Service manual

OCE
TDS600/TDS9600
 Preventive maintenance printer

Estimated lifetimes
Code no. Description Quantity Min.
Target SDS
(lm) (lm)
tests

7069.008 Photoconductor (drum) assy 1 >15.000

21.000 01-8-001 or 36
2999.818 Corona wire (Charging) 1
21.000 02-8-001 or 36
2999.802 Corona wire (Transfer) 1
21.000 06-8-001 or 36
2999.802 Corona wire (Separation) 1
21.000 15-8-001 or 36
2912.651 Cleaning blade assy 1
21.000 07-8-001 or 36
7045.011 Developer D5 1 bottle
21.000 05-8-001 or 36

Maintenance concept
General
The PM policy for the Oc· 9600 differs from the other Oc· ES Printing Systems. with
the introduction of a Preventive Maintenance kit. In this kit the OPC photoconductor
(drum) is bundled with all the other consumable parts.

The Oc· 9600 needs very little preventive maintenance. Therefore the preventive
maintenance which has to be done during every corrective maintenance visit is very
limited.

PM Policy
To reduce the number of repeat calls caused by preventive maintenance parts, the
following strategy for the Oc· 9600 is introduced.

1. Before every service call the number of copy meters of the OPC photoconductor
(drum) is checked (SDS test 01-8-001) using the data dump information downloaded
by Remote Assistance. If the counter is beyond the 15.000 lm, a PM kit must be taken
to the customer.
If Remote Assistance is not used the value has to be checked during the visit by the
technician. If the kit is available the PM kit actions have to be done right away or else
scheduled for the next visit.

2. During every visit the copy quality has to be checked. If it turns out that the OPC
photoconductor (drum) has to be replaced, after having analysed the copy quality,
than also the other PM parts in the kit needs to be replaced.

The Oc· 9600 PM kit code number 5600.415 consists of:

l OPC photoconductor (drum) assy 1 7069.008

l Corona wire (Charging) 1 2999.818
l Corona wire (Tr./Sep.) 2 2999.802
l Cleaning blade assy 1 2912.651
l Developer D5 1 bottle 7045.011
l Leafspring 1 7045.269
l Sealplate assy 1 2912.669

Preventive Maintenance Programs

Preventive maintenance program every visit

Item Action Remark

Preventive maintenance printer: Engine: maintenance

Waste toner bag Check/replace -

Output rollers Check/clean Cleaner K

OPC photoconductor (drum) lifetime Check/PM kit SDS test 01-8-001 or

36
Print quality Check Service test
prints SDS tests 50 + 51

Preventive maintenance program during photoconductor (drum) replacement (>15.000 lm)

CAS-C Item Action Remark

01 Photoconductor Replace

Grounding Clean

02 Charging unit Clean/replace Clean the unit. See chapter Charging: dis-assembly.
Replace the corona wires.

04 Print head Clean Clean the print head with cleaner-O ; use a clean cloth without
fibres.

05 Toner supply unit Clean/check Clean the outside of the unit and check for leakage's

Developing unit Clean/check Clean the outside of the unit and check for leakage's

Developer Replace See chapter 5 Developing - Disassembly: Replacing procedure

for the developer

06 Transfer / sep. unit Check/clean/ Clean the unit. See chapter Transfer.
replace Replace the corona wires.

07 Cleaning unit Check/clean Check for leakage's and sticked toner between the blade and the
seals (this occurs after 20 km)

Cleaning blade Replace

Cleaning seals Check

Waste- toner bag Check/replace

08 Fusing unit Check Check the inside of the unit

15 Paper feed roller Clean Water

Output roller Clean Cleaner K

Pick-off pawl Check/clean

23 Timing belts Check Tension/damage

Special tools
No special tools are required to service the Oc· 9600.
Only for maintenance purposes and for correct handling of the maintenance procedures, the
following items are necessary:

Code number Description

1068.117(USA) Cleaner A
1068.116EUR Cleaner A

04.06.2002 2
Preventive maintenance printer: Engine: maintenance

7991.469 Cleaner R (grid and corona wire)

1929.023(USA) Cleaner K (photoconductor (drum), output rollers)
1929.022EUR Cleaner K (photoconductor (drum), output rollers)
1987.798(USA) Cleaner P (photoconductor (drum))
1987.994EUR Cleaner P (photoconductor (drum))

For a describtion of the cleaning liquids, see [ Cleaning liquids ]

04.06.2002 3
 Laptop specification service technician (september 2000)
Hardware - Toshiba laptop
- Pentium 233 MHz or faster
- 32 MB minimum, 64 MB preferred
- 1.44 MB floppy drive
- CD drive
- 3.4GB harddisk minimum, 4.1 GB preferred in case of multiple
TSM's
- sound card for CBT.

- add ons
· Xircom RealPort Ethernet 10/100 + Modem 56 card
(take care of using most recent drivers!!)
OR
· other Xircom network card if usage of coax connectors is required!

- external mouse preferred, but not on COM1

- cable set laptop: partnumber 7991.585

System · Windows 95
- service release 2
- default installation path : c:\Windows\...
- cabinet files present on laptop in c:\Windows\Options\Cabs
OR Windows 98 2nd edition

· Dial Up Networking 1.2 or 1.3

· Direct Cable Connect

· Data Access Objects
- available in cabs files

Applications - STAR 3.0 (Depending on OPCO)

- minimal installation WinSR, OMC, Analysis, Repman, RJD, CSIC
(machine Management / Data Dump Display)
- installation according to instructions on STAR CD

· Internet Explorer 5.01 (5.5 not yet supported)

- for running WebSDS
- for easy installation of STAR applications

· Lotus Notes client

- required version 5.0.2C
- available at local Notes administrator
· 9600 TSM installation over local network according to ITC
instructions

- Plot Director
- 2 MB, sources available in TSM or Host Software CDROM
- install in c\program files\Oce\WFPS\Pd2

- Oce 9600 Postscript Printer Driver

- available on Host Software CDROM

- Oce 9600 Raster Printer Driver

- available on Raster Driver CDROM

- ReproDesk client
- 4 floppies, sources available in TSM
- install in c\program files\Oce\WFPS\OceRd

- SDS components
- 2 MB, source available on NGC CDROM
- install in c\oce\apps\SDS according to setup procedure provided by
R&D

- Remote Applications
- 11 MB, source available on NGC CDROM
- install in c\program files\Oce\Oce9600
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Product Specifications

- WinZip
- available at local EDP department

- Ocelpr
- 2 floppies, sources available in TSM
- install in c\program files\Oce\WPS\ocelpr

04.06.2002 2
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Product Specifications

Codenumbers LN TSM
The codenumbers of the Oc· 9600 Lotus Notes TSM are as follows:

Codenumber Manual Available

0910390.nsf LN TSM Oc· 9600 (GB) Yes
0910392.nsf LN TSM Oc· 9600 (DE) Yes
0910393.nsf LN TSM Oc· 9600 (FR) Yes
0910395.nsf LN TSM Oc· 9600 (IT) Yes

04.06.2002 3
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Product Specifications

General specifications
Printer

l Technology: Electrophotography (LED head) with organic

photoconductor (OPC) drum and closed toner system
l Resolution: 400 dpi with Oc· Enhanced Resolution Printing
Tecnology
l Printable area:
width = 210 mm to 914 mm
Length = 279 mm up to 15 meters
l Speed: 5 linear meters p/min. or approx. 4 A0s p/min. (3 linear
meters when paper is 110gr/m2.)
l Media sources: Several possible configurations from 2 to 6 rolls, up
to 3 sheet feeders, and manual sheet feed
l Output sizes: From A4 (portret scape) up to 15 meters long
l Output reception: Standard Integrated Receiving Tray (IRT) for 100
prints of supported media types and sizes
l Warm up time: None, instant behaviour (Oc· Radiant Fusing
System)
l Noise level: < 68 dB(A) operating; 0 dB(A) standby
l Power consumption: < 1500 W operating; < 15 W in low power
mode
l Electrical requirements: Europe 230 V, 50/60 Hz; USA 115 V,
60Hz
l Dimensions: (wxhxd) 1400 x 1470 x 753 mm including IRT
l Weight: From 250 kg (model with 2 rolls) to 360 kg (model with 6
rolls and 1 sheet feeder)
l Safety approvals: T·V GS, CETECOM, CE, UL, (c)UL, CB, FCC
Class B

l Materia types: The following material sizes are supported for the
Oc· 9600:
Plain paper 75 to 110 g/m 2
Transparent paper 80 to 110 g/m 2
Vellum 16 - 20 lbs
Polyester film 3.5 or 4.5 mil
Special Coloured paper, etc.

l Materal formats: Overview of print material sizes which can be used

The Oc· 9600 can handle the following formats

in the paper roll drawers:

Width Length DIN DIN carto 8.5” Mixed

8.5”&9”
DIN range
A4 210 mm 297 mm x x
A3 297 mm 420 mm x x
A2 420 mm 594 mm x x
A1 594 mm 841 mm x x
A0 841 mm 1189 mm x x
8.5” range
8.5” 8.5” 11” x x
11” 11” 17” x x
17” 17” 22” x x
22” 22” 34” x x
34” 34” 44” x x
9” range
9” 9” 12” x
12” 12” 18” x
18” 18” 24” x
24” 24” 36” x x
36” 36” 48” x x x x

04.06.2002 4
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Product Specifications

Several
30” 30” 42” x x
B1 carto 700 mm 1000 mm x
B1 (DIN) 707 mm 1000 mm x
B2 carto 500 mm 700 mm x
B2 (DIN) 500 mm 707 mm x

The 9600 can handle the following formats in

the sheet feeders:

Format Width Length DIN DIN carto 8.5” Mixed

8.5”&9”
DIN range
A4 portrait * 210 mm 297 mm x x
A3 landscape * 420 mm 297 mm x x
A3 portrait 297 mm 420 mm x x
A2 landscape 594 mm 420 mm x x
8.5” range
8.5” portrait * 8.5” 11” x x
11” landscape * 17” 11” x x
11” portrait 11” 17” x x
17” landscape 22” 17” x x
9” range
9” portrait * 9” 12” x
12” landscape * 18” 12” x
12” portrait 12” 18” x
18” landscape 24” 18” x
* Note: If a 9600 configuration has three sheet feeders, the sheet feeder in the
lowest position cannot handle the marked small sheet sizes. The 1st and 2nd
sheet feeder can handle all sheet sizes, independent of the configuration.

04.06.2002 5
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Product Specifications

General specifications NGC G1 Controller

NGC G1 Controller

Attention: Hardware can change in the future

The Controller is an external box based on a standard PC platform.
For the user, this Controller is seen as an external PC station linked to the Oc· 9600 via a specific connection
providing the Scanner and Printer interface.

THIS EXTERNAL PC STATION IS LIABLE TO NEW PRODUCTION VERSIONS IN THE NEAR FUTURE!
THIS MEANS THAT THE HARDWARE AND THE SOFTWARE (BIOS) WILL VARY IN THE FUTURE.
MINOR CHANGES e.g. THE POSITION OF A HARDDISK, WILL NOT BE SHOWN IN THE
DOCUMENTATION!
(dis-/assemblies, component locations etc.)

Oc· has set a minimum quality configuration.

The manufacturer of the controller has to supply the devices conform these component specifications, set by
Oc·.
It may be possible that better components are built in, e.g. faster processor, bigger harddisk etc.

Hardware
l Platform: Intel Pentium II 350 Mhz and Windows NT (see also: Attention)
l Memory: 128 MByte RAM
l Harddisks: (see also: Attention)
- 4 GByte high-speed hard disk dedicated to operating system and file spooling,
- 9 GByte high-speed hard disk dedicated to set memory
l Interfaces Standard: Ethernet 10/100 Mb with RJ45 (UTP 10baseT, 100baseT)
l Optional cards:
- Ethernet 10 Mb with BNC (thin coax 10base2), SubD (thick coax 10base5) and RJ45 (UTP 10baseT)
-TokenRing 4 and 16 Mb, UTP or Dsub9
l Power consumption: 250 W controller; 200 W monitor
l Electrical requirements: Europe 230 V, 50/60 Hz; USA 115 V, 60 Hz

Protocols
l Network protocols: TCP/IP, Novell IPX/SPX, NetBEUI
l Printing protocols/applications: lpr/lpd/lpq/lprm (UNIX), SMB-printing, Pserver (Novell) 3.x/4.x, FTP

Functionalities
l File formats: HP-GL, HP-GL/2, HP-RTL, uncompressed TIFF 6.0, compressed TIFF 6.0 (CCITT G3 1D,
CCITT G3 2D, CCITT G4, RLE, Packbit, Modified Huffman, greyscale 4-8 bit, colour 4-8-16-24 bit, strip,
tiled, raw, multipage), NIFF, CALS type 1, NIRS, C4, CalComp 906/907/951, PostScript Level 2 (optional),
ASCII, CGM through converter, Oc· Remote Controll Format (RCF) and Oc· Job Ticket (OJT) commands to
specify program media selection, plot parameters, folding
l Language Sensing: automatic (ALS)
l Auto media selection and switching
l Plot manipulation: autopositioning, rotation, autoscaling
l File spooling: on the controller
l Set memory: send once, process once, print many; capacity to store up to 250 A0s and create identical
sets sorted by page or by set
l Concurrent reception/processing/printing/finishing of digital jobs
l Multiple prints: up to 999

Communication system with:

l Queue Manager (QM) application for viewing the status of each job and cancelling or holding/restarting the
entire job
l System Control Panel (SCP) application for viewing the status and settings of system components
l Key Operator Settings (KO) and System Administrator Settings (SA) applications for job setting and
system parameters
text based in Release 1; graphical user interface from release 2
l Note user applications: controller only in release 1; controller and remote user (backchannel
communication)

04.06.2002 6
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Product Specifications

General specifications Repro Desk controller

RD Controller

Attention: Hardware can change in the future

Hardware
l Platform: Intel Pentium II 350 Mhz and Windows NT (see also: Attention)
l Memory: 128 RAM
l Harddisk: (see also: Attention)
4 GByte high-speed hard disk
l Interfaces Standard: Ethernet 10/100 Mb with RJ45 (UTP 10baseT, 100baseT)
l Optional cards:
- Ethernet 10 Mb with BNC (thin coax 10base2), SubD (thick coax 10base5) and RJ45 (UTP 10baseT)
-TokenRing 4 and 16 Mb, UTP or Dsub9
l Power consumption: 250 W controller; 200 W monitor
l Electrical requirements: Europe 230 V, 50/60 Hz; USA 115 V, 60 Hz

Protocols
l Network protocols: TCP/IP, Novell IPX/SPX, NetBEUI
l Printing protocols/applications: lpr/lpd/lpq/lprm (UNIX), SMB-printing, Pserver (Novell) 3.x/4.x, FTP

Functionalities
l File formats: HP-GL, HP-GL/2, HP-RTL, DWG, TIFF 6.0 (uncompressed TIFF 6.0 (CCITT G3 1D, CCITT
G3 2D, CCITT G4, Packbit), NIFFG4, CALS type 1, CalComp 906/907/951, PostScript Level 2 (optional),
ASCII, Oc· Remote Controll Format (RCF) and Oc· Job Ticket (OJT) commands to specify program media
selection, plot parameters, folding
l Language Sensing: automatic (ALS)
l Auto media selection and switching
l Plot manipulation: autopositioning, rotation, autoscaling
l File spooling: on the controller
l Set memory: send once, process once, print many; capacity to store up to 200 A0s and create identical
sets sorted by page or by set
l Concurrent reception/processing/printing/finishing of digital jobs
l Multiple prints: up to 999
l Clients: receives, processes and print jobs prepared by remotely located customers, using a
communication suite and Remote client software
l Direct DWG printing
l Viewing and WYSUWYG printing
l Sophisticated pen manupulation
l User difined stamp creation
l Unlimited plot overlay capability
l Job trackinh
l Local printing (remote) for check printing
l Possibility to sent jobs to another printer (using PostScript out and HPGL/2-HP-RTL out)

Communication system with:

l Queue Manager (QM) application for viewing the status of each job and cancelling or holding/restarting the
entire job
l Print Manager application for printing status, configuring and logging

Translation Control
current database language GB
current document GB
language
needs translation Yes

Version Control
maintenance/update 0
number
translation rerun number 9

last backup number 141999

04.06.2002 7
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Product Specifications

creator Wim van Helden, on 26-02-99

modifiers Mart Hendriks, on 05-07-99

Henk Ebus, on 03-08-99
Henk Ebus, on 03-08-99
Henk Ebus, on 03-08-99
Henk Ebus, on 03-08-99
Henk Ebus, on 03-08-99
Henk Ebus, on 03-08-99

Access Control
Target Audience Install & Setup
Maintenance
Troubleshooting

Hierarchy Control
Hierarchy Machine Level Sub function Level 1 Sub function Level 3
Function Level Sub function Level 2 Sub function Level 4
Document type No Document types found in Data Dictionary

04.06.2002 8
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Product Specifications

Specifications NGC G1
General
As mentioned in sub-chapter 'Attention', only minimum quality
specifications are set.

The connection between this PC Based controller and the Oc· 9600
(engine/scanner) is the way to print and scan data to or from the
machine. It will be based on a proprietary interface board (SPICE)
embedded in the PC and a connection SPICE protocol. The link is
ensured by a datacable.

This controller is composed of two set of Hard Drives (EIDE and SCSI).
The first one, composed of a single EIDE HD, is used to store the OS and
proprietary Oc· software. The second one, composed of one or two SCSI
HD, is used to provide buffer memory for the scan and print path.
Important timing constraints are thus attached to this module.

The BIOS software and configuration parameters of the PC will be

configured by supplier.
If necessary to enter the BIOS, enter the password

If more information is wanted about the controller, see webpages

Dell.com

Standard hardware

Standard add-on hardware

Extra hardware on customer request

Power

04.06.2002 9
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Product Specifications

General specifications scanner

Scanner

The scanner is operational from Release 2.

l Model: Free standing unit with operating panel to perform copy tasks
l Technology: CCD and Oc·'s Image Logic real-time image processing hardware
l Scan (CCD) resolution: 200 dpi in width and 400 dpi in length direction
On scanner CPU board the resolution is increased to 400 x 400 dpi
l Image width: 210 to 914 mm
l Speed: 5 linear meters per minute
l Reproduction scale: digital zoom from 25 to 400%

l Noise level: <66 dB(A) operating, 0 dB(A) stand-by

l Power consumption: <200 Watts operating, <10 Watts stand-by
l Electrical requirements: Europe 230 V, 50/60 Hz; USA 115 V, 60 Hz
l Dimensions (wxhxd): 1314 x 1355 x 585 mm
l Weight: 90 kg

l Original
l Feed: face down, right alignment, rear and front output
l Seize detection: automatic
l Dimensions:
Width: 210 to 1020 mm
Length: 210 mm up to 15 meters
Thickness: 1mm max.

04.06.2002 10
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Product Specifications

Print quality parameters (printer only)

The print quality criteria are only valid in the following conditions:

1. Printer must be adjusted correctly;

2. Environment:
l Temperature between 20 - 27 degrees Celsius
l Relative humidity between 30 - 60 %;
3. Print material according to Oc· norm.

Reference
Property Tools Unit Target Min. Max. Test Print
No. 51

Image Density

Maximum density 1.0 I and M

Variation in maximum density 0.25 I and M

Density variation 0.3 J and L

Density variation, small areas 0.2 J and L

Image Quality

Resolution Visual .lp/mm 2.6 D-Group

Thin line reproduction Visual All visible H

Synchronization Visual All lines K

separated

Fusing on plain paper Ruler .mm 0.5 Fold M

1:1 accuracy Ruler .mm 500 497.5 502.5 A-B

Poor image quality

- Trailing edge Ruler .mm 17 C

Loss of information
- Leading edge Ruler .mm 10 C
- Trailing edge Ruler .mm 10 C
- Side edge Ruler .mm 5 C

Image Position

Leading edge Ruler .mm 50 48 52 E

Side edge Ruler .mm 50 48 52 E

Skewing Ruler .mm 0 -3 3 E

Print length Ruler .mm 594 594 600 Print length

Print length in run of 25 prints Ruler .mm 4

Straightness of cutting Ruler .mm 0 -1 1

Rectangular cutting Ruler .mm 0 -2 2

The specifications of the print quality are checked with the aid of TEST
PRINT No. 51

04.06.2002 11
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Product Specifications

Descriptions
Image Density

Maximum density
Check the blackness of the band I and M.
Measure the Optical Density of the lightest spot.
Optical Density light spot > 1.0

Variation in maximum density

Check the blackness of the band I and M.
Measure the Optical Density of the lightest and darkest spot.
Optical Density dark spot - Optical Density light spot < 0.25

Density variation
Check the Grey Level of band J and L
Measure the Optical Density of the lightest and darkest spot.
Optical Density dark spot - Optical Density light spot < 0.3

Density variation, small areas

Check the Grey Level of band J and L
Measure the Optical Density of the lightest and darkest spot in an
area of 100 mm·.
Optical Density dark spot - Optical Density light spot < 0.2

Image Quality

Resolution
Check all line-pair groups D
Check visually that all the line-pair groups 2.6 are open.

Thin line reproduction

Check the thin lines (3x) in H
The 3 lines must be continuously over the entire width

Synchronization
Check band K
No irregularities in feed direction. Lines must separated equally.

Fusing on plain paper (75 gr./m·)

Check the toner fixation, use band M or I.
Fold the print by hand across band M or I. Image at the inside.
Unfold the print and run your finger lightly over the fold.
The eventually white line (rubbed out line) must be < 0.5 mm

1:1 accuracy
Measure the length of the line between arrow A and B.
The length of the line must be within 497.5 and 502.5 mm (500 mm
+/- 0.5%).

Poor image quality:

§ Trailing edge
Check the image of pattern C (3x) at the trailing edge of the
print.
Poor image < 17 mm, measured from the trailing edge of the
print.

Loss of information
§ Leading edge
Check the image of pattern C (3x) at the leading edge of the
print.
Loss of information < 10 mm, measured from the leading
edge of the print.

Trailing edge
Check the image of pattern C (3x) at the trailing edge of the

04.06.2002 12
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Product Specifications

print.
Loss of information < 10 mm, measured from the trailing
edge of the print.

Side edge
Check the image of pattern C (3x) at the right side edge of
the print.
Loss of information < 5 mm, measured from the trailing edge
of the print.

Image Position

Leading edge
Measure the length of the line from leading edge paper up to arrow
E at both sides.
Determine the average of both values.
The average length of the line E must be between 48 and 52 mm.

Side edge
Measure the length of the line from right side edge paper up to arrow
E at the top and bottom.
Determine the average of both values.
The average must be between 48 and 52 mm.

Skewing
Measure the length of the line from leading edge paper up to arrow
E at the left and right sides.
The absolute value | Length line E left - Length line E right | < 3 mm.

Print length difference

Measure the length of test print No. 51
The length must be between 594 and 600 mm

Print length difference (run of 25 prints)

Make a run of 25 prints of an arbitrary file (A0 or A1-size).
Select the longest and shortest print.
Longest print length - Shortest print length < 4 mm.

Straightness of cutting
Place a straight ruler at the trailing edge of the paper in such a way
that no part of the print disappears underneath.
The maximum < 1 mm

Rectangular cutting
Fold the print in such a way that the trailing edge is positioned over
the leading edge.
Align the left side front corner of the leading and trailing edge.
Measure the difference between leading and trailing edge at the right
corner.
The maximum deviation < 4 mm

04.06.2002 13
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Product Specifications

Specifications Copy delivery tray (printer)

Optional finishing: Copy Delivery Tray

l Capacity: Up to 150 sheets (media type dependent) from A4 to A0

l Types of media: Plain and transparent paper, film, vellum
l Power consumption: < 25 W operating
l Electrical supply: 120/230 V, 50/60 Hz
l Dimensions: (wxhxd) 1170 mm x 1090 mm x 1440 mm with tray
fully extended
l Weight: 35.5 kg

04.06.2002 14
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Product Specifications

Specifications folder
Folder:

1st Fold = Oc· 725

2nd Fold = Oc· 726
Reinforcement unit = Oc· 727 (from R2, optional, NOT field upgradable)
Belt delivery = Oc· 853 (optional)

l Folding modes: On line and off line fanfold and crossfold, (off line
from R2)
l Folding methods: Standard (=DIN-like), Ericsson, Afnor-like
Length: 276 - 310 mm
Width: 186 - 230 mm
Filing strip: 15 - 30 mm

l Paper size:
Width: 279 - 914 mm

Max length if:

Paper weight First fold only Second fold with
2 folds 3 folds
75 gr 6000 mm (236") 2500 (98") 2000 (79")
110 gr 2500 mm (98") 1220 (48") not possible
(So 36" wide paper may have a maximum length of 2000 mm if second
fold is required. (36" needs 3 second folds))

l First fold exit: Extra bin for fanfold

l Noise level: < 67 dB(A) operating; 0 dB(A) standby
l Power consumption: < 135 W operating
l Electrical supply: 120/230 V, 50/60 Hz
l Dimensions: (wxhxd) 2200 mm x 997 mm x 1260 mm
l Weight: 220 kg

l Optional belt delivery: Extra capacity of 100 A0 folded drawing

l Optional reinforcement unit: (from R2, NOT field upgradable)
Add a reinforcement strip with holes according to DIN standard
Weight: 14 kg
Dimensions: (wxhxd) 250 x 450 x 550 mm
Power 24V supplied by the folder
Consumption: 31 Watt

04.06.2002 15
 NGC system R2
This page gives you a roadmap how to install a 9600 R2 system. The
system will be delivered with a

90% pre-adjusted Printer

100% pre-adjusted Scanner (optionally)
90% pre-adjusted Folder (optionally)
100% hardware installed Controller. (Controller software has to be
installed manually)

This implies that the amount of work during installation at the customer
has been minimised as much as possible.

Step 1: Installation of the Controller

Step 2: Hardware installation of the Printer

Step 3: Optionally: Hardware installation of the Scanner

Step 4: Hardware installation of Optionals

Step 5: System software check/upgrade

Step 6: Time and Date in WINNT

Step 7: Installing system

Step 8: Optionally: Intergrating the System into the customer Network

Step 9: Optionally: Setting up Customer Workstations

Step 10: Ending of the visit

Goto step 4 of visit dispatch.
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

NGC system R2.1

This page gives you a roadmap how to install an Oc· 9600 R2.1 system.
The system will be delivered with a

90% pre-adjusted Printer

100% pre-adjusted Scanner (optionally)
90% pre-adjusted Folder (optionally)
100% installed Controller.

This implies that the amount of work during installation at the customer has been minimised as
much as possible.

Step 1: Installation of the Controller

Step 2: Hardware installation of the Printer

Step 3: Optionally: Hardware installation of the Scanner

Step 4: Hardware installation of Optionals

Step 5: System software check/upgrade

Step 6: Time and Date in WINNT

Step 7: Installing system

Step 8: Optionally: Intergrating the System into the customer Network

Step 9: Optionally: Setting up Customer Workstations

Step 10: Ending of the visit

04.06.2002 2
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Oce Power Logic Controller system V3.0

This page gives you a roadmap how to install an Oc· TDS600 V3.0 system.
The system will be delivered with a

90% pre-adjusted Printer

90% pre-adjusted Scanner (optionally)
90% pre-adjusted Folder (optionally)
100% installed Controller.

This implies that the amount of work during installation at the customer has been minimised as
much as possible.

Step 1: Installation of the Controller

Step 2: Hardware installation of the Printer

Step 3: Optionally: Hardware installation of the Scanner

Because of current stock, the scanner may still come as a Oc· 9600 scanner instead of
TDS 600.
In this case, there will be an extra kit with labels with the scanner.
Please change the labels, and check the version of the firmware. Version check

Step 4: Hardware installation of Optionals

Step 5: System software check/upgrade

Step 6: Time and Date in WINNT

Step 7: Installing system

Step 8: Optionally: Intergrating the System into the customer Network

Step 9: Optionally: Setting up Customer Workstations

Step 10: Ending of the visit

04.06.2002 3
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Oce Power Logic Controller system V3.0.1

This page gives you a roadmap how to install an Oc· TDS600 V3.0.1 system.
The system will be delivered with a

90% pre-adjusted Printer

90% pre-adjusted Scanner (optionally)
90% pre-adjusted Folder (optionally)
100% installed Controller.

This implies that the amount of work during installation at the customer has been minimised as
much as possible.

Step 1: Installation of the Controller

Hardware and software

Step 2: Hardware installation of the Printer

Installation description:

Step 3: Optionally: Hardware installation of the Scanner

Step 4: Hardware installation of Optionals

Step 5: System software check/upgrade

Step 6: Time and Date in WINNT

Step 7: Installing system

Step 8: Optionally: Intergrating the System into the customer Network

Step 9: Optionally: Setting up Customer Workstations

Step 10: Ending of the visit

04.06.2002 4
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Upgrade NGC system R1 to R2

This page gives you a roadmap how to upgrade a 9600 R1 system to 9600 R2.

The R1 will be a:
100% adjusted Printer
100% adjusted Folder (optionally)
90% hardware installed Controller. (Controller software has to be installed manually)

The R2 system could be extended with a:

100% pre-adjusted Scanner (optionally).

To upgrade a "Printer only" system, you will need the following items:
1x 5799.696 "9600R2 replacement CD"
1x 7136.635 CD with user manuals, connectivity manual R2, remote applications
1x 7070.630 "Firmpack folder 9600 R2.0" (optionally)

To upgrade to a "Hybrid" system (including Scanner), you need the upgrade package "9600, upg,
KIT R1-R2" (5799690).
Contents of the kit (1 x 5799690):
1x 5799.696 "9600R2 replacement CD"
1x 7136.635 CD with user manuals, connectivity manual R2, remote applications
1x 7070.630 "Firmpack folder 9600 R2.0"
1x 5584.535 SPICE PBA
1x 1201.854 "Cable Mains EUR"
1x 1301.782 "Cable Mains USA"
1x sticker for controller code number change

The system adjustments of the R1 system will be imported in the R2 system.

This implies that the amount of work during installation at the customer has been minimised as much as
possible.

Step 1: Backing up and upgrading the R1 System

Before starting the upgrade the parameters of the R1 system must be back-upped. This will save a lot of
time during the installation of the R2 system. Further the SPICE board of the Controller has to be
replaced.
The procedure, to be executed on the NGC R1.0 Controller, is the following:

Backing up the R1 parameters

l On the NGC R1 system log in as service user within WindowsNT
l Make a dump config on paper
l Activate the desktop icon LOG VISIT DATA
l Rename the created YYYYMMDD directory to the current date with the extension R1, e.g.
19990830R1
l Insert a floppy into the NGC
l Copy the created directory to the floppy.
l Remove the floppy from the NGC, label it NGC-R1-BACKUP and keep it on a save place. You
need these files later on.

Upgrade the KOS/SAS and SDS settings

A special tool is available to convert all Key Operator Settings, System Administrator Settings and
the SDS settings in R1 system format to the format used for R2. This tool will prevent time
consuming manual insertion of all the system settings. The tool is available as a self-extracting zip
archive, 9600Tool_V1.3.5.exe attached to this document. The procedure, to be executed on the
NGC R1.0 Controller, is the following:

l Copy 9600Tool_V1.3.5.exe to a floppy

l On the NGC R1 system log in as service user within WindowsNT
l Insert the floppy into the NGC
l Run the file 9600Tool_V1.3.5.exe
l Unzip the files in C:\9600Tool
l Run the file C:\9600Tool\R2Conversion.exe
l A window pops up, select Convert
l Select Close when the conversion is finished
l The converted files are stored in C:\Conversion
l Copy the C:\Conversion directory to another floppy
l Remove the floppy from the NGC and keep it on a save place. You need these files later on

04.06.2002 5
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

9600Tool_V1.3.5.exe
Upgrade the Installation floppy
A special tool is available to convert a R1 Installation floppy to a format usable for a R2 installation.
This implies that all Controller hardware options will be automatically reinstalled during the R2
installation of the software. The tool is available as a self-extracting zip archive,
FlopR1toR2_upgr.exe attached to this document. The procedure, to be executed on the NGC R1.0
Controller, is the following:

l Copy FlopR1toR2_upgr.exe to a floppy

l On the NGC R1 system log in as service user within WindowsNT
l Insert the floppy into the NGC
l Run the file FlopR1toR2_upgr.exe
l Unzip the files in C:\9600FlopR1toR2
l Remove the floppy
l Insert the Installation floppy (R1) into the NGC
l Run the file C:\9600FlopR1toR2\FLOPPY_UPGRADE.BAT
l The upgraded file are stored on the floppy
l Remove the floppy from the NGC, label it NGC R2.0 and keep it on a save place. You need this
floppy during the installation of the R2 software.

FlopR1toR2_upgr.exe

Upgrade of the SPICE board (Only for systems with a Scanner)

l Power-down the Controller.

l Open the Controller and replace the SPICE board with the new one SPICE-II (code no.5584.535).
l Check all board locations
l Close the Controller
l Label the Controller with the new code-number on the back

Note: The old SPICE board must be send back immediately. The returm address is provided by means
of the supplied address sticker.
Do not ship this board back through the normal channels for repair boards!

Step 2: Installing the Controller software NGC R2

Notes:
- Make sure that the controller is not connected to the network.
- The software (Operating system and Oc· application) will be installed automatically. The software
installation takes approximately 30 minutes.

l Switch the NGC Controller ON.

l Insert the Installation CD, NGC R2, in the CDROM player
l Insert the Installation floppy, NGC R2, in the floppy disk drive.
Note: Make sure that the Installation floppy is not write-protected. Further do not remove the floppy
during the installation sequence.
l Press the RESET button.
l An install screen appears.
l Type SETUP at the prompt and then press ENTER key. The acknowledge message appears:

04.06.2002 6
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

l Press any key to start the installation

l From this point on, the installation is unattended for approximately 30 minutes. You can use this
time to unpack the other devices.
Note: Disregard any error messages displayed during the installation. These are normal. Only
interact on error messages if they are displayed for at least 5 minutes.
l The installation is unattended until a Controller Installation window pops-up with the message
"Remove the floppy disk and CDROM. Then press OK"
l Remove the floppy disk and CDROM
l Press OK
l The controller will reboot and start-up again as "anonymous" user.
l The installation is completed as all applications, SE, SCP and QM are completely started up.
Note: Do not interrupt the installation during this last action. Adaptations on installed files are being
made until the last moment.

Step 3: Optionally: Hardware installation of the Scanner

Installation description:

Step 4: Software installation and Configuration of the Total System (R1 to R2)

At this point you are able to run the R2 NotesSDS from the Service Laptop or the WebSDS directly on
the NGC.
It is preferred to use the NotesSDS because in this way you can access the tests directly from the TSM
and have all help directly available.
How to setup the service laptop for NotesSDS is described in the following document;

Communication setup between Laptop and Controller

Note: The setup should be executed and tested before the actual upgrade.

The software installation and configuration of the 9600 system is divided in 3 steps.

1 Installing Folder (optionally) firmware

l Replace the current EPROM's of the folder CPU-board with the new ones, version R2.0.

2 Downloading Printer and Scanner (optionally) software

l Make sure all components are connected to the Controller
l Switch-on all components
l Re-start the Controller in Diagnostic Mode
l Download the preinstalled R2.0 software on the NGC to the Printer and Scanner (Optionally) via
SDS test 73
Note: Read carefully the SDS test description. Select in Step1 an already on the controller
installed version and select after this Preinstalled version.

3 Restoring system settings

l Restore all system settings via SDS test 72.
The source files were created on a floppy via the KOS SAS and SDS conversion tool in an
earlier stage.
Note: Read carefully the SDS test description

04.06.2002 7
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

4 Restoring Visit data

l Copy the directory created on the floppy NGC-R1-BACKUP in C:\SERVICE\VISITS
l The system is now completely setup.

Step 5: Optionally: Setting up Customer Workstations

Depending on the contract the customer has made with your local Oc·-organization setting up customer
workstations has to be executed.
Make sure that you don't give away this kind of services to the customer for free.
Information how to execute the network integration are described in the;

l Installing remote applications: User manual Oc· 9600

l Installing Plot Director: TSM Installing Workstation
l Installing Postscript Driver: TSM Installing Workstation
l Installing Raster Driver::TSM Installing Workstation Win95 , or WINNT
l Installing ACAD Driver: TSM Installing Workstation

Step 6: Ending of the visit

l Mark Modification NR.02 on the Modification label of the Printer, indicating Software Release 2.
l Mark Modification NR.04 on the Modification label of the Printer in case the new SPICE board has
been placed.
l Goto step 4 of Visit Dispatch.

04.06.2002 8
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Upgrade NGC system R2 to R2.0 Scan to file (STF).

This page gives you a roadmap how to upgrade a 9600 R2.0 system to
9600 R2.0 STF.

To upgrade R2.0 to R2.0 STF you need the two items:

l a password to enable Scan to file (from local logistics)
l the STF kit, code no.: 5799699.

The kit contains the following items:

l 1 x NGC CD R2.0 STF

l 1 x User documentation CD
l 1 x 128 MB DIMM
l 1 x LUT EPROM for the scanner
l 1 x Partnumber sticker (Scanner 10PBA4 )

The system adjustments of the R2.0 system are imported in the R2.0
STF system.
This indicates that the amount of work, during the installation at the
customer, is decreased as much as possible.

Step 1: Backing up and upgrading the R2.0 System

Before starting the upgrade, the parameters of the R2.0 system must be
back-upped.
This saves a lot of time during the installation of the R2.0 STF system.
The back-up procedure, run on the NGC R2.0 Controller, is the following:

Backing up the R2.0 parameters

l Log in as user [ service ] within Windows NT
l Print the [ Print Settings ] on paper
l Start SDS test 71 [ Back-up System data ]
l Put a diskette into the NGC
l Copy the created directory to the diskette (c:\service\visits\"sub
directory with the current date"). If the subdirectory does not fit
on the diskette, delete the file SDS_info.MDB.
l Remove the diskette from the NGC, label it NGC-R2.0-BACKUP
and keep it on a save place. You need these files later on.

Upgrade the Installation floppy

A special tool is available to convert a R2.0 Installation diskette to a
R2.0 STF installation diskette.
This implies that all the Controller hardware options are installed
again automatically during the R2.0 STF installation of the software.
The tool is available on the R2.0 STF CD, and you find it on the d:\
flop_upgrd directory.

l Make a bootable copy of the R2.0 installation diskette.

l Insert the copied R2.0 installation diskette.
l Insert the NGC CD (with Oc· 9600 R2.0 STF)
l Open the explorer
l Browse to d:\flop_upgrd
l Run the file: flop_upgrade.bat
The installation diskette is upgraded to R2.0 STF
l Remove the floppy from the NGC, label it NGC R2.0 STF and
keep it on a save place. You need this floppy during the
installation of the R2.0 STF software.

Step 2: Installing the Controller software NGC R2.0 STF

First turn off the controller and then add the 128 MB Dimm. The total is
now 256MB.

Notes:
- Make sure that the controller is not connected to the network.
- The software (Operating system and Oc· application) is automatically
installed. The software installation takes approximately 30 minutes.

l Switch the NGC Controller ON.

04.06.2002 9
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

l Put the Installation NGC CDROM, with R2 .0 STF, in the CDROM

player
l Put the Installation floppy, NGC R2.0 STF, in the floppy disk drive.
Note: Make sure that the Installation diskette is not write-protected.
Further do not remove the diskette during the installation sequence.
l Press the <RESET> button.
l An install screen appears.
l Type [ SETUP ] at the prompt and then press the <ENTER> key.
The acknowledge message appears:

l Press any key to start the installation.

l From this point, the installation is unattended for approximately 30
minutes. You can use this time to do the step 3.
Note: Ignore any error messages displayed during the installation.
These are normal. Only interact on error messages if they are
displayed for at least 5 minutes.
l The installation is unattended until the controller beeps and the CD
Rom carriage is moving out.
l Remove the diskette and the CDROM.
l The controller restarts automatically.
Press the <shift> key until the logon screen pops up.
l Login as user [service ].
l The installation is completed if all applications, SE, SCP and QM are
completely started.
Note: Do not interrupt the installation during this last action. The
changes on installed files are made until the last moment.
Note: If the install diskette is used once, it is not any more bootable.
To make it bootable, run on a NT computer (e.g. the controller) the
file: a:/boot/boot.bat on the diskette.

Step 3: Hardware installation of the Scanner

Replace the [ Look Up Table ] EPROM (LUT):

The LUT Eprom is located on 10PBA04 D12. Make sure the orientation is
correct. (notch on the eprom down, and all pins are in the sockets).

Replace the partnumber sticker on 10PBA04 (upper left corner).

The old LUT eprom needs to be returned to Venlo, as soon as

possible.
Send the EPROM to:

Oce Technologies BV
Attn. Mr. W. Lossie, loc. 1A220
P.O. Box 101
5900 MA Venlo

Please indicate the country where you send the LUT from.

Step 4: Software installation and Configuration of the Total System (R2.0

04.06.2002 10
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

To use the R2.0 STF NotesSDS, you must also upgrade the NotesSDS
in the laptop.
l Remove via: Start, Settings, Control Panel, Add/Remove Programs
the [ Oc· 9600 SDS Client ].
l Install from the R2.0 STF CD ROM the new [ Oc· 9600 SDS client ].
d:/sds_client_setup/SDS_Madrid/Disk1/setup.exe.
At this point you are able to run the R2 .0 STF NotesSDS from the
Service Laptop or the WebSDS directly on the NGC.
How to setup the service laptop for NotesSDS is described in the
following document;
Communication setup between Laptop and Controller
Note: The setup should be executed and tested before the actual
upgrade.

1 Downloading Printer and Scanner software

l Make sure all components are connected to the Controller.
l Switch-on all components.
l Activate the [ NGC DiagMode.bat ] icon on the desktop,(NGC
controller must be in [ service ] mode).
l Follow the instructions on the screen.
l If a message internal error appear, press [ Yes ].
l The controller is in [ Diagnosis Mode ], if the message in the
DOS window shows: [ Start OCI in Minimal Mode Controller
Started ].
l Download the preinstalled R2.0 STF software on the NGC to the
Printer and Scanner via SDS test 73 .
Note: Read carefully the SDS test description.
During software downloading to the printer, if a warning window
pops up with the message: [An error occured during the
programming of the application module into the printer. Do you
want to retry the programming of the module? ]. Press the [ retry
] button. Load Boot and Application software one by one.
Select in Step1: [ Browse for an Upgrade download-file ]
,press [ select ], and select after this: [ network neighborhood,
oce9600, swdl, PreinstalledSwdl.ofp ].
l After software downloading, activate the [ NGC Normal Mode
.bat ] icon.
l Follow the instructions on the screen.
l If a message [ internal error ] appear, press [ Yes ].

2 Restoring system settings

Before you restore the settings by test 72, do the test 22-6-001: init
NVD.
Restore all system settings via SDS test 72.
Note: Read carefully the SDS test description

3. Enabling [ Scan to file ]

The scan to file password will be deliverd as a text file (floppy or

e-mail).
l Open the file using notepad or wordpad.
l Verify that the password is for the correct printernumber (Listed
as HOST-ID).
l Logon to the [ Setting Editor ] (SE) as Key operator.
l Go to System
l Click on the [ Scan to File ] password
l Type the password in the space provided and press <enter>.
Note: The password is case sensitive.
l Click on [ <apply> ].
l Reboot the system.
l [ Scan Manager ] will now load automatically together with the [
Setting Editor, Queue Manager and System Control Panel ].
If not: Verify that the printer serial number is correctly entered in
the SDS.
(This must be in the following format: 9601xxxxx e.g.
960100123.

04.06.2002 11
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

4 Restoring Visit data

l Copy the directory created on the floppy NGC-R2.0-BACKUP in
C:\SERVICE\VISITS
l The system is now completely setup.

Step 5: Optionally: Setting up Customer Workstations

Depending on the contract the customer has made with your local
Oc·-organization setting up customer workstations has to be executed.
Make sure that you don't give away this kind of services to the customer
for free.
Information how to execute the network integration are described in the;

l Installing remote Logic: User manual Oc· 9600

l Installing Plot Director: TSM Installing Workstation
l Installing Postscript Driver: TSM Installing Workstation
l Installing Raster Driver::TSM Installing Workstation Win95 , or
WINNT
l Installing ACAD Driver: TSM Installing Workstation

Step 6: Ending of the visit

l Mark Modification NR.13 on the Modification label of the Printer,
indicating Software Release 2.0 STF
l Goto step 4 of Visit Dispatch.

04.06.2002 12
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Upgrade NGC system R2 to R2.0.1

This page gives you a roadmap how to upgrade a 9600 R2 system to

9600 R2.0.1.

Reason:
When a LPR-LPD mechanism is used to submit print-jobs, e.g.
PlotDirector, it is possible an internal error occurs on the Controller.

Occurring on the NGC R2.0 in the following situation:

- The TCP/IP hostname of the client PC begins with a number (e.g.
123host) and
- The plot/print file is send via an LPR-LPD session.

If this error occurs, the NGC shows the following message: Internal
error Yes to restart, No to reboot

Upgrade Procedure:

l Goto Upgrading NGC R2 Controller to R2.0.1

l Mark Modification NR.09 on the Modification label of the Printer,
indicating Software Release 2.0.1.
l Goto step 4 of Visit Dispatch.

04.06.2002 13
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Upgrade NGC system R2.0 to R2.1

This page gives you a roadmap how to upgrade an Oc· 9600 R2.0 system to Oc· 9600 R2.1

To upgrade R2.0 to R2.1 you need the two items:

l a password to enable Scan to file (from local logistics)
l the upgrade kit R2.1, code no.: 5798.303.

The kit contains the following items:

· CD-ROM R2.1 NGC 7070.831

· CD-ROM Manuals and remote logic 7136.960
· CD-ROM drivers pack 5 7166.294
· LUT Scanner EPROM 7070.859
· Folder EPROM's 7175.241
· 128 Mb memory mudule 7078.563
· Code number sticker for the scanner imaging processing PBA(7070.769) delivered with LUT
EPROM
· Address sticker to return the LUT EPROM

The system adjustments of the R2.0 system are imported in the R2.1 system.
This indicates that the amount of work, during the installation at the customer, is decreased as much as
possible.

Step 1: Backing up and upgrading the R2.0 System

Before starting the upgrade, the parameters of the R2.0 system must be saved.
This saves a lot of time during the installation of the R2.1 system.
The back-up procedure, run on the NGC R2.0 Controller, is the following:

Backing up the R2.0 parameters

l Log in as user [ service ] within Windows NT
l Print the [ Print Settings ] on paper
l Start SDS test 71 [ Back-up System data ]
l Put a diskette into the NGC
l Copy the created directory to the diskette (c:\service\visits\"sub directory with the current date").

l Remove the diskette from the NGC, label it NGC-R2.0-BACKUP and keep it on a save place.
You need these files later on.

Upgrade the Installation floppy

A special tool is available to convert a R2.0 Installation diskette to a R2.1 installation diskette.
This implies that all the Controller hardware options are installed again automatically during the R2.1
installation of the software. The tool is available on the R2.1 CD.
You find it on the d:\ flop_upgrd directory.

l Make a bootable copy of the R2.0 installation diskette.

l Insert the copied R2.0 installation diskette in the NGC.
l Insert the NGC CD (with Oc· 9600 R2.1)
l Open the explorer
l Browse to d:\flop_upgrd
l Run the file: floppy_upgrade.bat
Follow the instructions on the screen
The installation diskette is upgraded to R2.1
l Remove the floppy from the NGC, label it NGC R2.1 and keep it on a save place.
You need this floppy during the installation of the R2.1 software.

Step 2: Installing the Controller software NGC R2.1

Make sure the engine and scanner are switched off.

Switch off the controller and add the 128 MB Dimm (if Scan to File should be installed).
The total memory is now 256MB.

Notes:
- Make sure that the controller is not connected to the network.
- The software (Operating system and Oc· application) is automatically installed.

04.06.2002 14
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

The software installation takes approximately 30 minutes.

l Switch off the engine / folder.

l Switch the NGC Controller ON.
l Put the Installation NGC CD-ROM, with R2 .1, in the CD-ROM player.
l Put the Installation floppy, NGC R2.1, in the floppy disk drive.
Note:
Make sure that the Installation diskette is not write-protected.
Further do not remove the diskette during the installation sequence.
l Press the <RESET> button.
l An install screen appears.

l Type [ SETUP ] at the prompt and then press the <ENTER> key.
The acknowledge message appears:
l Press any key to start the installation.
l From this point, the installation is unattended for approximately 30 minutes.
You can use this time to do the step 3.
Note:
Ignore any error messages displayed during the installation.
These are normal. Only interact on error messages if they are displayed for at least 5 minutes.
l The installation is unattended until the controller beeps and the CD Rom carriage is moving out.
l Remove the diskette and the CDROM.
l The controller restarts automatically.
l When all screens are started up:
Press CTRL + ALT + F10 to close the applications
Shut down and log on as different user
Press the <shift> key until the logon screen pops up.
l Login as user [service ].
l The installation is completed if all applications, SE, SCP and QM are completely started.
Note: Do not interrupt the installation during this last action.
The changes on installed files are made until the last moment.
Note: If the install diskette is used once, it is not bootable any more .
To make it bootable, run on a NT computer (e.g. the controller) the file: a:/boot/boot.bat on the
diskette.

Step 3: Hardware installation of the Scanner

Replace the LUT [ Look Up Table ] EPROM:

The LUT Eprom is located on 10PBA04 D12.
Make sure the orientation is correct. (notch on the eprom down, and all pins are in the sockets).

Replace the partnumber sticker on 10PBA04 (upper left corner).

The old LUT eprom needs to be returned to Venlo, as soon as possible.

If you are using an upgrade kit, the sticker with the return address can be used.
Please indicate the country where you send the LUT from.

Replace the EPROM's for release 2.1 in the folder.

Step 4: Software installation and Configuration of the Total System (R2.0 to R2.1)
To use the R2.1 NotesSDS, you must also upgrade the NotesSDS in the laptop.
l Remove via: Start, Settings, Control Panel, Add/Remove Programs the [ Oc· 9600 SDS Client ].

04.06.2002 15
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

l Install from the R2.1 CD ROM the new [ Oc· 9600 SDS client ].
d:/sds_client_setup/SDS_Oce9600/setup.exe.
At this point you are able to run the R2 .1 NotesSDS from the Service Laptop or the WebSDS directly
on the NGC.
How to setup the service laptop for NotesSDS is described in the following document;
Communication setup between Laptop and Controller
Note: The setup should be executed and tested before the actual upgrade.

1 Downloading Printer and Scanner software

l Make sure all components are connected to the Controller.
l Switch-on all components.
l Activate the [ NGC DiagMode.bat ] icon on the desktop,(NGC controller must be in [ service ]
mode).
l Follow the instructions on the screen.
l If a message internal error appear, press [ Yes ].
l The controller is in [ Diagnosis Mode ], if the message in the DOS window shows: [ Start OCI in
Minimal Mode Controller Started ].
l Download the preinstalled R2.1 software on the NGC to the Printer and Scanner via SDS test
73 .
Note: Read carefully the SDS test description.
During software downloading to the printer, if a warning window pops up with the message: [An
error occured during the programming of the application module into the printer.
Do you want to retry the programming of the module? ].
Press the [ retry ] button. Load Boot and Application software one by one.
Select in Step1: [ Select an already on the controller available download-file ], named
Oce9600 Printer Scanner 2.1.
l After software downloading, activate the [ NGC Normal Mode .bat ] icon.
l Follow the instructions on the screen.
l If a message [ internal error ] appear, press [ Yes ].

2 Restoring system settings

Feed the media in the printer and enter the correct size on the printer operator panel.

3. Enabling [ Scanmanager ]
4 Restoring Visit data

Step 5: Optionally: Setting up Customer Workstations

Depending on the contract the customer has made with your local Oc·-organization setting up customer
workstations has to be executed.
Make sure that you don't give away this kind of services to the customer for free.
Information how to execute the network integration are described in the;
On the controller, new drivers are installed. If nessesary, upgrade the drivers on one client PC
l Installing Remote Logic: User manual Oc· 9600
l Installing Plot Director: TSM Installing Workstation
l Installing Postscript Driver: TSM Installing Workstation
l Installing Raster Driver::TSM Installing Workstation Win95 , or WINNT
l Installing AUTOCAD Driver: TSM Installing Workstation

Step 6: Ending of the visit

l Mark Modification NR. 16 on the Modification label of the Printer, indicating Software Release 2.1
l Goto step 4 of Visit Dispatch.

04.06.2002 16
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Upgrade PLC / NGC system R2.x to V3.0.1

This page gives you a roadmap how to upgrade an Oc· 9600 R2.x system to Oc· 9600 V3.0/TDS600 3.0

To upgrade R2.x to V3.0 you need the following items:

Item Codenumber Remark Order it

R2.0
CD-ROM PLC V3.0.1 7176.247 Yes
CD-ROM User Manual 7218.547 No
CD-ROM Remote Logic 7225.414 No
V3.0.1
CD-ROM drivers pack 8 7157.354 No
LUT Scanner EPROM V2.0 7070.859 Needed in case of: see rema
- Oc· Scan Logic to be installed
and
- old Image Processing pba (7070.860)
and
- Modification 16 not installed
Folder EPROM's 7175.241 Yes
Extra 128 MB RAM 4936531 256 MB in total needed in case of: see rema
(via order form) - Oc· Scan Logic to be installed
or
- Print Exec LT WEB to be installed
15 GB IDE hard disk 4936289 Needed in case of: see rema
(via order form) - Accounting to be installed
or
- Enhanced Queue Management to be
installed
or
- Postscript Level 3 to be installed
Passwords for all the new via order form
options

The system adjustments of the R2.x system are imported in the V3.0 system.
This indicates that the amount of work, during the installation at the customer, is decreased as much as
possible.

Step 0: Optionally: Clear the SDS_log.mdb file

Write down the parameters of SDS test 37 (e.g. developer settings 51001,51002 and 51003) as a
reference.

If the sds_log.mdb file grows too big to fit on a floppy, it may be wise to start with a fresh log-file.
l Make sure the system components (printer, scanner, folder) are switched on.
l Activate the [ Ngc_down.bat ] icon on the desktop,(controller must be in [ service ] mode).
l cd c:\Oce\Apps\sds
l rename sds_log.mdb to sds_log.sav (after this action there should be no sds_log.mdb on the
system)
l copy sds_log.sav to a floppy (compress if neccessary) or your laptop.
l Make sure this file is stored on a safe location; it may be needed for history purposes.
l Activate the [ Ngc_up.bat ] icon on the desktop
l Switch off / on printer / scanner / folder
l The system has made a new sds_log.mdb with all actual parameters

Step 1: Backing up and upgrading the R2.x System

Before starting the upgrade, the parameters of the R2.x system must be saved.
This saves a lot of time during the installation of the V3.0.1 system.
The back-up procedure, run on the NGC R2.x Controller, is the following:

l Log in as user [ service ] within Windows NT

l Print the [ Print Settings ] (on System Control Panel) on paper (you need this after restoring the

04.06.2002 17
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

settings)
l Start SDS test 71 [ Back-up System data ]

Backup the Scan Destinations

l copy the latest visit directory (c:\service\visits\"sub directory with the current date") to your
laptop

Step 2: Upgrade the installation floppy

A special tool is available to convert a R2.x Installation diskette to a V3.0.1 installation diskette.
This implies that all the Controller hardware options are installed again automatically during the
V3.0.1 installation of the software. The tool is available on the V3.0.1 CD.
You find it on the d:\ flop_upgrd directory.

l Make a bootable copy of the old installation diskette (dosprompt diskcopy a: a:, no window
should be open with Explorer to a:)
l Insert the copied installation diskette in the NGC.
l Insert the new V3.0.1 CD
l Open the explorer
l Browse to CD:\flop_upgrd
l Run the file: floppy_upgrade.bat
l Follow the instructions on the screen
l The installation diskette is upgraded to the newest level
l If the system did not use postscript level 2, the floppy is finished
l If the system did use postscript level 2, you must also insert the upgrade password for
postscript level 3

Notepad example password.oce file (not usable):

Note:
Space between colum 1-2: <Tab> or <Tab><Tab>
Space between collum 2-3: <Tab>

04.06.2002 18
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Space between collum 3-4: <Space><Space><Space>

Insert upgrade password postscript level 3

l Remove the floppy from the NGC, label it Installation floppy TDS600 V3.0.1 and keep it on a
safe place.
You need this floppy during the installation of the V3.0.1 software.

Step 3: Install controller hardware

Before starting the software upgrade, the controller hardware needs to be upgraded according the
wanted functionality.

Accounting Enhanced Postscript Oc· Scan Print Exec LT

Queue Level 3 Logic WEB
Management
More then 15 GB IDE Must Must Must
hard disk drive
256 MB internal memory Must Must

Step 4: Installing the Controller software Version 3.0.1

Notes:
- Make sure the engine and scanner are switched off and that the controller is not connected to the
network.
- The software (Operating system and Oc· application) is automatically installed.

The software installation takes approximately 30 minutes.

l Switch the Controller ON.

l Put the Installation CD-ROM, with V3.0.1, in the CD-ROM player.
l Put the Installation floppy, V3.0.1, in the floppy disk drive.
Note:
Make sure that the Installation diskette is not write-protected.
Further do not remove the diskette during the installation sequence.
l Press the <RESET> button.
l In case the IDE hard disk contains a previous installation, an install screen appears.

l Type [ SETUP ] at the prompt and then press the <ENTER> key.
The acknowledge message appears:
l Press any key to start the installation.
l From this point, the installation is unattended for approximately 30 minutes.
Note:
Ignore any error messages displayed during the installation.
These are normal. Only interact on error messages if they are displayed for at least 5 minutes.
l The installation is unattended until the controller beeps and the CD Rom carriage is moving out.
l Remove the diskette and the CDROM.

04.06.2002 19
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

l The controller restarts automatically.

l When all screens are started up:
Press CTRL + ALT + F10 to close the applications
Shut down (Use CTRL + ALT + DEL and the logoff windows) and log on as different user
Press the <shift> key until the logon screen pops up.
l Login as user [service ].
l The installation is completed if all applications are completely started.
Note: Do not interrupt the installation during this last action.
The changes on installed files are made until the last moment.
Note: If the install diskette is used once, it is not bootable any more .
To make it bootable, run on a NT computer (e.g. the controller) the file: a:/boot/boot.bat on the
diskette.

Step 5: Software installation and Configuration of the Total System (R2.x to V3.0.1)
To use the V3.0.1 NotesSDS, you must also upgrade the NotesSDS in the laptop.
l Remove via: Start, Settings, Control Panel, Add/Remove Programs the [ Oc· 9600 SDS Client ].
l Install from the V3.0.1 CD ROM the new [ Oc· 9600 SDS client ].
At this point you are able to run the V3.0.1 NotesSDS from the Service Laptop or the WebSDS
directly on the controller.
How to setup the service laptop for NotesSDS is described in the following document;
Communication setup between Laptop and Controller
Note: The setup should be executed and tested before the actual upgrade.

1. Downloading Printer and Scanner software

l Make sure all components are connected to the Controller.
l Switch-on all components.
l Reboot the controller and log in as user [service] within Windows NT
l Activate the [ DiagMode.bat ] icon on the desktop
l Follow the instructions on the screen.
l If a message internal error appear, press [ Yes ].
l The controller is in [ Diagnosis Mode ], if the message in the DOS window shows: [ Start OCI in
Minimal Mode Controller Started ].
l Download the preinstalled V3.0.1 software on the controller to the Printer and Scanner via SDS
test 73 .
Note: Read carefully the SDS test description.
During software downloading to the printer, if a warning window pops up with the message: [An
error occured during the programming of the application module into the printer.
Do you want to retry the programming of the module? ].
Press the [ retry ] button. Load Boot and Application software one by one.
Select in Step1: [ Select an already on the controller available download-file ], named
Pre-installed Version TDS600 V3.0.1
l After software downloading, activate the [ NGC Normal Mode .bat ] icon.
l Follow the instructions on the screen.
l If a message [ internal error ] appear, press [ Yes]

2. Initialisation of NVD-RAM
l When upgrading a R2.1 or older system, initialisation of the NVD-RAM is required
l Do the SDS test 22-6-001: Reset the non volatile RAM of the printer
l If you have a scanner, do the SDS test 22-6-021: Reset the non volatile RAM of the scanner

l Turn both the printer and the scanner off and on.
l Execute the following tests: Test 90.1
Test 90.2
Test 90.3
Test 90.4
l Enter the printer media on the printer panel

3. Restore settings
l Use the backup you made at "Step 1"
Note:
If you want to set-up a direct cable connection with LN SDS from your laptop you need to look
in the settingseditor for the hostname
(the name is TDS600-XXXXX, where XXXXX is a random number).
l Restore all system settings via SDS test 72. , choose location a:[current date]
l In case the customer uses the SMB check the Printer name(s) and sharename(s) in NT ( Start,

04.06.2002 20
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Settings, Printers).
If required rename the Printer name(s) and/or sharename(s) or adapt the drivers on the
workstations.

Note: Read carefully the SDS test description

Note: Performing a restore from a backup set without scan destinations will
show the status "Failed" instead of "Completed". This is because some
additional files are not present. Don't worry, the restore is performed correctly.

l If on the printer operator panel the message add toner and replace waste toner bag appears,
press the ON-line button when the applications are completely started.
l Print the [ Print Settings ] (on System Control Panel) and compare all these settings with
the [ Print Settings ] of the original system.
Correct settings via the Setting Editor if necessary.

Step 6: Optionally: Setting up Customer Workstations

Depending on the contract the customer has made with your local Oc·-organization setting up customer
workstations has to be executed.
Make sure that you don't give away this kind of services to the customer for free.
Information how to execute the network integration are described in the following directory

Step 7: Ending of the visit

l Mark Modification NR. 20 on the Modification label of the Printer, indicating Software Version 3.0
l Goto step 4 of Visit Dispatch.

04.06.2002 21
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Upgrade PLC system R3.0.1 to R3.1

This page gives you a roadmap how to upgrade a Oc· 9600 R3.0.1 / TDS600 R3.0.1 system to a Oc·
9600 R3.1 / TDS600 R3.1

To upgrade R3.0.1 to R3.1 you need the following items:

Item Codenumbers
CD-ROM TDS600 R3.1 7209360
CD-ROM User Manual R3.1 7218851
CD-ROM Remote Logic V5.0 7225649

The system adjustments of the R3.0.1 system are imported in the R3.1 system.
This indicates that the amount of work, during the installation at the customer, is decreased as much as
possible.

Step 0: Preparations

l Install the controller hardware.

Before the software upgrade is started, the controller hardware must be upgraded according to the
required functionality.

Accounting Enhanced Postscript Oc· Scan Print Exec LT

Queue Level 3 Logic WEB
Management
More then 15 GB IDE Must Must Must
hard disk drive
256 MB internal memory Must Must

Step 1: Back-up the system data

Save the parameters of the R3.0.1 system before the start of the upgrade.
This saves a lot of time during the installation of the R3.1 system.

1. Print the [ Print Settings ] (on System Control Panel) on paper.

2. Start SDS Session.
3. Start SDS test 71 [ Back-up System data ]
4. Insert a backup diskette in the controller.
5. Subset: <ALL>
6. Target: <Other dir (SL)>
7. Press 'Start' and select the path A:\
8. Wait until the display indicates the message: completed.
9. Remove the diskette from the controller and label the diskette as backup.

Step 2: Upgrade the installation floppy

l An upgrade of the installation diskette is not required for the upgrade of the R3.0.1 PLC system to
R3.1

Step 3: Upgrade the Oc· Power Logic Controller software

Note:
l Make sure the printer and scanner are turned off and that the controller is not connected to the
network.
If yes, ask the clients network administrator for the permission to disconnect.
l The software (Operating system and Oc· application) is automatically installed.
l The software installation takes approximately 30 minutes.
l If the installation diskette is used before, then it is not bootable any more.
To make the diskette bootable, run on a '95/'98/NT computer the file a:/boot/boot.bat on the
diskette.

1. If the controller is turned OFF, turn ON the Oc· Power Logic Controller.
2. Insert the installation CD-ROM, Oc· Power Logic R3.1, in the CD-ROM drive.
3. Insert the installation diskette R3.0.1 in the diskette drive.
Note: Make sure that the Installation diskette is not write protected.
Do not remove the diskette during the installation sequence.

04.06.2002 22
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

4. Press the RESET button on the controller.

5. From this point, the installation is unattended for approximately 30 minutes.
Type: [ setup ] and [press any key], when asked by the messages on the screen !!
6. Wait until the controller sounds beeps and the CD-ROM drive opens.
The CD-ROM drive retracts the drawer after approximately 2 minutes.
7. Remove the CD-ROM and installation diskette.
8. The controller restarts as an "anonymous" user.
9. The installation is completed.

Step 4: Upgrade the printer and scanner software

l Make sure all components are turned on.

l Log off from Windows-NT and log in as user [ service ].
l Activate the [ PLC DiagMode.bat ] icon on the desktop.
l Follow the instructions on the screen.
l If a message internal error appears, press [ Yes ].
l The controller is in [ Diagnosis Mode ], if the message in the DOS window shows: [ Start OCI in
Minimal Mode Controller Started ].
l Start the Oc· WebSDS.
l Download the pre-installed R3.1 printer and scanner software by the SDS test 73
Note: It is advised to download first the printer pre-installed Vx.x.x software and than the
scanner pre-installed Vx.x.x software.
Select: [Select an already on the machine available download file]
Select: [Preinstalled version TDS600 R3.1]
l Select [Printer boot & applications] and download the printer software.
When a warning message appears press [yes].
Select: [Select an already on the machine available download file]
Select: [Pre-installed version TDS600 R3.1]
l Select [Scanner boot & applications] and download the scanner software.
When a warning message appears press [yes].
l After the software download, stop the SDS session and activate the [ PLC Normal Mode .bat ] icon.
l Follow the instructions on the screen.
l If a message [ internal error ] appears, press [ Yes]
l If the error messages 22506 and/or 22519 appear on the printer display: Press [on-line] and all
the messages disappear.

Step 5: Restore settings

Restore the Printer settings

1. Activate the SDS and enter the SDS-mode.

2. Activate the ‘Reset NOVRAM’ procedure: (22-06-001) and (22-06-021).
3. Activate the SDS tests 90.1 to 90.4
4. Restore the settings by the SDS test 72
5. Select: Subset [Standard] / Target [Total]
6. Restore the data from the backup diskette [current date].
7. Wait until the display message indicates: [completed].
8. If the option Account logging is present then:
Select: Subset [Accounting] / Target [Total]
If a "warning" screen appears, click <OK>
9. Close the SDS session.
10. Turn the engine and scanner OFF and ON. (This allows the Oc· Power Logic controller to
receive the initialised settings from the printer and the scanner in its administration.)
Note: If on the Printer display the message: <out of toner> appears press the ON-line
button.

Restore the Customer settings.

1. Activate the [ Settings Editor ].
2. Log in as Service Operator:
3. View the Key Operator settings.
4. File \ Open \ current.kos
When the file is loaded: press the " Apply" button.
After the "Apply" button is pressed, an 'Information'-window appears. This window shows
the differences between the settings of R3.0.1 and R3.1.
This information is stored in a Log file: C:\oce\apps\applications\SEerror.txt'
Click <OK>

04.06.2002 23
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Do not restart the controller.

5. View the System Administrator settings.
6. File \ Open \ current.sas
When loaded: press the " Apply" button.
After the "Apply" button is pressed, an 'Information'-window appears. This window
shows the differences between the settings of R3.0.1 and R3.1.
This information is stored in a Log file: 'C:\oce\apps\applications\SEerror.txt'
Click <OK>
7. Rename [Host name] and [Description] in the [Settings Editor].
8. Close all the applications.
9. Restart the Oc· Power Logic Controller.
10. If Scan-to-file option is NOT installed, then continue with point 12.
11. If the Scan-to-file option is installed:
In Scan Manager, login as <service operator>
File \ Open \ current.sm
When loaded: press the " Apply" button.
12. Restart the Oc· Power Logic Controller.
13. Media settings:set the type and size on the printer operator panel.

l If the customer uses the SMB, then check the Printer name(s) and share name(s) in
NT ( Start, Settings, Printers).
If required, rename the Printer name(s) and/or share name(s) or adapt the drivers on
the workstations.

l Print the [ Print Settings ] (on System Control Panel) and compare all these
settings with the [ Print Settings ] of the original system.
Correct the settings by the Settings Editor if necessary.

Step 6: Optionally: Setting up the Customer Workstations

The setting up of the customer workstations depends on the contract between the customer and the
local Oc· organisation.
Make sure that you don't give away this kind of services to the customer for free.
The information how to make the network integration is described in the directory: Installation /
Workstation.

Step 7: Ending of the visit

l Mark Modification NR. 25 on the Modification label of the Printer, indicates Software Version 3.1

04.06.2002 24
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Upgrade NGC system R2.0 Scan To File to R2.1

This page gives you a roadmap how to upgrade an installed Oc· 9600
R2.0 STFsystem to Oc· 9600 R2.1

To upgrade R2.0 STF to R2.1 you need 5 items:

l CD-ROM R2.1 NGC 7070.831
l CD-ROM User Manuals and Remote Logic 7136.960
l CD-ROM driver pack 5 7166.294
l Firmpack Folder (2 e-prom's) 7175.241
l Sicker MS lisence 7137.109

The system adjustments of the R2.0 STF system are imported in the
R2.1 system.
This indicates that the amount of work, during the installation at the
customer, is decreased as much as possible.

Step 1: Backing up and upgrading the R2.0 STF System

Before starting the upgrade, the parameters of the R2.0 STF system
must be backed-up.
This saves a lot of time during the installation of the R2.1 system.
The back-up procedure, run on the NGC R2.0 STF Controller, is the
following:

Backing up the R2.0 STF parameters

l Log in as user [ service ] within Windows NT
l Print the [ Print Settings ] on paper
l Start SDS test 71 [ Back-up System data ]
l Put a diskette into the NGC
l Copy the created directory to the diskette (c:\service\visits\"sub
directory with the current date").
l Remove the diskette from the NGC, label it NGC-R2.0
STF-BACKUP and keep it on a save place.
You need these files later on.

Upgrade the Installation floppy

It is not nessassary to upgrade the installation floppy R2.0 STF to
R2.1
Note:
If the installation disk is used ones, it not boottable anymore.
To make it bootable, run on a NT computer (e.g. the NGC controller)
the file a:/boot/boot.bat on the diskette.

Step 2: Installing the Controller software NGC R2.1

Make sure the engine and scanner are switched off.

Notes:
- Make sure that the controller is not connected to the network.
- The software (Operating system and Oc· application) is automatically
installed.
The software installation takes approximately 30 minutes.

l Switch the NGC Controller ON.

l Put the Installation NGC CD-ROM, with R2 .1, in the CD-ROM
player.
l Put the Installation floppy, NGC R2.0 STF, in the floppy disk drive.
Note:
Make sure that the Installation diskette is not write-protected.
Further do not remove the diskette during the installation sequence.
l Press the <RESET> button.
l An install screen appears.

04.06.2002 25
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

l Type [ SETUP ] at the prompt and then press the <ENTER> key.
The acknowledge message appears:
l Press any key to start the installation.
l From this point, the installation is unattended for approximately 30
minutes.
You can use this time to do the step 3.
Note:
Ignore any error messages displayed during the installation.
These are normal. Only interact on error messages if they are
displayed for at least 5 minutes.
l The installation is unattended until the controller beeps and the CD
Rom carriage is moving out.
l Remove the diskette and the CDROM.
l The controller restarts automatically.
Press the <shift> key until the logon screen pops up.
l Login as user [service ].
l The installation is completed if all applications, SE, SCP and QM are
completely started.
Note: Do not interrupt the installation during this last action.
The changes on installed files are made until the last moment.
Note: If the install diskette is used once, it is not any more bootable.
To make it bootable, run on a NT computer (e.g. the controller) the
file: a:/boot/boot.bat on the diskette.

Step 3: Hardware ninstallation of the folder.

If a folder is available, replace the firmpack of the folder.

You can do this while the Controller is installing R2.1

Step 4: Software installation and Configuration of the Total System (R2.0

To use the R2.1 NotesSDS, you must also upgrade the NotesSDS in the
laptop.
l Remove via: Start, Settings, Control Panel, Add/Remove Programs
the [ Oc· 9600 SDS Client ].

Note:
Do not remove Oc· 9600 SDS client after the installation of the new
version.
The Lotus Notes SDS tests will be corrupted and you will have to install
SDS client again.

l Install from the R2.1 CD ROM the new [ Oc· 9600 SDS client ].
d:/sds_client_setup/SDS_Madrid/Disk1/setup.exe.
At this point you are able to run the R2 .1 NotesSDS from the Service
Laptop or the WebSDS directly on the NGC.
How to setup the service laptop for NotesSDS is described in the
following document;
Communication setup between Laptop and Controller
Note: The setup should be executed and tested before the actual

04.06.2002 26
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

upgrade.

1 Downloading Printer and Scanner software

l Make sure all components are connected to the Controller.
l Switch-on all components.
l Activate the [ NGC DiagMode.bat ] icon on the desktop.
l Follow the instructions on the screen.
l If a message internal error appear, press [ Yes ].
l The controller is in [ Diagnosis Mode ], if the message in the
DOS window shows: [ Start OCI in Minimal Mode Controller
Started ].
l Download the preinstalled R2.1 software on the NGC to the
Printer and Scanner via SDS test 73 .
Note: Read carefully the SDS test description.
During software downloading to the printer, if a warning window
pops up with the message: [An error occured during the
programming of the application module into the printer.
Do you want to retry the programming of the module? ].
Press the [ retry ] button. Load Boot and Application software
one by one.
Select in Step1: [ Select an already on the controlleravailable
download-file ], named Oce9600 printer scanner R2.1.
l After software downloading, activate the [ NGC Normal Mode
.bat ] icon.
l Follow the instructions on the screen.
l If a message [ internal error ] appear, press [ Yes ].

2 Restoring system settings

Before you restore the settings by test 72, do the test 22-6-001: init
NVD.
Restore all system settings via SDS test 72.
Note: Read carefully the SDS test description

3. Enabling [ Scan to file ]

If the Scan To File option was enablednin R2.0 STF you can skip
the following steps.

The scan to file password will be deliverd as a text file (floppy or

e-mail).
l Open the file using notepad or wordpad.
l Verify that the password is for the correct printernumber (Listed
as HOST-ID).
l Logon to the [ Setting Editor ] (SE) as Key operator.
l Go to System
l Click on the [ Scan to File ] password
l Type the password in the space provided and press <enter>.
Note: The password is case sensitive.
l Click on [ <apply> ].
l Reboot the system.
l [ Scan Manager ] will now load automatically together with the [
Setting Editor, Queue Manager and System Control Panel ].
If not: Verify that the printer serial number is correctly entered in
the SDS.
(This must be in the following format: 9601xxxxx e.g.
960100123.

4 Restoring Visit data

l Copy the directory created on the floppy NGC-R2.0
STF-BACKUP in C:\SERVICE\VISITS
l The system is now completely setup.

Step 5: Optionally: Setting up Customer Workstations

Depending on the contract the customer has made with your local
Oc·-organization setting up customer workstations has to be executed.
Make sure that you don't give away this kind of services to the customer
for free.

04.06.2002 27
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Information how to execute the network integration are described in the;

On the controller, new drivers are installed. If nessesary, upgrade the
drivers on one client PC
l Installing Remote Logic: User manual Oc· 9600
l Installing Plot Director: TSM Installing Workstation
l Installing Postscript Driver: TSM Installing Workstation
l Installing Raster Driver::TSM Installing Workstation Win95 , or
WINNT
l Installing AUTOCAD Driver: TSM Installing Workstation

Step 6: Ending of the visit

l Mark Modification NR. 16 on the Modification label of the Printer,
indicating Software Release 2.1
l Goto step 4 of Visit Dispatch.

04.06.2002 28
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Upgrade NGC system R2.x to V3.0

This page gives you a roadmap how to upgrade an Oc· 9600 R2.x system to Oc· 9600 V3.0/TDS600 3.0

To upgrade R2.x to V3.0 you need the following items:

Item Codenumber Remark Order it

R2.0
CD-ROM V3.0 NGC 4936299 Yes
(via order form)
CD-ROM User Manual included in package order Loose codenumber 7137.322 No
form
CD-ROM Remote Logic included in package order Loose codenumber 7175.693 No
V3.0 form
CD-ROM drivers pack 7 included in package order Loose codenumber 7208.895 No
form
LUT Scanner EPROM V2.0 7070.859 Needed in case of: see rema
- Oc· Scan Logic to be installed
and
- old Image Processing pba (7070.860)
and
- Modification 16 not installed
Folder EPROM's 7175.241 Yes
Extra 128 MB RAM 4936531 256 MB in total needed in case of: see rema
(via order form) - Oc· Scan Logic to be installed
or
- Print Exec LT WEB to be installed
15 GB IDE hard disk 4936289 Needed in case of: see rema
(via order form) - Accounting to be installed
or
- Enhanced Queue Management to be
installed
or
- Postscript Level 3 to be installed
Passwords for all the new via order form
options

The system adjustments of the R2.x system are imported in the V3.0 system.
This indicates that the amount of work, during the installation at the customer, is decreased as much as
possible.

Step 0: Optionally: Clear the SDS_log.mdb file

Write down the parameters of SDS test 37 (e.g. developer settings 51001,51002 and 51003) as a
reference.

If the sds_log.mdb file grows too big to fit on a floppy, it may be wise to start with a fresh log-file.
l Make sure the system components (printer, scanner, folder) are switched on.
l Activate the [ Ngc_down.bat ] icon on the desktop,(controller must be in [ service ] mode).
l cd c:\Oce\Apps\sds
l rename sds_log.mdb to sds_log.sav (after this action there should be no sds_log.mdb on the
system)
l copy sds_log.sav to a floppy (compress if neccessary) or your laptop.
l Make sure this file is stored on a save location; it may be needed for history purposes.
l Activate the [ Ngc_up.bat ] icon on the desktop
l Switch off / on printer / scanner / folder
l The system has made a new sds_log.mdb with all actual parameters

Step 1: Backing up and upgrading the R2.x System

Before starting the upgrade, the parameters of the R2.x system must be saved.
This saves a lot of time during the installation of the V3.0 system.
The back-up procedure, run on the NGC R2.x Controller, is the following:

04.06.2002 29
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

l Log in as user [ service ] within Windows NT

l Print the [ Print Settings ] (on System Control Panel) on paper
l Start SDS test 71 [ Back-up System data ]

Backup the Scan Destinations

l copy the latest visit directory (c:\service\visits\"sub directory with the current date") to your
laptop

Step 2: Upgrade the installation floppy

A special tool is available to convert a R2.x Installation diskette to a V3.0 installation diskette.
This implies that all the Controller hardware options are installed again automatically during the V3.0
installation of the software. The tool is available on the V3.0 CD.
You find it on the d:\ flop_upgrd directory.

l Make a bootable copy of the R2.x installation diskette.

l Insert the copied R2.x installation diskette in the NGC.
l Insert the NGC CD (with Oc· 9600 V3.0)
l Open the explorer
l Browse to d:\flop_upgrd
l Run the file: floppy_upgrade.bat
l Follow the instructions on the screen
l The installation diskette is upgraded to V3.0
l If the system did not use postscript level 2, the floppy is finished
l If the system did use postscript level 2, you must also insert the upgrade password for
postscript level 3

Notepad example password.oce file (not usable):

Note:
Space between colum 1-2: <Tab> or <Tab><Tab>

04.06.2002 30
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Space between collum 2-3: <Tab>

Space between collum 3-4: <Space><Space><Space>

Insert upgrade password postscript level 3

l Remove the floppy from the NGC, label it Installation floppy Oc· 9600 V3.0 and keep it on a
save place.
You need this floppy during the installation of the V3.0 software.

Step 3: Install controller hardware

Before starting the software upgrade, the controller hardware needs to be upgraded according the
wanted functionality.

Accounting Enhanced Postscript Oc· Scan Print Exec LT

Queue Level 3 Logic WEB
Management
More then 15 GB IDE Must Must Must
hard disk drive
256 MB internal memory Must Must

Step 4: Installing the Controller software Version 3.0

Notes:
- Make sure the engine and scanner are switched off and that the controller is not connected to the
network.
- The software (Operating system and Oc· application) is automatically installed.

The software installation takes approximately 30 minutes.

l Switch the Controller ON.

l Put the Installation CD-ROM, with V3.0, in the CD-ROM player.
l Put the Installation floppy, V3.0, in the floppy disk drive.
Note:
Make sure that the Installation diskette is not write-protected.
Further do not remove the diskette during the installation sequence.
l Press the <RESET> button.
l In case the IDE hard disk contains a previous installation, an install screen appears.

l Type [ SETUP ] at the prompt and then press the <ENTER> key.
The acknowledge message appears:
l Press any key to start the installation.
l From this point, the installation is unattended for approximately 30 minutes.
Note:
Ignore any error messages displayed during the installation.
These are normal. Only interact on error messages if they are displayed for at least 5 minutes.
l The installation is unattended until the controller beeps and the CD Rom carriage is moving out.

04.06.2002 31
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

l Remove the diskette and the CDROM.

l The controller restarts automatically.
l When all screens are started up:
Press CTRL + ALT + F10 to close the applications
Shut down (Use CTRL + ALT + DEL and the logoff windows) and log on as different user
Press the <shift> key until the logon screen pops up.
l Login as user [service ].
l The installation is completed if all applications are completely started.
Note: Do not interrupt the installation during this last action.
The changes on installed files are made until the last moment.
Note: If the install diskette is used once, it is not bootable any more .
To make it bootable, run on a NT computer (e.g. the controller) the file: a:/boot/boot.bat on the
diskette.

Step 5: Software installation and Configuration of the Total System (R2.x to V3.0)
To use the V3.0 NotesSDS, you must also upgrade the NotesSDS in the laptop.
l Remove via: Start, Settings, Control Panel, Add/Remove Programs the [ Oc· 9600 SDS Client ].
l Install from the V3.0 CD ROM the new [ Oc· 9600 SDS client ].
At this point you are able to run the V3.0 NotesSDS from the Service Laptop or the WebSDS
directly on the controller.
How to setup the service laptop for NotesSDS is described in the following document;
Communication setup between Laptop and Controller
Note: The setup should be executed and tested before the actual upgrade.

1. Downloading Printer and Scanner software

l Make sure all components are connected to the Controller.
l Switch-on all components.
l Activate the [ DiagMode.bat ] icon on the desktop,(controller must be in [ service ] mode).
l Follow the instructions on the screen.
l If a message internal error appear, press [ Yes ].
l The controller is in [ Diagnosis Mode ], if the message in the DOS window shows: [ Start OCI in
Minimal Mode Controller Started ].
l Download the preinstalled V3.0 software on the controller to the Printer and Scanner via SDS
test 73 .
Note: Read carefully the SDS test description.
During software downloading to the printer, if a warning window pops up with the message: [An
error occured during the programming of the application module into the printer.
Do you want to retry the programming of the module? ].
Press the [ retry ] button. Load Boot and Application software one by one.
Select in Step1: [ Select an already on the controller available download-file ], named
TDS600 Printer Scanner V3.0
l After software downloading, activate the [ NGC Normal Mode .bat ] icon.
l Follow the instructions on the screen.
l If a message [ internal error ] appear, press [ Yes]

2. Initialisation of NVD-RAM
l When upgrading a R2.1 or older system, initialisation of the NVD-RAM is required
l Do the SDS test 22-6-001: Reset the non volatile RAM of the printer
l If you have a scanner, do the SDS test 22-6-021: Reset the non volatile RAM of the scanner

l Execute the following tests: Test 90.1

Test 90.2
Test 90.3
Test 90.4
l Enter the printer media on the printer panel

3. Restore settings
l Use the backup you made at "Step 1"
Note:
If you want to set-up a direct cable connection with LN SDS from your laptop you need to look
in the settingseditor for the hostname
(the name is TDS600-XXXXX, where XXXXX is a random number).
l Restore all system settings via SDS test 72.
l In case the customer uses the SMB check the Printer name(s) and sharename(s) in NT ( Start,
Settings, Printers).

04.06.2002 32
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

If required rename the Printer name(s) and/or sharename(s) or adapt the drivers on the
workstations.

Note: Read carefully the SDS test description

Note: Performing a restore from a backup set without scan destinations will
show the status "Failed" instead of "Completed". This is because some
additional files are not present. Don't worry, the restore is performed correctly.

l If on the printer operator panel the message add toner and replace waste toner bag appears,
press the ON-line button when the applications are completely started.

Step 6: Optionally: Setting up Customer Workstations

Depending on the contract the customer has made with your local Oc·-organization setting up customer
workstations has to be executed.
Make sure that you don't give away this kind of services to the customer for free.
Information how to execute the network integration are described in the;
On the controller, new drivers are installed. If nessesary, upgrade the drivers on one client PC
l Installing Remote Logic: User manual Oc· 9600
l Installing Print Exec LT: TSM Installing Workstation
l Installing Postscript Driver: TSM Installing Workstation
l Installing Raster Driver::TSM Installing Workstation Win95 , or WINNT
l Installing AUTOCAD Driver: TSM Installing Workstation

Step 7: Ending of the visit

l Mark Modification NR. 20 on the Modification label of the Printer, indicating Software Version 3.0
l Goto step 4 of Visit Dispatch.

04.06.2002 33
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Repro Desk system R4.21

General

For passwords, check the passwords for Repro Desk.

Power connections

Installation

The first pre-installed machines come with a questionnaire.

You may use this digital questionnaire in case you want to
email it back to headquarters.

1. First install the controller.

2. Meanwhile unpack the print engine

3. Fill the toner dosage unit with toner

4. Put the provided roll of paper on roll 1

5. Optional: Hardware installation of the Scanner

Installation description:

6. If you have an optional ( Copy Delivery Tray or Folder

), you install this now

7. Connect controller, engine and optional and power up

every component

8. For a pre- installed engine see:

9. For a NON pre- installed engine see:

10. If the systems is working alright, end with step 4 of the Visit Dispatch

04.06.2002 34
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Repro Desk system R4.25

General

For passwords, check the passwords for Repro Desk 4.25.

Power connections

Installation

The first pre-installed machines come with a

questionnaire.
You may use this digital questionnaire in case you
want to email it back to headquarters.

1. First install the controller.

2. Meanwhile unpack the print engine

3. Fill the toner dosage unit with toner

4. Put the provided roll of paper on roll 1

5. Optional: Hardware installation of the Scanner

Installation description:

6. If you have an optional ( Copy Delivery Tray or

Folder ), you install this now

7. Connect controller, engine and optional and power

up every component

8. For a pre- installed engine see:

9. For a NON pre- installed engine see:

10. If the systems is working alright, end with step 4

of the Visit Dispatch

04.06.2002 35
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Repro Desk system R4.30 (only for Oc· 9600).

General

For passwords, check the passwords for Repro Desk 4.25.

Power connections

Installation

The first pre-installed machines come with a

questionnaire. You may use this digital questionnaire in
case you want to email it back to headquarters.

1. First install the controller.

2. Meanwhile unpack the print engine

3. Fill the toner dosage unit with toner

4. Put the provided roll of paper on roll 1

5. Optional: Hardware installation of the Scanner

Installation description:

6. If you have an optional ( Copy Delivery Tray or Folder

), you install this now

7. Connect controller, engine and optional and power up every

component

8. For a pre- installed engine see:

9. For a NON pre- installed engine see:

10. If the systems is working alright, end with step 4 of the Visit Dispatch

04.06.2002 36
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Generic installation print applications and printer drivers on

workstation
In this chapter are descriped the generic descriptions.
When the installation or configuration is because of the used network or protocols, the description is stopped.
The continuing corresponding description you will find in corresponding chapters.

Available generic descriptions are:

Applications:
Plot Director for SMB on workstation

Printer drivers:
Raster and PS driver on WIN'95 workstation
Raster and PS driver on WINNT4.0 workstation

04.06.2002 37
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

-- ADI driver R14 on workstation

Removing existing Oc· ADI driver in Autocad

Note: Before you start the installation procedure for the new Autocad 14 printer driver, you have to make certain
that previous version of Oc· drivers in Autocad are uninstalled. If this is not done, Autocad will crash en must be
reinstalled!
(It is also possible to delete the file [ Acad14.cfg ]. Autocad will start, but without any settings done before.)

Start the AutoCad application.

Select the 'Tools' tab.
Select 'Preferences' , the window 'Preferences' opens.
Select the 'Printer' tap.
Select 'Remove'.
Remove all present Oc· printers. Before executing write down the settings for these printers, if you want to
re-install them.

Installation of the Oc· ADI Printer driver

Make sure that ACAD14 is not launched.

1. Run setup.exe from disk1 or follow the installation procedure from the CD-ROM.

[7_1] Starting Autocad installation

2. If you have PC2 files stored on Oc· machines, you can update them by clicking on the Browse button. If you do not,
you can click on the Quit button.

04.06.2002 38
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

[7_2] Updating PC2 files

3. When the installation is complete, you click on the Return to Windows button to close the Autocad installation procedure.

04.06.2002 39
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

[7_3] Confirming completion of installation

You can now configure Autocad 14.

Configuring Oc· 9600 ADI driver in Autocad

1. Open Autocad 14.
2. Type Config in the Autocad prompt and press Enter, or
select "Tools, Preferences, Printer" tab.

04.06.2002 40
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

[7_4] Editing Autocad preferences

Be sure, that older Oc· drivers are removed.

3. Click on the New button. The Add a Printer dialog box appears.

04.06.2002 41
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

[7_5] Selecting an Autocad driver

4. Select the Oc· driver and click OK.

A text window with Oc· drivers appears.

[7_6] Selecting Oc· driver

5. Select on the command line the Oc· 9600 from the list, press <Enter>.
6. Select several configuration settings, press <Enter>.
When is asked to specify port:

04.06.2002 42
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

[7_7] Specify output port

Up till here, the description for the Oc· 9600 ADI driver is generic.
From this point on, the description depends of the type of network and protocols.

Available descriptions are:

SMB
TCP/IP
Novell

04.06.2002 43
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

-- Plot Director on workstation

1. Insert the Oc· drivers CD in the CD-ROM player.
2. Click on the Start button and select the Run option.
3. Start ocemenu.exe from the CD.

[43] Running ocemenu.exe

4. Click on the OK button.

The installation window appears on the screen.
5. Click on the Install Products button.
6. Click on the Plot Director button.
Note: If you have Plot Director on disk, you run Setup from Disk 1.

The installation of Plot Director is started.

[45] Installing Plot Director

7. Click on the Continue button.

[46] Selecting the desired language

8. Select a language from the list and click on the Continue button.

04.06.2002 44
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

[47] Specifying installation location

9. Click on the Browse button to define a different location for Plot Director, if needed.
If a previous version of Plot Director has already been installed on the PC, the following dialog box will
appear.

[48] Upgrading Plot Director

10. Click on the Upgrade button.

[49] Confirming directory creation

11. Click on the Yes button to confirm.

12. Next, define the group name in the Installing icons to Program Manager dialog box.

04.06.2002 45
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

[50] Installing icons to Program Manager

13. Click on the Continue button. The following message box appears:

[51] Defining plotter

Note:
If you click on the Cancel button, then you can configure the driver later on via:
start "Admin PlotDirector", menu "Plotter, Define".
in "Select a model" screen, select "9600 NGC1", OK

14. Click on the OK button. The Plotter Desciption dialog box now appears.

[52] Setting up the desired plotter

15. Specify a logical name, set the configuration settings and click on the OK button.
The Select output port dialog appears.

04.06.2002 46
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

[48] Selecting the desired output port

Up till here, the description for Plot Director is generic.

From this point on, the description depends of the type of network and protocols.

Available descriptions are:

SMB
TCP/IP
Novell

04.06.2002 47
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

-- Oc· Print Exec LT release notes (including installation

instructions)
For detailed information regarding Oc· Print Exec LT 1.0 see:

SPS-ES bulletins / Application software / Print Exec LT / Pelt 1.0 / IB 1001: Print Exec LT
1.0.

IB content:

Summary
Introduction of Print Exec LT 1.0 (PELT 1.0 )

Reason

Print Exec LT 1.0 is the first version of the entry level product of the Print Exec Suite.
It offers document submission functionality and is targeted at small sized user groups, up to 15 users,
who want to submit documents to Oce Wide Format Printers.

Description

Print Exec LT 1.0 is a Windows application allowing users of Oce WFPS printers to print archived
files in a very efficient way.
PELT 1.0 provides the following features:
l Job composition
l Full settings editing at job and document level
l Definition of destinations (i.e. virtual printers) with default values for jobs
l Ability to work with up to 30 jobs, allowing for reprint
l Easy to learn and productive user interface
l Support of following Oc· devices (incl. job on hold and accounting attributes):
9600 NGC 2.1/2.2
TDS400
TDS600
TDS800
l Support of following plateforms:
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
Windows 95
Windows 98
Windows Millenium
l Support of following languages:
English
French
German
Italian
Portuguese
Spanish
Dutch
l Information on printer status and jobs in printer queue (via the integration of SCP and QM Remote
Logic applications).
l Reverse order of documents in a job
l Customization of the settings displayed in the document table of the main view
l End-user installable software
l Evaluation mode by default
l Licensed mode protection based on the Mac address of the workstation.
l On-Line Help.

Parts & Tools

l PE LT 1.0 is distributed on a dedicated CD-ROM to be shipped with the 9600, TDS400, TDS600 &

04.06.2002 48
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

TDS800.
l PE LT 1.0 will be available on the Oc· WEB on week 106

Instruction

1. Installation instructions

2. Software Activation instructions

3. Access to the Printer Status & the Printer Queue functionnality

Known Problems

Known Problems

Appendices

Appendix 1 : Activation Key Requets Form

Appendix 2 : Example of Request

Appendix 3 : Tips and Tricks

Appendix 4 : Debugging Tools

Appendix 5 : Product & Getting Started Manuals

04.06.2002 49
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

-- PostScript driver
Note:
With this driver all type of files (except PostScript) can be sent to
the controller.

If sending PostScript files: then in the NGC the PostScript option

must be enabled by entering the autorisation code, given by the
PostScript driver software.

For installation of the driver, see: Generic instaalation drivers,

raster and PS driver.

04.06.2002 50
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

-- Raster and PS printer driver on WIN'95 workstation

General:
As the Raster and PostScript drivers are already installed on the NGC Controller, the way to install the 9600
printer on a client Workstation is very simple.

This involves the following steps:

Note:
The NGC Controller must be correctly setup and running! See NGC SMB setup on controller.

Installing a printer driver on a Win'95 workstation

1. Click on the Start button and select the Printers option from the Settings menu.
2. Click on the Add Printer icon in the Printers dialog box.

[34] Adding a new printer

The Add Printer Wizard is started.

[35] Specifying a printer as network printer

Note:
You can install a printer driver from a floppy, CR-ROM or via the network from the NGC controller.
In our next example the driver is taken from the NGC controller via the network.

3. Select the Network printer radio button and click on the Next button.

04.06.2002 51
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

[36] Specifying network path or queue name

4. Click on the Browse button. The Browse for Printer dialog box appears.
Note: It may take up to 10 minutes before the printer is added to the list.

[37] Selecting the desired network printer

5. Select the Entire Network option.

6. Select the workgroup, you defined on the 9600 controller.
7. Select the name of the 9600 controller.
8. Select the Oce9600 (Windows raster driver), or, if available, the Oce9600PS
(Postscript driver).

04.06.2002 52
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

[38] Selecting the desired Oc· printer

9. Specify a logical name, select the Yes radio button if you want to use the printer
as the default printer and click on the Next button.

[39] Defining the printer name

10. Select the Yes radio button and click on the Finish button to make a test page.

04.06.2002 53
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

[40] Printing a test page

Now a dialog box appears where you can specify if the test print was
successful.

[41] Confirming successful test print

11. Click on the Yes button.

A print job now appears in the Queue Manager of the 9600 controller.

04.06.2002 54
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

[42] Print job in Queue Manager

12. Open the propertties of the printer driver in < Start -Settings - Printers >
Click on the tab "Device Options" and set the corresponding settings like:
copy matrial
Roll drawers
Sheet drawers
Folding.

04.06.2002 55
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

-- Raster and PS printer driver on WINNT4.0 workstation

General:
As the Raster and PostScript drivers are already installed on the NGC Controller, the way to install the 9600
printer on a client Workstation is very simple.

This involves the following steps:

Note:
The NGC Controller must be correctly set-up and running! See NGC SMB set-up on controller.

Installing a printer driver on a Windows NT4.0 workstation

Note:
You can copy the printer driver over the network from the NGC controller or local from a diskette or CD-ROM.
If you copy / install the driver from the NGC controller via the network, you have to set some options first in the
driver on the controller.
Because in a WINNT environment (workstation / controller) there is always a check if the copy (on the
workstation) is still the same as the original (on the controller). If not, the original will be automatically copied to
the workstation.
So the original on the controller must first be set according the Oc· 9600 configuration, copy materials, folding,
etc.

1. Login as "service" on the NGC controller.

2. Select: Start - Settings - Printers.
Select the tab "Device Options".
Check and / or change the options.

3. Log on to your workstation.

4. Click on the Start button and select the Printers option from the Settings menu.
5. Click on the Add Printer icon in the Printers dialog box.

[34] Adding a new printer

Note:
You can install a printer driver from a floppy, CR-ROM or via the network from the NGC controller.
In our next example the driver is taken from the NGC controller via the network.

The Add Printer Wizard is started.

04.06.2002 56
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

[35] Specifying a printer as network printer

6. Select the Network printer radio button and click on the Next button.

7. The Browse for Printer dialog box appears.

Note: It may take up to 10 minutes before the printer is added to the list.

[37] Selecting the desired network printer

8. Select the Entire Network option.

9. Select the workgroup, you defined on the 9600 controller.
10. Select the name of the 9600 controller.
11. Select the Oce9600 (Windows raster driver), or, if available, the Oce9600PS
(Postscript driver).

04.06.2002 57
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

[38] Selecting the desired Oc· printer

12. Dubble click on the desired printer driver, Oc·9600 raster or Oc·9600PS.

13. Select the Yes radio button if you want to use the printer
as the default printer and click on the Next button.
Note: Upper part (give printer name) is NOT vissible in WINNT!!)

[39] Default printer.

14. Click on Finish radio button.

15. If you want to make a test print, select the properties of the printer icon in the printer controll window,
select the tab General and click on testprint radio button.

Now a dialog box appears where you can specify if the test print was successful.

04.06.2002 58
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

[41] Confirming successful test print

16. Click on the Yes button.

04.06.2002 59
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

NGC Novell 3.x and 4.x set up for R2

Before you can start up the Novell services, you have to enable them first on the NGC. To do so, you take the
following steps.

Enabling and configuring Novell in the NGC

1. Open the [ Setting Editor ].

2. Login as [ System administrator ] using the { Login ] option in the [ File ] menu.
3. Enter the password: 00096 and click OK.
4. Select the [ SA ] settings option from the [ View ] menu.
The [ System administrator ] view is displayed.
5. Click the [ System ] button.
The [ System ] settings is displayed.
6. Click the 'Novell' option under [ 'Connectivity' ].
7. Enable Novell.
8. Enter the [ Pserver ] name (print server name).
This is the same on the Novell system.
9. Enter the [ Pserver ] password, if needed!!
10. Enter the [ Access mode ], NDS or Bindery.
If the network is Novell 3.x then enter: Bindery.
If the network is Novell 4.x then enter NDS.
11. Enter the server name of the file server where the print queue is defined.
12. Enter the NDS context, where the [ Pserver ] object is defined. (If [ Bindery ] was chosen, a context is not
relevant).
Note: The specified string should not be preceded by a period. (Example: printservers.drawingroom.office)
13. Leave the Queue polling interval and Reconnection retry interval parameters unchanged at 30 seconds and
120 seconds, respectively.
14. Enter [ Communication mode ]: [ Print while spool ] (is preferred)
15. Enter PDL selection: [ Auto ] (is preferred)
16. Check in folder IPX/SPX if the network adapter is enabled.
17. Click the [ Apply ] button.
18. Reboot the NGC in order to enable the settings.

04.06.2002 60
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

NGC TCP/IP configuration

Note:
All supported protocols are already installed on the controller.
Only TCP/IP needs to be configured.

There are two ways to set-up the TCP/IP protocol:

l by service, or
l by the KOS/SAS box

R1 by Service

R1 by KOS/SAS box

R2 by settings Editor

04.06.2002 61
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

NGC LPD set up

To use LPD:
l LPD must be enabled in the NGC software (is standard enabled after installing with the CD-ROM)
l TCP/IP is must be properly configured on your NGC controller.

The LPD is standard enabled, after installing by the CD-ROM. But, if for any reason you have to do so, see description below.

R1 enabling LPD
R2 enabling LPD

04.06.2002 62
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

NGC FTP set up

To use FTP:
l FTP must be enabled in the NGC software (is standard enabled after installing with the CD-ROM)
l TCP/IP is must be properly configured on your NGC controller.

The FTP is standard enabled, after installing by the CD-ROM. But, if for any reason you have to do so, see description below.

Enabling FTP

04.06.2002 63
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

NGC Novell 4.x set up R1

Before you can start up the Novell 4.x services, you have to enable them first on your Oc· 9600. To do so, you
take the following steps.

Enabling Novell 4.x in the NGC

1. Activate the DOS box, called Oc· 9600 in the Taskbar.

2. Select option 1, Special User in the DOS window.
3. Select option 1, Setting Editor, from the Special user menu.
4. Select option 1, System administrator, from the Setting Editor menu.
5. Enter the System administrator password.
The System administrator menu is displayed.
6. Select option 3, System.
7. Select option 2, General, from the System menu.
8. Select option 8, NOVELL enabled, from the General menu.
9. Select option 3, Set NOVELL Connection ON, from the NOVELL enabled menu.
The Novell services should now be enabled.
The following message appears: "this modification needs a reboot to be taken into account. Press
<RETURN> to continue".
Note:
You can select option 2, Show current value, to check if the action was completed correctly. You should get
the following status: "NOVELL connection enabled : Current value = ON".

After having enabled Novell 4.x, you have to configure it on the Oc· 9600 NGC controller.
If you continue from this moment, then
l Select option 1 - Previous
l Select option 1 - Previous
l continue with point 6.

If you start on a later moment, start from point 1.

Configuring Novell 4.x in the NGC

1. Select option 1, Special User in the DOS window.

2. Select option 1, Setting Editor, from the Special user menu.
3. Select option 1, System administrator, from the Setting Editor menu.
4. Enter the System administrator password.
The System administrator menu is displayed.
5. Select option 3, System, from the System administrator menu.
6. Select option 3, NOVELL Parameters, from the System menu.
7. Select option 2, define Print server name, from the NOVELL parameters menu.
8. Enter the desired print server name and press Enter.
You need this name to configure to the Novell server.
You are now returned to the Novell parameters window.
9. Select option 3, to enter a printserver password, if needed!!
10. Select option 4, Netware access mode, from the NOVELL parameters menu.
11. Select option 4, Set NOVELL access mode NDS, to set the Netware access mode to NDS or,
You are now returned to the Netware access mode window.
12. Select option 1, Previous, to return to the Novell parameters menu.
13. Select option 5, Netware NDS context, (Chech the context in which PSERVER is defined).
Enter the desired print server context name and press Enter.
You are now returned to the Novell parameters window.
14. Leave the Queue polling interval and Reconnection retry interval parameters unchanged at 30 seconds and
120 seconds, respectively.
15. Select option 8, Netware servers names, to define the Netware server names.
(Advisable, when more then one Netware servers)
First enter the Novell server number (1 for the first one; 2 for the second, etc.) and then enter its name.
Only the first server will be served, the others are used for backup in case the first one is down.
Your Novell parameters have now been defined and you are returned to the Novell parameters window.
16. Select option 9, show all to check the settings.
17. Select option 0, to go to the top menu.
18. Enter <Y> when the system asks you if you want to restart the system.
After the reboot, the controller is configured.

04.06.2002 64
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

04.06.2002 65
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

NGC SMB set up

To use SMB:
l SMB must be enabled in the NGC software (is standard enabled after installing with the CD-ROM)
l SMB must be configured in the software of the operating system.

SMB enabling

SMB configuring

04.06.2002 66
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

How to install a FTP server on a Windows NT 4.0 PC of the

customer
To install the FTP server on a Windows NT environment you have to do the following steps

Activate the properties of the Network Neighbourhood.

Select the services tab.

Check if Microsoft Peer web server is loaded.
If this service is not loaded, press the add button.

Select the Microsoft Peer web server, and click OK

04.06.2002 67
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

The Microsoft Peer Web Services Setup is started and activate the OK button.

Activate only the Internet Service Manager and the FTP Service and activate the OK button.

04.06.2002 68
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Press OK

Press Yes

04.06.2002 69
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

The Microsoft Peer Web Services is installed. Press OK.

Press close

04.06.2002 70
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

04.06.2002 71
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

How to configure a FTP server on Windows NT 4.0 of the

customer

The following steps describe how to set up the FTP services.

Activate the Internet Service Manager.

Double click on the local host name (eg. 7706)

Cancel Anonymous logon when other users must logon.

Only registered NT users are allowed to logon.
Note: This often implies that you have to add a user and his password in the User Manager under the
Administrative Tools.

04.06.2002 72
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Select the Directories tab, and delete the default directory (c:\inetpub\ftproot) .

Set the home directory by pressing the Add button.

04.06.2002 73
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Browse to the FTP home directory and press OK.

Make sure, the read and write button are activated.

04.06.2002 74
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

You selected now the FTP home directory.

To setup the other directories press the Add button.

Select the virtual Directory, and browse to this directory. Press OK.

04.06.2002 75
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

It is possible, to give this directory a virtual name. Make sure, that this directory has read and write access.

Press the OK button and the configuration of the Microsoft FTP service is complete.

04.06.2002 76
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

---- SMB: Plot Director

Print applications:
Plot Director
For generic part, see: Plot Director on workstation.

Last action of the generic part was: selecting output port.

Continue now with:
1. Select LPT1 (e.g.) and click on the OK button.

[48] Selecting the desired output port

2. The application is now installed.

You will be asked to install the driver.
Select Yes.

If you cancell it, you have to do so later, via: <Start - Settings - Printers>, select the created printer with the
righthand mouse click, choose properties.

3. The properties window appears.

Select the tab details.

[55] Specifying the required properties

04.06.2002 77
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

4. Click on the Add Port Port button.

5. Select Network and browse on the network to the correct computer name, then the printer name.
6. Select OK. The information appears in the "Add Port" window.
7. Select OK.
8. This information appears bin the properties window.
9. Select OK.

PlotDirector is ready for use with SMB.

Test the installation by making a print.

04.06.2002 78
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

---- SMB: Raster and PS printer drivers

The following items are available to use with SMB printing:

Printer drivers:
Raster and PS drivers:

04.06.2002 79
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Printing via NOVELL 4.x

To print with Novell:

1. A Novell server must be installed with:

l A file server name
l A Novell queue name
l A print server name

2. NGC controller must be set up for Novell, see NGC Novell Pserver set-up

3. The printer drivers on the workstation must print to a port who is directed to the Novell queue.

04.06.2002 80
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

-- Novell 4.x set up on a Windows for Workgroups 3.11

workstation
Once the Oc· 9600 has been configured for printing via Novell PSERVER, you can make the Oc· 9600 available
on your Windows for Workgroups 3.11workstation. This involves the following steps.

Enabling the Oc· 9600 on your Windows for Workgroups 3.11 workstation

1. Log on to your workstation.

2. Double-click on the ‘Main’ icon from the Program Manager.
3. Double-click on the ‘Control Panel’ icon.
The ‘Control Panel’ window appears.
4. Double-click on the ‘Printer’ icon.
The list of currently installed printers with the port they are connected to is displayed.
5. Click on the ‘Connect’ button.
The list of available ports appears in the ‘Connect’ window.
6. Click on the ‘Network’ button.
The ‘Connect a Network Printer’ window appears.
7. Select the port you want to use (preferably LPT2 or LPT3; LPT1 is usually reserved for a direct connection
to the printer via Centronics).
8. Browse the network to find the desired Novell server.
The print queues appear at the bottom of the window.
9. Double-click on the desired queue (the network path appears at the top of the window). You are returned to
the ‘Connect’ window.
10. Select the ‘Reconnect on Startup’ checkbox, so that the network connection is automatically re-established
on startup and click on ‘OK’ when you are done.

Your Oc· 9600 printer is now ready for printing.

04.06.2002 81
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

-- Novell 4.x set up on a Windows 95 / NT workstation

Once the Oc· 9600 NGC controller has been configured for printing via Novell 4.x , you can make the Oc· 9600
available on your Windows 95/NT workstation.
This involves the following steps.

Enable Novell service on the workstation:

Novell set up on workstation is enabled, if installed is:
Win'95: Client for NetWare Networks and the IPX/SPX-compatible protocol.
WinNT: Client Service for NetWare and the NWlink IPX/SPX compatible Transport protocol.

Installation of a print application or a printer driver

where the output port is directed to the Novell server.
To use Novell printing, you have to install and configure the print
applications and / or printer drivers:
Installation, see "Generic installation print applications and printer drivers on workstation".
Configuring, see "Print applications and printer drivers with Novell".

04.06.2002 82
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

---- Novell 4.x: Oc· ADI driver for Autocad 14

Print applications:

Oc· ADI driver for Autocad 14

04.06.2002 83
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

---- Novell 4.x: Plot Director

Print applications:
Plot Director

04.06.2002 84
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

---- Novell 4.x: Raster and PS printer drivers

Installation Raster or PS printer driver

Printer drivers:
Installation raster or PS printer driver for Novell 4.x

1. Insert the driver CD-ROM (or floppy) in the player of the workstation.
2. Click on the Start button / Settings / Printers
3. Click on the Add Printer icon and click on the Next button.

[4.56] Starting the printer installation

4. Select the Network printer option and click on the Next button.

[4.57] Selecting the Network option

5. Click on the Browse button.

04.06.2002 85
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

[4.58] Specifying the network path or queue name

6. The network window appears.

Browse on the network and select the Novell queue which is desined for the Oc· 9600.

[4.59] Browsing for the desired queue.

7. The Add Printer Wizard appears.

Click on the Have Disk button.

04.06.2002 86
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

[4.60] Selecting the printer driver CD-ROM or floppy.

8. The Open window appears.

Browse for the correct printer driver.
Windows '95: win95.inf
WINNT4.0: nt4.inf
In our example: WINNT, PS driver, English on a CD-ROM.

[4.68] Selectingt the .inf file

9. Click on the OK button.

10. The Install From Disk window appears.

[4.69] Driverfile source selection

11. Click on the OK button twice.

12. The Add Printer Wizard appears.

04.06.2002 87
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Select the wanted driver from the list and click on the Next button.

[4.70] Selecting the desired printer

13. Type a logical name, specify if this printer will be used as the default printer and click on the Next button.

[4.71] Specifying a printer name

14. Select the Yes radio button to print a test page and click on the Finish button.

04.06.2002 88
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

[4.72] Print a test page

15. The installation of a printer driver, working with Novell, is finished.

You can use this driver with the Windows applications.

04.06.2002 89
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Printing via NetBeui (Peer to peer)

Printing via Netbeui is a peer to peer situation via the Microsoft NetBeui protocol.
Only WIN'95, '98 and NT support this protocol.
This must be enabled in the workstation and in the NGC controller.

A maximum of 10 connections can be made.

To use SMB printing, a printer driver must be installed, see SMB printing setup.

04.06.2002 90
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

-- SMB printing set up on a Windows for Workgroups 3.11

workstation
Once the Oc· 9600 has been configured for printing via SMB, you can make the Oc· 9600 available on your Windows for Workgroup
This involves the following steps.

Enabling the Oc· 9600 on your Windows for Workgroups 3.11 workstation

1. Log on to your workstation.

2. Double-click on the ‘Main’ icon from the Program Manager.
3. Double-click on the ‘Control Panel’ icon.
The ‘Control Panel’ window appears.
4. Double-click on the ‘Printer’ icon.
The list of currently installed printers with the port they are connected to is displayed.
5. Click on the ‘Connect’ button.
The list of available ports appears in the ‘Connect’ window.
6. Click on the ‘Network’ button.
The ‘Connect a Network Printer’ window appears.
7. Select the port you want to use (preferably LPT2 or LPT3; LPT1 is usually reserved for a direct connection
to the printer via Centronics).
8. Browse the network to find the desired printer.
The print queues appear at the bottom of the window.
9. Double-click on the desired queue (the network path appears at the top of the window). You are returned to
the ‘Connect’ window.
10. Select the ‘Reconnect on Startup’ checkbox, so that the network connection is automatically re-established
on startup and click on ‘OK’ when you are done.
Your Oc· 9600 printer is now ready for printing.

04.06.2002 91
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

-- SMB printing set up on a Windows 95 / NT workstation

Once the Oc· 9600 has been configured for printing via SMB (see NGC SMB set up), you can make the Oc·
9600 available on your Windows 95/NT workstation.

Enable SMB service on the workstation:

Printing:

04.06.2002 92
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

---- SMB: Oc· ADI driver for Autocad 14

Print applications:

Oc· ADI driver for Autocad 14

For generic part, see: ADI driver R14 on workstation.

Last action of the generic part was: asking to specify port:

Continue now with:

[7_7] Select the desired connection port.

Select <N> of network port.

The network window appears.

[7_8a] Select the desired printer driver

1. Select the desired printer driver by browsing for example to the NGC controller, Oc·9600.

The Preference window appears.

04.06.2002 93
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

[7_9] Selecting the default printer

2. Select under the tab 'Printer' the configured printer and click on the Set Current button.

Autocad returns to the standard screen.

04.06.2002 94
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

[7_10] Entering oceconfig command

3. Enter oceconfig at the Autocad prompt to set up the printer.

04.06.2002 95
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

[7_11] Configuration Oc· settings

In the Oc· configuration manager, you can configure the printer remotely.
Note: All settings remain active until you change them.

4. Setup is now completed.

04.06.2002 96
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Installation Disk NGC 2.1

Installation Disk NGC 2.1 (Installation boot disk)

With every system delivered, an "Installation Disk" is provided by M&L. This disk is used to install the
NGC software automatically taking into account the hardware and software options. Some examples
of hardware options are, kind of monitor, keyboard layout and Tokenring board. An example of
software option is postscript. Every installation disk is therefore unique.

1 - Create the environment in which you can create a base Installation Disk

Note: This action has to be done on your service laptop

1. On the NGC CD, go to the directory Flop_tools \ Runtime

2. Run Setup.exe
3. Choose standard / typical settings
4. Reboot the system

2 - Create a base Installation Disk

Note: This action has to be done on your service laptop

1. Insert an empty floppy disk

2. On the NGC CD, go to the directory Flop_tools \ floppy_image
3. Run REF_2_1_MERGED.exe

3- Configure an Installation Disk

Note: This action has to be done on your service laptop

1. If not inserted, insert a base installation disk

2. Start / Programs / Oce Configuration Floppy Tools / Configuration Floppy Tools Selector
3. Choose the type of NGC involved
4. Choose "New floppy"
5. Tab Hardware Options: choose the options involved and enable them
6. Tab OS parameters: ProductID = Microsoft License number (xxxxx-OEM-xxxxxxx-xxxxx)
7. Tab Miscellaneous: SAP number can be left empty
8. Choose "Create floppy"
9. Label the floppy: "Installation Disk NGC 2.1"
"7070842"
"Engine serial number 9601xxxxx"

04.06.2002 97
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Installation Disk Power Logic Controller V3.0

Installation Disk Power Logic Controller V3.0 (Installation boot disk)

With every system delivered by M&L, an installation disk and an installation CD is provided in order to
install the Power Logic controller unattended.
All hard- and software options are activated via this installation floppy during the installation process.
Hardware options like, "kind of monitor", "keyboard layout" and "Tokenring board" are enabled when
you configure the installation disk.
Software options like "postscript" or "Advance Queuemanager" are automatically installed if the
password file is included on the installation disk.
Every installation disk is therefore unique per system.

1 - Create the environment in which you can create a base Installation Disk

Note: This action has to be done on your service laptop

1. On the Power Logic Controller CD V3.0, go to the directory Flop_tools_3.1 \ Runtime

2. Extract OceCFT.zip to c:\temp\floppy (when prompted, use service password)
3. Run c:\temp\floppy\setup.exe
4. Choose typical settings

2 - Create a base Installation Disk

Note: This action has to be done on your service laptop

1. Insert an empty floppy disk

2. Browse on the Power Logic Controller CD to the directory Flop_tools_3.1 \ floppy_image_3.1
3. Run REF_3_1.exe

3- Configure an Installation Disk

Note: This action has to be done on your service laptop

1. If not inserted, insert a base installation disk

2. Start / Programs / Oce CFT 2.3 / Oce CFT2.3
3. Choose "New floppy"
4. Tab Hardware Options: choose the options involved and enable them
5. Tab OS parameters: ProductID = Microsoft License number (xxxxx-OEM-xxxxxxx-xxxxx)
6. Tab Miscellaneous: SAP number can be left empty
7. Choose "Create floppy"
8. If you have the password floppy at hand, copy the Password.oce file to the new installation disk (a:\)

If you need a sample password file to edit manually, detach the following file Password.oce to the new
installation disk (a:\)
In this last case, you need to edit the Password.oce file on the floppy
(the passwords in this file are not valid!):
- Put a hash (#) in front of the password lines that you do not need
- Remove the hash (#) from the password lines that you need to activate
- Edit the passwords and the serialnumbers to correspond to your engine

9. Label the floppy: "Installation Disk Oc· 9600 / TDS 600 V3.0"
"Engine serial number 9601xxxxx"

04.06.2002 98
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Installation Disk Power Logic Controller V3.0.1

Installation Disk Power Logic Controller V3.0.1 (Installation boot disk)

With every system delivered by M&L, an installation disk and an installation CD is provided in order to
install the Power Logic controller unattended.
All hard- and software options are activated via this installation floppy during the installation process.
Hardware options like, "kind of monitor", "keyboard layout" and "Tokenring board" are enabled when
you configure the installation disk.
Software options like "postscript" or "Advance Queuemanager" are automatically installed if the
password file is included on the installation disk.
Every installation disk is therefore unique per system.

1 - Create the environment in which you can create a base Installation Disk

Note: This action has to be done on your service laptop

1. On the Power Logic Controller CD V3.0.1, go to the directory Flop_tools_4.2 \ Runtime

2. Extract OceCFT31.zip to c:\temp\floppy (when prompted, use service password)
3. Run c:\temp\floppy\setup.exe
4. Choose typical settings

2 - Create a base Installation Disk

Note: This action has to be done on your service laptop

1. Insert an empty floppy disk

2. Browse on the Power Logic Controller CD to the directory Flop_tools_4.2 \ floppy_image_4.2
3. Run REF_4_2.exe

3- Configure an Installation Disk

Note: This action has to be done on your service laptop

1. If not inserted, insert a base installation disk

2. Start / Programs / Oce CFT 3.1 / Oce CFT3.1
3. Choose "New floppy"
4. Tab Hardware Options: choose the options involved and enable them
5. Tab OS parameters: ProductID = Microsoft License number (xxxxx-OEM-xxxxxxx-xxxxx)
6. Tab Miscellaneous: SAP number can be left empty
7. Choose "Create floppy"
8. If you have the password floppy at hand, copy the Password.oce file to the new installation disk (a:\)

If you need a sample password file to edit manually, detach the following file Password.oce to the new
installation disk (a:\)
In this last case, you need to edit the Password.oce file on the floppy
(the passwords in this file are not valid!):
- Put a hash (#) in front of the password lines that you do not need
- Remove the hash (#) from the password lines that you need to activate
- Edit the passwords and the serialnumbers to correspond to your engine

9. Label the floppy: "Installation Disk Oc· 9600 / TDS 600 V3.0.1"
"Engine serial number 9601xxxxx"

04.06.2002 99
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Install Oce Power Logic Controller V3.0

Hardware installation of the Oce Power Logic Controller

If the controller comes as a spare part, no software is installed.

If necessary, you can make a new boot floppy with the correct hardware- and software-optionals

Install controller software Version 3.0

04.06.2002 100
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Install the NGC Controller. (R1)

Controller installation

1. Check controller HW optional boards

Unpack and set-up the Controller hardware

1. Unpack the controller, monitor and keyboard.

2. The controller is configured conform the customers order. Check
that the correct optional boards are installed.
3. Locate the following items:
- INSTALLATION CD
- INSTALLATION DISK NGC 1.0 (This disk is custom made
for every system to be installed)
- DIAGNOSTIC DISK
4. Locate and attach the following cables:
- Monitor to NGC Controller
- Keyboard to NGC Controller
- Mouse to NGC Controller.
5. Before starting the installation all network parameters for the NGC
should be known to the Oce engineer. (Site analysis form)

1. Software CD en Floppy

Install the software

Notes:
- Make sure that the controller is not connected to the network.
- The software (Operating system and Oc· application) will be
installed (almost) automatically. The software installation takes
approximately 30 minutes. During software installation you may
start the installation of the engine, folder or scanner.

1. Switch the NGC Controller ON.

2. Insert the Installation CD in the CDROM player
3. Insert the Installation floppy in the floppy disk drive.
4. Press the RESET button.
A screen appears.
5. Type SET-UP at the prompt and then press ENTER key. The
acknowledge message appears:

6. Press any key to start the installation

7. From this point on, the installation is unattended for approximately
8 minutes. You can use this time to unpack the printer, folder and

04.06.2002 101
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

/ or scanner.
8. The message "Please remove floppy disk and reboot" appears.
9. Remove the floppy disk and press the reset button.
10. From this point on, the installation is unattended for approximately
23 minutes. You can use this time to unpack the printer, folder
and / or scanner.
Note: In case a Tokenring board is installed a window " Microsoft
TCP/IP properties" will pop-up after 16 minutes. Perform the
following actions;
- Select the "IBM Token-Ring PCI Family Adapter"
- Fill in the TCP Address section, the value "1.1.1.1"
- Fill in the Subnet Mask section, the value "255.255.255.0"
- Select OK (The installation will continue)
11. The installation is unattended until the NGC windows, SCP, QM
are popped up.

2. Network configuration

Adapt the network configuration to the specification. (Site analysis

form).
This is to be done in SAS-mode

3. Time & date

Check the time & date on the controller. If it is in-correct, login as

service (log in as different user, while holding down the "shift key"),
and change the Date / Time setting.
Note: The SCP and QM have to be closed before adapting the
time.
Shut down the controller with the tools on the desktop .

4. Service tools floppy

Install this utility as described in chapter "

5. Plot director for service

Install this utility as described in chapter "Install Plot Director (For

service only)"

6. Remote assistance (see accessories Remote Assistance)

Install this functionality if specified on the "Site analysis form" as

specified in chapter "Remote Assistance set-up"

04.06.2002 102
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Install the NGC Controller. (R2)

Hardware installation of the NGC controller

Step 2: Installing the Controller software NGC R2

Notes:
- Make sure that the controller is not connected to the network.
- The software (Operating system and Oc· application) will be installed
automatically. The software installation takes approximately 30 minutes.

l Switch the NGC Controller ON.

l Insert the Installation CD, NGC R2, in the CDROM player
l Insert the Installation floppy, NGC R2, in the floppy disk drive.
Note: Make sure that the Installation floppy is not write-protected.
Further do not remove the floppy during the installation sequence.
l Press the RESET button.
l An install screen appears.
l Type SETUP at the prompt and then press ENTER key. The
acknowledge message appears:

l Press any key to start the installation

l From this point on, the installation is unattended for approximately
30 minutes. You can use this time to unpack the other devices.
Note: Disregard any error messages displayed during the
installation. These are normal. Only interact on error messages if
they are displayed for at least 5 minutes.
l The installation is unattended until a Controller Installation window
pops-up with the message "Remove the floppy disk and CDROM.
Then press OK"
l Remove the floppy disk and CDROM
l Press OK
l The controller will reboot and start-up again as "anonymous" user.
l The installation is completed as all applications, SE, SCP and QM
are completely started up.
Note: Do not interrupt the installation during this last action.
Adaptations on installed files are being made until the last
moment.

04.06.2002 103
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Install the NGC Controller. (R2.1)

Hardware installation of the NGC controller

If the controller comes as a spare part, no software is installed.

If the new controller hardware is of the same type as the one replaced, you can use the old boot floppy and
go to step 2.
If the new controller hardware is of another type, you must make a new boot floppy with the correct
hardware
identified (G1 / GX100, correct SCSI controller, etc.)

Step 2: Installing the Controller software NGC R2.1

Note:
Only do this with a controller to install new software; not necessary
at a new installation when R2.1 software is preinstalled by
production (M&L).
If you receive a R1.0 configuration or a R2.0 configuration from
stock, you can follow the procedure described bellow. You must
upgrade the installation floppy first.

Upgrade installation floppy from R1.0 or R2.0 to R2.1

l Duplicate the floppy on your laptop. (safety procedure)
l leave the diskette in your Laptop
l Put the R2.1 NGC CD in your laptop
l Execute d:\flop_upgrd\floppy_upgrade.bat
l Label the diskette "installation floppy, NGC R2.1
l The boot diskette is upgraded.

Notes:
- Make sure that the controller is not connected to the network.
- The software (Operating system and Oc· application) will be installed
automatically. The software installation takes approximately 30 minutes.

l Switch the NGC Controller ON.

l Insert the Installation CD, NGC R2.1, in the CDROM player
l Insert the Installation floppy, NGC R2.1, in the floppy disk drive.
Note: Make sure that the Installation floppy is not write-protected.
Further do not remove the floppy during the installation sequence.
l Press the RESET button.
l An install screen appears.
l Type SETUP at the prompt and then press ENTER key. The
acknowledge message appears:

04.06.2002 104
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

l Press any key to start the installation

l From this point on, the installation is unattended for approximately
30 minutes. You can use this time to unpack the other devices.
Note: Disregard any error messages displayed during the
installation. These are normal. Only interact on error messages if
they are displayed for at least 5 minutes.
l The installation is unattended until a Controller Installation window
pops-up with the message "Remove the floppy disk and CDROM.
Then press OK"
l Remove the floppy disk and CDROM
l Press OK
l The controller will reboot and start-up again as "anonymous" user.
l The installation is completed as all applications, SE, SCP and QM
are completely started up.
Note: Do not interrupt the installation during this last action.
Adaptations on installed files are being made until the last
moment.

04.06.2002 105
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Upgrading NGC Controller R2 to R2.0.1

A special tool is available to convert a R2 system to R2.0.1.
The tool is available as a file, R2toR2.0.1_upgr.exe, attached to this
document.
The tool will replace the file C:\OCE\NGC\BIN\ih_lpd.exe by an updated
version.
The old file, ih_lpd.exe, will be renamed to ih_lpd.exe_2.0.0 and placed in
the C:\SERVICE directory of the NGC.

The procedure, to be executed on your service laptop, is the following:

Note: Once created you can use the disk for every Oc· 9600 NGC R2 to
R2.0.1 upgrade

l Run the R2toR2.0.1_upgr.exe file.

l It will install the files on a floppy disk

R2toR2.0.1_upgr.exe
l Label the disk NGC R2 to R2.0.1

The procedure, to be executed on the NGC R2.0 Controller, is the

following:

l Switch on the Oc· 9600 controller

l Logon as Service user and wait untill the applications have
completely started up
l Activate the NGC_down.bat icon on the desktop. If prompted, press
any key, do so.
Note: An internal error window can pop-up. Select Yes to continue.
l Insert the floppy into the NGC
l Run the file A:\UPDATE.BAT
l A DOS-box will open, proceed as prompted
Note: Copying of the files takes up to 30 seconds.
l Remove the floppy
l Reboot the controller

04.06.2002 106
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Install Oce Power Logic Controller V3.0.1

Hardware installation of the Oce Power Logic Controller

If the controller comes as a spare part, no software is installed.

If necessary, you can make a new boot floppy with the correct hardware- and software-optionals

Install controller software Version 3.0.1

04.06.2002 107
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Install the Repro Desk Controller (RD 4.25).

Note:
The primary HD partition often is pre-installed on 500MB.
As this Repro Desk controller version needs at least a primary partition of 2GB, the
harddisk has to be re-partitioned completely.
See point: Install Windows Repro Desk controllerNT and Repro Desk controller harddisk
partitioning.
Before installation one has to make sure that Modification 16 and 17 of the EPS Oc· 9600 are
incorporated.
Also Information bulletin 1016 has to be checked.

Compatibility

Hardware controller installation

Install Windows Repro Desk controllerNT and Repro Desk controller harddisk partitioning.

Install Oc· 9600 Repro Desk V4.25

Fine-tuning Oc· 9600 Repro Desk 4.25 server

Network configuration

Configure the users

Time & date

Remote assistance (see accessories Remote Assistance)

Restat the complete configuration.

04.06.2002 108
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Install the Repro Desk Controller (RD4.21).

Hardware controller installation

1. Unpack the controller, monitor and keyboard.

2. The controller is configured conform the customers order.
Check that the correct optional boards are installed. The SPICE board must be in slot 2.
3. Locate the following items:
- Windows NT 4.0 INSTALLATION CD
- INSTALLATION DISK RD4.21 (This disk is custom made for every system to be installed)
- Oc· 9600 REPRO DESK 4.21 CD
- DIAGNOSTIC DISKS (Batch Files RD 4.21 Beta and Ghost 5.0) Beta only
4. Locate and attach the following cables:
- Monitor to RD Controller
- Keyboard to RD Controller
- Mouse to RD Controller.
5. Before starting the installation all network parameters for the RD Controller should be known to
the Oce engineer. (Site analysis form)

Install Windows NT and RD software.

Notes:
- Make sure that the controller is not connected to the network.
- The software (Operating system and Oc· application) will be installed (almost) automatically.
The software installation takes approximately 30 minutes.
During software installation you may start the installation of the engine, folder (or scanner).

1. Switch ON the RD Controller.

2. Insert the Installation CD in the CD-ROM player
3. Insert the Installation floppy in the floppy disk drive.
4. Press the RESET button.
A install screen appears.
5. Type FDISK.
6. Choose NO for large disk support.
7. Choose Type Display partition information.
8. Check that the disk is partitioned in a FAT and NTFS partition.
If this is the case use [ setup ].
Otherwise use [ setup2 ].
9. Leave FDISK (twice Escape button).
10. Type [ setup ] or [ setup2 ] at the prompt and then press ENTER key.
The acknowledge message appears:

11. Press any key to start the installation

12. From this point on, the installation is unattended for approximately 8 minutes. You can use this
time to unpack the printer and folder.
13. The message "Please remove floppy disk and reboot" appears.
14. Remove the floppy disk and press the reset button.
15. From this point on, the installation is unattended for approximately 23 minutes. You can use this

04.06.2002 109
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

time to unpack the printer and folder.

Note: In case a Tokenring board is installed a window " Microsoft TCP/IP properties" will pop-up
after 16 minutes. Perform the following actions;
- Select the "IBM Token-Ring PCI Family Adapter"
- Fill in the TCP Address section, the value "1.1.1.1"
- Fill in the Subnet Mask section, the value "255.255.255.0"
- Select OK (The installation will continue)
16. The installation is unattended until NT is started clean and no further action occur.
17. Remove the CD.

Fine tuning Windows and RD

1. Login as different user "service" (Hold down the shift key while doing this), and enter the
password.
2. Run the batch file C:\SERVICE\SETUP (This batch file adapts the MIE settings to run SDS
correctly).
3. Go to Disk Administrator. Click OK and check that your free drive space is partitioned and
formatted as NTFS.
If not, adapt this within the disk-administrator (create a second primary partition). See document

4. Close Disk Administrator.

5. Copy the Explorer.exe file from C:\Winnt40 directory to C:\Winnt\Profiles\All Users\Desktop

Installing RD4.21 9600 server

1. Insert the Repro Desk 4.21 Installation CD in the CD-ROM player.

2. Install the 9600 server software (Everything as default. For more information see the documentation on the
Repro Desk 4.21CD).
3. Run setup.exe from Repro Desk 4.21.
4. Fill in the CD key number.
5. In screen Master install select exit.

Installing service packs (Beta version only)

Install the necessary service pack from Oc· 9600 Repro Desk 4.21 CD (ReproDsk4.21\!patch).

Installing ACROReader

Install the ACROReader from Oc· 9600 Repro Desk 4.21 CD (ReproDsk4.21\acroread\32\disk1\setup) .

Fine-tuning Oc· 9600 Repro Desk 4.21 server

1. Login as service.
2. Open de explorer.
3. Copy the shortcuts 9600 PRINT MANAGER and REPRO DESK from
C:\WINNT40\PROFILES\Service\START MENU\PROGRAMS\REPRO DESK to
C:\WINNT40\PROFILES\ALL USERS\START MENU\PROGRAMS\STARTUP and to
C:\WINNT40\PROFILES\ALL USERS\DESKTOP
4. Start the Print Manager (This takes about 40 seconds).
5. Open Printer\Service\System Configuration.
Note: (Do not go into Printer\Service\SDS testing)
6. Enter the service password.
7. Adapt the settings to your needs. The next screen-dumps are showing the settings made for the B-test.

04.06.2002 110
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

04.06.2002 111
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

1. Open Printer\Key operator\Printerconfiguration.

2. Enter Key Operator password.
3. Adapt the settings to your needs. The next screen-dumps are showing the settings made for the B-test.

04.06.2002 112
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

1. Click OK.
2. Start Repro Desk.
3. Open HELP\SECURITY.
4. Insert the print code.
5. Close Repro Desk.

Network configuration

04.06.2002 113
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Adapt the network configuration to the specification. (Site analysis form).

This is to done via the network settings menu in WindowsNT.

Time & date

Check the time & date on the controller. If it is in-correct, login as service (log in as different user,
while holding down the "shift key"), and change the Date / Time setting.

Service tools floppy RD4.21 (Beta only)

Run install.bat from A:

Install this utility as described in chapter "Setting up additional Oc· 9600 Repro Desk tools and
utilities with this TSM".

Remote assistance (see accessories Remote Assistance)

Install this functionality if specified on the "Site analysis form" as specified in "Remote assistance
set-up"

04.06.2002 114
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Install the Repro Desk Controller (RD4.30) (only for Oc· 9600).
Note:
The primary HD partition often is pre-installed on 500MB.
As this Repro Desk controller version needs at least a primary partition of 2GB, the
harddisk has to be re-partitioned completely.
See point: Install Windows Repro Desk controllerNT and Repro Desk controller harddisk
partitioning.
Before installation one has to make sure that Modification 16 and 17 of the EPS Oc· 9600 are
incorporated.
Also Information bulletin 1016 has to be checked.

Compatibility

Hardware controller installation

Install Windows Repro Desk controllerNT and Repro Desk controller harddisk partitioning.

Install Oc· 9600 Repro Desk V4.30

Fine-tuning Oc· 9600 Repro Desk 4.30 server

Network configuration

Configure the users

Time & date

Remote assistance (see accessories Remote Assistance)

Restat the complete configuration.

04.06.2002 115
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

RD controller: Create a second primary NTFS partition

To create a second primary partition:

1. Activate the disk administrator.
2. Select an area of free space on a disk.
3. On the Partion menu, click Create.
4. If the space you selected is not the primary partition created on
the disk , click Yes when a massage appears prompting you to
confirm the creation of another primary partition because the
partition could not be recognised by MS-DOS.

5. Disk Administrator displays what the minimum and maximum

sizes for the primary partition can be.
6. In Create partition of size window, click on OK to accept the
maximun size.
Please keep whole partition size.

The new unformatted primary partition is assigned a drive letter.

To format a partition and label the volume

1. On the Partition menu, click Commit Changes Now and then click
Yes to save the changes.
2. Click OK when Disk Administrator informs you that the disks were
updated successfully and advises you to create a new Emergency
Repair Disk.
3. Select the newly created partition.
4. On the Tools menu, click Format.
5. In the Format dialogue box, in file system:
Select NTFS
Select Quick format
Other settings see drawing

04.06.2002 116
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

6. Click Start to initiate the format request.

7. A message warns you that all data on the disk will be erased.
Click OK.
8. Click OK when the Format Complete message appears. Click
Close to return to the Disk Administrator window.

Note:

Be careful when making drive-letter assignments because many

MS-DOS and Windows programs make references to a specific drive
letter.
For example, the Path environment variable shows specific drive
letters in conjunction with program names.
An error message could appear when you are attempting to assign a
letter to a CD-ROM drive, possibly because it is in use by some
application in the system.
You must then close the application accessing the CD-ROM drive and
click the command again.
WindowsNT allows the static assignment of drive letters on volumes,
partitions, and CD-ROM drives.
This means that a drive letter can be permanently assigned to a
specific hard disk, partition or volume, and CD-ROM drive.
When a new hard disk is added to an existing computer system, it will
not affect statically assigned drive letters.

Drive letters should be assigned as follows:

1. Drive Letter Sequence: C-Fat; D-NTFS; E-CD-Rom.

2. Select the CD-Rom 0 drive whose drive letter you want to assign
3. On the Tools menu, click Assign Drive Letter.
4. In the Assign Drive Letter dialogue box, click Do not Assign drive
letter
5. Click OK.
6. Confirm windows: yes.
7. Select the NTFS partition whose drive letter you want to assign
8. In the Assign Drive Letter dialogue box, click Assign drive letter
and select the appropriate letter (D)
9. Click OK.

04.06.2002 117
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

10. Confirm windows: yes.

11. Select the CD-Rom 0 drive whose drive letter you want to assign
12. In the Assign Drive Letter dialogue box, click Assign drive letter
and select the appropriate letter (E)
13. Click OK.
14. Confirm windows: yes.
15. Close the Disk Administrator.

04.06.2002 118
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Repro Desk controller: General information partioning of the

harddisk with Disk Administrator
Regular shipped Repro Desk Dell controllers includes 10,2 GB HDD.
Introduction of this disk size, give us the possibility to take care over backup and recovery for Repro
environment.

Procedure Starting and Quitting Disk Administrator

Descriptions of the various situations and how to make the partions:

1. The Dell Repro Desk Controller has only 1 primary partion.

2. The Dell Repro Desk Controller has only 2 primary partion.
3. The Dell Repro Desk Controller has 3 primary partion.

04.06.2002 119
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Repro Desk controller: The Dell Repro Desk Controller has only
1 primary partition.

Procedure How to create new 2nd primary NTFS partition

Procedure How to format the 2nd Disk

Procedure How to create a new 3rd primary FAT 16 partition (Required space for 3rd partition is 1.2 GB.)

Procedure How to format the 3rd Disk

After the procedure is carry out you will get next partition construction on the HDD:

04.06.2002 120
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Repro Desk controller: The Dell Repro Desk controller has only 2
primary partitions

Note:
Because it's not enough disk space to create 3rd partition. First you must resize the 2nd partition.

Procedure How to resize not used 2nd primary FAT 16 or NTFS partition

Procedure How to create new 2nd primary NTFS partition

Procedure How to create a new 3rd primary FAT 16 partition (Required space for 3rd partition is 1.2 GB.)

Procedure How to format the 3rd Disk

04.06.2002 121
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Repro Desk controller: The Dell Repro Desk controller has 3

primary partitions.

Procedure How to change the File system on the 3rd primary partition.

1. Select the 3rd NTFS partition.

2. On the Tools menu, click Format.
3. In the Format dialog box, select a FAT file system, and then optionally specify the following:
To name the partition, type Image Drive.
To skip scanning for bad sectors in the partition during formatting, click Quick Format.
4. Click Start to initiate the format request.
A message warns you that all data on the disk will be erased. Click OK.
5. Click OK when the Format Complete message appears. Click Close to return to the Disk Administrator
window.

Note:
You can cancel the formatting at any time during the process.
However, clicking Cancel will not necessarily restore a volume to its previous state.
Before files and directories can be stored on the partitions that you have created, you must first commit the
changes to disk, and then individually format each partition with a file system.

04.06.2002 122
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Plot Director on NGC (only for service)

For test purpose, you can install Plot Director on the NGC
controller.
Plot Director is on the 'Host CD-Rom'.

1. Login as user "service"

2. Close the Que Manager and System Control Panel
3. Activate the "NGC down" icon on the desktop and shut down
the controller in the 9600 DOS window
4. Insert the medium that contains the Plot Director source files

5. Install Plot Director

1. Activate Setup.exe.
2. Follow the instructions on the screen.

6. Start "Admin Plot Director"

7. Select menu "Plotter", "Define"
8. On "Select a model" screen, select "9600", OK
9. Plotter description:
1. Plotter name: e.g. "9600NGC"
2. Number of rolls (check your actual engine configuration):
3. Number of trays (check your actual engine
configuration):
4. Unit: "mm"
5. Postscript: x (check it in case the postscript option is
available)
6. Folder: x (check it in case a folder is present)
7. OK
10. Select output port
1. under LPR port
1. activate add button
2. On "LPR parameters" screen
1. HostName: "127.0.0.1"
2. QueueName: "Service"
3. OK
3. On "Select Output port" screen
4. OK
Note: Lpd must be enabled on the NGC in order to
print via TCP/IP.
After the NGC installation this setting is default okay.

11. Reboot the NGC, login as user "service" and Plot Director is
ready for use.

Note:
Example files for plotting on NGC: c:\service\testfiles.

04.06.2002 123
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Installation Disk NGC 1.0

Installation Disk NGC 1.0

With every system delivered an "Installation Disk" is provided. This disk is used to install the NGC software
automatically taking into account the hardware and software options. Some examples of hardware options are,
kind of monitor, keyboard layout and Tokenring board. An example of software option is postscript. Every
installation disk is thereby unique.

Every disk is created in the following at M&L.

1 - Default Installation Disk

The starting point is a default installation disk without any actions

2 - Add hardware options

The next step is configure the customer dependent hardware options and the Windows NT license number is
generated. This is done via an Access program. The program creates several additional files on the floppy in
A:\Service.
The most interesting file regarding this item is the file a:\settings\hwd_opt.ini. In this file all hardware options are
listed. An example of the contents of this file is shown below.
[Hwd_Opt]
Token Ring card = 1
Oce Screen = 1

3 - Postscript option

If applicable the last step is the postscript option. This is done via a Lotus Notes program. The program creates
a file Password.oce in A:\

Creating a installation disk

In case of emergencies it is possible to create a disk in the following way.

1 Create default installation disk.

- Extract the Instalflop.exe file to a empty,1.4MB formatted floppy disk.

instalflop.exe
- Label the disk

Installation Disk NGC 1.0

7070197
Engine serial number 9601xxxxx

- Put windows 95 system files on the floppy using the Windows Explorer, select;
- Exploring
- 31/2 Floppy (A)
- Format
- Copy system files only
- After this a default installation disk is created.

2 Add hardware options

The hardware options can be configured by opening the Instalflop.mdb file with Microsoft Access.

Instalflop.mdb
The following settings have to be made;

04.06.2002 124
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

- On tab Device SN: Fill in the engine and controller serial number
- On tab Hardware Options: Mark the applicable options
- On tab OS Parameters: Fill in the Product ID (OEM number of WindowsNT) and the keyboard layout
- Insert the "default installation" disk and press "create floppy"
- After this the hardware option files are stored on the disk.

3 Postscript option

The postscript option can only be added by M&L.

If you have to reinstall a system you can reinstall the postscript option manually via the KOS menu. The
password is on the dump settings pages generated by the system before the reinstallation.
If the customer has bought the postscript option after the system installation you should have received the
Password.oce file on a separate diskette. Putting this file in the root of the installation disk installs the postscript
option automatically during the system installation.

04.06.2002 125
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Installation Disk NGC 2.0

Installation Disk NGC 2.0

With every system delivered an "Installation Disk" is provided. This disk is used to install the NGC software
automatically taking into account the hardware and software options. Some examples of hardware options are,
kind of monitor, keyboard layout and Tokenring board. An example of software option is postscript. Every
installation disk is thereby unique.

Every disk is created in the following at M&L.

1 - Default Installation Disk

The starting point is a default installation disk without any actions

2 - Add hardware options

The next step is configure the customer dependent hardware options and the Windows NT license number is
generated. This is done via an Access program. The program creates several additional files on the floppy in
A:\Service.
The most interesting file regarding this item is the file a:\settings\hwd_opt.ini. In this file all hardware options are
listed. An example of the contents of this file is shown below.
[Hwd_Opt]
Token Ring card = 1
Oce Screen = 1

3 - Postscript option

If applicable the last step is the postscript option. This is done via a Lotus Notes program. The program creates
a file Password.oce in A:\

Creating a installation disk

In case of emergencies it is possible to create a disk in the following way.

1 Create default installation disk.

l Run the Install_Flop_R2_V2.exe file.

l It will make the floppy disk bootable, and
l It will install the files on the floppy disk.

Install_Flop_R2_V2.ex
l Label the disk

Installation Disk NGC 2.0

7070790
Engine serial number 9601xxxxx

l After this a default installation disk is created.

2 Add hardware options

The hardware options can be configured by editing two files with Notepad on the created disk in step 1.
The following adaptations have to be made;

l Open the file A:\SETTINGS\Hwd_opt.ini. The following lines appears;

[Hwd_Opt]
Ethernet Combo card = 1
Token Ring card = 1
Centronics card = 1
Oce Screen = 1
Dell Screen 17+ = 1
Dell Screen 15 = 1

04.06.2002 126
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

l Remove the lines that are not applicable. For example if you have a Controller delivered with an
Ethernet Combo Card and a 17" Dell Screen the file should look like this;

[Hwd_Opt]
Ethernet Combo card = 1
Dell Screen 17+ = 1

l Save the file

l Open the file A:\SETTINGS\New.txt Look for the following lines, marked Red, within the file;

[Unattended]
KeyboardLayout = "Dutch"
KeyboardLayout = "German"
KeyboardLayout = "French"
KeyboardLayout = "English"
KeyboardLayout = "Swedish"
KeyboardLayout = "Danish"
KeyboardLayout = "Norwegian"
KeyboardLayout = "Italian"
KeyboardLayout = "US-International"
KeyboardLayout = "Spanish"
KeyboardLayout = "Portuguese"
KeyboardLayout = "Hungarian"
KeyboardLayout = "Czech"
OemPreinstall = yes
NoWaitAfterTextMode = 1
NoWaitAfterGUIMode = 1
l One of the lines is specifying the correct keyboard layout. Delete all other lines specifying the keyboard.
E.g. if you have an US-International keyboard this part of the file should look like this;

[Unattended]
KeyboardLayout = "US-International"
OemPreinstall = yes
NoWaitAfterTextMode = 1
NoWaitAfterGUIMode = 1
l One of the lines is specifying the OEM number of WindowsNT. Replace the X characters by the correct
number. The number is listed on the package containing the NGC Installation CD.
[UserData]
FullName = "Oce 9600"
OrgName = "Oce"
ComputerName = "Oce9600"
ProductId = "XXXXX-OEM-XXXXXXX-XXXXX"
[GuiUnattended]
OemSkipWelcome = 1

l Save the file

l Open the file A:\SETTINGS\Sds.ini Look for the following lines, marked Red, specifying the Printer and
Controller serial number;

[DeviceSN]
221010=9601XXXXX
221025=0315XXXXX

l Replace the X characters by the correct numbers

l At this point the hardware options are added.

3 Postscript option

The postscript option can only be added by M&L.

If you have to reinstall a system you can reinstall the postscript option manually via the KO menu within the
Settings Editor application.
The password is on the dump settings pages generated by the system before the reinstallation.

04.06.2002 127
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

If the customer has bought the postscript option after the system installation you should have received
the Password.oce file on a separate diskette.
Putting this file in the root of the installation disk installs the postscript option automatically during the system
installation.

04.06.2002 128
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

- Board locations
Mandatory locations:
Tokenring IBM 75H9802 PCI Combo Slot PCI #1
Adaptec SCSI board Slot PCI #2
Spice board Slot PCI #5

Remaining locations:
Ethernet 3Com any remaining PCI slot however PCI#3 is preferred

Example of PBAs layout:

Slot PCI #1 Tokenring *
Slot PCI #2 Adaptec *
Slot PCI #3 Ethernet *
Slot PCI #4 -
Slot PCI #5 Spice
Slot ISA #1 -
Slot ISA #2 -
Slot ISA #3 -
Slot ISA #4 -

* Mandatory

04.06.2002 129
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

- Spice PBA
Board Location
The Spice PBA must be installed in PCI slot #5.

Installation procedure
The board drivers are automatically installed during the installation of the NGC Controller.

04.06.2002 130
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

- Centronics PBA ( for Oc· 9600 V3.0 or Oc· TDS600).

Since the delivery of the version V3.0 for the Oc· 9600 systems, the Centronics PBA is available.
The Centronics option can be installed on both Oc· 9600 V3.0 or Oc· TDS600 systems.
Code number of the PBA: 5584.487 DPP Dual Parallel Port.

Warning: the Centronics option is not working on Oc· 9600 systems fitted with a version lower than
V3.0.

Before you start installing, make sure that you have a correct working system.

1. Install the Centronics interface board in the PCI slot #4 :

1. Turn off the controller.
2. Remove the power cable of the controller
3. Remove the controller cover.
4. Select the PCI slot #4.
5. Remove the slot's card-mounting bracket.
6. Insert the Centronics PBA in the slot #4 and secure it with the screw.
7. Close the computer cover and reconnect all previously connected cables
8. Connect the Centronics cable into the upper Centronics connector of the board
9. Switch on the controller

2. Configure the controller with Centronics PBA:

1. Enter SDS mode
2. Execute test 90.3 : "Set the Controller Configuration" :
Declare the presence of the Centronics PBA by setting the "Centronics board" field to: "present"
3. Enable the Centronics connection within the Settings Editor
Log in as System Administrator within the Settings Editor
Set "System" Settings / Connectivity / Centronics / Enable Centronics = Enabled
4. Click on "apply" button to validate the changes.
5. Reboot the controller.

Once the Centronics board is installed and declared, the drivers will be automatically installed and
started.

04.06.2002 131
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

- SCSI PBA
Board Location
The SCSI PBA must be installed in PCI slot #2.

Installation procedure
The drivers for the board are automatically installed during the installation of the NGC Controller.

04.06.2002 132
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

- SCSI PBA Adaptec AHA-29160N

Adaptec BIOS settings

· Enable Write Back Cache and Send Start Unit Command:

These settings should be set to YES for SCSI ID used by NGC e.g. 5 and 6.
Thus, the message “Device Not Ready” is avoided .

Installation procedure

1.1 NGC installation procedure

In case of a new controller installation, install the SCSI card at slot 2, with the internal
cable to connector J2 / J5, and install the latest NGC software
In case the Adaptec AHA-29160N is identified on the boot floppy, the driver is automatically
installed (R2.1 and higher).
In case the Adaptec AHA-29160N is not identified on the boot floppy, the driver has to be
installed manually, conform the followling procedure.
If the driver floppy is not with the system, you can generate it from the TSM

1.2 Adaptec U160 board driver installation procedure

· Restart NGC controller
· Press on Shift key until NT display the win-logon window message
· Login as service user
· Stop NGC within ngc_down.bat batch file (ignore possible error message)
· Start installation of Adaptec U160 driver as follows
· Open Start Menu->Settings->Control Panel->SCSI Adapters

· Select Drivers menu

04.06.2002 133
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

· If this board is a replacement for an older SCSI board, select current Adaptec driver
and
click on Remove button (Do not reboot the controller after this step)

· Click on Add button

· Select Adaptec Manufacturer then click on Have disk

04.06.2002 134
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

· Install files from floppy

· Select Adaptec U160 PCI SCSI for NT4.0

04.06.2002 135
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

· Click on OK button
· Restart Controller

04.06.2002 136
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

- SCSI PBA Adaptec AHA-2940U2W

Adaptec BIOS settings

· Send Start Unit Command: this setting should be set to YES for SCSI ID used by
NGC e.g. 5 and 6.
Thus, the message “Device Not Ready” is avoided.

Installation procedure

1.1 NGC installation procedure

In case of a new controller installation, install the SCSI card at slot 2, with the internal
cable to connector J2 / J5, and install the latest NGC software
In case the Adaptec AHA-2940U2W is identified on the boot floppy, the driver is automatically
installed (R2.1 and higher).
In case the Adaptec AHA-2940U2W is not identified on the boot floppy, the driver has to be
installed manually, conform the followling procedure.

1.2 Adaptec U2 board driver installation procedure

· Restart NGC controller
· Press on Shift key until NT display the win-logon window message
· Login as service user
· Stop NGC within ngc_down.bat batch file (ignore possible error message)
· Start installation of Adaptec U2 driver as follows
· Open Start Menu->Settings->Control Panel->SCSI Adapters

· Select Drivers menu

04.06.2002 137
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

· If this board is a replacement for an older SCSI board, select current Adaptec driver
and
click on Remove button (Do not reboot the controller after this step)

· Click on Add button

· Click on Have Disk button

04.06.2002 138
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

· Insert the floppy which contains the Adaptec U2 driver

· Click on OK button
· Select Adaptec AHA-294xU2 driver for NT as below

· Click on OK and enter driver location as below

04.06.2002 139
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

· Click on Continue button

· Reboot the controller by answering YES on NT restart menu dialog

04.06.2002 140
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

- Ethernet 3Com COMBO EtherLink XL PBA

Normally the Ethernet card installation is executed automatically during the installation of the NGC software.
In cases the Ethernet card has to be installed afterwards it must be installed in the following way

Board Location
The Ethernet PBA can be installed in any free PCI slot, however PCI slot #3 is preferred.

Hardware Installation
Installing the Ethernet network interface card:
1. Turn off the computer.
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Select PCI slot #3.
4. Remove the slot's card-mounting bracket.
5. Insert the adapter in the slot and secure with the screw.
6. Replace the computer cover and reconnect all previously connected cables.

Install driver for Ethernet PBA

1. Switch on the PC.
2. Login as service

04.06.2002 141
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

3. Open the Control Panel > Network

The installed Network adapters are shown
Note: Normally the onboard Ethernet adapter is shown.
Select Add

04.06.2002 142
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

4. Insert disk 2 of 2 of the 3Com driver floppies.

Note: The 3Com driver floppy can be made from the attached archive.

3com2.exe
Select Have Disk

04.06.2002 143
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

5. Select OK

04.06.2002 144
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

6. Select OK

04.06.2002 145
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

7. The driver for the network card is installed.

Select close

04.06.2002 146
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

8. Select close

04.06.2002 147
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

9. The Microsoft TCP/IP Properties window shows up

Setting up the protocol for TCP / IP

1. Adapt the network properties to your needs.
2. Reboot the controller.

Adapting the installation diskette

Update the installation diskette as described in Installation Disk NGC R2, chapter Create installation
diskette, step 2.
Note: This upgrade of the diskette is necessary to make sure that during a NGC upgrade in the future
the diskette is correctly configured, i.e. all boards are correctly installed.

04.06.2002 148
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

- Tokenring PBA IBM 75H9802 PCI Combo

Normally the Tokenring card installation is executed automatically during the installation of the NGC software.
In cases the Tokenring card has to be installed afterwards it must be installed in the following way.

Board Location
The Tokenring PBA must be installed in PCI slot #1.

Hardware Installation
Installing the Tokenring network interface card:
1. Turn off the computer.
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Select PCI slot #1.
4. Remove the slot's card-mounting bracket.
5. Insert the adapter in the slot and secure with the screw.
6. Replace the computer cover and reconnect all previously connected cables.

Install driver for Tokenring PBA

1. Switch on the PC.
2. Login as service

04.06.2002 149
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

3. Open the Control Panel > Network

The installed Network adapters are shown
Select Add

04.06.2002 150
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

4. Insert the NGC R2.0 CDROM

Select Have Disk

04.06.2002 151
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

5. Insert the correct path for the driver, d:\i386\$oem$\net\ibmtrp

04.06.2002 152
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

6. Select OK

04.06.2002 153
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

7. The driver for the network card is installed.

Note: If necessary the properties for the card can be changed (Normally not needed)
Select close

04.06.2002 154
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

8. The Microsoft TCP/IP properties window shows up.

Setting up the protocol for TCP / IP

1. Adapt the network properties to your needs.
2. Reboot the controller.

Adapting the installation diskette

Update the installation diskette as described in Installation Disk NGC R2, chapter Create installation
diskette, step 2.
Note: This upgrade of the diskette is necessary to make sure that during a NGC upgrade in the future
the diskette is correctly configured, i.e. all boards are correctly installed.

04.06.2002 155
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Install the Scanner

Note:
Before installing the Scanner make sure that the controller is installed
first. In case the software needs to be installed on the controller, you
have plenty of time to (start with) this installation.

Unpacking (overseas packing only)

1. Remove the cardboard box.
2. Remove the two cardboard support plates on top of the scanner.
3. Remove the two cardboard protection boxes from the original
handling.

Prepare installation
1. Remove the four straps with clasps and hooks.
2. Remove the plastic dust cover.
3. Remove the cable ties from the communication cable.
4. Remove the tape from the box on the pallet. Place the box aside.
5. Lift the scanner 5 cm upwards and remove it from the pallet (90
kg / 200 lbs)

6. Remove the two straps with clasps from the scanner.

7. Remove the three tapes from the original handling.
8. Remove the side covers at the left and right side.
9. Remove the two cardboard protection caps from the exposure
lamp ends.
10. Open the original top cover and remove the three foam pieces
from the exposure glass window.

11. Remove the two foam pieces from the gauge roller.ends.
12. Remove the tape from the front side of the original feed table.
13. Remove the tape from the rear side of the original exit guide.

Finish installation
14. Check the position of the exposure lamp, Scanning
dis-/assemblies Exposurelamp.
15. Connect the two connectors of the exposure lamp.
16. Open the box and mount the two side covers with two screws
each. One screw is spare.
Remark: What is the reason
17. Check the position of jumper W1 on the Mixed Power Supply
PBA, must been connected according local voltage supply
(115V TB2 - 230V TB1) see figure:
18. Fill out the Quality Report Card .

04.06.2002 156
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Install the Scanner (Repro Desk)

Note:
Before installing the Scanner make sure that the controller is installed
first.
In case the software needs to be installed on the controller, you have
plenty of time to (start with) this installation.

Unpacking (overseas packing only)

1. Remove the cardboard box.
2. Remove the two cardboard support plates on top of the scanner.
3. Remove the two cardboard protection boxes from the original
handling.

Prepare installation
1. Remove the four straps with clasps and hooks.
2. Remove the plastic dust cover.
3. Remove the cable ties from the communication cable.
4. Remove the tape from the box on the pallet. Place the box aside.
5. Lift the scanner 5 cm upwards and remove it from the pallet (90
kg / 200 lbs)

6. Remove the two straps with clasps from the scanner.

7. Remove the three tapes from the original handling.
8. Remove the side covers at the left and right side.
9. Remove the two cardboard protection caps from the exposure
lamp ends.
10. Open the original top cover and remove the three foam pieces
from the exposure glass window.

11. Remove the two foam pieces from the gauge roller.ends.
12. Remove the tape from the front side of the original feed table.
13. Remove the tape from the rear side of the original exit guide.

Finish installation
14. Check the position of the exposure lamp, Scanning disassemblies
Exposurelamp.
15. Connect the two connectors of the exposure lamp.
16. Open the box and mount the two side covers with two screws
each. One screw is spare.
Remark: What is the reason
17. Check the position of jumper W1 on the Mixed Power Supply
PBA, must been connected according local voltage supply
(115V TB2 - 230V TB1) see figure:
18. Fill out the Quality Report Card .

04.06.2002 157
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Paper switch.
Preparing the Oc· 9600

1. Unpack the paper switch.

2. Hang the paper switch on the output of the Oc· 9600.
3. Connect the connector 15X4 for the motor.
4. Mount the bundle protection cover.
5. Mount the connection brackets to the paperswitch
6. Position the folder or CDT behind the printer, the input guide plate
must fit into the brackets of the paper switch.
7. Activate SDS test 90.1 and set paperswitch to present.

04.06.2002 158
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Unpacking and installation of the Print Engine

Before installing the Printer, make sure that the controller is installed first.
While the software installation in the controller is running, you have plenty
of time to (start with) this installation.

1. Remove the plastic bag.

2. Remove the strap.
3. Remove all the tapes.
4. Remove the foam blocks between the front top cover and the manual
feed table.
5. Loosen at both sides 2 screws from the side covers of the
underframe.

6. Remove at the rear side 2 screws from both side covers of the
underframe.
7. Remove both side covers of the underframe.
8. Remove at the left side the 2 carton boxes inside the underframe.
9. Open the left side top cover.
10. Remove 1 screw and open the right side top cover.

11. At the left side open the fuser unit.

12. Remove the transport protection material at the left and right side.
13. Loosen the 2 fixing screws at the rear side of the front top cover .

Only with empty developing unit:

14. Remove at the left and right side the 2 fixing screws from the front top
cover.
15. Remove the front top cover.

16. Remove at the left and right side 1 transport security screw (taptie)
from the print head.
17. Unlock the print head.

Only with empty developing unit:

18. Remount the top cover (do not fix the screws).

19. Close the fuser unit.

20. Close the side top covers.

21. Roll the Oc· 9600 to its final position.

22. Place the 4 studs (in carton box) underneath the levelling feed.
23. Turn the levelling feed until the wheels are free.
24. Level the Oc· 9600, (spirit level On positions A + B (= behind the
doors) + C), to avoid turn over of the machine when the paper
drawers are open.

04.06.2002 159
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

25. Loosen at the left and right side 1 transport locking screw of the
paper roll drawers.
26. Remove the locking screw together with their bushes.
27. Open the paper roll drawers one by one and remove the transport
securities from the roll holders.
28. Loosen at the left and right side 1 transport locking screw of the
paper sheet feeder(s).
29. Open the sheet feeder(s) and remove the cable ties.
30. Open the left side top cover.

31. Open the fuser unit.

32. Loosen 8 screws from the front side of the fuser cover.
33. Install the 4 Integrated Receiving Trays.
34. Install the small guide in the middle.
35. Install the two output guide plates.
36. Close the fuser unit.

37. If present, install the paper switch.

38. Connect the connector 15X4 and mount the cover over the
connector.
39. Install the shaft and the 12 print reversal guide strips, they must fit
into the grooves.

04.06.2002 160
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Repro Desk controller: Unpacking and installation of the Print

Engine.

1. Remove the plastic bag.

2. Remove the strap.
3. Remove all the tapes.
4. Remove the foam blocks between the front top cover and the manual
feed table.
5. Loosen at both sides 2 screws from the side covers of the
underframe.

6. Remove at the rear side 2 screws from both side covers of the
underframe.
7. Remove both side covers of the underframe.
8. Remove at the left side the 2 carton boxes inside the underframe.
9. Open the left side top cover.
10. Remove 1 screw and open the right side top cover.

11. At the left side open the fuser unit.

12. Remove the transport protection material at the left and right side.
13. Loosen the 2 fixing screws at the rear side of the front top cover .
14. Remove at the left and right side the 2 fixing screws from the front top
cover.
15. Remove the front top cover.

16. Remove at the left and right side 1 transport security screw (taptie)
from the print head.
17. Unlock the print head.
18. Remount the top cover (do not fix the screws).
19. Close the side top covers.
20. Close the fuser unit.

21. Roll the Oc· 9600 to its final position.

22. Place the 4 studs (in carton box) underneath the levelling feed.
23. Turn the levelling feed until the wheels are free.
24. Level the Oc· 9600, (spirit level underneath the bottom frame), to
avoid turn over of the machine when the paper drawers are open.
25. Loosen at the left and right side 1 transport locking screw of the
paper roll drawers.

26. Remove the locking screw together with their bushes.

27. Open the paper roll drawers one by one and remove the transport
securities from the roll holders.
28. Loosen at the left and right side 1 transport locking screw of the
paper sheet feeder(s).
29. Open the sheet feeder(s) and remove the cable ties.
30. Open the left side top cover.

31. Open the fuser unit.

32. Loosen 8 screws from the front side of the fuser cover.
33. Install the 4 Integrated Receiving Trays.
34. Install the small guide in the middle.
35. Close the fuser unit.

36. If present, install the paper switch.

37. Connect the connector 15X4 and mount the cover over the
connector.
38. Install the shaft and the 12 print reversal guide strips, they must fit
into the grooves.

04.06.2002 161
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

NGC R1: Setting up a NON pre- installed Print Engine

Warning:
DO NOT LEAVE THE SDS BEFORE THE CONCENTRATION SENSOR
IS ADJUSTED. OTHERWISE TONER CAN BE ADDED TO THE
DEVELOPER AND THE CONCENTRATION MIXTURE IS WRONG TO
ADJUST.

1. Replace eproms of folder and printer at the same time (If needed)
2. Switch ON the controller, monitor and printer engine.
3. Log in as user "service".
4. If necessary (first time after installation), set display options to a lower
frequency for the controller to accept the display driver.
5. Switch to special user / SDS tests

6. Enter the password.

7. Select 3 printer

1. Before initializing the NVD, please check if de developing unit is

already filled.
2. If so, and you want to save the toner concentration setpoint,
please note down the value (SDS 05-1-001).
3. This value has to be inserted again during the installation
procedure.

8. Select SDS test 22-6-001 ((PRT) CONtrol Initialise Non Volatile

Data).
9. On the printer, press "on-line"

10. Select SDS test 22-6-004 ((PRT) CONtrol Automatic configuration).

11. Set optionals in case they are present:

12. Set folder present (Setting editor / SDS user / System / Printer
configuration / Set folder present) or
13. Set CDT present (Setting editor / SDS user / System / Printer
configuration / Set CDT present)
14. etcetera...

15. Leave SDS by going to the top level (4 x "0")

16. Restart the controller (shutdown on top level); while the controller is
restarting, switch the Printer OFF. Wait for 5 seconds, switch the
printer ON.
17. Do not log in before the printer shows "Ready to print", this can take
several minutes.

Starting with empty toner unit

Place a new waste bag on its position

1. Shake 1 bottle of B5 toner well
2. Screw the bottle into the fill opening (fill opening has the turn
down position) of the toner pot unit
3. Turn the bottle straight up
4. When empty turn down the bottle and remove it
5. Printer message on display says: “.........................Press on-line”
; Please do so.

18. If you are re-installing with a filled developing unit, enter the
concentration setpoint in SDS test 05-1-001.

19. If you are installing with an empty developing unit, take the following
steps:
1. Carry out the SDS test 05-6-002 ((PRT) Recover developer
layer equalisation) for 15 sec., stop with escape.
2. Remove the front top cover.
3. Release and open the Print head.
4. Remove the fill cap from the developing unit and place the
funnel.
5. Shake one bottle of developer well.

04.06.2002 162
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

6. Carry out the SDS test 23-6-001 (Drive motor), forward at normal
speed.
7. Empty the bottle in the developing unit.
8. Stop the test when the bottle and funnel are empty.
9. Remove the funnel and mount back the cap.

10. Close the print head.

11. Remount the front top cover and fasten it with the screws.
12. Close the fuser unit.
13. Read the sensitivity value of the toner concentration sensor, the
value is written on a sticker on the sensor it self and on the frame
plate of the developing unit on the drive side.

14. Start up SDS test 05-1-002 (set DEVTONCONSE value) and

insert the sensitivity value of the toner concentration sensor.
If the value is not present, enter the default value of "300".
15. Close the side covers.
16. Adjustment of the toner concentration.
This test only has to be executed if the the value of the
parameter 05-1-001 is unknown

20. Feed and cut a full roll A0 or 36 inch, plain paper 75 gr/m2 on roll 1.
21. Enter the correct paper size in the printer operator panel.
22. Ignore the folder switched off message (if present).
23. Adjustment light intensity printhead (Blocknumber with correct light
intensity).

24. Remark ! To execute the next measurements properly, the print to

be measured must cool down for at least 15 minutes

(because of shrinkage caused by fuse temperature).

25. Use the same print; measure the line between marker “A” and “B”
(1:1 adjustment)
1. This must be 950 mm. +/- 1 mm.
2. If not, correct by entering SDS test 23-1-002 (DRIMO speed)
3. Enter the measured length in mm, multiplied by 10.
26. Use the same print; measure the length from leading edge to “C”
(leading edge position).
1. This must be 70 mm. +/- 1 mm.
2. If not, correct by entering SDS test 12-1-002 (Paper rolls, leading
edge position)
3. Enter the measured length in mm, multiplied by 10.
27. Start up SDS test 15-7-001 (static deviation on measured lenght roll
1).
1. Measure the total length of the print (again, for the correct
measurement, the print should be cooled down).
2. Enter the measured length in mm, multiplied by 10.
28. Load the upper sheet feeder with A3 plain paper 80 gr/m2 (portrait
orientated) or 11”x17” (B-size) plain paper 20 lb (portrait
1. orientated) or 12”x18” (B-size) plain paper 20 lb (portrait
orientated)
2. Take care if the side edge is properly adjusted to the format
mark in the sheet feeder
3. Enter the correct paper size in the printer operator panel.
29. Make testprint system test 50 from the upper sheet feeder.
1. Measure on the print if the length between the sheets' leading
edge and marker “D”. This must be 70 mm. +/- 1 mm.
2. If not correct do the following:
1. A = measured value in mm X 10
2. Enter A in SDS test 13-1-002 ([PRT] Length between
leading edge and marker “D”)
30. Load the rolls and sheet feeders with the customer required materials /
widths.
31. Switch the printer to OFF-line and enter the correct settings for paper
and sheet sizes.

04.06.2002 163
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

32. Use full paper rolls for the tests 12-7-007.

33. Carry out the SDS test 12-7-007 (cutting length of all rolls).
2 sheets are cut from all rolls and the engine calibrates itself. It is not
necessary to check the length but if checking the first sheet must be
1300 -0/+6 mm and the second 300 -??/+???.
34. Carry out the adjustment Skewing in function 15.

35. Check function 12 adjustment PRD width position / Z-correction

PRD .

36. Check function 13 adjustment PSF width position / Z-correction PSF

.

04.06.2002 164
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Repro Desk controller: Setting up a NON pre- installed Print

Engine.
1.
[ 70.1 SYSTEM INSTALLATION ]

Activate the follwing SDS test:

Step Test Name M&L TP Not Tech.
in R1
1 22-6-001 [ (PRT) CON initialise Non Volatile Data ] X x
2 22-6-041 [ (FOL) CON initialise Non Volatile Data ] X x
3 90 [ Configuration ] X X x
Note: Only do this test if the configuration on the printer panel
is incorrect and / or a folder or HRT should be added to the
system
4 22-6-004 [ [PRT] CONtrol Automatic configuration] X X x

5 91 [ Serial numbers and configuration identification ] X X x

Deactivate the SDS

Activate the Print Manager (PM).
Adjust the service / system Configuration.
Deactivate the PM.
Activate SDS again.

Step Test Name M&L TP Not in R1 Tech.

1 - - X x
2 22-6-041 [ (FOL) CON X x
initialise Non
Volatile Data ]
3 - - X X x
4 - - X X x
5 91 [ Serial numbers X X x
and configuration
identification ]

[ 70.2 PRINTER INSTALLATION ]

Step Test Name M&L TP Not Tech.

in R1
1 05-6-002 [ [PRT] Recover developer layer equalisation ] x X x
Note: Keep all covers closed. Keep test active for about 15
seconds to clean the OPC
2 23-6-001 [ [PRT] DRIMO ],(forward, normal speed) insert the developer x X x
during this time
3 05-1-002 [ [PRT] DEV TONer CONcentration Sensor sensivity ] x X x
4 05-7-001 [ [PRT] DEV TONer CONcentration Sensor ] x X x
Note 1: Keep all covers closed
Note 2: Only if there is a note with the engine, that the engine
is shipped with fresh new developer. If no note, the sensor is
already adjusted by M&L.
Note 3: Always only with fresh new developer.
See: Adjustment of [ The toner concentration sensor 05B1 ]

5 50 [ [PRT] Test print (basic) from roll 1 x X x

Note: Make three prints from the 36" roll
Determine correct OD from third print (correct blackness and
openess)
6 04-1-001 [ [PRT] PHD light intensity ] x X x
Note: Insert correct blocknumber from previous test
7 23-1-002 [ [PRT] Length "A" to "B" (1:1 scale) ] x X x
8 12-1-002 [ [PRT] PRD leading edge position to "C" ] x X x
9 15-7-001 [ [PRT] Static deviation PTRINSE ] x X x

04.06.2002 165
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

10 12-7-001 [ [PRT] UPRD cutting length roll 1 ] x X x

11 12-7-002 [ [PRT] UPRD cutting length roll 2 ] x X x
12 12-7-003 [ [PRT] MPRD cutting length roll 3 ] x X x
13 12-7-004 [ [PRT] MPRD cutting length roll 4 ] x X x
14 12-7-005 [ [PRT] LPRD cutting length roll 5 ] x X x
15 12-7-006 [ [PRT] LPRD cutting length roll 6 ] x X x
16 50 [ [PRT] Test print (basic) from roll 1 ] x X x
17 12-1-008 [ [PRT] PRDU Length between side edge and marker “ F” ] x x
18 50 [ [PRT] Test print (basic) from roll 3 ] x X x
19 12-1-026 [ [PRT] PRDM Length between side edge and marker “F” ] x x
20 50 [ [PRT] Test print (basic) from roll 5[ x X x
21 12-1-046 [ [PRT] PRDL Length between side edge and marker “ F” ] x x
22 50 [ [PRT] Test print (basic) from sheet feeder 1 ] x X x
23 13-1-002 [ [PRT] Length leading edge to “D” ] x X x
24 13-1-005 [ [PRT] UPSF Length between side edge and marker “ E” ] x x
25 50 [ [PRT] Test print (basic) from sheet feeder 2 ] x x
26 13-1-024 [ [PRT] MPSF Length between side edge and marker “E” ] x x
27 50 [ [PRT] Test print (basic) from sheet feeder 3 ] x x
28 13-1-044 [ [PRT] LPSF Length between side edge and marker “ E” ] x x
29 50 [ [PRT] Test print (simple) from manual feed ] x X x
30 15-1-002 [ [PRT] PTR Manual Feed leading edge position to "C" ] x x
31 15-1-003 [ PRT] Manual feed with position ] x x
32 52 [ Demo Print ] x X x

[ 70.4 FOLDER INSTALLATION ]

Step Test Name M&L TP Not Tech.

in R1
1 18-1-001 [ [FOL] FOL1 Input Motor roll diameter ] X x
2 18-1-003 [FOL] FOL2 Input Motor roll diameter ] X X x
3 50 [ [PRT] Test print (basic) on A0 or US equivalent ] X x
4 18-7-001 [ [FOL] Adjust first fold set within RD delivery on FFD ] X x
5 50 [ [PRT] Test print (basic) on A4 or US equivalent ] X x
6 15-1-016 [ [FOL]Paper Transport ROTation Time ] X x
7 50 [ [PRT] Test print (basic) on A0 or 36” ] X x
8 50 [ [PRT] Test print (basic) on A0 or 36” ] X x
9 50 [ [PRT] Test print (basic) on A0 or 36” ] X x
10 50 [ [PRT] Test print (basic) on A0 or 36” ] X x
11 50 [ [PRT] Test print (basic) on A0 or 36” ] X x
12 18-1-002 [ [FOL] FOL1 Start Sensor distance ] X x
13 18-7-002 [ [FOL] Adjust second fold ] X X x
Set within RD delivery on Stacker
14 50 [ [PRT] Test print (basic) on A1 or US equivalent ] X x
15 50 [ [PRT] Test print (basic) on A1 or US equivalent ] X x
16 50 [ [PRT] Test print (basic) on A1 or US equivalent ] X x
17 50 [ [PRT] Test print (basic) on A1 or US equivalent ] X x
18 18-1-005 [ [FOL] FOL2 Start Sensor distance ] x X x
19 52 [ Demo Print ] x X

Note : The folder is adjusted in M&L. The settings of test 70.4 are
written down and stored in RAM on the CPU-IO located in the 1st fold.
Because M&L can not manage to deliver the first fold + second fold as
one unique pair, during installation of the system the TP has to fill in the
paper parameters of FOL2 into the BBR.

04.06.2002 166
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

04.06.2002 167
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Repro Desk controller: Setting up pre-installed System

installation.

[ 70.1 SYSTEM INSTALLATION ]

Carry out the indicated SDS tests:

Step Test Name M&L TP Not Tech.

in R1
1 - -
2 - -
3 - -
4 22-6-004 [ [PRT] CONtrol Automatic configuration] X X x

5 -

[ 70.2 PRINTER INSTALLATION ]

Step Test Name M&L TP Not Tech.

in R1
1 05-6-002 [ [PRT] Recover developer layer equalisation ] x X x
Note: Keep all covers closed.
Keep test active for about 15 seconds to clean the OPC
2 23-6-001 [ [PRT] DRIMO ],(forward, normal speed) insert the developer x X x
during this time
3 - -
4 05-7-001 [ [PRT] DEV TONer CONcentration Sensor ] x X x
Note 1: Keep all covers closed
Note 2: Only if there is a note with the engine, that the engine
is shipped with fresh new developer. If no note, the sensor is
already adjusted by M&L.
Note 3: Always only with fresh new developer.
See: Adjustment of [ The toner concentration sensor 05B1 ]

5 50 [ [PRT] Test print (basic) from roll 1 x X x

Note: Make three prints from the 36" roll
Determine correct OD from third print (correct blackness and
openess)
6 04-1-001 [ [PRT] PHD light intensity ] x X x
Note: Insert correct blocknumber from previous test
7 - x X x
8 - x X x
9 - x X x
10 - x X x
11 - x X x
12 - x X x
13 - x X x
14 - x X x
15 - x X x
16 - x X x
17 - x x
18 - x X x
19 - x x
20 - x X x
21 - x x
22 - x X x
23 - x X x
24 - x x
25 - x x
26 - x x
27 - x x

04.06.2002 168
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

28 - x x
29 - x X x
30 - x x
31 - x x
32 52 [ Demo Print ] x X x

[ 70.4 FOLDER INSTALLATION ]

Step Test Name M&L TP Not Tech.

in R1
1 - X x
2 18-1-003 [ [FOL] FOL2 Input Motor roll diameter ] X X x
3 - X x
4 - X x
5 - X x
6 - X x
7 - X x
8 - X x
9 - X x
10 - X x
11 - X x
12 - X x
13 - X X x
14 - X x
15 - X x
16 - X x
17 - X x
18 18-1-005 [ [FOL] FOL2 Start Sensor distance ] x X x
19 52 [ Demo Print ] x X x

Note : The folder is adjusted in M&L. The settings of test 70.4 are
written down and stored in RAM on the CPU-IO located in the 1st fold.
Because M&L can not manage to deliver the first fold + second fold as
one unique pair, during installation of the system the TP has to fill in the
paper parameters of FOL2 into the BBR.

04.06.2002 169
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Separating process unit and underframe

The following steps need to be done if transport of the printer during installlation is not possible:
1. Remove at the left and right side the covers from the stand.
2. Disconnect at the right side:
- all connectors from the left side of the CPU PBA.
- 2 connectors from the upper side of the CPU PBA.
- 4 connectors from the power supply
3. Loosen the cable bundles from the holders.
4. Pull the cable bundles through the hole of the bottom plate of the process part.
5. Remove at the right front side the upper gear.
6. Remove at the left and right side the 4 fixing screws of the process part.
7. Lift with 4 persons (or 2 persons using straps) the process part from the stand.

Note: If the developing unit is filled with toner, first remove the developing unit to prevent pollution in
the printer.

Before removing the developing unit, please secure the photoconductor with the supplied (long) tie
raps

8. Remove the black cover at the toner side of the engine, and reposition the long bolt behind the
clean unit
9. Use a long tie rap to fasten the photoconductor to this bolt
10. Use a long tie rap at the drive side to fasten the photoconductor to the bracket with the safety
switches for the fuser (9600 Z-2202, pos 7

04.06.2002 170
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Copy Delivery Tray

CDT installation
1. Unpack the CDT.

2. Install the paper-switch

04.06.2002 171
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Printing via TCP/IP

To print with TCP/IP:
l The TCP/IP protocol must be installed.
l The LPR/LPD service must be installed.
l A printer driver must be installed.

LPR/LPD:
if not present, you can use third-party applications.

Plot Director:
LPR is part of the Plot Director application. Yo have to choose the LPR output port.

WIN'95 applications:
LPR is not present. You have to install a third-party LPR application.

WINNT4.0 applications:
LPR is present. You only have to activate this service and then choose the LPR output port.

04.06.2002 172
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

-- TCP/IP set up on a Windows 95 workstation

Installing the TCP/IP protocol

1 If asked: Place the Windows 95 distribution CD-ROM into you CD-ROM reader.

2 Right-click on the ’Network Neighborhood’ icon on the desktop of the Windows 95 workstation.

3 Select the ’Properties’ option.

The ‘Network’ window is displayed.

4 Click on the ‘Add...’ button.

The ‘Select Network Component Type’ window appears.

04.06.2002 173
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

5 Select the ‘Protocol’ option

and click on the ‘Add...’ button.

The ‘Select Network Protocol’ window appears.

6 Select ‘Microsoft’ as manufacturer

04.06.2002 174
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

and ‘TCP/IP’ as network protocol and click on ‘OK’.

You are returned to the ‘Network’ window.

04.06.2002 175
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

7 Click on ‘OK’.
The corresponding files are then copied from your Windows 95 distribution CD-ROM

8 Specify whether or not you want to restart your workstation by clicking on the ‘Yes’ button.

The reboot process starts.

Checking the connection

l Open a DOS session by clicking on the Start button, Programs menu and selecting the MS-DOS prompt
option.
l Type: ping [IP address of the NGC controller]
For example: ping 192.168.100.100.
Note: If you get a replay message, the connection is OK; when a timeout message appears the workstation
cannot reach the NGC.

Setting up the TCP/IP protocol:

9 Right-click on the ’Network Neighborhood’ icon on the desktop of the Windows 95 workstation.

04.06.2002 176
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

and click on the ‘Properties’ button.

The ‘Network’ window appears.

10 Select the TCP/IP protocol

04.06.2002 177
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

and click on the ‘Properties’ button.

The ‘TCP/IP Properties’ window appears.

04.06.2002 178
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

11 Select the ‘Specify an IP address’ radio button. You can now enter an IP address and network mask.

04.06.2002 179
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

12 Enter a value in the ‘IP Address’ field.

For example: 194.2.66.146 (where 194.2.66 is the LAN address and 146 the workstation IP
address).

13 Enter a value in the ‘Subnet Mask’ field. For example: 255.255.255.0 (for a standard Class C LAN).

Let the 'Advanced' parameters with their default values.

04.06.2002 180
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Let the 'DNS Configuration' parameters with their default values.

04.06.2002 181
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Let the 'WINS Configuration' parameters with their default values.

04.06.2002 182
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Let the 'Bindings' parameters with their default values.

04.06.2002 183
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

14 Click on the ’OK’ button in the IP Address window.

You are returned to the ‘Network’ window.

04.06.2002 184
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

15 Close the ‘Network’ window by clicking on the ’Close’ button.

16 You are then asked whether or not you want to restart your workstation.

17 Click on the ’Yes’ button to start the reboot process.

04.06.2002 185
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

-- LPD/LPR set up using TCP/IP on a Windows 95 workstation

Setting up on a Windows 95 workstation

Setting up a Windows 95 workstation involves the following steps:

l Installing and setting up the TCP/IP protocol must first be finnished and
a printer driver must be installed, see Generic installation: Raster and PS driver on WIN'95 workstation
l Installing the Oc· Windows LPR Utility
l Initialising the Oc· Windows LPR Utility
l Defining the Oc· Windows LPR Utility queue
l Setting up the printer for the Oc· Windows LPR Utility, see TCP/IP printing using LPD/LPR on a Windows
'95 workstation

Note:
Since the MicroSoft TCP/IP-32 for Windows 95 option does not support the LPR/LPD protocol, you need a
specific utility named Oc· Windows LPR Utility to print from a Windows 95 workstation.

Installing the Oc· Windows LPR Utility

1 Execute the Setup.exe program from either distribution diskette #1/2,

or from the Disk1 directory from the hard disk distribution.

2 Specify the directory in which you want to store the utility (e.g.: C:\WIN95\WLPRSPL)

and click on ‘Continue’.

3 Add the Program to its own Program Group by clicking on the ‘Yes’ button in the ‘Add to Program
Manager’ window.

The ‘Specify Program Manager Group’ window appears.

04.06.2002 186
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

4 Specify the program group name (e.g.: Oce Windows LPR Spooler) and click on ‘Continue’.

The ‘Copy Documentation’ window appears.

5 Click on the ‘Yes’ button if you wish the documentation files in PostScript format.

6 Repeat this action for the documentation files in ASCII format.

When requested, insert the second diskette (#2/2), if you load the program from diskette.
The load procedure is now completed, click on the 'OK' button.

The ‘Add to Program Manager’ window appears.

7 Add the program icon to the Startup Program Group. To do this you take the
following steps:

8 Select the ‘Windows LPR Spooler’ icon from the ‘Oce Windows LPR Spooler’
menu, displayed by the Explorer, just after the installation and press Ctrl/C (copy)

04.06.2002 187
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

9 Go up one level via the tool bar and click on the ‘StartUp’ icon.

10 Press Ctrl/V (paste) to copy the shortcup into the ‘StartUp’ menu.

11 Now close the window by clicking on the cross in the upper right corner of the window.

Initialising the Oc· Windows LPR Utility

1 Select the - ‘Programs - Oce Windows LPR Spooler - Windows LPR Spooler’ options from the ‘Start’
menu of Windows 95.

04.06.2002 188
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

2 Click on the ‘Windows LPR Spooler’ icon.

The first time this utility is launched after installation you are asked to set up your local parameters:
spool directory and queue definition file.

First the ‘Windows LPR Spooler 4.2a’ window appears.

3 Click on ‘OK’.

The ‘Select Spool Directory’ window appears.

4 Select the drive and directory or create a specific directory where you want to temporarily store the data
files
before they are sent to the printer (e.g.: C:\WIN95\OCESPL)

04.06.2002 189
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

and click on‘OK’.

The ‘Windows LPR Spooler 4.2a’ window appears again.

5 Click on ‘OK’.

The ‘Load Queue Definition File’ window appears.

6 Specify the desired queue definition file. This is an ASCII data file where all aueue definition
parameters are stored.
Note: It is recommended to select the (default) wlprspl.qs file located in the installation directory.

7 Click on ‘OK’.

The Oc· Windows LPR Utility now is ready and started.

04.06.2002 190
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Defining the Oc· Windows LPR Utility queue

1 Click on the banner of the ‘Windows LPR Spooler 4.2a’ window which appears after installation of the
Oc· Windows LPR Utility to activate this window.

2 Press the <Alt> and <Ins> keys or click on -Setup, Queues, Define new queue-.

The ‘Edit Queue Data’ window appears.

3 Enter values in the fields of this window:

l ‘Local Spool File Name’
Local workstation name of the resource. E.g.: “9600Q"
l ‘Remote Printer/Queue Name’
Printer destination name on the Oc· 9600 controller. As only 1 printer is serviced,
any name is available.
E.g.: "9600"
l ‘Remote Host Name or IP’
Name of the Oc· 9600 controller on the network. Enter its name if this has been defined
by the network administrator, or enter its IP address.
E.g.: "194.2.66.146"
l ‘Queue Description’
A character string to identify this remote resource.
E.g.: "Oce 9600 Printer Controller"
l ‘Protocol to be used’
Leave it to its default value BSD LPR/LPD.
E.g.: "BSD LPR/LPD Protocol (WLP2.DLL)"

04.06.2002 191
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

4 Click on the ‘Queue propeties ...’ button.

The ‘Queue Setup’ window appears.

5 Modify the default setup by selecting the ‘Raw Print File’ radio button, to send data file ‘as is’
(without header page or any other options)

04.06.2002 192
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

and click on the ‘Advanced options’ button.

The ‘Advanced Queue Setup’ window appears.

6 Unselect all check boxes:

l Remove leading Ctrl-D

04.06.2002 193
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

l Remove trailing Ctrl-D

l Send data file before control file

7 Click on the ‘Close’ button.

You are returned to the ‘Queue Setup’ window

8 Click on the ‘DLL Setup...’ button.

The ‘WLPR2.DLL Settings’ window appears.

9 Select the default values by clicking on the ‘Default’ button.

04.06.2002 194
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

10 Click on ‘OK’.
You are returned to the ‘Queue Setup’ window.

11 Click on ‘OK’ again.

You are returned to the ‘Edit Queue Data’ window.

12 Click on ‘OK’ again.

You are returned to the main ‘Window LPR Spooler 4.2a’ window.

13 Press <Ctrl/Q> or click on -Queues, Shoe remote printer status- to get the remote Printer status
in order to check if the connection is OK and if LPD is running on the Oc· 9600 controller.

14 Click on the ‘Close’ button to quit this window.

The queue is now fully set up and a new local port (e.g.: C:\WIN95\OCESPL\9600Q) has been defined.

Setting up the printer for the Windows LPR utility

See TCP/IP printing using LPD/LPR on a Windows '95 workstation

04.06.2002 195
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

-- TCP/IP printing setup using LPD/LPR on a Windows 95

workstation

Setting up on a Windows 95 workstation

Setting up a Windows 95 workstation involves the following steps:

l Actions that has to be finnished first:
Installing and setting up the TCP/IP protocol
a printer driver must have been installed
Installing the Oc· Windows LPR Utility
Initialising the Oc· Windows LPR Utility
Defining the Oc· Windows LPR Utility queue

l Installing a print application or printer driver, where the output port is directed to the LPR port.
To use TCP/IP printing, you have to install and configure the print applications and / or printer drivers:
Installation, see "Generic installation print applications and printer drivers on workstation".
Configuring, see "Print applications and printer drivers with TCP/IP".

04.06.2002 196
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

-- TCP/IP set up on a Windows NT4.0 workstation

Note:
By default, Windows NT 4.0 is delivered with a TCP/IP printing service.
This is needed to use TCP/IP and to activate the LPR possebility.

Log in as an administrator and check the TCP/IP settings.

Checking the TCP/IP settings on the server

1. Select the Network option from the Control Panel.

2. Go to the Services tab.

[86] Selecting Microsoft TCP/IP printing

3. Make certain that Microsoft TCP/IP printing is installed.

Note: If this is not the case you select the Add and TCP/IP printing options, click on OK (you will be
prompted for the NT CD), click on OK again and restart the client.

04.06.2002 197
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

-- LPD/LPR set up using TCP/IP on a Windows NT4.0 workstation

Setting up on a Windows NT4.0 workstation

Setting up a Windows NT4.0 workstation involves the following steps:

l Installing and setting up the TCP/IP protocol must first be finnished, and
also a printer driver must have been installed, see See Generic installation: Raster and PS printer driver
on WINNT4.0 workstation
l Installing the Microsoft TCP/IP printing service must first be finnished
l Setting up the printer for the Oc· Windows LPR Utility, see TCP/IP printing set up using LPD/LPR on a
Windows NT4.0 workstation

Note:
Windows NT4.0 supports the LPD/LPR service, only when the Microsoft TCP/IP printing service is installed.

Setting up the Microsoft TCP/IP printing service

1. Log in as an administrator on the Windows NT4.0 workstation.

2. Select the Network option from the control Panel
3. Go to the Services tab.

4. Make certain that Microsoft TCP/IP printing is installed.

Note: If this is not the case, you select Add and then TCP/IP printing options, and click on th OK button.
You will be prompted to place the NT CD-ROM, or browse to the <i386> directory, click on OK, the software
will be installed and restart the workstation.

5. The NT4.0 workstation is now ready to use the LPR service.

Setting up the printer for the Oc· Windows LPR Utility

04.06.2002 198
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

-- TCP/IP printing set up using LPD/LPR on a Windows NT 4.0

workstation
Setting up on a Windows NT 4.0 workstation

Setting up on a Windows NT 4.0 workstation involves the following steps:

l Actions that has to be finnished first:
Installing and setting up the TCP/IP protocol
Installing the Microsoft TCP/IP Printing service
l Setting up the printer for the Microsoft TCP/IP Printing service.

l Installing a print application or printer driver, where the output port is

directed to the LPR port.
To use TCP/IP printing, you have to install and configure the print
applications and / or printer drivers:
Installation, see "Generic installation print applications and printer drivers on workstation".
Configuring, see "Print applications and printer drivers with TCP/IP".

Note:
You have to log in as an administrator (Local or Domain) to be able to set
up the printer TCP/IP protocol and Microsoft TCP/IP Printing service.

04.06.2002 199
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

---- TCP/IP: Oc· ADI driver for Autocad 14

Print applications:

Oc· ADI driver for Autocad 14

For generic part, see: ADI driver R14 on workstation.

Last action of the generic part was: asking to specify port:

Continue now with:

[7_7] Select the desired connection port.

1. Select <N> of network port.

The network window appears.
Note: Only for WINNT4.0: a second possibility is: Select <P> of parallel port, enter the IP address of the
NGC controller.
Continue with point 4 (type <oceconfig>

[7_8a] Select the desired printer driver

2. Select the desired printer driver by browsing for example to the NGC controller, Oc·9600.
The Preference window appears.

04.06.2002 200
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

[7_9] Selecting the default printer

3. Select under the tab 'Printer' the configured printer and click on the Set Current button.
Autocad returns to the standard screen.

04.06.2002 201
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

[7_10] Entering oceconfig command

4. Enter <oceconfig> at the Autocad prompt to set up the printer.

04.06.2002 202
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

[7_11] Configuration Oc· settings

In the Oc· configuration manager, you can configure the printer remotely.
Note: All settings remain active until you change them.

5. Setup is now completed.

04.06.2002 203
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

---- TCP/IP: Plot Director

Print applications:
Plot Director
For generic part, see: Plot Director on workstation.

Last action of the generic part was: selecting output port.

Continue now with:
1. Activate the Add button in the LPR sub-window.

[48] Selecting the desired output port

2. Fill in on "LPR parameters" screen:

1. HostName: TCP/IP addres of the controller
2. QueueName: any name is correct e.g. Oce9600
3. OK
3. On "Select Output port" screen
1. Select just created LPR port.
2. OK.

4. PlotDirector is ready for use with TCP/IP.

Test the installation by making a print.

04.06.2002 204
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

---- TCP/IP Raster and PS printer drivers

The following items are available to use with TCP/IP printing and LPD/LPR service:

Printer drivers:
Setting up the printer driver using LPR on a Windows '95 workstation

1 Select the ‘Settings - Printers’ options from the ‘Start’ menu of Windows 95.

The ‘Printers’ window containing a list of all defined printers appears (e.g.: "Oce 9600")

2 Right-click on the ‘Oce 9600’ icon and select the ‘Properties’ option.
This can be the 9700 Raster 0r 9600 PS driver.

04.06.2002 205
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

The ‘Oce 9600 Properties’ window appears.

3 Click on the ‘Details’ tab

04.06.2002 206
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

and check the available ports in order to select the correct one.

4 Now select the ‘C:\WIN95\OCESPL\9600Q (unknown local)’ port

04.06.2002 207
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

and click on the ‘Apply’ button.

5 Click on ‘OK’ to validate your choice.

04.06.2002 208
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Your printer in now connected.

Note: This new printer connection can be checked in the ‘Window LPR Spooler 4.2a’ window, where the ‘Printer
driver for selected queue’ field is now filled with the "Oce 9600" printer name instead of with "-none-".

Now you can use this printer in the same way as any other printer within a standard Windows 95 application.

You can check now the properties of the Oce 9600 printer:

Setting up the printer driver using LPR on Windows NT4.0 workstation

1. Select the ‘Settings - Printers’ options from the ‘Start’ menu of Windows NT 4.0.
2. The ‘Printers’ window containing a list of all defined printers then appears (e.g.: "Oce 9600")
3. Right-click on the ‘Oce 9600’ icon and select the ‘Properties’ option.
4. The ‘Oce 9600 Properties’ window appears.
5. Click on the ‘Ports’ tab.
6. Click on the ‘Add Port...’ button.
7. The ‘Printer Ports’ window containing all available ports then appears.

04.06.2002 209
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

[105] Selecting the LPR Port option

8. Select the ‘LPR Port’ option and then click on the ‘New Port...’ button.
9. The ‘Add LPR compatible printer’ window appears asking you for the LPR parameters.

[106] Configuring the printer

10. Enter the address of the NGC controller and the name of the printer/print queue and click on the OK button.
The printer name window appears.
11. Click on ‘OK’.
12. The ‘Printer Ports’ window appears again.
13. Click on the ‘Close’ button.
14. You are returned to the ‘Oce 9600 Properties’ window where you can see the new port you just defined to
which the "Oce 9600" printer will be connected.
15. Click on ‘OK’.
16. Your printer is now connected.

Now you can use this printer in the same way as any other printer within a standard Windows NT application.
Note: You can check the LPD connection by opening a DOS window and entering the next command: LPQ
-S194.2.66.146 -P9600 -l
You should get a response from the Oc· 9600 controller.

04.06.2002 210
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Install the Folder

Folder installation
Note:
Before installing the Folder make sure that the controller is installed first. While the software
installation in the controller is running you have plenty of time to (start with) this installation.

The installation of the Folder is divided in seven main steps:

l Unpacking the 1st folding section
l Unpacking the 2nd folding section
l Connecting the 1st and 2nd folding sections
l Preparing the Oc· 9600
l Installing the folder behind the Oc· 9600
l Final
l Minimise the width of the 1st folding section
l Adjustments / parameters in 1st and 2nd fold

Unpacking the 1st folding section

Unpacking the 2nd folding section without Reinforcement unit
Connecting the 1st and 2nd folding sections without Reinforcement unit

Unpacking and connecting 2nd folding section with Reinforcement unit

Preparing the Oc· 9600

Installing the folder behind the Oc· 9600

Final

1. Place all covers (except the left hand side cover).

2. Check the tolerance of the mains supply voltage (+/- 10 %).
3. Connect the folder to the mains supply.
4. Connect the folder to the printer via the special cable.
5. Switch on the folder and the printer.

Minimize the width of the 1st folding unit

The maximum width of the 1st folding unit is 1160 mm (45”).

The width of the 1st folding unit can be minimised to 980 mm or 913 mm.

Minimise the width to 980 mm (39”):

1. Open the rear covers of the 1st folding unit.

2. Loosen at the left and right side 2 screws from the side top covers.
3. Remove at the right hand side the top and the top side cover of the 1st folding unit.
4. Remove at the left hand side the top and the top side cover of the 1st folding unit.
5. Open the cover of the intermediate transport.
6. Remove at the right hand side the 2 bolts of the locking bracket from the cover.
7. Remove at the right hand side the locking handle (1 bolt).

8. Hold the cover and remove the two fixing bolts of the cover.
9. Remove at the left hand side the print guide plate underneath the subframe.
10. Remove at the left hand side the subframe (3 bolts).
11. Remove at the right hand side the subframe (2 bolts).

Minimise the width to 913 mm (36”):

1. Remove at the right hand side the cover of the frame (2 screws).
2. Remove the connector 1802X4 from I/O PBA.
3. Open the top cover of the paper transport.
4. Remove at the right hand side the side cover of the paper transport (4 screws).
5. Remove the right hand side the top cover and the top side cover of the 1st folding unit.

6. Disconnect at the right hand side the connector 18X4 and the earth wire.
7. Remove at the left hand side the side cover of the paper transport (4 screws).

04.06.2002 211
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

8. Remove the left hand side the top cover and the top side cover of the 1st folding unit
9. Remove at the left-hand side the folder drive belt from the gear.
10. Remove at each side one locking screw of the paper transport.

11. Close the top cover of the paper transport .

12. Slide the paper transport section to the front and remove it.

Attention:: Do not damage the cover underneath the paper transport.

04.06.2002 212
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Belt Unit
Unpacking the belt unit.
1. Open the carton box.
2. Remove the cover for the 2nd folding unit.
3. Remove the carton box with the receiving rack and mounting materials.
4. Remove the belt frame.
5. Remove the belt.

Installation of the belt unit.

1. Remove the rear upper cover and the front upper cover of the 2nd folding unit.
2. Remove the side cover of the 2nd folding unit.
3. Turn the 4 belt frame mounting bolts (M6x20 mm) in the 2nd folding unit.
4. Unpack the frame.
5. Remove the top cover of the frame.

6. Loosen the lower screws of the side covers from the frame.
7. Remove the upper screws and remove the covers.
8. Loosen 2 screws of the small output cover and remove the small cover.
9. Disconnect the earth wire from the upper output cover.
10. Remove the 2 screws from the upper output cover.

11. Remove the upper output cover.

12. Mount the frame to the 2nd folding unit (10 mm).
13. Tighten the upper bolts.
14. Open the door of the frame and tighten the lower bolts.
15. Push the bearings from the rotation support shaft of the belt to the inside against the shoulder.

bearings

rotation support
shaft
16. Slide the belt horizontally between the frame.
17. Lift the belt 45· and shift the belt to the machine rear side.
18. Connect the earth wire.
19. Push the connector from the belt end sensor through the frame and connect.
20. Lock the belt with the bracket over the bearing (when removing the belt remove the locking screw
completely).

21. Mount the belt drive belt.

22. Connect the connectors 18X33 and 18X36 (Put the dummy connector 18X33 on a cable-bundle in the
neighbourhood) This connector is needed if you want to run without a belt unit).
23. Mount the receiving rack (4 washers and 2 screws), the smallest washers against the frame.
24. Remove the fixed copy guide from the copy receiving tray.
25. Mount the new copy guide.

26. Mount the small lower output cover.

27. Close the belt door.
28. Mount the new side cover of the 2nd folding unit (2 screws).
29. Slide the upper output cover over the belt end, connect the earth wire.
30. Mount the upper output cover.

31. Mount the front and rear cover.

32. Mount the top cover, it must fit over the other covers.

04.06.2002 213
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

04.06.2002 214
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Installation

Reinforcement Unit
The Reinforcement unit can not be installed on an existing 2nd fold unit.
The whole 2nd fold unit must be replaced by a new 2nd fold unit on which the Reinforcement unit is already
installed.
This discription discribets only the installation of the 2nd fold unit with reinforcement and is so part of the whole
description of the folder installation.

Unpacking and connecting Second folding unit with Reinforcement unit Oc· 712

1. Remove the cardboard box (if present).

2. Remove the dust cover.
3. Remove the cartons with the covers and the FFD (first fold delivery) tray.
4. Loosen the bolts, which fix the unit to the pallet (13 mm).
5. Push the unit with the aid of a dock board from the pallet.
Note: Do not lift the unit at the intermediate transport

6. Remove all transport tapes, the cable ties from the first fold delivery rollers and the reinforcement unit.
7. Mount the bracket, which is inside the waste tray of the reinforcement unit, to the right support of the cover
over the intermediate transport.
8. Remove the foam strips from between the folding rollers and 2 cable ties.
9. Remove the nut and ring from the position pin from the first folding unit.
10. Place the 2nd folding unit behind the 1st folding unit.

11. Check if the position pin of the 2nd folding unit fits with the first folding unit.
12. Mount on the left side the ring and nut which fix the 2nd with the first folding unit.
13. Connect on the left side the connectors 18X1, 18X5, 18X8 and 18X19 and 18X23.
14. Mount the long rear cover.
Note: In case the bundle of connector 18X19 is too short: remove the counter connector from the frame and
connect the connectors underneath the frame.
15. Level the second fold, by putting adjustment plates if necessary between the bottom of the frame and the
wheels (these plates are packed inside to the side frame of the 2nd fold)

16. Adjust the height position of the second fold with respect to the first fold 12 mm and parallel.
17. Lock the 2nd folding unit with the nut and ring at the left side.
18. Remove the door over the reinforcement unit.
19. Remove the transport security bolt from the reinforcement unit (left / top site).
20. Mount the actuator for the [ FOL2RUINTDOORSW ] safety switch.
Position the actuator between the right hand hinge and the cover above the intermediate transport.

21. Mount the rear lower cover.

22. Mount all covers on the folder.
23. Mount the FFD tray (if exists)
24. Switch on the engine.
25. Activate SDS.

Note: If only a 2nd fold is replaced:

26. Carry out test 90.4 [ Folder configuration ]
Configure the correct items.
27. Carry out test 91.6 [ Folder serial numbers ].
Fill in the correct items.
28. Switch off SDS and switch off and on the engine.

Note:
To test the correct working of the reinforcement unit, login as [ Key operator ] in the { Settings editor ] and set the
reinforcement unit in the way you want to use it.

04.06.2002 215
 [ 01-29 Function tests ]
Indentification
Every test has its unique number. This number is composed in the following way:

test number = CAS-group + function group + reference

Function tests can be divided into the next groups:

Function group Number

[ Counters ] 0
[ Parameters ] 1
[ Inputs ] 2
[ Outputs ] 4
[ Specials ] 6
[ Adjustments ] 7
[ Consumables ] 8
[ Information ] 9

Definition
[ Counters ]
[ Parameters ]
[ Inputs ]
[ Outputs ]
[ Specials ]
[ Adjustments ]
[ Consumables ]
[ Information ]

All tests are described in corresponding chapters.

TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

General overview Settings Editor KO setting (R2)

This overview gives information where to find and change the settings for the Key Operator in the settings editor
(KO settings) window on the NGC controller or remote.
The settings can be viewed by all operators but only the Key Operator can change the settings.

Activate the Settings editor.

To view: select View and click on KO settings.
To change : File, Log in, select Key operator, enter the password and click OK.
For detailed information see User Manual Copier/Printer

KO setting menu structure:

Jobs Copy
Defaults
Input mode
Number of prints / sets
Original
Original type
Background compensation
Scan with method
Manual scan width value
Legend input
Shift
Auto shift
Horizontal shift
Vertical shift
Editing
Exposure
Mirror
Strips
Add leading strip
Remove leading strip
Add trailing strip
Remove trailing strip
Zoom
Auto zoom
Default zoom
Media
Auto format
Default paper source
Default paper source number
Manual feed
Print cut method
Custom print length
Finishing
Folding
Drawing method
Folding length
Folding width
Binding strip
Copy delivery
Folded
Zoom calibration
Horizontal zoom calibration
Vertical zoom calibration

Jobs Print
Print error page
Defaults
Number of prints / sets
Input mode
Shift
Auto shift
Horizontal shift
Vertical shift
Editing

04.06.2002 2
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

Mirror
Invert
Strips
Add leading strip
Remove leading strip
Add trailing strip
Remove trailing strip
Zoom
Auto zoom
Default zoom
Media
Auto format
Fit format
Feed preference
Default paper source
Default paper source number
Default roll format
Print cut method
Custom print length
Rotate
Rotate value
Legend correction
Finishing
Folding
Drawing method
Folding length
Folding width
Binding strip
Print delivery
Folded

Jobs
Off-line folding
Defaults
Legend input
Drawing method
Folding length
Folding width
Binding strips
Folding delivery

Printer
Printer settings
Automatic roll switch
Folder
Sheets on belt
Adjust
Block number with correct light intensity

System
System settings
Telephone number
Localization
Display languages
First language
Second language
Measurement unit
Job priorities
Copy priorities
Media
Paper series
Timers
Sleep mode timer
Manual feed time-out

Scanner
Settings
Automatic feed

04.06.2002 3
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

Automatic feed time-out

Panel defaults
Zoom steps
Reduction step 1-4
Enlargement 1-4
Timers
Panel time-out
Set time-out

Scanner
Custom card
Setting groups Custom card

04.06.2002 4
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

General overview Settings Editor SA settings (R2)

This overview gives information where to find and change the settings for the System Administrator (SA settings)
in the settings editor window on the NGC controller or remote.
The settings can be viewed by all operators but only the System Administrator can change the settings.

Activate the Settings editor.

To view: select View and click on SA settings.
To change : File, Log in, select System administrator, enter the password and click OK.
For detailed information see User Manual Copier/Printer

SA setting menu structure:

Printer PLDs
Dithering matrix
Poker PDL heap size
Poker min number of vertices in polygons
Poker max number of vertices in polygons
HPGL
Enable
Origin
Select pen
Color merge control
HPGL2
Enable HPGL-2
Origin
Select pen 0
Color merge control
Pen priority
PS no clip
Emulation type
Calcomp
Enable Calcomp
Step size
Origin
Synchro code
Double synchro
Checksum
End of message
Pen priority
Color merge control
Postscript
Enable Postscript
PS level 2 password
Default paper size
PS level 2 heap size
NIRS
Enable NIRS
C4
Enable C4
TIFF
Enable TIFF
Photo metry
CALS
Enable CALS
ASCII
Enable ASCII
End of line
Line overflow
Font size
Tab size
Top margin
Bottom margin
Left margin
Right margin
Pen width
Page type
Custom page width

04.06.2002 5
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

Custom page height

Standard page format
Standard page orientation

Printer
Pens

System
System settings
Controller identification
Host name
Description
Location
Administrator

Set memory reservation

Orange zone threshold
Red zone limit
Connectivity
FTP
Enable FTP
Time-out
Communication mode
PDL selection
LPD
Enable LPD
Communication mode
PDL selection
SMB
Enable SMB
Workgroup name
Communication mode
PDL selection
Novell
Enable Novell
Pserver name
Pserver password
Access mode
File server name
NDS context
Queue poll interval
Connection retry interval
Communication mode
PDL selection
TCP/IP
Domain
DNS
Adapter 1
Enable
Enable DHCP
IP adress
IP mask
Default gateway
Adapter 2
Enable
DHCP enable
IP adress
IP mask
Default gateway
IPX/SPX
Adapter 1
Enable
Adapter 2
Enable
Netbeui
Adapter 1

04.06.2002 6
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

Enable
Adapter 2
Enable

04.06.2002 7
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

General overview Settings Editor KO setting (R3.0 Oc·

TDS600/Oc· 9600)
This overview gives information where to find and change the settings for the Key Operator in the settings editor
(KO settings) window on the Oc· Power Logic controller or remote.
The settings can be viewed by all operators but only the Key Operator can change the settings.

Activate the Settings editor.

To view: select View and click on KO settings.
To change : File, Log in, select Key operator, enter the password and click OK.
For detailed information see User Manual Copier/Printer

KO setting menu structure:

Jobs Copy & File

Defaults
Custom card
Check print
Number of prints / sets
Output mode
Mirror
User id
Account id
Zoom
Zoom method
Custom zoom
Original card
Feeding
Input mode
Legend orientation
Drawing method
Sheet
Remove leading strip
Remove trailing strip
Scan width method
Custom scan width
Scan length method
Custom scan length
Image
Original type
Background compensation
Exposure
Print card
Layout
Align
Horizontal shift
Vertical shift
Finishing
Folding
Folded copy delivery
Folding length
Folding width
Folding reinforcement
Binding strip
Sheet
Automatic media
Default paper source
Default paper source number
Manual feed
Cut length method
Custom cut length
Strips
Add leading strip
Add trailing strip
File card
Destination
File format

04.06.2002 8
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

Destination
TIFF compression
TIFF organisation
PDF compression
Image
File resolution
Optimization
Zoom calibration
Horizontal zoom calibration
Vertical zoom calibration
Scan to file
File extension PDF
File extension TIFF
File extension CALS

Jobs Print
Print error page
Defaults
Number of prints / sets
Collate
Default print mode
User id
Account id
Sheet
Auto format
Fit method
Feed preference
Default paper source
Default paper source number
Print cut method
Custom print length
Default roll format
Default material
Strips
Remove leading strip
Remove trailing strip
Add leading strip
Add trailing strip
Finishing
Folding
Folded print delivery
Drawing method
Image orientation
Folding length
Folding width
Folding reinforcement
Binding strip
Image
Zoom method
Custom zoom
Mirror
Invert
Rotate
Rotate value
Legend correction
Lay-out
Auto shift
Horizontal shift
Vertical shift

Jobs Off-line folding

Defaults
Folding delivery
Legend location
Drawing method
Folding length

04.06.2002 9
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

Folding width
Folding reinforcement
Binding strip

Printer
Automatic roll switch
Folder
Reinforce A4
Sheets on belt
Adjust
Block number with correct light intensity

ScannerSettings
Printer family
Rewind originals
Automatic feed
Sheet
Fit method
Zoom steps
Reduction step 1
Reduction step 2
Reduction step 3
Reduction step 4
Enlargement 1
Enlargement 2
Enlargement 3
Enlargement 4
Timers
Panel time-out
Set time-out
Automatic feed time-out

System
Telephone number
Enabling passwords
Scan logic
Adobe® PostScript ® 3™ / PDF
Oce Print Exec LT Web
Account logging
Advanced Queue Manager
Localization
Display languages
First language
Second language
Measurement unit
Date & time
Job priorities
Copy priorities
Media
Paper series
Media request time-out
Media request action
Manual feed time-out
Manual feed action
Timers
Sleep mode timer
Controller panel time-out
Disk cleanup
Local storage cleanup
Frequency
File age
Next time
Unsent folder cleanup
Frequency
File age
Next time
Scan spool cleanup

04.06.2002 10
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

Frequency
File age
Next time
Job management
Print jobs
Rights for printing
History queue
Enable history queue
Print job lifetime
Max. nr. of jobs
Logging
File format
File field separator
File age

04.06.2002 11
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

General overview Settings Editor SA settings (R3.0 Oc·

TDS600/Oc· 9600)
This overview gives information where to find and change the settings for the System Administrator (SA settings)
in the settings editor window on the Oc· Logic Power Logic controller or remote.
The settings can be viewed by all operators but only the System Administrator can change the settings.

Activate the Settings editor.

To view: select View and click on SA settings.
To change : File, Log in, select System administrator, enter the password and click OK.
For detailed information see User Manual Copier/Printer

SA setting menu structure:

Printer PLDs
Dithering matrix
Poker PDL heap size
Poker min number of vertices in polygons
Poker max number of vertices in polygons
Scale down algorithm
HPGL
Enable HPGL
Origin
Select pen 0
Color merge control
Pen width scaling
Kanji font set
HPGL2
Enable HPGL-2
Origin
Select pen 0
Color merge control
Pen priority
PS no clip
Emulation type
Line attributes
Pen width scaling
Kanji font set
Calcomp
Enable Calcomp
Step size
Origin
Synchro code
Double synchro
Checksum
End of message
Pen priority
Color merge control
Pen width scaling
Kanji font set
Font 3
Postscript
Enable Postscript
Enable PDF
Default paper size
PS heap size
NIRS
Enable NIRS
C4
Enable C4
TIFF
Enable TIFF
Photometry
CALS
Enable CALS
ASCII
Enable ASCII

04.06.2002 12
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

End of line
Line overflow
Font size
Tab size
Top margin
Bottom margin
Left margin
Right margin
Pen width
Page type
Custom page width
Custom page height
Standard page format
Standard page orientation
Pen width scaling

Printer
Pens

System
Scan memory reservation
Controller identification
Host name
Description
Location
Administrator
Set memory reservation
Orange zone threshold
Red zone limit
Connectivity
FTP
Enable FTP
Time-out
Communication mode
PDL selection
LPD
Enable LPD
Communication mode
PDL selection
SMB
Enable SMB
Workgroup name
Communication mode
PDL selection
Novell
Enable Novell
Pserver name
Pserver password
Access mode
File server names
NDS context
Queue poll interval
Connection retry interval
Communication mode
PDL selection
TCP/IP
Domain
DNS
Adapter 1
Enable
Enable DHCP
IP adress
IP mask
Default gateway
Primary WINS Server
Secondary WINS Server
IPX/SPX

04.06.2002 13
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

Adapter 1
Enable
Netbeui
Adapter 1
Enable

04.06.2002 14
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

Installation and configuring of Web SDS on the laptop

Introduction

To enable to run the WebSDS on the service laptop after a Direct Cable connection to the Controller is
established , the following actions have to be executed:
l Setting up the Microsoft Internet Explorer on the laptop
l Starting a Web SDS session from the laptop

Setting up the Microsoft Internet Explorer

Starting a Web SDS session from the Laptop

04.06.2002 15
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

Installation of SDS-client on the laptop

Before you can start working with [ SDS ] ([ Notes ] or [ Web SDS ] ) on
the Laptop it is neccessary to install the following applications from the
Controller CD-Rom:
l [ Client setup SDS ]
l [ DAO software ]
Note: If you have already an installed version of SDS client on your
laptop, then you must upgrade the older version.
l Remove the older version via: [ Start, Settings, Control Panel,
Add/Remove Programs: Oc· 9600 SDS Client ].

Installation Client setup SDS

l Insert the latest Controller installation CD-ROM in the Service

Laptop.
l Run [ sdsclnt.exe ] in the [ sds_client_setup ] directory; installation
folder c:\windows\temp\sdsclnt
Note: Close all running applications, e.g. Notes.
l Run [ setup.exe ] from c:\windows\temp\sdsclnt
l The start up screen appears.
l Select [Next ]
l Select [ Yes ] in the Software license agreement screen.
l Select [ Finish ] in the Setup complete screen.

Installation DAO software

l Insert the latest Controller installation CD-ROM in the Service

Laptop.
l Run [ Dao_3.5.exe ]; installation folder c:\windows\temp
l Run [ setup.exe ] in the c:\windows\temp\Disk1 ] directory
l The startup screen appears.
l Press [ Next ].
l Select only [ Jet 3.5 ] in the Select Components screen and press [
Next ].
l Deselect all in the next Select Components screen and press [ Next
].
l Select [ OK ] in the Information screen.

04.06.2002 16
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

Notes SDS session

Explanation SDS session

The SDS session starts and controls the SDS Session for WebSDS (on the Service Laptop or Controller) or
NotesSDS (on Service laptop).
Within the Notes SDS also a sds_log.mdb file (showing all system SDS settings) can be viewed.
A little icon (sds) on the screen is shown in the NotesSDS.

Settings in SDS session:

Host
The following entries are possible:

l NotesSDS on the service laptop: The default controller TCP/IP address is shown. Replace the address by
service to run the NotesSDS.
l WebSDS on the service laptop: The default of the Controller TCP/IP address is shown. Replace the
address by service to run the WebSDS.
l WebSDS on the controller: The default controller TCP/IP address is shown. This address is OK to run the
Web SDS. In case the controller is not connected to a network use: localhost.
l In case a sds_log.mdb file must be viewed via NotesSDS, use local as an entry.

Password
The service password is required to access the SDS

Start / Stop
Start / Stop button to start / stop the SDS session.

Note:
Make sure that you always STOP the SDS session before leaving the NotesSDS or WebSDS.

Message
Actual status message of the SDS session.

System information
System type: indication of the used system (in this case Oc· 9600).

Controller status
On-line: while printing / plotting the technician is able to read out machine information e.g. counters. It is not
possible to change parameters or activate outputs while online.
Off-Line: technician has full access to the system.

Permanent error
Iindication of a permanent error

Remove / test 30
Activate test 30 to reset the permanent error.

04.06.2002 17
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

04.06.2002 18
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 30 Reset PE ]

Test Name Description Remark

30 [ Reset PE ] All active faults can be resetted via This test is not available as a
this test. The active faults are separate test within SDS but is a part
displayed. of the SDS session component.

04.06.2002 19
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 31 Log and Reset the fault and the service counters ]

Analysis tests give information for fault finding e.g.,about the number of occurred errors since the last visit of the
service technician.

Test Name Description Remark

31 Log and Reset the fault All fault counters and service counters become resetted
and the service counters via this test.
Further all counters will be updated in the fault history.
In general this test will be activated , by the technician, as
one of the last steps before disconnecting the service
laptop from the CONTROLLER

04.06.2002 20
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 32 Display the last error logging ]

Analysis tests give information for fault finding e.g.,about the number of occurred errors since the last visit of the
service technician.
Test Name Description Remark
32 Display the The last 15 faults are displayed. Information presented for each
last error fault are:
logging * History, after which visit the error was generated, i.e. 0 is previous
visit, 1 is the visit before that etc..
* Name; description of the fault
* Counter; number of times the fault has occurred
* Copy counter, value of the copy counter at the fault moment
* Date; at the fault moment
* Time; at the fault moment

The information is displayed in 4 categories:

* 32.1 Last errors

* 32.2 Last system errors (only FE, PE, MRE)

* 32.3 Last errors in service mode

* 32.4 Last system errors in service mode (only FE, PE and MRE)

04.06.2002 21
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 32.1 Display the last errors ]

Analysis tests give information for fault finding e.g.,about the number of occurred errors since the last visit of the
service technician.

Test Name Description Remark

32.1 Display the last errors The last 15 faults are displayed. Information presented for Similar to Oc·
each fault are: 9800
* History, after which visit the error was generated, i.e. 0 is
previous visit, 1 is the visit before that etc..
* Name; description of the fault
* Counter; number of times the fault has occurred
* Copy counter, value of the copy counter at the fault
moment
* Date; at the fault moment
* Time; at the fault moment

The information is displayed in 4 categories:

* 32.1 Last errors
* 32.2 Last system errors (only FE, PE, MRE)
* 32.3 Last errors in service mode
* 32.4 Last system errors in service mode (only FE, PE
and MRE)

04.06.2002 22
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 32.2 Display the last system errors ]

Analysis tests give information for fault finding e.g.,about the number of occurred errors since the last visit of the
service technician.

Test Name Description Remark

32.2 Display the last system The last 15 faults are displayed. Information presented for Similar to Oc·
errors each fault are: 9800
* History, after which visit the error was generated, i.e. 0 is
previous visit, 1 is the visit before that etc..
* Name; description of the fault
* Counter; number of times the fault has occurred
* Copy counter, value of the copy counter at the fault
moment
* Date; at the fault moment
* Time; at the fault moment

The information is displayed in 4 categories:

* 32.1 Last errors
* 32.2 Last system errors (only FE, PE, MRE)
* 32.3 Last errors in service mode
* 32.4 Last system errors in service mode (only FE, PE
and MRE)

04.06.2002 23
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 32.3 Display the last errors in service mode ]

Analysis tests give information for fault finding e.g.,about the number of occurred errors since the last visit of the
service technician.

Test Name Description Remark

32.3 Display the last errors in The last 15 faults are displayed. Information presented for Similar to Oc·
service mode each fault are: 9800
* History, after which visit the error was generated, i.e. 0 is
previous visit, 1 is the visit before that etc..
* Name; description of the fault
* Counter; number of times the fault has occurred
* Copy counter, value of the copy counter at the fault
moment
* Date; at the fault moment
* Time; at the fault moment

The information is displayed in 4 categories:

* 32.1 Last errors
* 32.2 Last system errors (only FE, PE, MRE)
* 32.3 Last errors in service mode
* 32.4 Last system errors in service mode (only FE, PE
and MRE)

04.06.2002 24
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 32.4 Display the last system errors in service mode ]

Analysis tests give information for fault finding e.g.,about the number of occurred errors since the last visit of the
service technician.

Test Name Description Remark

32 Display the last system The last 15 faults are displayed. Information presented for Similar to Oc·
errors in service mode each fault are: 9800
* History, after which visit the error was generated, i.e. 0 is
previous visit, 1 is the visit before that etc..
* Name; description of the fault
* Counter; number of times the fault has occurred
* Copy counter, value of the copy counter at the fault
moment
* Date; at the fault moment
* Time; at the fault moment

The information is displayed in 4 categories:

* 32.1 Last errors
* 32.2 Last system errors (only FE, PE, MRE)
* 32.3 Last errors in service mode
* 32.4 Last system errors in service mode (only FE, PE
and MRE)

04.06.2002 25
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 34 Display the error top 10 ]

Analysis tests give information for fault finding e.g.,about the number of occurred errors since the last visit of the
service technician.
Test Name Description Remark
34 Display the The error top 10 is displayed, with the items; Only errors
error top 10 * Item following number occured during
* Fault number normal mode
* Name; description of the fault since the last
* Counter; number of times the fault has occurred visit are
displayed.
The information is displayed in 4 categories:

* 34.1 Absolute error top 10 (All errors)

* 34.2 Absolute system error top 10 (Only FE, PE and MRE)

04.06.2002 26
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 34.1 Display the absolute error top 10 ]

Analysis tests give information for fault finding e.g.,about the number of occurred errors since the last visit of the
service technician.

Test Name Description Remark

34.1 Display the absolute error The error top 10 is displayed, with the items; Similar to Oc·
top 10 * Item following number 9800
* Fault number
* Name; description of the fault
* Counter; number of times the fault has occurred
* Usage; After R2?
* Relative; After R2?

The information is displayed in 4 categories:

* 34.1 Absolute error top 10 (All errors)
* 34.2 Absolute system error top 10 (Only FE, PE and
MRE)
* 34.3 Relative error top 10 (All errors) After R2?
* 34.4 Relative system error top 10 (Only FE, PE and
MRE) After R2?

04.06.2002 27
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 34.2 Display the absolute system error top 10 ]

Analysis tests give information for fault finding e.g.,about the number of occurred errors since the last visit of the
service technician.

Test Name Description Remark

34.2 Display the absolute The error top 10 is displayed, with the items; Similar to Oc·
system error top 10 * Item following number 9800
* Fault number
* Name; description of the fault
* Counter; number of times the fault has occurred
* Usage; After R2?
* Relative; After R2?

The information is displayed in 4 categories:

* 34.1 Absolute error top 10 (All errors)
* 34.2 Absolute system error top 10 (Only FE, PE and
MRE)
* 34.3 Relative error top 10 (All errors) After R2?
* 34.4 Relative system error top 10 (Only FE, PE and
MRE) After R2?

04.06.2002 28
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 35 Display the error counters that contain errors ]

Analysis tests give information for fault finding e.g.,about the number of occurred errors since the last visit of the
service technician.

Test Name Description Remark

35 Display the error All logged errors are displayed in CAS-group order, with the Only errors
counters that contain items; occured during
errors * Fault number normal mode
* Name; description of the fault since the last
* Counter; number of times the fault has occurred visit are
* Usage; After R2? displayed.
* Relative; After R2?

04.06.2002 29
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 36 Display the consumable counters ]

Analysis tests give information for fault finding e.g.,about the number of occurred errors since the last visit of the
service technician.

Test Name Description Remark

36 Display the consumable Display’s all the actual consumable counters.
counters The following items are displayed for every
consumable:
l Consumable counter number
l Consumable counter name
l The current value

04.06.2002 30
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 37 Display the parameter settings ]

Analysis tests give information for fault finding e.g.,about the number of occurred errors since the last visit of the
service technician.

Test Name Description Remark

37 Display the parameter settings Displays all the presetted parameters.
The following items are displayed for every
parameter:
* Parameter name
* The current value
* The minimum range value
* The maximum range value

04.06.2002 31
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 38 Display the usage counters (only from R3.0 onwards)]

Analysis tests give information for fault finding e.g.,about the number of occurred errors since the last visit of the
service technician.

Test Name Description Remark

38 Display the usage Display’s all the service and marketing counters that are
counters counted.
The following items are displayed for every counter;

General total counters

- Total copy counter (equivalent of the hardware
counter)
- Total number off prints in BB
- Note: BB stands for number, length meters/feet and m
2/sqft.

Job related counters (since last service visit)

- Total number of jobs sorted in all supported copy job
possibilities, e.g. set jobs, matrix jobs and scan jobs.
- Total number of jobs sorted in all supported print job
possibilities languages e.g. HPGL, Tiff and interfaces
e.g. Centronics and SCSI.

04.06.2002 32
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 43 Make a blank print with a specified length ]

Test Name Description

43 Make a blank print with a specified This test will produce a blank print with the selected
length length(> 297 mm up to the maximum manual feed size
1219 mm)

04.06.2002 33
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 45 Print the system settings ]

Test Name Description Remark

45 Print the system settings A number of controller settings can be printed. Also accessible via
The following items can be selected and printed: SCP
- The total Oc·9600 configuration (options, settings,
versions, configuration, etc)
- All BIOS settings
- The hardware configuration of the NGC
- The software configuration of the NGC
- The status report of the total system (Windows NT
and Oc· 9600)

R2:
The following items are printed:
- All settings available within the "settings
editor"application
(Non default settings are printed BOLD) (After R2?)
- All settings of SDS test 90 up to 99 except for test 94
- Date and time of the generation of the print settings
- Number of pages and total set number

04.06.2002 34
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 50 Make the basic test print ]

System tests are tests that concern more than one function ( CAS-group).
They are used to diagnose the correct functioning of the system.
After selecting one of these tests, all the functions of the component concerned (PRINTER and/or
SCANNER/CONTROLLER/FOLDER) are activated.
This means that the start conditions are checked and the safety mechanisms are enabled.
Note : The CONTROLLER/Printhead test is not activated by the SDS system.

Test Name Description Remark

50 Make the basic test print Activating this test will produce the basic Test Print The number of
from the specified roll or paper sheet feeder with a prints can be
predefined test pattern. selected. (After
This print is intended for installation by the transporter R2?)
and adjustment by the customer. This print can give an
indication of the general print quality and must be used The print (bitmap) is
for the adjustments of the following items : printed from the
- PHD light intensity; CONTROLLER.
- DRIve 1:1 image length, Also accessible
- PRD leading edge adjustment, from Settings Editor
- PSF leading edge adjustment, (i.a.) application. (After
- PRD cutting length, R2?)
- PRDU width position,
- PRDM width position, (i.a.)
- PRDL width position, (i.a.)

04.06.2002 35
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 51 Make the advanced test print ]

System tests are tests that concern more than one function ( CAS-group).
They are used to diagnose the correct functioning of the system.
After selecting one of these tests, all the functions of the component concerned (PRINTER and/or
SCANNER/CONTROLLER/FOLDER) are activated.
This means that the start conditions are checked and the safety mechanisms are enabled.
Note : The CONTROLLER/Printhead test is not activated by the SDS system.

Test Name Description Remark

51 Make the advanced test Activating this test will produce the advanced Test Print The number of prints
print (Test 50 or 51) from the specified roll or paper sheet can be selected.
feeder with a predefined test-pattern. (After R2?)
This print is intended for the technician. The basis
functionality is exact the same as given in test 50. The print (bitmap) is
Further some more items are printed, necessary for printed from the
(print-quality) fault finding which are: CONTROLLER.

For the technician on side without advanced tooling

- A pattern of 1 cm. length, all even PHD leds on
- A pattern of 1 cm. length, all odd PHD leds on
- A pattern of 1 cm. length, all PHD leds on
- A ruler is printed with markings of typical print-quality
values, i.e. the circumference of the photoconductor
(drum) and PHD segments.

For S&S and R&D

- Advanced test images to check all print quality aspects.

04.06.2002 36
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 52 Make a demo print ]

Not in R1
Test Name Description Remark
52 Make a demo print Activating this test will produce a demo print. This test is also
This print contains a drawing of the Oc· 9600 system. accessable from
the SCP application

04.06.2002 37
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 70.1 Pre-installed System Installation ]

Activarte in order next SDS tests to set/adjust the Oc· 9600 configuration parameters.
System Installation 70.1.1
Printer Installation 70.1.2
Folder Installation 70.1.4
Settings of enable / disable, fold program, output delivery (stacker, belt unit) and more, see:
NGC: [ Settings editor ]
RD 4.21: [ Print manager ]

04.06.2002 38
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 70.1.1 Do the system installation, pre-installed ]

Activate next SDS tests, to set the system parameters.

Step test number Name

1 90 Set the system configuration
2 93 Set the international pPaper series
3 97 Preset the copy counter
4 98 Preset the first installation date

04.06.2002 39
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 70.1.2 Do the printer installation, pre-installed ]

Fill the toner unit with toner.

Some Opco's receive the engine with the developer unit filled with the developer.
Developer adjustments are set during the production.
Only do steps 4 - 6.

The other Opco's receive the engine without developer.

Do the steps 1 - 6. Activate in order next SDS tests to set the printer parameters.

Step Test Name ADJUST

M.
1 05-6-002 [ Activate the recover developer layer equal in the developer unit test ]
Note: keep test active for about 15 seconds to clean the OPC
2 23-6-001 Activate the drive motor at normal/low speed, to insert the developer
3 05-7-001 [ Adjust the developer toner concentration sensor ]
Note: Always with new fresh developer.
See: Adjustment of [ The toner concentration sensor 05B1 ].
4 50 [ Make the basic test print from roll 1]
Note: Make three prints from the 36" roll
Determine correct OD from third print (correct blackness and openess)
5 04-1-001 [ Display/set the adjustment setting of the blocknumber with the correct
light intensity ]
Note: Insert correct blocknumber from previous test
6 52 [ Make a demo print ]

04.06.2002 40
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 70.1.4 Do the folder installation, pre-installed ]

Activate next SDS tests, to set the folder parameters, only for the 2nd Fold.

Step Test Name

1 18-1-003 [ Display/set the diameter of the second fold input roll ]
2 18-7-002 [ Adjust the second fold ]
Set within KOS delivery on Stacker
3 18-1-005 [ Display/set the distance between the second fold start sensor and the
second fold input roll ]
4 52 [ Make a demo print ]

Note:
The folder is adjusted in M&L. The settings of test 70.1.4 are written down and stored in RAM on the
CPU-IO located in the 1st fold.
Because M&L can not manage to deliver the first fold + second fold as one unique pair, so during
installation of the system the parameters of FOL2 has to be filled into the BBR (see installation card).

04.06.2002 41
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 70.2 Full System Installation ]

All next actions have to be done when all settings are lost, e.g. system crash, broken CPU board, init BBR.

System installation, 70.2.1

Printer installation 70.2.2
Scanner installation 70.2.3
Folder installation 70.2.4

04.06.2002 42
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 70.2.1 Do the system installation, full installation ]

Activate next SDS tests, to set the system parameters.

Step Test Name

1 22-6-001 [ Reset the non volatile RAM of the printer ]
2 22-6-021 [ Reset the non volatile RAM of the scanner ]
3 90 [ Set the printer / scanner / controller / folder configuration ]
4 22-6-041 [ Reset the non volatile RAM of the folder ]
5 91 [ Configuration identification and serial numbers ]
6 93 [ Set the international paper series ]
7 95 [ Modification records ] (After R2?)
8 97 [ Preset the copy counter ]
9 98 [ Preset the first installation date ]

04.06.2002 43
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 70.2.2 Do the printer Installation, full installation ]

Fill the toner unit with toner

Activate in order next SDS tests to set the printer parameters.

Step Test Name ADJUSTM

.
1 05-6-002 [ Activate the recover developer layer equal in the developer unit test ]
Note: keep test active for about 15 seconds to clean the OPC
2 23-6-001 [ Activate the drive motor at normal/slow speed ], to insert the developer

3 05-1-002 [ Display the developer toner concentration sensor sensivity ]

4 05-7-001 [ Adjust the developer toner concentration sensor ]
Note: Always with new fresh developer.
See: Adjustment of [ The toner concentration sensor 05B1 ].
5 50 [ Make the basic test print ] from roll 1
Note: Make three prints from the 36" roll
Determine correct OD from third print (correct blackness and openess)
6 04-1-001 [ Display/set the adjustment setting of the blocknumber with correct
light intensity ]
Note: Insert correct blocknumber from previous test
7 12-1-002 [ Display/set the length between leading edge and marker "C" value ]
8 23-1-002 [ Display/set the length between marker "A" to "B" ]
9 15-7-001 [ Adjust the static deviation of the paper transport input sensor on the
measured length ]
10 12-7-001 [ Adjust the upper paper roll drawer cutting length roll 1 ]
11 12-7-002 [ Adjust the upper paper roll drawer cutting length roll 2 ]
12 12-7-003 [ Adjust the middle paper roll drawer cutting length roll 3 ]
13 12-7-004 [ Adjust the middle paper roll drawer cutting length roll 4 ]
14 10-7-005 [ Adjust the lower paper roll drawer cutting length roll 5 ]
15 12-7-006 [ [Adjust the lower paper roll drawer cutting length roll 6 ]
16 50 [ Make the basic test print ] from roll 1
17 12-1-008 [ Display/set the upper paper roll drawer length between side edge and
marker “F” ]
18 50 [ Make the basic test print ] from roll 3
19 12-1-026 [ Display/set the middle paper roll drawer length between side edge and
marker “F” ]
20 50 [ Make the basic test print ] from roll 5
21 12-1-046 [ Display/set the lower paper roll drawer length between side edge and
marker “F” ]
22 50 [ Make the basic test print ] from sheet feeder 1
23 15-1-002 [ Display/set the length between leading edge and marker " C" ]
24 15-1-006 [ Display/set the manual paper transport length value between side
edge and marker "E" ]
25 50 [ Make the basic test print ] from manual feed ]
26 13-1-002 [ Display/set the length between leading edge and marker “ D” ]
27 13-1-005 [ Display/set the upper paper sheet feeder length value between side
edge and marker “E” ]
28 50 [ Make the basic test print ] from sheet feeder 2 ]
29 13-1-024 [ Display/set the middle paper sheet feeder length value between side
edge and marker “E” ]
30 50 [ Make the basic test print ] from sheet feeder 3 ]
31 13-1-044 [ Display/set the lower paper sheet feeder length value between side
edge and marker “E” ]
33 52 [ Make a demo print ]

04.06.2002 44
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

04.06.2002 45
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 70.2.3 Do the scanner installation, full installation ]

Activate next SDS tests, to set the system parameters.

Step Test Name ADJUST

M.
1 10-7-003 [ Adjust the scanning CCD gain ]
2 10-7-001 [ Adjust the scanning CCD alignment ]
3 10-7-003 [ Adjust the scanning CCD gain ]
4 10-7-002 [ Adjust the scanning CCD focus ]
5 56 [ [SCA] Adjust SCA ] (After R2?)
6 10-7-004 [ Adjust the scanning 1:1 width and right alignment ]
7 09-1-001 [ Display/set the 1:1 image length correction value of the scanner ]
8 09-1-002 [ Display/set the original present sensor leading edge correction value ]
9 09-1-003 [ Display/set the original present sensor trailing edge correction value ]

04.06.2002 46
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 70.2.4 Do the folder installation, full installation ]

Activate next SDS tests, to set the system parameters.

Step Test Name ADJUST

M.
1 18-1-001 [ Display/set the diameter of the first fold input roll ]
2 18-1-003 [ Display/set the diameter of the second fold input roll ]
3 50 [ Make the basic test print ]
4 18-7-001 [ Adjust first fold ]
5 50 [ Make the basic test print ] delivery on FFD
6 15-1-016 [ Display/set the paper transport rotation time ]
7 50 [ Make the basic test print ] 5 times
8 18-1-002 [ Display/set the distance between the first fold start sensor and the first fold
input roll ]
9 18-7-002 [ Adjust second fold ]
10 50 [ Make the basic test print ] 5 times, delivery on Stacker
11 18-1-005 [ Display/set the distance between the second fold start sensor and the
second fold input roll ]
12 52 [ Make a demo print ]

04.06.2002 47
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 70 [Only R1] Installation / Mem. and Softw. management ]

General

Note:
Since the machine will be pre-installed at M&L the installation tests need not all to be done.
If pre-installed machine, do only the tests marked with >>.
[ 70.1 SYSTEM INSTALLATION ]

Step Test Name M&L TP Not Tech.

in R1
1 22-6-001 [ (PRT) CON initialise Non Volatile Data ] X x
2 22-6-041 [ (FOL) CON initialise Non Volatile Data ] X x
3 90 >> [ Configuration ] X X x
Note: Only do this test if the configuration on the printer
panel is incorrect and / or a folder or HRT should be
added to the system
4 22-6-004 >> [ [PRT] CONtrol Automatic configuration] X X x

5 91 [ Serial numbers and configuration identification ] X X x

[ 70.2 PRINTER INSTALLATION ]

Step Test Name M&L TP Not Tech.

in R1
1 05-6-002 >> [ [PRT] Recover developer layer equalisation ] x X x
Note: Keep all covers closed. Keep test active for about
15 seconds to clean the OPC
2 23-6-001 >> [ [PRT] DRIMO ],(forward, normal speed) insert the x X x
developer during this time
3 05-1-002 [ [PRT] DEV TONer CONcentration Sensor sensivity ] x X x
4 05-7-001 >> [ [PRT] DEV TONer CONcentration Sensor ] x X x
Note 1: Keep all covers closed
Note 2: Only if there is a note with the engine, that the
engine is shipped with fresh new developer. If no note,
the sensor is already adjusted by M&L.
Note 3: Always only with fresh new developer.
See: Adjustment of [ The toner concentration sensor
05B1 ]
5 50 >> [ [PRT] Test print (basic) from roll 1 x X x
Note: Make three prints from the 36" roll
Determine correct OD from third print (correct blackness
and openess)
6 04-1-001 >> [ [PRT] PHD light intensity ] x X x
Note: Insert correct blocknumber from previous test
7 23-1-002 [ [PRT] Length "A" to "B" (1:1 scale) ] x X x
8 12-1-002 [ [PRT] PRD leading edge position to "C" ] x X x
9 15-7-001 [ [PRT] Static deviation PTRINSE ] x X x
10 12-7-001 [ [PRT] UPRD cutting length roll 1 ] x X x
11 12-7-002 [ [PRT] UPRD cutting length roll 2 ] x X x
12 12-7-003 [ [PRT] MPRD cutting length roll 3 ] x X x
13 12-7-004 [ [PRT] MPRD cutting length roll 4 ] x X x
14 12-7-005 [ [PRT] LPRD cutting length roll 5 ] x X x
15 12-7-006 [ [PRT] LPRD cutting length roll 6 ] x X x
16 50 [ [PRT] Test print (basic) from roll 1 ] x X x
17 12-1-008 [ [PRT] PRDU Length between side edge and marker “ F” x x

04.06.2002 48
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

]
18 50 [ [PRT] Test print (basic) from roll 3 ] x X x
19 12-1-026 [ [PRT] PRDM Length between side edge and marker “F” x x
]
20 50 [ [PRT] Test print (basic) from roll 5[ x X x
21 12-1-046 [ [PRT] PRDL Length between side edge and marker “ F” x x
]
22 50 [ [PRT] Test print (basic) from sheet feeder 1 ] x X x
23 13-1-002 [ [PRT] Length leading edge to “D” ] x X x
24 13-1-005 [ [PRT] UPSF Length between side edge and marker “ E” x x
]
25 50 [ [PRT] Test print (basic) from sheet feeder 2 ] x x
26 13-1-024 [ [PRT] MPSF Length between side edge and marker “E” x x
]
27 50 [ [PRT] Test print (basic) from sheet feeder 3 ] x x
28 13-1-044 [ [PRT] LPSF Length between side edge and marker “ E” ] x x
29 50 [ [PRT] Test print (simple) from manual feed ] x X x
30 15-1-002 [ [PRT] PTR Manual Feed leading edge position to "C" ] x x
31 15-1-003 [ PRT] Manual feed with position ] x x
32 52 >> [ Demo Print ] x X x

[ 70.3 SCANNER INSTALLATION ]

[ 70.4 FOLDER INSTALLATION ]

[ 70.5 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION ]

[ 70.6 CUSTOMER INSTALLATION ]

04.06.2002 49
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 71 Backup the system data ( V2.0 / V2.1) ]

Test Name Description Remark

71 [ Backup System data ] When the backup mechanism is activated, 1. The created directory
the following actions are performed: has to be copied to a
different medium, e.g.
1. On the controller PC, a directory is logfloppy, that stays with
created in the c:\service\visits directory with the system.
the current date (YYYYMMDD) as directory This could be done via;
name. - Copy the directory to
Example: c:\service\visits\199990323 the service laptop
connected to the
2. The current KOS/SAS settings files controller.
(current.sas and current.kos) are copied - Use WinZip to
into the directory created in step 1. compress the directory
3. The current SDS setting file and store it on the
(sds_log.mdb) and the SDS definition file logflop.
(sds_info.mdb) are copied into the directory 2. Via this set of back-up
created in step 1. files, it is possible to
4. The OTS file (datadump.ots) is generated restore a system to the
and placed into the directory created in step status at the backup-time
1. via SDS test 72.

04.06.2002 50
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 71 Backup the system data ( V3.0. / V3.0.1) ]

Test Name Description Remark

71 Backup the SDS and The following options are possible: 1. The created directory
Customer system data has to be copied to a
Subset: different medium, e.g.
logfloppy, that stays with
Target: the system.
This could be done via;
When the backup mechanism is activated, - Copy the directory to
the following actions are performed: the service laptop
connected to the
1. On the controller PC, a directory is
controller.
created in the c:\service\visits directory with
- Use WinZip to
the current date (YYYYMMDD) as directory
compress the directory
name.
and store it on the
Example: c:\service\visits\199990323
logflop.
2. The current KOS/SAS settings files
2. Via this set of back-up
(current.sas and current.kos) are copied
files, it is possible to
into the directory created in step 1.
restore a system to the
3. The current SDS setting file status at the backup-time
(sds_log.mdb) and the SDS definition file via SDS test 72.
(sds_info.mdb) are copied into the directory
created in step 1.

4. The OTS file (datadump.ots) is generated

and placed into the directory created in step
1.

04.06.2002 51
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 72 Restore the system data ( V2.0. / V2.1) ]

Test Name Description

72 [ Restore System Before activating the restore mechanism, the back-up files (created by
data ] SDS test 71): sds_log.mdb, current.sas and current.kos must be copied
into the c:\service\restore directory.

When the test activated, the following actions are performed:

1. A window appears to choose the specific targets where the parameters /

consumables have to be sent..
The service engineer can make a distinction between available targets:
- Printer only
- Scanner only
- Folder only
- Controller only
- total (default)

2. The back-up settings file sds_log.mdb, located in the c:\service\restore

directory on the controller PC, is copied into the c:\oce\apps\sds directory.

3. The KOS/SAS setting files[ current.sas ] and [ current.kos ], located in

the c:\service\restore directory on the controller PC, are copied into the
c:\oce\apps\applications\settings directory.

After the test, following actions have to be done:

1. First close the SDS session

2. The [ current.kos ] file has to be opened and applied in the Settings

Editor.
(log in as K.O, open file, select apply, log out as K.O. and save the
settings.

3. The [ current.sas ] file has to be opened and applied in the Settings

Editor.
(log in as S.A., change view to SA Settings, open file, select apply,
log out as S.A.

4. Reboot the controller and switch off / on all components.

5. Execute the configuration SDS test 90

04.06.2002 52
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 72 Restore the system data ( V3.0 / V3.0.1) ]

Test Name Description

72 Restore the SDS The following options are possible:
and Customer
system settings Subset:

l Standard:
Restore of
l SDS settings (sds_log.mdb, sds_info.mdb)
l Actual customer settings (current.sas, curent.kos, current.sm,
adt.cfg) (See remark)
l All:
Restore of
l SDS settings (sds_log.mdb, sds_info.mdb)
l All customer settings files on the PLC (*.sas, *.kos, *.sm, adt.cfg)
(See remark)
l All accounting files on the PLC
l Settings Editor:
Restore of
l All customer settings files on the PLC (*.sas, *.kos, *.sm, adt.cfg)
(See remark)
l SDS:
Restore of
l SDS settings (sds_log.mdb, sds_info.mdb)
l Accounting:
Restore of
l All accounting files on the PLC

Target:

Remarks:

The files for the settings editor and scan manager have to be opened
and applied in these applications before the settings are loaded by the
system.
Version 3.0.1

When the test is activated, the following actions are performed:

1. From V3.0 onwards, a window appears to choose the directory with the
files to restore
(a:\[current date], c:oce\backup\[your system]\[current date] or
c:\Service\visits\[current date])
The service engineer can make a distinction between available subsets and
targets.
Choose "Standard/total" for upgrade purposes.
Choose "All/total" for restore purposes within the same release; for this
option you need the complete backup that was made through test 71.

2. The back-up settings file sds_log.mdb, is automatically copied into the

04.06.2002 53
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

c:\oce\apps\sds directory and applied..

3. The KOS/SAS/SM setting files [Adt.cfg], [ current.sas ], [ current.kos ]

and [ current.sm ], are automatically copied into the
c:\oce\apps\applications\settings directory.

After the test, following actions have to be done:

1. First close the SDS session

2. Go to the directory c:\oce\apps\applications\settings

3. Open the Setting Editor window, log in as Service Operator and select
view KO settings

4. The [current.kos ] file has to be opened and applied in the Settings

Editor.
(open the file and select apply).

5. Select view SAS settings.

6. The [ current.sas] file has to be opened and applied in the Settings

Editor.
(open the file and select apply).

7. Open the Scan Manager window, log in as Service Operator.

8. The [ current.sm ] file has to be opened in the Scan Manager.

(open the file and log off from the Scan Manager)
If the Scan Manager is not present in the "Launcher", the system has to
be rebooted in order for the application to be activated.

9. Reboot the controller, and switch off / on all components.

Version 3.0
Release 2.1

04.06.2002 54
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 73 Download the system software ]

Note:
To download the software, the controller must be booted in Diagnosis Mode ! ! !
from R2.1 via the
[ NGC DiagMode.bat ] icon on the desktop.
For an extended description of SDS test 73, see:
Test Name Description Remark
73 Download the Downloading of several kinds of software The following upgrades will not be done
system (firmware) applications. by means of the software downloading:
software These are: - NGC Windows NT upgrades
- PRINTER embedded software upgrades - NGC Oc· 9600 upgrades (normal
(Normal releases and patches) releases and patches)
- SCANNER embedded software upgrades - Folder, Belt unit, Reinforcement unit
(Normal releases and patches) upgrades

Starting with Option: [ Select new version ]:

the download Via this option you can browse to an upgrade file. (Normally this will be the case for a
settings software patch)
(Step 1)
Option: [ Select an already on the controller installed version ] :
Via this option you can select an already pre-installed version on the controller.
(Normally this will be the case during a normal system installation)

Install only Boot software if it's necessary to upgrade the version. (If its fails you have to
order a new CPU board).
Check the Check if all the download settings are correct.
download
settings After going into the download mode, check if the printer or the scanner goes into
(Step 2) download mode on the operator panel.:
If the Printer doesn't go into Download mode you can do it manually by:
Switching on the power while pressing simultaneously the 3 panel buttons: on line button
+ left selection button + red stop button.

If the Scanner doesn't go into Download mode you can do it manually by;
Switching on the power while pressing simultaneously the 3 panel buttons: print button +
nummerique 1 key button + 1st left selection button under the screen.

Disregard any messages Waiting for Controller on the Printer / Scanner panel. This is
normal behaviour because the test is in Diagnostic Mode.
Start Do not power down any component while downloading the software.
downloading
(Step 3)
Downloading Wait until the progress meter is showing 100%.

04.06.2002 55
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

(Step 4)
Step 5 After finishing the test, the controller has to be rebooted in Normal mode.
From R2.1 via the [ NGC Normal Mode.bat ] icon on the desktop.

04.06.2002 56
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 90 Set the system configuration ]

From R2
Test Name Remark
90 Set the system configuration Each system component has his own configuration settings.
These settings can be pre-set in the sub-system NOVRAM or are
automatically determined by the component.
Activating of test 90 initialise each sub-system to find the
configuration settings that are automatically determined.
Before executing this test all components must be switched on.
The configuration of each sub-system can be
viewed/changed/overruled in the following tests:

90.1 Printer configuration

90.2 Scanner configuration

90.3 Controller configuration

90.4 Folder configuration

R1 info

[ 90.1 PRINTER CONFGURATION ]

[ 90.3 CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION ]
[ 90.4 FOLDER CONFIGURATION ]

04.06.2002 57
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 90.1 Set the printer configuration ]

From R2
Test Name Remark
90.1 Set the printer configuration Each system component has his own configuration
settings.
These settings can be preset in the sub-system NOVRAM
or automatically determined by this test

Note: For R1 this test is available by the SDS or KOS setting editor.
By the SDS setting editor, the following parameters are available:
CDT present
Folder present

Number Name Automatic detected Remark

by test 22-6-004
1 [ Printer ] yes present/not present
2 [ Number of PRD rolls ] yes 2/3|/4/5/6
3 [ Number of PSF ] yes 1/2/3
4 [ Paper switch (output side) ] yes present/not present
5 [ Dew preventor ] no present/not present
6 [Copy Delivery Tray ] no present/not present

Notes: The paper compartment consists of a compilation of paper rolls and paper sheet feeders.
The physical configuration is read automatically after activating the SDS-test 90.
The next combinations can occur :

nr. of rolls nr. of paper sheet feeders

2 0 1 2 3
3 0 1 2 3
4 0 1 2 3
5 0 1 x x
6 0 1 x x

The configuration of the paper compartment can be read by means of :

1. PSF(U|M|L)CONFIG : if this input is active the related paper sheet feeder is present.
2. PRD(U|M|L)CONFIG : this input will be active if the driver of the related paper roll is present and enabled (by

04.06.2002 58
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

PRD(U|M|L)FEDMOEN)

The configuration of the PTRIRTSW can be read by means of activating the PTRIRTSWMO and check for
pulses of PTRIRTSWSE.

04.06.2002 59
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 90.2 Set the scanner configuration ]

From R2
Test Name Remark
90.2 Set the scanner configuration Each system component has his own configuration
settings.
These settings can be preset in the sub-system NOVRAM
or automatically determined by this test

Number Name Remark

1 [ Scanner ] present/not present
2 [ Original Delivery Tray ] present/not present

04.06.2002 60
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 90.3 Set the controller configuration ]

From R2
Test Name Remark
90.3 Set the controller configuration Each system component has his own configuration
settings.
These settings can be preset in the sub-system NOVRAM
or automatically determined by this test

Note: For R1 this test is available by the SDS or KOS setting editor.
By the SDS setting editor, the following parameters are available:
Controller type option = 0 ... 999 (not used by NGC
Set memory size option = 524288 Kb / 33554432 Kb
Orange zone threshold option = 102400 Kb / 2097152 Kb
Red zone threshold option = 51200 Kb / 1048576 Kb

Number Name Automatic detected by test 90 Remark

1 [ Controller type ] yes Repro Desk / NGC
2 [ Size set-memory disk 1 ] yes ?MB
3 [ Centronics board ] no
4 [ Token ring board ] no
5 [ Ethernet combo board ] no

Note: Some software applications are enabled via password floppies.

If such a application must be enabled, for the first time on that particular system, the operator is
prompted to insert the password floppy in the CONTROLLER.
If then, after disabling of a software option and again enabling of it, the password diskette is no longer
necessarry.

04.06.2002 61
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 90.4 Set the folder configuration ]

From R2
Test Name Remark
90.4 Set the folder configuration Each system component has his own configuration
settings.
These settings can be preset in the sub-system NOVRAM
or automatically determined by this test

Note: For R1 this test is available by the SDS or KOS setting editor.

By the KOS setting editor, (KOS/JOB/Printer/Finishing/Delivery) the following parameters are available:
Set first fold
Set fold on stack
Set fold on belt 1
Set fold on belt 2
Set fold on auto belt

Number Name Remark

1 [ Folder ] present/not present
2 [ Reinforcement Unit ] present/not present
3 [ Belt Unit ] present/not present

04.06.2002 62
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ (R2.1) 91 System serial number and configuration identification

: R1 only ]

Not in R1
Test Name Remark
91 [ System serial number and Each system component has his own serial numbers.
configuration identification ] These numbers can be pre-set in the sub-system NOVRAM
via activating test 91. All numbers are checked for possible
errors.

Serial number total :

Serial number total system (equal to serial number engine)

The total system serial number is equal to the engine serial
number. This number is also used in combination with the
password floppies to enable certain system functionality.
(See
test 90.3) (In case the system is “scanner only” the scanner
serial number is used for this purpose)

Configuration identification :

The configuration identification number is calculated

automatically, depending on the configuration, test 90,
according to the following table:

Configuration Identification

[ 91.1 PRINTER SERIAL NUMBER ]

Test Name Description Remark

91.1 [ Printer serial numbers ] The serial number of the Oc· 9600 printer units Serial numbers are
must be filled in under this test. The following normally automatically
items must be filled in (X identified) if applicable; filled into SDS during
- Serial number Engine the installation of the
- Serial number Stand controller software.
- Serial number Upper Paper Roll Drawer (1 roll) (Configuration floppy).
- Serial number Middle Paper Roll Drawer (1 roll)

- Serial number Lower Paper Roll Drawer (1 roll)

- Serial number Upper Paper Roll Drawer (2 roll)
- Serial number Middle Paper Roll Drawer (2 roll)

- Serial number Lower Paper Roll Drawer (2 roll)

- Serial number Upper Sheet-feeder (96270xxxx)
- Serial number Middle Sheet-feeder (96270xxxx)
- Serial number Lower Sheet-feeder (96270xxxx)

04.06.2002 63
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 91.2 SCANNER SERIAL NUMBER ]

[ 91.3 CONTROLLER SERIAL NUMBER ]

Test Name Description Remark

91.3 [ ConTRoller serial The serial number of the Oc· 9600 Serial numbers are normally
numbers ] controller unit must be filled in under this automatically filled into SDS
test. The following items must be filled in during the installation of the
(X identified) if applicable; controller software.
- Serial number CONTROLLER (Configuration floppy).

[ 91.4 FOLDER SERIAL NUMBER ]

Not in R1
Test Name Description Remark
91.4 [ FOLder serial The serial number of the Oc· 9600 controller Serial numbers are
numbers ] units must be filled in under this test. The normally automatically
following items must be filled in (X identified) if filled into SDS during the
applicable; installation of the
* Serial number First Fold controller software.
* Serial number Second Fold (Configuration floppy).
* Serial number Belt unit
* Serial number Reinforcement unit

04.06.2002 64
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 91 Configuration identification and serial numbers ]

From R2
Test Name Remark
91 Configuration identification and The system as whole has a certain configurtation
serial numbers identification number depending on the installed system
components.
The system has a serial number total system which
depends on the configuration of the system.
Each system component has his own serial number. These
numbers can be preset in the sub-system NOVRAM via
activating test 91. All numbers are checked for possible
errors. The configuration identification and serial numbers
can be viewed / changed / overruled in the following tests:

91.1 System configuration identification

91.2 System serial numbers

91.3 Printer serial numbers

91.4 Scanner serial numbers

91.5 Controller serial numbers

91.6 Folder serial numbers

91.1 System Configuaration identification (After R2?)

(After R2?)
Test Name Description Remark
91.1 [ SYStem configuaration The configuration
identification ] identification number is
calculated automatically,
depending on the
configuration, test 90,
according to the table
below:

(After R2?)
Config. ID 9656 9657 9658
[ Oc· 9600 engine ] X X X
[ Folder, 1st fold ] X X
[ Folder, 2nd fold/FFD ] X
[ Folder, 2nd fold/FFD/RIU ] X
[ NGC ] X X X

Config. ID 9676 9677 9678

[ Oc· 9600 engine ] X X X
[ Folder, 1st fold ] X X
[ Folder, 2nd fold/FFD ] X
[ Folder, 2nd fold/FFD/RIU ] X
[ NGC ] X X X
[ Scanner ] X X X

Config. ID 9666 9667 9668

[ Oc· 9600 engine ] X X X
[ Folder, 1st fold ] X X
[ Folder, 2nd fold/FFD ] X
[ Folder, 2nd fold/FFD/RIU ] X

04.06.2002 65
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ RD Controller ] X X X

Config. ID 9686 9687 9688

[ Oc· 9600 engine ] X X X
[ Folder, 1st fold ] X X
[ Folder, 2nd fold/FFD ] X
[ Folder, 2nd fold/FFD/RIU ] X
[ RD Controller ] X X X
[ Scanner ] X X X

91.2 SYStem serial number

[ 91.3 Printer serial numbers ]

[ 91.4 Scanner serial number ]

[ 91.5 Controller serial number ]

[ 91.6 Folder serial number ]

04.06.2002 66
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 91.1 Set the system configuration identification ]

Test Name Description Remark

91.1 Set the system The configuration
configuration identification identification number has
to be filled in according the
table below:

Config. ID 9656 9657 9658

[ Oc· 9600 engine ] X X X
[ Folder, 1st fold ] X X
[ Folder, 2nd fold/FFD ] X
[ Folder, 2nd fold/FFD/RIU X
]
[ NGC ] X X X

Config. ID 9676 9677 9678

[ Oc· 9600 engine ] X X X
[ Folder, 1st fold ] X X
[ Folder, 2nd fold/FFD ] X
[ Folder, 2nd fold/FFD/RIU X
]
[ NGC ] X X X
[ Scanner ] X X X

Config. ID 9666 9667 9668

[ Oc· 9600 engine ] X X X
[ Folder, 1st fold ] X X
[ Folder, 2nd fold/FFD ] X
[ Folder, 2nd fold/FFD/RIU X
]
[ RD Controller ] X X X

Config. ID 9686 9687 9688

[ Oc· 9600 engine ] X X X
[ Folder, 1st fold ] X X
[ Folder, 2nd fold/FFD ] X
[ Folder, 2nd fold/FFD/RIU X

04.06.2002 67
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

]
[ RD Controller ] X X X
[ Scanner ] X X X

04.06.2002 68
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 91.2 Display the system serial number ]

Test Name Description Remark

91.2 Display the system serial The system serial number Can not be changed
number is equal to Printer serial
number.

04.06.2002 69
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 91.3 Set the printer serial number ]

Test Name Description Remark

91.3 Set the printer serial The serial number of the Oc· 9600 printer units The Printer serial
number must be filled in under this test. number is mandatory
The following items must be filled in if applicable: because it is needed to
- Serial number Engine set the Postscript option.
- Serial number Upper Paper Roll Drawer
- Serial number Middle Paper Roll Drawer
- Serial number Lower Paper Roll Drawer
- Serial number Upper Sheet-feeder
- Serial number Middle Sheet-feeder
- Serial number Lower Sheet-feeder

04.06.2002 70
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 91.4 Set the scanner serial number ]

Test Name Description Remark

91.4 Set the scanner serial The serial number of the Oc· 9600 Serial numbers are
number scanner units must be filled in under this normally automatically
test. filled in at M&L.
The following items must be filled in if
applicable:
- Serial number SCANNER

04.06.2002 71
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 91.5 Set the controller serial number ]

Test Name Description Remark

91.5 Set the controller The serial number of the Oc· 9600 Serial numbers are normally
serial number controller unit must be filled in under this automatically filled into SDS
test. during the installation of the
The following items must be filled in if controller software
applicable; (Configuration floppy).
- Serial number CONTROLLER

04.06.2002 72
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 91.6 Set the folder serial numbers ]

Test Name Description Remark

91.6 Set the folder serial The serial number of the Oc· 9600 controller Serial numbers are
numbers units must be filled in under this test. The normally automatically
following items must be filled in (X identified) if filled in at M&L.
applicable;
* Serial number First Fold
* Serial number Second Fold
* Serial number Belt unit
* Serial number Reinforcement unit

04.06.2002 73
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 93 Set the international paper series ]

Test Name Description Remark

93 Set the international paper One of the following paper Accessible via Settings
series series must be selected: Editor
- ISO
- ISO CARTOGRAPHIC
- ANSI
- ANSI E
- JIS B

04.06.2002 74
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 94 Display the passwords ]

Test Name Description Remark

94 Display the passwords Password read out for: Accessible via Setting
- Key operator Editor
- System administrator
- Repro operator.

04.06.2002 75
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 97 Preset the copy counter ]

Test Name Description Remark

97 Preset the copy counter 1. Copy counter can be read and preset. The copy counter
2. Furthermore the counting method of the value is shown
counter is set. only correct after
The operator can select meters, square a power-up of the
meters, feet or square feet. printer

04.06.2002 76
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 98 Preset the first installation date ]

From R2
Test Name Description Remark
98 Preset the first installation date First installation date can be read and
preset.

04.06.2002 77
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 20-0-001 Display the interfacing error counters of the controller

]

04.06.2002 78
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 20-1-001 Enable/disable the Oc· TDS600 processes to produce

tracing information into logfile(s) ]

Test Name Description Remark

20-1-001 Enable/disable the Oc· TDS600 This function allows to Tracing information is
processes to produce tracing enable/disable Oc· 9600 comparable with debug
information into logfile(s) processes to produce tracing information inside the Oc·9600
information. processes. This information
The files are stored in the should help the system
C:\OCE\NGC\LOG\DIAGNOSTI consultant to understand /
C directory. analyse the system behaviour
Two level of traces can be and to provide correct
enabled : information towards R&D.
- tracing level 1: inter process
communication relevant to The controller has to be
service are logged. rebooted
- tracing level 2: tracing level 1 +
insight process information
relevant to R&D support.

Values:
0 = disable
1 = level 1
2 = level 2

04.06.2002 79
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 20-1-002 Display/set the maximum size TDS600 tracing

logfile(s) ]

Test Name Description Remark

20-1-002 Display/set the maximum size This parameter defines the The minimum size of this file is:
TDS600 tracing logfile(s) maximum size of the functional 4,000 Byte
tracing logfile (module.trc). The default size is: 30,000 Byte
If this maximum is reached, the The maximum size is: 1,280,000
logfile will be copied to a file Byte
(module.old) and so on.

04.06.2002 80
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 20-1-006 Enable/disable tracing input data into logfile(s) ]

Test Name Description Remark

20-1-006 Enable/disable tracing input data This function allows to enable / The controller has to be
into logfile(s) disable the logging of the input rebooted.
data, as received from the host,
into a logfile.
The files are stored in the
C:\OCE\NGC\LOG\DIAGNOSTI
C directory.
If multiple printfiles are sent the
Oc· 9600, these printfiles are all
stored on the Oc· 9600, using
the name convention <
inputfile.number>.

The logfile can be used to check

the input data including the
received controll commands
(ticket / rcf).
Further you can view the files on
your laptop with a viewer, e.g.
Repro Desk.

04.06.2002 81
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 20-6-001 Activate the SPICE board test ]

Test Name Description Remarks

20-6-001 Activate the SPICE board This test tests the SPICE board.. (IMAGE-link In R2 this test is
test and CONTROL-link are tested.) To complete available in
this test it is necessary to connect together Diagnosis Mode
the scan input and the printer output. (loop
back, use your SPICE cable for this).
The test returns de status ok or failed,
indicating which part failed.

Information are logged in a logfile

spiceHwTest.log in the
C:\OCE\NGC\LOG\DIAGNOSTIC directory.

04.06.2002 82
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 20-6-002 Activate the set memory disk(s) and adapters ]

Test Name Description Remarks

20-6-002 Activate the set memory disk(s) This test tests:
and adapters the disks adapter(s)of the setmemory disks

each set memory disks, by listing the

number of detected setmemory disks and
checking each disks seperately.
The test displays the status of the adapter
(OK / Failed)
and the number of the adapter which
failed.
Each setmemory disk is tested by checking
the access/read/write operations. The test
retuns the status ok or failed. When a test
fail, we indicate the disknumber,and the
number of the adapter which controls the
defficient disk..

More Information are logged in a logfile

setMemHwTest.log under
OCEROOT/log/diagnostic area.

04.06.2002 83
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 20-6-003 Activate the Centronics board test ]

Test Name Description Remark

20-6-003 Activate the centronics board This test checks the parallel In R2 this test is available in
test port of the Centronics board. Diagnosis Mode
(To complete this test you have
to connect the OCE100 input to
the centronics mother board
output with a normalised
Centronics cable (IEEE 1284).
The tests displays the status OK
or failed. If the test fails
the reason of the failure is
displayed: driver error, cable
error unexpected error.

Information are logged in a

logfile centroHwTest.log under
OCEROOT/log/diagnostic area.

04.06.2002 84
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 20-6-013 Disable all tracing/logging tests of the Oc· TDS600 ]

Test Name Description Remarks

20-6-013 Disable all tracing/logging tests All tracing tests of the Oc·9600
of the Oc· TDS600 are disabled. This to prevent
unnecessary logging.

04.06.2002 85
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 20-6-020 Dump all the Oc· TDS600 configurations into Oc·

TDS600 conf-logfile ]

Test Name Description Remarks

20-6-020 Dump all the Oc· TDS600 The total Oc· 9600 configuration Depending on the
configurations into Oc· TDS600 (options, settings, versions, completeness of the status
conf-logfile configuration, etc) is dumped report.
into a Oc·9600conf-logfile.
This file
DumpOce9600Config.txt are
stored in the
C:\OCE\NGC\LOG\DIAGNOSTI
C directory.

04.06.2002 86
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 20-6-022 [CTR] Get diagnostic area from NGC : Only in R1 ]

Test Name Description Remarks

20-6-022 [CTR] Get diagnostic area from The logfiles functional tracing, File can be stored on the
NGC data image files, dump config, service laptop by means of
HW logfiles) are stored on a Explorer
floppy

04.06.2002 87
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 20-6-023 Clear the diagnostic area from controller ]

Test Name Description Remarks

20-6-023 Clear the diagnostic area from All HW logfiles, Oce 9600
controller Dump config, functionnal tracing

04.06.2002 88
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 20-6-025 Clear the error and warning log files ]

Test Name Description Remarks

20-6-025 Clear the error and warning log
files

04.06.2002 89
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 20-6-031 Clear the setmemory and spool-areas ]

NOTE : For R1 this test will be available in Diagosis Mode

Test Name Description Remarks
20-6-031 Clear the setmemory All temporary files, locks, In R2 this test is
and spool-areas directories are removed available in Diagnosis
from the system. Mode
This test will cleanup the
system resources, used
for temp. storage.

04.06.2002 90
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-1-025 Controller serial number : Only in R1]

Test Name Description Remark

22-1-025 [CTR] Controller serial number This parameter holds the serial Not visible on
number of the Reinforcement Unit. SDS -UI

04.06.2002 91
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-1-046 Display the controller Firmpack release number ]

Test Name Description Remark

22-1-046 Display the controller Firmpack Reflects the release number of the The firmpack
release number controller firmpack in the following release
way: number is
release aa.bb.cc is represented as a hardcoded in
number with 6 digits, so aabbcc. the software.
(e.g. release 1.15.1 will have the value
11501).

04.06.2002 92
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 25-0-001 Display the operator controller error counters ]

04.06.2002 93
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 09-1-001 Display/set the 1:1 image length correction value of

the scanner ]

Test Name Description Remark

09-1-001 Display/set the 1:1 image Adjusting the scan speed to Unit: 0.1%
length correction value of the achieve a correct 1:1 image Min. value: -50 (=95.0%)
scanner length in feed through direction Max. value: +50 (=105.0%)
This is achieved by applying a Default: 0 (=100.0%)
zoom factor to the scan speed.

04.06.2002 94
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 09-1-002 Display/set the original present sensor leading edge

correction value ]

Test Name Description Remark

09-1-002 Display/set the original present Adjusting offset and distance of Unit: 0.1 mm
sensor leading edge correction the leading edge. Min. value: -100 (= -10.0 mm)
value This is achieved by adding or Max. value: +100 (= +10.0 mm)
subtracting a length. Default: 0 (0.0 mm)

04.06.2002 95
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 09-1-003 Display/set the original present sensor trailing edge

correction value ]

Test Name Description Remark

09-1-003 Display/set the original present Adjusting offset and distance of Unit: 0.1 mm
sensor trailing edge correction the trailing edge. Min. value: -100 (= -10.0 mm)
value This is achieved by adding or Max. value: +100 (= +10.0 mm)
subtracting a length. Default: 0 (0.0 mm)

04.06.2002 96
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 09-2-001 Check the original present sensor (ORGPRESE) ]

Test Name Description Remark

09-2-001 Check the original present Original present detection with
sensor (ORGPRESE) a minimum width of 77.2 mm.

04.06.2002 97
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 09-2-002 Check the original width sensor 1 (ORGWIDSE1) ]

Test Name Description Remark

09-2-002 Check the original width sensor Detection of a feed original with
1 (ORGWIDSE1) a minimum width of 243 mm

04.06.2002 98
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 09-2-003 Check the original width sensor 2 (ORGWIDSE2) ]

Test Name Description Remark

09-2-003 Check the original width sensor Detection of a feed original with
2 (ORGWIDSE2) a minimum width of 334.5 mm

04.06.2002 99
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 09-2-004 Check the original width sensor 3 (ORGWIDSE3) ]

Test Name Description Remark

09-2-004 Check the original width sensor Detection of a feed original with
3 (ORGWIDSE3) a minimum width of 478 mm

04.06.2002 100
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 09-2-005 Check the original width sensor 4 (ORGWIDSE4) ]

Test Name Description Remark

09-2-005 Check the original width sensor Detection of a feed original with
4 (ORGWIDSE4) a minimum width of 570 mm

04.06.2002 101
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 09-2-006 Check the original width sensor 5 (ORGWIDSE5) ]

Test Name Description Remark

09-2-006 Check the original width sensor Detection of a feed original with
5 (ORGWIDSE5) a minimum width of 620 mm

04.06.2002 102
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 09-2-007 Check the original width sensor 6 (ORGWIDSE6) ]

Test Name Description Remark

09-2-007 Check the original width sensor Detection of a feed original with
6 (ORGWIDSE6) a minimum width of 772.7 mm

04.06.2002 103
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 09-2-008 Check the original width sensor 7 (ORGWIDSE7) ]

Test Name Description Remark

09-2-008 Check the original width sensor Detection of a feed original with
7 (ORGWIDSE7) a minimum width of 877 mm

04.06.2002 104
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 09-2-009 Check the original safety switch (ORGSAFSW) ]

Test Name Description Remark

09-2-009 Check the original safety switch Upper cover of the original
(ORGSAFSW) input part open/closed
detection

04.06.2002 105
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 09-6-001 Activate the original motor (ORGMO) ]

Test Name Description Remark

09-6-001 Activate the original motor This test is used to test the
(ORGMO) correct functioning of the
original motor.
After activating this test a
selection, the next test can
be choosen:
1 = Transport direction,
1.25 m/min
2 = Transport direction,
10 m/min
3 = Rewind direction,
1.25 m/min
4 = Rewind direction, 10
m/min

04.06.2002 106
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 10-0-003 Displays the image scanning error counters ]

04.06.2002 107
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 10-1-002 Display the scan left margin correction value ]

Test Name Description Remark

10-1-002 Display the scan left margin This test is used to read or Unit: 1 pixel @ 200 dpi
correction value write the parameter that reflects Default: 0
the number of pixels by which Min. value: 0 (0 pixels or 0 "or 0
the left margin is corrected. mm)
(Because the scanner is face Max. value: 400 (400 pixels or
down oriented the left margin is 2" or 51.2 mm)
the right side from front view Default value: 150 ( 150 pixels
or 0.75" or 19.2 mm )
Usually determined via test
10-7-004

04.06.2002 108
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 10-1-003 Display the scan width correction value ]

Test Name Description Remark

10-1-003 Display the scan width This test is used to read or Unit: 0.1%
correction value write the parameter that reflects Default: 0
the correction factor by which Min. value: -50 (-5.0%)
the width is corrected Max. value: +50 (+5.0%)
Usually determined via test
10-7-004

04.06.2002 109
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 10-2-001 Check the scanner lamp active signal ]

Test Name Description Remarks

10-2-001 Check the scanner lamp This test is used to check if
active signal the optical sensor placed
on the
[ SCALAACT] [ SCALAmp ] is functioning
correctly. This sensor can
be checked by starting the
test, and then pointing a
flash-light at the sensor.

04.06.2002 110
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 10-4-001 Check the scanner supply (SCASUPON) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

10-4-001 Check the scanner supply The [ SCASUP ] +5V, +12V
(SCASUPON) and +24V can be disabled
and enabled with this test.

04.06.2002 111
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 10-6-002 Activate the scanner lamp test (SCALA) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

10-6-002 Activate the scanner lamp
This test is used to test the This test is strongly related
test (SCALA) correct functioning of the to test 10-2-001
SCAnning Lamp in
[ SCALAFIL, SCALAPWM, conjunction with the optical
SCALAACT] sensor, [ In the [ ON ] state the lamp
SCALAACT ] . is put on 100% PWM. The
The scanner lamp can be PWM level returns to
switched on and off, while normal state when [ STOP
the sensor is read. ] is pressed.
Select the lamp status: In the [ OFF ] state the test
1. lamp ON is stopped automatically,
2. lamp OFF the lamp stays [ OFF ]
During this test the status then.
of [ SCALAACT ] is
displayed.

04.06.2002 112
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 10-7-001 Adjust the scanning CCD alignment ]

Test Name Description Remarks

10-7-001 Adjust the scanning CCD This test is used to During the test the
alignment determine the correct measured value for the left
mechenical position of the [ ALIGNMENT LEFT ] and
CCD after placing the 2 right side [ ALIGNMENT
diabolos on the exposure RIGHT ] in the range of
glass plate. 0...255 will be displayed.
After completion of this test
the CCD will be parrallel
and the scan line in
horizontal plane.
The test displays the
measured diameter in
pixels of the left and right
diabolo. The adjustment is
correct if both values are
minimum (range is approx.
75 ....85).

04.06.2002 113
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 10-7-002 Adjust the scanning CCD focus ]

Test Name Description Remarks

10-7-002 Adjust the scanning CCD This test is used to adjust During the test the
focus the mechanical [CCD] measured contrast for the
position to the lens after left [ FOCUS LEFT ] and
placing the focus test tool right side [ FOCUS RIGHT
on the exposure glass ] in the range of 0 ....255 of
plate. the focus test tool will be
After completion of this test displayed.
the focus on the left and
right side will be adjusted.
The adjustment is correct if
the value is maximum.

04.06.2002 114
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 10-7-003 Adjust the scanning CCD gain ]

Test Name Description Remarks

10-7-003 Adjust the scanning CCD This test is to determine The lamp will be put on
gain the correct amplification 80% PWM.
factor of the odd and even During the test the
pixels, during measuring measured odd [ GAIN ODD
the reflection of the gauge ] and even gain [ GAIN
roller. EVEN ] in the range 0..255
After completion of this will be displayed.
test, the CCD will be
adjusted for maximum
greystep recognition.

04.06.2002 115
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 10-7-004 Adjust the scanning 1:1 width and the right alignment
]

Test Name Description Remarks

10-7-004 Adjust the scanning 1:1 This test is used to have a The calculated parameters
width and the right correct 1:1 width and "0" are given in test 10-1-002
alignment alignment at the right side. and 10-1-003.
After placing the 1:1
special tool centred over
the exposure glass plate
the software calculates the
correction factor for the
width and the right
alignment.

04.06.2002 116
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 11-0-003 Display the image processing error counters ]

04.06.2002 117
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 11-6-001 CPU-IO <--> IMAGE-PROC control bus ]

Test Name Description Remarks

11-6-001 [ [SCA] CPU-IO <--> The test determines the correct
IMAGE-PROC control functioning of the control bus between
bus ] the [ CPU-IO ] and [ IMAGE-PROC
PBAs ] of the SCANNER. This is
[ SCADA0..7, checked via sending a special test
SCARECON, pattern from the [ CPU-IO ] via the [
SCASYNC ] IMAGE-PROC PBA ] back to the [
CPU-IO ] board. If this pattern is not
read back correctly on the [ CPU-IO ]
board, the test failed message is
generated

04.06.2002 118
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-0-003 Display the scanner error counters ]

04.06.2002 119
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-1-002 Display the scanner Firmpack release number ]

Test Name Description Remark

22-1-002 Display the scanner Firmpack release This parameter reflects the release
number number of the scanner firmpack in the
following way :
release aa.bb.cc is represented as a
number with 6 digits, so aabbcc. (e.g.
release 1.15.1 will have the value
11501)

04.06.2002 120
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-1-005 Display the scanner Boot Firmpack release number ]

Test Name Description Remark

22-1-005 Display the scanner Boot This parameter reflects the release
Firmpack release number number of the scanner software
downloading firmpack in the following
way:
release aa.bb.cc is represented as a
number with 6 digits e.g. release 1.15.1
will have the value 011501

04.06.2002 121
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-6-021 Reset the non volatile RAM of the scanner ]

Test Name Description Remark

22-6-021 Reset the non volatile RAM of Presets the default settings in - After the test the Scanner has
the scanner NVD-RAM. to be switched Off and On.
- If possible make a backup of
the scanner settings with SDS
test 71
WARNING : Activating the test
will reset all NVD settings.
The operator has to confirm to
start the execution.

04.06.2002 122
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 25-0-003 Display the operator scanner error counters ]

04.06.2002 123
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 01-8-001 Display/set the life time of the photoconductor ]

Test Name Description Remark

01-8-001 Display/set the life time of the Indication of the lifetime, based Magnitude: meters
photoconductor on total process length Min. value: 0
Max. value: 9999999

04.06.2002 124
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 02-6-001 Activate the corona supply test (CHGSUP) ]

Test Name Description Remark

02-6-001 Activate the corona supply The high voltage power Next message is
test supply of the scorotron is displayed:
(CHGSUP) active. Before executing this
Also active are: test, remove the gear
- Drive motor at 5 m/min, [ from the magnet roller of
DRIMO ] the DEV unit to prevent
- Cleaning leds, [ CLELED system polution!!!
]
- Ozon exhaust fan on, [ - Timing is the same as
CONFAN ] used for normal printing.
- Developing supply, [ - Test stops automatically
DEVSUP ] after 10 minutes.
- Charging supply, [ - After the test is
CHGSUP ] deactivated the ozon
exhaust fan stays active
for 6 sec.
Verify correct functioning
of [ CHGSUP ] by Supply off: < 0.1 Volt
measuring the test point Supply on: between 0.9
(CHGHV ] on [ HV and 1.1 Volt DC
SUPPLY PBA ].

04.06.2002 125
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 02-8-001 Display/set the life time of the charge corona wire ]

Test Name Description Remark

02-8-001 Display/set the life time of the Life time of corona wire in total magnitude: meters
charge corona wire process length Min. value: 0
[ CHGV ] Max. value: 9999999

04.06.2002 126
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 04-1-001 Display/set the adjustment setting of the blocknumber

with correct light intensity ]

Test Name Description Remark

04-1-001 Display/set the adjustment With this test the operator can Test also by KOS/SAS/
setting of the blocknumber with feed the number of the block on application (after R2)
correct light intensity the test print that has a correct
light intensity. The Test Print Minimum: 1
must be printed (see chapter Maximum: 20
“Test print (basic) 50”). The Default: 13
operator has to examine the
printhead related test-pattern
and feed the result.The number
fed determines the (absolute)
light intensity of the printhead
(see 04-1-003).

04.06.2002 127
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 04-1-003 Display/set the light intensity of the print head ]

Test Name Description Remark

04-1-003 Display/set the light intensity of Used to correct the light Test also by Settings Editor
the print head intensity of the print head. application
To determin this parameter test
04-1-001 is used.

04.06.2002 128
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 04-1-004 Display/set the non-printable area (framing) ]

Test Name Description Remark

04-1-004 Display/set the non-printable Standard Value 3 mm (= Note:
area (framing) Framing of 3 mm) Change this setting only on
Value: between 1 and 3 mm customer request. Instruct
the customer that the
position of the media on the
roll holder or in the sheet
feeder becomes crucial.
If the media is not well
positioned, lowering the
setting can lead to machine
pollution.

04.06.2002 129
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 04-6-001 Check the control bus between the CPU-IO and

the-PHD_INT PBA (04PBA01) ]

Test Name Description Remark

04-6-001 Check the control bus between Test to check the data Green LED on 04PBA01 lights
the CPU-IO and the-PHD_INT connection between [ CPU-IO ] when communication lines [
PBA (04PBA01) and PHDDATA0..5 ] are correct
[ PHDDATA0..5 ] [ PHD-INT_PBA ]
[ PHD STROBE ]

04.06.2002 130
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 04-9-001 Display the print head temperature sensor value (NTC

PHD ]

test Name Description Remark

04-9-001 Display the print head This test shows the current The temperature is displayed in
temperature sensor value (NTC value of the temperature degrees Celsius.
PHD) measured by the print head
NTC.

04.06.2002 131
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 05-0-002 Display the development error counters ]

04.06.2002 132
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 05-1-001 Display the developer toner concentration setpoint ]

Test Name Description Remark

05-1-001 Display the developer toner Contains the set point (Volts) of PWM value
concentration setpoint the control value needed to min. = 0
control the toner concentration max. = 4095
default = 1000
The parameter is normally
determined with test 05-7-001

04.06.2002 133
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 05-1-002 Display the developer toner concentration sensor

sensitivity ]

Test Name Description Remark

05-1-002 Display the developer toner This parameter is used to The unit is 1 mV/wt%
concentration sensor sensitivity indicate the sensitivity of the min.= 100
[ DEVTONCONSE ] sensor. The value is max. = 500
determined during production default = 300
(M&L).

04.06.2002 134
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 05-1-003 Display the developer toner concentration control

voltage ]

Test Name Description Remark

05-1-003 Display the developer toner The parameter contains the The parameter is normally
concentration control voltage measured ADC-value of the determined with test 05-7-001
PWM signal which reflects the
present developer unit voltage Unit: ADC value
Minimum: 35
Maximum: 255
Default: 170

04.06.2002 135
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 05-2-001 Check the toner level switch (DEVTONSW) ]

Test Name Description Remark

05-2-001 Check the toner level switch This magnetic reed switch is
(DEVTONSW) used to detect an almost empty
toner supply. In this situation
[ DEVTONSW ] pulses will be generated via a
rotating magnet within the unit.
The function of the switch can
also be checked, i.e. with a full
toner unit, via holding of a
magnet against the sensor on
the outside of the toner supply

04.06.2002 136
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 05-4-001 Activate the developer supply test (DEVSUP) ]

Test Name Description Remark

05-4-001 Activate the developer supply The high voltage power The voltages are:
test (DEVSUP) supplies ClEANHV approx. - 420 V
[ BIASHV ] and [ CLEANHV ] BIASHV approx. - 550 V
[ DEVSUP ] are enabled. Correct
functioning of the [ DEVSUP ]
voltages within his environment
can be verified via measuring
the testpoint voltage
[ BIASHV ] and [ CLEANHV ]
on the [ HV-SUPPLY-PBA ]
and/or measuring the voltages
on the DEV-unit.

04.06.2002 137
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 05-6-001 Activate the recover the too low toner level of the
developer test ]

Test Name Descrioption Remark

05-6-001 Activate the recover the too low This test can be used to Before starting this test first
toner level of the developer test recover the toner concentration check the correct functioning
without printing. of the charging supply [
Also active are: CHGSUP ] and the bias
* Drive motor at 5 m/min., [ supply [ (DEVSUP ].
DRIMO ] During this test the toner
* Developing supply (bias), concentration limits are not
[ DEVSUP ]
monitored. No errors/warning
* Cleaning leds, [ CLELED ]
are reported.
* Toner concentration control
[ DEVSUPMO ] - the timing is the same as
* Ozon exhaust fan on used for normal printing
Next items are displayed during - The test stops automatically
the test: after 10 min.
* control voltage of toner - After the test the ozon
concentration control exhaust fan stays active for 6
[ DEVTONCONSESP ] sec.
* toner sensor voltage
[ DEVTONCONSE ]
* indication of elapsed time

04.06.2002 138
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 05-6-002 Activate the recover developer layer equal in the

developer unit test ]

Test Name Descrioption Remark

05-6-002 Activate the recover developer This test can be used to - The timing is the same as
layer equal in the developer recover the toner layer used for normal printing
unit test equalisation (= electrical - The test stops automatically
neutralising of the drum) within after 10 min.
the toner unit without printing. - After the test the ozon
Also active are: exhaust fan stays active for 6
* Charging supply on, [ sec.
CHGSUP ]
* DrIve motor active, controlled
at 5 m/min., [ DRIMO ]
* Developing supply (bias
voltage)
[ DEVSUP ]
* Cleaning leds, [ CLELED ]
* ozon exhaust fan on,
CONFAN

Next items are displayed during

the test:
* control voltage of toner
concentration control
[ DEVTONCONSESP ]
* toner sensor voltage
[ DEVTONCONSE ]
* indication of elapsed time

04.06.2002 139
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 05-6-003 Activate the toner supply motor (DEVTONMO) ]

Test Name Descrioption Remark

05-6-003 Activate the toner supply motor The toner supply motor, Max. time 10 sec.
(DEVTONMO) [ DEVTONMO ], is activated
and the current status of the
sensor,
[ DEVTONSW ], is displayed.
This magnetic reed switch is
used to detect an almost empty
toner supply. In this situation
pulses will be generated via a
rotating magnet within the unit.

04.06.2002 140
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 05-7-001 Adjust the developer toner concentration sensor ]

Test Name Description Remark

05-7-001 Adjust the developer toner Adjustment of the toner The next message is displayed:
concentration sensor concentration setpoint, i.e. control WARNING : Only execute this
[PRT] DEV TONer voltage, combined with a filled test with new developer.
CONcentration SEnsor developing unit with only fresh
developer. See adjustment description: [ R2
Also active are: The toner concentration sensor
* Charging supply on, [ CHGSUP 05B1 ].
]
* DrIve motor active, controlled at * After the test is deactivated, the
5 m/min., [ DRIMO ] ozon exhaust fan will stay active
* DeVeloping supply (bias during 6 seconds
voltage) * Also accessible by the [ TIM ]
[ DEVSUP ]
* Cleaning leds, [ CLELED ] Minimum: 0
* Ozon exhaust fan on, [ Maximum: 4095
CONFAN ] Default: 1000

The next items are displayed

during this test:
* Control voltage toner
concentration control [
DEVTONCONSP ]
* Toner sensor voltage
[ DEVTONCONSE ]
· indication of elapsed time

The determined value is stored as

a parameter that can be read and
set with test 05-1-001 and
05-1-003.

04.06.2002 141
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 05-7-002 Restore the control voltage ]

Test Name Description Remark

05-7-002 Restore the control voltage This test can be used to This test stops automatically
eliminate hardware after the control voltage has
dependencies of the been determined.
[ CPU-IO ] board on the control
voltage, determined by the
previous adjustment test. It can
be used if for instance the
board is exchanged.

04.06.2002 142
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 05-8-001 Display/set life time of the developer ]

Test Name Description Remark

05-8-001 Display/set life time of the Indication of the total process Magnitude: meters
developer length made with the Min. value: 0
developer. Max. value: 9999999

04.06.2002 143
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 05-9-001 Display the developer toner concentration sensor

value ]

Test Name Description Remark

05-9-0 Display the developer This test can be used This information is only
01 toner concentration to monitor the function valid if the main drive
sensor value of the toner is running
concentration control
[ DEVTONCONSE ] (the sensor, the flap
etc.).
The next items are
displayed during this
test:
* Control voltage toner
concentration control [
DEVTONCONSP ]
* Toner sensor voltage
[ DEVTONCONSE ]
* indication of elapsed
time

04.06.2002 144
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 06-6-001 Activate the transfer supply test (TRASUP) ]

Test Name Description Remark

06-6-001 Activate the The high voltage power supply of Next message is displayed:
transfer supply test the transfer unit is activated. Before executing this test,
(TRASUP) Also active are: remove the gear from the magnet
* DrIve motor at 5 m/min., [ DRIMO ] roller of the DEV unit to prevent
* Cleaning leds, [ CLELED ] system polution!!!
* Transfer supply, [ TRASUP ]
* Ozon exhaust fan on, [ CONFAN ] - This test automatically stops after
* PTR separation supply, [ 1 minute
PTRSEPSUP ] - After the test is deactivated the
ozon exhaust fan stays active for 6
After activating the test [ TRASUP ] sec.
and
[ PTRSEPSUP ] are activated in
turn,
[ TRASUP ] is ON for 3 sec. and
than
[ PTRSEPSUP ] for 3.3 sec.

During the time [ TRASUP ] is

active a beeper is activated (on Supply off: > minus 0.1 Volt
the Service Laptop or controller). Supply on: between minus 0.4 and
Correct functioning of the [ TRASUP minus 0.6 Volt DC
] within his environment can be
verified by measuring the testpoint
voltage [ TRAHV ] on the [
HV-SUPPLY-PBA ].

04.06.2002 145
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 06-8-001 Display/set the life time of the transfer corona wire ]

Test Name Description Remark

06-8-001 Display/set the life time of the Indication of the condition of Magnitude: meters
transfer corona wire the transfer unit based on total Min. value: 0
paper length. Max. value: 9999999

04.06.2002 146
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 07-4-001 Activate the cleaning LEDs ]

Test Name Description Remark

07-4-001 Activate the cleaning LEDs The cleaning LEDs are active Max. time: none
[ CLELED ]

04.06.2002 147
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 07-8-001 Display/set the life time of the cleaning blade ]

Test Name Description Remark

07-8-001 Display/set the life time of the Indication of the condition of Magnitude: meters
cleaning blade the cleaning blade based on Min. value: 0
process length . Max. value: 9999999

04.06.2002 148
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 08-0-002 Display the fuser error counters ]

04.06.2002 149
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 08-2-001 Check the fuser door open switch (FUSOPSW) ]

Test Name Description Remark

08-2-001 Check the fuser door open This sensor indicated the status
switch (FUSOPSW) of the fuser cover: open or
closed.

04.06.2002 150
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 08-4-001 Activate the fuser fans (FUSFANL/R) ]

Test Name Description Remark

08-4-001 Activate the fuser fans The fusing fans are active
(FUSFANL/R)
(08M1 /08M2)

04.06.2002 151
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 08-6-001 Activate the fuser heaters ]

Test Name Description Remark

08-6-001 Activate the fuser heaters This test switches the fuser on The absorber cooling can
[ FUSSSR, FUSNTC1..6 ] without activating the rest of the become active.
system. The temperature is During this test, the current
controlled at the normal values of the NTCs are
working setpoint. displayed.
Use test 08-9-001 to read the
information during a run.

04.06.2002 152
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 08-9-001 Display the fusing NTC1-6 values ]

Test Name Description Remark

08-9-001 Display the fusing This test can be The temperature is
NTC1-6 values used to monitor o
displayed in C
the measured
values of the NTCs
within the fusing
function

This test can be done with controller on line.

04.06.2002 153
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-0-002 Display the paper roll drawer error counters ]

04.06.2002 154
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-1-001 Display/set the paper roll drawer leading edge

position value ]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-1-001 Display/set the paper roll This parameter corrects Test also via Settings
drawer leading edge the position of the leading Editor / Tim application
position value edge of the image related (after R2).
to the leading edge of the
paper. Unit: 0.1 mm
To determine this Min. value: 600
parameter, test 12-1-002 Max. value: 800
can be used. Default: 700

04.06.2002 155
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-1-002 Display/set the length between leading edge and

marker "C" value ]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-1-002 Display/set the length With this test the operator - A read action on this test
between leading edge and can feed the length will always result in the
marker "C" value between the leading edge default value.
of the sheet and the point - Always a new print must
marked by “C" of the Test be made and measured
Print (“Test print (basic) before this parameter is
50”). The print has to filled in.
made from roll 1. After - Also accessible via
feeding the length, the Settings Editor / TIM
leading edge correction application (after R2)
(12-1-001) is adapted
automatically. Unit: 0.1 mm
Min. value: 600
Max. value: 800
Default: 700

04.06.2002 156
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-1-003 Display/set the upper roll drawer width position value

]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-1-003 Display/set the upper roll This test displays and Test also by Settings
drawer width position modifies the width position Editor / Tim application
value (Z axis) of the image to the (after R2).
paper from the upper roll
drawer. The Test Print Unit: 0.1 mm
(test 50 or 51) must be Min. value: 100
printed from roll 1 or roll 2. Max. value: 900
Default: 500

04.06.2002 157
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-1-004 Display/set the upper roll drawer roll 1 diameter

correction value ]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-1-004 Display/set the upper roll This test contains the Unit: 10 nm/pulse
drawer roll 1 diameter correction on the diameter Min. value: 1963
correction value of roll 1. This parameter is Max. value: 2945
determined by the related Default: 2466
Adjustment Test 12-7-001).

04.06.2002 158
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-1-005 Display/set the upper paper roll drawer roll 1 distance

knife to leading sensor value ]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-1-005 Display/set the upper This test contains the Unit: 0.1 um
paper roll drawer roll 1 distance between the knife Min. value: 416500
distance knife to leading and the leading edge Max. value: 1016500
sensor value sensor. This parameter is Default: 736500
determined by the related
Adjustment Test 12-7-001.

04.06.2002 159
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-1-006 Display/set the upper roll drawer roll 2 diameter

correction value ]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-1-006 Paper Roll Drawer roll 2 This test contains the Unit: 10 unm/pulse
diameter correction correction on the diameter Min. value: 1963
of roll 2. This parameter is Max. value: 2945
determined by the related Default: 2466
Adjustment Test 12-7-002.

04.06.2002 160
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-1-007 Display/set the upper paper roll drawer roll 2 distance

knife to leading sensor value ]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-1-007 Display/set the upper This test contains the Theoretically the same
paper roll drawer roll 2 distance between the knife value as 12-1-005.
distance knife to leading and the leading edge
sensor value sensor. This parameter is Unit: 0.1 um
determined by the related Min. value: 416500
Adjustment Test 12-7-002. Max. value: 1016500
Default: 736500

04.06.2002 161
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-1-008 Display/set the upper paper roll drawer length

between side edge and marker “F” ]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-1-008 Display/set the upper With this test the operator - The value of 12-1-003
paper roll drawer length can feed the length will change.
between side edge and between the leading edge - A read action on this test
marker “F” of the sheet and the point will always result in the
marked by “F” of the Test default value
Print ( “Test print (basic) - Also accessible via
50”). The print has to Settings Editor / TIM
made from roll 1. application (after R2).
After feeding the length,
the width position (Z Unit: 0.1 mm
correction) of the upper Min. value: 400
roll drawer is adapted. Max. value: 600
Default: 500

04.06.2002 162
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-1-021 Display/set the middle roll drawer width position value

]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-1-021 Display/set the middle roll This test displays and Test also by Settings
drawer width position modifies the width position Editor / Tim application
value (Z axis) of the image to the (after R2).
paper from the middle roll
drawer. The Test Print Unit: 0.1 mm
(Test 50 or 51) must be Min. value: 100
printed from roll 3 or roll 4. Max. value: 900
Default: 500

04.06.2002 163
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-1-022 Display/set the middle roll drawer roll 3 diameter

correction value ]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-1-022 Display/set the middle roll This test contains the Unit: 10 nm/pulse
drawer roll 3 diameter correction on the diameter Min. value: 1963
correction value of roll 3. This parameter is Max. value: 2945
determined by the related Default: 2466
Adjustment Test 12-7-003.

04.06.2002 164
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-1-023 Display/set the middle paper roll drawer roll 3

distance knife to leading sensor value ]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-1-023 Display/set the middle This test contains the Unit: 0.1 um
paper roll drawer roll 3 distance between the knife Min. value: 416500
distance knife to leading and the leading edge Max. value: 1016500
sensor value sensor. This parameter is Default: 736500
determined by the related
Adjustment Test 12-7-003.

04.06.2002 165
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-1-024 Display/set the middle roll drawer roll 4 diameter

correction value ]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-1-024 Display/set the middle roll This test contains the Unit: 10 nm/pulse
drawer roll 4 diameter correction on the diameter Min. value: 1963
correction value of roll 4. This parameter is Max. value: 2945
determined by the related Default: 2466
Adjustment Test 12-7-004).

04.06.2002 166
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-1-025 Display/set the middle paper roll drawer roll 4

distance knife to leading sensor value ]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-1-025 Display/set the middle This test contains the Unit: 0.1 um
paper roll drawer roll 4 distance between the knife Min. value: 416500
distance knife to leading and the leading edge Max. value: 1016500
sensor value sensor. This parameter is Default: 736500
determined by the related
Adjustment Test 12-7-004.

04.06.2002 167
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-1-026 Display/set the middle paper roll drawer length

between side edge and marker “F” ]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-1-026 Display/set the middle With this test the operator - The value of 12-1-021
paper roll drawer length can feed the length will change.
between side edge and between the leading edge - A read action on this test
marker “F” of the sheet and the point will always result in the
marked by “F” of the Test default value
Print ( “Test print (basic) - Also accessible via
50”). The print has to Settings Editor / TIM
made from roll 3. application (after R2).
After feeding the length,
the width position (Z Unit: 0.1 mm
correction) of the middle Min. value: 400
roll drawer is adapted. Max. value: 600
Default: 500

04.06.2002 168
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-1-041 Display/set the lower roll drawer width position value ]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-1-041 Display/set the lower roll This test displays and Test also by Settings
drawer width position modifies the width position Editor / Tim application
value (Z axis) of the image to the (after R2)
paper from the lower roll
drawer. The Test Print Unit: 0.1 mm
(Test 50 or 51) must be Min. value: 100
printed from roll 5 or roll 6. Max. value: 900
Default: 500

04.06.2002 169
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-1-042 Display/set the lower roll drawer roll 5 diameter

correction value ]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-1-042 Display/set the lower roll This test contains the Unit: 10 nm/pulse
drawer roll 5 diameter correction on the diameter Min. value: 1963
correction value of roll 5. This parameter is Max. value: 2945
determined by the related Default: 2466
Adjustment Test 12-7-005.

04.06.2002 170
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-1-043 Display/set the lower paper roll drawer roll 5 distance

knife to leading sensor value ]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-1-043 Display/set the lower paper This test contains the Unit: 0.1 um
roll drawer roll 5 distance distance between the knife Min. value: 416500
knife to leading sensor and the leading edge Max. value: 1016500
value sensor. This parameter is Default: 736500
determined by the related
Adjustment Test 12-7-005.

04.06.2002 171
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-1-044 Display/set the lower roll drawer roll 6 diameter

correction value ]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-1-044 Display/set the lower roll This test contains the Unit: 10 nm/pulse
drawer roll 6 diameter correction on the diameter Min. value: 1963
correction value of roll 6. This parameter is Max. value: 2945
determined by the related Default: 2466
Adjustment Test 12-7-006.

04.06.2002 172
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-1-045 Display/set the lower paper roll drawer roll 6 distance

knife to leading sensor value ]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-1-045 Display/set the lower paper This test contains the Unit: 0.1 um
roll drawer roll 6 distance distance between the knife Min. value: 416500
knife to leading sensor and the leading edge Max. value: 1016500
value sensor. This parameter is Default: 736500
determined by the related
Adjustment Test 12-7-006.

04.06.2002 173
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-1-046 Display/set the lower paper roll drawer length

between side edge and marker “F” ]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-1-046 Display/set the lower With this test the operator - The value of 12-1-041
paper roll drawer length can feed the length will change.
between side edge and between the leading edge - A read action on this test
marker “F” of the sheet and the point will always result in the
marked by “F” of the Test default value
Print ( “Test print (basic) - Also accessible via
50”). The print has to Settings Editor / TIM
made from roll 5. application (after R2).
After feeding the length,
the width position (Z Unit: 0.1 mm
correction) of the lower roll Min. value: 400
drawer is adapted. Max. value: 600
Default: 500

04.06.2002 174
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-2-001 Check the upper paper roll drawer feed switch 1

(PRDUFEDSW1) ]
Upper roll drawer

Test Name Description Remarks

12-2-00 Check the upper paper roll Detection if the operator has
1 drawer feed switch 1 pushed the switch
[ PRDUFEDSW1 ]

04.06.2002 175
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-2-002 Check the upper paper roll drawer feed switch 2

PRDUFEDSW2) ]
Upper roll drawer

Test Name Description Remarks

12-2-002 Check the upper paper roll Detection if the operator
drawer feed switch 2 has pushed the switch
[ PRDUFEDSW2 ]

04.06.2002 176
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-2-003 Check the upper paper roll drawer knife sensor right
(PRDUKNISER) ]
Upper roll drawer

Test Name Description Remarks

12-2-003 Check the upper paper roll Detection if the knife is in
drawer knife sensor right the right corner position
[ PRDUKNISER ]

04.06.2002 177
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-2-004 Check the upper paper roll drawer knife sensor left
(PRDUKNISEL) ]
Upper roll drawer

Test Name Description Remarks

12-2-004 Check the upper paper roll Detection if the knife is in
drawer knife sensor left the left corner position
[ PRDUKNISEL ]

04.06.2002 178
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-2-005 Check the upper paper roll drawer leading edge

sensor (PRDULEADSE) ]
Upper roll drawer

Test Name Description Remarks

12-2-005 Check the upper paper roll Used for paper path
drawer leading edge protection and length
sensor measurement
[ PRDULEADSE ]

04.06.2002 179
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-2-006 Check the upper paper roll drawer open switch

(PRDUOPSW1) ]
Upper roll drawer

Test Name Description Remarks

12-2-006 Check the upper paper roll Detection roll drawer open Paper Roll Drawer Upper
drawer open switch / closed Open SWitch 2 is not read
[ PRDUOPSW ]

04.06.2002 180
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-2-007 Check the upper paper roll drawer present sensor 1

(PRDUPRESE1) ]
Upper roll drawer

Test Name Description Remarks

12-2-007 Check the upper paper roll Detection if paper is feed
drawer present sensor 1 by the operator
[ PRDUPRESE1 ]

04.06.2002 181
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-2-008 Check the upper paper roll drawer present sensor 2

(PRDUPRESE2) ]
Upper roll drawer

Test Name Description Remarks

12-2-008 Check the upper paper roll Detection if paper is feed
drawer present sensor 2 by the operator
[ PRDUPRESE2 ]

04.06.2002 182
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-2-009 Check the upper paper roll drawer run sensor 1

(PRDURUNSE1) ]
Upper roll drawer

Test Name Description Remarks

12-2-009 Check the upper paper roll Detection if roll 1 is empty
drawer run sensor 1 or not (pulses)
[ PRDURUNSE1 ]

04.06.2002 183
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-2-010 Check the upper paper roll drawer run sensor 2

(PRDURUNSE2) ]
Upper roll drawer

Test Name Description Remarks

12-2-010 Check the upper paper roll Detection if roll 2 is empty
drawer run sensor 2 or not (pulses)
[ PRDURUNSE2 ]

04.06.2002 184
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-2-021 Check the middle paper roll drawer feed switch 1

(PRDMFEDSW1) ]
Middle roll drawer

Test Name Description Remarks

12-2-02 Check the middle paper roll Detection if the operator has
1 drawer feed switch 1 pushed the switch
[ PRDMFEDSW1 ]

04.06.2002 185
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-2-022 Check the middle paper roll drawer feed switch 2

(PRDMFEDSW2) ]
Middle roll drawer

Test Name Description Remarks

12-2-022 Check the middle paper roll Detection if the operator
drawer feed switch 2 has pushed the switch
[ PRDMFEDSW2 ]

04.06.2002 186
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-2-023 Check the middle paper roll drawer knife sensor right
(PRDMKNISER) ]
Middle roll drawer

Test Name Description Remarks

12-2-023 Check the middle paper roll Detection if the knife is in
drawer knife sensor right the right corner position.
[ PRDMKNISER ]

04.06.2002 187
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-2-024 Check the middle paper roll drawer knife sensor left
(PRDMKNISEL) ]
Middle roll drawer

Test Name Description Remarks

12-2-024 Check the middle paper roll Detection if the knife is in
drawer knife sensor left the left corner position.
[ PRDMKNISEL ]

04.06.2002 188
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-2-025 Check the middle paper roll drawer leading edge

sensor (PRDMLEADSE) ]
Middle roll drawer

Test Name Description Remarks

12-2-025 Check the middle paper roll Used for paper path
drawer leading edge protection and length
sensor measurement
[ PRDMLEADSE ]

04.06.2002 189
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-2-026 Check the middle paper roll drawer open switch

(PRDMOPSW1) ]
Middle roll drawer

Test Name Description Remarks

12-2-026 Check the middle paper roll Detection roll drawer open Paper Roll Drawer Middle
drawer open switch / closed Open SWitch 2 is not read
[ PRDMOPSW ]

04.06.2002 190
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-2-027 Check the middle paper roll drawer present sensor 1

(PRDMPRESE1) ]
Middle roll drawer

Test Name Description Remarks

12-2-027 Check the middle paper roll Detection if paper is feed
drawer present sensor 1 by the operator
[ PRDMPRESE1 ]

04.06.2002 191
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-2-028 Check the middle paper roll drawer present sensor 2

(PRDMPRESE2) ]
Upper roll drawer

Test Name Description Remarks

12-2-028 Check the middle paper roll Detection if paper is feed
drawer present sensor 2 by the operator
[ PRDMPRESE2 ]

04.06.2002 192
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-2-029 Check the middle paper roll drawer run sensor 1

(PRDMRUNSE1) ]
Middle roll drawer

Test Name Description Remarks

12-2-029 Check the middle paper roll Detection if roll 1 is empty
drawer run sensor 1 or not (pulses)
[ PRDMRUNSE1 ]

04.06.2002 193
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-2-030 Check the middle paper roll drawer run sensor 2

(PRDMRUNSE2) ]
Middle roll drawer

Test Name Description Remarks

12-2-030 Check the middle paper roll Detection if roll 2 is empty
drawer run sensor 2 or not (pulses)
[ PRDMRUNSE2 ]

04.06.2002 194
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-2-041 Check the lower paper roll drawer feed switch 1

(PRDLFEDSW1) ]
Lower roll drawer

Test Name Description Remarks

12-2-04 Check the lower paper roll drawer Detection if the operator has
1 feed switch 1 pushed the switch
[ PRDLFEDSW1 ]

04.06.2002 195
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-2-042 Check the lower paper roll drawer feed switch 2

(PRDLFEDSW2) ]
Lower roll drawer

Test Name Description Remarks

12-2-042 Check the lower paper roll Detection if the operator
drawer feed switch 2 has pushed the switch
[ PRDLFEDSW2 ]

04.06.2002 196
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-2-043 Check the lower paper roll drawer knife sensor right
(PRDLKNISER) ]
Lower roll drawer

Test Name Description Remarks

12-2-043 Check the lower paper roll Detection if the knife is in
drawer knife sensor right the right corner position.
[ PRDLKNISER ]

04.06.2002 197
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-2-044 Check the lower paper roll drawer knife sensor left
(PRDLKNISEL ]
Lower roll drawer

Test Name Description Remarks

12-2-044 Check the lower paper roll Detection if the knife is in
drawer knife sensor left the left corner position.
[ PRDLKNISEL ]

04.06.2002 198
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-2-045 Check the lower paper roll drawer leading edge

sensor (PRDLLEADSE) ]
Lower roll drawer

Test Name Description Remarks

12-2-045 Check the lower paper roll Used for paper path
drawer leading edge protection and length
sensor measurement
[ PRDLLEADSE ]

04.06.2002 199
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-2-046 Check the lower paper roll drawer open switch

(PRDLOPSW1) ]
Lower roll drawer

Test Name Description Remarks

12-2-046 Check the lower paper roll Detection roll drawer open Paper Roll Drawer Lower
drawer open switch / closed Open SWitch 2 is not read
[ PRDLOPSW ]

04.06.2002 200
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-2-047 Check the lower paper roll drawer present sensor 1

(PRDLPRESE1) ]
Lower roll drawer

Test Name Description Remarks

12-2-047 Check the lower paper roll Detection if paper is feed
drawer present sensor 1 by the operator
[ PRDLPRESE1 ]

04.06.2002 201
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-2-048 Check the lower paper roll drawer present sensor 2

(PRDLPRESE2) ]
Upper roll drawer

Test Name Description Remarks

12-2-048 Check the lower paper roll Detection if paper is feed
drawer present sensor 2 by the operator
[ PRDLPRESE2 ]

04.06.2002 202
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-2-049 Check the lower paper roll drawer run sensor 1

(PRDLRUNSE1) ]
Lower roll drawer

Test Name Description Remarks

12-2-049 Check the lower paper roll Detection if roll 1 is empty
drawer run sensor 1 or not (pulses)
[ PRDLRUNSE1 ]

04.06.2002 203
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-2-050 Check the lower paper roll drawer run sensor 2

(PRDLRUNSE2) ]
Lower roll drawer

Test Name Description Remarks

12-2-050 Check the lower paper roll Detection if roll 2 is empty
drawer run sensor 2 or not (pulses)
[ PRDLRUNSE2 ]

04.06.2002 204
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-6-001 Check/activate the upper paper roll drawer knife

motor (PRDUKNIMO) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-6-00 Check/activate the upper paper Knife motor moves the knife to Test completed if sensor other
1 roll drawer knife motor the other side. side is activated.
[ PRDUKNITOL ] If the sensor does not detect the
[ PRDUKNITOR ] knife before a time-out expires,
[ PRDUKNISER ] the test is ‘failed’.
[ PRDUKNISEL ]

04.06.2002 205
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-6-002 Check/activate the upper paper roll drawer feed motor

1, forward/backward/normal/slow (PRDUFEDMO1) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-6-00 Check/activate the upper paper Activates the feed motor. Selectable:
2 roll drawer feed motor 1, 3 or 5 mtr/min
forward/backward/normal/slow clockwise / anti clockwise
[ PRDUFEDMOCLK ]
[ PRDUFEDMODIR ] During this test the status of [
[ PRDUFEDMOEN ] PRDUCONFIG ] is displayed
[ PRDUFEDMOSEL ]

04.06.2002 206
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-6-003 Check/activate the upper paper roll drawer feed motor

2, forward/backward/normal/slow (PRDUFEDMO2) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-6-00 Check/activate the upper paper Activates the feed motor. Selectable:
3 roll drawer feed motor 2, 3 or 5 mtr/min
forward/backward/normal/slow clockwise / anti clockwise
[ PRDUFEDMOCLK ]
[ PRDUFEDMODIR ] During this test the status of [
[ PRDUFEDMOEN ] PRDUCONFIG ] is displayed.
[ PRDUFEDMOSEL ]

04.06.2002 207
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-6-021 Check/activate the middle paper roll drawer knife

motor (PRDMKNIMO) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-6-02 Check/activate the middle paper Knife motor moves the knife to Test completed if sensor other
1 roll drawer knife motor the other side. side is activated.
[ PRDMKNITOL ] If the sensor does not detect the
[ PRDMKNITOR ] knife before a time-out expires,
[ PRDMKNISER ] the test is 'failed’.
[ PRDMKNISEL ]

04.06.2002 208
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-6-022 Check/activate the middle paper roll drawer feed

motor 1, forward/backward/normal/slow (PRDMFEDMO1) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-6-02 Check/activate the middle paper Activates the feed motor. Selectable:
2 roll drawer feed motor 1, 3 or 5 mtr/min
forward/backward/normal/slow clockwise / anti clockwise
[ PRDMFEDMOCLK ]
[ PRDMFEDMODIR ] During this test the status of [
[ PRDMFEDMOEN ] PRDMCONFIG ] is displayed.
[ PRDMFEDMOSEL ]

04.06.2002 209
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-6-023 Check/activate the middle paper roll drawer feed

motor 2, forward/backward/normal/slow (PRDMFEDMO2) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-6-02 Check/activate the middle paper Activates the feed motor. Selectable:
3 roll drawer feed motor 2, 3 or 5 mtr/min
forward/backward/normal/slow clockwise / anti clockwise
[ PRDMFEDMOCLK ]
[ PRDMFEDMODIR ] During this test the status of [
[ PRDMFEDMOEN ] PRDMCONFIG ] is displayed
[ PRDMFEDMOSEL ]

04.06.2002 210
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-6-041 Check/activate the lower paper roll drawer knife motor

(PRDLKNIMO) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-6-04 Check/activate the lower paper Knife motor moves the knife to Test completed if sensor other
1 roll drawer knife motor the other side. side is activated.
[ PRDLKNITOL ] If the sensor does not detect the
[ PRDLKNITOR ] knife before a time-out expires,
[ PRDLKNISER ] the test is ‘failed’.
[ PRDLKNISEL ]

04.06.2002 211
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-6-042 Check/activate the lower paper roll drawer feed motor

1, forward/backward/normal/slow (PRDLFEDMO1) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-6-04 Check/activate the lower paper Activates the feed motor. Selectable:
2 roll drawer feed motor 1, 3 or 5 mtr/min
forward/backward/normal/slow clockwise / anti clockwise
[ PRDLFEDMOCLK ]
[ PRDLFEDMODIR ] During this test the status of
[ PRDLFEDMOEN ] PRDLCONFIG is displayed
[ PRDLFEDMOSEL ]

04.06.2002 212
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-6-043 Check/activate the lower paper roll drawer feed motor

2, forward/backward/normal/slow (PRDLFEDMO2) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-6-04 Check/activate the lower paper Activates the feed motor. Selectable:
3 roll drawer feed motor 2, 3 or 5 mtr/min
forward/backward/normal/slow clockwise / anti clockwise
[ PRDLFEDMOCLK ]
[ PRDLFEDMODIR ] During this test the status of
[ PRDLFEDMOEN ] PRDLCONFIG is displayed
[ PRDLFEDMOSEL ]

04.06.2002 213
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-7-002 Adjust the upper paper roll drawer cutting length roll 2
]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-7-00 Adjust the upper paper roll This test corrects the cutting - Ten blank prints are made from
2 drawer cutting length roll 2 length off roll 2. After activating roll 2.
this test ten blank prints (5 times - Test must be preceded by test
about 1300 mm and 5 times 300 23-1-002, 12-1-002 and
mm) are made. The cutting 15-7-001.
length is automatically corrected
after the length of both print
lengths is measured by [
PTRINSE ].

04.06.2002 214
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-7-003 Adjust the middle paper roll drawer cutting length roll
3]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-7-00 Adjust the middle paper roll This test corrects the cutting - Ten blank prints are made from
3 drawer cutting length roll 3 length off roll 3. After activating roll 3.
this test ten blank prints (5 times - Test must be preceded by test
about 1300 mm and 5 times 300 23-1-002, 12-1-002 and
mm) are made. The cutting 15-7-001.
length is automatically corrected
after the length of both print
lengths is measured by [
PTRINSE ].

04.06.2002 215
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-7-004 Adjust the middle paper roll drawer cutting length roll
4]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-7-00 Adjust the middle paper roll This test corrects the cutting - Ten blank prints are made from
4 drawer cutting length roll 4 length off roll 4. After activating roll 4.
this test ten blank prints (5 times - Test must be preceded by test
about 1300 mm and 5 times 300 23-1-002, 12-1-002 and
mm) are made. The cutting 15-7-001.
length is automatically corrected
after the length of both print
lengths is measured by [
PTRINSE ].

04.06.2002 216
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-7-005 Adjust the lower paper roll drawer cutting length roll 5
]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-7-00 Adjust the lower paper roll drawer This test corrects the cutting - Ten blank prints are made from
5 cutting length roll 5 length off roll 5. After activating roll 5.
this test ten blank prints (5 times - Test must be preceded by test
about 1300 mm and 5 times 300 23-1-002, 12-1-002 and
mm) are made. The cutting 15-7-001.
length is automatically corrected
after the length of both print
lengths is measured by [
PTRINSE ].

04.06.2002 217
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-7-006 Adjust the lower paper roll drawer cutting length roll 6
]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-7-00 Adjust the lower paper roll drawer This test corrects the cutting - Ten blank prints are made from
6 cutting length roll 6 length off roll 6. After activating roll 6.
this test ten blank prints (5 times - Test must be preceded by test
about 1300 mm and 5 times 300 23-1-002, 12-1-002 and
mm) are made. The cutting 15-7-001.
length is automatically corrected
after the length of both print
lengths is measured by [
PTRINSE ].

04.06.2002 218
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 12-7-007 Adjust the paper roll drawers cutting length ]

Test Name Description Remarks

12-7-00 Adjust the paper roll drawers This test corrects the cutting - Ten blank print are made from
7 cutting length length of all rolls. After activating each roll that is configured.
this test five blank prints (about - Test must be preceded by test
1300 mm and 300 mm) are made 23-1-002, 12-1-002 and
from each roll. The cutting length 15-7-001.
is automatically corrected after
the lengthof both prints is
measured by [ PTRINSE ].

04.06.2002 219
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

0 Counters

04.06.2002 220
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 13-1-001 Display/set the paper sheet leading edge position ]

Test Name Description Remarks

13-1-00 Display/set the paper sheet This parameter corrects the Also accessible via Settings
1 leading edge position position of the leading edge of Editor / TIM application (after
the image related to the leading R2).
edge of the paper.
To determine this parameter, test Unit: 0.1 mm
13-1-002 can be used. Min. value: 0
Max. value: 200
Default: 100

04.06.2002 221
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 13-1-002 Display/set the length between leading edge and

marker “D” ]

Test Name Description Remarks

13-1-00 Display/set the length between With this test you input the length - A read action on this test will
2 leading edge and marker “D” between the leading edge of the always result in the default value.
sheet and the point marked with “ - Also accessible via Settings
D” of the Test Print ( “Test print Editor / TIM application (after
(basic) 50”). R2).
The print has to made from the
sheet feeder. Unit: 0.1 mm
After feeding the length, the Min. value: 600
leading edge correction Max. value: 800
(13-1-001) is adapted Default: 700
automatically.

04.06.2002 222
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 13-1-003 Display/set the upper paper sheet feeder width

position value ]

Test Name Description Remarks

13-1-00 Display/set the upper paper This test displays and modifies Also accessible via Settings
3 sheet feeder width position value the width position (Z axis) of the Editor / TIM application (after
image to the paper from the R2).
upper sheet feeder. The Test
Print (test 50 or 51) must be Unit: 0.1 mm
printed from this sheet feeder Min. value: 100
Max. value: 900
Default: 500

04.06.2002 223
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 13-1-005 Display/set the upper paper sheet feeder length value

between side edge and marker “E” ]

Test Name Description Remarks

13-1-00 Display/set the upper paper With this test the operator can - The value of 13-1-003 will
5 sheet feeder length value feed the length between the change.
between side edge and marker leading edge of the sheet and the - A read action on this test will
“E” point marked with “E” of the Test always result in the default value
Print ( “Test print (basic) 50”). - Also accessible via Settings
The print has to made from the Editor / TIM application (after
upper sheet feeder. After feeding R2).
the length, the width position (Z
correction) of the upper sheet Unit: 0.1 mm
feeder is adapted. Min. value:400
Max. value: 600
Default: 500

04.06.2002 224
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 13-1-022 Display/set the middle paper sheet feeder width

position value ]

Test Name Description Remarks

13-1-02 Display/set the middle paper This test displays and modifies Also accessible via
2 sheet feeder width position value the width position (Z axis) of the KOS/SAS/TIM application (after
image to the paper from the R2).
middle sheet feeder. The Test
Print (Test 50 or 51) must be Unit: 0.1 mm
printed from this sheet feeder Min. value: 100
Max. value: 900
Default: 500

04.06.2002 225
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 13-1-024 Display/set the middle paper sheet feeder length value

between side edge and marker “E” ]

Test Name Description Remarks

13-1-02 Display/set the middle paper With this test the operator can - The value of 13-1-022 will
4 sheet feeder length value feed the length between the change.
between side edge and marker leading edge of the sheet and the - A read action on this test will
“E” point marked with “E” of the Test always result in the default value.
Print ( “Test print (basic) 50”). - Also accessible via
The print has to made from the KOS/SAS/TIM application (after
middle sheet feeder. After R2).
feeding the length, the width
position (Z correction) of the Unit: 0.1 mm
middle sheet feeder is adapted. Min. value: 400
Max. value: 600
Default: 500

04.06.2002 226
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 13-1-042 Display/set the lower paper sheet feeder width

position value ]

Test Name Description Remarks

13-1-04 Display/set the lower paper sheet This test displays and modifies Also accessible via
2 feeder width position value the width position (Z axis) of the KOS/SAS/TIM application (after
image to the paper from the lower R2).
sheet feeder. The Test Print (Test
50 or 51) must be printed from Unit: 0.1 mm
this sheet feeder Min. value: 100
Max. value: 900
Default: 500

04.06.2002 227
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 13-1-044 Display/set the lower paper sheet feeder length value

between side edge and marker “E” ]

Test Name Description Remarks

13-1-04 Display/set the lower paper sheet With this test the operator can - The value of 13-1-042 will
4 feeder length value between side feed the length between the change.
edge and marker “E” leading edge of the sheet and the - A read action on this test will
point marked with “E” of the Test always result in the default value
Print ( “Test print (basic) 50”). - Also accessible via Settings
The print has to made from the Editor / TIM application (after
lower sheet feeder. After feeding R2).
the length, the width position (Z
correction) of the lower sheet Unit:0.1 mm
feeder is adapted. Min. value:400
Max. value: 600
Default: 500

04.06.2002 228
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 13-2-001 Check the upper paper sheet feeder configuration

jumper (PSFUCONFIG) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

13-2-00 Check the upper paper sheet Sheet feeder present detection
1 feeder configuration jumper
[ PSFUCONFIG ]

04.06.2002 229
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 13-2-002 Check the upper paper sheet feeder empty sensor

(PSFUEMPSE) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

13-2-00 Check the upper paper sheet Detection sheet feeder empty
2 feeder empty sensor
[ PSFUEMPSE ]

04.06.2002 230
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 13-2-003 Check the upper paper sheet feeder open switch

(PSFUOPSW) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

13-2-003 Check the upper paper Detection sheet feeder Paper Sheet Feeder Upper
sheet feeder open switch open/closed Open SWitch 2 is not read
[ PSFUOPSW ]

04.06.2002 231
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 13-2-021 Check the middle paper sheet feeder configuration

jumper (PSFMCONFIG) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

13-2-02 Check the middle paper sheet Sheet feeder present detection
1 feeder configuration jumper
[ PSFMCONFIG ]

04.06.2002 232
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 13-2-022 Check the middle paper sheet feeder empty sensor

(PSFMEMPSE) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

13-2-02 Check the middle paper sheet Detection sheet feeder empty
2 feeder empty sensor
[ PSFMEMPSE ]

04.06.2002 233
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 13-2-023 Check the middle paper sheet feeder open switch

(PSFMOPSW) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

13-2-023 Check the middle paper Detection sheet feeder Paper Sheet Feeder
sheet feeder open switch open/closed Middle Open SWitch 2 is
[ PSFMOPSW ] not read

04.06.2002 234
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 13-2-041 Check the lower paper sheet feeder configuration

jumper (PSFLCONFIG) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

13-2-04 Check the lower paper sheet Sheet feeder present detection
1 feeder configuration jumper
[ PSFLCONFIG ]

04.06.2002 235
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 13-2-042 Check the lower paper sheet feeder empty sensor

(PSFLEMPSE) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

13-2-04 Check the lower paper sheet Detection sheet feeder empty
2 feeder empty sensor
[ PSFLEMPSE ]

04.06.2002 236
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 13-2-043 Check the lower paper sheet feeder open switch

(PSFLOPSW) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

13-2-04 Check the lower paper sheet Detection sheet feeder open / Paper Sheet Feeder Lower Open
3 feeder open switch closed SWitch 2 is not read
[ PSFLOPSW ]

04.06.2002 237
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 13-4-001 Activate the upper paper sheet feed separation clutch

(PSFUSEPCL) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

13-4-00 Activate the upper paper sheet Activates the clutch
1 feed separation clutch
[ PSFUSEPCL ]

04.06.2002 238
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 13-4-002 Activate the upper paper sheet feeder elevator motor

(PSFUELEMO)]

Test Name Description Remarks

13-4-00 Activate the upper paper sheet Enables the elevator motor. Running of the motor is
2 feeder elevator motor depending on the state of [
[ PSFUELEMO ] PSFUELESW ]

04.06.2002 239
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 13-4-021 Activate the middle paper sheet feed separation clutch

(PSFMSEPCL) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

13-4-02 Activate the middle paper sheet Activates the clutch
1 feed separation clutch
[ PSFMSEPCL ]

04.06.2002 240
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 13-4-022 Activate the middle paper sheet feeder elevator motor

(PSFMELEMO) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

13-4-02 Activate the middle paper sheet Enables the elevator motor. Running of the motor is
2 feeder elevator motor depending on the state of [
[ PSFMELEMO ] PSFMELESW ]

04.06.2002 241
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 13-4-041 Activate the lower paper sheet feed separation clutch

(PSFLSEPCL) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

13-4-04 Activate the lower paper sheet Activates the clutch
1 feed separation clutch
[ PSFLSEPCL ]

04.06.2002 242
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 13-4-042 Activate the lower paper sheet feeder elevator motor

(PSFLELEMO) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

13-4-04 Activate the lower paper sheet Enables the elevator motor. Running of the motor is
2 feeder elevator motor depending on the state of [
[ PSFLELEMO ] PSFLELESW ]

04.06.2002 243
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-0-002 Display the printer paper transport error counters ]

04.06.2002 244
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-1-001 Display/set manual paper transport feed leading edge

position value ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-1-001 Display/set manual paper This parameter corrects the Also accessible via Settings
transport feed leading edge position of the leading edge of Editor / TIM application (after
position value the image, related to the leading R2).
edge opf the paper. To
determine this parameter, test Unit: 0.1 mm
15-01-002 can be used. Min. value: 0
Max. value: 200
Default: 100

04.06.2002 245
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-1-002 Display/set the length between leading edge and

marker “C” ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-1-002 Display/set the length between In this test you can input the - A read action on this test will
leading edge and marker “C” length between the leading edge always result in the default
of the sheet and the point value.
marked with "C" of the Test Print - Also accessible via Settings
( “Test print (basic) 50”). The Editor / TIM application (after
print has to be made from the R2).
manual feed.
After input of the length, the Unit: 0.1 mm
leading edge correction Min. value: 600
(15-1-001) is adapted Max. value: 800
automatically. Default: 700

04.06.2002 246
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-1-003 Display/set the manual feed width position value ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-1-003 Display/set the manual feed This test displays and modifies Also accessible via the Settings
width position value the width position (Z axis) of the Editor application (after R2).
image to the paper feed by hand
(manual feed). The Test Print Unit: 0.1 mm
(test 50 or 51) must be printed Min. value: 100
twice Max. value: 900
Default: 500

04.06.2002 247
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-1-004 Display/set the static deviation value of the paper

transport input sensor (PTRINSE) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-1-004 Display/set the static deviation Displays and modifies the Note: The correction is
value of the paper transport correction on the static deviation automatically determined by
input sensor [ PTRINSE ] of [ PTRINSE ]. using the related Adjustment
This deviation occurs when this Test 15-7-001.
sensor is used to measure the
length of a sheet (e.g. cutting Also accessible via Settings
length calibration). Editor / TIM application (after
R2).

Unit: 0.1 mm
Min. value: 0
Max. value:200
Default: 100

04.06.2002 248
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-1-006 Display/set the manual paper transport length value

between side edge and marker “E” ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-1-006 Display/set the manual With this test the operator - The value of 15-1-003
paper transport length can feed the length will change.
value between side edge between the leading edge - A read action on this test
and marker “E” of the sheet and the point will always result in the
marked by “E” of the Test default value
Print ( “Test print (basic) - This parameter is also
50”). The print has to accessible via the Settings
made via the manual feed. Editor application (after
After feeding the length, R2).
the width position (Z
correction) of the manual Unit: 0.1 mm
feed is adapted. Min. value: 400
Max. value: 600
Default: 500

04.06.2002 249
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-1-011 Display/set the distance between trailing sensor 1 and

the 1st folder start sensor (PTRFOLTRAISE1) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-1-011 Display/set the distance This parameter is the distance This value is automatically
between trailing sensor 1 and between the [ PTRFOLTRAISE1 determined by an Adjustment
the 1st folder start sensor ] and [ FOL1STARTSE ] and is Test 18-7-001.
[ PTRFOLTRAISE1 ] used in the determination of the
restlength of a print. Unit: 0.1 mm
Min. value: 6600
Max. value: 6800
Default: 6702

04.06.2002 250
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-1-012 Display/set the distance between trailing sensor 2 and

the 1st folder start sensor (PTRFOLTRAISE2) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-1-012 Display/set the distance This parameter is the distance This value is automatically
between trailing sensor 2 and between the [ PTRFOLTRAISE2 determined by an Adjustment
the 1st folder start sensor ] and [ FOL1STARTSE ] and is Test 18-7-001.
[ PTRFOLTRAISE2 ] used in the determination of the
restlength of a print. Unit: 0.1 mm
Min. value: 5250
Max. value: 5450
Default: 5352

04.06.2002 251
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-1-013 Display/set the distance between trailing sensor 3 and

the 1st folder start sensor (PTRFOLTRAISE3) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-1-013 Display/set the distance This parameter is the distance This value is automatically
between trailing sensor 3 and between the [ PTRFOLTRAISE3 determined by an Adjustment
the 1st folder start sensor ] and [ FOL1STARTSE ] and is Test 18-7-001.
[ PTRFOLTRAISE3 ] used in the determination of the
restlength of a print. Unit: 0.1 mm
Min. value: 4070
Max. value: 4270
Default: 4172

04.06.2002 252
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-2-001 Check the paper transport leading edge sensor

(PTRLEADSE) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-2-001 Check the paper transport Used for paper path protection
leading edge sensor and length measurement
[ PTRLEADSE ]

04.06.2002 253
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-2-002 Check the paper transport bulge sensor (PTRBULSE) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-2-002 Check the paper transport bulge Used for paper path protection
sensor and bulge control
[ PTRBULSE ]

04.06.2002 254
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-2-003 Check the paper transport table door open switch

(PTRFLAPSW) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-2-003 Check the paper transport table Detects when flap is open
door open switch
[ PTRFLAPSW ]

04.06.2002 255
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-2-004 Check the paper transport input sensor (PTRINSE) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-2-004 Check the paper transport input Used for paper path protection
sensor and length measurement
[ PTRINSE ]

04.06.2002 256
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-2-005 Check the paper transport output sensor (PTROUTSE)

]

Test Name Description Remark

15-2-005 Check the paper transport Used for paper path protection
output sensor
[ PTROUTSE ]

04.06.2002 257
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-2-006 Check the paper transport integrated receiving tray

sensor (PTRIRTSE) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-2-006 Check the paper transport Used for paper path protection
integrated receiving tray sensor
[ PTRIRTSE ]

04.06.2002 258
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-2-007 Check the paper transport integrated receiving tray

switch sensor (PTRIRTSWSE) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-2-007 Check the paper transport Detects position of [ IRT ] switch
integrated receiving tray switch (half moon actuator)
sensor
[ PTRIRTSWSE ]

04.06.2002 259
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-2-008 Check the paper transport suction fan control signal ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-2-008 Check the paper transport The signal detects if there is
suction fan control signal a current through the fan
[ PTRSUCFANCON ]

04.06.2002 260
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-4-001 Activate the paper transport input clutch (PTRINCL) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-4-001 Activate the paper transport Activates the [ PTR ] input clutch
input clutch
[ PTRINCL ]

04.06.2002 261
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-4-002 Activate the paper transport output fan (PTROUTFAN)

]

Test Name Description Remark

15-4-002 Activate the paper transport Activates the [ PTR ] output fan The fan cools the [ PTR ] output
output fan pinch roller
[ PTROUTFAN ]

04.06.2002 262
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-4-003 Activate the paper transport receiving tray fan

(PTRIRTFAN) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-4-003 Activate the paper transport Activates the [ PTR IRT ] fan
receiving tray fan
[ PTRIRTFAN ]

04.06.2002 263
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-4-004 Activate the paper transport input reverse clutch

(PTRINREVCL) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-4-004 Activate the paper transport Activating the [ PTR ] revese
input reverse clutch clutch
[ PTRINREVCL ]

04.06.2002 264
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-6-001 Activate the separation corona supply (PTRSEPSUP) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-6-001 Activate the separation corona The Hhigh voltage power supply Next message is displayed:
supply of the separation unit is active. Before executing this test,
[ PTRSEPSUP ] Also active are: remove the gear of the magnet
- Drive motor at 5 m/min, [ roller of the [ DEV ] unit to
DRIMO ] prevent system polution!!!
- Cleaning leds, [ CLELED ]
- Ozon exhaust fan on, [ - This test automatically stops
CONFAN ] after 1 minute
- PTR Separation supply, [ - After the test is deactivated the
PTRSEPSUP ] ozon exhaust fan stays active for
6 sec.

Supply off: < 0.1 Volt rms

Verify correct functioning of [
Supply on: between 0.7 and 0.9
PTRSEPSUP ] by measuring the
Volt rms
test point [ SEPHV ] on [ HV
SUPPLY PBA ].

04.06.2002 265
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-6-002 Activate the paper transport suction fan

(PTRSUCFAN) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-6-002 Activate the paper transport This test is used to check the
suction fan correct functioning of the output
[ PTRSUCFAN ] driver on the [ DRIVER-PBA ]
that controls the FAN. The
output state is visible via the [
PTRSUCFANCONT ] input .

04.06.2002 266
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-6-003 Activate the paper transport motor at normal/slow

speed (PTRMO) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-6-003 Activate the paper transport After activating this test the [
motor at normal/slow speed motor runs selectable at 3 or 5 SDS_FORWARD_NORMAL_SP
[PTRMOCLK ] m/min in feed direction. EED ]
[ PTRMOEN ] [
[ PTRMODIR ] SDS_FORWARD_LOW_SPEED
]

04.06.2002 267
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-6-004 Activate the paper transport paperswitch motor

(PTRIRTSWMO) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-6-004 Activate the paper transport After activating this test the
paperswitch motor switch can be successively
[ PTRIRTSWMO ] transported to the other side.
[ PTRIRTSWSW ] The state of the switch sensors
is also displayed

04.06.2002 268
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-7-001 Adjust the static deviation of the paper transport input

sensor on the measured length ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-7-001 Adjust the static deviation of the This corrects the static deviation Note: This test updates the
paper transport input sensor on of [ PTRINSE ]. After starting parameter 15-1-004.
the measured length this test, a blank sheet is - A read action on this test will
produced. The operator is asked always result in the default
to measure the length of the value.
sheet and feed the result in - Also accessible via Settings
0,1mm. This result is compared Editor / TIM application (after
to the length the printer engine R2)
has measured [ PTRINSE ] and
the deviation is corrected.

04.06.2002 269
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-8-001 Display/set the life time of the separation corona wire

]

Test Name Description Remark

15-8-001 Display/set the life time of the Indication of the condition of the Magnitude: meters
separation corona wire separation unit (wire), based on Min. value: 0
total paper length. Max. value: 9999999

04.06.2002 270
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

0 Counters [system]

5005 [SYS] CTR-SCA, Interface error

5006 [SYS] CTR-PRT, Interface error
5007 [SYS] PRT-FOL, Interface error (7SD code 9)
9002 [SYS] Firmpack/Software version failure
9002 [SYS] Configuration failure

04.06.2002 271
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-0-002 Display the printer error counters ]

04.06.2002 272
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-1-001 Display the printer Firmpack release number ]

Test Name Description Remark

22-1-001 Display the printer Firmpack release This parameter reflects the release
number number of the printer firmpack in the
following way :
release aa.bb.cc is represented as a
number with 6 digits, so aabbcc. (e.g.
release 1.15.1 will have the value
11501)

04.06.2002 273
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-1-004 Sleepmode timeout : Only in R1 ]

Test Name Description Remark

22-1-004 [PRT] Sleepmode timeout This parameter determines the time - The value ‘0’
after which the printer will switch to indicated sleepmode
sleepmode. This is done if the printer disabled
does not receive any print commands - other values smaller
during the predefined time or does than the minimum
not detect any user interaction value are translated
to the minimum
value.
- Also accessible via
KOS/SAS/TIM
application

Moved to KOS

04.06.2002 274
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-1-006 Display the printer Boot Firmpack release number ]

SDS test wijzigen

Test Name Description Remark

22-1-006 Display the printer Boot This parameter reflects the release
Firmpack release number number of the scanner software
downloading firmpack in the following
way:
release aa.bb.cc is represented as a
number with 6 digits e.g. release 1.15.1
will have the value 011501

04.06.2002 275
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-1-010 Serial Number Engine : Only in R1 ]

Test Name Description Remark

22-1-010 [PRT] Serial Number Engine This parameter holds the serial Not visible on
number of the printer engine. SDS -UI.

04.06.2002 276
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-1-011 Serial Number Stand : Only in R1 ]

Test Name Description Remark

22-1-011 [PRT] Serial Number Stand This parameter holds the serial Not visible on
number of the printers stand. SDS -UI

04.06.2002 277
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-1-012 Serial Number Upper Paper Roll Drawer (1 roll) : Only

in R1 ]

Test Name Description Remark

22-1-012 [PRT] Serial Number Upper Paper This parameter holds the serial Not visible
Roll Drawer (1roll) number of the printers Upper Paper on SDS -UI
Roll Drawer (1 roll)

04.06.2002 278
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-1-013 Serial Number Middle Paper Roll Drawer (1 roll) : Only

in R1]

Test Name Description Remark

22-1-013 [PRT] Serial Number Middle Paper This parameter holds the serial Not visible
Roll Drawer (1 roll) number of the printers Middle on SDS -UI
Paper Roll Drawer (1 roll)

04.06.2002 279
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-1-014 Serial Number Lower Roll Drawer (1 roll) : Only in R1 ]

Test Name Description Remark

22-1-014 [PRT] Serial Number Lower Paper This parameter holds the serial Not visible
Roll Drawer (1 roll) number of the printers Lower Paper on SDS -UI
Roll Drawer (1 roll)

04.06.2002 280
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-1-015 Serial Number Upper Paper Roll Drawer (2 rolls) : Only

in R1]

Test Name Description Remark

22-1-015 [PRT] Serial Number Upper Paper This parameter holds the serial Not visible
Roll Drawer (2 rolls) number of the printers Upper Paper on SDS -UI
Roll Drawer (2 rolls).

04.06.2002 281
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-1-016 Serial Number Middle Paper Roll Drawer (2 rolls) :

Only in R1 ]

Test Name Description Remark

22-1-016 [PRT] Serial Number Middle Paper This parameter holds the serial Not visible
Roll Drawer (2 rolls) number of the printers Middle on SDS -UI
Paper Roll Drawer (2 rolls).

04.06.2002 282
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-1-017 Serial Number Lower Paper Roll Drawer (2 rolls) :

Only in R1 ]

Test Name Description Remark

22-1-017 [PRT] Serial Number Lower Paper This parameter holds the serial Not visible
Roll Drawer (2 rolls) number of the printers Lower Paper on SDS -UI
Roll Drawer (2 rolls).

04.06.2002 283
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-1-018 Serial Number Upper Paper Sheet Feeder : Only in R1]

Test Name Description Remark

22-1-018 [PRT] Serial Number Upper Paper This parameter holds the serial Not visible
Sheet Feeder number of the printers Upper Paper on SDS -UI
Sheet Feeder

04.06.2002 284
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-1-019 Serial Number Middle Paper Sheet Feeder : Only in R1

]

Test Name Description Remark

22-1-019 [PRT] Serial Number Middle Paper This parameter holds the serial Not visible on
Sheet Feeder number of the printers Middle SDS -UI
Paper Sheet Feeder

04.06.2002 285
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-1-020 Serial Number Lower Paper Sheet Feeder : Only in R1]

Test Name Description Remark

22-1-020 [PRT] Serial Number Lower Paper This parameter holds the serial Not visible on
Sheet Feeder number of the printers Lower Paper SDS -UI
Sheet Feeder

04.06.2002 286
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-4-001 Activate the control fan (CONFAN) ]

Test Name Description Remark

22-4-001 Activate the control fan (CONFAN) The ozon fan can be activated via
this test

04.06.2002 287
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-4-002 Activate the paperswitch ]

Test Name Description Remark

22-4-002 Activate the paperswitch This test activates the optional power
relais

04.06.2002 288
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-6-001 Reset the non volatile RAM of the printer ]

Test Name Description Remark

22-6-001 Reset the non volatile Presets the default settings in NVD-RAM. - After this test the
RAM of the printer The following message is displayed : printer has to be
WARNING : Activating the test will reset switched Off and On
all NVD settings. - Test 90.1 should be
The operator has to confirm to start the executed
execution. - If possible make a
backup of the printer
settings via SDS test
71
For Repro Desk 4.25
use test 22

04.06.2002 289
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-6-003 [PRT] CONtrol Backup Non Volatile Data : Only R1 ]

Test Name Description Remark

22-6-003 CONtrol Backup Non Volatile Data Store the contents of the printers
NVD-RAM in the controller.

04.06.2002 290
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-6-004 [PRT] CONtrol Automatic configuration : Only in R1 ]

Test Name Description Remark

22-6-004 (PRT) CONtrol Automatic This test determines the This test is
configuration paperhandling configuration by not vissible in
reading the configuration SDS-UI.
connectors of the paper drawers. It
also detects the presence of the
paper switch.

04.06.2002 291
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-6-006 Activate the control counter ]

Test Name Description Remark

22-6-006 Activate the control counter This test is used to check the correct
CONCNT, CONCNTCONT functioning of the copy counter. The
test uses an onboard input line to
check if the counter is connected. Both
the signals, [ CONCNT ] and [
CONCNTCONT ] are displayed.

04.06.2002 292
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-6-011 [PRT] CONtrol FKS test 1 : Only for production ]

Test Name Description Remark

22-6-011 (PRT) CONtrol FKS test 1 Only for
prodution

04.06.2002 293
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-6-012 [PRT] CONtrol FKS test 2 : Only for production ]

Test Name Description Remark

22-6-012 (PRT) CONtrol FKS test 2 Only for
prodution

04.06.2002 294
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-8-001 Total Copy Counter : Only in R1]

Test Name Description Remark

22-08-001 [PRT] Total Copy Counter Indication of the total amount Value depends on setting
of copy material processed by 0 - 9999999
the printer. The parameter
holds a copy of the
mechanical counter.

04.06.2002 295
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-9-002 Display the mains frequency ]

Test Name Description Remark

22-9-002 Display the mains This test displays the frequency of the main
frequency supply in Hz. This frequency is measured by
the CONMAINSII interrupt input of the
PRINTER CPU-IO board.

04.06.2002 296
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 23-0-002 Display the main drive error counters ]

04.06.2002 297
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 23-1-001 Display the 1:1 image length correction value ]

Test Name Description Remark

23-1-001 Display the 1:1 image length This test is used to correct the Also accessible via
correction value 1:1 projection of the image onto KOS/SAS/TIM application ( after
the paper. R2? )
Test 23-1-002 can be used to
determine the value.

04.06.2002 298
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 23-1-002 Display/set the length between marker “A” and “B” ]

Test Name Description Remark

23-1-002 Display/set the length With this test the operator can - The Test Print (Test 50 or 51)
between marker “A” and “B” feed the length between the must be printed
points marked with “A” and “B” of - A read action on this test will
the Test Print (see paragraph always result in the default value
“Test print (basic) 50”). - Also accessible via Settings
Editor/TIM application ( after R2?
After feeding the length, the 1 : 1 ).
image length (23-1-001) is
adapted automatically.

04.06.2002 299
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 23-6-001 Activate the drIve motor at normal/slow speed ]

Test Name Description Remark

23-6-001 Activate the drIve motor at Switch on the maindrive This test is stopped
normal/slow speed (DRIMO) and control the automatically after 1 minute
DRIMOPWM, DRIMOEN, speed selectable at 3 or 5 Activating the main-drive too
DRIMOSE m/min. long (more than 1 minute)
could cause OPC-pollution

04.06.2002 300
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

0 Counters [system]

5001 [SYS] control bus failure: CTR-PRT

5002 [SYS] control bus failure: CTR-SCA
5003 [SYS] control bus failure: PRT-FOL

04.06.2002 301
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 25-0-002 Display the operator printer error counters ]

04.06.2002 302
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-0-004 Display the folder error counters ]

04.06.2002 303
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-0-004 Display the folder error counters ]

04.06.2002 304
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-9-001 Display the measured length of the last sheet ]

Test Name Description Remark

18-9-00 Display the measured The length of the last
1 length of the last sheet media fed, measured
in the folder

04.06.2002 305
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-9-002 Display the measured width of the last sheet ]

Test Name Description Remark

18-9-002 Display the measured The width of the last media
width of the last sheet fed, measured in the
folder.

04.06.2002 306
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-1-014 Display/set the distance between trailing sensor 4 and

the 1st folder start sensor (PTRFOLTRAISE4) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-1-014 Display/set the distance This parameter is the distance This value is automatically
between trailing sensor 4 and between the [ PTRFOLTRAISE4 determined by an Adjustment
the 1st folder start sensor ] and [ FOL1STARTSE ] and is Test 18-7-001.
[ PTRFOLTRAISE4 ] used in the determination of the
restlength of a print. Unit: 0.1 mm
Min. value: 3160
Max. value: 3360
Default: 3262

04.06.2002 307
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-1-015 Display/set the distance between trailing sensor 5 and

the 1st folder start sensor (PTRFOLTRAISE5) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-1-015 Display/set the distance This parameter is the distance This value is automatically
between trailing sensor 5 and between the [ PTRFOLTRAISE5 determined by an Adjustment
the 1st folder start sensor ] and [ FOL1STARTSE ] and is Test 18-7-001.
[ PTRFOLTRAISE5 ] used in the determination of the
restlength of a print Unit: 0.1 mm
Min. value: 2150
Max. value: 2350
Default: 2252

04.06.2002 308
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-1-016 Display/set the paper transport rotation time ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-1-016 Display/set the paper This parameter indicates Unit: Rotation steps
transport rotation time the time the [ FOL1ROTSO Min. value: 2000
] is activated and therefore Max. value: 2700
it indicates the angle of the Default: 2300
rotation made

04.06.2002 309
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-1-018 Display/set alignment active ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-1-018 Display/set alignment This parameter indicates Unit: Boolean
active whether the sheet should Min. value: no align
be aligned or not after Max. value: align
entering the folder Default: align

04.06.2002 310
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-1-019 Display/set alignment active time ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-1-019 Display/set alignment This parameter indicates Unit: Boolean
active time the time the sheet is Min. value: short align time
aligned. Max. value: long align time
Default: long align time

04.06.2002 311
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-2-011 Check the paper transport folder bulge sensor

(PTRFOLBULSE) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-2-011 Check the paper transport folder Sensor to detect a bulge
bulge sensor between the paper transport of
[ PTRFOLBULSE ] PRINTER and engine, which is
used for speed synchronisation.

04.06.2002 312
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-2-012 Check the paper transport folder input sensor

(PTRFOLINSE) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-2-012 Check the paper transport folder When a sheet is offered to the
input sensor FOLDER, online or offline, it is
[ PTRFOLINSE ] detected by this sensor

04.06.2002 313
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-2-013 Check the paper transport folder trailing edge sensor

1 (PTRFOLTRAISE1) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-2-013 Check the paper transport folder Used for length measurement
trailing edge sensor 1
[ PTRFOLTRAISE1 ]

04.06.2002 314
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-2-014 Check the paper transport folder trailing edge sensor

2 (PTRFOLTRAISE2) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-2-014 Check the paper transport folder Used for length measurement
trailing edge sensor 2
[ PTRFOLTRAISE2 ]

04.06.2002 315
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-2-015 Check the paper transport folder trailing edge sensor

3 (PTRFOLTRAISE3) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-2-015 Check the paper transport folder Used for length measurement
trailing edge sensor 3 and paper path protection
[ PTRFOLTRAISE3 ]

04.06.2002 316
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-2-016 Check the paper transport folder trailing edge sensor

4 (PTRFOLTRAISE4) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-2-016 Check the paper transport folder Used for length measurement
trailing edge sensor 4
[ PTRFOLTRAISE4 ]

04.06.2002 317
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-2-017 Check the paper transport folder trailing edge sensor

5 (PTRFOLTRAISE5) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-2-017 Check the paper transport folder Used for length measurement
trailing edge sensor 5 and paper path protection
[ PTRFOLTRAISE5 ]

04.06.2002 318
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-2-018 [FOL] Paper TRansport FOLder WIdth SEnsor 1, (only

in R1) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-2-018 [FOL] Paper TRansport FOLder Active for sheets wider than 510 Only in R1.
WIdth SEnsor 1 mm
[ PTRFOLWISE1 ]

04.06.2002 319
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-2-019 [FOL] Paper TRansport FOLder WIdth SEnsor 2, (only

in R1)]

Test Name Description Remark

15-2-019 ([FOL] Paper TRansport FOLder Active for sheets wider than 726
WIdth SEnsor 2 mm
[ PTRFOLWISE2 ]

04.06.2002 320
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-2-020 Check the paper transport folder door open switch

(PTRFOLDOORSW) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-2-020 Check the paper transport folder The sensor detecting weather
door open switch the horizontal door of the feed
[ PTRFOLDOORSW ] table has been closed.

04.06.2002 321
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-4-012 Activate the paper transport folder feed clutch

(PTRFOLFEDCL) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-4-012 Activate the paper transport Enables the transport roller to
folder feed clutch roll towards the FOLDER
[ PTRFOLFEDCL ]

04.06.2002 322
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-4-013 Activate the paper transport folder correction clutch

(PTRFOLCORCL) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-4-013 Activate the paper transport Enables the transport roller push
folder correction clutch the sheet back towards the input
[ PTRFOLCORCL ]

04.06.2002 323
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-4-014 Activate the paper transport folder Off-line LED

(PTRFOLOFFLED) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-4-014 Activate the paper transport This led show the user that
folder Off-line LED manual feed is allowed
[ PTRFOLOFFLED ]

04.06.2002 324
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 15-4-015 Activate the paper transport folder rotation solenoid

(PTRFOLROSO) ]

Test Name Description Remark

15-4-015 Activate the paper transport To rotate a print this solenoids
folder rotation solenoid lifts one roller and lowers a
[ PTRFOLROSO ] rubber

04.06.2002 325
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-1-007 Folder output belt capacity (only in R1) ]

Test Name Description Remark

18-1-007 [FOL] FOLder Output belt capacity Number of copies that can be Min. value: 5
placed on the belt. Max. value: 100
Default: 75

From R2 ONLY
accessible via
Settings Editor
application.

04.06.2002 326
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-2-017 Check the presence of a sheet at the folder output

sensor (FOLOOUTSE) ]

Test Name Description Remark

18-2-017 Check the presence of a sheet Output protection in the belt unit.
at the folder output sensor
[ FOLOOUTSE ]

04.06.2002 327
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-2-018 Check the presence of a sheet at the end of the belt

(FOLOBELTENDSE) ]

Test Name Description Remark

18-2-018 Check the presence of a sheet Almost full dection on the belt.
at the end of the belt
[ FOLOBELTENDSE ]

04.06.2002 328
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-2-019 Check the folder output door open switch

(FOLODOORSW]

Test Name Description Remark

18-2-019 Check the folder output door Switch to detect when the belt
open switch unit door is open.
[ FOLODOORSW ]

04.06.2002 329
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-2-020 Check the folder output belt door open switch

(FOLOBELTDOORSW) ]

Test Name Description Remark

18-2-020 Check the folder output belt door Switch to detect when the belt
open switch unit is raised.
[ FOLOBELTDOORSW ]

04.06.2002 330
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-1-001 Display/set the diameter of the first fold input roll ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-1-001 Display/set the diameter of the This parameter is used to A label with the diameter will be
first fold input roll calculate the distance that is place on the roller by M&L.
transported by every puls of the
transport motor in the first fold Unit: 0.1 mm
Min. value:2800
Max. value: 3200
Default: 3000

04.06.2002 331
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-1-002 Display/set the distance between the first fold start

sensor and the first fold input roll ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-1-002 Display/set the distance This parameter is determines This value is automatically
between the first fold start the width of the first folded page determined by adjustment Test
sensor and the first fold input roll in the first fold 18-7-001.

Unit: 0.1 mm
Min. value: 800
Max. value: 1100
Default: 951

04.06.2002 332
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-1-006 Display/set the correction value for overlap in the first

fold ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-1-006 Display/set the correction value In the first fold an extra overlap Also accessible via Settings
for overlap in the first fold is used. Editor/TIM application (after R2).

Unit: 0.1 mm
Min. value: 0
Max. value: 50
Default: 50

04.06.2002 333
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-2-001 Check the presence of a sheet at the first fold start

sensor (FOL1STARTSE) ]

Test Name Description Remark

18-2-001 Check the presence of a sheet Used for length measurement.
at the first fold start sensor
[ FOL1STARTSE ]

04.06.2002 334
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-2-002 Check the first fold deflector position

(FOL1DEFPOSE) ]

Test Name Description Remark

18-2-002 Check the first fold deflector Detects the position of the fold
position deflector
[ FOL1DEPOSE ]

04.06.2002 335
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-2-003 Check the first fold door open switch (FOL1DOORSW)

]

Test Name Description Remark

18-2-003 Check the first fold door open Detects when the door of the
switch first fold is open.
[ FOL1DOORSW ]

04.06.2002 336
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-2-004 Check the first fold output sensor (FOL1OUTSE) ]

Test Name Description Remark

18-2-004 Check the first fold output Detects paper that is leaving the
sensor first fold
[ FOL1OUTSE ]

04.06.2002 337
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-2-016 Check the presence of a sheet at the first fold output

sensor (FOLOFFOUTSE) ]

Test Name Description Remark

18-2-016 Check the presence of a sheet Output protection in the First
at the first fold output sensor Fold Delivery.
[ FOLOFFOUTSE ]

04.06.2002 338
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-4-001 Activate the first fold output deflector solenoid

(FOL1OUTDEFSO) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-4-001 Activate the first fold output Switches the 1st fold output
deflector solenoid flap.
[ FOL1OUTDEFSO ]

04.06.2002 339
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-4-010 Activate the first fold output motor (FOLOFFOUTMO)]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-4-010 Activate the first fold output Transport the package to the
motor first fold delivery.
[ FOLOFFOUTMO ]

04.06.2002 340
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-6-001 Activate the first folder input motor at normal/slow

speed (FOL1INMO) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-6-001 Activate the first folder input Activate [ FOL1INMO ] at
motor at normal/slow speed selected speed. After start of
[ FOL1INMO ] the test the speed has to be
selected:
1 = reduced speed (3 m/min)
2 = normal speed (5 m/min)

04.06.2002 341
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-6-002 Activate the first folder fold motor at

forward/backward/normal/slow speed (FOL1FOLMO) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-6-002 Activate the first folder fold Activate FOL1FOLMO at The motor puls disc sensor is
motor at selected speed and direction. not available as an input test.
forward/backward/normal/slow After start of the test the speed
speed has to be selected:
[ FOL1FOLMO ] 1 = reduced speed (3 m/min)
2 = normal speed (5 m/min)

Next the motor direction has to

be selected:
1 = forwards
2 = backwards

04.06.2002 342
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-6-005 Activate the first folder deflector clutch (FOL1DEFCL)

]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-6-005 Activate the first folder deflector The clutch is activated and the - [ FOL1INMO ] is active during
clutch deflector makes a sweep to this test and the speed has to
[ FOL1DEFCL ] direct the paper towards the be selected
other fold roller. 1= Normal
When the clutch is deactivated 2= Slow
the deflector is stopped in one - The state of [
of the folding positions. FOL1DEFPOSSE ] is displayed.

04.06.2002 343
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-6-007 Activate the simulate first fold test ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-6-007 Activate the simulate first fold Continuous simulation of the
test first fold.

04.06.2002 344
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-7-001 Adjust the first fold ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-7-001 Adjust the first fold With this test the distances from - The input material can be best
[ PTRFOLTRAISE1-5 ] to [ the type the user uses most.
FOL1STARTSE ] are When there is doubt 75 gr/m2 is
determined. prefered.

The values of 15-1-011..15 and Unit: 0.1 mm

18-1-002 will change Min. value: 11600
automatically. Max. value: 12500
Default: 11890

04.06.2002 345
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-2-011 Check the presence of a sheet at the reinforcement

unit start sensor (FOL2RUSTARTSE) ]

Test Name Description Remark

18-2-011 Check the presence of a sheet L-shaped sensor to detect prints
at the reinforcement unit start entering the RU.
sensor
[ FOL2RUSTARTSE ]

04.06.2002 346
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-2-012 Check the reinforcement unit stamp at home position

sensor (FOL2RUHOMESE) ]

Test Name Description Remark

18-2-012 Check the reinforcement unit Detection of the home-position
stamp at home position sensor of the stamp wheel.
[ FOL2RUHOMESE ]

04.06.2002 347
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-2-013 Check the reinforcement unit out of tape sensor

(FOL2RUEMPSE) ]

Test Name Description Remark

18-2-013 Check the reinforcement unit out When the RU runs outof
of tape sensor reinforcement material it is
[ FOL2RUEMPSE ] detected by this sensor.

04.06.2002 348
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-2-014 Check the reinforcement unit tape jam switch

(FOL2RUJAMSW) ]

Test Name Description Remark

18-2-014 Check the reinforcement unit This switch can detect jams of
tape jam switch the reinforcement material.
[ FOL2RUJAMSW ]

04.06.2002 349
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-2-015 Check the reinforcement unit door open switch

(FOL2RUDOORSW) ]

Test Name Description Remark

18-2-015 Check the reinforcement unit Detects when the door of the RU
door open switch is open.
[ FOL2RUDOORSW ]

04.06.2002 350
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-4-004 Activate the reinforcement unit motor (FOL2RUMO) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-4-004 Activate the reinforcement unit The reinforcement motor is
motor activated / deactivated.
[ FOL2RUMO ]

04.06.2002 351
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-4-005 Activate the reinforcement unit stamp solenoid

(FOL2RUSTAMPSO) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-4-005 Activate the reinforcement unit The solenoid is
stamp solenoid activated/deactivated.
[ FOL2RUSTAMPSO ] If after this test the drive motor
is activated, the stamp will be
activated once.

04.06.2002 352
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-4-006 Activate the reinforcement unit stop solenoid

(FOL2RUSTOPSO) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-4-006 Activate the reinforcement unit The stopper solenoid is
stop solenoid activated / deactivated.
[ FOL2RUSTOPSO ]

04.06.2002 353
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-4-007 Activate the reinforcement unit tape transport

solenoid (FOL2RUTAPESO) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-4-007 Activate the reinforcement unit The tape solenoid is activated /
tape transport solenoid deactivated.
[ FOL2RUTAPESO ] If after the test the drive motor is
activated, one length of tape will
be transported.

04.06.2002 354
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-4-008 Activate the reinforcement unit guide solenoid

(FOL2RUGUIDSO) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-4-008 Activate the reinforcement unit The paper guide solenoid is
guide solenoid activated / deactivated.
[ FOL2RUGUIDSO ]

04.06.2002 355
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-6-013 Activate the reinforcement unit tape solenoid

(FOL2RUTAPESO) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-6-013 Activate the reinforcement The tape transport solenoid
unit tape solenoid is activated once, while the
[ FOL2RUTAPESO ] RU motor is running.
A normal tape length is
turned.

04.06.2002 356
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-6-014 Activate the reinforcement unit stamp turn test

(FOL2RUSTAMPSO) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-6-014 Activate the reinforcement The stamp solenoid is
unit stamp turn test activated once and a
[ FOL2RUSTAMPSO ] complete turn of the stamp
is made.

04.06.2002 357
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-6-015 Activate the reinforcement unit stamp 1/2 turn test

(FOL2RUSTAMPSO) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-6-015 Activate the reinforcement The stamp solenoid is
unit stamp1/2 turn test activated once and a half
[ FOL2RUSTAMPSO ] turn of the stamp is made.

04.06.2002 358
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-6-016 Activate the simulate reinforcement unit stamp test ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-6-016 Activate the simulate Put a sheet that is folded
reinforcement unit stamp once on the intermediate
test transport. The stopper is
[ FOL2RUSTAMPSO ] activated when the test is
started. The sheet is
stopped in the
reinforcement unit and the
sheet is reinforced.
The stopper is deactivated
and the copy is transported
again.
After half a second the
intermediate transport is
stopped.

04.06.2002 359
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-1-003 Display/set the diameter of the second fold input roll ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-1-003 Display/set the diameter of the This parameter is used to A label with the diameter will be
second fold input roll calculate the distance that is place on the roller by M&L
transported by every puls of the
transport motor in the second Unit: 0.1 mm
fold. Min. value: 3800
Max, value: 4200
Default: 4050

04.06.2002 360
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-1-004 Display/set the distance between the second fold

trailing sensor and the second fold input roll ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-1-004 Display/set the distance Used for length measurement in This value is automatically
between the second fold trailing the second fold. determined by adjustment Test
sensor and the second fold input 18-7-002.
roll
Unit: 0.1 mm
Min. value: 800
Max. value: 1200
Default: 1000

04.06.2002 361
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-1-005 Display/set the distance between the second fold start

sensor and the second fold input roll ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-1-005 Display/set the distance This parameter is determines This value is automatically
between the second fold start the width of the first folded page determined by adjustment Test
sensor and the second fold input in the second fold 18-7-001.
roll
Unit: 0.1 mm
Min. value: 1000
Max. value: 1400
Default: 1230

04.06.2002 362
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-2-005 Check the presence of a sheet at the second fold

trailing sensor (FOL2TRAISE2) ]

Test Name Description Remark

18-2-005 Check the presence of a sheet This sensor is used for length When the wiring is not correctly
at the second fold trailing sensor measurement in the second fold. installed (to tight) metal-fatigue
[ FOL2TRAISE2 ] might cause unwanted toggling
of this signal.

04.06.2002 363
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-2-006 Check the presence of a sheet at the second fold start

sensor (FOL2STARTSE) ]

Test Name Description Remark

18-2-006 Check the presence of a sheet Used for length measurement
at the second fold start sensor
[ FOL2STARTSE ]

04.06.2002 364
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-2-007 Check the second fold deflector position

(FOL2DEPOSE) ]

Test Name Description Remark

18-2-007 Check the second fold deflector Signals the position of the fold
position deflector
[ FOL2DEPOSE ]

04.06.2002 365
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-2-008 Check the presence of a sheet at the second fold

output sensor (FOL2OUTSE1) ]

Test Name Description Remark

18-2-008 Check the presence of a sheet Detects wether a packages is
at the second fold output sensor deliverd into the stack (tray).
[ FOL2OUTSE1 ]

04.06.2002 366
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-2-009 Check the second fold door open switch

(FOL2DOORSW)]

Test Name Description Remark

18-2-009 Check the second fold door Detects when the door of the
open switch second fold is open.
[ FOL2DOORSW ]

04.06.2002 367
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-2-010 Check the second fold tray open switch

(FOL2TRAYSW) ]

Test Name Description Remark

18-2-010 Check the second fold tray open Detects when the door of the
switch tray in the second fold is open.
[ FOL2TRAYSW ]

04.06.2002 368
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-2-021 Check the second fold intermediate door open switch

(FOL2INTDOORSW) ]

Test Name Description Remark

18-2-021 Check the second fold Switch to detect when the door
intermediate door open switch above the intermediate transport
[ FOL2INTDOORSW ] is open.
(Between first and second fold).

04.06.2002 369
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-2-022 Check the reinforcement unit top cover door open

switch (FOL2RUCOVERSW) ]

Test Name Description Remark

18-2-022 Check the reinforcement unit top Switch to detect when the door
cover door open switch above the Reinforcement unit is
[ FOL2RUCOVERSW ] raised.

04.06.2002 370
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-4-002 Activate the second fold flat solenoid (FOL2FLATSO) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-4-002 Activate the second fold flat The FOL2FLATSO is activated
solenoid to make it possible to feed a
[ FOL2FLATSO ] single folded package into the
second fold. When the package
is fed far enough this solenoid is
released.

04.06.2002 371
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-4-003 Activate the second fold output solenoid

(FOL2OUTSO) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-4-003 Activate the second fold output With this solenoid, the output of
solenoid the folded package can be
[ FOL2OUTSO ] switched from stacker to the belt
unit.

04.06.2002 372
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-4-011 Activate the folder output transport motor

(FOLOUTPTRMO) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-4-011 Activate the folder output Transports the package to the
transport motor belt unit
[ FOLOPTRMO ]

04.06.2002 373
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-6-003 Activate the second folder input motor at

forward/backward speed (FOL2INMO) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-6-003 Activate the second folder input Activate [ FOL2INMO ] at The motor puls disc sensor is
motor at forward/backward selected direction. not available as an input test.
speed 1 = forward
[ FOL2INMO ] 2 = backward

04.06.2002 374
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-6-004 Activate the second folder fold motor at

forward/backward speed (FOL2FOLMO) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-6-004 Activate the second folder fold Activate [ FOL2FOLMO ] at The motor puls disc sensor is
motor at forward/backward selected direction. not available as an input test.
speed (FOL2FOLMO) 1 = forward
[ FOL2FOLMO ] 2 = backward

04.06.2002 375
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-6-006 Activate the second folder deflector clutch

(FOL2DEFCL) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-6-006 Activate the second folder The clutch is activated and the - FOL2INMO is active during
deflector clutch deflector makes a sweep to this test.
[ FOL2DEFCL ] direct the paper towards the - The state of FOL2DEFPOSSE
other fold roller. is displayed:
When the clutch is deactivated [ LVL_SENSOR_ACTIVE ]
the deflector is stopped in one [ LVL_SENSOR_INACTIVE ]
of the folding positions.

04.06.2002 376
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-6-008 Activate the simulate second fold test ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-6-008 Activate the simulate second Continuous simulation of the
fold test second fold.

04.06.2002 377
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-6-009 Activate the second fold stand alone test ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-6-009 Activate the second fold stand This test forces the second fold
alone test to run stand alone. A packet
that is put on the intermediate
transport will be folded.

04.06.2002 378
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-6-010 Activate the second folder ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-6-010 Activate the second folder A sheet is spooled (without
folding) through the second fold
and is delivered on the stacker.
The sheet has to be inserted on
the intermediate transport.

04.06.2002 379
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-6-011 Activate the belt (FOLOPTRMO) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-6-011 Activate the belt A sheet is spooled (without
folding) through the second fold
and is delivered on the belt. The
sheet has to be inserted on the
intermediate transport.

04.06.2002 380
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-6-012 Activate the folder output belt clutch (FOLOBELTCL) ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-6-012 Activate the folder output The [ PTRMO ] is turned on This test stopped
belt clutch and after 1 second the belt automatically after about
clutch is activated for 300 2.5 seconds.
ms.

04.06.2002 381
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 18-7-002 Adjust the second fold ]

Test Name Description Remarks

18-7-002 Adjust the second fold With this test the distances from - The input material can be best
[ FOLTRAISE2 ] to [ the type the user uses most.
FOLT2STARTSE ] is When there is doubt 75 gr/m2 is
determined. prefered.

The parameter tests 18-1-004/5 Unit: 0.1 mm

are updated automatically. Min. value: 2700
Max. value: 3150
Default: 2970

04.06.2002 382
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-0-004 Display the folder error counters ]

04.06.2002 383
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-1-003 Display the folder Firmpack release number ]

Test Name Description Remark

22-1-003 Display the folder Firmpack release This parameter reflects the release
number number of the folder firmpack in the
following way :
release aa.bb.cc is represented as a
number with 6 digits, so aabbcc. (e.g.
release 1.15.1 will have the value
11501)

04.06.2002 384
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-1-021 Serial Number First fold : Only in R1]

Test Name Description Remark

22-1-021 [FOL] Serial Number First fold This parameter holds the serial Not visible on
number of the folders first fold. SDS -UI

04.06.2002 385
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-1-022 Serial Number Second fold : Only in R1 ]

Test Name Description Remark

22-1-022 [FOL] Serial Number Second fold This parameter holds the serial Not visible on
number of the folders second fold. SDS -UI

04.06.2002 386
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-1-023 Serial Number Belt unit : Only in R1 ]

Test Name Description Remark

22-1-023 [FOL] Serial Number Belt unit. This parameter holds the serial Not visible on
number of the Belt unit. SDS -UI

04.06.2002 387
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-1-024 Serial Number Reinforcement Unit : Only in R1]

Test Name Description Remark

22-1-024 [FOL] Serial Number This parameter holds the serial Not visible on
Reinforcement Unit. number of the Reinforcement Unit. SDS -UI

04.06.2002 388
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 22-6-041 Reset the non volatile RAM of the folder ]

Test Name Description Remark

22-6-041 Reset the non volatile RAM of Presets the default settings in - After the test the Folder has to
the folder NVD. switched Off and On.
- If possible make a backup of
the Folder settings via SDS test
71

04.06.2002 389
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - SDS

[ 25-0-004 Display the operator folder error counters ]

04.06.2002 390
 Safety Data
For information about the safety data, see the safety data sheets in the User manual Oc· 9600
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Maintenance

Cleaning liquids
Cleaner A
Application: Antistatic cleaning and maintenance fluid for glass surfaces.
Code numbers: USA: 1068117 and EUR. 1068116
Contents: also silicone oil
Disadvantage: softened toner contaminates originals, rots, belts and pinch rollers
If glass surface is coated, use cleaner O

Cleaner O
Application: Cleaning optical parts, mirrors, lenses and glass platen
Code number: 7991470
Contents: Solution of alcohol and moistening agent (soap)
Finish: Leaves no stripes and no film
Disadvantages: When used on glass platen: surface is dry and original transport problems occur

Cleaner K
Application: General purpose cleaning, rubber belts, rollers
Code numbers: USA 1929023 and EUR. 1929022
Contents:
Disadvantages: Flammable, harmful

Cleaner T
Application: Cleaning fluid for removing toner caked on hot/cold machine parts.
Code numbers: USA 1989750 and EUR. 1989916
Contents: Diethyleneglycol monoethylether acetate
Disadvantages: Never clean the OPC! It affects the surface!
Usage: Apply cleaning fluid on a cloth and polish the parts to be cleaned.
After cleaning, the surface must be polished with a moth moistened with water and
after that with a dry cloth so to be sure that the cleaned surface is dry.
Caution:
Safety: Cleaner T is irritating to the eyes and defats the skin. Wear protection gloves.

Cleaner P
Application: Cleaner for OPC's
Code numbers: USA 1987798 and EUR. 1987994
Contents:

Caution:
Safety: Cleaner P is irritating to the eyes and defats the skin. Wear protection gloves.

Cleaner R
Application: Cleaner for corona wires
Code number: 7991469
Contents: Phosphates (extremely mild Acid)
Disadvantage: Residue from Alkali salts corrodes rubber on silicone belts

04.06.2002 2
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Maintenance

Visit dispatch
This chapter describes, in a logical way, how a visit to the customer can be executed.
The purpose of this item is to give a way of working which takes in account all the necessary actions for the Oc·
9600 system.
Working via this guided method makes sure that items are not forgotten and the overall costs will be as low as
possible.

Warning:
Before starting to work active on the Oc· 9600, ask the system administrator of the customer to close / stop the
network connection to the controller.
Only disconnecting the physical network connector from the controller can create error codes and hang-up of the
customers network!

Every visit can be divided into 4 steps. These steps are;

- Step 1: Generate worklist

- Step 2: Corrective maintenance
- Step 3: Preventive maintenance
- Step 4: Closing of the visit

What to do in every step is explained in detail in the document link at each step.

04.06.2002 3
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Maintenance

Step 1: Generate worklist (Visit dispatch)

Step 1: Generate worklist

In this step a worklist for the visit is generated (which things to do)

l Check the problem description of the dispatcher

l Verify the problem with the customer

l Make a backup of the system settings with SDS test 71.

These files should be stored on a logfloppy or your service laptop.

Note: This is a precaution. If for any reason the system settings are getting lost, you can always restore them.

04.06.2002 4
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Maintenance

Step 2: Corrective maintenance (Visit dispatch)

Corrective Maintenance

In cases that corrective maintenance is necessary you must categorise the problem(s).
If the visit is purely preventive this step can be skipped.

Categorise the problem

l Error codes

Activate the following SDS tests:

SDS test 30
SDS test 32
SDS test 34
SDS test 35
Use the TSM, Diagnostics, Error messages.

l Print quality problems.

Analyse the problem.
Use the TSM , Diagnostics, Image quality problems.

l Display messages
Analyse the problem.
Use the TSM , Diagnostics, Display message problems.

l No plotting from workstation possible (not for RD)

Analyse the problem.
Use the TSM, Diagnostics, Other symptoms, Controller, Plotting problems.

l Controller does not start/functioning correctly.

Analyse the problem
Use the TSM, Diagnostics, Other symptoms, Controller, Controller problems.
RD only: Use ODBS to restore a working image

l No SDS possible
Analyse the problem
Use the TSM, Diagnostics, Other symptoms, Information, SDS problems.
RD only: Use ODBS to restore a working image

l Other problems
Analyse the problem
Use the TSM , Diagnostics, Other symptoms, Information, Other problems.

04.06.2002 5
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Maintenance

Step 3: Preventive Maintenance (Visit dispatch)

Preventive Maintenance

l Check for (minor) customer problems

Categorise the problem, as given in step 2 and solve them

l Check consumable counter

Use SDS test 36
Change consumables if needed or make arrangements that they will be replaced in the next visit, see
Preventive
maintenance printer

l Check general print quality

Use SDS 50 and 51
Solve the print quality if available

l Check scan quality (from R2)

Use the service test chart
Solve the scan problem if available

l RD only: Execute a backup of the system via ODBS

04.06.2002 6
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Maintenance

Step 4: Closing of the visit (Visit dispatch)

Step 4: Closing of the visit

At the end of the visit proceed as follows:

l Log and Reset with SDS test 31

l Fill out the service report / ST or STAR application.

l Backup System data with SDS test 71

Note: At the start of the visit you executed a backup of the system. Now you make a new one with all
updated settings, parameters etc.

l Restart the controller and set the system in normal user mode (anonymous).
NGC
RD

End of the service visit

04.06.2002 7
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Maintenance

Questionnaire pre-installed machines

The first machines will be delivered pre-installed.

This means that these engines have:

- a tested (and used for printing) photoconductor, without protection sheet
- an emptied developing unit
- an empty toner dosage unit

The machine will have test prints in the upper roll drawer, that were printed on the engine before it was packed.

If you encounter such a machine, please follow the procedure that is attached to the machine.
If you want to return it by email, you can use the document below.

questionnaire_word6.doc

04.06.2002 8
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Maintenance

Status Modification Bulletins Oc· 9600

The following table gives a quick overview of the Modifications within the 9600 system.
All modifications of the 9600 system are listed on the Printer Modification label .
Detailed information can be found in the Modification and Information bulletins.

Mod. NR: Sub-system: Description: Remark:

01 Printer Improved transfer unit Installed from 1st machine
onwards
02 All Software Release 2
03 Printer Dew Preventer installed
04 Controller New SPICE board (5584.535)
05 Accessoires Noise reduction belt unit Not released yet
(Belt-Unit)
06 Printer Modified PBA, PHD Interface Blank prints
07 Printer Easier opening of fuser Not released yet
08 Printer Improved locking toner compartment
09 Controller Modified input handler
10 Printer Reserved USA (check correct
installation)
11 Folder Adding static discharge brush on stacker Not released yet
12 Controller New SPICE board (5584.612) because of
image shifting
13 All Software release R2.0STF
14 Folder Additional fly wheel (1995,409) for setting Not released yet
clutch free 1st fold
15 Printer New profile behind drum to prevent smear on Not released yet
print
16 All Software release R2.1
17 Controller Change SPICE BOARD to 5584.613
18
19

04.06.2002 9
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Maintenance

Preventive maintenance printer

Estimated lifetimes
Code no. Description Quantity Min.
Target SDS
(lm) (lm)
tests

7069.008 Photoconductor (drum) assy 1 >15.000

21.000 01-8-001 or 36
2999.818 Corona wire (Charging) 1
21.000 02-8-001 or 36
2999.802 Corona wire (Transfer) 1
21.000 06-8-001 or 36
2999.802 Corona wire (Separation) 1
21.000 15-8-001 or 36
2912.651 Cleaning blade assy 1
21.000 07-8-001 or 36
7045.011 Developer D5 1 bottle
21.000 05-8-001 or 36

Maintenance concept
General
The PM policy for the Oc· 9600 differs from the other Oc· ES Printing Systems. with
the introduction of a Preventive Maintenance kit. In this kit the OPC photoconductor
(drum) is bundled with all the other consumable parts.

The Oc· 9600 needs very little preventive maintenance. Therefore the preventive
maintenance which has to be done during every corrective maintenance visit is very
limited.

PM Policy
To reduce the number of repeat calls caused by preventive maintenance parts, the
following strategy for the Oc· 9600 is introduced.

1. Before every service call the number of copy meters of the OPC photoconductor
(drum) is checked (SDS test 01-8-001) using the data dump information downloaded
by Remote Assistance. If the counter is beyond the 15.000 lm, a PM kit must be taken
to the customer.
If Remote Assistance is not used the value has to be checked during the visit by the
technician. If the kit is available the PM kit actions have to be done right away or else
scheduled for the next visit.

2. During every visit the copy quality has to be checked. If it turns out that the OPC
photoconductor (drum) has to be replaced, after having analysed the copy quality,
than also the other PM parts in the kit needs to be replaced.

The Oc· 9600 PM kit code number 5600.415 consists of:

l OPC photoconductor (drum) assy 1 7069.008

l Corona wire (Charging) 1 2999.818
l Corona wire (Tr./Sep.) 2 2999.802
l Cleaning blade assy 1 2912.651
l Developer D5 1 bottle 7045.011
l Leafspring 1 7045.269
l Sealplate assy 1 2912.669

Preventive Maintenance Programs

Preventive maintenance program every visit

Item Action Remark

04.06.2002 10
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Maintenance

Waste toner bag Check/replace -

Output rollers Check/clean Cleaner K

OPC photoconductor (drum) lifetime Check/PM kit SDS test 01-8-001 or

36
Print quality Check Service test
prints SDS tests 50 + 51

Preventive maintenance program during photoconductor (drum) replacement (>15.000 lm)

CAS-C Item Action Remark

01 Photoconductor Replace

Grounding Clean

02 Charging unit Clean/replace Clean the unit. See chapter Charging: dis-assembly.
Replace the corona wires.

04 Print head Clean Clean the print head with cleaner-O ; use a clean cloth without
fibres.

05 Toner supply unit Clean/check Clean the outside of the unit and check for leakage's

Developing unit Clean/check Clean the outside of the unit and check for leakage's

Developer Replace See chapter 5 Developing - Disassembly: Replacing procedure

for the developer

06 Transfer / sep. unit Check/clean/ Clean the unit. See chapter Transfer.
replace Replace the corona wires.

07 Cleaning unit Check/clean Check for leakage's and sticked toner between the blade and the
seals (this occurs after 20 km)

Cleaning blade Replace

Cleaning seals Check

Waste- toner bag Check/replace

08 Fusing unit Check Check the inside of the unit

15 Paper feed roller Clean Water

Output roller Clean Cleaner K

Pick-off pawl Check/clean

23 Timing belts Check Tension/damage

Special tools
No special tools are required to service the Oc· 9600.
Only for maintenance purposes and for correct handling of the maintenance procedures, the
following items are necessary:

Code number Description

1068.117(USA) Cleaner A
1068.116EUR Cleaner A

04.06.2002 11
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Maintenance

7991.469 Cleaner R (grid and corona wire)

1929.023(USA) Cleaner K (photoconductor (drum), output rollers)
1929.022EUR Cleaner K (photoconductor (drum), output rollers)
1987.798(USA) Cleaner P (photoconductor (drum))
1987.994EUR Cleaner P (photoconductor (drum))

For a describtion of the cleaning liquids, see [ Cleaning liquids ]

04.06.2002 12
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Maintenance

Cleaning the photoconductor (drum)

Remove fused toner

Cleaning / polishing the photoconductor (drum)

04.06.2002 13
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Maintenance

Cleaning the photoconductor (drum)

Remove fused toner

04.06.2002 14
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Maintenance

Measuring the thickness of the photoconductor (drum)

Thickness of the OPC layer can be (more or less) determined by measuring the charge current.

In order to do this, take the following steps:

1. Connect a voltage meter over the resistor, positioned between the drum and the earth (9600 Z-0102 pos 6
)
2. Disconnect the litze wire (9600 Z-0102 pos 5 )
3. Run SDS test 05-6-002 and note the measured voltage (= 0.1 x charge current in uA)

Formula to caculate the thickness of the OPC layer:

Thickness (mm) = 1300 / (charge current - 5)

Example:
Measured voltage: 7.35 V
So Charge current = 73.5 uA
So OPC thickness = (1300 / (73.5-5)) = 19 um

Thickness OPC's:
New approx. 30 um
Average at 21.000 lm approx. 24 um
Worn approx. 20 um and less

04.06.2002 15
 Limitations/Known problems Release 3.1

Description:

Problem cause:

Resolution:

Symptom classification

Power & Control

l Communication sometimes lost between the Printer and the PLC.
Printing
l AutoRoll selection mechanism not correct.
l Wrong management of roll selection with B1.
l For the ANSI paper series, the 36” roll is chosen instead of 30”.
l Files generated by WRD2 are clipped at 1.2 m with PS “ON”.

Other
l Japanese/Chinese Keyboard can not be selected in the CFT tool.

Area Classification

Job submission
Autocad ADI
l To set the pen Weight & Pattern at the same time is not possible within
AutoCAD R14.

Win raster driver

l The roll information is not updated in WRD driver.
l The customer can not update and change the defaults on the PS/WRD
driver on the PLC.
l Some labels and combined boxes are not wide enough (all OS) for the
new added languages (Czech, Hungarian and Polish).
l Values selected in the driver properties are not accepted by some
applications (all OS).
l If you keep the driver, detected by the wizard during a re-installation
process, then the installation fails (Win 9x/Me).
l When the driver is set to print to a queue, it always print to the queue.
Even if the 'print to file' mode is selected in the application (Win 9x/Me).

l A change of the “contrast” value changes only the images / objects

(Win 9x/Me).
l The de-installation of the driver sometimes fails without a message.
Specially if a print was made just before and without a restart (Win
9x/Me).
l The driver settings are not initialised when the driver properties are
displayed from some applications (Win 9x/Me).
l If driver is installed again in another language, all the help entries
remain in previous language (Win 9x/Me).
l For all the supported languages, some errors are always in English.
l The long plots (longer than 5 m) are not released in the QM (Win
NT/2000).
l The driver installation by “add printer” does not allow a correct share,
setup should be used.
l The “Collate” function from a Word97 document does not operate (Win
2000).
l It is possible to define the Account ID’s and the User ID’s values out of
range. (Win NT/2000)
l A plot is always printed with the short edge as leading edge.
l If the driver is installed several times, the latest installed language is be
used.
l Image Control options are not available (Win NT/2000).
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Known Problems

l The maximum User Defined length is limited to 2.07 m

l The driver shared names longer than 12 characters are not visible (Win
98x)
Win PostScript driver
l The customer can not update and change the defaults on the PS/WRD
driver on the PLC.
l During the installation, the 'new port' configuration button does not
operate (all OS).
l Uninstall problem (Win NT/2000).
l The driver installation by “add printer” does not allow a correct share,
setup should be used.
l When a “custom” paper size is created, the limits of the width and the
length sometimes get swapped.
l No restore the “default” button (Win NT/2000).
l Number of copies is limit to 9999 (Win NT/2000).
l The scaling factor is 1 to 1000% (Win NT/2000), instead of 25 to 400%.
l The available values for “custom” paper size are according to Adobe
definition instead of Oc· definition.
l The “Letter” and “Tabloid” page size appear, even if they are the same
as A and B formats (Win NT/2000).
l Some of the strings are shortened (Win NT France).
l When SMB is used, the print information do not appear in the printer
queue.
l The 'Fold Width', 'Fold Length' and 'Fold Binding Edge' have no effect.

l Re-enforcement does not operate if the “Fold Orientation” is set to

“Portrait” or “Landscape”.
l The default paper size is “Letter” (Win NT/2000) or A4/A (Win 9x), must
be A0.
Print Exec LT Web
l PELTWEB R1.2 requires IE 4.0.2 SP2 or above.
l The large files can not be submitted in advanced job submission.
l The advanced job submission does not operate on Mac and Unix OS.
l There is no warning message when PELTWEB is not started on a PLC
with less than 256 MB.
l The file format is not identified automatically.
l PELTWEB only displays the correct Czech, Polish, Hungarian and
Japanese language, if the OS is configured with the correct fonts.
l A job is cancelled when the job composition window is closed or a new
job is activated, before the submission acknowledge message is
disappeared.
l The job is cancelled when the Submit button (Netscape) is activated two
times.
l PDF/PS is displayed as supported, but is not available on the controller.
l The advanced job submission takes some time to load while Netscape
is used.
l In the main screen the same picture is used with and without the folder.
l PDF/PS documents are not discarded while they are disabled in the SE.
l A wrong message is displayed when at the same moment the number
of submission sessions are exceeded.
l A wrong message when the spool is full.
l Plot will be completely folded if “first fold” is selected.
l There is no warning when empty job are submitted.
l The user name is not saved if the name includes spaces.
l The user name is not recovered in the Japanese language.
l PELTWEB needs a restart of the PLC when the language is changed
on the PLC.

Job control
Remote Control Format
l The CM command is ignored.

Remote Logic
l A connection is not possible from Remote Logic if <options-hostname>
is ["localhost"] on the controller.

04.06.2002 2
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Known Problems

l The [Application launcher] disappears from the screens smaller than

1024x768.
Settings editor
l To fill the location in the SE with Japanese characters is not possible.
l The adapters are listed by a number in the Settings Editor.
l The sleep mode time out is not correct above 120 minutes.
Queue Manager
l Plots generated by SDS are not printed after a change to NUSR and
back to SDS mode.
Scan manager
l Default NIC addresses (0.0.0.0) causes Scan to File errors.
l To fill the SM with Japanese characters is not possible after a change
from English to Japanese in the IME.
l File destinations not checked before the delivery of a file.
l Files on remote destinations are written over without a message to
confirm.

Job processing
l Not supported file types crashes sometimes the controller or causes white
pages.
ASCII
l The Automatic Language Sensing for ASCII is not full proof.

Communication
l The printer share name is changed after the upgrade.
LPR/LPD
l The LPRM command does not operate.
SMB
l The transmission is lost after a stop of a transmission.
l The length of the host name is limit to 14 characters.

Engine
22 Power & Control
l The print is cut by a change to the SDS mode.
l The wrong software version of the printer is shown after the download of
the printer software.

SDS
l Win2000 does not support the RAS connection with the WinNT PLC controller.
Work around:
l The SDS test 71 (Backup the system data) fails.
l The SDS client 4.6.3.0 needs MsDAC installed if the laptop does not run the
STAR application.
l WEB-SDS will not start if [Oc· Viewstation] is active.
l The previous backup.zip file is included in the new backup of the same day.

04.06.2002 3
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Known Problems

Printing from Macintosh OS 8.5 and 8.6. (R2.1)

Description:
Description: When sending several
files from Mac to 9600, Mac may hang
up and a reboot is required.

Problem cause:

Resolution:
Workaround: Print with the driver 8.7
and PrintLib 9.0.

04.06.2002 4
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Known Problems

Full name is not visible in the Scan Manager (R2.1)

Description:
If the name of the destination contains Capitals, it is possible you see eg. F.... in the Scan Manager.

Problem cause:

Resolution:
Use Lower case to enter the name of the destination.

04.06.2002 5
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Known Problems

Scanned files are not delivered on a Windows 95/98 PC (R2.1)

Description:
The contents of the shared directory is visible on the Scan Manager. The Files are not delivered on the SMB
location, but in the unsent directory on the NGC

Problem cause:

Resolution:
Use only Uppercase characters to enter the path name in the scanmanager

Keywords: windows 95 98 scan manager scanmanager unsent smb shared ngc

04.06.2002 6
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Known Problems

Unable to scan a file to a web peer server on windows NT 4.0 (R2.1)

Description:
When you get a delivery error, you can check the following items:

1 Is the ftp server web peer server on windows NT Workstation or

the ftp server Microsoft Internet information server on Windows NT 4.0 Server.
2 Is the contents of the destination visible in the Scan Manager.

Problem cause:

Resolution:
If the items above are applicable for you, advice the customer to reinstall the ftp server on the customer
destination.
How to install the ftp server on the customer PC
How to configure the ftp server on the customer PC

04.06.2002 7
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Known Problems

Unable to scan a file to the root directory of a ftp server (R2.1)

Description:
The contents of the Ftp root directory is visable but the the scanned files are stored in the unsent directory of the
NGC not on the remote destination.

Problem cause:

Resolution:
Don't use root directories to store the scan files.

04.06.2002 8
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Known Problems

Problems with Postscript Files.(R2.1)

Description:

Description: Some "complex"

PostScript files cannot be printed out.

Problem cause:

Resolution:
Workaround: none

04.06.2002 9
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Known Problems

FTP push on Novell 3.12 crashes the controller (R2.1)

Description:
Description: when TCP/IP and a ftp
daemon are running on a Novell 3.12
server, a push of the scan will result in
a crash of the ngc.

Problem cause:

Resolution:
Workaround: Try using another ftp.
Use ftp push or smb push on a
workstation running Windows NT or
Windows95/98.

04.06.2002 10
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Functional Block Diagram

In the following drawing you can see all parts that make up an Oc· 9600.

The parts have the following functions:

Scanner The scanner is responsible for scanning (reading) the original. This results in a data
stream that is send to the printer .
Printer The printer (print-engine) is able to produce an image on paper. The paper is then fed
to a local output tray or to the folder .
Folder The folder is able to fold a sheet of paper to several standardized sizes.
Controller The controller is in charge of all units. It regulates timing and interfacing between the
units of the Oc· 9600. The controller is also responsible for connectivity aspects of the
Oc· 9600.
Laptop The laptop is an integral part of the diagnostic system. For using the Interactive SDS
a laptop is absolutely mandatory.

04.06.2002 1
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

NGC / Oc· Power Logic controller release: User Names &

Passwords
Note:
If you want to have the login window pop-up, hold down the <shift> key during booting of the controller.

Users login SDS/Sett QM/SCP Pass Passwor

Windows ing word d
NT Editor up to from R3
R2.1
inclu
ded
Service service Service 6757 675756
engineer 56
Normal Anonymo [ [
user anonymo Anonymo us anonymo anonymo
us us us ] us ]
Key - Key Key 9600 KeyOp
operator operator operator 0
Service - Service Service 675756
operator operator operator
(New in
R3.0)

System - System System 0009 SysAdm

administr administr administr 6
ator ator ator
Repro - - Repro 0960 ReproOp
operator operator 0
For the 6869 6869767*
BIOS 767*

* Note: Use numeric part of the keyboard (right side) to enter the
number

Note: Use the service password for tools that require a

password/keyword to extract from the
installation CD

04.06.2002 2
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Repro Desk 4.21: User Names & Passwords

Note:
If you want to have the login window pop-up, hold down the <shift> key during booting of the controller.

Users login Print (Print Password

Windows NT Manager Manager)
KOS SDS
Service service Service 675756
engineer (Admin)
Normal user repro [ repro ]
(Admin)
Normal user anonymous anonymous
(User)
Key operator Key operator 96000
For the BIOS 6869767*

* Note: Use numeric part of the keyboard (right side) to enter the
number

04.06.2002 3
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Repro Desk 4.25: User Names & Passwords

Note:
If you want to have the login window pop-up, hold down the <shift> key during booting of the controller.

Users login Print (Print Password

Windows NT Manager Manager)
KOS SDS
Service support - support 675756
(Admin)
Transporter transporter - - [ transporter ]
Repro user repro (Admin) - - 96000
Normal user anonynous anonymous
Key operator - Key operator 96000
For the BIOS 6869767*

* Note: Use numeric part of the keyboard (right side) to enter the
number

04.06.2002 4
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Oc· 9600 configurations in OCS

The Oc· 9600 configuration structure, based on the Oc· Common System, is set up as follows:

The Oc· 9600 modelgroup is: 134

The Oc· 9600 modelseries are: 9655 (printer)

9675 (hybrid)

The model serie 9655 (Printer):

Configurati Engine NGC Repro Desk Folder 1st Folder 2nd Folder 2nd
on controller Controller Reinforcem
9601 336 725 726 ent
315 727
9656 x x
9657 x x x x
9658 x x x x
9666 x x
9667 x x x x
9668 x x x x

The model serie 9675 (Hybrid):

Configurat Engine Scanner NGC Repro Folder 1st Folder Folder 2nd
ion controller Desk 2nd Reinforce
Controller ment
9601 9610 315 725
336 726 727
9676 x x x
9677 x x x x x
9678 x x x x x
9686 x x x
9687 x x x x x
9688 x x x x x

04.06.2002 5
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Additional documentation with this HTSM: Oc· 9600 Copier /

Printer Connectivity manual (Ed. 2.0)

On this page you find additional documentation to help you doing your job as good and efficient as possible.

Oc· 9600 Copier / Printer Connectivity manual

This attachment contains the Oc· 9600 Copier / Printer Connectivity manual, Edition 2.0, in PDF format.
To read it you must have Acrobat Reader installed.
The raster value of the screen dumps are reduced, to minimise the size of the file.

7136581p.pdf

04.06.2002 6
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Additional documentation with this HTSM: Oc· 9600 Copier /

Printer Connectivity manual (Ed. 2.1)

On this page you find additional documentation to help you doing your job as good and efficient as possible.

Oc· 9600 Copier / Printer Connectivity manual

This attachment contains the Oc· 9600 Copier / Printer Connectivity manual, Edition 2.1, in PDF format.
To read it you must have Acrobat Reader installed.
The raster value of the screen dumps are reduced, to minimise the size of the file.

Cm9600gb.pdf

04.06.2002 7
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Additional documentation with this HTSM: Oc· TDS600 User

manual (Ed. 4.0)
On this page you find additional documentation to help you doing your job as good and efficient as possible.

User manual Oc· TDS600

Codenumber: 7137322 (CD-ROM)

THe CD-ROM is delivered with the new systems (for the customer) or you can order the CD-ROM as a spare
part.

04.06.2002 8
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Additional documentation with this HTSM: RCF manual

On this page you find additional documentation to help you doing your job as good and efficient as possible.

RCF Manual

This attachment contains the RCF manual, Edition 7.0, in pdf format.
To read it you must have Acrobat Reader installed.
This self extracting zip archives should be extracted to a directory on your laptop.

rcf.exe

04.06.2002 9
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Additional documentation with this HTSM: User manual (Ed. 2.0)

On this page you find additional documentation to help you doing your job as good and efficient as possible.

User manual

This attachment contains the 9600 user manual, Edition 2.0, in pdf format.
To read it you must have Acrobat Reader installed.

7005258p.pdf

04.06.2002 10
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Setting up additional tools and utilities with this HTSM: Oc·

Repro desk (service only) client
On this page you may find additional tools and utilities to help you doing your job as good and efficient as
possible.

Oc· Repro Desk (service only) client

This attachment contains the Oc· Repro Desk application (service only) version 4.2. This application can be
used to view the plot-files in case of problems with them. The only file-format that is not supported within Repro
Desk is postscript.
These self extracting zip archives should be extracted to floppies.

Installation
- Run set-up on diskette 1
- Do not change the prompted options except for the communication. Select here none.

RD1.exe RD2.exe RD3.exe RD4.exe

04.06.2002 11
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Setting up additional tools and utilities with this HTSM : NGC R1

tools
On this page you may find additional tools and utilities to help you doing your job as good and efficient as
possible.

NGC R1 tools

This attachment, NGC_Tools_V1.0, contains certain service tools that are necessary to install on the NGC for
R1.
This self extracting zip archives can be extracted to a floppy or to a temporary directory on the hard disk.
After this start the install.bat file within the service account of NT. This batch files creates a directory
C:\service\tools which contains a lot of tools.
Further on the desktop a lot of short-cuts are generated.
The functionality of non-standard short-cuts is;

- NGC down: Stops the NGC related services. After running the NGC windows can be closed and you get a
"clean" NT environment

- NGC up: Start the NGC related services. After this the Start SCP + QM can be executed.

- Start SCP + QM: Starts the NGC applications System Control Panel and Que Manager.

- NGC without printer: Can be used to simulate a printer attached to the controller.

- NGC in normal mode: Can be used to put the system back from the previous option to the normal
functionality.

- DAOview.exe: Start the DOA viewer which can be used to view the SDS_LOG.MDB file which contains SDS
settings.

- Log visit DATA:

Creates a directory C:\SERVICE\VISITS\YYYYMMDD. All system files to backup after every visit are
automatically copied in this directory.
Also a word-pad document is generated where you can put in your comments.
The Windows explorer is opening automatically in the C:\SERVICE\VISITS directory.
Note: You have to rename the directory YYYYMMDD to the current date in the sequence year-month-day, e.g.
19990419.

NGC_Tools_V1.0.exe

Note: For systems running release 0.9.8 an old version of the tools floppy must be generated. This version is
available below.

NGC_tools.exe

04.06.2002 12
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Setting up additional tools and utilities with this HTSM : Oc· LPR
On this page you may find additional tools and utilities to help you doing your job as good and efficient as
possible.

Oc· LPR

This attachment contains the Oc· WINLPR application. You will need this application when you want to print
from your service laptop, running Windows95, to the 9600 via a fixed TCP/IP address.
These self extracting zip archives should be extracted to floppies.

Installation
- Run set-up on diskette 1
- Within the installation chapter of the workstation of this TSM you can find the information how set-up the
OceLPR utility.

Ocelpr1.exe Ocelpr2.exe

04.06.2002 13
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Setting up additional tools and utilities with this HTSM : Plot

Director
On this page you may find additional tools and utilities to help you doing your job as good and efficient as
possible.

Plot Director

This attachment contains the Oc· Plot Director application version 3.1.1.
These self extracting zip archives should be extracted to floppies.

Installation
- Run set-up on diskette 1

PD1.exe PD2.exe PD3.exe

04.06.2002 14
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Setting up additional Repro Desk tools and utilities with this

HTSM
On this page you may find additional tools and utilities to help you doing your job as good and efficient as
possible.

Repro Desk 4.21 Beta tools

The floppy must be inserted into the Repro Desk controller.

The install.bat file should be started within the service account of NT.
This batch files creates a directory C:\service\tools which contains a lot of tools.
Further on the desktop a lot of short-cuts are generated.
The functionality of the non-standard short-cuts is:

- Log visit DATA:

Creates a directory C:\SERVICE\VISITS\YYYYMMDD.
All system files to backup after every visit are automatically copied in this directory.
Also a word-pad document is generated where you can put in your comments.
Generate lp.txt (include IP settings).
Create RD_Files.txt (Repro Desk file stsus)
Start automatically Windows Diagnostics, so you can print the report to file in YYYYMMDD directory.
The Windows explorer is opening automatically in the C:\SERVICE\VISITS directory.

Note:
You have to rename the directory YYYYMMDD to the current date in the sequence year-month-day, e.g.
19990419.

04.06.2002 15
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Handling and location of the Microsoft Certificate Of Authenticity

(COA).

Since a few months, the Microsoft Certificate Of Authenticity for Windows NT, has been replaced by a
sticker.
On normal Personal Computers, this COA sticker has to be affixed to the PC on a visible location.

On a TDS system, the Windows operating system is part of the complete system.
The complete system is registered under the number of the main component (printer on a hybrid
system, scanner on a scanner only system).
Therefore, we need to affix the Microsoft License to the frame of the main component.

The controller itself is not the correct place, since this can be changed (spare part) while the total
system (and the license) stays in place.

1. Two types of "Certificate of Authenticity" (COA)

The left certificate was sent during the last few years, and has to stay in the software box that came
with the printer engine.

The right certificate is a small sticker. It comes with the complete system and is included in the
software box.
It has to be affixed to the main component of the system at installation time.
The locations are given below.

2. Printer only system / Copier system

The main component in this case is the printer engine (the system serial number is the same as the
printer engine serial number)

In this case the COA-sticker is affixed to the printer engine on the location below (rear side of engine
at the toner side)

04.06.2002 16
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

3. Scanner only system

The main component in this case is the scanner (the system serial number is the same as the scanner
serial number)

In this case the COA-sticker is affixed to the scanner on the location below (entry of spice cable)

4. Existing systems with COA on controller

Some systems were shipped with the COA sticker affixed to the controller.
Since these stickers are hard to remove, we advise you to leave them on the controller, unless this
controller needs to be replaced.

In that case, please remove the sticker carefully (they tear up easily).

04.06.2002 17
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

04.06.2002 18
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Oc· Data Backup Services (ODBS) RD4.21 Beta only.

For RD systems the IDE hard-disk contents can be backup using GHOST software.
This service called ODBS is using another IDE hard-disk to place the image-files from the hard-disk containing
the NT, RD and Customer environment files.
(Disk to Image)

Installing the backup disk.

l Shut-down the RD controller.

l Replace jumper J50 on the backup hard-disk to ''MS'' position.
l Set the CD-Rom in the ''slave'' mode.
l Mount the CD-Rom drive one place under.
l Mount the backup hard-disk and connect the IDE-2 flat-cable connector and the power supply.
l Check all cable conections.
l Reboot the RD controller and press F2 to enter the BIOS settings
l Put the 2nd primary hard-disk on auto.
l Save the BIOS settings and reboot.
l Use the WIndowsNT Disk Administrator to format Disk 1 as shown below

Making a backup

l Boot from the ghost diskette

l Create a disk backup to image. (Disk to Image)
l Choose No compression
l Name the file as the current date in the format YYYYMMDD
l Save the file on Image_1 derive
l Check the image file

Restoring a backup

l Boot from the ghost diskette

l Start a restore from file. (Disk from Image)
l Select the correct file and restore

04.06.2002 19
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

04.06.2002 20
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Special short-cuts (Icons) on the NGC desktop (R2)

On the NGC desktop some non-standard short-cuts (Icons) are given.
The functionality of these non-standard short-cuts is;

NGC_down.bat:
Stops the NGC related services. The applications SCP, QM and SE, will disappear from the screen.
An error window will pop-up during the batch file executing. Select Yes and proceed.
SDS will not functioning in this state.
After execution the system is in a "clean" NT status.

NGC_up.bat:
Start the NGC related services. The applications SCP, QM and SE will start.
An error window will pop-up during the batch file executing. Select Yes and proceed.

Note: Activating the "NGC down" and "NGC up" icons successively will have the same result as a reboot of the
Controller.

Simulate Printer.bat:
Can be used to simulate a printer attached to the controller. Files printed to the NGC will appear in the
QUE-manager
and then disappear after a few seconds.
An error window will pop-up during the batch file executing. Select Yes and proceed.

NGC in normal mode:

Can be used to put the system back from the previous option to the normal functionality.
An error window will pop-up during the batch file executing. Select Yes and proceed.

SYSLOG:
Displays the contents of the C:\OCE\NGC\LOG\SYSLOG directory.
These files contain detailed logging information of the Controller processes.

Admin Plot Director:

Starts Plot Director installed on the NGC. Plot files are available in C:\VISITS\TESTFILES

04.06.2002 21
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Plug & Play function

Contents

Select a topic for answers to the following questions.

What is Plug and Play?

What are the benefits of Plug and Play?
How do I make sure that peripherals I purchase are Plug and Play compatible?
Can I use peripherals that are not Plug and Play compatible?
What does Plug and Play require from me?
What are the limitations of Plug and Play?
What are legacy devices?
How do I configure legacy devices?

04.06.2002 22
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Dictionary
Contents

DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

DNS Domain Name System

ftp File Transfer Protocol

IP Address

IPX Internet Packet Exchange

NDS NetWare Directory Services

NetBEUI NetBIOS Extended User Interface

NetBIOS Network Basic Input/Output System

Novell

SMB Server Message Block

SPX Sequenced Packet Exchange

TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

04.06.2002 23
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Process steps NGC G1

The process steps of the NGC controller can be split into 3 layers:
l Job Handling layer
l Machine handling layer
l Interface layer
l

The job handling layer

The Input Handler [IH}

The Input Handler [IH] takes care of the following actions:

l Connection Management
ftp
smb
Novell
Centronics
l Split data into Jobs (data and Job tickets)
hard boundaries of network
RCF / OJT
l Burster
Decode headers (RCF / OJT)
Add default ticket if no (or not all) information is available
l Spooling data into the spool area
l Inform the Job Server about new jobs

Spool area

The spool area is de IDE System Disk.

Print Pipeline

The Print Pipeline task care of the following actions:

l Creates data from the spooler

l Processes the data
Poker DLL (HPGL, HPGL2, NIRS TIFF, CALLS, CALCOMP)
l Transformation
Scaling
Rotation
l Interpretation
Display list (internal representation of the file
Rasterization (generating a bitmap)
Bitmap into set memory

Set Memory

The Set Memory uses the 2 SCSI disk. It uses its own Oc· file system

04.06.2002 24
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Job Server [JS]

The Job Server is part of the machine handling layer.
The function of the Job Server is:
l Schedule the jobs
l Give information to OCI about Job Status
l Abort Jobs

04.06.2002 25
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Engine Handler [EH]

The functions of the engine handler are:

l Check status of the engine
Out of paper
Paper Jam
l Write engine information into the status database

Page Handler [PH]

The functions of the Page Handler [PH] are :

l Get bitmaps out of the set memory
l Scheduling of delivering (which bitmap)
l Size of the bitmap
To decide which roll to use (automatic roll selection)
l Attribute for delivering
folding
types of folding
leading edge
trailing edge
l Send data to the engine (Speed 2.5 MB/s)

User Interaction handler

l Display
l Feedback to the user
l Replaced by OCI in R2

System Control Handler

l SDS test management
printer, scanner, controller
l System state handling
Start-up, On-line, Off-line, Shut-down and Restart
l Act as an Input Handler for internal jobs
Demo plot, dump configuration, printer test pages ....
l Setting editing
For service [SDS] and Key Operator [KOS]

Settings Database
l Stores the settings in ASCII files

04.06.2002 26
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

OCI (Oc· Controller Interface)

Goal of this interface:

l Standard public programmers interface for the outside world
l 2 way communication

Main functionality
l Inquiry: configuration and status
l Management: Configuration Update
l Feedback: System notification

Clients
l Queue Manager
l System Control Panel
l KOS/SAS applications
l Local / remote 3 rd party applications

04.06.2002 27
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Field Exchangable Units NGC G1

The controller consists of external devices, basic (internal) devices and optional devices. Each device can be
found in the list below with a link to the correct page.

External devices:
Basic devices:
Optional devices:
Software:

04.06.2002 28
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Next Generation Controller NGC G1

The controller for the Oc· 9600 system is the Next Generation Controller. In principle this is a computer based on
a standard PC with some added Oc· specific items.
The standard PC is: Dell OptiPlex G1.

The functional block diagram of the NGC is shown below:

Input 2.5 MB/s

SPICE
Output 2.5 MB/s
memory
ISA

PCI
bridge
video

CPU
SCSI
setmemory

04.06.2002 29
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Operator Controls NGC G1

Power button Push-button that turns computer on and off.

Power indicator Lights up when the computer is on.
Reset button Initiates a hardware reset. To avoid possible data or file structure corruption, use the
reset button only when the system cannot be rebooted with the <Ctrl><Alt><Del> key
combination, and close any open applications or files if possible.
Hard-disk drive access Lights up when the hard-disk drive is being accessed.
indicator
Diskette-drive access Lights up when the diskette drive is being accessed.
indicator

04.06.2002 30
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Riser PBA NGC G1

The Riser PBA provides the connection between the Motherboard PBA and the ISA & PCI extension slots.
The riser board includes the P1 connector (for connecting the NIC to the riser board cable) and an LED.
If the LED is on, the riser board is receiving power.

Nine expansion-card connectors (slots) reside on the board. Because two of the available expansion-slot spaces
are shared by expansion-card connectors, a maximum of seven expansion cards can be installed on the riser
board.
l Expansion slot ISA1 - ISA4: support 8- or 16-bit ISA cards
l Expansion slot PCI1 - PCI5: support 32- bit PCI cards.

Note:
ISA1 shares its card-slot opening with PCI4 and ISA2 shares its card-slot opening with PCI5, only one card of
either type can be installed in each of the two shared slots.

04.06.2002 31
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Spice PBA NGC G1

The SPICE-board is an expansion board in the controller. It is connected via a PCI bus connector.

No image available

04.06.2002 32
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

EIDE Interface (Hard-Disk) NGC G1

EIDE Subsystem

The EIDE subsystem provides 2 mode-4, DMA bus-mastered EIDE interfaces, each of which can support up to
2 EIDE devices.
The EIDE controller attaches to the high-speed PCI local bus.

The primary EIDE interface (IDE1) provides support for up to 2 high-performance EIDE devices, such as
hard-disk drives.
The computer's boot drive should be connected to the primary EIDE interface.
The secondary EIDE interface (IDE2) provides support for up to 2 additional EIDE devices, typically EIDE tape
drives or CD-ROM drives.

The hard-disk drive brackets are located under the externally accessible drive bays at the front of the computer.
The hard-disk drive bracket can contain either (1) or (2) 1-inch-high EIDE hard-disk drives, or (1) 1-inch high
EIDE hard-disk drive and (1) 1.6-inch-high EIDE hard-disk drive.

Note:
The externally accessible drive bays at the front of the computer are normally used for diskette drives, CD-ROM
drives, and/or tape drives. Hard-disk drives should be installed in the internal hard-disk drive bracket(s).

04.06.2002 33
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Memory NGC G1
Installation Guidelines

The 2 DIMM sockets on the system board can accommodate combinations of 32-, 64-, and 128-MB DIMMs up
to a total memory capacity of 256 MB. The system can support SDRAM.
DIMM speed (66 MHz or 100 MHz) should match the external bus speed of the microprocessor. Do not mix
different DIMM's!

Main memory consists of 64-bit nonparity DIMMs. For optimum performance, install DIMMs beginning with
socket DIMM_A. Although nonparity DIMMs are recommended, 72-bit parity DIMMs can also be installed.

Configuration Options

04.06.2002 34
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Power Supply NGC G1

The NGC controller has a 200-W system power supply. Both system power supplies can operate from an AC
power source of 115 VAC at 60 Hz or 230 VAC at 50 Hz. The system power supplies provide the DC operating
voltages and currents listed in the table below.

Note:
Each power supply produces DC voltages only under its loaded condition. Therefore, when you measure these
voltages, the DC power connectors must be connected to their corresponding power input connectors on the
system board or drives.

Voltage Range Maximum Output Current

+3.3 VDC +3.15 to +3.45 VDC 14.0 A
1

+5 VDC +4.75 to +5.25 VDC 22.0 A

1

+12 VDC +11.40 to +12.60 VDC 6.0 A

2

-12 VDC -10.80 to -13.20 VDC 0.3 A

-5 VDC -4.50 to -5.50 VDC 0.3 A
+5 VFP
3
+4.75 to +5.25 VDC 10 mA

1. The combined load on the +5-VDC and +3.3-VDC outputs should not exceed 140 W on the mini tower
computer.
2. Withstands surges of up to 11.0 A to support disk start-up operations.
3. VFP (volts flea power) -- sometimes called "standby power."

04.06.2002 35
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Power-on self-test (POST) NGC G1

Power-on self-test (POST) is the initial process executed by the system BIOS.
After all of the controllers on the system board are initialized and tested, the system POST BIOS transfers
control to the operating system on the bootable media.

The System Setup (CMOS) values, if applicable, are used for initialization of various controllers.
Any errors detected during POST are either displayed on the monitor or reported through beep codes.
Errors occurring before video initialization are typically reported through beep codes.
After the video controller has been initialized, any error messages appear on the screen.

POST on the NGC systems consists of the following steps (in order of their occurrence):
1. Determine the density and type of DIMMs.
2. Shadow the system BIOS (system BIOS on the flash is copied to main memory).
3. Initialize the interrupt controllers and chip sets.
4. Test the microprocessor registers.
5. Size the L2 cache.
6. Test the CMOS.
7. Test and initialize the CMOS.
8. Test the DMA channels
9. Verify that refresh is running.
10. Test the base 64 KB of memory.
11. Determine the total memory size.
12. Initialize the keyboard controller.
13. Detect the presence of external video controllers.
14. Configure PCI video, set the monitor refresh rates, and size the video memory.
15. Display the banner.
16. Reset the keyboard.
17. Test all memory above 64 KB, base and extended.

Note:
Memory count is not displayed due to PC97 specifications.

18. Flush and enable the L2 cache.

19. Initialize the serial and parallel port controllers.
20. Initialize the diskette drive controller and seek the diskette drives specified in System Setup.
21. Reset the mouse.
22. Initialize the hard-disk drive subsystem. Determine the type and size of the IDE drives.
23. Run the Plug and Play code.
24. Complete POST.

Note:
The system will not generate a post beep due to PC97 specifications.

25. Boot to the operating system on bootable media.

Note:
The system configures devices in the following order:
1. ISA legacy
2. Device nodes (timer, PIC, CMOS, super I/O controller)
3. Plug and Play devices
4. PCI devices

For POST to complete successfully, all subsystems of the system board must be functional. Most boot problems
following a successful POST are attributable to corrupted media or faulty peripherals.

04.06.2002 36
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

System BIOS Setup NGC G1

While booting, on the first screen and top right corner "Set-p" is visible. Press F2 or Ctrl+Alt+Enter to enter the
set-up menu of the DELL BIOS.
For detailed information on setup categories and options, see "Using the System Setup Program" in the online
System User's Guide.
Shown settings are the Oce settings for the NGC R1.0
To remove the [ Cover openend ] message (if exist during the start up of the controller), change under: [ System
Security / Chassis Intrusion: Detected ] to enable.

Dell Computer Corporation (www.dell.com) - OptiPlex G1 350L

Pentium II Processor : 350 MHz BIOS Version: A00
Level 2 Cach: 512 KB Integrated Service Tag: A1234
System Time .................................................................................
System Date ..................................................................................

Diskette A: ...................................................................................... 3.5 inch, 1.44 MB (After selecting "Auto" and

saving the bios settings the device is shown)
Diskette B: ...................................................................................... Not Installed

Primary Drive 0 .............................................................................. Hard Drive (After selecting "Auto" and saving
the bios settings the device is shown)
Primary Drive 1 .............................................................................. Not Installed
Secondary Drive 0 ......................................................................... CD-ROM Reader (After selecting "Auto" and
saving the bios settings the device is shown)
Secondary Drive 1 ......................................................................... Not Installed

Hard-Disk Drive Sequence ......................................................... <ENTER>

1 System BIOS boot devices

2 Adapters with no ID support

Boot Sequence .............................................................................. <ENTER>

V 1 Diskette Drive A
V 2 Hard Disk Drive C
V 3 CDROM Device
V 4 PXE

System Memory ............................................................................ 128 - MB SDRAM

Video Memory ............................................................................... 2 - MB SGRAM
Reserved Memory ....................................................................... None Reserved
CPU Speed ................................................................................... 350 MHz

Integrated Devices ....................................................................... <ENTER>

Network Interface Controller.............On
w/PXE
Mouse Port...........................................On
Serial Port 1.........................................Auto
Serial Port 2.........................................Auto
Parallel Port........................................378h
Parallel Port Mode.............................PS/2

IDE Drive Interface.............................Auto

Diskette Interface...............................Auto
PC speaker........................................On
Video BNC Snoop.............................Off

ACPI.....................................................Disabled

System Security ............................................................................ <ENTER>

Password Status.............................Unlocked
System Password...........................Not
enabled
Setup Password..............................Enabled
(6869767, use numeric part of key-board)
Chassis Intrusion............................Detected

Keypoard NumLock ..................................................................... ON

04.06.2002 37
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Report Keyboard Errors .............................................................. Report

Auto Power On .............................................................................. Disabled

Wakeup On LAN ........................................................................... Off
Power Management .................................................................... Disabled

Asset Tag ...................................................................................... ASSET TAG

04.06.2002 38
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Power management monitor GX100

The Bios of the GX100 system does not support power management of the monitor.
In order to modify the power management of the monitor within a GX 100 system, a dos utility has to be
activated.

Procedure:

l Login as service user in the NT logon window on the controller

l Open a DOS Window
l Enter cd c:\tools\gx100\pwrmgnt

l Switch off power management of the monitor : enter pwrmgmt 0

l Switch on power management of the monitor : enter pwrmgmt 2

l Reboot the controller to activate the power management setting

04.06.2002 39
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

How to shutdown the Oc· Power Logic Controller

How to shutdown the Oc· Power Logic Controller

You have to shutdown the Oc· Power Logic Controller properly or you might create one of the
following situations:

l You can damage the file structure on the system hard disk.
In worst case the Oc· Power Logic Controller will no longer start up.
If you are lucky on the next boot an extensive hard disk test will be performed that could take a
lot of time.
l The scanner or engine might do unexpected things.

For proper shutdown use one of the following:

l Switch the Oc· Power Logic Controller off using the ON/OFF button on the front.
l Shutdown using the shutdown option in the system menu of the Oc· System Control Panel.
l In service mode only.
Select one of the Oc· applications and press CTRL-ALT-F10 to shut down the Oc· applications.
Shutdown the NT operating system using "START MENU/SHUTDOWN"

Warning: Never ever just unplug the Oc· Power Logic Controller before it is shutdown.

04.06.2002 40
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Network Interface Card (integrated NIC) NGC G1

The NGC's have a built-in integrated 10/100-Mbps 3Com® PCI 3C905B-TX Ethernet NIC subsystem. The NIC
provides all the functions of a separate network expansion card and supports the 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX
Ethernet standards.
Category 5 wiring and connections must be used.

The standard integrated 3Com 3C905B-TX NIC does support the Wakeup

The NIC subsystem connects to the Ethernet network through an RJ45 connector on the back panel of the
computer.

The NIC connector on the computer's back panel has the following indicators:
1. A yellow activity indicator flashes when the system is transmitting or receiving network data. (A high volume
of network traffic may make this indicator appear to be in a steady “on” state.)
2. A green link integrity indicator lights up when there is a good connection between the network and the NIC.
When the green indicator is off, the computer is not detecting a physical connection to the network.

04.06.2002 41
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

3Com 3C900-COMBO EtherLink XL PBA (Ethernet)

The 3C900 PCI PBA is an expansion board in the controller. It is connected via a PCI bus connector.
This PBA is a regular 3Com Ethernet card with AUI, BNC and RJ45 connectors. The network-speeds supported
by this PBA are 10 Mbit and 100 Mbit.

Specifications: 3Com 3C900-COMBO EtherLink XL

General
Network Interface
Physical Configuration
Environmental Operating Range
Power Requirements
Cabling Requirements
AUI Connector Pin Assignments
RJ45 Connector Pin Assignments

04.06.2002 42
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

IBM 75H9802 PCI PBA (Tokenring)

The IBM 75H9802 PCI PBA is an expansion board in the controller. It is connected via a PCI bus connector.
This PBA is a regular IBM Tokenring network interface card with RJ45 and DB9 connectors. The
network-speeds supported by this PBA are 10 Mbit and 100 Mbit.

No image available

04.06.2002 43
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

General
The original handling transports the original through the scanner.

The function consists of:

l an original input section
l an original through-feed section
l an original rear output section
l an original front output section
Rear output Front output Input

Through feed

04.06.2002 44
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Original input section

Sequence
The original is fed in manually, with the image face down against the original side guide at the right hand
side.
First the seven width sensors (ORGWIDSE) are activated and then the original present sensor
(ORGPRESE).
During a fixed time (adjustable by the key operator [ Original input delay ]) the original can be aligned
against the first input pinch and against the original side guide.
After this delay the original motor (ORGMO) starts at low speed. The original transport motor and the input
roller feed the original inside. A timer stops the original motor after about 8mm transport. The original stays
with the leading edge between the first pinch, until the operator activates the print button.

Passive guide flap Gauge roller

1st pinch

2nd pinch
Feed direction

Exposure glass
ORGWIDSE

ORGPRESE
Input roller

ORGMO

If the timing (distance) of the next original, compared to the previous original, is too short (32 cm / 12,6”),
the original is fed in as being a part of the previous original.

04.06.2002 45
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Original through-feed section

Sequence
Press the <START> button.
The original motor is activated and transports the original with a constant speed of 5 m/min. between the white
gauge roller and the exposure glass to the second pinch.
During this feeding the original is scanned.
The transport speed depends on the magnification factor, see Original Motor.

Timing
The timing of the original present sensor (ORGPRESE) is used for:
l start / stop moment of the scanning
l original length measurement
l for front output: to stop and start the original motor in reversed direction when the trailing edge of the
original is between the second pinch
l to stop the original motor when the original is fed out, front or rear side.
l measurement delay on leading and trailing edge to detect holes in a filing strip.

04.06.2002 46
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Rear output
The original is fed out of the scanner by the second pinch rollers.
A delivery table may be needed for rear delivery.

Difficult originals e.g.: thick, curled, must fed out by the rear output.

04.06.2002 47
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Front output
The original is transported to the rear output, until the trailing edge is in the second pinch. The original motor
stops and reverses the direction. The reverse transport speed depends of the original length. Up to 30 cm (12")
the speed is 5 m/min, for all other length the speed is 8.4 m/min. A passive guide flap guides the original over
the gauge roller to the front output of the scanner.

04.06.2002 48
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Original motor (ORGMO)

For 1:1 image, the speed of the original motor (ORGMO) is 100% (5 m/min.).

Magnification from 100% to 400% in feed direction is done by reducing the speed between 100% and 25% (25
% = 1.25 m/min.).

Reduction is also done by increasing the speed of the original motor.

l image reduction from 100% to approx. 48%: motor speed from 5 m/min to 10 m/min.
l image reduction from approx. 48% to 25%: motor speed from 5 m/min to 10 m/min. + scans only every
alternate line (skips the line in between).
mtr/min
10

0
50 100 400 %

The original motor is switched off by the original cover switch (ORGSAFSW), when the cover is opened.

04.06.2002 49
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Original width detection

Width detection of the original is necessary to select the correct roll width in the printer when copying in the
automatic roll feed mode. The selected roll width also depends on the chosen magnification ratio.
The original present sensor and the 7 width sensors are positioned in such a way that they can detect the
various width formats:

The table below shows the activated sensors and the corresponding size:
Size PRE- WID- WID- WID- WID- WID- WID- WID- Size
Metric SE SE1 SE2 SE3 SE4 SE5 SE6 SE7 Inches
DIN A4 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 A 8.5" - 9"
DIN A3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 B 11" - 12"
DIN A2 1 * 1 0 0 0 0 0 C 17" - 18"
1 * * 1 0 0 0 0 B2 / D 22"
DIN A1 1 * * * 1 0 0 0 D 24"
1 * * * * 1 0 0 B1
DIN A0 1 * * * * * 1 0 E 34"
914mm 1 * * * * * * 1 36"

* = don’t care 0 = not activated 1 = activated

04.06.2002 50
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Original length
Original length
The original length is calculated from the number of steps, the original motor (ORGMO) is turning to transport
the original over the original present sensor (ORGPRESE).

Minimum original length

The minimum length of an original is 210 mm (8.2") because of the distance between the two pinch rollers.

04.06.2002 51
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Filing strips
Filing strips
Originals with filing strips must be fed in as follows:

Filing strip at the right-hand side

Move the side guide so far to the right, till the left side of the filing strip is over the zero position. The filing
strip is thus outside the scanning area and causes no problems with the sensors in the original handling

Filing strip at the left-hand side.

Choose the corresponding paper roll size.

Filing strip at the leading or trailing edge.

The timer for the original present sensor delays and ignores the edge of a filing strip hole up to 32 mm
(1.26").
Holes larger than 32 mm will be seen as the edge of an original.
The filing strip is always visible on the copy except, when the operator selects a shorter edge.

04.06.2002 52
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

General
The aim of the scanner function is to convert the information of the original into a digital form.

The following different functions are in the scanner:

l the original transport (see function 09 original handling)

l the light path
l scanning
l the one line CCD.
l data processing

Original path SCALA CCD Lens

Mirror Light path

04.06.2002 53
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

The light path

The light path exposes the original and transfers the light to the CCD units.
The light path consists of:

l exposure lamp SCALA

l reflector (also by the gauge roller when using transparent originals)
l exposure glass
l mirror
l lens
l light sensor EXPSE

Figure

Exposure lamp

Exposure sensor (EXPSE)

04.06.2002 54
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

The scanner lamp

The exposure lamp is a 50 W fluorescent lamp. The light output of the lamp is regulated. The EXPSE
sensor detects the light output of the scanner lamp.

Block diagram:

Lam p
Ballast

SCALAFIL

SCALAPWM
+ 12 V / GND
SCALAACT
EXPSEIN EXPSE

Mixed Power
Supply

l The SCALAFIL signals starts the pre-heaters of the lamp. The pre-heaters are on until the scanner
lamp is switched off.
l The SCALAPWM switches the lamp on and off. The SCALAPWM signal is also the demanded light
level and is set on 80%. It is a puls width modulation signal.
l The EXPSEIN signal is the analog output signal of the EXPSE sensor. The value of this signal is
related to the actual amount of light of the scanner lamp.
l The SCALAACT signal is a feedback signal that indicates the control if the scanner lamp is switched
on or off.

Timing diagram:
EXPOSURE
LEVEL
80 %

SCALAFIL

SCALAPWM
time

Scanner lamp adjustment

The scanner lamp must have a certain light output. This amount of light is de-rived from its maximal light
output, because this point is a limit.
To create the 100% light output during the adjustment of the scanner lamp con-trol circuit, the feedback
signal of the optical sensor (EXPSEIN) is disabled from the control loop. This is done by means of a jumper.

04.06.2002 55
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

SCALAPWM Exp. lamp

jumper output

testpoint
EXPSE

EXPSEIN
EXPSE
10PBA5

If the jumper is in the adjust position the SCALAPWM signal is held low (= 100% duty-cycle) and the power
supply will supply the lamp with the maxi-mum power.
The light level of the lamp will rise until it reaches 100% light out-put at the optimal lamp temperature.
During the rise the signal of EXPSE (at the testpoint) must be kept at a constant level of 9.0 V. This is done
by means of the potentiometer (see adjustment: ‘Maximum exposure level’ .
After the adjustment the jumper must be re-positioned in the original position.

04.06.2002 56
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

CCD unit
The Charged Coupled Device (CCD) converts the detected light amount into an analogue
voltage. The value of the analogue voltage is related to the light amount.

The Oc· 9600 uses a reduced type CCD. The actual image is projected on 1 CCD device via an
optical system with a mirror and a lens.

The CCD has 7500 pixels. Only 7200 pixels are used to scan the maximum original size of 914.4
mm (36”). The even and odd pixels have separate com-mand and data channels.
The CCD is mounted on the CCD Console PBA.

The scanspeed is set by jumper X4 on 10PBA2, see assembling CCD unit.

The scanning resolution is 200 dots/inch (dpi) in the width direction and 400 dots/inch (dpi) in the
feed direction.
If the magnification is >200%, the resolution in feed direction is reduced to 200 dots/inch, to
reduce the amount of RAM memory. By interpolation the 200 dots/inch is increased back to 400
dots/inch.
One pixel is approx. 0.064 mm.

All data of the original is directly transported via the Image Processing PBA to the SPICE board
in the NGC controller.
The figure below shows the used PBAs and the direction of the data flow.
The Image processing PBA is described in chapter 11 Image processing.

CCD CCD
CCD Console interface
10 PBA 1 10 PBA 2
Image
Processing
To SPICE
10PBA4
board
NGC
Console
CPU
22PBA02

Scanner

04.06.2002 57
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Data processing
Block diagram data path
The data path block diagram describes the various data steps on the CCD Con-sole 10PBA1.
Figure data path

Offset compensation
Every CCD cell generates a DC voltage, independently of light, which is not needed. The offset
compensation compensates all pixels for this DC level.
Note: . The offset compensation is carried out just after the machine is switched on.

Multiplexing
To reduce the amount of electrical connections and to gain higher performance the data of the 2 CCD
channels is multiplexed.

Adjustable amplifier
The amplifier amplifies the analogue voltage to the optimum input range for the ADC. In this way the total
range of the ADC is used. The adjustable am-plifier is needed to compensate system tolerances of the
driver on the CCD PBA. The setting of the adjustable amplifier is based on the CCD information from the
gauge roller. This is done during scanner calibration, after switching on the machine.

A/D converter
The A/D converter (Analog Digital converter) converts the analog voltage into an 8 bit digital signal.

CCD Interface 10PBA2

The interface function takes care of the transmission from and to the Image Processing PBA, where the
image processing takes place (see chapter 11).

04.06.2002 58
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Mixed Power Supply

The mixed power supply is used for:
+ 24V / + 12 V and +5V supply (only in RUN mode)
+ 5 V in STAND-BY mode

Block diagram:

Mains filter
Mains switch
Engine

Exp.
Lam p
ON in
Stand-b y Ballast la mp
m ode + 5V
stand -by
SUPON

+ 24 V
ON Ballast c ontrol EXPSEIN
in + 5V SCALAPWM
RUN SCALAFIL
m ode + 12 V SCALAACT

The Mixed Power Supply is supplied by the line voltage of the engine.
It generates the low voltage power supply and the high frequency lamp ballast.
By the logic signal ~SUPON~ the scanner can be switched between the RUN mode and the STAND-BY
mode.
The input voltage of the power supply is not from the engine, but from a socket outlet on the wall.

04.06.2002 59
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Scanning
The scanning function is a part of the total image data processing, which en-sures a good copy quality for
most types of originals.
Nearly independent of the quality of the original e.g. opaque or transparent, the output quality should be at a
high level.

The total image processing functions take place on the following PBAs:

Scanner
NGC Controller Engine

CCD CCD
CCD Console Interface
10PBA1 10PBA2

SPICE NGC
PBA soft- Print- Print-
ware head head
Image I/O
processing
Console CPU 10PBA4
22PBA02

This chapter describes only the scanning part, which is up to the Image processing PBA.

Scan start moment

The scanning of the original must start on the leading edge of the original.
This moment depends of:
l original transport moment / position
l original speed (magnification factor)
l leading edge setting

Scan stop moment

The scanning of the original must stop on the trailing edge of the original.
This moment depends of:
l deactivating of the original present sensor (ORGPRESE)
l trailing edge setting

04.06.2002 60
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

General
The aim of the image processing function is to create:
l a good copy quality
l a retention function
l an editing function.
l a zoom function
l a scan to file with Scan Station

The image processing function is a part of the total data processing, which takes care of a good copy quality
for most types of originals. Nearly independent to the quality of the original e.g. opaque or transparent, the
output quality should be at a high level.

The total image processing functions take place on the following PBAs:
Scanner
NGC Controller Engine

CCD CCD
CCD Console Interface
10PBA1 10PBA2

SPICE NGC
PBA soft- Print- Print-
ware head head
Image I/O
processing
Console CPU 10PBA4
22PBA02

This chapter describes the image processing part, which is handled by the Image Processing board 10PBA4.

04.06.2002 61
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Image processing 10PBA04

The image processing is A PBA, containing digital hardware that implements algorithms to transform the
output of the CCD into a good quality half-toned bitmap.
The data flow through the Image processing PBA is in serial order, meaning that it is actually a pipeline of
modules, each implementing part of the desired functionality.

Image Processing Modules:

NGC
Controller

Zoom
Output adaptor

ABC
Half toning

Blue print
Framing
Uneveness PP_LUT
compensation

Filtering
Input adaptor Image
Processing
10PBA04
CCD 10PBA02

Input adaptor

Uneveness compensation, Blue print, Framing

ABC (Automatic Background Compensation)

Zoom

Filtering

PP LUT

Scale Y

Halftoning

Output adapter

04.06.2002 62
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

The process
The process steps are:

Developing roller Photoconductor Printhead Charge Post-exposure

(drum)

Transfer Separation Cleaning

Short explanation of the process

The photoconductor is charged even and negatively up to -670 volt.
After charging the photoconductor (drum) is image exposed.
At the exposed places the photoconductor is discharged to approximately -200 volt. On the photoconductor
(drum) exists now a latent image of the original or plot.
The latent image is developed by black toner and is now visible on the photoconductor (drum).
The toner image is electrically transferred onto the copy material, which is transported against the
photoconductor (drum).
Separation of the copy material from the photoconductor (drum) is done by electrically neutralising of the copy
material.
The toner image on the copy material is fixed by heat of the fuser.
The residual toner on the photoconductor (drum) is cleaned off by a cleaning blade.
The residual charge on the photoconductor (drum) is neutralised by light of a led array.
The photoconductor (drum) is after one turn neutral and can be used for the next cycle.

Voltage Neutral Exposure Bias voltage Contrast voltage

photoconductor voltage (Optical Density)
(drum)

04.06.2002 63
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Charge on drum Toner on drum Total charge

04.06.2002 64
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Introduction to the Photoconductor

The photoconductor of the Oc· 9600 is a photoconductor (drum) with an organic photoconductive layer.
The photoconductor (drum) is the centre of the process.

The photoconductor (drum) consists of:

Transport layer Generation layer Adhesion layer Aluminium drum

The photoconductor (drum) diameter is 80 mm, the circumference is 251.3 mm.

photoconductor (drum) key figures and attention points:

1. lifetime min. 21,000 lm (68900 lf)

2. Stock: temperature: 10 - 35 °C (50°F - 95°F)
no condensation on the photoconductor (drum)
environment air should be dry and clean
never expose to corrosive gasses e.g. NH3
3. photoconductor (drum)
handling: expose to sunlight: never
expose to TL-tube: < 5 min., so use the protection sheet.

Attention: hands: never touch with bare hands, clean with a dry tissue
Body: Skin particles, hair: never on the photoconductor (drum),
it will affect the photoconductor (drum) surface.

04.06.2002 65
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Introduction to the Charging function

Charging is the first step in the electro-photographic process.
The aim of this function is to charge the OPC drum negative till the desired level of:
-670 V by 5 mtr/min and -690 V by 3 mtr/min.
The unit consists of:

Housing Corona wire

Grid wire (15x) Post-exposure Gridvoltage PBA

PBA 02PBA01

The corona wire thickness is 80 mm and is regulated to a constant current of 1000 uA total. This will give appr.
-6kV negative.
50 uA is used to charge the photoconductor (drum).
The 15 grid wires are made from stainless steel and the thickness is 0,15 mm. They are supplied with a constant
voltage of appr. - 650 volt negative by a zenerdiode on pba 02PBA01 gridvoltage. Grid and housing are kept
under the same constant voltage.

Working

When the charge corona is activated, the charge current (electrons) flow through the grid to the photoconductor
(drum) and partly to the metal housing.
So long there is a potential difference between the photoconductor (drum) and the grid, charge current flows to
the photoconductor (drum) and charges the photoconductor (drum).
The current flow to the photoconductor (drum) decreases because the potential difference between grid and the
photoconductor (drum) decreases, till both are in balance.

Post-exposure

To achieve a equal and desired charged photoconductor (drum), the photoconductor (drum) must be neutral
before the charging starts.
Post-exposure is done by the light of a led bar just before the corona unit.
Mechanical neutral (rest toner of previous copy) is done by a scraper.

Ozone

Over the full width of the machine a ozone filter is build under the photoconductor (drum). The filters are placed
in a plastic box and the air is sucked from the machine inside into the box by fan CONFAN.
The lifetime of the filters is machine lifetime.

Cleaning

Clean housing and grid with water, never with RBS or cleaner K (toner dissolves in alcohol and can left behind
as pollution).
Clean the corona wire with water.

04.06.2002 66
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Introduction to the Exposure function

Exposing is the second step in the electro photographic process.

The 9600 printhead writes black information on the photoconductor (drum).

This means that the printhead only discharges the image areas on the photoconductor (drum).
The background areas stays charged.
The printing resolution of the Oc· 9600 is 400 x 400 dpi.
One pixel is 0,063 mm.
Light of LED's is used to expose the photoconductor (drum). The light of the LED's is focused by a SLA (Self
focussing Lens Array).

Interface PHD NTC Support

04PBA01

LED bar PBA Self focussing LED Photoconductor LED bar PBA
Lens Area (drum)

The printhead is one led bar with 14464 printing (exposure) LED's. The maximum image width is 914 mm (36")

Automatic regulations:

Temperature changes the duty cycle

l NTC on the printhead: when the temperature increases, the duty cycle of the LED's will increase to give
constant light.

Framing
l Framing is done by non exposure (LED's switched off) of the image outside the paper size.

Factory adjustments:

l The distance between the print head and the photoconductor (drum).
l Differences between the 113 driver chips, to arrange an more equal copy quality of grey areas.
Attention: the data of this adjustment (PICO) is written inside an Eprom on the IO PBA.
This Eprom must always stay with the print head. When the print head is changed, also the Eprom must be
changed.

04.06.2002 67
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

General
In this sub section of functional descriptions next items are descript:

General is this description

Binary toner explanation of binary toner
The developer function explanation of developing
Toner reservoir and dosing explanation of toner buffer control and dosing in the developer
Developer unit explanation of the developer unit
Toner concentration control explanation of the different concentration levels
Sleeve cleaner explanation of cleaning toner of the surface of the developer roller
Carrier developing explanation and possible causes

04.06.2002 68
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Binary toner

For the Oc· 9600 a binary toner is used. This means that the developer consists of a toner and a carrier.
The carriers tasks are:
l Charging the toner particles with static electricity (tribo-electricity)
l Transport the toner from the toner reservoir to the photoconductor (drum)

The toner is made from an organic resin and contains black dye. The toner is not conducting electricity
(insulator).
Picture
Toner particles
This picture shows some toner particles.
The toner particles have an average size of 10 micromete
The picture is made with an electron-microscope with an
enlargement factor of 3000x.

The carrier is made from a metal (iron) which is sensitive to magnetism. When toner and carrier are mixed and
stirred both the toner and the carrier will acquire electrostatic charge and they will stick to each other.
The toner is charged negative and the carrier positive. So the toner is sensitive to an electrical field.

Picture
Carrier particle with toner
This picture shows a carrier particle with some toner partic
in a state when they are electrostatic charged. Due to the
electrostatic charge the toner particles stick to the carrier.
The carrier particles have an average size of 100 microme
The picture is made with an electron-microscope.

The developing roller in the Oc· 9600 is made magnetic, and it therefore attracts the metal carrier particles.
When the developing roller rotates, the carrier (with the attached toner particles) move with it.
Picture
Magnetic developing roller attracts carrier
Magnetic force and electrical field.
The magnetic field of the developing roller holds the car

04.06.2002 69
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

to the developing roller surface.

The toner particles stick to the carrier due to electrostati
charge.
N

04.06.2002 70
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

The developing function

After charging and exposing, developing is the third step in the electrophotographic process.
Fig. prodevel: The developing function.

-CHGHV Direction of The charging function charges the light

electromagnetic force sensitive layer of the photoconductor (drum)
to -670 negative volt (ASV). On area's
-670V where the printed image must be black, the
photoconductor (drum) is exposed by the
-200V exposing function of the printhead. The
voltage on these places are less negative
(-200 volt). These exposed area's are also
N
the area's where we want toner.
N N
S S S N
N
S S

N
N
-550V

S
S
To achieve that the toner is attracted to the

N
N

S
S
-BIASHV
photoconductor (drum) we make use of a

N
S

S
bias voltage (BIASHV = -550V) on the

N
S

N
S
developing roller. When the bias voltage is

S
N
N

S
high enough, the electromagnetic force

N
(directed from the developing roller to the
photoconductor (drum), will force toner to
the photoconductor (drum) in the exposed
area's.
Voltage developing roller: -550V, voltage
exposed photoconductor (drum): -200V.

In unexposed area's (-670V), the

electromagnetic field is opposite because
the charge on the photoconductor (drum)
more negative as the bias voltage. So at
these area's no toner will be attracted.
There is a voltage difference of approx. 50V between the PBA and the developing roller.
The voltage on the TP1 of the high voltage supply 22PBA04 is approx. -550 V DC ± 4V. The voltage on the
magnet roller in the developing unit is approx. -500 V DC.

04.06.2002 71
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Toner Supply
When the toner concentration in the developer unit is low, the toner supply motor DEVTONMO (05M1) feeds
toner. During toner dosing, the toner supply switch DEVTONSW (05S1) detects if there is still sufficient toner in
the reservoir.

Toner feed unit Spiral roller Toner Developing unit

concentration
sensor

Toner Magnet Toner supply Flap Toner supply motor

switch

The toner supply switch DEVTONSW is a Reed switch inside the toner feed unit. When the toner supply motor
DEVTONMO rotates, a flap inside the toner feed unit also rotates. A magnet is mounted on this flap. When there
is sufficient toner, the flap is moved upwards by the resistance of the toner. In that case the magnet does not
energise the toner supply switch DEVTONSW.

When the toner level gets low, the flap falls down because there is no more toner to resist it. The magnet then
energises the Toner supply switch and DEVTONMO supplies toner.
If the toner supply switch is activated 3 times then the
“add toner” message appears.

Note: If the toner-dosing system is activated 200 times after the toner gets low then the machine stops copying.
After refill and a special test the machine starts again. (Attention.: 200 times toner-dosing is not the same as 200
copies!)

After every turn of the mix roller in the developer unit the toner concentration sensor DEVTONCONSE (05B1) is
cleaned by a magnet and measures the toner concentration. If the concentration level is low, the toner supply
motor is activated for 2 seconds (needs to detect toner high / low level in the reservoir). At the end of the 2
seconds the new mixture is measured, the toner supply motor stops or turns again 2 seconds.

Note: The toner supply motor turns only when the main drive motor (DRIMO) is activated.
Note: 1 bottle toner is 450 gr.
Note: Dosing is about 0,25 gr./min.

04.06.2002 72
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Developer unit
The aim of the developer unit is:
l Charge the toner particles tribo-electric
l Transport the charged toner particles to the photoconductor (drum).

The developer unit consists of:

Toner supply Developer roller

spiral with magnets

Toner Mix spiral rollers Doctor blade Sleeve cleaner Photoconductor

concentration (drum)
sensor

During installation the developer unit is filled with 1 bottle developer (1750 gr.) and the toner concentration
sensor DEVTONCONSE is adjusted.
The developer unit is driven by the main drive motor DRIMO.
By the mix spirals,
l the toner is well mixed with the carrier to charge tribo-electric
l new added toner is well mixed with the developer before it is used to develop the image on the
photoconductor (drum)
l Decreasing of the toner concentration by developing black area's on one spot is not possible. The
developer is continuously transported through the unit around a partition. This means also that the whole
mixture stays homogeneous over the whole length of the developer roller.

The doctor blade is not adjustable

The developer unit is isolated from the machine.
Maximal temperature is 35 °C (95°F), to prevent that the toner starts clumping.

04.06.2002 73
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Toner concentration
Mixing of toner and carrier is one of the tasks of the developing unit. The mixing process works in such a way
that there is a constant flow of developer alongside the developing roller. This prevents a local shortage of toner
on the developing roller.
The demanded quality of the developing function can only be guaranteed if the toner concentration (density of
the toner) is within certain limits. This is regulated by the toner concentration regulator.

2.25 V On/Off Fig. 05tcon01: Toner-concentration-regulator.

toner
dosing The toner concentration sensor DEVCONSE (05B1) in the
developing unit measures the toner concentration by means
of induction. When the toner concentration decreases, the
V_sensor toner concentration sensor sees relatively more carrier and
V_sensor increases. When V_sensor gets higher than 2.25
toner V the toner supply motor DEVTONMO is activated and tone
sensor is added. The reference 2.25 V is a factory determined
voltage which guarantees a correct developer mix.
When the toner concentration is correct (V_sensor < 2.25 V
the toner dosing system stops.

After every turn of the mix roller in the developer unit the toner concentration sensor DEVCONSE is cleaned by
a magnet and the developer concentration is measured.

There are 4 different situations, to know:

1. Normal dosing
2. Optimising print quality
3. Developer pollution
4. Severe developer pollution

1. Normal dosing
2. Optimising print quality
3. Developer pollution
4. Severe developer pollution

Oc· 9600 area coverage versus productivity

04.06.2002 74
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Sleeve cleaner
The aim of the sleeve cleaner is to clean the surface of the developer roller.
Otherwise the bias voltage changes what can result in background on the copy.

The function consists of:

l Sleeve cleaner
CLEANHV between -350 V and -450 V

ATTENTION: this -400 voltage is also on the metal housing of the unit !!

Developer roller

Doctor blade Sleeve cleaner Photoconductor

(drum)

Explanation:
In the process of the black writing the white surface of the print background is about 93-95%.
In these big area the electric field forces the negative toner particles to the developer roller.
The very small toner particles will adhere as a shield around the developer roller on which the carrier particles
are positioned by the magnetic field.
This extra negative toner layer (e.g. -35V) increases the bias tension (-550V) up to -585V !
This decreases the potential difference between the developer roller and the photoconductor (drum),
what increases the possibility of developing the photoconductor (drum) so background on the copy.

The sleeve cleaner is a strip of metal (easy to magnetise) and connected to -400 volt CLEANHV.
By the potential difference of the bias (-550V) and the sleeve cleaner (-400V) the toner around the sleeve is
developed to the clean sleeve strip.
Toner around the carrier particles remain because the field strength between carrier and toner is too strong.
The strip is cleaned by the developer on the magnetic roller.

04.06.2002 75
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Carrier developing
Carrier developing happens when the contrast tension is too high between the developer roller and the
photoconductor (drum).
When the e-field is stronger than the magnetic field the carrier is moved to the photoconductor (drum).

This is a list of possibilities that carrier is developed to the photoconductor (drum) / copy.

1. Too low bias (main reason!)

2. Too low toner concentration in developer unit

3. Low photoconductor (drum) charge

scorotron defect
covers open
big black area's

4. High photoconductor (drum) charge

backing scorotron disconnected

04.06.2002 76
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Introduction to the Transfer function

Transfer is the fourth step in the electrophotographic process.
The function of transfer is to transfer the image from the photoconductor (drum), which consists of isolated
negatively charged toner, electrically to the copy material.
Transfer and separation wires are mounted in one housing.
The function consists of:

Paper Transport Paper Photoconductor Guide fingers Pick-off pawls

Input Pinch (drum)

Transfer corona Separation corona

The transfer corona charges the copy material positively while the photoconductor (drum) is charged negatively.
The difference in polarity attracts the copy material to the photoconductor (drum).
When the electrical field between the paper and the toner is stronger than the attraction force between the
photoconductor (drum) and the toner, the toner particles move to the paper.
Not all toner is transferred to the paper. Some toner (10%) remains on the photoconductor (drum). This toner is
removed with a cleaning blade.

The transfer voltage is controlled by a constant current of 600 uA total.

The transfer current to the photoconductor (drum) is between 35 - 50 uA.

The wire thickness is 80 mm.

Ozone
Over the full width of the machine a ozone filter is build under the photoconductor (drum). The filters are placed
in a plastic box and the air is sucked from the machine inside into the box by fan CONFAN.
The lifetime of the filters is machine lifetime.

04.06.2002 77
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

04.06.2002 78
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Introduction to the Cleaning function

Cleaning is the seventh step in the electrophotographic process.

Mechanical cleaning

The residual toner on the photoconductor (drum) after transfer is removed mechanically by a scraper blade and
transported via a transport spring to waste toner bag.
Lifetime: the clean blade is replaced together with the photoconductor (drum).

Post-exposure

After the removal of the toner the image formed ASV pattern will still remain on the photoconductor (drum).
This charge is removed by the light of red LEDs.
These LEDs are placed on three PBAs, each contain 32 LEDs.
The LED bars are mounted on the scorotron unit.

The photoconductor (drum) is now clean and neutral and ready for the next copy cycle.

04.06.2002 79
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Introduction to the Fusing function

Fusing is the sixth step in the electrophotographic process.

General
In the Oc· 9600, fusing is achieved by heat and radiation. To get a correct fusing, the temperature of the fuser
elements are very high (over 320 °C 608°F). At this high temperature, fumes can evaporate out of the paper.
Sometimes it is possible that you can smell these fumes. Assure the customer that these fumes are harmless
and that they are not ozone fumes.

Paper Fuser fan Absorber Output roller Fuser output pinch

cooled down

Suction transport Heater elements Output sensor

roller

The inside of the fuser box is isolated and covered with a reflector.
2 heater elements, each have 6 strips, are mounted:
220V: serial
115V: parallel
24 Ohm
2400 Watt
The fuser is covered with a grid to protect that the copy material drops inside.

04.06.2002 80
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Paper transport in the Fusing function

The paper is transported by the suction roller of the intermediate transport and by the output rollers.
The distance over the fuser is about 270 mm (10.6"), which means A4 landscape is not possible.
Paper jam is detected by the output sensor PTROUTSE.

The copy material is heated from the underside and when the machine is warm also from the environment.
The colder paper absorbs heat needed to fuse the toner. The toner starts melting already at 40 °C (104 °F)
and is fused at 52 °C (125 °F).
The copy material temperature over the fusing elements will reach 100 °C (212 °F).
The fixing temperature for the different copy material is set automatically.

04.06.2002 81
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Temperature measurement

The temperature is measured by 5 NTC's, spread over the whole width of the fuser elements.
They are positioned so that an A4 copy always is detected.
All the NTC's are involved with the temperature protection.
The fuser temperature is controlled by the middle NTC (FUSNTC3). It regulates the duty cycle of the SSR.
The set temperature is set automatically and differs between the several types of copy material and between
a "cold" and "warm" machine, e.g.:
paper 75 gr. - cold machine - 320 °C (608 °F)
paper 75 gr. - warm machine - 297.9 °C (568 °F)
polyester 3.5 mil - cold machine - 313 °C (595,5 °F)
polyester 3.5 mil - warm machine - 266.6 °C (512 °F).
"Cold" or "warm machine" is detected by the NTC (FUSNTC6) which is mounted on the reflector.

l The copy material absorbs heat, this means that outside the paper seize the temperature increases. To much
difference is checked by the other NTC's. When the difference in temperature is outside the specifications, a
safety circuit is activated.
l Temperature increase between two copies (no heat absorption) will result in problems on the leading edge of
the next copy. Therefore the temperature set point is lowered temporarily and then increased by a certain
number of °C/second, back till the temperature set point

04.06.2002 82
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

The absorber
The absorber is a box above the fuser.

Aim:
l The aim is to prevent loss of heat and carry off superfluous of heat.

Function
l Temperature isolation for fast warming up
l Fire security by carry off superfluous of heat
l Cooling down the fuser elements outside the paper size where there is no heat absorption by the paper
The temperature is much more equal over the length of the fuser elements.
l Contribution to the fuse process, especially when the machine is just switched on ("cold"), temperature can be
up to 120 °C (248 °F).

Construction
l The bottom side is closed with a black painted foil.
l The top side is covered with isolation.
l 2 air fans (FUSFANR and FUSFANL) are mounted on the left and right top side. They are switch on when the
NTC's of the fuser elements measures a to high temperature.
l This happens at the side of the copy material where the heat is absorbed by the foil.
Switch on: Temp. NTC1,2,4,5>SET Temp. + 10°C (18°F)
Switch off: Temp. NTC1,2,4,5< SET Temp. + 5°C (9°F)
l The upper output roller is hollow and a fan (PTROUTFAN) cools down the roller shaft and the roller wheels.
To prevent that the toner sticks to the warm rollers and creates reprinting on the copies.
The temperature is checked by the reflector NTC (FUSNTC6).
Switched on: Temp.NTC6 > 40°C (104 °F).
Switched off: Temp.NTC6 < 35°C (95 °F).
l The output sensor (PTROUTSE) with a pulse disk near the output rollers detects the leading edge and
transport speed of the copy material. If something is wrong, the fuser is deactivated.

04.06.2002 83
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Safety precautions

To prevent the overheating of the paper in the fuser, several precautions have been taken:
The temperature in the fuser is kept as low as possible. Paper burns spontaneously at a temperature of 425 °C
(797°F) and when lighted it burns at a temperature of 375 °C (707°F). The temperature of the heaters will never
exceed 350 °C (662°F).

Passive precautions
l An absorber is used. When small-format paper is used, only a small amount of the heat is absorbed by the
paper. So the temperature at the sides will rise. When the temperature difference of the NTC's
FUSNTC1,2,4,or 5 compared to FUSNTC3 is more then 330 °C (626°F), the absorber cooling is switched on.
The cooling is achieved with the fuser fan FUSFANL at the left and the fuser fan FUSFANR at the right. There
is also a natural air flow at the rear of the fuser.
l Protection wire grid above the heaters. This wire grid prevents large paper clippings from reaching the heaters
(small clippings are harmless).
l Reliable paper path.

Active protections
l The paper output sensor PTROUTSE, Error 15504.
When the paper does not reach the paper output sensor in time or no sensor pulses are detected.
l NTC's in the fuser and reflector.
Temperature fuser FUSNTC1,2,4 or 5 is >50 °C (122°F) then FUSNTC3, Error 08520/21.
Temperature fuser FUSNTC1,2,3,4 or 5 is >345 °C (653°F) Error 08507/11
Temperature fuser FUSNTC1,2,3,4 or 5 is >350 °C (662°F) hardware protection Error 08001/05.

During warming up, a certain temperature is expected after a certain time. This is controlled:
Temperature fuser FUSNTC1,2,3,4 or 5 difference is >50 °C (122°F) and the temperature of 3 NTC's are over
the average of the 5 NTC's after 10 seconds, Error 08507/11
Temperature fuser FUSNTC1,2,3,4 or 5 difference is >80 °C (176°F) and the temperature of 3 NTC's are below
the average of the 5 NTC's after 10 seconds, Error 08513/17.
Temperature fuser FUSNTC1,2,4 or 5 is <50 °C (122°F) then FUSNTC3 after 25 seconds, Error 08519.
Temperature fuser FUSNTC1,2,4 or 5 is <100 °C (212°F) after 10 seconds, Error 08001/05.
Temperature fuser FUSNTC1,2,4 and 5 is <100 °C (212°F) after 10 seconds Error 25716.
Temperature reflector FUSNTC6 is <6 °C (43°F) after 10 seconds Error 08006.
Temperature reflector FUSNTC6 is >200 °C (392°F) and < 350 °C (662 °F) Error 08006.

l Software protections
Some protections are called: "Software protection". The safety relay 1 on pba 22PBA03 is deactivated, the
fuser is switched off and an error message is presented on the screen. The restart of the fuser can be activated
by the operator.
l Hardware protections
Some protections are called: "Hardware protection". The safety relay 1 on pba 22PBA03 is deactivated, the
fuser is switched off and an error message is presented on the screen. The restart is only possible by switching
off and on the machine.

04.06.2002 84
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

General
General
One configuration can have maximal 3 paper roll drawers mounted.
The roll drawers are always mounted directly under the process unit.
Each roll drawer can handle one or two rolls. In an one roll drawer the second position is only a stock position.

"Drawing side view 3 rolls + 1 sheet feeder" (rap. 96441075)

Copy material rolls that can be placed are:

l max: 914,8 mm (36")
l min: 297 mm (11")
l max diameter: 180 mm (75gr/m2: 200mtr.)

The paper roll drawer consits of:

Knife unit Feed motor Paper present Roll 1 Papertray open switch
sensor

Paper leading Paper present Brake rollers Roll 2

edge sensor sensor

By the central doorlocking, only one drawer can be openend.

04.06.2002 85
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Functional description of the operation

Description of:
1 New roll of copy material
2 Transport of the copy material
3 Brake roll holder
4 Transport speed

New roll of copy material

The roll drawer is open and the leading edge of the new copy material is positioned by the operator against the
pinch of the feed rollers.
After pressing the feed/cut button, the feed motor drives the feed rollers and the paper is transported over the
present sensor PRDxPRESE.
The paper passes the knife unit into the vertical transport.
Timing from the present sensor calculates the minimum length (297 mm) of the chip to be cut by the knife.
Is the feed/cut button still activated, then the cutting moment is also deleted.
During cutting the vertical paper transport is stopped to have a straight cut.
After the cutting, the operator removes the paper chip.
There are no roll width sensors, so paper size and type off copy material must be set in the operator panel.

Transport of the copy material

When copy material is needed, the feed motor (PRDxFEDMOx) is activated and drives the feed rollers.
Paper is transported through the knife unit into the vertical transport pinch of the above drawer or the PTR unit.
Lead sensor (PRDxLEADSE or PTRLEADSE) is activated and starts the counting of the paper length.
After counting the needed length, the paper must be cutted by the knife.
During cutting the paper under the knife must be stopped to have a straight cut.
l Short piece of paper: feed motor and vertical transport is stopped,
l Long piece of paper: just before cutting, the transport speed is increased and in the PTR unit a bulge is
created. In the moment of cutting the feed motor and the vertical transport is stopped to have a straight cut
while the copy material keeps his normal transport speed under the photoconductor (drum).
If no more sheets from the same roll is needed, the roll feed motor reversed the transport direction and pulls the
paper backwards till the leading edge is not anymore in the general paper path (about 60 mm).
If more than one print is ordered from the same roll, a minimum distance of 40 mm is timed between two prints.

Knife motor Knife Paper present Running wheels Paper roll

12M2/5/8 sensor
12B4/11/18

Feed motor Paper lead Paper present Brake roll

12M1/4/7 sensor sensor 12B6
12B3/10/17

Brake roll holder

The roll holder rotates on two running wheels on both side of the roll holder. In one of the wheel is a friction

04.06.2002 86
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

bearing to brake the turning of the paper roller in the moment the feed motor stops.
This to prevent bulging of the paper during stopping.

Transport speed
There are three (four) transport speeds inside the paper roll drawer (also for the vertical transport):
1. 5 mtr/min for normal copy material
2. 3 mtr/min for material >110 gr/m2
3. 7,5 mtr/min just before the cut moment for long plots where the leading edge is allready under the
photoconductor (drum)
4. 0 mtr/min during cutting

After the feed rollers of the paper roll, all following transport rollers have a slightly higher speed to keep the copy
material under tension. The highest pinch friction is from the feed rollers of the paper roll (they must also be able
to introduce the heavy weight of a new roller).
This means that the copy material has the speed of these feed rollers, all other transport rollers will slip on the
passing copy material.

The paper section and the process section each have there own drive motor.
To synchronise the copy material between the two sections, the speed of the motor for the roll drawer and for
the vertical transport can variate to create a variable bulge in the PTR unit.
This varation is regulated by the bulge sensor (PTRBULSE) in the PTR unit, to keep the bulge stable.

Nominal speed: 5 mtr/min 3 mtr/min

Bulge sensor not activated: 5,05 3,05
Bulge sensor activated: 4,85 2,85
High speed for cutting 7,5 4,5

04.06.2002 87
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Drive

Paper rolls

Each paper roll is driven by a motor (PRDxFEDMOx)

Knife

In each paper roll drawer is one knife unit, driven by a knife motor (PRDxKNMO).

Vertical transport

In the vertical transport part of each paper roll drawer are transport rollers.
The drive of these transport rollers is done by the sprockets of the vertical transport section.
This group of sprockets is driven by the Paper Transport Motor (15-PRDTRMO)
When a drawer is openend, the Paper Transport Motor is switch off by the Drawer Open Switch (PRDxOPSW)

Drive picture

1 PTRMO
2 upper drawer
3 lower drawer
4 upper sheet feeder
5 lower sheet feeder

04.06.2002 88
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Knife unit

The knife unit consists off:

Cord Carriage plate Circular knife Linear knife Knife support profile

Knife motor Knife position

sensor left/right

Cutting

The knife motor moves a circular knife over a linear knife from left to right and vice versa to cut the copy material.
A correct cut can only be guaranteed when at the moment of cutting the paper does not move at the knife
position. At the same time the paper still has to be fed into the basic machine. Therefore a bulge has to be
created between the knife and the paperfeed pinch of the basic machine.

End sensors

The knife end sensor left and the knife end sensor right are used to detect if the circular knife is on the left side
or on the right side position. For the next cut the motor shall turn clockwise or anti clockwise.

These sensors are also used to brake the speed of the knife motor to prevent that the circular knife is crashed
against the side frame.
When during a cut one of the sensors is activated, the direction of the knife motor is reversed and/or
short-circuited to brake the speed of the knife movement.
At the time of initialisation, the circular knife is moved until one of the knife sensors becomes active.

04.06.2002 89
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

General
General
One configuration can have maximal 3 sheet feed drawers mounted.
The sheet feed drawers are always mounted under the paper roll drawers.

"Drawing side view 3 rolls + 1 sheet feeder" (rap. 96441075)

Depending of the thickness of the material up to 250 sheets can be placed inside.
Material sizes are: A4 portrait
A3 landscape / portrait
A2 landscape
Also for 11” and 12” series.

The sheet feed drawer consists of:

1 Handle 9 Upper separation roll

2 Locking 10 Lower separation wheel
3 Tray empty sensor 11 Upper transport pinch
(PSFxEMPSE) roll
4 Paper sizes ????? 12 Lower transport pinch
wheel
5 Paper 13 Vertical transport
6 Format positioners 14 Elevator table
7 Elevator switch 15 Elevator motor
(PSFxELEMO)
8 Sheet feed roll 16 Central door locking

Presents of copy material is detected by the tray empty sensor PSFxEMPSE, which is mounted under the
elevator table.
By the central door locking, only one drawer can be openened.

04.06.2002 90
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Drive

Drive of the feed rollers and separation clutch is done by the sprockets of the vertical transport section.
This group of sprockets is driven by the Paper Transport Motor (15-PTRMO)

Plaats hier het plaatje

drawing sprocket group and motor

04.06.2002 91
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Paper elevator
Construction

The elevatorconstruction consist of:

1 Elevator motor (ELEMO) 6 Elevator bracket

2 Elevator cable 7 Sprockets
3 Elevator table 8 Sheet feed roll
4 Microswitch Elevator up position 9 Paper
5 Separation frame

Description

The elevator motor is controlled by the elevator motor microswitch.

The microswitch is operated by the position of the separation frame.
The separation frame is positionnned by the upwards pressure of the
paper against the sheet feed roll.
When the elevator table is in lower position:
l the separation frame is in lower position
l the microswitch is activated
l the elevator motor is activated, turns a shaft with two elevator cables
to pull the elevator table upwards
- till the existing paper on the elevator table pushes the sheet feed
roller upwards
- the separation frame turns upwards and the microswitch is
deactivated
- the elevator motor stops.
Depending of the microswitch the elevator motor will keep (regulate) the
elevator table and paper in position.

Opening the sheet feeder

The opening handle moves the elevator bracket which disengages the
sprockets.
When the sheet feeder drawer is pulled out, the elevator motor is
electrical disconnected.
The elevator table drops downwards.

04.06.2002 92
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

04.06.2002 93
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Separation
General

The separation unit takes care that only one sheet of paper is transported to the process section.

The separation unit consists of:

upper separation lower separation sheet feed roll

roll roll

slipping clutch sheets

Separation

The upper separation roll is activated by the separation clutch.

The lower separation wheel with a slipping clutch is idle and turns with
the upper roller. This because the friction with the upper roller is higher
then the counter friction of the slipping clutch.
l If one sheet of paper is in between, the friction between the lower
separation wheel and the paper is higher then the counter friction of
the slipping clutch. So also the lower wheel is turning and the sheet
of paper is transported.
l If two sheets of paper are in between, the counter friction of the
slipping clutch is higher as the friction between the sheets of paper,
so the slipping clutch blocks the lower separation wheel. Only the
upper sheet of paper is transported.
Attention: if more then two sheets are in between the separation
rollers, it is possible that a second sheet is also transported!

If the leading edge of the paper is take-over by the next transport rollers,
the separation clutch is switched off. The upper separation roll and the
sheet feed roll have an one way bearing, so they run idle over the
surface of the paper.

04.06.2002 94
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Sheet transport
Sheet transport to/in the vertical transport

The sheet transport after separation consists of:

1 Transport rollers
2 Vertical transport

When the upper transport roll and the lower transport wheel take-over the paper sheet transport, the separation
section is switch off by the separation clutch PSFxSEPCL.
To prevent for bulging of the paper, the speed of the transport rollers is a little faster as from the separation
section. Therefore the upper separation roll and the sheet feed roll have one way bearings, so they can run idle.
The transport rollers push the paper sheet into the vertical transport.
The next transport pinch in the vertical transport is from the lowest paper roll drawer.
So, if three sheet feed drawers are mounted, it is not possible to transport from the lowest sheet feeder:
A4 portrait and A3 landscape.

Transport speed

The transport speed for paper sheets in the vertical transport is nominal and 5,1 m/min.
All other speeds inside the sheet feed drawer are changed by sprockets.

04.06.2002 95
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

For all descriptionsof the PTR input table folder: see function
Folder, 15 Paper Transport.
All descriptions of the PTR input table folder, like:
l functional descriptions
l SDS tests
l dis-/assemblies
l etc.
are described in chapter Folder, 15 Paper Transport.

04.06.2002 96
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Paper switch IRT

The paperswitch is an accessory, what can be build between the fuser output pinch and the paper rack.
With this section, the print can be transported underneath the paper rack to an optional device e.g. a table or a
folder.

This section consists of:

Paperpath rack Paper guide

Optical sensor Pulse wheel Paper switch

motor

If the engine is initiated, the paper switch motor is activated, the sensor detects the edge of the flank of the cam.
The motor stops and the flap position will guide the print into e.g. the folder.

To guide the print onto the delivery rack, the motor turns the cam 1x till the sensor sees the flank of the cam
again.
(The intelligence of the engine does not now the position of the flap!)

04.06.2002 97
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

General
The function.

The paperpath encloses the:

l Paper Transport PTR, this is the section between the upper roll drawer and the photoconductor (drum).
The transfer/separation unit is positioned in this function.
l Synchronisation of the paper leading edge with the process.
Papertransport ensures a continuous transport of the paper during the print process.
l Differences in speed between the process and the paperhandling are adapted by the papertransport in this
situation.

This section consists of:

Bulge section Transfer/- Intermediate Fuser output pinch

separation unit transport

Vertical pinch Input pinch Fuser

Copy material from the roll or sheet feeder is transported through the vertical pinch, through the bulge section
against the input pinch.
Copy material from the manual feed is directly feeded against the input pinch.
From this moment the path of the copy material is the same: under the photoconductor (drum) and over the
transfer and separation unit, over the intermediate transport and under the fuser to the output delivery section.

04.06.2002 98
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Paper transport in the PTR

This section consists of:

Manual feed table Bulge levers Paper Transport Paper Transport Photoconductor
Input Sensor Input Pinch (drum)

Paper Roll Vertical Pinch Vertical Transport Horizontal

Drawer Upper Motor Transport Motor
Lead Sensor

PTR
The leading edge of the paper from the paperhandling (roll-drawer or sheetfeeder) is caught in a funnel above
the PRDU. The paper passes PTRVERPINCH and reaches PRDULEADSE.
Only if the paper is coming from the PRDU, this sensor (PRDULEADSE) is used to determine the moment on
which the paperhandling is stopped and a sheet is cut.
After passing PRDULEADSE the paper enters the bulge-area. The bulge-levers are in a rest position. They
guide the paper to the Paper Feed Table.
Next the paper passes PTRINSE, which determines the rest of the timing for the paper. This depends on the
source where the paper comes from and the (cutting) length.
After this sensor PTRINSE the leading edge is either transported through PTRINPINCH until the synchronisation
point, or first pushed against the non rotating PTRINPINCH for a short time and then transported to the
synchronisation point.
After synchronisation (leading edge paper / image on photoconductor (drum), the paper is transported further to
the photoconductor (drum).

Manual feed
The operator has to feed in the copy material, till it is stopped by the non rotating PTRINPINCH.
When the sheet is pushed correctly against the pinch, a small bulge is formed, which enables the sheet to be
aligned with the pinch. After a short time the sheet is pulled into the pinch, until the synchronisation point.
With PTRINSE a check has to be made whether the length of the speciality is minimum 279 mm.

04.06.2002 99
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Bulge area
This section consists of;

Positive bulge Negative bulge Paper Transport Paper Transport Photoconductor

lever lever Input Sensor Input Pinch (drum)

Bulge Sensor Vertical Pinch Vertical Transport Horizontal

Motor Transport Motor

Bulge-area
In the bulge area, a positive and a negative bulge can be formed. There are several situations which influence
the amount of bulge:

No bulge
A bulge may only be formed after the leading edge is stopped against or in PTRINPINCH. To prevent that a
bulge is formed before the leading edge has reached PTRINPINCH, e.g. in case of a strongly curled sheet (end
of roll/paper moistened and dried again), the bulge levers need a steady rest position. When the bulge is formed
the weight of the levers may not be to high, else it will have an impact on the amount and form of the bulge. A
steady rest position and low weight when lifted for the bulge is realised by adding a small magnet strip on the tip
of the lever, which sticks to a metal plate in rest position.

Bulge during paper stop

The copy material stops for a short moment:
l If the leading edge reaches the synchronisation point after the PTRINPINCH,
l for some sheets (see ???? ) if the leading edge is against the PTRINPINCH for aligning.
If the leading edge is stopped, the papertransport keeps feeding paper.
For the time the leading edge is stopped, the bulge keeps growing.

Bulge during speed synchronisation

Papertransport and process can never operate at exactly the same speed (different motors).
Therefore the paperhandling switches between two speeds.
One speed is slightly slower and the other slightly faster than the process.
Sensor PTRBULSE, operated by one of the outer bulge-levers, determines whether the bulge is bigger or
smaller than a certain size and sets the vertical papertransport to the required faster or slower speed.
In this way the size of the bulge reaches a nearly constant level.

Bulge during cutting

l Process is not started ( PTRINSE is not activated), this means that the printhead is not writing data.

04.06.2002 100
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

To stop the copy material for cutting, the PTRMO of the vertical transport is deactivated and the copy
material is stopped.
In this case, no bulge is necessary.
l Process is started ( PTRINSE is activated), this means that the printhead is writing data.
The leading edge of the copy material can not be stopped for cutting the trailing edge. This because of the
synchronisation with the image on the photoconductor (drum).
To stop the copy material for cutting, a bulge is needed. This bulge is bigger than the normal synchro bulge.
Therefore just before the copy material is cut the vertical transport is set to a higher speed, so the bulge is
larger to ensure a correct cut .

Negative bulge or initial bulge

A negative bulge is formed when the leading edge is already in PTRINPINCH but has not yet reached the
synchronisation point, while at the same time the vertical transport is stopped to make a cut (there is no bulge
formed yet).
Normally the cut bulge is high enough to make a good cut, but during a worst case situation a negative bulge
can be formed.

04.06.2002 101
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Paper handling in the PTRINPINCH

General
The upper PTRINPINCH roller is driven via the clutch PTRINCL by the photoconductor (drum) motor DRIMO
The input sensor PTRINSE is located just before the pinch rollers.

Description in this section of paper handling:

leading edge
trailing edge

This section consists of:

Manual feed table Reverse Clutch Paper Transport Paper Transport Photoconductor
Input Clutch Input Pinch (drum)

Paper Transport Horizontal

Input Sensor Transport Motor

Leading edge

- Manual feed
If manual feed is used PTRINSE detects the presence of the leading edge of the sheet.
After the speciality is detected the customer has 1 second time to align the sheet against the non rotating
pinch.
After this time the clutch PTRCL is activated and the pinch transports the sheet to the synchronisation point
between the pinch rollers and the photoconductor (drum) and the process (printhead) is started.

- Print from a roll, normal situation

The clutch PTRCL is activated and the PTRINPINCH is rotating.
When the leading edge of the copy material activates the input sensor PTRINSE, the clutch is deactivated
and the copy material is stopped.
Now the reverse clutch is activated, the rollers reverse direction for a very short time, the paper is aligned.
The reverse clutch becomes active for paper up to A3 size.
When PTRCL is energized again and the leading edge reaches the synchronisation point the process
starts.
The printhead prints data on the photoconductor (drum).

- Print from a roll, special situation

The vertical transport is stopped on the moment of cutting. If the leading edge of the copy material is
between the PTRINSE and the pinch rollers, then the pinch clutch is not activated so the rollers do not
rotate.
After cutting the vertical transport is started again and feeds the leading edge of the sheet against the non
rotating pinch rollers.
After a certain time the clutch of the pinch rollers is energised for a short moment to transport the sheet up

04.06.2002 102
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

to the synchronisation point. Start of the pinch is also the moment when the printhead starts printing.
After synchronisation the clutch is activated again and the copy material is transported to the
photoconductor (drum).
In this case PTRINSE has no function.

The length of the sheets which require this special treatment depends on the drawer that is used:
-for PRDU: between 300 and 325 mm.
-for PRDM: between 500 and 525 mm.
-for PRDL: between 700 and 725 mm.

- Print from the sheetfeeder

The clutch PTRCL is not activated and the PTRINPINCH is not rotating.
The leading edge of a sheet from the sheetfeeder activates the PTRINSE and is stopped against the pinch
rollers for alignment.
After a certain time the clutch of the pinch rollers is energised for a short moment to transport the sheet up
to the synchronisation point. Start of the pinch is also the moment when the printhead starts printing.
After synchronisation the clutch is activated again and the copy material is transported to the
photoconductor (drum).

- Switching off feed clutch PTRCL

For all cases the feed clutch is switched off, to stop the leading edge of the copy material, at the position of
synchronisation between the pinch rollers and the photoconductor (drum).

Trailing edge

- Switching off feed clutch PTRCL

The trailing edge of the copy material must have left the pinch rollers before the rollers are stopped.
After deactivating the pinch sensor PTRINSE, the clutch is de-energised with a short delay.

Only in following cases the feed-clutch has to be switched off:

- next sheet from the sheetfeeder
- when the next sheet from the roll drawer has a critical length (see Print from a roll, special situation)
- when there is no next sheet.

- Paper jam
PTRINSE has no function for paper jam on the trailing edge.

04.06.2002 103
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Intermediate transport

The goal of this section is:

l transport of the shortest copy material (279 mm, 11") from the photoconductor (drum) to the output pinch of
the fuser.
l no image disturbance of the not fused toner by the speed differences of the photoconductor (drum) and the
fuser output pinch.
l keep the copy material down, so it does not touch the upper part of the fuser.

The intermediate transport consists of:

Transport wheels Airflow

Suction fan

The fan SUCFAN creates an underpressure in the suction box.

This underpressure attracts the copy material on the transport wheels for transport.
The speed of the transport rollers is slightly faster as from the photoconductor (drum), to prevent for:
l No bulge between the suction box and the photoconductor (drum)
l no double image if pulling the trailing edge away under the photoconductor (drum).
The transport rollers are driven by the process motor DRIMO

Timing of the ventilator by the processor is started by PTRINSE:

Start: if the suction holes are covered by the leading edge of the copy material
Stop: if the suction holes are just covered by the trailing edge of the copy material

Bad paper transport:

l not sufficient under pressure, the sealing does not close properly
l transport rollers position to low, outside bearings must not have any play.

04.06.2002 104
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

04.06.2002 105
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Integrated Receiving Tray (IRT)

This is a receiving rack on top of the printer.
The capacity is about 100 sheets.
The copies are delivered face down.
Maximum length copy material 1220 mm (48")

The unit consists of:

Receiving rack IRT output pinch Tray full sensor Paperpath rack

Fan Fuser output Output sensor Paper switch IRT Paper guide
pinch
The rack is mounted on the upper cover of the absorber.
The paper rack is mounted against the rear side of the machine.

Reversal guide strips?????

When the print leaves the output pinch of the fuser the leading edge is guided by the paperpath rack outside the
engine to the output pinch of the IRT.
The speed of the output pinch of the IRT is lower than the speed of the output pinch of the fuser. (For safety
reasons the output-pinch has a slip-clutch.)
The paperpath rack is mounted with a hinge at the rear of the engine. The bulge created by the difference in
speed of the output pinches pushes the paperpath rack outwards.

- paperpath rack
It is very important that the paperpath racks are well mounted. The difference off paperpath length between the
racks. Larger difference can lead to skew transport of especially long and small sheets and even to paperjams.
The weight of the outside rack must be so height that the leading edge of all supported materials is transported
to the output pinch of the IRT without moving the racks upwards more then 1 or 2 mm.

- tray
The transport rollers of the output pinch have different diameters so the prints are waved perpendicular on the
transport direction. This makes the prints stronger which is necessary to transport the prints upwards in the tray.
Because especially polyester and film are weak when they are warmed up and also stick together very easy

04.06.2002 106
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

when they are pushed over each other a blower (PTRIRTFAN) is added.
This blower makes a air-cushion from the output pinch to the end of the tray underneath the print which is
transported into the tray. Also in the middle of the tray an extra rack is added which is positioned some mm
higher to keep the airflow in the middle of delivered formats as much as possible.

The straight length of the tray is about 650 mm. Prints with a longer length are curling over the end of the rack.
The maximum length which can be received is 1220 mm (48"). Longer prints will fall on the ground.
Transporting to long prints to the IRT will give no paperjams.

Tray full detection is done by sensor (PTRIRTSE).

When this sensor stays active after the last trailing edge, there will be no start of a new job and an operator
message appears.

- Paperswitch
The paperswitch is an accessory, what can be build between the fuser output pinch and the paper rack.
With this section activated, the print is transported underneath the paper rack e.g. onto a table (HRT) or into a
folding device.

04.06.2002 107
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Introduction to the Separation function

Separating is the fifth step in the electrophotographic process.
The negative charged photoconductor (drum) attracts the positive charged copy material. By this attraction the
copy material will try to follow the outline of the photoconductor (drum). To prevent this there is a separation
function to neutralise the charged copy material.
The stiffness of the copy material separates it from the photoconductor (drum).
This function consists of:

Paper Transport Paper Photoconductor Guide fingers Pick-off pawls

Input Pinch (drum)

Transfer corona Separation corona

Separation is achieved by one corona wire which is supplied with a negative -450V DC offset voltage on which is
superimposed a AC voltage 11.8 kV peak-peak, 500 Hz.
The AC component is most effective during the period that the polarity is opposite of the rest charges to be
removed, in this way positive and negative rest charges can be removed.
By the negative DC offset voltage, the negative working area is bigger then the positive area.
In this way the positive copy material and the positive (transfer outside the paper format) photoconductor (drum)
area are neutralised.
Vibration of the separation wire are dimmed by two beads at the ends of the wire.

To increase the print quality for only paper materials till the trailing edge e.g. posters, the separation corona is
switched off 50 mm before the trailing edge of the paper. By this the effective force of transfer increases and the
paper follows the photoconductor (drum) for a longer time. In this way there is a better transfer quality and so the
print quality increases.
Using other type of material (e.g. polyester and vellum) the separation corona is not switched off.

After the trailing edge of the copy material the separation corona is switch on again, to neutralise the last part of
the positive transfer charge on the photoconductor (drum).
The small difference of the charge on the photoconductor (drum) is not visible on the copy.

04.06.2002 108
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Bad separation:
l A pick off pawl is mounted against the photoconductor (drum) to prevent paper jams at the cleaning blade
area or jams in the scorotron.
l On top of the separation unit guide fingers are mounted to prevent that the copy material enters the unit.

The wire thickness is 80 mm.

04.06.2002 109
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

PBA Driver
PBA DRIVER is used to drive the main drive, the suction fan, the zero-cross-detection and the safety-relay for
the fuser.

The main-drive is a DC motor that drives the process part and the corresponding paperpath. It also drives the
paper output.

The suction-fan is used to suck the paper in a pinch between the photocondutor and the fuser. It is not possible
in the Oc· 9600 to use normal pinch-rollers on top of the paper because these rollers would make an impression
on the toner image on the paper. It is only possible to use pinch-rollers at the bottom-side of the paper. The
suction-fan sucks the paper onto these pinch-rollers in order to transport the paper without disturbing the
toner-image.

The zero-cross-detection detects the zero cross point of the mains-voltage.

A safety-relay is implemented to switch OFF the mains of the fuser, in case of emergency. The working of this
function is checked by the zero-cross-detection. If the relay-contacts are closed, the zero-cross-detection will
function. Otherwise, when the relay-contacts are open, there will be no zero-cross pulses.
Together with the NTC's inside the fuser, this relay replaces a clixon.

04.06.2002 110
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

General

The main-drive of the machine is a DC motor.

This DRIve MOtor (DRIMO) is controlled by 22PBA03 Driver pba.
The speed of the motor is 3 or 5 mtr/min.

The main-drive motor drives with the long drive belt:

l the copy material input pinch (PTRINPINCH) via the clutch (PTRCL)
l the developer unit
l the suction roller of the intermediate transport
l the output roller behind the fuser section

The main-drive motor drives with the short drive belt:

l the photoconductor (drum)

PTRCL Drum drive output roller

cooled down

drive developing drive motor suction roller

unit

04.06.2002 111
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

General

General description

The general function of the folder, which is installed behind the Oc· 9600
is to fold the prints from the Oc· 9600
according to the selected folding method.
The selection of folder ON/OFF is made on the controller in Setting
Editor.

The first fold input motor is started by the paper transport folder input
sensor. The speed of the motor is checked by the motor sensor. This
motor drives all transport rollers in the paper transport and the first fold
via toothed belts and clutches.
The folding process has its own motor.
To ensure that the paper is fed correctly through the folder the
transportation speed of the successive pairs of rollers increases. The
rollers are equipped with uni-directional bearings to pull the paper
straight for correct measurement.

The function folder is subdivided into the following sub-functions:

1. Paper TRansport (15 PTR)
2. First fold (18 FOL1)
3. Second fold (18 FOL2)
4. Belt unit (18 Belt unit)

Folding rollers

input rollers leading edge of bulge for first fold fold flap
the paper

18func1
folding rollers folding rollers in reversed direction

04.06.2002 112
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Folding programs
The basic folding programmes for the folder are:

Standard:
l 190 x 297 mm
l 210 x 297 mm
l 210 x 297 mm including 15 - 30 mm binding edge (left hand side).

Ericsson:
l 190 x 297 mm
l 210 x 297 mm
l 210 x 297 mm including 15 - 30 mm binding edge (right hand side).

USA small and large:

l 8.5 x 11" without binding edge
l 8.5 x 11" with binding edge
l 9 x 12" without binding edge
l 9 x 12" with binding edge

In key operator mode it is possible to set the folded package dimensions as well as the binding edge.
These folding settings are:

1st fold 186 - 230 mm (7.3 - 9") steps of 1 mm (0.1") default = 210 mm
2nd fold 276 - 310 mm (10.9 - 12.2") steps of 1 mm (0.1") default = 297 mm
Binding edge 15 -30 mm (0.6 - 1.2") steps of 1 mm (0.1") default = no binding edge

04.06.2002 113
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Package definition
Folding package definition and distances.
The size of the folding package in the 1st and 2nd fold are defined as follows:

1st fold:

e.g. A0 size copy without binding

edge

W = width = 210 mm
* = 5 mm (fixed overlap)
L.E. = Leading edge
T.E. = Trailing edge

Attention: With fixed overlap, all inside folds are left and right 5 mm shorter.
Without overlap, all inside folds are in line.

2nd fold:

e.g. A0 size copy

L = Length = 297 mm
* = 3 mm (fixed overlap)

04.06.2002 114
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Example folding DIN A sizes

Folding lengths for DIN A-sizes in 1st fold:

190 mm 210 with 20 mm binding edge 210 mm

* = 5 mm * = 5 mm * = 5 mm

A0 1 = 190 mm 1 = 190 mm 1 = 210 mm

2 = 139 mm 2 = 129 mm 2 = 189 mm
3 = 134 mm 3 = 124 mm 3 = 184 mm
4 = 180 mm 4 = 180 mm 4 = 100 mm
5 = 180 mm 5 = 180 mm 5 = 100 mm
6 = 180 mm 6 = 180 mm 6 = 200 mm
7 = 185 mm 7 = 205 mm 7 = 205 mm

A1 1 = 190 mm 1 = 190 mm 1 = 210 mm

2 = 145.5 mm 2 = 135.5 mm 2 = 115.5 mm
3 = 140.5 mm 3 = 130.5 mm 3 = 110.5 mm
4 = 180 mm 4 = 180 mm 4 = 200 mm
5 = 185 mm 5 = 205 mm 5 = 205 mm

A2 1 = 190 mm 1 = 190 mm 1 = 210 mm

2 = 112 mm 2 = 102 mm 2 = 192 mm
3 = 107 mm 3 = 97 mm 3 = 192 mm
4 = 90 mm 4 = 90 mm
5 = 95 mm 5 = 115 mm

A3 1 = 190 mm 1 = 190 mm 1 = 210 mm

2 = 115 mm 2 = 105 mm 2 = 105 mm
3 = 115 mm 3 = 125 mm 3 = 105 mm

Folding length for DIN A-sizes in the 2nd fold

297 mm
* = 3 mm

A0 1 = 300 mm
2 = 297 mm
3 = 244 mm

A1 1 = 300 mm
2 = 294 mm

A2 1 = 297 mm
2 = 120 mm

A3 not applicable

04.06.2002 115
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

OFF line feed

A green LED, (PTRFOLOFFLILED 15V1), on the folder indicates when
the printer allows OFF line feed in the folder.
The LED has four states:
OFF = no OFF line feed allowed
ON = OFF line feed allowed
BLINKING = wait for printer to go OFF line
FAST BLINKING = paper jam and error situation

When a copy is fed, the input sensor (PTRFOLINSE 15B2) is activated

and folder input motor (FOL1INMO (18M1) starts turning.
The speed of the motor is checked by the motor sensor.
For OFF line feed the folder has to detect the width of the copy.
The orientation of the copy is not important for the fold program.
Portrait and landscape can be detected if standard sizes DIN, USA
small / large are used.
Always feed the copy face down and the legend at the right rear side.

04.06.2002 116
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Low voltage supply

Power supply

With the ON / OFF switch (18S5) on the folder in the ON position and
relay FOL1LPMRL (18K3) enabled by the printer, the power supply
(18G01) is connected to the mains voltage.
The output voltage of the power supply is:
24V supply for motors, solenoids and clutches
5V supply for sensor

24V supply

The 24V from the power supply 18G01 is connected to:

First Fold:
FOL1SAFRL (18K1), safety relay
PBA POWER I/O FOL1 (18PBA03), supply for motors, clutches
and solenoids
PBA DISTRIBUTION POWER I/O (15PBA05), supply for
solenoid

Second Fold:
PBA RELAY (18PBA16)
from 18PBA16 to:
FOL2SAFRL1 (18K2), safety relay
PBA POWER I/O FOL2 (18PBA10), supply for motors, clutches
and solenoids

Optional:
via 18PBA16 in 2nd Fold to:
FOLOSAFRL (18K4), safety relay
PBA DISTRIBUTION POWER I/O (18PBA18), supply for motor
and clutch
PBA REINFORCEMENT (18PBA17), supply for motor and
solenoids

5V supply

The 5V from the power supply 18G01 is via PBA CPU (22PBA01)
connected to:

First Fold:
PBA I/O INTERFACE (22PBA02)
via 22PBA02 connected to:
PBA DISTRIBUTION POWER I/O (15PBA05), supply for
sensors
PBA SENSOR DISTRIBUTION FOLD1 (18PBA07), supply for
sensors
PBA POWER I/O FOLD1 (18PBA03), circuit for door switches

Second Fold:
PBA I/O INTERFACE FOL2 (22PBA09)
via 22PBA09 connected to:
PBA SENSOR DISTRIBUTION FOLD2 (18PBA14)
PBA POWER I/O FOl2 (18PBA10)
Optional: PBA DISTRIBUTION POWER I/O (18PBA18)
Reinforcement: REINFORCEMENT (18PBA17)
via 18 PBA17 to:
Optional:
PBA SENSOR DISTRIBUTION FOLD, supply for sensors

04.06.2002 117
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Door switches
Door switches

The door switches are:

FOL1: FOL1DOORSW (18S1) and PTRFOLDOORSW (15S1)
FOL2: FOL2DOORSW (18S2) and FOL2TRAYSW (18S3)
Optional: FOLODOORSW (18S8) and FOLOBELTDOORSW (18S9)

All door switches have two contacts.

The contacts 1-2 switch the 24V supply for the safety relays:
Fol1: FOL1SAFRL (18K1)
Fol2: FOL2SAFRL1 (18K2
Optional: FOLOSAFRL (18K4)
The contacts of these relays switch off the motors when a door is open.

The contacts 3-4 of the switches generate a operator warning when a door is open.

FOL1DOORSW = FOL 1 DOOR SWitch

PTRFOLDOORSW = Paper TRansport FOL DOOR SWitch
FOL2DOORSW = FOL 2 DOOR SWitch
FOL2TRAYSW = FOL 2 TRAY SWitch
FOLODOORSW = FOL Output DOOR SWitch
FOLOBELTDOORSW = FOL Output BELT DOOR SWitch
FOL1SAFRL = FOL 1 SAFety ReLay
FOL2SAFRL = FOL 2 SAFety ReLay
FOLOSAFRL = FOL Output SAFety ReLay

The doors switches from the RU are not switching a safety relay but immediately the components.
FOL2RUDOORSW1 (18S7)
FOL2RUINTDOORSW2 (18S10)
FOL2RUCOVERDOORSW3 (18S11)

04.06.2002 118
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

General paper transport in the PTR folder

The function of the paper transport, which is an intermediate between the

printer and the 1st folding unit, is to guide the prints to the first fold.
Prints can be fed into the folder in two ways:
- automatic feed from the printer
- OFF line feed
Folder input motor (FOL1INMO) drives the PTR and the speed is
controlled by the motor sensor.
The speed of the folder depends on the speed of the printer. The paper
transport speed is 5 m/min for materials up to 80 gr./m· and 3 m/min
above 80gr/m· .

This function describes the:

1. Paper input
2. Alignment
3. Bulge
4. Rotation
5. Trailing edge sensor

04.06.2002 119
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

1Paper input (in the PTR folder)

When the leading edge of the print enters in the Paper TRansport the
input sensor (PTRFOLINSE 15B2) detects the print.
The folder input motor starts running.
This motor drives all transport rollers in the paper transport and the first
folding via toothed belts and clutches.

04.06.2002 120
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

2 Alignment (in the PTR folder)

When the input sensor detects the leading edge of the print, the feed
clutch (PTRFOLFEDCL 15Y2) is deactivated and the correction clutch
(PTRFOLCORCL 15Y1) is activated.
The first roller pair rotate in opposite direction.
This allows the alignment of the leading edge.
After a designated time the correction clutch becomes de-active and the
feed clutch becomes active, the roller pair reverses direction and the
print is transported to the first fold.

04.06.2002 121
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

3 Bulge (in the PTR folder)

The speed of the folder, is slightly lower than the speed of the printer.
When the leading edge of a print enters into the PTR a bulge will be
formed and the bulge sensor (PTRFOLBULSE 15B1)is activated.
The speed of the input motor increases to a higher speed than the printer
speed.
The bulge disappears, the sensor is deactivated and the speed lowers
until a new bulge is formed and the sensor is active again.

04.06.2002 122
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

4 Rotation (in the PTR folder)

An A4 like print is printed in portrait by the printer.

Arriving in the PTR it is transported by a roller and two transport wheels.
After a certain time, the rotation solenoid (PTRFOLROSO 15Y4) is
energised.
The print is hold and one of the two wheels is lifted.
The other wheel together with the rotation point rotate the print to
landscape.
The solenoid deactivates and the print is transported in landscape
orientation to the first fold.

04.06.2002 123
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

5 trailing edge sensor (in the PTR folder)

The moment the leading edge of the print is detected by the folding start
sensor (FOL1STARTSE 8B1) the length measurement of the print starts.

This is done by the start sensor in combination with the trailing edge
sensors (PTRFOLTRAISE1-5 15B6, 15B7, 15B8, 15B9, 15B10).
The aim of this measurement is to determine the rest length of the print
in order to calculate the intermediate folding length because the last
sheet has to cover the complete package.

04.06.2002 124
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Belt unit
When delivery to the belt unit is selected, the packages are transported
from the second fold to the belt unit.
The paper transport motor (FOLOPTRMO 18M8) drives all rollers in the
belt unit.
A clutch (FOLOBELTCL 18Y11) becomes active and the delivery belts
are running for a short moment.
Output sensor (FOLOOUTSE 18B14) detects if the package is delivered
correctly on the belts.
At the end of the belt the belt full sensor (FOLOBELTENDSE 18B16)
detects if the belt is full, but it is still possible to deliver more packages on
the belt.
This is adjustable by service with SDS parameter test 18-1-07 (Folder
output belt capacity).

04.06.2002 125
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

First fold (FOL1)

General
The function of the first fold is to fold the prints perpendicular to the feed
direction according to the selected folding method.
The prints are transported from the paper transport feed table to the first
fold by the first fold input motor (FOL1INMO 18M1), the speed is
controlled by the motor sensor.
Arriving in the fold, the first fold start sensor (FOL1STARTSE 18B1)
detects the leading edge of the print.
First fold folding motor (FOL1FOLMO 18M2) starts on the pulse with
signal (FOL1FOLMOPWM).
The speed of the motor is controlled by the motor sensor
(FOL1FOLMOSE 18PBA05).
The length measurement starts the measurement for the lengths to be
folded, in combination with the trailing edge sensors
(PTRFOLTRAISE1-5 18B6,18B7, 18B8, 18B9, 18B10).

This measurement is to determine the rest length of the print in order to

calculate the intermediate folding length
because the last sheet must cover the complete package.

A deflector clutch (FOL1DEFCL 18Y1) activates the fold flap to change

position while the position sensor (FOL1DEPOSE 18B4) the
position of the flap detects.
When a print enters in the first fold, the fold rollers and the fold flap are
pointed to the same direction.

Before the last folding is made a deflector solenoid (FOL1OUTDEFSO

18Y2) becomes active and the output flap opens. The folded package is
transported onto the intermediate transport of the second fold.

04.06.2002 126
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

General Reinforcement unit

The reinforcement unit is an optional to the second folding section of the Oc· 9600.
It adds a pre-punched, self-adhesive, filing strip to the folded copy.
Advantages of this type of filing strip are:
l it is much stronger than holes punched directly into the copy;
l the copy can be unfolded without being taken out of the binder mechanism.
The name of the Reinforcement Unit is abbreviated in the SDS and electrical diagrams as RU.

Functional description

5 4 3
7

11

10

The reinforcement unit consists of the following parts:

1. the roll holder
2. the guide roller
3. the pin roller
4. the transfer section
5. the knife section
6. the stamp section
7. the reinforcement head
8. the protective sheet rollers and the slide
9. FOL2GUIDSO
10. the drive section
11. the frame

04.06.2002 127
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Roll holder / Guide roller / Pin roller / Transfer section

The roll holder

The roll holder holds a roll of reinforcement tape. The tape is tensioned by a brake at the rear side of the roll
holder, to prevent it from unrolling.

The guide roller

The side plates of the roll holder and a non-driven guide roller guide the tape towards the pin roller.

The pin roller

The pin roller provides the stamp with the correct length of reinforcement tape (111.125 mm), by turning half a
revolution per copy. In order to prevent slip of the tape the pin roller is equipped with 10 pins, which correspond
with holes in the tape. The rotation of the pin roller is determined by a half-a-revolution clutch.

The transfer section

The transfer section has three goals:

l it separates the protective sheet from the adhesive tape;
l it guides the separated protective sheet away from the knife;
l it guides the tape through the knife towards the stamp unit.

04.06.2002 128
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

The knife section / the stamp section

The knife section

The knife section consists of an upper and a lower knife. The upper knife is spring-loaded and mounted on the
front frame plate. The lower knife is mounted on the lower stamp.
In the home position the upper knife is leaning against the lower knife outside the tape path.
The tape is guided on the left and right hand side, outside the area where the glue is sitting, by a guide plate that
is mounted on the upper knife.
For cleaning the knives, a key-operator test is created. When you select this test the clutch and the motor are
activated for a short time. The knives are now accessible for cleaning.
At the end of the cleaning procedure, the stamp will not be in its home position. This will be corrected
automatically once the door of the RU is closed.

The stamp section

The stamp section consists of a lower stamp and an upper stamp. The reinforcement strip is put onto the lower
stamp and held by two spring-loaded guide rails.
Vertical movement of the strip is blocked by the guide rail, closest to the frame plate.
The two stamps are driven by the same mechanism and therefore move at the same time: when the upper
stamp moves down, the lower stamp moves up, and vice versa.
In order to get an even pressure of the stamp, i.e. to compensate for mechanical tolerances, the pressure plate
of the upper stamp is mounted on a foamy rubber layer. For smooth guidance of the copy, this pressure plate is
teflon coated.
A sticker on the frame of the intermediate transport indicates how the reinforcement tape has to be inserted
between the stamps.

04.06.2002 129
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

The reinforcement head / protective sheet rollers / FOL2GUIDSO

The reinforcement head

The reinforcement head holds the upper stamp and is mounted between the frame plates of the unit.

The protective sheet rollers and the slide

The protective sheet is put between two rollers. These rollers turn when the drive motor is running, they gently
pull the protective sheet off the tape, stiffen the sheet, and feed it onto the slide, away from the knife. Stiffening
the sheet is achieved by the shape of the rollers (‘cam and groove’).
There is a container for collecting the protective sheet.
In order to feed the leading edge of the protective sheet of a new roll, the slide can be lifted on the right hand
side to open the pinch between the rollers.

FOL2GUIDSO

A small copy guide guides the copy through the Reinforcement Unit, between the stamps.
A solenoid, called FOL2GUIDSO, pulls away the small copy guide in order to prevent it from colliding with the
moving stamp. In case of a malfunction of the solenoid, a mechanical safety takes over its function.

04.06.2002 130
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

The drive section

The drive section

½-Revolutio n
Clutch

Distr ibution
PBA

Chain Tensioner

Sin gle-Revolution
Clutch
FOL2RUSTA MPSO

Chain DC-Motor

The entire reinforcement unit is driven by one DC-motor (FOL2RUMO) and a chain.
The pin roller is driven via a half-a-revolution clutch (FOL2RUTAPESO).
The stamp is driven via a single-revolution clutch (FOL2RUSTAMPSO).
The protective sheet rollers are driven directly by the chain.
The chain can be tensioned with an adjustable sprocket.

The frame

The frame consists of two plates and 5 spacers.

04.06.2002 131
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Sensor detection circuit

Sensor detection circuit

The detection circuit consists of four sensors:
1. FOL2RUHOMESE
2. FOL2RUEMPTYSE
3. FOL2RUJAMSW
4. FOL2RUSTARTSE (transmitter and receiver)

1. Sensor FOL2RUHOMESE
When the reinforcement unit is inoperative, the lower stamp should be in the bottom position and the upper
stamp in the top position. This corresponds with a certain position of a slot in the eccentric disk that drives
the stamp. Sensor FOL2RUHOMESE checks the position of the slot. If this position is not correct error
message 185xx is displayed.
2. Sensor FOL2RUEMPTYSE
Sensor FOL2RUEMPTYSE is an L-shaped sensor, located in the path of the reinforcement tape. A
transmitter sends infrared light in the direction of a receiver. If the light path is not blocked by the tape, the
control knows that the roll of tape is finished. A message in the operator panel tells the operator to reload
reinforcement tape.
3. Sensor FOL2RUJAMSW
Sensor FOL2RUJAMSW, a micro-switch, is placed in front of the knife unit. It detects the position of the
guide plate. When a tape jam occurs the guide plate will move upwards and the switch will be activated.
This will result in error message 187xx.
4. Sensor FOL2RUSTARTSE
Sensor FOL2RUSTARTSE consists of a separate transmitter, located in the intermediate transport of the
2nd fold, and a receiver, located in the top stamp section. It detects the presence of the copy in the
reinforcement unit.
(error message 18717, 18722, 18723, 18725)

04.06.2002 132
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Reinforcement operation

Operation

The functioning of the reinforcement unit is controlled from the software of the engine.

The initial position of the reinforcement unit is:

l the lower stamp in the bottom position

l the upper stamp in the top position
l the pin roller in a locked position
l the leading edge of the reinforcement tape in the knife section

The working sequence of the reinforcement unit is as follows:

1. FOL2RUSTARTSE detects the copy;

2. the drive motor FOL2RUMO is switched on: the chain and the protective sheet rollers start running;
3. the half-a-revolution clutch FOL2RUTAPESO is activated: the pin roller turns 180 degrees and one length
(111.125 mm) of reinforcement tape is supplied onto the lower stamp;
4. FOL2GUIDSO moves the small guide out of the working area of the stamp;
5. at the moment the lower stamp hits the pressure plate of the upper stamp, the guide rails move out of the
working area and the reinforcement tape is glued onto the copy;
6. the single-revolution clutch FOL2RUSTAMPSO is activated: the eccentric disks make one full turn, moving
the lower stamp upwards and the upper stamp downwards;
7. while the lower stamp moves upwards, the knife cuts the tape;
8. the eccentric disks finish the turn, the stamps return to the home position, and the guide rails drop back into
place;
9. the drive motor FOL2RUMO stops.

04.06.2002 133
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

Second fold FOL2

General
The function of second fold is to fold the packages from the first fold in
perpendicular direction to a package according to the selected folding
method.
This function describes the:

1 First Fold delivery

The prints with a length up to 2.5 m can be folded in the second fold. If
the First Fold Delivery only is installed copies with a length between 2.5
and 6 m are automatically ejected on the first fold delivery.
First fold delivery is always possible by selection via KOS (on the printer /
workstation / scanner).

Normally the second fold input motor (FOL2INMO 18M3) drives the inner
transport to the second fold.
For first fold delivery Its running direction is changed with a relay
(FOL2INMOREL).

When first fold delivery is selected and the package arrives on the
transport rollers it is transported to the First Fold Delivery.
The output motor (FOLOFFOUTMO 18M6) transports the package to the
first fold delivery and a output sensor (FOLOFFOUTSE 18B15)
detects the correct delivery.

2 Second fold

When a second fold is needed, the second fold input motor transports
the package to the second fold.
The second fold start sensor (FOL2STARTSE 18B9) detects the leading
edge.
At this moment the second folding motor (FOL2FOLMO 18M4) starts on
the pulse with signal (FOL1FOLMOPWM).
The speed of the motor is controlled by the motor sensor
(FOL2FOLMOSE 18PBA12).
The length measurement starts the measurement for the lengths to be
folded, in combination with the trailing edge sensor
(FOL2TRAISE2 18B10).
On the intermediate transport, the copies are aligned against a guide plate and transported straight into the 2nd folding section.
When the print leaves the 1st fold FOL1OUTSE becomes active, the flat
solenoid (FOL2FLATSO 18Y5) activates, a plate just before the entrance
of the second fold is lifted for easy pass of the package.
When the package activates the FOL2STARTSE the flat solenoid
(FOL2FLATSO) is deactivated.

The folding principle of the second fold is similar to the first fold, so when
a copy enters in the second fold, the fold rollers and the fold flap are
pointed to the same direction.
Once the length of the first folding is measured FOL2FOLMO (18M4)
reverses direction and FOL2DEFCL (18Y3) becomes active, therefore
the rollers and the flap change direction.
The paper is fed with a bulge in between the rollers and the first folding is
made.
After the second folding length is passed the rollers and the flap change
again and depending on the paper width and the selected folding length
a second or third folding is made.

3 Second fold output

When belt delivery is selected FOL2OUTSO (18Y4) is activated, before

the last folding is made, and the output flap guides the package to the
belt unit.
When stacker delivery is selected the solenoid is not active.

04.06.2002 134
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Functional Description

FOL2OUTSE1 (18B15) detects the correct delivery in the folder tray.

It is also possible to deliver the packages to the belt unit (see functional
description belt unit).

04.06.2002 135
Question:
What are the software versions in R3.1

Answer:

Name Version
Print engine 3.1
Scanner 3.1

Controller 5.0.1
Software download 2.0.0.8
Operating sysytem NT Service Pack 6a

SDS
WEB SDS 4.6.4.0
SDS Client 4.6.4.0

Remote Logic
Application ManagerSDS Client 5.0.0.6
Queue Manager 3.1.1
System Control Panel 3.1.1
Settings Editor 3.1.1
Scan manager 3.1.1
View Station LT 6.22TK

Drivers
PELT WEB 1.3
WRD 2.6
PS3 1.2
Plot Director (for service only) 3.4.1
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Frequently Asked Questions

Question:
What is new in Release 3.1

Answer:
Job Submission

Windows Raster Driver 2

l The driver supports the Czech, Hungarian, Polish and true Japanese language .
l Multy copy in GUI removed.
l The driver version included in the controller software is now 2.6, from the Driver Pack 9.
See also: Information Bulletin 1009 and 1011.

Windows PostScript Driver

l The "Fold Length" value is adjustable by steps of 1mm.
l The "Copy count" and " Colour mode" options are removed for the NT driver.
l The "separations" option is removed from all the drivers.
l "Landscape" is removed from the "Fold" orientation.
l The driver version included in the controller software is now 1.3, from the Driver Pack 9.
l Japanese language added.
l "Media type", "Print Mode", "Accounting" and "Send to Inbox" options added.
l New Oc·-specific 'setup.exe' file.
l 'Line text' print mode is available.
l The "Accounting" and "Send to Inbox" options are added by the OJT.
See also: Information Bulletin 1007 and 1008.

Print Exec LT Web

l The utility version included in the controller software is now 1.2 .
l Advanced job submission (e.g. max. 100 documents, job and document level setting).
l If PELT WEB is installed, but is not activated, a Welcome page is displayed.
Also the Demo mode gives information how to order the PELT WEB application.
l Management of the dependency between the different menu settings.
l The minimum memory in the controller is 256MB of RAM.

Job Control
Remote Logic

Queue Manager
l You can change the size the dialog box of the column options and the job properties.

Settings Editor
l Added: Sleep mode timer enable. Default = ON.
See: Key Op. settings / System / Timers
l Added: Rasterisation optimalisation. Default = Quality.
See: Key Op. settings / Jobs / Print / Defaults / Image
This setting defines the sequence of zoom and rasterisation when the colour or
greyscale bitmap images are processed.
Select between: speed and quality.
Speed: The output of bitmap files can be degraded by a coarse halftone screen.
Quality: The output of bitmap files are not degraded. The process time can be longer.
l Removed: Controller panel time out.
See: Key Op. settings / Timers /

Communication
Novell
l Novell 6 is supported for Scan To File to the Novell FTP server.

SDS Applications.
l You can use the short-cut keys in the Lotus Notes SDS application
The pointer must be on the AxtiveX window.
Short-cut keys are e.g.: <Enter>, <Tab>, <Shift-Tab>, <Space bar>, <Arrow keys>.

l Only for the [STAR] application:

Support to backup the SDS_log database in the NUSR mode

04.06.2002 2
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Frequently Asked Questions

You can backup the SDS_log database and the STAR SDS_log dump in normal user mode.
There is no need to set the controller to the service mode.

l The default value is shown in the value field.

The value range is shown in the information field.

l The SDS test stops when the [Stop] button is pressed in the dialog box.
(The previous name of the [Cancel] button is changed to [Stop] button.)

l The beep sound is only enabled for the input and the output tests.

Controller
Operating System
l Based on NT4 SP6a for improved security.

Controller software
l Chinese language selection.
l The zoom quality in the job processes.

TDS600 sytem

l Included the [Product Adaptation Request Finland]: paper size 891 mm is supported for
on-line and off-line folding. Is standard available in the new folders (new software) for all the
countries. Is backward compatible with R2.1 folder software .
l A new command in HPGL is added for the HP1050 driver.
Without this command, the plots were not printed.
l Reduction to 5% for print jobs.
l The Mixed/Ansi paper standards are supported.
- You can select on the printer panel all the paper size formats.
- You can select on the scanner panel all the original size formats.
l The scanner supports the job interrupt mechanism (same as the TDS800).
l Round stepping in the menus.

04.06.2002 3
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Frequently Asked Questions

Question:
What is solved in Release 3.1

Answer:
Job Submission
Print Exec LT Web
l PDF was not printed by PELT WEB.

WRD
All operating systems
l Margins are set to match the physical limitations of the printer.

Windows NT and 2000

l All "version" strings (in the About Box from the driver and in the Properties) are correct
translated.
l All setup strings (Danish and German language) are displayed correct during the installation
steps.
l Dependencies are added between rotation, autorotation and first edge control.
l For all languages (ecept the new Czech, Hungarian and Polish), the "printer default" strings
are completely displayed in several boxes .
l For Italian, French, Portuguese languages:
Width and length labels are correct displayed in "User defined paper size" and "Custom paper
format".
l Printer default strings are complete displayed in several boxes.

Windows 9x and ME
l The driver generates a correct PS according to the new margin values.
l The user defined paper dialog box is now functional when the OS uses the metric
measurement system.
l The Japanese font size is changed to match with the Japanese dialog box sizes.

See also: Information Bulletin 1009 and 1011.

PS3
l Error messages are displayed if problems occur during the driver installation under NT and
Win2000.
l The selection of "First Fold Exit" and "Fold Length" ismutual exlusive.
l The Danish and French language menus are corrected.
l For some of the strings the upper case was not present
l The selection of the IRT and CDT did not operate .
l The selection of the sheet feeders did not operate. .

See also: Information Bulletin 1007 and 1008.

Job Control
Remote Logic
Queue Manager
l The job names are not cleared when the print process is finished.

Settings Editor
l The PLC blocks when the KOS settings were restored.
l There was no "reboot necessary" message when you switch on/off the error pages and have
changed the temporary store size.

System Control Panel

l There was a wrong message in the Dutch language, when the controller is in the "service"
mode.

Controller application
l Hang up because of increasing memory usage server.exe

Scan Manager
l S2F files were not delivered when the PDF format is selected.
l Scan to file on Novell 5.1 SP2.
l Default setting of the destinations.

04.06.2002 4
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Frequently Asked Questions

l FTP destination.
The application stopped when "c:" was used in the destination path.
Solution: use the browse button.
l Refresh of the SM was very slow, especially after pressing refresh more than once.
l Change of the default destination stops the scan manager.

Viewer
l The viewer displays sometimes the PDF files not correct or gives a wrong resolution
information.
l The installation was not finished when the CD-ROM drive opens.
After the automatic restart, installation of the viewer is started.
In R3.1 the viewer is installed before the CD-ROM drive opens.

Job processing
TIFF
l STF files not fully TIFF 6.0 compliant (for 'Date format' and 'Tags order').

PDF
l A PDF scan increases the dimensions of the image.
l To scan an original in landscape was only possible with "synchro" scan length.

Communication
SMB
l It was possible to delete the copy jobs in the QM by SMB.
l Not possible to setup a SMB Scan destination to NetApp.
l The SMB could not be disabled.

RAS
l The RAS connection (DCC) with the service laptop supports [ 'oceservice' ] as user name.

LPD/LPR
l LPD could not be disabled.

Controller
Hardware
l Some characters were wrong by the Japanese keyboard.

Operating System
l Short cuts names on the desktop changed from NGC to PLC.
l The Postscript printer was not shared after the installation.

System Software
l Logd.exe blocked due to SDS extensive logging.
White pages, jobs stay in the queue, lost of the scanner-controller communication.
l The given scan length was ignored by the controller.
l When: "PS no clip" was set to OFF, plots longer then 1.2 m were clipped.
l The long plots were not correctly folded.
l The dump config (scan length method parameter) was not according to the current settings.
l The optional boards (Centronics, Ethernet board) could not be enabled (SDS 90.3).

Printer
Media
l Invalid media request
l Wrong media request with best fit & media format available, but not as plain paper.
l The developer gear break down too often.
l The characters break if: high humidity, low toner consumption, 110gr paper.

Scanner
l The wrong media was requested for manual feed when a A1 portrait was scanned.
l Wrong print with correction of the legend position. The RCF did not overrule the SE settings.
l 1:1 adjustment of the original was not according to the specifications.
l Some Japanese characters were not correct.

Folder

04.06.2002 5
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Frequently Asked Questions

l Set the default to "binding edge" or "punching".

SDS application
ActiveX component
l The <Enter> key works correct inside an ActiveX box.
l Problems with backup and restore are solved.
When you restore the data, a logfile is generated: c:\oce\apps\applications\SEerror.txt
l The passwords are saved in the backup of the system.

04.06.2002 6
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Frequently Asked Questions

Question:
What is the edition review status of the Oc· 9600 / TDS600 TSM ?

Answer:
This page is used to give the edition, date and a short description of the changes made into
this LN TSM.

edition date Description

-
1.1.00 14 / 9 / 99 R1 The toner concentration sensor 05B1 adjustment added
R2 The toner concentration sensor 05B1 adjustment added
Links in the installation procedures) added
1.1.01 16 / 9 / 99 General overview Settings Editor SA / KO settings (R2)
See chapter General / SDS
Edition review status of the Oc· 9600 TSM in FAQ released
1.1.02 17 / 9 / 99 Update of Installation Repro Desk 4.21 controller
Bug fixing of various NotesSDS tests

1.1.03 23 / 9 / 99 Installation: chapter GENERAL added.

Workflow descriptions moved to GENERAL
1.1.04 30 / 9 / 99 SDS tests adapted. Mainly the 70-79 and 90-99 SDS tests.
1.1.05 1 / 10 / 99 Workflow installation: upgrade R1 to R2 / R2 added.
1.1.06 6 / 10 / 99 Function 12 (PRD) Adjustment leading edge and width position modified
Function 13 (PSF) Adjustment leading edge and width position modified
Function 23 (Drive) Adjustment 1:1 added
1.1.07 7 / 10 / 99 Function 15 (PTR) Adjustment leading edge and width position added
Function 15 (PTR) Adjustment static deviation PTRINSE
1.1.08 11 / 10 / 99 Adjustments Reinforcement Unit released (see chapter 18 Folder)
1.1.09 14 / 10 / 99 Workflow installation: upgrade R1 to R2. Conversion tool updated to
9600Tool_V1.3.5
1.1.10 15 / 10 / 99 Function 20 (CTR) Installation disk NGC R2.0 Creation of disk now possible
without using MS Access
1.1.11 05 / 11 / 99 Installation: Remote Assistance for Oc· 9600 NGC R2 added and for NGC R1
removed.
Installation: Installation NGC Release 2.0.1 added
1.1.12 11 / 11 / 99 Installation: Ethernet and Tokenring NIC installation updated for NGC R2.0
1.1.13 12 / 11 / 99 SDS session button for Lotus Notes TSM added in button bar
1.1.14 16 / 11 / 99 Extended upgrade / download description added to the TSM
1.1.15 20 / 12 / 99 Update electrical diagrams: 18 Folder, 18 Folder 1st Fold, 18 Folder 2nd Fold
1.1.16 10 / 3 / 2000 Upgrade R2.0 to R2.0 STF (Scan To File)
1.1.17 13 / 3 / 2000 In installation description added: Extra adjustmentsfor printer and folder;
when to fill toner.
1.1.18 10 / 4 / 2000 What to do when the CPU I/O PBA is replaced
1.1.19 20 / 4 / 2000 Installation: Remote Assistance for Oc· 9600 NGC R2 removed due to
performance problems.
1.1.20 21 / 4 / 2000 Installation: New description(s) for R2.1 Installation and upgrade
1.1.21 8 / 5 / 2000 Jumper settings Disk drives added in Chapter 20

04.06.2002 7
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Frequently Asked Questions

1.1.22 11 / 5 / 2000 Installation: Rerpo desk 4.25 Installation added / General: Passwords
changed for R4.25 of RD
1.1.23 11 / 5 / 2000 FAQ and Known problems updated
2.0.00 29 / 5 / 2000 Major Lotus Notes TSM update including electrical diagrams in all functions
2.0.01 21 / 6 / 2000 Centronics information removed. (No supoport).
2.0.02 4 / 9 / 2000 Main diagrams (A0/ Esize Tiff format) of Printer / Scanner / 1st Fold / 2nd Fold
and Fold optionals added in chapter 20
electrical diagrams.
2.0.03 18 / 9 / 2000 Additional links added in adjustments and dis/assemblies of several functions.
2.0.04 20 / 10 / Bugfixing in various documents
2000
2.0.04 06 / 02 / Oc· 9600 / Oc· TDS600 R3.0
2001 update of SDS tests as used in R3.0
update of SDS test names as in R3.0
2.0.05 11 / 05 / Oc· Print Exec LT information added to TSM
2001 Upgrade procedure NGC system R2.x to V3.0 updated
Update of SDS tests 71/72
2.0.06 14 / 08 / Handling / location Microsoft Certificate Of Athenticity (COA): see Chapter 20
2001 Interface.
SCSI issues: see Chapter 20 Interface.
2.0.07 27 / 08 / Oc· Repro Desk 4.30 added to the chapter installation
2001
2.0.08 09 / 10 / Additional information GX150 controller
2001

04.06.2002 8
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Frequently Asked Questions

Question:
How can I connect the Scan Manager to Novell via IPX/SPX (R2.1)

Answer:
R2.1 Scan to files does not support IPX/SPX. Use FTP: Install an FTP server application on the PC and activate
TCP/IP on that PC.

Keywords: tcp/ip IPX SPX novell netware scanmanager

04.06.2002 9
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Frequently Asked Questions

Question:
How to decrease the sds_log.mdb if the size is too large.

Answer:
Activate the SDS test 31 eight times.
This action clears all the error record history!
(The memory is a shift register with eight positions.)

Note:
The backup action can be done direct to the laptop and zipped.
But still the sds_log. mdb file can be too large.

04.06.2002 10
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Frequently Asked Questions

How to test the printhead

Note: If the Printhead is not functioning correctly, e.g. white prints, a continuously black line or area in feed
direction present, the following test procedure has to be executed before the replacement of the Printhead and
PHD Interface PBA.

Test procedure

Note: Make sure that the printhead unit and the cables do not touch the photoconductor (drum).
Attention:
The Print head is factory adjusted, the data of this adjustment (PICO) is written inside an Eprom on the Printhead
Interface PBA.
This Eprom is unique for each printhead and must always stay with the printhead. When the printhead is
changed, also the Eprom must be changed.
If the printhead is returned for crediting to Venlo, The EPROM must be returned as well. If not, no refund will be
given.

04.06.2002 11
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PCI bus ISA/EIO Floppy drive

Primary bus USB
PC87307 I/O UART (RS232)
controller
82371AB
PIIX4 ECP (Par. port)

Key board

Audio
ISA slot 1
HOST bus
ISA slot 2
ISA slot 3
L2 cach
ISA slot 4

Hard disc
BMI IDE
µP Ultra DMA/33
430 TX CD drive
PCI

S3 trio 64V2

ROM 2Mb
32 Mb PCI card connector 1
EDO
DIMM Hard disc
SCSI
Hard disc
PCI card connector 2
PCI card connector 3 PCI bus Spice board
Secondary
PCI card connector
DEC 2253
Bridge chip PCI card connector

BDNGC

04.06.2002 2
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Power supply mixed

Exp sense
10G01
10PBA05

22S1 Main switch

Step M contr
09PBA01

M 09M1

Console CPU
22PBA02 Supply FL inverter
22G1

09S1
ORGSAFSW
10E1 LC Display
Supply cord SCALA
22LCD1
Sensors
09B 2 ... 9

Image processing CCD interface CCD console CCD

10PBA04 10PBA02 10PBA01 10CCD1

To NGC

BDSCA

04.06.2002 3
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

09S1
Console CPU (NO)
09
22PBA02 (COM) OR
X8 Step M Contr
ORGSAFSW
7 09PBA01
GND-23
X1 8 X1 X2
+5V-1 ORGMOCLK-PWM OA
1 24 4 1
GND-1 ORGMOENA NOA 09
2 28 5 2
+12V-1 ORMMODIR OB M OR
3 29 6 3
NOB
4
Image processing 2
10PBA04
1
X17 X10
+5V-12 3
3 1
2 4
1 3

NGC 2

Power supply mixed

10G01
G2
Supply cord +5V-14
G1 2
Line GND-22
1 3
Neutral
3 G3
+12V-12
2 8
+24V-1
9
GND-21
10
EDOM

04.06.2002 4
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Image processing Console CPU

10PBA04 22PBA02
X17 X1 GND X7
+5V-1 +5VSB-3 09B2-1
1 1 +5V +5V 1
GND-1 ORGPRESE 09B2-3 09
2 2 GND 2
+12V-1 GND-13 09B2-2 OR
3 3 +12V 3
+5V-5 09B3-1
4 4
ORGWIDSE1 09B3-3 09
X15 X6 5
TXD GND-14 09B3-2 OR
1 1 6
RTS +5V-6 09B4-1
2 2 IO 7
RXD ORGWIDSE2 09B4-3 09
3 3 8
CTS GND-15 09B4-2 OR
4 4 9
GND-12 +5V-7 09B5-1
5 5 10
ORGWIDSE3 09B5-3 09
X4 X5 11
GND-16 09B5-2 OR
1 1 12
+5V-8 09B6-1
13
ORGWIDSE4 09B6-3 09
14
GND-17 09B6-2 OR
26 26 15
CLK +5V-9 09B9-1
16
ORGWIDSE5 09B9-3 09
17
GND-18 09B9-2 OR
18
+5V-10 09B7-1
µP 19
ORGWIDSE6 09B7-3 09
20
GND-19 09B7-2 OR
21
+5V-11 09B8-1
22
RAM ORGWIDSE7 09B8-3
23 09
GND-20 09B8-2 OR
24
EDOPS

04.06.2002 5
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Power supply mixed

Exp sense
10G01
10PBA05

22S1 Main switch

Step M contr
09PBA01

M 09M1

Console CPU
22PBA02 Supply FL inverter
22G1

09S1
ORGSAFSW
10E1 LC Display
Supply cord SCALA
22LCD1
Sensors
09B 2 ... 9

Image processing CCD interface CCD console CCD

10PBA04 10PBA02 10PBA01 10CCD1

To NGC

BDSCA

04.06.2002 6
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Power supply mixed Step M Contr

10G01 09PBA01
Supply cord
G1 G3 X1
Line GND-21
1 10 3
Neutral +24V-1
3 9 1 Image processing CCD Interface CC
+12V-12
22S1 2 8 2 10PBA04 10PBA02 10
Main switch
10X4 G5 X10 X9 G2 X3
+5V-12 +5V-17
4 4 1 1 1 1
GND-43
3 3 G2 4 2 2 2
+5V-14
2 2 2 2 3
GND-22
1 1 3 3 6
G3 X17 8
+5VSTANDBY
11 1 11
2 13

Console CPU 3 15
22PBA02 16

Keypad 1 X8 X1
+5V-1
22PBA06 30 1
GND-1
X1 X3 2
GND-2 +5VSTANDBY
9 9 3 LC Display
+5V-2
27 27 22LCD1
X4 LCD1 10T1
1
+5V-3
1
JAPAN
Supply FL-Invertor

100V

115V
GND-3
10G1 2 2 Supply cord
10X6 10X5
+5V-4
G1 X4 4 4 1 1
+5V-16 GND-4
1 14 7 7 3 3
GND-27 -24V
2 16 13 13 2 2
GND-5 To
15 15
EDSCLVS

Note for 10X4:

Cable connector 10X4 consists of 2 parts

Machine type Female contacts Male contacts

Oce 9600 / TDS 600 scanner 10X4 10X3
Other (f.i. Oce 9700 scanner) 10X4 10X4

04.06.2002 7
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Console CPU Power supply mixed

22PBA02 10G01
X8 G3 G4
SCALAACT SCALA1
14 1 1
SCALAPWM SCALA3
23 2 2
SCALAFIL SCALA4 10E01
25 3 3 Exp Sense
SCASUPON SCALA2
26 4 4 SCALA 10PBA05
+5V-STANDBY
30 11 G3 X1
+12V-12 EXPSEIN
8 5 1
GND-24
G2 6 2
+5V-14 +12V-3
2 7 3 +12V
GND-22
3

Image Processing
10PBA04
X1
3
2
4 NGC
X1 X17
+5V-1
1 1
GND-1
2 2
+12V-1
3 3

EDSCA

04.06.2002 8
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Console CPU IImage Processing CCD Interface CCD Console CCD

22PBA02 10PBA04 10PBA02 10PBA01 10C
X5 X4 X2 X2 X3 X1

X1 X17 X9 X1
+5V-1 +5V-17
1 1 1 1
GND-1 GND-43
2 2 4 2
+12V-1
3 3
X6 X15
TXD
1 1
RTS
2 2
RXD
3 3 X16
CTS NGC
4 4
GND-12
5 5
6 Power Supply Mixed
L1-AB 7 10G01
8 X10 G3
+12V-12
L2-AB 9 4 8
10 G2
+5V-14
RSH22-ON 11 2 2
GND-22
12 3 3
EDIP

04.06.2002 9
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

CPU/IO High Voltage Supply Gridvoltage

22PBA01 22PBA04 02PBA01
X6 X1 T3
CHGSUP
1 1 PRE HV
REGULATOR OUTPUT Charging unit

Low voltage supply X7 CHGHV

22PBA02
X2 X2
+24V-3
2 1 X1
GND24V-3 GNDGRID
4 2 1

CURRENT CONTROL 22X5

22PBA03 Driver

EDCU

04.06.2002 10
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Driver Low voltage supply High voltage supply

22PBA03 22PBA02 22PBA04
22Z1 Noise filter
Charging unit

Grid voltage
CPU/IO 02PBA01
22PBA01

BDCU

04.06.2002 11
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

RFI board PHD Interface

22PBA06 04PBA01

Low voltage supply

22PBA02

22PBA03 Driver

CPU/IO
22PBA01 Printhead
04PHD1

BDPHD

04.06.2002 12
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Low voltage supply CPU/IO Printhead interface

22PBA02 22PBA01 04PBA01
X1 X7 1 EN
+24V-2 LCA
3 +24V 1
+5V-2
1 +5V 2
+5VSB-1
5 +5VSB 3
GND24V-2
4 GND RFI-Board 6
GND5V-2 22PBA06
2 +24VELV 7
EN 1
X4 X2 5V +5VELV 8
+24VELV-1
1 1 4
GND24VELV-1
2 2 GNDELV 5
9
10
X10 X6 D1,D2,D3
IO PHDDATA0
CLK 8 1 & EN
X2 X
LCA
PHDDATA1 Flat cable
9 2
2x10P
PHDDATA2
10 3 X3 X
PHDDATA3 Flat cable
11 4
µP 2x10P
PHDDATA4
12 5
PHDDATA5 OSCILLATOR
13 6
GND5V-8
GND 14 7
PHDSTROBE EPROM
RAM 15 8
PHDRESET
16 9
+5VELV
10 SRAM
& ADC

X3 04X5
PHDNTC 04
12 2 NT
Driver GNDELV
22PBA03 GNDELV 11 1

EDPHDDA

04.06.2002 13
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Low voltage supply Printhead interface Printhead

22PBA02 04PBA01 04PHD1
X5 X5 Z5 Z3 X1 X1
+5VPHD-1 PHDSUP +5V1PHD-1
+5VPHD 1 1 1
Filt. Filt.
+5VPHD-2 supp supp +5V1PHD-2
2 2 2
+5VPHD-3 +5V1PHD-3
3 3 3
PHDSENSE+ +5V1PHD-4
+SENSE 4 4 4
+5VPHD-4 GNDPHD-1
+5VPHD 5 5 5
GND5VPHD-1 GNDPHD-2
GND5VPHD 6 6 6
GND5VPHD-2 GNDPHD-3
7 7 7
GND5VPHD-3 GNDPHD-4
8 8 8
GND5VPHD-4 +5V1PHD-5
9 9 9
PHDSENSE-
-SENSE 10 10
+5V-3
+5V 11 11 + +5V
GND5V-3
GND5V 12 12

Z4 X4 X4
+5V1PHD-6
PHDSUP 1
Filt.
supp +5V1PHD-7
2
+5V1PHD-8
3
+5V1PHD-9
+5V 4
LCA
GNDPHD-6
5
OSCILLATOR GNDPHD-7
6
GNDPHD-8
7
EPROM GNDPHD-9
8
+5V1PHD-10
9
SRAM

EDPHDPO

04.06.2002 14
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Driver Low voltage supply High voltage supply

22PBA03 22PBA02 22PBA04
22Z1 Noise filter Separation

Separation unit

CPU/IO
22PBA01

Developing

Bias unit

05B1 Toner sensor

M 05M1 Toner supply motor

05S1 Developing supply switch

BDBIASU

04.06.2002 15
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

CPU/IO High Voltage Supply

22PBA01 22PBA04
X6 X1 PRE HV
DEVSUP REGULATOR OUTPUT
2 2
IO
X1
+24V 3 Low voltage supply T4
CLK
+5V 1 22PBA02
CURRENT CONTROL
+5VSB 5 X2
CLK CLEANH
GND 4 1 +24V
+24VELV BIAS
2 2 GND
CLK
X3 X4
X2
µP +24VELV 1
GNDELV 2 -400V
05B1 Toner sensor
X3 05B1 -5
DEVTONCONSP GRAY
+5VELV 27 5
&

RAM DEVTONCONSE WHITE

ADC 25 3 X1
+24VELV +24VELV-3 RED
26 4 Fe
GNDELV-8 BLUE
GNDELV 28 2 Bias unit
YELLOW
1
X6 05X1
+24V-8 +
+24V 8 1
05M1
M Toner sup. motor
+24VELV DEVTONMO -
5V +5VELV 9 2
05X2 05S1
+5V-15
+5V 6 3 1 Dev. sup. switch
DEVTONSW
7 4 2

EDDEVU

04.06.2002 16
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Low voltage supply High Voltage Supply

22PBA02 22PBA04
X2 X2
+24V-3
2 1 +24V
GND24V-3
4 2 GND
GND5V-2
GND24V-2
+5VSB-1
+5V-2
+24V-2

22PBA03 Driver

CPU/IO
22PBA01
CLK
X1
+24V 3
IO
+5V 1
+5VSB 5
µP GND 4 PRE HV
REGULATOR OUTPUT
2
SEPHV
X6 X1 T1
PTRSEPSUP Separatio
4 4
RAM
CURRENT CONTROL
22X7 X6
EDSEPU

04.06.2002 17
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Low voltage supply High Voltage Supply

22PBA02 22PBA04
X2 X2
+24V-3
2 1 +24V
GND24V-3
4 2 GND
GND5V-2
GND24V-2
+5VSB-1
+5V-2
+24V-2

22PBA03 Driver

CPU/IO
22PBA01
CLK
X1
+24V 3
IO
+5V 1
+5VSB 5
µP GND 4 PRE HV
REGULATOR OUTPUT
2 Transfer unit
X6 X1 X5 TRAHV
TRASUP T2
3 3
RAM
CURRENT CONTROL
22X11
EDTRANSU

04.06.2002 18
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

CPU/IO High Voltage Supply

22PBA01 22PBA04
X6 X1 PRE HV
DEVSUP REGULATOR OUTPUT
2 2
IO Low voltage supply
X1
22PBA02
+24V 3
T4
CLK
+5V 1
CURRENT CONTROL
+5VSB 5 X2
CLK CLEANHV
GND 4 1 +24V
BIASHV
2 2 GND
X3 X4
µP Cleaning LEDs
07PBA01 -400V
X6 X1 -55
+24V-9
+24V 10 2
RAM CLELED
11 1 X1

Bias unit
EDCLLED

04.06.2002 19
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

SSR fuser
08S1
08E1 / 08E2
Heater
22Z1 Noise filter

Driver
22PBA03

CPU/IO
22PBA01

-T 08R 1 .... 6
NTC

08M1 / 08M2
M Fuser fan

BDFU

04.06.2002 20
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Low voltage supply Main Controller

22PBA02 22PBA01
X6 08X7
+24V-10
CLK +24V 12 1
IO
M 08M1
Fuser Fan Left
FUSFANL
13 2
08X8
µP +24V-11
+24V 14 1
M 08M2
Fuser Fan Right
FUSFANR
15 2
RAM

X1
+24V-2
3 +24V
+5V-2
1 +5V
+5VSB-1
5 +5VSB
GND24V-2
4 GND
GND5V-2
2

EDFUFAN

04.06.2002 21
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

CPU/IO Driver
22PBA01 EUR 22PBA
08S02
Rear fuser interlock X3
08E01 X19
Front heater 08L1 22 Power & Control
a Mains

b NO
08E02
08S01 Rear heater
SSR fuser
X3
17 + ~
18 - ~
USA 08S02 08E02
Rear fuser interlock Rear heater
a a
X2
b b 08L1
08S4
Fuser open switch X1
X7
FUSOPSW
7
GND5V-15 08S03 08E01
8 Front fuser interlock Front heater
CO

X3 X5
CONMAINS1
29 1
CONMAINS2
30 2
X6 X2
CONMAINS11
22 2

EDFUHE

04.06.2002 22
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Low voltage supply CPU/IO

22PBA02 22PBA01
X3 08X1
GNDELV-1 -T
GNDELV 1 1 08R01
CLK FUSNTC1
IO +5VELV 2 2 NTC Left
&
ADC 08X2
GNDELV-2 -T
3 1 08R02
FUSNTC2 NTC Middle
µP 4 2
08X3
GNDELV-3 -T
5 1 08R03
FUSNTC3 NTC Contr
6 2
RAM +24VELV
+5V 08X4
GNDELV-4 -T
7 1 08R04
FUSNTC4 NTC Middle
8 2
08X5
X1 GNDELV-5 -T
+24V-2 9 1 08R05
3 +24V FUSNTC5
10 2 NTC Right
+5V-2
1 +5V
+5VSB-1 08X6
5 +5VSB GNDELV-6 -T
GND24V-2 15 1 08R06
4 GND FUSNTC6
16 2 NTC Reflec
GND5V-2
2
Driver
22PBA03
+24VELV 5V +5VELV
X5
CONMAINS1
29 1 Relais 1
CONMAINS2
30 2
EDFUNTC

04.06.2002 23
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PRD driver U/M/L

12PBA 01/03/05
X1 X2
?KNIMO1
3 +24V 25
?KNIMO2
5 26
23 +5V X3
6 GND ?NOA1 2
+24V ?OA1
14 +5V 1
22 ?NOB1 4
PRD?KNITOR ?OB1
7 3
PRD?KNITOL ?NOA2
9 6
+5V GND X2 ?OA2 5
PRD?FEDMOEN ?NOA1 3
12 ?NOB2 8
PRD?FEDMODIR ?NOA2 6
11 1 ?OB2 7
?OA1 8
+24V X2
?OA2 11 +5V
1
PRD?FEDMOCLK +24V 15
10 K1 4
PRD?CONFIG ?NOB1 20
8 7
PRD?FEDMOSEL ?NOB2 X1 24
4 ?PRESE2 10
?OB1 21 21
?RUNSE2 13
?OB2 20 23
?RUNSE1 19
+24V 19 14
K2 22
?PRESE1
16 12
?KNISEL 29
17 2
?KNISER
18 5
?LEADSE
15 9
?FEDSW2
2 18
?FEDSW1
1 16
EDPRDD

04.06.2002 24
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PRD driver
12PBA01(U)
CPU/IO
12PBA03(M)
22PBA01 12PBA05(L)
Safety Circuit
12S1(U) /12S2(M) /12S3(L)

Roll 1 Transport
M 12M1(U) /12M4(M) /12M7(L)

12B5(U) /12B12(M) /12B19(L)

Roll 2
M 12M3(U) /12M6(M) /12M9(L)

12B7(U) /12B14(M) /12B21(L)

Knife
M 12M2(U) /12M5(M) /12M8(L)

Left 12B1(U) /12B8(M) /12B15(L)

Right 12B2(U) /12B9(M) /12B16(L)

Roll Empty Detection

Roll 1 12B4(U) /12B11(M) /12B18(L)

Roll 2 12B6(U) /12B13(M) /12B20(L)

22PBA02 Low voltage Supply

BDPRD

04.06.2002 25
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Low voltage supply CPU/IO PRD driver

22PBA02 22PBA01 12PBA01
X1 X15 X1 Knife moto
+24V-2 PRDLFEDMOCLK
3 +24V 10 10
+5V-2 PRDLFEDMOSEL
1 +5V IO 4 4
+5VSB-1 PRDLKNITOR Feed motor
5 +5VSB 7 7
GND24V-2 PRDLKNITOL
4 GND 9 9
GND5V-2 PRDLFEDMODIR
2 11 11
Feed motor
PRDLFEDMOEN
12 12
CLK PRDLFEDSW1
1 1
PRDLFEDSW2 Feeding sw
2 2
Lead senso
PRDLCONFIG
8 8
PRDLLEADSE
µP 15 15
PRDLPRESE2
16 16
PRDLKNISEL
22PBA03 Driver 17 17
PRDLKNISER
18 18
RAM PRDLRUNSE1
19 19
PRDLRUNSE2
20 20
PRDLPRESE2
21 21
PRDLOPSW
13
+24V-5
+24V 3 3
+24V-6
+24V 5 5
GND-9
GND 6 6
GND-11
GND 14 14
GND-12
GND 22 22
+5V-5
+5V 23 23
+5VSB-3
+5VSB 24
12S3
Open sw

EDPRDL

04.06.2002 26
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

CPU/IO PRD driver

22PBA01 12PBA05
X15 X1 X2
+24V-5 +5V-31
3 3 +24V +5V 10 1
+24V-6 GND-41 12B18
5 5 GND 11 2 Present s
+5V-5 LPRESE1
23 23 +5V 12 3
GND-9
6 6 GND
GND-11
14 14
GND-12 +5V-32
22 22 +5V 13 1
PRDLPRESE1 LRUNSE1 12B19
16 16 14 2 Run sens
PRDLRUNSE1 GND-42
19 19 GND 15 3

+5V X3 12X9
LNOA1
PRDLFEDMOEN 2 1
12 12 Roll2 LOA1 12M7
PRDLFEDMODIR 1 2
11 11 1
LNOB1 M Feed moto
4 3
+24V Roll2 LOB1
3 4
PRDLFEDMOCLK K1
10 10
PRDLCONFIG
8 8 Roll2
PRDLFEDMOSEL
4 4
Roll2

+24V
K2

22PBA02 Low voltage supply

EDPRDLFM1

04.06.2002 27
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

CPU/IO PRD driver

22PBA01 12PBA05
X15 X1 X2
+24V-5 +5V-26
3 3 +24V +5V 19 1
+24V-6 GND-36 12B20
5 5 GND 20 2 Present s
+5V-5 LPRESE2
23 23 +5V 21 3
GND-9
6 6 GND
GND-11
14 14
GND-12 +5V-27
22 22 +5V 22 1
PRDLPRESE2 LRUNSE2 12B21
20 20 23 2 Run sens
PRDLRUNSE2 GND-37
21 21 GND 24 3

+5V Roll1
PRDLFEDMOEN X3 12X11
12 12 LNOA2
PRDLFEDMODIR 1 6 2
11 11 Roll1 LOA2 12M9
5 1
+24V LNOB2 M Feed moto
8 4
K1 LOB2
PRDLFEDMOCLK 7 3
10 10 Roll1
PRDLCONFIG
8 8
PRDLFEDMOSEL
4 4 Roll1

+24V
K2

22PBA02 Low voltage supply

EDPRDLFM2

04.06.2002 28
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

CPU/IO PRD driver

22PBA01 12PBA05
X15 X1 X2
+24V-5 +5V-28
3 3 +24V +5V 1 1
+24V-6 LKNISEL 12B15
5 5 2 2 Knife senso
+5V-5 GND-38
23 23 +5V GND 3 3
GND-9
6 6 GND
GND-11
14 14
GND-12 +5V-29
22 22 +5V 4 1
PRDLKNISEL LKNISER 12B16
17 17 5 2 Knife senso
PRDLKNISER GND-39
18 18 GND 6 3
+24V
+5V -
LKNIMO1
25
PRDLKNITOR 12M8
7 7 + M Knife motor
PRDLKNITOL LKNIMO2
9 9 26

22PBA02 Low voltage supply

EDPRDLKNI

04.06.2002 29
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

CPU/IO PRD driver

22PBA01 12PBA05
X15 X1 X2
+5V-5 +5V-30
23 23 7 1
GND-12 GND-40 12B17
22 22 8 2 Lead senso
PRDLLEADSE LLEADSE
15 15 9 3
PRDLFEDSW1
1 1
PRDLFEDSW2
2 2 Feeding switch
12PBA06
X1
+5V-43
29 2
LFEDSW1
16 3
LFEDSW2
18 1

22PBA02 Low voltage supply

EDPRDLLSFS

04.06.2002 30
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Low voltage supply CPU/IO PRD driver

22PBA02 22PBA01 12PBA01
X1 X14 X1 Knife moto
+24V-2 PRDMFEDMOCLK
3 +24V 10 10
+5V-2 PRDMFEDMOSEL
1 +5V IO 4 4
+5VSB-1 PRDMKNITOR Feed motor
5 +5VSB 7 7
GND24V-2 PRDMKNITOL
4 GND 9 9
GND5V-2 PRDMFEDMODIR
2 11 11
Feed motor
PRDMFEDMOEN
12 12
CLK PRDMFEDSW1
1 1
PRDMFEDSW2 Feeding sw
2 2
Lead senso
PRDMCONFIG
8 8
PRDMLEADSE
µP 15 15
PRDMPRESE2
16 16
PRDMKNISEL
22PBA03 Driver 17 17
PRDMKNISER
18 18
RAM PRDMRUNSE1
19 19
PRDMRUNSE2
20 20
PRDMPRESE2
21 21
PRDMOPSW
13
+24V-3
+24V 3 3
+24V-4
+24V 5 5
GND-5
GND 6 6
GND-7
GND 14 14
GND-8
GND 22 22
+5V-3
+5V 23 23
+5VSB-2
+5VSB 24
12S2
Open sw

EDPRDM

04.06.2002 31
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

CPU/IO PRD driver

22PBA01 12PBA03
X14 X1 X2
+24V-3 +5V-31
3 3 +24V +5V 10 1
+24V-4 GND-41 12B11
5 5 GND 11 2 Present s
+5V-3 MPRESE1
23 23 +5V 12 3
GND-5
6 6 GND
GND-7
14 14
GND-8 +5V-32
22 22 +5V 13 1
PRDMPRESE1 MRUNSE1 12B12
16 16 14 2 Run sens
PRDMRUNSE1 GND-42
19 19 GND 15 3

+5V X3 12X5
MNOA1
PRDMFEDMOEN 2 1
12 12 Roll2 MOA1 12M4
PRDMFEDMODIR 1 2
11 11 1
MNOB1 M Feed moto
4 3
+24V Roll2 MOB1
3 4
PRDMFEDMOCLK K1
10 10
PRDMCONFIG
8 8 Roll2
PRDMFEDMOSEL
4 4
Roll2

+24V
K2

22PBA02 Low voltage supply

EDPRDMFM1

04.06.2002 32
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

CPU/IO PRD driver

22PBA01 12PBA03
X14 X1 X2
+24V-3 +5V-18
3 3 +24V +5V 19 1
+24V-4 GND-28 12B13
5 5 GND 20 2 Present s
+5V-3 MPRESE2
23 23 +5V 21 3
GND-5
6 6 GND
GND-7
14 14
GND-8 +5V-19
22 22 +5V 22 1
PRDMPRESE2 MRUNSE2 12B14
21 21 23 2 Run sens
PRDMRUNSE2 GND-29
20 20 GND 24 3

+5V Roll1
PRDMFEDMOEN X3 12X7
12 12 MNOA2
PRDMFEDMODIR 1 6 2
11 11 Roll1 MOA2 12M6
5 1
+24V MNOB2 M Feed moto
8 4
K1 MOB2
PRDMFEDMOCLK 7 3
10 10 Roll1
PRDMCONFIG
8 8
PRDMFEDMOSEL
4 4 Roll1

+24V
K2

22PBA02 Low voltage supply

EDPRDMFM2

04.06.2002 33
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

CPU/IO PRD driver

22PBA01 12PBA03
X14 X1 X2
+24V-3 +5V-20
3 3 +24V +5V 1 1
+24V-4 MKNISEL 12B8
5 5 2 2 Knife senso
+5V-3 GND-30
23 23 +5V GND 3 3
GND-5
6 6 GND
GND-7
14 14
GND-8 +5V-21
22 22 +5V 4 1
PRDMKNISEL MKNISER 12B9
17 17 5 2 Knife senso
PRDMKNISER GND-31
18 18 GND 6 3
+24V
+5V -
MKNIMO1
25
PRDMKNITOR 12M5
7 7 + M Knife motor
PRDMKNITOL MKNIMO2
9 9 26

22PBA02 Low voltage supply

EDPRDMKNI

04.06.2002 34
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

CPU/IO PRD driver

22PBA01 12PBA03
X14 X1 X2
+5V-3 +5V-22
23 23 7 1
GND-8 GND-32 12B10
22 22 8 2 Lead senso
PRDMLEADSE MLEADSE
15 15 9 3
PRDMFEDSW1
1 1
PRDMFEDSW2
2 2 Feeding switch
12PBA04
X1
+5V-45
29 2
MFEDSW2
16 3
MFEDSW1
18 1

22PBA02 Low voltage supply

EDPRDMLSFS

04.06.2002 35
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Low voltage supply CPU/IO PRD driver

22PBA02 22PBA01 12PBA01
X1 X13 X1 Knife moto
+24V-2 PRDUFEDMOCLK
3 +24V 10 10
+5V-2 PRDUFEDMOSEL
1 +5V IO 4 4
+5VSB-1 PRDUKNITOR Feed motor
5 +5VSB 7 7
GND24V-2 PRDUKNITOL
4 GND 9 9
GND5V-2 PRDUFEDMODIR
2 11 11
Feed motor
PRDUFEDMOEN
12 12
CLK PRDUFEDSW1
1 1
PRDUFEDSW2 Feeding sw
2 2
Lead senso
PRDUCONFIG
8 8
PRDULEADSE
µP 15 15
PRDUPRESE2
16 16
PRDUKNISEL
22PBA03 Driver 17 17
PRDUKNISER
18 18
RAM PRDURUNSE1
19 19
PRDURUNSE2
20 20
PRDUPRESE2
21 21
PRDUOPSW
13
+24V-1
+24V 3 3
+24V-2
+24V 5 5
GND-1
GND 6 6
GND-3
GND 14 14
GND-4
GND 22 22
+5V-1
+5V 23 23
+5VSB-1
+5VSB 24
12S1
Open sw

EDPRDU

04.06.2002 36
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

CPU/IO PRD driver

22PBA01 12PBA01
X13 X1 X2
+24V-1 +5V-15
3 3 +24V +5V 10 1
+24V-2 GND-24 12B4
5 5 GND 11 2 Present s
+5V-1 UPRESE1
23 23 +5V 12 3
GND-1
6 6 GND
GND-3
14 14
GND-4 +5V-16
22 22 +5V 13 1
PRDUPRESE1 URUNSE1 12B5
16 16 14 2 Run sens
PRDURUNSE1 GND-25
19 19 GND 15 3

+5V X3 12X5
UNOA1
PRDUFEDMOEN 2 2
12 12 Roll2 UOA1 12M1
PRDUFEDMODIR 1 1
11 11 1
UNOB1 M Feed moto
4 4
+24V Roll2 UOB1
3 3
PRDUFEDMOCLK K1
10 10
PRDUCONFIG
8 8 Roll2
PRDUFEDMOSEL
4 4
Roll2

+24V
K2

22PBA02 Low voltage supply

EDPRDUFM1

04.06.2002 37
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

CPU/IO PRD driver

22PBA01 12PBA01
X13 X1 X2
+24V-1 +5V-10
3 3 +24V +5V 19 1
+24V-2 GND-19 12B6
5 5 GND 20 2 Present s
+5V-1 UPRESE2
23 23 +5V 21 3
GND-1
6 6 GND
GND-3
14 14
GND-4 +5V-11
22 22 +5V 22 1
PRDUPRESE2 URUNSE2 12B7
21 21 23 2 Run sens
PRDURUNSE2 GND-20
20 20 GND 24 3

+5V Roll1
PRDUFEDMOEN X3 12X7
12 12 UNOA2
PRDUFEDMODIR 1 6 2
11 11 Roll1 UOA2 12M3
5 1
+24V UNOB2 M Feed moto
8 4
K1 UOB2
PRDUFEDMOCLK 7 3
10 10 Roll1
PRDUCONFIG
8 8
PRDUFEDMOSEL
4 4 Roll1

+24V
K2

22PBA02 Low voltage supply

EDPRDUFM2

04.06.2002 38
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

CPU/IO PRD driver

22PBA01 12PBA01
X13 X1 X2
+24V-1 +5V-12
3 3 +24V +5V 1 1
+24V-2 UKNISEL 12B1
5 5 2 2 Knife senso
+5V-1 GND-21
23 23 +5V GND 3 3
GND-1
6 6 GND
GND-3
14 14
GND-4 +5V-13
22 22 +5V 4 1
PRDUKNISEL UKNISER 12B2
17 17 5 2 Knife senso
PRDUKNISER GND-22
18 18 GND 6 3
+5V +24V
-
UKNIMO1
25
PRDUKNITOR 12M2
7 7 + M Knife motor
PRDUKNITOL UKNIMO2
9 9 26

22PBA02 Low voltage supply

EDPRDUKNI

04.06.2002 39
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

CPU/IO PRD driver

22PBA01 12PBA01
X13 X1 X2
+5V-1 +5V-14
23 23 7 1
GND-4 GND-23 12B3
22 22 8 2 Lead senso
PRDULEADSE ULEADSE
15 15 9 3
PRDUFEDSW1
1 1
PRDUFEDSW2
2 2 Feeding switch
12PBA02
X1
+5V-44
29 2
UFEDSW1
16 3
UFEDSW2
18 1

22PBA02 Low voltage supply

EDPRDULSFS

04.06.2002 40
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

CPU/IO
22PBA01
M 13M1 Upper paper sheet feeder

13B1

13Y1

13S2

M 13M2 Middle paper sheet feeder

13B2

13Y2

13S4

M 13M3 Lower paper sheet feeder

13B3

13Y3

13S6

22PBA02 Low voltage Supply

BDPSF

04.06.2002 41
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Low voltage supply CPU/IO

22PBA02 22PBA01
X18
X1 +5V
+5V-9
+24V-2 1 1
3 +24V GND-17
GND 2 2 13B3
+5V-2 Empty sens
1 +5V PSFLEMPSE
+5VSB-1 IO 3 3
5 +5VSB
GND24V-2
4 GND PSFLELEMO
-
GND5V-2 6
2 13S5
CLK GND
Elevator switch +
M 13M3
Elevator m
+24V-12
+24V 7
GND 10
PSFLCONFIG
11
µP +24V-11 1
+24V 4
13Y3
2 Seperation
PSFLSEPCL
22PBA03 Driver 5
RAM GND
13S6
PSFLOPSW Open switc
8
+5VSB-6
+5VSB 9
EDPSFL

04.06.2002 42
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Low voltage supply CPU/IO

22PBA02 22PBA01
X17
X1 +5V
+5V-8
+24V-2 1 1
3 +24V GND-15
GND 2 2 13B2
+5V-2 Empty sens
1 +5V PSFMEMPSE
+5VSB-1 IO 3 3
5 +5VSB
GND24V-2
4 GND PSFMELEMO
-
GND5V-2 6
2 13S3
CLK GND
Elevator switch +
M 13M2
Elevator m
+24V-10
+24V 7
GND 10
PSFMCONFIG
11
µP +24V-9 1
+24V 4
13Y2
2 Seperation
PSFMSEPCL
22PBA03 Driver 5
RAM GND
13S4
PSFMOPSW Open switc
8
+5VSB-5
+5VSB 9
EDPSFM

04.06.2002 43
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Low voltage supply CPU/IO

22PBA02 22PBA01
X16
X1 +5V
+5V-7
+24V-2 1 1
3 +24V GND-13
GND 2 2 13B1
+5V-2 Empty sens
1 +5V PSFUEMPSE
+5VSB-1 IO 3 3
5 +5VSB
GND24V-2
4 GND PSFUELEMO
-
GND5V-2 6
2 13S1
CLK GND
Elevator switch +
M 13M1
Elevator m
+24V-8
+24V 7
GND 10
PSFUCONFIG
11
µP +24V-7 1
+24V 4
13Y1
2 Seperation
PSFUSEPCL
22PBA03 Driver 5
RAM GND
13S2
PSFUOPSW Open switc
8
+5VSB-4
+5VSB 9
EDPSFU

04.06.2002 44
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Driver CPU/IO Step motor control

22PBA03 22PBA01 15PBA01
15M2
M Feed motor paper transpor
22Z1 Noise filter

15M3
M Output fan
15M1
M Suction fan
15S1
Flap switch
15Y1
Low voltage supply Input clutch
22PBA02

15B1
Lead sensor
15B2
Bulge sensor
15B3
Input sensor

15M4
M IRT fan

15B6

15M5
M IRT motor
OPTIONAL
BDPP

04.06.2002 45
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Low voltage supply CPU/IO

22PBA02 22PBA01
X1 X8 15B1
+24V-2 +5V-9
3 +24V +5V 1 1 Lead sensor
+5V-2 GND5V-9
1 +5V GND 2 2
+5VSB-1 PTRLEADSE
5 +5VSB 3 3
GND24V-2
4 GND
GND5V-2
2
15B2
IO +5V-10
CLK +5V 4 1 Bulge sensor
PTRBULSE
5 2
GND5V-10
GND 6 3

µP
15B3
+5V-11
+5V 7 1 Input sensor
GND5V-11
GND 8 2
PTRINSE
RAM 9 3

Driver
22PBA03

EDPPSE

04.06.2002 46
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Low voltage supply CPU/IO Step motor control

22PBA02 22PBA01 15PBA01
X1 X7 X1 X2
+24V-2 +24V-4 OA
3 +24V +24V 1 1 1
+5V-2 +5V-8 NOA 15M2
1 +5V +5V 2 2 2
+5VSB-1 GND24V-4 OB M Feed motor
paper transpo
5 +5VSB GND 3 3 3
GND24V-2 PTRSMCLK NOB
4 GND CLK 4 4 4
GND5V-2 PTRSMEN
2 5 5
PTRSMDIR
CLK 6 6

CLK IO X8 15S1
+5V-13 Flap switch
+5V 13
PTRFLAPSW
14
+24V-5 1
+24V 15 15Y1
PTRINCL 2
µP 16 Input clutch
15M3
15X2 Output
+24V-6 +
GND 19 1
M
RAM PTROUTFAN
20 2 -

X6
+24V-19 1
24 15Y2
PTRINREVCL 2
26 Input reverse

GND 22PBA03 Driver

15M1
X2 15X1 Suction
+24V-22 +
X6 X2 +24V 6 1
PTRSUCFANCONT
30 3 M
SUCFAN -
5 2
PTRSUCFAN
5 4 +

- +
Noise filter
22Z1

EDPPMO

04.06.2002 47
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Low voltage supply CPU/IO

22PBA02 22PBA01
X1 X10
+24V-2 +24V-14 +
3 +24V IO +24V 4 15M4
+5V-2
1 +5V M IRT fan
+5VSB-1 PTRIRTFAN -
5 +5VSB 5
GND24V-2
4 GND
GND5V-2 OPTIONAL 15M5
2 15X4 15X5 Paperswitch m
CLK +24V-15
+24V 6 2 1
M
PRTIRTMO
7 4 2
µP 15B6
X8
+5V-16 Paperswitch se
+5V 17
GND-47
GND 18 1 1

22PBA03 Driver X6 3 3
RAM PRTIRTSWSE
29 5 2

EDPPIRT

04.06.2002 48
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Low voltage supply

22PBA02
F X5
X1 F L +5VPHD
+5VPHD-
LINE 1
3 Vbulk +5VPHD-
2

LOAD
LINE
2 N +5VPHD-
F PFC 3
NEUTRAL
1 PHDSEN
+SENSE 4
+5VPHD-
Vbulk PWRFAIL +5VPHD 5
F
5V standby GND5VP
+24VELV GND5VPHD 6
+5VSB GND5VP
7
GND5VP
GND24VELV 8
GND5VP
Vbulk +5V 9
PHDSEN
-SENSE 10
+5V-3
GND5V +5V 11
PWM GND5V-3
+24V.1 GND5V 12
controller
+5V-2
+24V.2 +5V
GND5V-2
X6 GND24V.1 GND5V
+24V-17 ON/OFF CONTROL +24V-2
1 +24V.2 GND24V.2 +24V.2
GND24V-5 GND24V
2 GND24V.2 +SENSE GND24V.2
N +5VSB-1
4 N +5VPHD +5VSB
L LVSUPEN CONLVS
5 L -SENSE LVSUPEN
CONPWR
X4 GND5VPHD PWRFAIL
+24VELV-1
+24VELV
X2
1 +24V-1
GND24VELV-1 +24V.1 1
2 GND24VELV Protection Circuit for:
+24V-3
- Short circuit 2
- No load GND24V
GND24V.1 3
- Overload
GND24V
4

ED22PBA02

04.06.2002 49
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Driver L.V. su
22PBA03 22PB
X3 X1 X1
LINE
22 Power & Control 3 3
Mains NEUTRAL
1 1
NO
X4 X2
+24V-1
+24V 1 1
CPU/IO GND24V-1
2 3
22PBA01
+
COM
08 Fusing - +
Heater 08E01/02
X3 X5 Relais1 +24V
CONMAINS1
29 1
CONMAINS2
30 2

X4
+24V-33 23M1
+24V 3
DRIMO Drive m
4
X6 X2
DRIPWM
25 1 X2
CONMAINS11 +24V-22 15M1
22 2 6
PTRSUCFANCONT SUCFAN Suction
30 3 5
PTRSUCFAN
5 4 +

- +

ED22PBA03

04.06.2002 50
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Low voltage supply CPU/IO High Voltage Supply

22PBA02 22PBA01 22PBA04
X1 PRE HV
3 +24V REGULATOR OUTPUT
X6 X1
CHGSUP Charging u
1 +5V 1 1
IO
X7
5 +5VSB
T3
4 GND
CURRENT CONTROL
2
PRE HV
CLK REGULATOR OUTPUT BIAS-
Developing
DEVSUP X3
2 2
X4
T4
µP CURRENT CONTROL

PRE HV
REGULATOR OUTPUT
TRASUP Transfer un
3 3
RAM X5
T2
CURRENT CONTROL

PRE HV
REGULATOR OUTPUT
Separation
PTRSEPSUP T1
4 4

CURRENT CONTROL

X2 X2
+24V-3
2 1 +24V
GND24V-3
4 2 GND

ED22PBA04

04.06.2002 51
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Low voltage supply CPU/IO Control Panel

22PBA02 22PBA01 22PBA05
+5VSB

F1 A500 X9 X1
+5VCONSOLE
1 1
GND5V-4
GND 2 2
EN R CONPANINP
3 3
µP CONPANOUT
1D 4 4
CONPANCLK
5 5
F2 A500
+24VCONSOLE
+24V 6 6
CONPANEN
7 7
X1 GND24V-18
8 8
3 +24V GND24V
GND 9 9
1 +5V
5 +5VSB
4 GND
2

Driver
22PBA03

EDCONPAN

04.06.2002 52
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

CPU/IO RFI board Printhead inte

22PBA01 22PBA06 04PB
RS232 X2 X7
IO IDATA0P
CLK C V
X19 X1 1 1
INTCNTRLTXD Z2 IDATA0N
T1 1 1 2 2
INTCNTRLRTS Z1 ICLKP
T2 2 2 3 3
INTCNTRLRXD Z4 NXTLINEP
R1 3 3 6 6
µP INTCNTRLCTS Z3 NXTLINEN
R2 4 4 7 7
INTCNTRLGND ICLKN
GND 5 5 8 8
IDATA1P
+5VSB 6 6 4 4
IDATA1N
RAM X3 5 5
GND
8 9 9
CTS
Low voltage supply 14
22PBA02 RX
6
RTS
15
TX
7
D0+
3
D0-
NGC 11
CLK+
1
CLK-
9
D1+
4
D1-
12
LINE+
5
LINE-
13
GND
2
10
EDRFI

04.06.2002 53
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Low voltage supply CPU/IO Control Panel

22PBA02 22PBA01 22PBA05

High Voltage Supply

22PBA04

Driver
Charging un
22PBA03
Low voltage supply
BIAS unit
23M1 M
22PBA02
Transfer unit
15M1 M
Separation u

PHD Interface
MAINS
04PBA06

PRD driver
12PBA01/02/03

RIF board
22PBA06
22M1 M

22Y1

BDCPUGEN

04.06.2002 54
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Low voltage supply

22PBA02
N
F
X1 L
Driver F 22K1
22PBA03 3 Vbulk X6 Relais dewpreventor

LOAD
+24V-17

LINE
2 +24V.2 1
F PFC
GND24V.2 GND24V-5
1 2
L
L 5
N
N 4
Vbulk +24V.1
Dew preventor
+24V.2
22X13 22R1 22X14
+24V-2
GND24V.1
GND24V-2 PWM +T
GND24V.2
controller 22X15 22R2 22X16

+T
22S2
CPU/IO Humidity controller
22PBA01
X1
+24V CLK
X6 22X10
3 IO +24V-12
+24V 16 1
4 GND 22Y1
CONCNT Copy c
17 2
22X12
+24V-13 +
µP +24V 18 1
22M1
M Ozon fa
CONFAN -
19 2

RAM

EDCOPOZ

04.06.2002 55
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Driv
Supply cord 22S01 22Q01/02 22Z1 22P
ON/OFF Switch Circuit Breaker Noise filter

LOAD
LINE
22X1

08 Fusing
Heater 08E01/02

JAPAN Only

22T1

0V

200V

240V
EDMAINS

04.06.2002 56
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Driver CPU PBA Control panel

MAINS 22PBA03 22PBA01 22PBA05
Neutral +24V-1
+5VSB
Line GND
+24V-2
Earth +5V
GND
+5VSB
Low voltage supply Step motor control
+24V-2
22PBA02 15PBA01
+24VELV +5V
GND +24V-2
GND
PRD driver
12PBA01/02/03
+5V
+24V-2
GND

High voltage supply

22PBA04
+5V +24V-1
+5VSB GND
+24V-1 PHD interface Printhead
+24V-2 04PBA06 04PHD1
+24VELV GND GND
GND
+5VPHD +5VPHD
+5V-3 +5V-3
PHDSENSE+
PHDSENSE-
OUT
IN

EDPDSENG

04.06.2002 57
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Main diagram of Printer (as A0/E size Tiff format ).

Printer.tif

04.06.2002 58
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Main diagram of Scanner ( as A0/E size Tiff format ).

Scanner.tif

04.06.2002 59
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Main diagram of 1st Fold ( as A0/E size Tiff format ).

1st Fold.tif

04.06.2002 60
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Main diagram of 2 nd Fold ( as A0/E size Tiff format ).

2ndfold.tif

04.06.2002 61
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Main diagram of Fold optional ( as A0/E size Tiff format ).

foldoptional.tif

04.06.2002 62
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Driver L.V. su
22S01 22Q01/02 22Z1 22PBA03 22PB
ON/OFF Switch Circuit Breaker Noise filter
X3 X1 X1
LINE
3 3

LOAD
LINE
NEUTRAL
1 1
NO
+

- +
CPU/IO
22X1
22PBA01
+24V
X3 X5 Relais1
CONMAINS1
29 1
CONMAINS2
30 2
CLK 23M1
IO X6 X2 X4 23X1 Drive motor
CONMAINS11 DRIMO -
22 2 4 2
DRIMOPWM
25 1 M
+24V-33 +
+24V 3 1
µP
X4 X2
+24V-1
+24V 1 1
GND24V-1
2 3
RAM
X1
+24V +24V-2
3
+5V-2
+5V 1
+5VSB-1
+5VSB 5
GND24V-2
GND 4
GND5V-2
2
X6
+5V-11
+5V 4 1
23B1
DRIMOSE
5 2 Drive motor sensor
GND5V-1
GND 6 3

EDDMO

04.06.2002 63
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, Distribution power I/O

15PBA05
X3 +5V
+5V-12
1 +5V X1 X1 X2
GND5V-12 PTRFOLBULSE +5V +5V-2
2 GND5V 3 1 1
PTRFOLBULSE-B PTRFOLINSE GND5V GND5V
4 6 2 2
PTRFOLINSE-B Option +5V-13 +5V-3
5 9 4 4
PTRFOLWISE3-B GND5V-13 GND5V
6 X2 5 5
PTRFOLWISE1-B PTRFOLWISE1 Option +5V-4
7 3 7 7
PTRFOLWISE2-B PTRFOLWISE2 Option GND5V
8 6 8 8
PTRFOLTRAISE1-B PTRFOLTRAISE1Option +5V-5
9 9 10 10
PTRFOLTRAISE2-B PTRFOLTRAISE2 GND5V
10 12 11
PTRFOLTRAISE3-B PTRFOLTRAISE3 +5V-6
11 15 13
PTRFOLTRAISE4-B PTRFOLTRAISE4 GND5V
12 18 14
PTRFOLTRAISE5-B PTRFOLTRAISE5 +5V-7
13 21 16
PTRFOLTRAISE6-B Option GND5V
14 24 17
PTRFOLTRAISE7-B Option +5V-8
15 27 19
PTRFOLTRAISE8-B Option GND5V
16 30 20
INPSE OUTPSE Option
X6 X5 22
GND24V-11 PTRFOLOFFLILED Option
2 GND24V 8 23
+24V-34 GND5V +5V +5V-39 Option
1 7 25
Option
X8 26
+5V Option
4 + X4 28
INPSE - PTRFOLOFFLILED-1 Option
5 +24V 12 29
+24V-35 OUTPSE PTRFOLINPDIAG
1 +24V + 3
+5V - GND5V
PTRFOLROSSO PTRFOLOUTDIAG
2 4
PTRFOLROSSO-1
OUTPSE 11
INPSE
ED15PBA05

04.06.2002 64
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, CPU PBA, I/O Interface PBA, sensor distribution fold

22PBA01 22PBA02 18PBA07
18B1 /18B3 /18B4
Folder 1 sensors
15S2
Folder 1 doorswitch

PBA, Power I/O

18PBA03
15S1 / 18S1
Folder 1 doorswitches
18B5 / 18PBA05
Folder 1 sensors

Power supply 18M1 / 18M2

18G01 M
Folder 1 motors

18Y1 / 18Y2 / 15Y1 / 15Y2

Relays / solenoids
PBA, Distribution power I/O
15PBA05
15B 1......10
Paper transport sensors

15Y4

Solenoid
15V1
Paper transport LED

18G01 Power supply

BDFOL1

04.06.2002 65
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, CPU PBA, I/O Interface PBA, POWER I/O

22PBA01 22PBA02 18PBA03
X1 X1 X2 X7
FOL1INMOSE1-B
1 1 +5V 1 20
FOL1FOLMOSE1-B
+5V 2 2 2 19
GND5V FOL1FOLMOSE2-B
3 3 GND5V 3 18
FOL1INMOPWM
4 4 7 17
FOL1FOLMOPWM
5 5 9 16
FOL1FOLMOCW
6 6 10 15
PTRFOLDOORSW-2
7 7 11 14
FOL1DOORSW-B
8 8 12 13
FOL14QOUTDIAG-1
9 9 13 12
FOL14QINDIAG-1
10 10 14 11
FOL1DEFCL-1
11 11 17 8
FOL1OUTDEFSO-1
12 12 18 7
PTRFOLCORCL-2
13 13 19 6
PTRFOLFEDCL-2
14 14 20 5
PTRFOLUFOSO-2
15 15 21 4
RESERVEOUT
16 16 22 3
GND5V GND5V-37
17 17 23 2 GND5V
+5V-31
18 18 +5V 24 1 +5V
19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22
23 23
24 24
25 25
26 26

EDCPUPTRCON

04.06.2002 66
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, I/O INTERFACE PBA, POWER I/O Power supply

22PBA02 18PBA03 18G01
X6 X1 G2
+24V-29
2 1 1
GND24V-29
3 GND24V 2 3
6
7 +24V

X2 X7
24 1 +5V
23 2 GND5V X8 18X4
PTRFOLCORCL-1 PTRFOLCORCL
INPSE 1 1 15Y1
+24V-5 +24V-26 PTRFOLC
19 6 2 2
PTRFOLFEDCL-1 PTRFOLFEDCL
20 5 OUTPSE 3 3 15Y2
GND24V 2X +24V-6 +24V-27 PTRFOLF
4 4
18K1 FOL1SAFRL
+24V X3 18X21 18X21 18X3
+ +5V +24V-23
14 11 - INPSE 1 5 6 1
18M1
13 12 + OUTPSE M FOL1IN
- +5V FOL1INMO-1 FOL1INMO
2 2
CONTROL
7 17 X4 18B5
OUTPSE GND5V-21
GND5V 5 3 FOL1IN
INPSE FOL1INMOSE1
1 20 6 2
+5V-22
+5V 7 1

PBA, DISTRIB POWER I/O

15PBA05
X4 X3 X1 15X1 15B2
+5V-13 +5V-23 PTRFO
16 1 +5V +5V 4 1 1
GND5V-13 GND5V-26
15 2 GND5V GND5V 5 2 2
PTRFOLINSE-1 PTRFOLINSE
12 5 6 3 3

EDFOLPAPIN

04.06.2002 67
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, I/O INTERFACE PBA, POWER I/O Power supply

22PBA02 18PBA03 18G01
X6 X1 G2
+24V-29
2 1 1
GND24V-29
3 GND24V 2 3
6
7 +24V
18K1
X2 X7 FOL1SAFRL
24 1 +5V X3 18X21 18X21 18X3
+24V-23
23 2 GND5V +24V 1 5 6 1
+ +5V 18M1
14 11 - INPSE M FOL1IN
FOL1INMO-1 FOL1INMO
13 12 + OUTPSE 2 2
- +5V
CONTROL
7 17 X4 18B5
OUTPSE GND5V-21
INPSE GND5V 5 3 FOL1IN
FOL1INMOSE1
1 20 6 2
+5V-22
+5V 7 1

PBA, DISTRIB POWER I/O

15PBA05
X4 X3 X1 15X1 15B1
+5V +5V-11 PTRFOL
16 1 +5V +5V 1 1 1
GND5V GND5V-22
15 2 GND5V GND5V 2 2 2
PTRFOLBULSE-1 PTRFOLBULSE
13 4 3 3 3

EDFOLBUL

04.06.2002 68
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, I/O INTERFACE PBA, POWER I/O

22PBA02 18PBA03
18K1
X2 X7 FOL1SAFRL
24 1 +5V + INPSE X3 18X21 18X21 18X3
- +5V +24V-23
23 2 GND5V +24V 1 5 6 1
18M1
14 11 + OUTPSE M FOL1IN
- +5V FOL1INMO-1 FOL1INMO
13 12 2 2
7 17 CONTROL OUTPSEX4 18B5
GND5V-21 FOL1IN
1 20 INPSE GND5V 5 3
FOL1INMOSE1
X6 6 2
+5V-22
2 +5V 7 1
3 X1
6 1 Power supply
18G01
7 +24V GND24V 2
G2
+24V-29
PBA, DISTRIB POWER I/O 1
GND24V-29
15PBA05 3
X8 X6 18X4 G3
+24V-34 +24V-11
4 1 11 2
GND24V-11 GND24V-12
5 +24V GND24V 2 12 4
X5 X4 OUTPSE X8 18X5
INPSE +24V-35 +24V-36
11 11 +24V 1 1 15Y4
PTRFOLROSO PTRFOLROSO PTRFOLROSO
18 3 2 2
17 4
+ INPSE
X4 X3 - +5V
16 1 +5V
+ OUTPSE
15 2 GND5V - +5V

EDFOLROT

04.06.2002 69
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, I/O Interface PBA, DISTRIB POWER I/O

22PBA02 15PBA05
X2 15B6
+5V-4 PTRFOLTR
+5V +5V 7 1
GND5V-4
GND5V X4 X3 GND5V 8 2
PTRFOLTRAISE1-B PTRFOLTRAISE1
8 9 9 3
+5V-12
16 1 +5V
GND5V-12
15 2 GND5V 15B7
+5V-5 PTRFOLTR
+5V 10 1
GND5V-5
GND5V 11 2
7 PTRFOLTRAISE2-B PTRFOLTRAISE2
10 12 3

15B8
+5V-6 PTRFOLTR
+5V 13 1
µP GND5V-6
GND5V 14 2
IO
6 PTRFOLTRAISE3-B PTRFOLTRAISE3
11 15 3

CLK
15B9
+5V-7 PTRFOLTR
+5V 16 1
GND5V-18
GND5V 17 2
PTRFOLTRAISE4-B PTRFOLTRAISE4
5 12 18 3

15B10
+5V-8 PTRFOLTR
+5V 19 1
GND5V-8
GND5V 20 2
PTRFOLTRAISE5-B PTRFOLTRAISE5
4 13 21 3

EDFOLTRAIS

04.06.2002 70
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, I/O INTERFACE PBA, DISTRIB POWER I/O

22PBA02 15PBA05
X4 X3 X1 15X1
+5V +5V-13 +5V-23 15B2
16 1 +5V 4 1 1
GND5V-13 GND5V-26 PTRFOL
15 2 GND5V GND5V 5 2 2
PTRFOLINSE-1 PTRFOLINSE
12 5 6 3 3
10 7 X5
INPSE OUTPSE PTRFOLOFFLILED
9 8 8
15V1
+5V +5V-39
X5 X4 GND5V 7 PTRFOLOFFLILED
9 12
18 3 + INPSE
- +5V
17 4
+ OUTPSE
- +5V

PBA, POWER I/O

18PBA03
18K1
X2 X7 FOL1SAFRL
+5V
-
+
14 11 INPSE X3 18X21 18X21 18X3
+24V-23
13 12 +24V 1 5 6 1
+ OUTPSE 18M1
24 1 +5V - +5V M FOL1IN
FOL1INMO-1 FOL1INMO
23 2 GND5V 2 2
OUTPSE
7 17 CONTROL X4 18B5
GND5V-21 FOL1IN
1 20 INPSE GND5V 5 3
FOL1INMOSE1
X6 6 2
+5V-22
2 +5V 7 1
3 X1 G2
+24V-29 Power supply
6 1 1
GND24V-29 18G01
7 +24V GND24V 2 3
EDFOLF

04.06.2002 71
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, Sensor distribution fold

18PBA 07/14

X2 X3
2 3
3 6
4 9
5 12
6 14
GND5V GND5V
7 2
+5V GND5V
8 5
GND5V
1 8
GND5V
11
GND5V
15
+5V
1
+5V
4
+5V
7
+5V
10
+5V
13
X1
GND5V
2
+5V
1
3

ED18PBA07/14

04.06.2002 72
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, I/O interface

22PBA 02/09
X3 +5V X1
(+5V) (+5V)
1 S +5V 1
C1
(I/O) (+5V)
8 R +5V 2
(I/O) (GND)
7 3
(I/O) (DATA
6 X2 4
(I/O) (I/O) (DATA
5 IO 1 5
(I/O) (I/O) (DATA
4 2 IO 6
(I/O) (I/O) (DATA
3 3 & 7
(GND) (I/O) µP (GND)
2 GND 7 8
(I/O) (DATA
X1 & X5 9 9
(NINT) NINT (I/O) (I/O) (DATA
23 1 10 10
(I/O) (I/O) (DATA
X4 2 4 CLK 11
(I/O) (I/O) (I/O) (DATA
1 3 5 12
(I/O) (I/O) (I/O) (GND)
3 4 11 13
(I/O) C1 S (I/O) (I/O) (ADRE
5 C2 J 5 12 14
(I/O) C3 K (I/O) (I/O) (ADRE
7 C4 R 6 13 15
(I/O) (I/O) (I/O) (ADRE
2 7 14 16
(I/O) (I/O) (I/O) (ADRE
4 8 15 17
(I/O) (I/O) (I/O) (GND)
6 9 16 18
(I/O) (I/O) (I/O) (CONT
8 10 17 19
(I/O) (I/O) (I/O) (CONT
9 11 18 20
(I/O) (I/O) (I/O) (GND)
10 12 19 21
(I/O) (I/O) (I/O) (CONT
11 13 20 22
(I/O) (I/O) (I/O) (CONT
12 17 21 24
(I/O) (I/O) (I/O) (CONT
13 18 22 25
(GND) (GND) (GND) (GND)
15 GND GND5V 19 23 GND GND 26
(+5V) (+5V) (+5V)
16 +5V +5V 20 24 +5V

EDF22PBA02/09

04.06.2002 73
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Power supply PBA, CPU

18G01 22PBA01
G4 X5 X1/X2
+5V-29 (+5V)
1 1 +5V +5V 1
G3
GND5V-28 IO IO (+5V)
3 2 GND5V 3 EN1[BA] 2
3 EN2[AB]
GND5V (GND)
3
(DATA
1 4
CLK (DATA
RS232 connection 2 5
18PBA04 (DATA
6
X1 X4 (DATA
TXD 7
1 1 (GND)
RTS µP 8
2 2 (DATA
RXD 9
3 3 (DATA
CTS 10
4 4 (DATA
11
5 5 GND5V RAM (DATA
12
6 6 +5V (GND)
13
(ADRE
14
(ADRE
15
(ADRE
16
(ADRE
R 17
C1
(GND)
EN 18
C1
x7 (CONT
1D 19
(CONT
1D 20
A1
(GND)
S1 Buzzer 21
+5V (CONT
BAT 1 22
S2 (NINT)
2 Service switch 23
(CONT
3 24
(CONT
A3 25
(GND)
26
EDF22PBA01

04.06.2002 74
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

RS 232 connection Power supply

..18X12
18PBA04 18G01
1
X3 2201X5 G4
2 +5V-29
1 1 1 +5V
3 GND5V-28
2 2 3 GND5V
4

18Q4/18Q6 18S5 18K3

Fol1lpmrl
Japan
18X13 Circuit Breaker ON/OFF Switch only T
MAINS 3P 18X12 18X12 G1
Neutral
1 3 1
F1 5A
Line
2 4 3
Earth
2
18E1 +24V +24

18X31 18X11 G5
GN

Japan only 18T1 +24V +5V +5V

100V

115V
18X1 1801G1 10X6 10X5
Neutral GND24V GN
3 3 3 3
Line
4 1 1 1
Earth
2 2 2

1803X1
1
18V1
18S1 15S1 2

18X4 18X4 18X21 18K1 18X21 G2

+24V-29
10 7 2 1 1 +24V
GND24V-29
3 GND24V

1815X3
+24V-28
1816X1 18X8 1 2 +24V
+24V-15 GND24V-6
1 1 5 4 GND24V
GND24V-4
2 3 G3
+24V-10
1 +24V
GND24V-10
1505X6 18X4 3 GND24V
+24V-34 +24V-11
1 11 2 +24V
GND24V-11 GND24V-12
2 12 4 GND24V
ED18G01

04.06.2002 75
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, Distribution power I/O

18PBA18
18X33 X6 X1 18X37
+24V-32 +5V-1 18B16
4 1 +5V 1 1 1
GND-9 GND5V GND5V-1
5 2 2 2 3
FOLOBELTENDSE-1
1 GND24V 3 3 2
FOLOBELTEN
3 18K4
FOLOSAFRL Option
+5V-2 18B14
+5V 4 1
X8 GND5V GND5V-2
5 2
4 FOLOOUTSE-2
6 3
5 +24V FOLOOUTSE
18S9a 18S8a
FOLOBELTDOORSWFOLODOORSW X7
+24V +24V-12
X3 1
18M8
18X36 4 M FOLOPTRMO
FOLOBELTENDSE FOLOPTRMO
7 6 2
FOLOINSE +24V-13 18Y1
9 5 3
FOLOOUTSE FOLOBELTCL FOLOBELTC
8 X4 4
FOLOPTRMO OUTPSE
10 9
FOLOBELTCL INPSE OUTPSE
11 10 X5 18S9b
FOLOBELTDOORSW-1 INPSE FOLOBELTDOORSW
5 5 1 FOLOBELTDO
+5V-40 +5V GND5V-11
1 1 +5V 2
GND5V-45 GND5V
2 2 GND5V 18S8b
FOLODOORSW-1 +5V FOLODOORSW
6 6 3 FOLODOORSW
FOLOINPDIAG GND5V-12
3 3 4
FOLOOUTDIAG + +5V 18S 8/9
4 4 - INPSE GND5V DOORSW
+ OUTPSE a
- +5V
ED18PBA18
b

04.06.2002 76
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, POWER I/O

18PBA03

X1 X6
+24V-29
1 2
GND24V-7
2 GND24V 3
X7 6
+5V-31
1 +5V +24V 7 X6
GND5V-37 FOL1DOORSW GND5V-38
2 GND5V +5V 1 4 GND5V
RESERVEOUT NC FOLPTRDOORSW-2 GND5V-42
3 +5V 5 8
FOL1DOORSW-B
13 OUTPSE X5
PTRFOLDOORSW-2 +24V
14 1
FOL1FOLMOCW INPSE FOL1FOLMO-1
15 CONTROL 2
FOL1FOLMOPWM INPSE
16 X4 X4
FOL1FOLMOSE1-B FOL1FOLMOSE1 +5V-18
19 2 1 +5V
FOL1FOLMOSE2-B FOL1FOLMOSE2 GND5V-20
18 3 4
FOL1INMOSE1-B FOL1INMOSE1 GND5V-21
20 6 5
FOL1DEFCL-1
8 X2 X2
FOL1OUTDEFSO-1 INPSE FOL1DEFCL +24V-3
7 1 2 +24V
PTRFOLCDRCL-2 FOL1OUTDEFSO +24V-4
6 3 4
PTRFOLFEDCL-2 OUTPSE
5 GND24V X8 X8
PTRFOLUFOSO-2 5X PTRFOLCDRCL-1 +24V-5
4 1 2
FOL1INMOPWM PTRFOLFEDCL-1 +24V-6
17 CONTROL 3 4
FOL14QINDIAG-1 INPSE PTRFOLUFOSO-1 +24V-7
11 5 6
FOL14QOUTDIAG-1 OUTPSE
12 + +5V X3
- INPSE
+24V 1
+ OUTPSE FOL1INMO-1
- +5V 2
ED18PBA03

04.06.2002 77
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, POWER I/O

18PBA10

X6 X6 X6
+24V-13 FOL2DOORSW GND5V-31
7 +24V +5V 1 4 GND5
FOL2TRAYSW GND5V-32
X1 +5V 5 8
GND24V-7
2 GND24V X5
OUTPSE +24V-1
X7 1
+5V-36 FOL2FOLMO-1
1 +5V 2 X4
GND5V-41 +5V-24
2 GND5V X4 1 +5V
FOL2DOORSW-B-1 FOL2FOLMOSE1 GND5V-25
13 2 4
FOL2TRAYSW-B-1 FOL2FOLMOSE2 GND5V-27
14 3 5
FOL2FOLMOCW-1 INPSE FOL2INMOSE1 +5V-28
15 CONTROL 6 7
FOL2FOLMOPWM-1 INPSE
16 X2 X2
FOL2FOLMOSE1-B-1 FOL2DEFCL +24V-10
19 1 2
FOL2FOLMOSE2-B-1 FOL2OUTSO +24V-11
18 3 4
FOL2INMOSE1-B-1
20 X8 X8 +24V
FOL2DEFCL-2 FOL2FLATSO +24V-12
8 1 2
FOL2OUTSO-2 INPSE FOL2INMOCW +24V-36
7 3 4
FOL2FLATSO-2 FOLOFFOUTMO-1 +24V-19
6 5 6
FOL2INMOCW-2 OUTPSE
5 GND24V X3
FOLOFFOUTMO-3 5X +24V-17
4 +24V 1
FOL2INMOPWM-1 FOL2INMO-2
17 CONTROL 2
FOL2INPDIAG-1 INPSE OUTPSE
11
FOL2OUTDIAG-1
12 + +5V
- INPSE
+ OUTPSE
- +5V
ED18PBA10

04.06.2002 78
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, Relay Power supply

18PBA16 18G01
X1 18X8 G3
+24V-15 +24V-10
1 1 1 PBA, Reinforcement
GND24V-4 GND24V-10
2 3 3 18PBA17
X3 X7
+24V-29
1 1
GND24V-8
2 2
PBA, Distribution power I/O
18PBA18
X4 18X33 X6
+24V-16 +24V-32
1 4 1 PBA, Power I/O
GND24V-16 GND24V-5
2 5 2 18PBA10
X2 X6
+24V-13
1 7
GND24V-7
K1 2 X1
6 2
5 X3
+24V-17
1
FOL2INMO-2
2
3 X8
FOL2INMOCW
7 3
+24V-36
18X7 4
FOL2INMO-1
8 2
+24V-9 FOL2INMO
9 1
18M3
M FOL2INMO
+24V-8

ED18PBA16 18K2 FOL2SAFRL1

04.06.2002 79
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, Sensor distribution fold

18PBA21
X2 X3
2 3
FOL2RUHOMESE FOL2RUHOMESE-1
3 6
FOL2RUEMPTYSE FOL2RUEMPTYSE-1
4 9
5 12
6 14
GND5V
7 2
+5V GND5V
8 5
GND5V
1 8
11
15
1
+5V
4
+5V
7
10
13
ED18PBA21

04.06.2002 80
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, CPU PBA, I/O Interface PBA, sensor distribution fold

22PBA01 22PBA09 18PBA14
18B15
First fold delivery sen

PBA, Power I/O

18PBA10
18B12
First fold delivery sen

18M6
M
First fold delivery mo
Power supply PBA, Relay
18G01 18PBA16

18M3
M
First fold delivery mo

BDFOLDEL

04.06.2002 81
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, Distribution powe

+5V +24V GND 15PBA05
+24V
GND

18X13 Power supply PBA, CPU PBA, I/O Interface

MAINS 3P 18G01 22PBA01 22PBA02
Line
+5V +5V
Neutral +5V
GND
Earth GND
GND

PBA, Sensor distributio

18PBA07
+5V
GND
Japan only 18T1

18X13 Power supply

18G01 PBA, Power I/O
MAINS 3P
Line 18PBA03
+5V
Neutral
GND
Earth

PBA, I/O Interface

22PBA09
Folder 2
+5V
GND

OUT +24V
IN GND

EDPDSF1

04.06.2002 82
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, CPU PBA, I/O Interface PBA, POWER I/O

22PBA01 22PBA02 18PBA03
X1 X1 X2 X7
FOL1INMOSE1-B
1 1 +5V 1 20
FOL1FOLMOSE1-B
+5V 2 2 2 19
GND5V FOL1FOLMOSE2-B
3 3 GND5V 3 18
FOL1INMOPWM
4 4 7 17
FOL1FOLMOPWM
5 5 9 16
FOL1FOLMOCW
6 6 10 15
PTRFOLDOORSW-2
7 7 11 14
FOL1DOORSW-B
8 8 12 13
FOL14QOUTDIAG-1
9 9 13 12
FOL14QINDIAG-1
10 10 14 11
FOL1DEFCL-1
11 11 17 8
FOL1OUTDEFSO-1
12 12 18 7
PTRFOLCORCL-2
13 13 19 6
PTRFOLFEDCL-2
14 14 20 5
PTRFOLUFOSO-2
15 15 21 4
RESERVEOUT
16 16 22 3
GND5V GND5V-37
17 17 23 2 GND5V
+5V-31
18 18 +5V 24 1 +5V
19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22
23 23
24 24
25 25
26 26

EDCPUPTRCON

04.06.2002 83
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

Power supply 18V1

18G01 PBA, POWER I/O
18PBA03
G2 15S1 18S1
GND24V-29 18K1 PRTFOLDOORSW FOL1DOORSW X1
3 18X21 FOL1SAFRL 18X21 18X4 18X4
+24V-29 3
1 1 2 7 10
(To 18M1) 7
5 6 8 9 +5V
PBA, I/O Interface (To 18M2) X6
3 4 GND5V-38
22PBA02 4 GND5V
FOL1DOORSW-1
+5V 1
GND5V FOLPTRDOORSW-2
5
GND5V-42
8 GND5V
+5V
µP X2 X7
IO +5V-31
24 1 +5V
GND5V-37
23 2 GND5V
PTRFOLDOORSW-2
11 14
FOL1DOORSW-B
CLK 12 13
PBA, Sensor distribution fold
18PBA07 15S2
FOL1INTDOORSW
X3 X2 X3
FOL1INTDOORSW_1 FOL1INTDOORSW
6 3 6
GND5V GND5V-35 GND5V-24
2 7 5

EDFOL1DOORSW

04.06.2002 84
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, I/O INTERFACE PBA, POWER I/O Power supply

22PBA02 18PBA03 18G01
X6 X1 G2
+24V-29
2 1 1
GND24V-29
3 GND24V 2 3
6 X2
INPSE FOL1DEFCL
7 +24V 1 18Y1
OUTPSE +24V-3
+24V 2 FOL1DEF
X2 X7
18K1 FOL1SAFRL
17 8 X5 18X21 18X21 18X2
GND24V +24V-25
24 1 +5V 1 3 4 1
OUTPSE 18M2
23 2 GND5V M FOL1FO
FOL1FOLMO-1 FOL1FOLMO
10 15 CONTROL 2 2
INPSE
9 16 X4
INPSE 18PBA05
FOL1FOLMOSE1
2 19 2 3 FOL1FOLM
FOL1FOLMOSE2
3 18 3 2
+5V-18
14 11 +5V +5V 1 4
-
+
INPSE GND5V-20
13 12 GND5V 4 1
+ OUTPSE
- +5V

PBA, SENSOR DISTRIBUTION FOLD

18PBA07
X3 X2 X1 18B1
+5V-17 FOL1STAR
1 8 +5V +5V 1 1
GND5V-17
2 7 GND5V GND5V 2 2
FOL1STARTSE
8 1 3 3
3 6 X3 18B4
+5V-30 FOL1DEPO
+5V 13 1
FOL1DEPOSE
14 2
GND5V-29
GND5V 15 3
EDFOLFIRST

04.06.2002 85
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, I/O INTERFACE PBA, POWER I/O Power supply

22PBA02 18PBA03 18G01
X6 X1 G2
+24V-29
2 1 1
GND24V-29
3 GND24V 2 3
6 INPSE X2
OUTPSE FOL1OUTDEFSO
7 +24V 3 18Y2
+24V-3 FOL1OUTDEF
X2 X7 +24V 4
18K1 FOL1SAFRL
18 7 GND24V X3 18X21 18X21 18X3
+24V-23
24 1 +5V OUTPSE 1 5 6 1 18M1
23 2 GND5V M FOL1INM
CONTROL FOL1INMO-1 FOL1INMO
7 17 2 2
INPSE
X4 18B5
FOL1INMOSE1 FOL1INMO
1 20 6 2
+5V-22
14 11 +5V +5V 7 1
-
+
INPSE GND5V-21
13 12 GND5V 5 3
+ OUTPSE
- +5V

PBA, SENSOR DISTRIBUTION FOLD

18PBA07
X3 X2 X3 18X40 18B3
+5V-19 +5V-24 FOL1OUTS
1 8 +5V +5V 1 1 1
GND5V-19 GND5V-23
2 7 GND5V GND5V 2 2 2
FOL1OUTSE FOL1OUTSF
7 2 3 3 3

EDFOL1OUT

04.06.2002 86
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, Power I/O PBA, RELAY Power supply

18PBA10 18PBA16 18G01
X6 X2 X1 X8 G3
+24V-13 +24V-15 +24V-10
+24V 7 1 +24V 1 1 1
GND24V-7 GND24V-4 GND24V-10
X1 2 GND24V 2 3 3
GND24V 2

X8 18X30 PBA, I/O Interfa

+24V-19 +24V-18
+24V 6 2
18M6
22PBA09
M FOLOFFOUTMO
OUTPSE FOLOFFOUTMO-1 FOLOFFOUTMO
5 1
INPSE X7 18X1 X2
FOLOFFOUTMO-3 FOLOFFOUTMO-2
4 3 21

+5V +
18X23
INPSE - FOL2INPDIAG-1 FOL2INPDIAG
11 2 14
OUTPSE FOL2OUTDIAG-1 FOL2OUTDIAG
+ 12 3 13
+5V -

PBA, DISTRIBUTION FOLD

18PBA14
X2 18X5 X3
FOLOFFOUTSE-2 FOLOFFOUTSE-3
3 5 4
+5V-27 +5V-25
+5V 8 8 1
GND5V-24 GND5V-30
GND5V 7 7 2
X3 18X12 18B15
+5V-35 +5V-15 FOLOFFOUTSE
+5V 4 1 1
GND5V-35 GND5V-7
GND5V 5 2 2
FOLOFFOUTSE-1 FOLOFFOUTSE
6 3 3

EDFOLOFFOUTMO

04.06.2002 87
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, Relay Power supply

18PBA16 18G01
X2 K1 X1 X8 G3
+24V-13 +24V-15 +24V-10
1 +24V +24V 1 1 1
GND24V-7 GND24V-4 GND24V-10
2 GND24V GND24V 2 3 3
18K2
5 FOL2SAFRL1
6 X2 18X7
+24V-9 +24V-8
3 9 1
18M3
7 M FOL2INMO
FOL2INMO-1 FOL2INMO
8 2

PBA, Power I/O

18PBA10
X8 X4 18B12
+24V-36 GND5V-27 FOL2INMOS
4 +24V GND5V 5 3
FOL2INMOCW FOL2INMOSE1
3 6 2
OUTPSE INPSE +5V-28
X3 +5V 7 1
+24V-17
1 +24V
GND24V PBA, I/O Inte
FOL2INMO-2
2 22PBA09
OUTPSE
X1 X7 18X23 X2
FOL2INMOSE1-B-1 FOL2INMOSE1-B
2 GND24V 20 11 1
FOL2INMOCW-2 FOL2INMOPWM
X6 5 8 7
INPSE FOL2INMOPWM-1 FOL2INPDIAG
7 +24V CONTROL 17 2 14
FOL2INPDIAG-1 FOL2OUTDIAG
11 3 13
+5V + FOL2OUTDIAG-1
INPSE - 12 18X1
OUTPSE +5V-36 FOL2INMOCW-1
+ +5V 1 4 20
+5V - GND5V-41 +5V-24
GND5V 2 1 24
GND5V-23
2 23

EDFOL2INMO

04.06.2002 88
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, CPU PBA, I/O Interface PBA, Power I/O PBA, sensor distribution fold
22PBA01 22PBA09 18PBA10 18PBA14
18B17 / 18B18
RU Home/ Empty s

PBA, Reinforcement
18PBA17

18M7
M
PBA, Relay FOL2RUMO
18PBA16

18PBA 19/20
PBA, IR-TX/RX

18Y 6/7/8/10
Power supply
18G01 Solenoid

18S 7/10/11
RU doorswitches

18S12
RU jamswitch

18G01 Power supply

BDRU

04.06.2002 89
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, Reinforcement
18PBA17
X1 EN
&
15 +5V R X6
C1 OUTPSE RUMO
14 GND5V 4
DATA0
1 1D 3
DATA1 INPSE STAMP
2 6
DATA2 INPSE
3 5
DATA3 INPSE OUTPSE MTRSO
4 8
DATA4 INPSE n.c.
5 7
DATA5 INPSE STOPS
6 2
DATA6 INPSE n.c.
7 Driver 2,3,4,6 1
DATA7 INPSE n.c. GUIDS
8 12
SELECT0 INPSE
9 +24V 11
INPSE 0
SELECT1
10 0/7 X4
SELECT2 INPSE
11 2 GND5V 19
SELECT3 INPSE EN &
12 & 17
INPDIAG INPSE
13 X4 13
STARTSE
1 11
HOMESE
X7 2 9
EMPSE
2 GND24V 3 7
JAMSW
1 6 4
DOORSW1
X5 8 +5V 20
DOORSW2
3 10 18
DOORSW3
1 +24V 12 5

+5V
-
OUTPSE
+
INPSE +
+5V -

ED18PBA17

04.06.2002 90
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, I/O Interface PBA, Reinforcement

22PBA09 18PBA17
X5 18X19 18X25
+5V
+5V 20 15 6 X1
GND5V
GND5V 19 13 5 15 +5V

18X24 14 GND5V
FOLODATA0
1 1 1 1
FOLODATA1 INPSE
2 2 2 2
FOLODATA2 INPSE
IO 3 3 3 3
FOLODATA3 INPSE
µP 4 4 4 4
FOLODATA4 INPSE
5 5 5 5
FOLODATA5 INPSE
6 6 6 6
FOLODATA6 INPSE
7 7 7 7
CLK FOLODATA7 INPSE
8 8 8 8
FOLOCTRL0 INPSE
9 9 9 9
INPSE
18X25 10
FOLOCTRL1 INPSE EN
10 10 1 11
FOLOCTRL2 INPSE
11 11 2 12
FOLOCTRL3 INPSE
12 12 3 13
FOL2RUINPDIAG
13 14 4

18S7b 18S10b 18S11b

FOLORUDOORSW FOL2RUINTDOORSW FOL2RUCOVERSW
X5
+24V-IN
3 +24V
PBA , Relay
+24V
18PBA16 1
X3 X7
+24V-29
1 1 +5V
-
+
GND24V-8 INPSE
2 2 GND24V

EDRUCON

04.06.2002 91
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, I/O Interface PBA, Reinforcement

22PBA09 18PBA17
X5 18X19 18X25 X1
+5V
20 15 6 15 +5V
GND5V
19 13 5 14 GND5V
FOLOCTRL3
12 12 3 12
FOLOCTRL2
11 11 2 11
FOLOCTRL1
10 10 1 10 X6 18X28
+24V
9 9 18X24 +24V 3 1
18M7
FOLOCTRL0
1 1 9 9 M FOL2RU
FOLODATA0 FOL2RUMO
1 1 4 2
PBA , Relay
18PBA16 18S7b 18S10b 18S11b
FOLORUDOORSW FOL2RUINTDOORSW FOL2RUCOVER
X3 X7 X5
+24V-29 +24V
1 1 1
GND24V-8
2 2 GND24V
+24V-IN
+24V 3

EDRUMO

04.06.2002 92
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, Rinforcement
18PBA17
X1 X6 18X28
+24V
18X19 18X25 14 GND5V +24V 3 1
+5V 18M7
+5V
15 6 15 +5V GND5V M FOL2RUM
GND5V FOL2RUMO
13 5 1 4 2
FOLOCTRL3
12 3 12
FOLOCTRL2 X1 PBA, IR-TX/R
11 2 11
FOLOCTRL1 1 18PBA20
10 1 10
X4 3
18X24 +5V
FOLODATA0 18
1 1 GND5V
FOLOCTRL0 17 X1
9 9 9 +5V
FOLODATA5 20 1
6 6 6 GND5V PBA, IR-TX/R
FOLODATA3 19 3
4 4 4 FOL2RUSTARTSE 18PBA19
1 2
X6 18X29
FOL2RUSTOPSO
2 1 18Y6
+24V FOL2RUST
1 2
18X28
FOL2RUTAPESO
8 8 18Y8
+24V FOL2RUTA
7 7
PBA , Relay
18PBA16 18S7b 18S10b 18S11b
FOLORUDOORSW FOL2RUINTDOORSW FOL2RUCOVERS
X3 X7 X5
+24V-29 +24V
1 1 1
GND24V-8 +24V-IN
2 2 GND24V +24V 3

EDRUIN

04.06.2002 93
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, Sensor distribution fold

18PBA21
X3 18B17
+5V FOL2RUH
+5V 1 1
GND5V
GND5V 2 2
FOL2RUHOMESE-1
6 3
PBA, Reinforcement
18PBA17
X2 18X26 X4 +24V X6 18X28
FOL2RUHOMESE-2 +24V
3 2 2 5 4 18Y7
GND5V FOL2RUSTAMPSO FOL2RUSTAM
GND5V 7 4 4 GND5V 6 5
+5V +24V
+5V 8 5 5 +5V 11 3 18Y10
FOL2RUGUIDSO FOL2RUGUID
12 6
18X19 18X24 X1
FOLODATA1
2 2 2
FOLODATA5
6 6 6
FOLOCTRL0
9 9 9
18X25
FOLOCTRL3
12 3 12
FOLOCTRL2
11 2 11
FOLOCTRL1
10 1 10
+5V
15 6 15 +5V
GND5V
13 5 14 GND5V
PBA , Relay 18S7b 18S10b
FOLORUDOORSW FOL2RUINTDOO
18PBA16 X5
+24V
X3 X7 1
+24V-29 18S11b
1 1 FOL2RUCOVERSW
GND24V-8 +24V-IN
2 2 GND24V +24V 3

EDRUST

04.06.2002 94
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA , Relay PBA, Reinforcement

18PBA16 18PBA17 18S7b 18S10b 18S11b
FOLORUDOORSW FOL2RUINTDOORSW FOL2RUCOV
X3 X7 X5
+24V-29 +24V
1 1 1
GND24V-8 +24V-IN
2 2 GND24V +24V 3
X1 GND5V
18X19 18X25 14 +5V X4 18S7a
+5V FOL2RUDOORSW1 FOLORUDOORSW
13 5 15 8
GND5V GND5V
15 6 12 9 18S10b
FOLOCTRL3 FOL2RUDOORSW2 FOL2RUINTDOOR
12 3 11 10
FOLOCTRL2 GND5V
11 2 10 11
18S11b
FOLOCTRL1 FOL2RUDOORSW3 FOL2RUCOVERSW
10 1 12
GND5V
18X24 9 13 18X26
FOLOCTRL0 GND5V
9 9 5 4 4
FOLODATA4 +5V
5 5 6 5 5
FOLODATA5 FOL2RUJAMSW
6 6 7 6 6
FOLODATA6 GND5V
7 7 4 7 7
FOLODATA3 FOL2RUEMPTYSE-2
4 4 3 3 3
FOLODATA2
3 3
18X26 18S12
6 FOL2RUJAMSW

7
5 PBA, Sensor distribution fold
18PBA21 18B18
4 FOL2RUEMPTYSE
X2 X3
3 +5V
8 +5V 7 1
GND5V
7 GND5V 8 2
FOL2RUEMPTYSE-1
4 9 3
EDRUJAM

04.06.2002 95
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, CPU PBA, I/O Interface PBA, sensor distribution fold

22PBA01 22PBA09 18PBA14
18B 1/ 4/ 6/ 9/ 10
Folder 2 sensors

18B15
First fold delivery s

PBA, Power I/O

18PBA10
18B12
First fold delivery s
18S2 / 18S3
Folder 2 doorswitch
18PBA12
Folder 2 sensor
Power supply PBA, Relay
18G01 18PBA16 18M4 / 18M6
M Folder 2 motor/
First fold delivery m

18Y3 / 18Y4 / 18Y

Relays / solenoids

18M3
M
PBA, Distribution power I/O First fold delivery m
18PBA18
18B16 / 18B14
Belt unit sensors
18Y11

Solenoid

18M8
M
Belt unit motor

18G01 Power supply 18S8 / 18S9

Belt unit doorswitch
BDFOL2

04.06.2002 96
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, Relay
18PBA16

+5V +24V GND

+24V PBA, Distrib. power I
GND 18PBA18
+24V
18X13 Power supply PBA, CPU PBA, I/O Interface
GND
MAINS 3P 18G01 22PBA01 22PBA09
Line
+5V +5V
Neutral +5V
GND
Earth GND
GND

PBA, Sensor distribution fold

18PBA14
+5V

Japan only 18T1 GND

18X13 Power supply

MAINS 3P 18G01 PBA, Power I/O
Line
18PBA10
Neutral +5V GND
Earth GND +24V

PBA, I/O Interface

22PBA02
Folder 1
+5V
GND
OUT
IN

EDPDSF2

04.06.2002 97
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, I/O Interface PBA, POWER I/O

22PBA09 18PBA10
X2 18X1 X7
+5V-24 +5V-36
+5V 24 1 1 +5V OUTPSE
GND5V-23 GND5V-41
GND5V 23 2 2 GND5V
FOL2FLATSO-1 FOL2FLATSO-2 3x
IO 19 5 6
FOL2OUTSO-1 FOL2OUTSO-2
18 6 7
18X23 -
+5V
FOL2DEFCL-1 FOL2DEFCL-2 +
17 1 8 INPSE
FOL2INPDIAG FOL2INPDIAG-1
14 2 11
FOL2OUTDIAG FOL2OUTDIAG-1 + OUTPSE
& 13 3 12 - +5V
CLK FOL2FOLMOCW FOL2FOLMOCW-1 INPSE
10 6 15 CONTROL
FOL2FOLMOPWM FOL2FOLMOPWM-1 INPSE
9 7 16
FOL2INMOPWM FOL2INMOPWM-1 INPSE
7 8 17 CONTROL
µP FOL2FOLMOSE2-B FOL2FOLMOSE2-B-1
3 9 18
FOL2FOLMOSE1-B FOL2FOLMOSE1-B-1
2 10 19
FOL2INMOSE1-B FOL2INMOSE1-B-1
1 11 20

+5V PBA, Sensor distribution fold

18PBA14
S
C1
R
X3 18X5 X2
FOL2STARTSE-3 FOL2STARTSE-2
8 1 4
FOL2OUTSE1-2 FOL2OUTSE1-1
7 2 2
FOL2DEPOSE-2 FOL2DEPOSE-1
3 6 6
GND5V-30 GND5V-24
GND5V 2 7 7 GND5V
+5V-25 +5V-27
+5V 1 8 8 +5V

EDFOL2CON

04.06.2002 98
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, Relay
18S2
18PBA16 FOL2DOORSW
18X21 Optional
X1 18X8
1 Belt unit
GND24V-4
2 3 18V2
+24V-15 18G01 3
1 1
18S3 18X33
4 18K2 FOL2TRAYSW
X2 18X27 FOL2SAFRL 18X27 1
18S9 18S8
GND24V-7
2 2 1 3
+24V-13
1 (To 18M3) 5
4 18K4
X4 (To 18M4) FOLOSAFRL
GND24V-16
2
+24V-16
1
PBA, POWER I/O
18PBA10
+5V
PBA, I/O Interface X6
GND5V-32
22PBA09 8 GND5V
FOL2TRAYSW
+5V 5
GND5V FOL2DOORSW
1
GND5V-31
4 GND5V
18X1 +5V
+5V-24 +5V-36
X2 1 X7
µP IO GND5V-23 GND5V-41
24 2 1 +5V
23 18X23 2 GND5V
FOL2TRAYSW-B FOL2TRAYSW-B-1
11 5 14
FOL2DOORSW-B FOL2DOORSW-B-1
CLK 12 4 13

EDFOL2DOORSW

04.06.2002 99
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, Relay PBA, POWER I/O

18PBA16 18PBA10
X2 X1 X8
GND24V-29 FOL2FLATSO
2 2 GND24V 1 18Y5
+24V-29 OUTPSE +24V-12
1 +24V 2 FOL2FLATSO
X6
7 +24V X2
GND24V
FOL2DEFCL
18X1 X7 1 18Y3
+5V-36 OUTPSE +24V-10
1 1 +5V +24V 2 FOL2DEFCL
GND5V-41 18K2 FOL2SAFRL1
2 2 GND5V X5 18X6
FOL2FLATSO-2 GND24V +24V-1 +24V-2 +24V-20
5 6 1 1 18M4
INPSE OUTPSE
18X23 M FOL2FO
FOL2DEFCL-2 INPSE FOL2FOLMO-1 FOL2FOLMO
1 8 CONTROL 2 2
FOL2FOLMOCW-1 INPSE
6 15 X4
INPSE 18PBA12
FOL2FOLMOPWM-1 FOL2FOLMOSE1
7 16 2 3 FOL2FOLM
FOL2FOLMOSE1-B-1 FOL2FOLMOSE2
10 19 3 2
FOL2FOLMOSE2-B-1 +5V-26
9 18 +5V +5V 1 4
-
+
FOL2INPDIAG-1 INPSE GND5V-25
2 11 GND5V 4 1
FOL2OUTDIAG-1
3 12 + OUTPSE
- +5V

PBA, SENSOR DISTRIBUTION FOLD

18PBA14
18X5 X2 X3 18X10 18B9
+5V-27 +5V-19 +5V-34 FOL2STAR
8 8 +5V 7 1 1
GND5V-24 GND5V-19 GND5V-34
7 7 GND5V 8 2 2
FOL2STARTSE-2 FOL2STARTSE-1 FOL2STARTSE
1 4 9 3 3
FOL2DEPOSE-1
6 6
18B11
+5V-20 FOL2DEPO
+5V 13 1
FOL2DEPOSE
14 2
GND5V-15
GND5V 15 3
EDFOLSEC

04.06.2002 100
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, DISTRIBUTION FOLD

18PBA14
X3 18X9 18B10
+5V-32 +5V-21 FOL2TRAIS
+5V 10 1 1
GND5V-36 GND5V-14
GND5V 11 2 2
FOL2TRAISE2-1 FOL2TRAISE2
12 3 3

PBA, I/O Interface

22PBA09

X2 18X5 X3
FOL2TRAISE2-2 FOL2TRAISE2-3
5 3 6
+5V-27 +5V-25
+5V 8 8 1 +5V
GND5V-24 GND5V-30 µP
GND5V 7 7 2 GND5V IO

CLK
EDFOL2TRAIL

04.06.2002 101
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, Relay Power supply

18PBA16 18G01
X2 K1 X1 18X8 G3
+24V-13 +24V-15 +24V-10
1 +24V +24V 1 1 1
GND24V-7 GND24V-4 GND24V-10
2 GND24V GND24V 2 3 3
5 18K2
X2 18X7
+24V-9 +24V-8
6 9 1
18M3
M FOL2IN
FOL2INMO-1 FOL2INMO
8 2

PBA, POWER I/O

18PBA10
X3 X4 18B12
+24V-17 FOL2INMOSE1 FOL2IN
1 +24V 6 2
FOL2INMO-2 +5V-28
2 +5V 7 1
GND5V-27
X1 OUTPSE GND5V 5 3
2 GND24V INPSE X2
OUTPSE FOL2OUTSO
X6 3 18Y4
+24V-11 FOL2OU
7 +24V +24V 4
INPSE
18X23 X7
FOL2INMOPWM-1 CONTROL PBA, Sensor distribution fold
8 17
FOL2INMOSE1-B-1 18PBA14
11 20
FOL2INPDIAG-1
+5V
X2 18X5
2 11
-
+ GND5V-24
FOL2OUTDIAG-1 INPSE GND5V 7 7
3 12 +5V-27
+5V 8 8
FOL2OUTSE1-1
+ OUTPSE 2 2
18X1 - +5V
+5V-36
+5V
X3 18B7
1 1 +5V-28
GND5V-41 1 1 FOL2O
2 2 GND5V GND5V-27
FOL2OUTSO-2 +5V 2 2
6 7 FOL2OUTSE1
GND5V 3 3
EDFOL2OUT

04.06.2002 102
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, CPU PBA, I/O Interface

22PBA01 22PBA09
X2 X1
1 1 +5V
+5V 2 2 PBA, Distribution pow
18PBA
GND5V 3 3 GND5V
X3
4 4
X4 18X34 18X36 6
5 5 FOLOINSE FOLOINSE
7 9 9 5
6 6 FOLOOUTSE-2 FOLOOUTSE
8 8 8 4
7 7 FOLOBELTENDSE FOLOBELTENDSE
9 7 7 X4
8 8 FOLOBELTDOORSW-2 FOLOBELTDOORSW-1
11 5 5 5
9 9 FOLODOORSW-2 FOLODOORSW-1
10 6 6 6
10 10 FOLOINPDIAG-1 FOLOINPDIAG
13 3 3 3
11 11 FOLOOUTDIAG-1 FOLOOUTDIAG
12 4 4 4
12 12 +5V-45 +5V-40
+5V 16 1 1 1
13 13 GND5V-51 GND5V-45
GND5V 15 2 2 2
14 14 FOLOPTRMO
X2 10 10 9
15 15 FOLOPTRMO-2 FOLOBELTCL
4 11 11 10
16 16 FOLOBELTCL-2
5
17 17
18 18
19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22
23 23
24 24
25 25
26 26

EDCPUBUCON

04.06.2002 103
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, Relay PBA, Distribution power I/O

18PBA16 18PBA18
X4 18X33 X6
+24V-16 +24V-32
1 4 1
GND24V-16 GND-9
2 5 2
18S3
3 18V1 GND24V
1
18X27 18K2 18S9 18S8
18K4 FOLOBELTDOORSWFOLODOORSW
X2 1 FOLOSAFRL
+24V-13
1 2

18S2 18X21 X8
3 4
GND24V-7
2 1 5 +24V

X5 +5V
PBA, I/O Interface GND5V-11
4 GND5V
22PBA09 FOLODOORSW
3
+5V
GND5V +5V
FOLOBELTDOORSW
1
GND5V-11
2 GND5V

µP X4 18X34 18X36 X4
IO FOLOBELTDOORSW-2 FOLOBELTDOORSW-1
11 5 5 5
+5V-45 +5V-40
16 1 1 1 +5V
GND5V-51 GND5V-45
15 2 2 2 GND5V
FOLODOORSW-2 FOLODOORSW-1
CLK 10 6 6 6

EDBELTDOORSW

04.06.2002 104
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Electrical Diagram

PBA, Relay PBA, Distribution power I/O

18PBA16 18PBA18
X6 18X33 X6 X1 18X37
+24V-16 +24V-32 +5V-1 18B16
1 4 1 +5V 1 1 1
GND24V-16 GND24V-9 GND5V GND5V-1
2 5 2 2 2 3
18K4 FOLOBELTENDSE-1
3 3 2
FOLOBELTEN
X8
+5V-2 18B14
4 +5V 4 1
GND5V GND5V-2
5 +24V 5 2
FOLOOUTSE-2
X3 6 3
FOLOOUTSE
18X34 18X36 4 X7
FOLOBELTENDSE +24V +24V-12
7 7 1
18M8
FOLOOUTSE
8 8 5 OUTPSE M FOLOPTRMO
FOLOPTRMO
X4 2
FOLOPTRMO +24V-13 18Y1
10 10 9 3
FOLOBELTCL INPSE FOLOBELTCL
11 11 10 4 FOLOBELTC
GND5V-45 INPSE
2 2 2 OUTPSE PBA, I/O Interfa
+5V-40 22PBA09
1 1 1 +5V
FOLOINPDIAG + +5V X2
3 3 3 - INPSE
FOLOOUTDIAG 18X34 4
4 4 4 + OUTPSE FOLOPTRMO-2
- +5V 10 5
FOLOBELTCL-2
11 X4
+5V-45
1 16
GND5V-451
2 15
FOLOINPDIAG-1
3 13
FOLOOUTDIAG-1
4 12
FOLOBELTENDSE
7 9
FOLOOUTSE-2
8 8
EDFOL2DEL

04.06.2002 105
 Disassembly procedure NGC G1
Caution:
Check for precautionary measures.

Notes regarding the procedures

Recommended Tools

The following procedures are defined:

Link Procedure

Side Cover Removal

Eject-, Power, and Reset-Button Removal

Control Panel Removal

Disk Drives Removal
System Power-Supply Removal
Expansion-Card Cage Removal
Expansion-Card Removal
Riser Board Removal
DIMM Removal and Installation
Front Panel Removal
Microprocessor Removal
System Battery Removal
System Board Removal
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

SCSI issues
This document is intended to give an overview of possible SCSI configurations and settings needed.

Number of SCSI disks needed for guaranteed system performance

Number of SCSI controllers

Disk Type SCSI disks Adaptec Adaptec AHA-2940U2 Adaptec AHA-29160N
AHA-2940UW
1 Quantum Viking II 2 2 2
2 Seagate Cheetah 2 2 2
ST39103LW
3 Quantum Atlas 10K2 2 1 (GX100) 2 (G1) 1 (GX100) 2 (G1)
4 Fujitsu MAJ3091MP 2 1 (GX100) 2 (G1) 1 (GX100) 2 (G1)

Systems with 2 SCSI disks can run temporarily on 1 disk (with the failing SCSI disk disconnected), however,
performance during heavy setmemory usage is not guaranteed.

Mixed types/brands of SCSI disks

In systems with mixed SCSI disks, performance is determined by the disk with the lowest disk number.

Needed settings for the different SCSI controllers

SCSI controllers
SCSI Bios Settings Adaptec AHA-2940UW Adaptec AHA-2940U2W Adaptec AHA-29160N
Send Start Unit Command Y Y Y
Enable Write Back Cache Not present Not present Y

Adjust bios settings conform the TSM: HTSM/Function/20 Interface/Disk Drives/Dis-/assemby/

l SCSI card Bios settings Adaptec AHA-2940 ,
l SCSI card Bios settings Adaptec AHA-29160N .

Adjust jumper settings conform the TSM: HTSM/Function/20 Interface/Disk Drives/Dis-/assembly/

l Quantum Viking II
l Seagate Cheetah ST39103LW
l Quantum Atlas 10K2
l Fujitsu MAJ3091MP

Drivers for different SCSI controllers in NGC/PLC software

SCSI controllers
Drivers included in Adaptec AHA-2940UW Adaptec AHA-2940U2W Adaptec AHA-29160N
Release 2.0 Y N* N **
Release 2.1 Y Y N **
Release 2.2 Y Y N **
Version 3.0 Y Y Y

* Use driver as supplied on the Installation CD-ROM R2.1, R.2.2 or V 3.0

** Use driver as supplied on the Installation CD V 3.0 or
with the TSM: HTSM/Function/20 Interface/Disk Drives/dis-/assembly/SCSI card driver Adaptec
AHA-29160N

Software tool to be run after exchange of SCSI disk or setmemory problems

After a setmemory disk replacement or during other setmemory problems, the registration on the hard disk may
be corrupt.
Re-initialisation may solve set memory problems. The software tool to do this, is already present on the
controller.

Re-initialise the set memory conform the description: HTSM/Function/20 Interface/Disk

Drives/Dis-/assembly/How to re-initialize the setmemory disks

04.06.2002 2
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

04.06.2002 3
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Control Panel NGC G1

1. Remove the hard-disk drive bracket.
2. Disconnect the control panel cable from the PANEL connector on the system board.
3. Unscrew the mounting screw securing the control panel to the chassis.
4. Slide the control panel out of the hooks securing it to the chassis.

Note:
Note the routing of the control panel cable as you remove it from the chassis.

04.06.2002 4
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

DIMM Removal / DIMM Installation NGC G1

DIMM Removal

1. Push outward on the SIMM socket's securing clips until the SIMM is released from its socket. It should pop forward slightly.
2. Lift the SIMM away from the socket.

DIMM Installation

To (re)place a DIMM, press the DIMM fully into the socket at an angle. Pivot the DIMM upward until the securing clips lock the SIMM
socket.

04.06.2002 5
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Disk Drives NGC G1

Overview
Refer to this figure when performing any of the next actions.

3.5-Inch Diskette-Drive Removal

1. Disconnect the DC power cable and the interface cable from the back of the 3.5-inch diskette drive.

04.06.2002 6
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

2. Press the retaining-tab release button and pull the drive assembly forward to remove it.
3. Remove the drive-mounting screw. from the left side of the drive and remove the drive from the bracket.

When you replace the 3.5-inch diskette drive, be sure the two hooks on the right side of the bracket engage the mounting
holes in the side of the 3.5-inch diskette drive.

Hard-disk Drive Bracket

Hard-Disk Drive Removal

04.06.2002 7
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

1. Remove the hard-disk drive bracket.

2. Remove the four screws that attach the hard-disk drive to the hard-disk drive bracket.
l One hard-disk drive attaches to the hard-disk drive bracket at the sides of the drive. The other hard-disk
drive attaches to the hard-disk drive bracket at
l he bottom of the hard-disk drive.
3. Slide the drive out of the hard-disk drive bracket.

04.06.2002 8
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Eject-, Power, and Reset-Button NGC G1

1. Lay the computer cover upside down on a flat work surface, with the back of the cover facing up.
2. To remove the 3.5-inch diskette-drive eject button, pull gently on the plastic part of the button until it comes free.
3. To remove the power buttonor the reset button, use a small screwdriver to push in the two or three plastic clips that secure the
buttons to the computer cover.
When these clips are released, the button comes free from the panel.

04.06.2002 9
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Expansion Cage Riser Board NGC G1

The controller has a removable expansion-card cage. The cage contains the Riser board and any installed expansion cards.
It is recommanded to remove the cage first before removing or installing expansion cards.

1. Remove the expansion-card cage and all expansion cards.

2. Place the expansion-card cage on a flat work surface with the riser board facing up.
3. Remove the two riser-board mounting screws.
4. Slide the riser board away from the release handle until it stops; then lift the riser board away from the expansion-card carge.

04.06.2002 10
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Expansion-Card Cage NGC G1

1. Rotate the lever toward the back of the computer until it stops in the upright position.
2. Slide the expansion-card cage out of the computer.

To replace the expansion-card cage, align the tabs on the left and the right sides of the expansion-card cage
l with the slots on the back and bottom of the chassis.
l With the securing lever in its extended position, slide the expansion-card cage into place.

04.06.2002 11
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Expansion-Card NGC G1
The controller has a removable expansion-card cage. The cage contains the Riser board and any installed expansion cards.
It is recommanded to remove the cage first before removing or installing expansion cards.

1. Disconnect any cables from the expansion card being removed.

2. Remove the expansion-card cage.
3. Remove the retaining screw from the card-mounting bracket.
4. Grasp the expansion card by its corners, and carefully remove it from the expansion-card connector.

04.06.2002 12
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Front panel NGC G1

1. Press the tab release marked with the icon.

2. Tilt the front panel away from the chassis.
3. Disengage the two retaining hooks at the bottom of the panel,
and pull the panel away from the chassis.
4.

04.06.2002 13
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Jumpersettings Disk Drive IDE Maxtor 30768H1 (7,5 GB)

Only jumper J48 to be installed

04.06.2002 14
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Jumpersettings Disk Drive IDE Maxtor 51536H2 (15 GB)

Only jumper J48 to be installed

04.06.2002 15
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Jumpersettings Disk Drive IDE Maxtor 5T020H2 (20 GB)

Only jumper J48 to be installed

04.06.2002 16
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Jumpersettings Disk Drive IDE Maxtor 90432D2

Only jumper J48 to be installed

04.06.2002 17
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Jumpersettings Disk Drive IDE Maxtor 91024D4

Only jumper J48 to be installed

04.06.2002 18
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Microprocessor NGC G1
The microprocessor (upgrade) kit is shipped with an (single-edge contact) SEC cartridge/heat sink assembly which includes the mic
microprocessor heat sink and L2-cache memory module.

WARNING: The microprocessor/heat sink assembly can get extremely hot during system operations.
Be sure the assembly has had sufficient time to cool before touching it.

1. Locate the SEC cartridge / heat sink assembly.

2. Disconnect the micrprocessor fan connector from the 3-pin connector on the system board (labeled [ 'FAN' ], located between
the [ SERIAL2 ] connector and the [ MONITOR ] connector.
3. Release the two securing clips near the base of the heat sink from the metal standoffs.
4. Locate and press inward on the SEC cartridge release latches (located directly on the top of the SEC cartridge adjecent to the
heat sink assembly) until the latches click.
5. Lift the SEC cartridge/heat sink assembly out of its guide bracket assembly/connector on the system board.

New Microprocessor and Heat Sink Assembly

When installing the SEC cartridge/heat sink assembly, carefully orient the assenbly and press firmly to mate the SEC cartridge with
Then slide the SEC cartridge release latches outwards to lock the assembly onto the metal standoffs.

04.06.2002 19
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Side Cover NGC G1

1. Remove the padlock if one is installed.
2. Press the release button until the left-cover is free to swing up.
3. Move the cover to the left.
4. Disengage the cover's hooks from the top of the chassis, and take the cover away.

Before you reinstall the cover, fold all cables out of the way so that they do not interfere with the cover or with
the proper airflow inside the computer.

04.06.2002 20
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

System Battery NGC G1

04.06.2002 21
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

System Board NGC G1

1. Disconnect all cables from their connectors at the back of the computer.
2. Remove the expansion-card cage.
3. Disconnect all cables from the system board.
4. Remove the screw that secures the system board to the bottom of the chassis.
5. Slide the system board toward the front of the chassis until it stops.
6. Carefully lift the system board out of the chassis (be sure to lift evenly and not twist the system board).

Note:
If you are replacing a system board, remove any DIMMs, video memory module, the SEC cartridge/heat sink
and the guide bracket assembly from the old system board and install them on the replacement board.
Also, set the jumpers on the new system board so they are indentical to those on the old board, unless a
microprocessor upgrade is being installed.
If the original system board has a NIC connector, ensure that the replacement board has a NIC connector to.

Assembly
When you reinstall the system board (before you slide the system board back to lock it in position), push down
near each slot to engage the grounding clip onto its corresponding tab. Push evenly on both sides of the system
board as you slide it into position (do not twist the system board).

04.06.2002 22
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

System Power-Supply NGC G1

1. Disconnect the AC power cable from the back of the system power supply.
2. Free the system power supply from the securing tab labeled [ "RELEASE -->," ] and rotate it to upwards until it locks.
3. Press the securing tab to release the system power supply.
4. Disconnect the DC power cables from the system board and the drives.
5. Facing the left side of the controller, move the front end of the system power supply toward you, and lift it up to
disengage the power supply from the slot in the chassis.
6. Lift the system power supply from the controller.

Assembly
When the system power supply is reinstalled, place the power supply detent link over the pin on the power supply
as you position the power supply in the chassis opening,

04.06.2002 23
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

How to open and close the Oc· Power Logic controller (GX150).

Before you begin

1. You must shut down the Oc· Power Logic Controller properly.
2. Unplug the power cord.

Note:
Do not open the cover if the system is on the edge of a desk or table.
Doing so may cause the system to tip over and fall.
Make sure that the system is situated so that there is at least 30 cm (12 ") of desk- or
table-top for the cover to rest on.
How to open the controller.
How to close the controller.

04.06.2002 24
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Jumpersettings Disk Drive SCSI Quantum Atlas 10K 9GB

Make sure that the SCSI card uses the "Send Unit Start Command"

and jumper the disk drive according the settings below.

After changing a setmem disk, re-initialize the disk(s)

Jumpersettings SCSI ID 5

Jumpersettings SCSI ID 6

Jumper (pin) names

04.06.2002 25
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Jumpersettings Disk Drive SCSI Quantum Viking II 4 GB

After changing a setmem disk, re-initialize the disk(s)

Jumper the disk drive according the settings below:

Jumpersettings SCSI ID 5

Jumpersettings SCSI ID 6

Jumper (pin) names

04.06.2002 26
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Jumpersettings Disk Drive SCSI Seagate Cheetah ST39103LW

9GB
Make sure that the SCSI card uses the "Send Unit Start Command"

and jumper the disk drive according the settings below.

After changing a setmem disk, re-initialize the disk(s)

Jumpersettings SCSI ID 5

Jumpersettings SCSI ID 6

Jumper (pin) names

04.06.2002 27
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

How to re-initialize the setmemory disks

After a setmemory disk replacement or during other setmemory problems, the registration on the hard
disk may be corrupted.
Re-initialization may solve set memory problems.

This initialization goes further then SDS-test "20-6-031 Clear the setmemory and spool-areas"

Description

After replacement of set memory disk or other set memory problems, perform the following
actions:

1. Login as service (press Shift key after NT boot sequence in order to get Window login
screen)
2. Activate NGC_DOWN.bat on desktop (this stops the controller applications)
3. Press YES on NGC internal error pop Up menu

4. Open a cmd window ( Start Menu->Run: cmd)

5. Type "cd c:\oce\ngc\bin"
6. Type "smm.exe -d -e"

7. Wait 3 minutes (your setmem disk(s) is/are cleaned)

8. Kill smm.exe process by typing control-C
9. Now your set memory disk(s) is clean.

10. Close the cmd window

11. Shutdown and restart the controller

04.06.2002 28
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Jumper settings Disk Drive SCSI Fujitsu MAJ3091MP Ultra 160 (

9GB).
Make sure that the SCSI card uses the "Send Unit Start Command"

and jumper the disk drive according the settings below.

After changing a setmem disk, re-initialize the disk(s)

Jumper settings SCSI ID 5

Jumper settings SCSI ID 6

Cn 2 Terminal settings

Pin # Setting item

1-2 SCSI ID 0
3-4 SCSI ID 1
5-6 SCSI ID 2
7-8 SCSI ID 3
9-10 Write protect
11-12 Remote start
13-14 Force narrow
15-16 Force single ended
17-18 N.C.
19-20 IDD reset
21-22 Remote LED
23-24 Terminate power

04.06.2002 29
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

SCSI card BIOS settings Adaptec AHA-29160N

If one or more new SCSI disk boot with the message "device not ready" instead of the SCSI logical unit ID,
the disk has to be used with the following settings:

1. SCSI disk jumper setting "Enable motor start" or "SPIN delay" has to be set. (see jumpersettings of corresponding disk drive)

2. SCSI card Bios setting needs to be adapted for that specific disk drive:
1. During the boot sequence of the controller, the text
"Adaptec AHA-29160N...." will be displayed.
Press <Ctrl><A> for SCSISelect(TM) Utility
2. Options: Configure / View Host Adapter Settings <enter>
3. Additional Options: SCSI Device Configuration <enter>
4. Send Start Unit Command: "Yes" for disk #5 and/or #6
5. Enable Write Back Cache: "Yes" for disk #5 and/or #6
6. <esc> to exit
7. Save Changes Made? Yes <enter>
8.<esc> to exit
9. Exit Utility? Yes <enter>

04.06.2002 30
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

SCSI card BIOS settings Adaptec AHA-2940

If one or more new SCSI disk boot with the message "device not ready" instead of the SCSI logical unit ID,
the disk has to be used with the following settings:

1. SCSI disk jumper setting "Enable motor start" or "SPIN delay" has to be set. (see jumpersettings of corresponding disk drive)

2. SCSI card Bios setting needs to be adapted ("Send Start Unit Command") for that specific disk drive:
1. During the boot sequence of the controller, the text
"Adaptec AHA-2940...." will be displayed.
Press <Ctrl><A> for SCSISelect(TM) Utility
2. Options: Configure / View Host Adapter Settings <enter>
3. Additional Options: SCSI Device Configuration <enter>
4. Send Start Unit Command: "Yes" for disk #5 and/or #6
5. <esc> to exit
6. Save Changes Made? Yes <enter>
7.<esc> to exit
8. Exit Utility? Yes <enter>

04.06.2002 31
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

SCSI card driver Adaptec AHA-29160N

Not all systems with a Adaptec AHA-29160N SCSI controller were shipped including the driver diskette.

With this image, the diskette can be created.

1. Insert an empty floppy in the floppy drive

2. Double-click the icon below
3. Click on "launch"
4. Click on "Unzip"

U160.exe

04.06.2002 32
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Top section of the original handling

1. Remove the left and right hand side covers from the stand (2 x 4 screws).
2. Remove the top covers from the scanner stand at the left and right side (2x2 screw).
3. Remove the butterfly at the right side.
Note: do not drop / loosen the small washer
4. Remove the turning-points at the left and right side (2x1 shoulder screw).
Note: each shoulder screw has 2 washers (1 large, 1 small)
Do not drop / loosen the small washer
5. Remove the top section, by moving it simultaneously to the front and upwards.
6. Place it always on a flat table.

04.06.2002 33
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Input table
1. Open the top section of the original handling.
2. Remove the left and right hand side cover from the stand (2x4 screw).
3. Remove the top covers from the scanner stand at the left and right side (2x2 screw)
4. Remove 2x2 screws from the input table at the left and right side.
5. Push the front side of the table downwards, and lift the rear side of the table upwards over the front frame
plate.
6. Lift the input table out of the scanner front plate.
Note:
During assembly the groove of the input table should fit over the cover plate of the sensors.

04.06.2002 34
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Passive guide flap front output

1. Remove the top section of the original handling and place it on a flat table.
2. Remove the front cover (2x2 taptites)
3. Remove 2x2 screws from the rear guide plate.
4. Remove 2x1 screw from the front guide plate with passive flap.
5. Loosen 1x frame fixing screw at the left or right side.
6. Remove the rear and front guide plate.

Rear guide plate Front guide plate Front cover

I l
Passive guide flap Frame fixing screw

04.06.2002 35
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

ORGMO [ ORiGinal MOtor ]

1. Remove the left cover from the

scanner stand (4 screw).
2. Remove the top left cover from the
scanner stand (1 screw).
3. Unhook the spring.
4. Loosen the gear belt tensioner
plate (3 screws).
5. Remove the drive belt from the Spring
motor.
6. Disconnect connector 0901X2
from the motor PBA.
7. Loosen the 3 taptites from the
motor frame plate.
8. Remove the motor frame plate
with the motor. Tensioner
plate

Motor
plate

Note: during assembling:

1. Check if both belts are correct guided around the wheels.
2. Both belts are tighted by the same tensioner plate.

04.06.2002 36
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Gauge roller
1. Remove the left and right hand side cover from the stand.
2. Remove the top covers from the scanner stand at the left and right side (2x1 screw).
3. Open the original handling.
4. Remove the top front cover ( 2x2 taptites).
5. Unhook the 2 springs of the left roller assy. (Do not drop the springs!)
6. Remove the left roller from the supports and from the ‘O’-drive belt.

Warning during next action: Support the gauge roller, to prevent dropping on the exposure glass.
7. Remove the 2 fixing plates from the plastic gauge roller support plates at the left and right side (2x2
screws).
8. Remove the gauge roller, with ‘O’- drive belt and plastic support plates.

Gauge
roller

Fixing plate

Gauge
Gauge plate block

Note:
When assembling a new Gauge roller, execute the gauge roller adjustment, from correction point 3.

04.06.2002 37
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Original sensors
1. Remove the top section of the original handling.
2. Remove the input table.
3. Move the cover plate over the sensors horizontally frontwards.
Attention for the switcharm of the microswitch at the right side.
4. Remove the sensor(s).

Note during assembling:

l The lips of the sensor cover plate must be placed under the black glass plate holder.
l Position the sensor cover plate so that the pens of the frame plate drop in the left and right side holes
of the cover plate.

04.06.2002 38
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Exposure lamp
1. Remove the 2 bottom side covers from the scanner stand (2x4 screws).
2. Push the plastic position finger aside and remove the connector from the lamp.
3. Remove the lamp.

Exposure Indentificatio
window n mark

Left side Position finger Right side

Note: during assembling:

1 The exposure window must point upwards under an angle of 45 degrees to the front of the machine.
2 The identification mark must be positioned to the right side of the machine.
3 When placing the lamp and connector, support the lamp at the other side of the machine.

04.06.2002 39
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

CCD assy
Disassembling

Assembling

04.06.2002 40
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

CCD / lens cleaning

For CCD and / or lens cleaning, following disassemblies are necessary:

1. Remove the rear cover over the CCD assy, 2 screws.

2. Loosen 14 screws from the protection plate, and remove the plate.
3. Disconnect all 3 connectors from the CCD PBA.
4. Remove the PBA, 2 screws
5. Remove the black block over the lens (2 taptites).

Cleaning is now possible, use an airbrush.

If necessary, remove the diaphragm from the lens.

Caution: Do not change the position of the lens!

04.06.2002 41
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Operator console assy

Note: Seen from the rear side of the scanner.

1. Remove the cover plate, 5 screws.

2. Disconnect 5 connectors from the (front) Console PBA 22PBA02:
2202X1, X5, X6, X7, X8.
3. Remove the console, by pulling it upwards.

LCD Display
22LCD1

Console CPU
22PBA02

Supply FL
Inverter
22G2

Keypad 1 Keypad 1
22PBA06 22PBA06

LCD Display
22LCD1

Console CPU
22PBA02
Supply FL
Inverter
22G2

04.06.2002 42
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Photoconductor (drum) removal

1. Remove the developing unit (see 05 DEV).
2. Open the print head.
3. Remove the photoconductor (drum) drive belt.
4. Remove the drive pulley from the photoconductor (drum) shaft.
5. Slide the photoconductor (drum) to the front and position it in the groove.
Note:
When you install a new photoconductor (drum), make the following adjustment:
Reset the consumable counter to '0' , SDS test 01-8-001.
Carry out SDS test 50 [ Test Print (basic) ].
Carry out SDS test 04-1-001 [ Block number with correct light intensity ].
Note:
Do not expose the photoconductor (drum) too long to the environment light.

04.06.2002 43
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Scorotron unit
1 Open the cover at the left hand side.
2 Open the cover at the right hand side (1 screw).
3 Open the fuser unit.
4 Loosen the 2 screws (1 turn) from the service cover between the process and the fusing unit..
5 Pull down and turn the service cover to the rear.

6 Remove the 2 pressure blocks with springs.

7 Disconnect the charge connector from the scorotron unit (at the right).
8 Disconnect the earth connector and post-exposure connector from the scorotron unit (at the left inside
the frame).
9 Remove the scorotron unit to the rear.

Note: When placing the protection cover in its working position, make sure that you do not bend the 2 ridges.

Remount the pressure blocks in the position as shown in the figure.

Drawing

pressure block

spring

04.06.2002 44
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Charge corona wire

1. Remove the scorotron unit from the machine and place it on a flat table.
2. Remove at the rear side the plastic cover strip.
3. Remove the old corona wire. Check that no little piece remains in the unit
4. Clean the scorotron housing with a towel moistened with water, Never use RBS or cleaner K.
5. Remove the corona wire from the carton package. Do not kink the wire.
Little sticker with arrow indicates how the wire was wind up.
6. Left side: position the O-ring over the pin and position the bead in the room.
7. Right side: position the bead in the room and hook the spring on the hook.
8. Clean the wire.
Use a Masslinn cloth and moisten it with water.
9. Dry the grid wire with a cloth.
10. Replace the plastic cover strip.

Notes:
When you install a corona wire, execute the following SDS tests:
SDS test 02-8-001, reset the consumable counter of the charge corona wire.
SDS test 50 Test Print (basic).
Adjust the parameter of SDS test 04-1-001 [ Block number with correct light intensity ].

04.06.2002 45
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

How to disassemble the printhead

1. Loosen at the rear the 2 screws from the top cover.
2. Remove at the left and right side the 2 screws from the top cover.
3. Remove the top cover.
4. Unlock and open the fuser unit.
5. Disconnect the 4 connectors from the Printhead Interface PBA and from the NTC PHD (04R1) and push the
cable bundle to the right side of the machine.

6. Remove at the right side the E-ring from the Printhead mounting bracket.
7. Remove at the left and right side the mounting brackets from the printhead.
8. Remove the print head assy carefully.
9. Place the top cover back again, to cover the photoconductor (drum) for environment light.
10. Remove the connections between the Printhead Interface PBA and the Printhead.

11. After the assembly of the new Printhead execute SDS test 04-1-001 [ Block number with correct light
intensity ].

Note: Make sure that the printhead unit and the cables do not touch the photoconductor (drum).
Attention:
The Print head is factory adjusted, the data of this adjustment (PICO) is written inside an Eprom on the Printhead
Interface PBA.
This Eprom is unique for each printhead and must always stay with the printhead. When the printhead is
changed, also the Eprom must be changed.
If the printhead is returned for crediting to Venlo, The EPROM must be returned as well. If not, no refund will be
given.

04.06.2002 46
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Fill / Replacing procedure for the developer and the toner

Fill the toner unit

1. Put a new waste bag on its position.
2. Shake 1 bottle of B5 toner well.
3. Screw the bottle into the fill opening (fill opening has the turn down position) of the toner unit
4. Turn the bottle straight up
5. When empty, turn down the bottle and remove it.
6. The message on the printer display indicates: “.........................Press on-line”. Press the on-line
button.

Remove the old developer.

1. Remove the developing unit.
2. Put the developing unit on A1 sheets.
3. Open the top lid.
4. Turn the developing unit until the developing roller points upwards. Then turn the unit to the front
until the developer drops out of the unit.
5. Turn the developer roller to empty the developing unit.
6. Remove the developer according to local regulations.
7. Remove the remaining developer with a vacuum cleaner.
8. Clean the complete unit with the vacuum cleaner.
9. Take care not to damage the cleaning magnet of the toner concentration sensor 05B1.

Adding new developer

1. Do the SDS test 05-6-002 ((PRT) Recover developer layer equalisation) for 15 sec.,
stop the test with the <Stop> button.

2. Open the fuser unit.

3. Remove the front top cover.
4. Release and open the Print head.

5. Remove the fill cap from the developing unit and put the funnel.
6. Shake one bottle of developer well.
7. Do the SDS test 23-6-001 (Drive motor), forward at normal speed.
8. Empty the bottle in the developing unit.
9. Stop the test when the bottle and funnel are empty.
10. Remove the funnel and replace the cap.

11. Close the print head.

12. Install the front top cover and fasten it with the screws.
13. Close the fuser unit.

14. Read the sensitivity value of the toner concentration sensor. The value is written on a label on the
sensor,
and on the frame plate of the developing unit on the drive side.
15. Activate the SDS test 05-1-002 (set DEVTONCONSE value) and insert the sensitivity value of the
toner concentration sensor.
If no value is indicated, enter the default value of "300".
16. Close the side covers.

17. After filling the developer unit, run the adjustment: The toner concentration sensor 05B1

04.06.2002 47
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Installing the developing unit

in line developing unit

frame fixing screw photoconductor

(drum) flange

1. Place the developing unit in line with the frame.

2. Mount at the left and right hand side the fixing screws hand-tight.
3. Make sure that at the right hand side there is no clearance between:
- the photoconductor (drum) flange and the frame
- the developing unit and the photoconductor (drum) flange
4. Tighten the screw at the right hand side.
5. Make sure that at the left hand side there is no clearance between:
- the photoconductor (drum) flange and the frame
- the developing unit and the photoconductor (drum) flange

6. Tighten the screw at the right hand side.

7. Check by hand that there is no play between the developing unit and the photoconductor (drum).
8. Connect the toner concentration sensor 05B1.
9. Mount the toner dosage unit, first push the supply tube into the developing unit.
10. Connect the connector 05X1 (toner supply motor 05M1).

11. Connect the bias connector with the developing unit.

12. Connect the clean HV connector with the developing unit.
13. Remount the inside front cover (6 screws).
14. Mount the black plastic cover at the left (3 screws).
15. Mount the waste-toner bag.

16. Place the printhead in its position.

17. Remount the top cover (6 screws).
18. Close the paper feed table.
19. Close the side cover at the right (1 screws).
20. Lift the service cover between process and fusing unit and turn it to the front (put it in the groove along the
entire width).
Note: Take care not to damage the 2 ridges.

21. Tighten the 2 screws from the service cover.

22. Close the fuser unit.
23. Close the side cover at the left.

04.06.2002 48
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

04.06.2002 49
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Removing the developing unit

1. Open the side cover at the left.
2. Remove the waste-toner bag.
3. Lift up the reverse guides strips (in newer version the are lifted automatically when fuser unit is opened).
4. Open the fuser unit.
5. Remove the black plastic cover at the left (3 screws).

6. Disconnect the toner concentration sensor 05B1.

7. Unplug the connector 05X1 (toner supply motor 05M1).
8. Remove the toner dosage unit (loosen 1 screw).
Note: Do not spill toner.
9. Disconnect at the left the bias connector from the developing unit.
10. Loosen (1 turn) at the rear side the 2 screws from the service cover between the process and fusing unit.

11. Lift the service cover and turn it to the rear, do not drop the pressure blocks with spring.
12. Open the side cover at the right (1 screw).
13. Disconnect at the right the clean HV connector from the developing unit.
14. Loosen at the rear side the 2 screws from the top cover.
15. Remove at the left and right hand side the 2 screws from the top cover.

16. Remove the top cover.

17. Release and open the printhead.
18. Open the manual paper feed table.
19. Remove the inside front cover (6 screws).
20. Remove at the left and right the fixing screws from the developing unit.

21. Slide the developing unit to the front and remove it.
Note: Keep the developing unit in a horizontal position!

Remount the pressure blocks as shown in figure.

pressure block

spring

04.06.2002 50
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Transfer / Separation unit

1. Open the right side cover (1 screw).
2. Open the paper feed table.
3. Disconnect at the right side the transfer and separation connectors.
4. Remove the transfer and separation unit over the paper feed table towards the front.

Note: Make sure that you do not damage the [ PTRINSE ] and the photoconductor (drum).

04.06.2002 51
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Transfer corona wire

1. Remove the transfer/separation unit from the machine and place it on a flat table.
2. Remove at the left and right side the plastic covers.
3. Remove the 9 paper guides (4 pointing to the front left and 5 pointing to the front right).
4. Remove the old corona wire. Check that no little piece remains in the unit
5. Clean the housing of the transfer/separation unit with a towel moistened with water (no RBS or cleaner K).
6. Remove the corona wire from the carton package. Do not kink the wire.
Little sticker with arrow indicates how the wire was wind up.
7. Left side: position the washer over the pen and position the bead in the room.
8. Right side: position the bead in the room and hook the spring on the hook.
9. Clean the wire.
Use a piece of Masslinn cloth and moisten it with water.
10. Dry the wire with a piece of Masslinn cloth.

Notes:
When you install a corona wire, execute the following SDS tests:
SDS test 06-8-001, reset the consumable counter,
SDS test 51 Test Print (advanced) and check the print quality.

04.06.2002 52
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Cleaning unit and cleaning blade

1. Remove the photoconductor (drum).

Note:
Cover the 2 holes in the air handling box, to prevent the springs from falling in.

2. Remove the 2 pressure blocks.

3. Loosen the 2 springs from the cleaning unit and take the springs out of the machine.
4. Remove the cleaning unit seals to prevent from falling out of the unit.
5. Remove the cleaning unit to the front, attention for the earth spring of the photoconductor (drum).

Cleaning blade
6. Remove the cleaning blade assy.

When you mount the cleaning unit, make sure that the ridge at the right hand side is outside the frame.
Check if the springs are not stretched.

04.06.2002 53
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Cleaning unit seals

You must bend the cleaning unit seals at 8 positions to get a situation as indicated.

04.06.2002 54
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Absorber fuser unit

1. Open the fuser unit.
2. Disconnect the connectors from the 3 fans in the absorber unit.
3. Remove at the right side the spring from the drive gear.
4. Remove at the right side the drive gear.
Note: Do not drop the washer behind the gear.
5. Close the fuser unit

6. Remove at the left side the cover with fan (2 screws).

7. Remove the shaft of the reversal guide strips by removing at the left side the fixing screws (2 tapties) of the
bracket .
8. Remove the shaft with the reversal guide strips.
9. Disconnect the connector 15X4 from the paper switch (if present).
10. Lift out the paper switch (if present).

11. Remove the rear top cover (2 screws).

12. Remove the rear upper cover (5 tapties).
13. Disconnect the connector 15B5.
14. Remove the bundles from the absorber unit.
15. Close the fuser unit.

16. Remove at the left side the position strip from the absorber unit (2 nuts).
17. Remove at the right inside the E-ring from the position pin of the absorber unit.
18. Open the absorber unit and remove it to the rear and left.

04.06.2002 55
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Fuser heater unit

Note:
When doing the first next item be careful not to damage the serial connection between engine and folder.

1. Switch off thr printer.

2. Lift the folder input guide plate between the folder and the engine and move the folder to the rear.
3. Disconnect the connector 15X4 from the paper switch (if present).
4. Lift out the paper switch (if present).
5. Remove the rear lower cover of the fuser unit (6 screws).

6. Disconnect the 6 NTC connectors 08X1, 08X2, 08X3, 08X4, 08X5 and 08X6
7. Open the left side cover.
8. Remove the waste toner bag.
9. Remove the black plastic cover (3 screws).
10. Open the right side cover 1 screw.

11. Disconnect at the right side the 4 connectors from the fuser heater elements.
12. Open the fuser unit.
13. Loosen at the right 1 screw and at the left 2 screws from the suction box in front of the heater
unit.
14. Push the suction box to the front and tighten the screws temporary.
15. Remove at the left and right side the loose inner side covers from the heater unit.

16. Remove at the left and right 1 screw from the fuser heater unit.
17. Lift out the fuser heater unit.

04.06.2002 56
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Assembly / replacement Paper roll drawer

For the disassembly of the PRD remove the rear cover and start from item 12 upwards.

Attention:
The position of the paper roll drawers must be confirm the configuration possibilities.
This means e.g. that when in a 1 roll and 1 sheet configuration a second roll drawer is placed the sheet feeder
has to be remounted one position lower!

1. Check if the rails are the correct rails for the paper drawer.
Paper roll drawer: heavier and higher (7,5 cm)
Sheet feeder: lighter and smaller (5,5 cm)
2. Remove the rear cover from the under frame (2 screws).
3. Remove the left and right side covers from the under frame (rear cover screws out, side cover screws
loosen).
4. Remove the upper blind front plate (2x 2 screws).
5. Place the rails inside the under frame.
- first move the rear lip of the rails in the rear frame slot,
- then hang the front lip of the rails inside the front frame slot.
6. Mount a screw in the middle hole of the side bracket from the rails, for positioning the roll drawer (2x 1
screw)
7. Mount the two gears against the outside right hand frame in order: small - big gear (2x 1 screw, 2x 1 bush).
8. Mount the bearings against the inside left and right side frames, just over the rails and in the first screw hole
(2x 1 screw, 2x 1 bush, see upper drawer).
9. Place the drawer on the rails. Lign out the drawer with the position screw, see point 6.
10. Mount at the left and right the drawer with 2 fixing screws on the frame.
11. Mount at the right hand rear side the hinge bracket:
- first lead the cable bundle through the frame hole.
- second place the lip inside the right hand side frame,
- then fix the bracket with 1 screw.
12. Connect the connector on the corresponding connector of the [ PBA CPU-I/O ]
X13 Upper paper roll drawer
X14 Middle paper roll drawer
X15 Lower paper roll drawer
13. Add number of drawers and serialnumber in SDS 90.1 Printer Configuration.
14. Reboot the machine.
15. Test the correct working of the new paper roll drawer by making prints (system test 50):
- check leading edge adjustment PRD
- check paper roll cutting length
- check PRD width position / Z-correction PRD
16. Test the correct working of every roll drawer and / or sheetfeeder beneath the new or replaced drawer by
making prints (system test 50):
- check leading edge adjustment PRD
- check PRD width position / Z-correction PRD
17. Mount all covers.
18. Click the operator information stickers on the top of the open drawer and the roll number's on the front of
the drawer.

04.06.2002 57
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Circular knife
1. Open the paper roll drawer.
2. Remove the front cover (4 screws).
3. Move the circular knife to the left side.
4. Remove the bracket with the pulley (2 screws).
5. Remove the O-cord from the pulley.
6. Unhook one side of the O-cord from the knife unit.
7. Take out the knife unit and unhook the other side of the O-cord from the knife unit..
8. Remove the knife unit.
9. Replace the knife.

Note: When remounting the knife unit, lift the circular knife on top of the linear knife .

04.06.2002 58
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Linear knife
1. Remove the circular knife.
2. Remove the cover above the linear knife (6 tapties).
3. Remove the linear knife.
Note: The knife can be used at 4 sides.

When remounting the cover check if the linear knife is correctly positioned against the profile.

04.06.2002 59
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Assembly / replacement Sheet Feeder

For the disassembly of the PSF remove the rear cover and the right side cover from the underframe and
start from item 12 upwards.

Attention:
The position of the sheet feeder must be confirm the configuration possibilities.
This means that the sheet feeder(s) must be mounted directly below the paper roll drawer(s).

1. Check if the rails are the correct rails for the sheet feeder.
Paper roll drawer: heavier and higher (7,5 cm)
Sheet feeder: lighter and smaller (5,5 cm)
2. Remove the rear cover from the under frame (2 screws).
3. Remove the left and right side covers from the under frame (rear cover screws out, side cover screws
loosen).
4. Remove the upper blind front plate, directly under the paper roll drawer (2x 2 screws).
5. Place the rails inside the under frame.
- first move the rear lip of the rails in the rear frame slot,
- then hang the front lip of the rails inside the front frame slot.
6. Mount a screw in the middle hole of the side bracket from the rails, for positioning the sheet feeder (2x 1
screw)
7. Mount the four gears against the outside right hand frame in order: small - big - small - big gear (4x 1 screw,
4x 1 bush).
8. Mount the bearings against the inside left and right side frames, just over the rails and in the first screw hole
(2x 1 screw, 2x 1 bush, see upper drawer).
9. Place the sheet feeder on the rails. Line out the sheet feeder with position screw, see point 6.
10. Mount at the left and right the sheet feeder with 2 fixing screws on the rail frame.
11. Mount at the right hand rear side the hinge bracket:
- first lead the cable bundle through the frame hole.
- second place the lip inside the right hand side frame,
- then fix the bracket with 1 screw.
12. Connect the connector on the corresponding connector of the PBA CPU-I/O
X16 Upper paper sheet feeder, (only one sheetfeeder is always the upper one)
X17 Middle paper sheet feeder (the second sheetfeeder is always the middle one)
X18 Lower paper sheet feeder
13. Add number of sheet feeders and serialnumber in SDS 90.1 Printer Configuration.
14. Reboot the machine.
15. Test the correct working of the new sheet feeder by making prints (system test 50):
- check leading edge adjustment PSF
- check PSF width position / Z-correction sheet feeders
16. Test the correct working of every sheetfeeder beneath the new or replaced sheetfeeder by making prints
(system test 50):
- check leading edge adjustment PSF
- check PSF width position / Z-correction sheet feeders
17. Mount all covers (If needed, an extra 100 mm blind cover is delivered with the new sheet feeder).
18. Click the operator information stickers on the top of the open feeder and the sheet feeder number on the
front of the drawer.

Position of elevator cable

cable

large ball small ball

04.06.2002 60
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

04.06.2002 61
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Drive belts photoconductor (drum) motor

04.06.2002 62
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Output guide plate

This description shows the position of the two guide plates.

A= 14 holes
B= 15 holes
c= 5 holes

04.06.2002 63
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

PTR suction fan

1. Remove the fuser heater unit.

2. Remove at the right side the clip from the main drive gear which drives the white drive gear of the suction
fan.
3. Remove at the right side the clip from the white drive gear of the suction fan.
4. Remove the white drive gear of the suction fan.
5. Remove the plain plastic bearing from the shaft.

6. Remove at the right side the fixing screw from assy of the suction fan.
7. Remove at the left side the 2 fixing screws from the assy of the suction fan.
8. Disconnect the connector 15X1.
9. Remove the suction fan assy.
Note:
Be careful not to damage the drive shaft or buffer during removal of the assy.

10. Push, during assembly, the unit strongly against the heater unit assy.

drive gear suction fan

drive belt fixing screw fuser heater

04.06.2002 64
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Separation corona wire

1. Remove the transfer/separation unit from the machine and place it
on a flat table.
2. Remove at the left and right side the plastic covers.
3. Remove the 9 paper guides (4 pointing to the front left and 5
pointing to the front right).
4. Remove the old corona wire. Check that no little piece remains in the
unit
5. Clean the housing of the transfer/separation unit with a towel
moistened with water (no RBS or cleaner K).
6. Remove the corona wire from the carton package. Do not kink the
wire.
Little sticker with arrow indicates how the wire was wind up.
7. Left side: position the washer over the pen and position the bead in
the room.
8. Right side: position the bead in the room and hook the spring on the
hook.
9. Clean the wire.
Use a piece of Masslinn cloth and moisten it with water.
10. Dry the wire with a piece of Masslinn cloth.

Notes:
When you install a corona wire, execute the following SDS tests:
SDS test 15-8-001, reset the consumable counter.
SDS test 51 Test Print (advanced) and check the ptint quality.

04.06.2002 65
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Transfer / separation unit

1. Open the right side cover (1 screw).
2. Open the paper feed table.
3. Disconnect at the right side the transfer and separation connectors.
4. Remove the transfer and separation unit over the paper feed table towards the front.

Note: Make sure that you do not damage the PTRINSE and the photoconductor (drum).

04.06.2002 66
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

CPU-IO replacement

If it is possible to make a datadump:

If no datadump is possible:

If no datadump available:

04.06.2002 67
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Firmware version, check / upgrade, download

To check the firmware version.

To upgrade the firmware.

04.06.2002 68
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Firmware version, check / upgrade, download V3.0

To check the firmware version.

To upgrade the firmware.

04.06.2002 69
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Drive motor
1. Open the right side cover (1 screw).
2. Disconnect the connectors from the HV supplies from the Bias and charge from the HV supply PBA.
3. Disconnect the connectors from the HV supplies from the Transfer / separation unit.
4. Disconnect the supply connectors 2204X1 and 2204X2.
5. Remove the bracket with the HV supply PBA.

6. Remove the 2 pulleys from the drive motor (flanches to the outside).
7. Remove the fixing screws from the drive motor.
8. Open the manual feed table.
9. Remove the clips from the hinges at the table side.
10. Push the hinges to the rear to rise the inner paper guide plate.

11. Disconnect the connector 23X1 from the motor and the connector from the motor sensor.
12. Remove the motor.

04.06.2002 70
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Connection Folder Folding Motors

Connect the wires of the motor as follows:
wire number 1807001 to number 1 on the motor.
wire number 1807002 to number 2 on the motor.
The numbers are not shown on the motor.

04.06.2002 71
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Paper transport table

Disassembly if the complete Paper Transport unit can not pass a door the next units can be disassembled:
1. The Paper transport table (see description below).
2. The 1st fold (see description disassembly 1st Fold in function 18).

Paper transport table

1. Remove the PTR table cover.

2. Open the PTR table.
3. Remove on the table the springs from the gas dampers.
4. Hold the table and remove the gas dampers from the table top.
5. Close the table.
6. Remove the right side cover from the frame stand.
7. Disconnect the connectors 2209X4 and 2209X5 from the I/O PBA.
8. Push the bundles through the frame.
9. Disconnect connector 18X4 (between 1st Fold and table).
10. Remove the ground wire.
11. Remove the drive belt from the gear.
12. Remove the 2 screws from the table underneath the stand.
Attention: now the table is only just sitting in the grooves.
Do not bent the gas dampers with the following action.

If the first fold is still there:

- Lift the table from the stand.

If the first fold is removed:

- Turn the table upwards and roll the unit to its place.

04.06.2002 72
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

Belt
1. Loosen the 4 screws from the top cover of the belt unit and remove
the cover.
2. Loosen the lower screws from the side covers of the belt unit.
3. Remove the upper screws from the side covers of the belt unit.
4. Remove the side covers.
5. Loosen the screws from the small cover underneath the belt and
remove the cover.

6. Loosen the 2 lower screws from the output cover.

7. Remove the 2 upper screws from the output cover and remove the
cover (disconnect the ground wire).
8. Remove the drive belt from the drive gear of the belt.
9. Remove the security bracket from the bearing of the drive gear for
the belt.
10. Disconnect the ground wire and the connector from the belt end
sensor.
11. Turn up the belt halfway , push to the machine front and lift it out
from the belt unit.

04.06.2002 73
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

1st Fold unit

1. First carry out disassembly 2nd fold unit.
2. Remove the right and left hand side covers of the paper transport table (1 screw).
3. Remove the left and right side top covers from the paper transport table (2 screws).
4. Disconnect at the right side the connector 18X4 and the earth connection.
5. Remove the right side cover from the PTR frame (2 screws).

6. Disconnect the connectors 2202X2 and 2202X3 from 22PBA02.

7. Disconnect the connectors 2209X2 and 2209X3 from 22PBA09.
8. Loosen the bundles from the PTR frame.
9. Push the bundles through the PTR frame.
10. Loosen at the left side the drive belt tensioner.

11. Remove the drive belt from the PTR drive gear.
12. Remove at the rear side the lower cover from the 1st fold unit.
13. Disconnect the supply 1801G1 and the earth connection.
14. Remove at the rear left and right at the inside 2 bolts (M6) which attach the 1st fold to the PTR frame.
15. Open all hinged covers from the 1st fold unit.

16. Position the red lifting handles on the right and left frame plate in the appropriate key holes.
17. Lift the unit with two persons and place it on the floor (attention for cable bundles).

Note: when remounting, the left side hinge of 1st fold must fit in the outer groove of the bar.

04.06.2002 74
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diss-Assembly

2nd Fold unit

1. Open the PTR folder door.
2. Open the folder 1 door.
3. Open the lower folder cover.

If no first fold delivery is installed:

4. Loosen at the left and right the screws from the side top covers (2 each side).
5. Remove the side top covers together with the top side covers.
6. Remove the right side middle cover.
Continue with point 15

If the first fold delivery is installed:

7. Loosen at the left the screws from the side top cover (2 screws).
8. Remove the side top cover together with the top side cover.
9. Remove at the right side the screws from the top side cover (3 screws).
10. Remove the top side cover.
11. Loosen at the right the screws from the side top cover (2 screws ).
12. Remove the side top cover.
13. Lift off the first fold delivery tray.
14. Remove the cover from the first fold delivery (3 screws).

Continue
15. Disconnect the connectors 18X1, 18X5, 18X8, 18X23 and 18X34 from the 2nd fold.
16. Remove the small top cover from the intermediate transport.
17. Remove at the right side the 2nd fold unit fixing nut and washer.
18. Push the 2nd fold unit a few cm to the right and turn the unit away from the 1st fold unit.

04.06.2002 75
 "Communication with server could not be established" message
Description
In the WEB browser a wrong message is displayed "Communication with server could not be
established", instead of the message "Maximum number of print sessions, please try later
again".

Work around: Ignore the message and try later again

TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

"Communication with the server was interrupted" message.

Description
The WEB browser shows a message "Communication with the server was interrupted", in case
of a controller spool full condition.

Work around: Try later again.

04.06.2002 2
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

PELTWEB R1.2 requires IE 4.0.2 SP2 or above (R3.1)

Description
If PELTweb R1.2 is used in combination with IE4.0.2 up to SP1, some errors can occur.

On remote PC's PELTweb with IE4.0.2 SP2 or higher should be used.

04.06.2002 3
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

The file format is not identified automatically

Description
The file format is not automatically recognized.
Language settings and Pen settings can not be done.

Work around: In order to access language and pen settings the language must be set
manually.

04.06.2002 4
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

The large files can not be submitted in advanced job submission

Description
With the Microsoft Internet explorer the maximum file size which can be submitted is 30 MB
with 256 MB of RAM and 40 MB with 512 MB of RAM due to the memory management of the
Internet Explorer.

Netscape test were successful with job up to 70 MB on a PC with 256 MB of RAM.

04.06.2002 5
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

The user name is not saved if the name includes spaces

Description
To prevent that the user has to enter his name, Account ID, and User ID for each job, the
system saves the name (via cookies).
If the first name has a space, only the first word (before the space) is restored.

These cookies are also associated to a specific printer, so if a user connects to a different
printer, the info has to be reentered.

Work around: avoid spaces.

04.06.2002 6
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

There is no warning message when PELTWEB is not started on

a PLC with less than 256 MB
Description
PELTweb requires 256Mb of RAM.

the reason for not starting PELTweb is stored in the file log.txt in the PELTW directory on the
PLC.

04.06.2002 7
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Customer can not update and change the defaults on the

PS/WRD on the PLC.
Description
New versions of the PS and WRD driver can only be updated on the PLC in the service account.
Default settings can only be done in the service account.

Work around:

Install the driver directly on the client PC of the customer.

So the feature driver downloading is not used.

04.06.2002 8
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

During the installation, the 'new port' configuration button does

not operate (all OS).
Description
During the installation the 'new port' configuration button does not work (all OS).

Work around: Configure the port after the installation by selecting Port/Properties.

04.06.2002 9
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

The 'Fold Width', 'Fold Length' and 'Fold Binding Edge' have no
effect
Description
The 'Fold Width', 'Fold Length' and 'Fold Binding Edge' have no effect .

Work around: Change the default values on the controller .

04.06.2002 10
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Uninstall problem (Win NT / 2000)

Description
If you install a printer, the associated files remain on the disk even after the printer
is uninstalled.

A new installation of a printer does not overwrite these files even when one selects to
replace the already existent driver.This is particularly an issue when reinstalling the driver
to change its language.

Work around : If the new driver is to be installed in a different language, the older files
have to be manually removed from the Windows printer folder before a re-installation of
the printer.

Typically, before re-installation of the printer driver, the file(s) Adobe driver,
OctdsX00x.ppd, OctdsX00x.abd and Ocetdsui.dll have to be removed from the
following directories:

Windows NT: "Winnt40 -> system32 -> spool -> drivers -> w32x86 -> 2"
Windows 2000: "Winnt40 -> system32 -> spool -> drivers -> w32x86 -> 3"

04.06.2002 11
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

When a “custom” paper size is created, the limits of the width

and the length sometimes get swapped.
Description
When a “custom” paper size is created, the limits of the width and the length sometimes get swapped.

Work around: Select "Different options" in the Paper Feed direction

04.06.2002 12
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

When SMB is used, the print information do not appear in the

printer queue.
Description
When SMB is used, the print information do not appear in the printer queue.

Work around: Use another type of connection (LPR,..)

04.06.2002 13
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Customer can not update and change the defaults on the

PS/WRD on the PLC.
Description
New versions of the PS and WRD driver can only be updated on the PLC in the service account.
Default settings can only be done in the service account.

Work around:

Install the driver directly on the client PC of the customer.

So the feature driver downloading is not used.

04.06.2002 14
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

If driver is re-installed in another language, all the helping

entries remain in previous language (Win 9x/Me)
Description
After successful un-installation steps, when the same driver is re-installed in another language, all the
helping entries (context sensitive help, help push b utton and help content) remain in the previously
installed language.

Work Around: Delete the Windows global index file (*.gid - generated with the first opening of
any help file) in the folder C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM

04.06.2002 15
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Re-installation of the driver fails if the driver detected by the

wizard is kept (Win 9x/Me)
Description
If you keep the driver, detected by the wizard during a re-installation process, then the installation fails
(Win 9x/Me).

Work around: During the re-installation process, select to replace the current driver.

04.06.2002 16
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Roll info not updated in WRD driver.

Description
A change of roll information is not updated automatically in the client part of the WRD driver.

Work around:

None.

04.06.2002 17
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

The driver settings are not initialized when the driver properties
are displayed from some applications (Win 9x/Me).
Description
The driver settings are not initialized when the driver properties are displayed from some applications
(Win 9x/Me).

Work around: Set the printer driver as default.

04.06.2002 18
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Values selected in the driver properties are not accepted by

some applications.
Description

Some applications don’t take into account the values selected in the drivers’ properties in
the print setup dialog. It’s possible to have 2 different configurations but only one is used
while printing

Work around: Set all the features you want to apply through the driver default settings.
Then Use only the application specific settings to make other changes but do not change
the driver specific settings through the application.

04.06.2002 19
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

When the driver is set to print to a queue, it always print to

the queue. Even if the 'print to file' mode is selected in the
application (Win 9x/Me).
Description
When the driver is set to print to a queue, it will always print to
the queue. Even if the 'print to file' mode is selected in the application (Win 9x/Me).

Work around: Set the driver to 'print to file' in the properties of the driver

04.06.2002 20
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Default NIC addresses (0.0.0.0) causes Scan to File errors

Description
If after a PLC installation no IP-address is configured all IP addresses are 0.0.0.0, this will
cause delivery errors, even if a local destination is used.

Work Around: configure at least one Network Interface Card with a valid IP-address (provided
by customer) or use 192.168.100.100 or 192.168.100.101 or 192.100.102

04.06.2002 21
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Delivery errors with Scan Manager / File destinations not

checked before the delivery of a file
Description
The Scan Manager generates "delivery errors" when inaccessible destinations are used.

Cause: File destinations are not checked prior to the delivery of a file.

Work Around: Use existing destinations.

Remark: Never use drive letters and colons in a destination

04.06.2002 22
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Files on remote destinations are written over without a message

to confirm
Description
If the Scan Manager writes a file to a remote destination, it will not ask for confirmation.

Work around: Check for the existing of the file before scanning.

04.06.2002 23
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

To fill the SM with Japanese characters is not possible after a

change from English to Japanese in the IME
Description
It is not possible to fill the SM with Japanese characters after a switch from English to
Japanese in the IME.

Work Around: close the Scan Manager, and start it again.

04.06.2002 24
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Adapters shown in a list by a number in the Settings Editor

Description
The adapters are listed by a number in the Settings Editor. It is not clear which number is
which adapter.

Work around: Make a print of the settings to see which adapter has which number.

04.06.2002 25
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Setting Editor does not accept change of settings

Description
When upgrading from Release 1 to Release 2, conflicting settings that were not a problem in R1, give problems
in R2.
These settings result in a setting editor that does not accept new settings (the black triangle behind the new
setting does not dissapear after activating "apply").

Use the proper SDS tests 90.1 through 90.4 to set the status of the components to the correct value.

The following possible (conflicting) settings are known from R1:

System Component Status Check System Component Status Check

Belt unit present 90.4 while Folder not present 90.4
Reinforcement present 90.4 while Folder not present 90.4
Folder present 90.4 while Copy Delivery Tray present 90.1
Copy Delivery Tray present 90.1 while Folder present 90.4

To avoid importing conflicting settings from R1, use the newest upgrade tool (9600Tool_V1.x.x)

If you encounter other conflicting settings, please send over the following files to S&S in Venlo:
Last visit data (test 71 ) + c:\oce\ngc\etc\pcf\controller.gsm

04.06.2002 26
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

The sleepmode time out is not correct above 120 minutes

Description
If in the Settings Editor a sleepmode time-out is entered between 120 and 240 minutes, the
default value of 30 minutes is used.

Work around: Use a setting between 5 and 120 minutes.

04.06.2002 27
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

A connection is not possible from Remote Logic if

<options-hostname> is ["localhost"] on the controller
Description
If in the <options-hostname> field of the applications on the controller "localhost" is filled in, it is
not possible to connect to the controller from the Remote Applications.

Work Around: Use the correct system name or nothing.

04.06.2002 28
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Adapters shown in a list by a number in the Settings Editor

Description
The adapters are listed by a number in the Settings Editor. It is not clear which number is
which adapter.

Work around: Make a print of the settings to see which adapter has which number.

04.06.2002 29
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Not supported file types crashes sometimes the controller or

causes white pages
Description
unsupported file types sometimes crashes the controller or white pages are printed.

Work around: avoid sending unsupported file types

04.06.2002 30
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Automatic Language Sensing for ASCII not full proof.

Description
ASCII is not well recognized by the Automatic Language Sensing.

Work around:

Combine the RCF header which contains the "LG" parameter in the ASCII plot in order to print in ASCII mode.

04.06.2002 31
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Postscript Level 3 upgrade can not be activated

Description
"Postscript Level 3 upgrade password" may not have been entered conform the upgrade description step 2

Suspected Parts & Settings:

1. If you have both the "Postscript Level 2" password and the "Postscript Level 3 upgrade password",
you can edit the file c:\oce\ngc\etc\pcf\controller.gsm to correct this problem, without re-installation.

Edit the controller.gsm file

2. After editing this controller.gsm file, reboot the controller

3. Share the Postscript printer (start / settings / printers / "PS-printer" / properties / sharing)

04.06.2002 32
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

The printer share name is changed after the upgrade

Description
After upgrading from the printer sharename does not contain a " " (space character) anymore.

Work around:

Reinstall all clients or change the portname.

04.06.2002 33
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

The transmission is lost after a stop of a transmission

Description
Transmission lost after abort of a transmis sion.

Work around: establish the connection again.

04.06.2002 34
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Backup / Restore does not work.

Tests / Checks:

Tests / Checks:
Check if the date/time are equal between the laptop and the Power Logic Controller.

The time is visible in the (remote) settings editor and printed on a "print settings".

The setting can be changed logged in as Key Operator in the KO settings, in the System section.

After the setting is changed, the controller has to be rebooted.

04.06.2002 35
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Emulation different between [ ALS ] and [ OJT ] command

Description
This error is generated if the Job Ticket describes another fileformat of a printfile as detected by the ALS
function of the controller. Check the plot file as it is send from a client workstation and how it is received on the
controller. You can use Repro Desk client software to view the file. You can use Wordpad to view JT commands.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Analyse the Job as Check
received on controller 20-1-00
6
Analyse the Job as Check
send on workstation

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 36
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Emulation not recognized

Description
This error is generated if the plotfile is not recognized by the ALS function of the controller.
Check the plot file as it is send from a client workstation and how it is received on the controller.
You can use Repro Desk client software to view the file.
You can use Plot Director/Wordpad to view RCF/JT commands.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Analyse the Job as Check
received on controller 20-1-00
6
Analyse the Job as Check
send on workstation

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 37
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Job error
Description
This error is generated if the controller can not apply an action on the plot. Check the plot file as it is send from a
client workstation and how it is received on the controller. You can use Repro Desk client software to view the
file. You can use Plot Director or Wordpad to view RCF commands.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Analyse the Job as Check
received on controller 20-1-00
6
Analyse the Job as Check
send on workstation

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 38
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Plot failure
Description
Thiss error is generated if print files are received not according to the job ticket. Check the plot file as it is send
from a client workstation and how it is received on the controller. You can use Repro Desk client software to
view the file. You can use Plot Director/Wordpad to view RCF/JT commands.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Analyse the Job as Check
received on controller 20-1-00
6
Analyse the Job as Check
send on workstation

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 39
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Plot failure
Description
This error is generated if the OJT is too complex to be handled by the controller.
Check the plot file as it is send from a client workstation and how it is received on the controller.
You can use Repro Desk client software to view the file.
You can use Plot Director/Wordpad to view RCF/JT commands.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Analyse the Job (OJT) Check
as received on 20-1-00
controller 6
Analyse the Job (OJT) Check
as send on workstation

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 40
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Plot language not enabled failure

Description
This error is generated when a postscript file is received by the controller and the postscript option is not
enabled

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Enable postscript
option (has to be
bought by the
customer)

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 41
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Plot too large

Description
This error is generated if the plot is too large. Check the plot file as it is send from a client workstation and how it
is received on the controller. You can use Repro Desk client software to view the file. You can use Plot
Director/Wordpad to view RCF/JT commands.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Analyse the Job as Check
received on controller 20-1-00
6
Analyse the Job as Check
send on workstation

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 42
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Self test not OK / Option not available

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Correct the problem
indication detected
during the self-test or
enable option

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 43
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 20804 [CTR] Type 4 software error in the DUS module in the

controller ]
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagram

Automatic Clear
re-boot of [ spool
NGC ] area in
controller diagno
stic
mode.
If error Auto
occurs while rotate
scan to file must
in R2.0 STF set on
OS Autom
mechanism atic
failed - reboot
System call
failure
-Internal
error
A process Autom
died - atic
Internal error reboot

Wrong
connected
position from
connector
during
assembly
paper roll
drawer /
sheetfeeder

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 44
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 20805 [CTR] DUS module memory failure in the controller ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
No more space Automa
available in RAM to tic
keep the OS running reboot
(Memory allocation of the
failure) system
Memory management Automa
failure. tic
(internal error) reboot

04.06.2002 45
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 20806 [CTR] Set memory disk failure in the controller ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Set memory disk Check
problem or disk not set
found memory
Cannot use correctly Automa
the Set Memory tic
reboot
of the
system

04.06.2002 46
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 20807 [CTR] INT Spool area failure in the controller ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
- OS mechanism failed Automa
- System call failure tic
- Spool area failure reboot
of the
system.
If
needed,
re-instal
l the
controll
er
softwar
e
Problem handling the Automa
spool on disk tic
reboot.
If
necess
ary,
check
or
chjange
the
spool
disk

04.06.2002 47
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 20809 [CTR] Type 2 software error in the FH module in the

controller ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Fatal error: Wrong Re-inst
controller set-up all the
controll
er
softwar
e

04.06.2002 48
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 20810 [CTR] Type 3 software error in the FH module in the

controller ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Controller protocol not Automa
respected. tic
Fatal error (bug) reboot
of the
system.
Report
the
error to
R&D

04.06.2002 49
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 20813 [CTR] Type 2 software error in the JH module in the

controller ]
Description

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Postscript PDL not Automa
reachable. tic
Fatal error (bug) reboot
of the
system.
Report
the
error to
R&D
Installation no more Re-inst
consistent : Wrong all the
controller set-up controll
(Fatal error) er
softwar
e

04.06.2002 50
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 20814 [CTR] Type 3 software error in the JH module in the

controller ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Software bug : Bad Automa
process state. tic
Fatal error (bug) reboot
of the
system.
Report
the
error to
R&D

04.06.2002 51
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 20816 [CTR] Data processing failure in the controller ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Job error: the data was No
not successfully action
processed or plot
file
analysis
required

04.06.2002 52
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 20818 [CTR] Type 2 software error in the JS module in the

controller ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Installation no more Re-inst
consistent : General all the
configuration problem controll
er
softwar
e

04.06.2002 53
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 20820 [CTR] Type 4 software error in the JS module in the

controller ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
OS mechanism failed. Automa
(Internal error) tic
reboot
of the
system

04.06.2002 54
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 20821 [CTR] JS module memory failure in the controller ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
- Memory allocation Automa
failure. tic
- No more space reboot
available in RAM to of the
keep the OS running system
(Fatal error)

04.06.2002 55
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 20822 [CTR] Set memory full failure in the controller ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Warning: Set memory Wait for
full in the pipeline print
delivery

04.06.2002 56
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 20824 [CTR] Type 2 software error in the PDL module in the

controller ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Installation no more Re-inst
consistent : Fatal error: all the
wrong controller set-up controll
er
softwar
e
Installation no more Re-inst
consistent : Fatal error: all the
font files cannot be controll
reached er
softwar
e

04.06.2002 57
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 20827 [CTR] PK module memory failure in the controller ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Memory allocation Automa
failure : tic
Fatal error: No more reboot
space available in RAM of the
to keep the OS running system

04.06.2002 58
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 20829 [CTR] Type 2 software error in the SIM module in the

controller ]
Description
Installation no more consistance

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Installation no more Re-inst
consistent : Fatal error: all the
wrong controller set-up controll
er
softwar
e

04.06.2002 59
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 20830 [CTR] SIM module memory failure in the controller ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Memory allocation Automa
failure : tic
Fatal error: No more reboot
space available in RAM of the
to keep the OS running system

04.06.2002 60
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 20832 [CTR] Type 2 software error in the SW module in the

controller ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Installation no more Re-inst
consistent : Fatal error: all the
wrong controller set-up controll
er
softwar
e

04.06.2002 61
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 20833 [CTR] Type 3 software error in the SW module in the

controller ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Software Bug (Fatal Automa
error) tic
reboot
of the
controll
er.
Report
the
error to
R&D

04.06.2002 62
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 20834 [CTR] Type 4 software error in the SW module in the

controller ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
OS mechanism failed Automa
(Internal error) tic
reboot
of the
controll
er

04.06.2002 63
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 20835 [CTR] The SPICE PBA in the controller has an error ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
SPICE board problem : Reboot
Spice board reports an the
error conttroll
er
OR
if
necess
ary
check
the
Spice
board

04.06.2002 64
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 20836 [CTR] The IDE hard disk in the controller has an error ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
SCSI Disk failure : Check
Cannot start SCSI HD set
drive memory
disk

04.06.2002 65
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 20901 [CTR] Type 5 software error in the DUS module in the

controller ]
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Warning: OS If reboot
mechanism failed - doesn’t
System call failure (file solve
access) : File system the
full - NGC Resource file problem
failure. ,
re-instal
l the
controll
er
softwar
e
Warning (bug): protocol Automa
error between JS and tic
PH reboot
of the
system
Report
error to
R&D
Warning (bug): protocol None.
error in OCI - Report
Application bug - error to
R&D
warning: problem in No
generating dump config action
- Bug -
Warning: printer No
console problem - OS action
calls failed. This is not or
fatal Reboot
if
behavio
ur
become
s weird

04.06.2002 66
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 20902 [CTR] Type 5 software error in the JS module in the

controller ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Internal error Automa
tic
reboot
of the
system

04.06.2002 67
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 20903 [CTR] Type 5 software error in the PK module in the

controller ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Internal warning : Poker No
processing problem action
or
manual
restart if
needed
(persist
ent
error)
Internal warning : No
problem on a data file action
or
Check
plot file

04.06.2002 68
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 20904 [CTR] Type 5 software error in the SW module in the

controller ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Unclassified problem Automa
(Mainly OS problems) tic
reboot
of the
system

04.06.2002 69
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ OJT ] command problem

Description
This error is generated if multiple Job Tickets are send before a print file. Check the plot file as it is send from a
client workstation and how it is received on the controller. You can use Repro Desk client software to view the
file. You can use Plot Director/Wordpad to view RCF/JT commands.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Analyse the Job (Job Check
Ticket) as received on 20-1-00
controller 6
Analyse the Job (Job Check
Ticket) as send on
workstation

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 70
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ OJT ] command problem

Description
This error is generated if the plotfiles and OJT are splitted up.
Check the plot file as it is send from a client workstation and how it is received on the controller.
You can use Repro Desk client software to view the file.
You can use Plot Director/Wordpad to view RCF/JT commands.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Analyse the Job as Check
received on controller 20-1-00
6
Analyse the Job as Check
send on workstation

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 71
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ OJT ] syntax error / invalid value

Description
This error is generated if the OJT commands are not recognized by the controller.
Check the plot file as it is send from a client workstation and how it is received on the controller.
You can use Repro Desk client software to view the file. You can use Plot Director/Wordpad to view the OJT
commands.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Analyse the Job (OJT) Check
as received on 20-1-00
controller 6
Analyse the Job (OJT) Check
as send on workstation

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 72
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ RCF ] not supported / remote commands not consistent

Description
This error is generated if the RCF commands are not recognized by the controller.
Check the plot file as it is send from a client workstation and how it is received on the controller.
You can use Repro Desk client software to view the file.
You can use Plot Director/Wordpad to view the RCF commands.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Analyse the Job (RCF) Check
as received on 20-1-00
controller 6
Analyse the Job (RCF) Check
as send on workstation

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 73
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Diagnostic, Step 1: Perform Basic Checks

Description
Before performing all kind of diagnostic tests, it is necessary to perform
some basic checks.
Depending on the current state of the controller, it is advised to backup
the controller files first.
If the controller is still running, you can backup the system data via the
"LOG visit data" icon on the controller desktop in service mode and copy
the files within the c:\service\visits\"current date" directory to another
medium e.g. a floppy disk. Further execute a print-setting on paper or
floppy-disk.

The Basic Checks are:

l Make data-dump / print-settings

If the controller is running, first make a backup of the system data
via the "LOG visit data" icon on the controller desktop in service
mode and copy the files within the c:\service\visits\"current date"
directory to another medium e.g. a floppy disk. Further execute
a print-setting on paper or floppy-disk.backup of the system
parameters and print-setting on paper or floppy-disk. With this
information, you can restore the customer specific settings.
l Check outside of the controller
If the controller is wet or damaged, you have to disconnect the
power immediately.
Open the controller and check the internal parts.
l Checking connections and switches
Verify whether all external cables are correctly connected. Similar for
the external switch.
l Look and listen
When switching on the controller, you have to verify the start-up of
the hard-disk / fan / poweron LED.
If one of these parts are not functioning, check the power.
l Check for error message / beep codes
During power on, several system tests are performed.
Errors detected during these tests are reported as system error
messages or system beep codes.
For the error messages: / for the beep codes:

If no errors are detected during these basic checks, you can continue
with step 2: performing the DELL DIAGNOSTIC DISK

04.06.2002 74
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Diagnostic, Step 2: DELL diagnostic floppy

Description
For the Oc·9600 controller, the DELL DIAGNOSTIC DISK is used to
verify the standard components.
The DELL DIAGNOSTIC DISK is a standard DELL floppy disk and is
labelled as:

Dell Diagnostics Disk, RevA01 Ver 3.97 A

The DELL DIAGNOSTIC DISK is bundled together with the Oc·9600

controller.
To be sure to have a spare diagnostic disk, create an image (diskcopy,
not copy!) from the Dell disk.

To run the DELL diagnostics, insert the DELL DIAGNOSTIC DISK into
the floppy drive and reboot the
controller.

The controller loads the MS-DOS operating system from the floppy disk.
Via the autoexec.bat the diagnostic program (delldiag) is started
automatically.
This diagnostic program creates an ASCII-based window with four menu
items (see next figure).

Dell Computer Corporation

Dell System Diagnostics Version x.xx

Diagnostic menu

Run All Tests

Run Quick Tests
Run Specific Tests
Exit to MS-DOS

This diagnostic program can be used by the technician, specialist and

the consultant.

To verify the correct functioning of the controller, perform the ‘Run Quick
Test’.
Selecting this mode, all standard controller components are checked in
batch mode. No interaction is required.
During this test, the result of each test is displayed on screen.
The result will be: ‘Fail’ or ‘Pass’.
The output of the ‘Run Quick Test’ is listed in appendix 3 ‘Dell
Diagnostic Quick Test Results’.

The diagnostic program is started automatically and the output is

displayed on screen.
To write the output into a file, you have to exit the diagnostic program via
the option ‘Exit to MS-DOS’.
Now you have access to the normal MS-DOS commandline. Type in the
command: ‘delldiag –oef’ to re-start the diagnostic program again. Now
the output is displayed on screen and written into the file ‘result’ on the
diagnostic floppy.
An example of the ‘Run Quick Test’ result, including an error example is
given below.

DELL Diagnostic Disk ‘Quick test’ result

By default the result is written to the controller screen. If an output file is

requested, you have to quit the diagnostic program (exit to MS-DOS).
Restart the diagnostic program by typing the command ‘delldiag -oef’.
On the diagnostic disk, a file called ‘result’ is created.

Below, you will find the result of the ‘Run Quick Tests’, performed with

04.06.2002 75
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

the DELL diagnostic disk.

Dell OptiPlex G1 350MTbr+ Diagnostics Version

3.97A00
Started 09/24/98 15:24:58
Quick Memory Test - Memory :
Pass
CMOS Confidence Test - CMOS :
Pass
DMA Controller Test - DMA :
Pass
Real-Time Clock Test - RTC :
Pass
Timers Test - Timers :
Pass
Interrupt Controller Test - PIC :
Pass
x87 Calculation Test - Coprocessor :
Pass
x87 Error Exception Test - Coprocessor :
Pass
PCI Bridge Test - PCI Bridge :
Pass
USB Register Test - USB1 :
Pass
USB Memory Structure Test - USB1 :
Pass
Video Memory Test - Video :
Pass
Controller Test - Keyboard :
Pass
Self Diagnostics Test - Disk 0 :
Pass
Self Diagnostics Test - CD ROM 2 :
Pass
Baud Rate Test - Serial Port 1 :
Pass
Baud Rate Test - Serial Port 2 :
Pass
Internal Test - Parallel Port 1 :
Pass
Device Self Test - SCSI 0-0 HD 5 :
Pass
Device Self Test - SCSI 0-0 HD 6 :
Pass
Register Test - 3COM918_IX_0 :
Pass
Bus Master Test - 3COM918_IX_0 :
Pass
Completed 09/24/98 15:28:38
If an error is detected, the error code and a short error message is
given. Error list, see
Below, you will find an example of a failed speaker test.
CMOS Confidence Test - CMOS :
Pass
DMA Controller Test - DMA :
Pass
Real-Time Clock Test - RTC :
Pass
Timers Test - Timers :
Pass
Interrupt Controller Test - PIC :
Pass

04.06.2002 76
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Speaker Test - Speaker :

<SY565> Fail Speaker

error
The result of the ‘Quick test’ indicates a problem with the speaker.
Advised is to check the speaker connection and/or to replace the
speaker.

If detailed checking is required, e.g. no error detected during the Quick

Test and/or the problem not solved, the ‘Run ALL Tests’ or ‘Run
Specific Tests’ is advised. These tests will perform detailed checking, by
performing more tests, changing the test order and the number of
repetitions.

This ‘Fail’ result can be checked with the error information within the
Digital TSM and the proper action can be executed (e.g. ordering FEU).

The diagnostic error messages, which are generated by the DELL

DIAGNOSTIC DISK are listed in: Diagnostics, - Error messages, - 20
Interface, - Controller, - Dell Diagnostic Error Messages.

If no errors detected during the DELL DIAGNOSTIC TESTS, you can

continue with step 3: performing the OPTION DIAGNOSTIC TESTS.

04.06.2002 77
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Diagnostic, Step 3: Optional diagnostic floppy

Description
For the Oc·9600 controller, the OPTION DIAGNOSTIC DISK is used to
verify additional components.
The OPTION DIAGNOSTIC DISK is labelled as:

NEW OCE SPICE CARD + NIC

DIAGN
OSTICS
P/N
9866E
REV
A02

The OPTION DIAGNOSTIC DISK is bundled together with the Oc·9600

controller.
To be sure to have a spare diagnostic disk, create an image (diskcopy,
not copy!) from the Dell disk.

To run the OPTION diagnostics, insert the OPTION DIAGNOSTIC DISK

into the floppy drive and reboot the
controller.

The controller loads the MS-DOS operating system from the floppy disk.
Via the autoexec.bat the diagnostic program is started automatically.
This diagnostic program creates an ASCII-based windows with four
menu items (see next figure).

1. IBM Token Ring NIC Test

2. 3Com 3C900 NIC Test
3. SPICE Card
4. Exit

CHOOSE OPTION:

This diagnostic program can be used by the technician, specialist and

the consultant.

To verify the correct functioning of the controller add-ons, perform the

‘required test’.
For example, to verify the correct functioning of the SPICE Card, connect
the loopback cable/connector and select option 3.
The result (and progress) of the test is displayed on screen.
With these option tests, it is not possible to write the results into a logfile.

The error messages generated by the OPTION DIAGNOSTIC program

are listed in ‘OPTION DIAGNOSTIC ERROR MESSAGES’.

If no errors detected during the OPTION DIAGNOSTIC TESTS, you can

continue with step 4: performing the SDS tests in DIAGNOSIS MODE.

04.06.2002 78
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Diagnostic, Step 4: Controller SDS tests in diagnostic mode

Description
After poweron, the Oc·9600 controller will be started automatically.
In case of start-up problems (corrupt configuration, problems in spool
area, problems with engine
communication), you can start the
controller in Diagnosis Mode.
This mode contains only tests which can not be launched during normal
mode or which are required to restore
system settings.

To enter the Diagnosis Mode, re-boot the controller. Within the re-start
procedure, select the option Oc·9600
Debug Mode.
The controller will be started without establishing the connection with the
engine.

In this Diagnosis Mode enter the ‘diagnosis test / SDS’ mode. On this
menu, you have the possibility to:

l Clear spool areas

Clears the spool areas. All plotfiles are removed and the spool area
will be emptied.
This is needed in case of corrupt plotfiles or problems with the spool
area.
l Test SPICE board
Test to check the correct functioning of the SPICE board.
Due to the fact that in normal mode the communication between the
controller and the engine is running, it is not possible to
launch this test. For that reason, this test is available within the
Diagnosis Mode.
The test results are displayed on screen and stored in a logfile in the
diagnostic area.
File: C:\Oce\NGC\log\diagnostic\spiceHwTest.log
l Test Centronics board
Test to check the correct functioning of the Centronics board.
During normal mode, it is not possible to launch this test. For that
reason, this test is available within the Diagnosis Mode.
The test results are displayed on screen and stored in a logfile in the
diagnostic area.
File: C:\Oce\NGC\log\diagnostic\centroHwTest.log

If no errors detected during the SDS DIAGNOSIS MODE TESTS, you

can continue with step 5: performing the SDS tests in NORMAL MODE.

04.06.2002 79
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Diagnostic, Step 5: Controller SDS tests in normal mode

Description

Description
After poweron, the Oc·9600 controller will be started automatically.
Within the controller console window (ASCII based interface), you can
enter the normal SDS mode.
Within this SDS, you can launch tests to configure and test the controller
/ engine.
As mentioned, a lot of the controller tests are outside this SDS, due to
valid reasons.

Within normal SDS mode, you are able to launch the following controller
tests / actions:

l (20-1-001) Enable Functional Tracing

If additional information is needed of the controller functioning,
enable this option and re-boot the controller.
After the re-boot, the controller writes additional information into
logfiles (*.trc), which are located in the diagnostic area.
If the maximum size is reached, the ‘*.trc’ file is renamed to ‘*.old’.
Files: C:\Oce\NGC\log\diagnostic\*.trc and
Files: C:\Oce\NGC\log\diagnostic\*.old
l (20-1-002) Set Maximum size Tracing logfiles
Set the maximum size of the tracing logfiles.
The size depends on the problem occurrence and the method used
to extract the logfiles from the controller.
l (20-1-006) Enable Input Tracing
To catch all the bytes arrived at the controller input channel, enable
this option and reboot the controller.
The input data, without any interpretation is stored in the diagnostic
area.
The inputfiles are stored using the name: inputfileX.Y, where X =
the job number and Y = the file number inside the job.
Files: C:\Oce\NGC\log\diagnostic\inputfileX.Y
l (20-6-002) Test SetMemory Disk and Adapter
Performs the hardware test to verify the correct functioning of the
setmemory controller and setmemory disks.
The output of this test is displayed on the screen and written into a
logfile stored in the diagnostic area.
File: C:\Oce\NGC\log\diagnostic\setMemHwTest.log
l (20-6-020) Dump configuration into Oce9600ConfLogfile
To write the system configuration into a file, select this option.
The contents of the dump configuration is exactly the same as
printed on paper with print-settings.
This logfile is stored in the diagnostic area.
Files: C:\Oce\NGC\log\diagnostic\DumpOce9600Config.txt
l (20-6-021) Get Oce9600 ConfLogfile
To copy the Oce9600-configuration-file on floppy, select this option.
Only the configuration file is copied to the floppy.
l (20-6-022) Get Diagnostic area
All the logfiles, which are created by the controller during the SDS
tests, are copied on the floppy.
If the total size of these files is too large, copy the logfiles manually
via the service login account.
l (20-6-023) Clear Diagnostic area
To clean up the diagnostic area, select this option.
All the logfiles, stored in the diagnostic area are removed from the
controller.
l (20-6-024) Get Oce9600 error/warning logfiles
To make a copy of the controller error/warning files, select this
option.
The so-called syslog files are stored on the floppy.
l (20-6-025) Clear Oce9600 error/warning logfiles
To cleanup the system logfiles, select this option.
The so-called syslog files are cleaned.

04.06.2002 80
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

In general, before performing any test, first make a backup of the

SYSTEM DATA.
This backup contains all the customer specific settings and will be useful
to restore customer specific setting.

If no errors detected during the SDS NORMAL MODE TESTS, you can
continue with step 6: re-installing the software.

04.06.2002 81
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Diagnostic, Step 6: Reinstalling NGC software

Description
If the problem still exist, after performing all the described diagnostic tests, re-install the software.
This will be the last possible action, which can be performed before swapping the controller or controller
parts.

To re-install the controller software, you need the following parts:

l Oc·9600 CDROM
l Oc·9600 boot-floppy
l Data-dump floppy, containing a backup of the system data
l Print-settings

If the controller is running, first make a backup of the system data via SDS test 71 (backup systems) or
for R1 systems via the "LOG visit data" icon on the controller desktop in service mode and copy the files
within the c:\service\visits\"current date" directory to another medium e.g. a floppy disk. Further execute
a print-setting on paper or floppy-disk.backup of the system parameters and print-setting on paper or
floppy-disk. With this information, you can restore the customer specific settings.

See the installation chapter of the controller to continue with the re-installation.
After re-installation execute also the installation of the NGC tools floppy of the installation chapter. The
other items can be executed once the system is up and running again.

Finally, the controller configuration can be restored via SDS test 72 (Restore systems) or for R1 systems
manually in the following order.
l Login as service
l Activate the "NGC down" icon to get a "clean NT" environment.
l Copy the backup data from the floppy to its original position, i.e. C:\SERVICE\VISITS\"current date".
l Copy the contents of the C:\SERVICE\VISITS\"current date"\PCF into C:\OCE\NGC\ETC\PCF
(Overwrite the default files)
l Copy the file C:\SERVICE\VISITS\"current date"\sds_log.mdb into C:\OCE\APPS\SDS (Overwrite
the default file)
l Reboot the controller. After reboot all Key operator/SYstem administrator settings of the controller
should be correct now.
l TCP/IP related network settings must be adapted if necessary.
l Check the correct functioning of the system and finish the installation chapter of the controller, i.e.
installation of plot-director etc.

If the problem still exists, the whole controller has to be replaced.

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 82
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

Installation no more consistant / Missing or corrupted file /

Internal error.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Missing or corrupted file Re-inst
all
controll
er
softwar
e
Installation no more Re-inst
consistent all
controll
er
softwar
e
Controller cannot be Re-inst
started - Process all
creation error controll
er
softwar
e
Password given by the No
user is not correct action

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 83
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 09901 [SCA] ORGWIDSE 1..7 width detection failure ] & 36 "

(914 mm) is scanned as a B1.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0904 [ ORGWIDSE7 ] inactive 09-2-008 330

04.06.2002 84
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 09901 [SCA] ORGWIDSE 1..7 width detection failure ] & A0 is

scanned as a B1.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0904 ORGWIDSE6 continuous 09-2-007 330
inacitve

04.06.2002 85
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 09901 [SCA] ORGWIDSE 1..7 width detection failure ] & B1 is

scanned as an A1.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0904 [ ORGWIDSE5 ] inactive 09-2-006 330

04.06.2002 86
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 09901 [SCA] ORGWIDSE 1..7 width detection failure ] & A1 is

scanned as a B2.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0904 [ ORGWIDSE4 ] inactive 09-2-005 330

04.06.2002 87
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 09901 [SCA] ORGWIDSE 1..7 width detection failure ] & B2 is

scanned as an A2.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0904 [ ORGWIDSE3 ] inactive 09-2-004 330

04.06.2002 88
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 09901 [SCA] ORGWIDSE 1..7 width detection failure ] & A3 is

scanned as an A4.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0904 [ ORGWIDSE1 ] inactive 09-2-002 330

04.06.2002 89
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 09901 [SCA] ORGWIDSE 1..7 width detection failure ] & A2 is

scanned as an A3.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0904 [ ORGWIDSE2 ] inactive 09-2-003 330

04.06.2002 90
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 10501 [SCA] SCALA ON failure ] & Black scan image / print.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-2206 [ Power supply mixed G4 ] 10-6-002 399
not connected from power
up
Z-1002 [ SCALAmp ] 10-6-002 370

Z-2206 Scanner "dies"; Disconne Exchange 863

On display scanner "-", ct Operating
LCD-dsiplay is turned on LCD-displ panel
and scanner dies. ay assy.
22LCD1

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 91
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 10501 [SCA] SCALA ON failure ] & Decreased scan quality /

black image.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-2206 [ Power supply mixed 10-6-002 385
SCALAMP supply ] defect
Z-2206 [ POWERSUPPLY 10-6-002 399
MIXED_SCALA output ]
short circuit to ground

04.06.2002 92
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 10901 [SCA] SCALA OFF failure ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-2206 Power supply mixed 10-6-002 385
(SCALAMP supply block
continuous on)

04.06.2002 93
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 11501 CPU-IO IMAGEPROC control bus failure scanner]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1102 [ IMAGE PROC X4 ] not 11-6-001 399
connected from power up

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 94
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 11902 IMAGE-PROC self-test failure scanner ] & Decreased

scan quality.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1102 [ IMAGE PROC ] 11-6-002 420

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 95
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 11902 IMAGE-PROC self-test failure scanner ] & Deformed scan

image.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1102 Short circuit in wiring 11-6-002 869
between [ Console CPU
PBA ] and [ Image
Processing PBA ]

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 96
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 11902 IMAGE-PROC self-test failure scanner ] & Random scan

image (wallpaper).
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1102 [ IMAGE PROC ] -> [ 11-6-002 769
Controller ] wiring short
circuit to ground from power
up)

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 97
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22011 [SCA] PBA CPU-I/O watchdog in the scanner ]

Description
The watchdog is a piece of hardware on the Scanner CPU IO board. It checks that the software is correctly
running.
If the watchdog on the Scanner CPU IO board becomes active the operator has to switch off and on the
Scanner.
After power-up the CPU-IO board detects automatically that the watchdog was active and the error is generated.
The watchdog becomes also active during test 73 when the printer goes into software-download mode.
This is also a way to test the hardware of the watchdog.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Z-2206 [ PRT-PBA CPU-I/O ] 73 Replace 861

watchdog circuit defect board if
printer
does
not go
in
downlo
ad
mode.
Z-2206 [ PRT-PBA CPU-I/O ] Report 865
software is not running if after
correctly replace
ment
the
problem
is not
solved.
(Include
backup
files of
test 71)

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 98
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22012 [SCA] PBA CPU-I/O EPROM failure in the scanner ]

Description
During power up of the CPU-IO board the checksum of the FEPROM is calculated and compared with the
correct value.
If they do not match the following error is generated.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Z-2206 [ SCA-PBA CPU-I/O ] Replace 861

FEPROM defective, board
detected at power up

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 99
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22013 [SCA] PBA CPU-I/O IO-ASIC failure in the scanner ]

Description
During power up of the CPU-IO board the checksum of the IOASICs (input and output IC's) are tested.
If a fault is detected the following error is generated.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Z-2206 [ SCA-PBA CPU-I/O ] Replace 861

IOASIC defective, board
detected at power up

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 100
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22014 [SCA] PBA CPU-I/O FASTRAM failure in the scanner ]

Description
During power up of the CPU-IO board test patterns are written and read from the FAST-RAM, which contains the
images displayed on the LCD.
If a fault is detected the following error is generated.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Z-2206 [ SCA-PBA CPU-I/O ] Replace 861

RAM defective, board
detected at power up

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 101
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22015 [SCA] PBA CPU-I/O SLOWRAM failure in the scanner ]

Description
During power up of the CPU-IO board test patterns are written and read from the RAM.
If a fault is detected the following error is generated.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Z-2206 [ SCA-PBA CPU-I/O ] Replace 861

RAM defective, board
detected at power up

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 102
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22016 [SCA] PBA CPU-I/O DUART failure in the scanner ]

Description
During power up of the CPU-IO board the DUART (communication IC) is tested.
If a fault is detected the following error is generated.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Z-2206 [ SCA-PBA CPU-I/O ] Replace 861

DUART defective, board
detected at power up

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 103
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22017 [SCA] PBA CPU-I/O software failure in the scanner ]

Description
If the CPU-IO board firmware detects a program contradiction in the software the following error is generated.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Z-2206 [ SCA-PBA CPU-I/O ] Write 865

software failure Proble
m
Report
(Include
backup
files of
test 71)

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 104
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22018 [SCA] PBA CPU-I/O CPU failure in the scanner ]

Description
If the CPU (processor) detects a hardware contradiction the following error is generated.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Z-2206 [ SCA-PBA CPU-I/O ] Write 861

software is not running Proble
correctly m
report
(Include
backup
files of
test 71)

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 105
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22505 [SCA] Controller - scanner interface error ]

Description
This error occurs if the Scanner recieves in-correct data from the Controller

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-2206 [ SCA-PBA CPU-I/O ] failure Write 870
Problem
Report if
problem
occurs
more as
ones
(Include
backup
files of
test 71)

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 106
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22911 [SCA] PBA CPU-I/O NOVRAM category 2 failure in the

scanner ] & Scanner settings on default
Description
Category 2 NOVRAM data contains Scanner parameters that are not critical for functioning.
At power-up all parameters are checked for legal values and if not correct the default value will be filled in.
The next error will be generated.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Z-2204 [ SCA-PBA CPU-I/O ] Switch Replace 861

NOVRAM category 2 Scanner PBA if
values not correct at OFF/On errors
power-up several occurs
times after
Scanne
r
OFF/O
N test.

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 107
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25002 [SYS] Control bus Failure CTR - SCA ]

Description

Description
This error is generated if the Scanner
is switched off during run. Basically
this error is assumed to be caused by
the customer.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Scanner is switched off Instruct
during run. customer
Electrical problem in Solve
Scanner problem

04.06.2002 108
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25731 [SCA] Scanner opened while scanning (ORGSAFSW) ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 109
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25732 [SCA] Original present sensor and/or width sensor

ORGWIDSE1..7 not free (ORGPRESE/ORGWIDSE)]
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 110
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25733 [SCA] Unexpected leading edge at original present

sensor (ORGPRESE) ]
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 111
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25734 [SCA] Original too short at original present sensor

(ORGPRESE) ]
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 112
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25735 [SCA] Stop pressed during scanning ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 113
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 04501 PHDNTC short / open circuit ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0402 Short / open circuit of the [ 04-9-001 130
PHDNTC ]

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 114
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 05101 [PRT] Severe developer pollution ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Hard lumps in toner 05-9-001 Replace 200
([ DEVTONCONSE ] developer
measures too high toner and toner
concentration)
Z-0202 Charge corona wiring 02-6-001 46

Connector 2204X7 02-6-001 79

Short circuit [ 02-6-001 79

CHGHV-backing ]
Open / short circuit [ 02-6-001 79
CHGHV ] wiring
Open circuit [ CHGSUP ] 02-6-001 79

[ CHGHV ] inactive 02-6-001 60

Z-0202 PBA, Grid defect 02-6-001 61

Short circuit [ BIAS_HV ] 05-4-001 199

wiring
[ DEVTONCONSE ] (too 05-9-001 170
high toner concentration)
[ BIASHV ] inactive 05-4-001 180
Z-0504 [ DEVTONMO ] active 05-6-003 850

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 115
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 05501 [PRT] Developer concentration time out ] & Posteralarm

followed by toner concentration not reached situation.
Description

Developer concentration time out

If its takes too long to recover the developer concentration the
following error is generated.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0504 [ DEVTONSW ] inactive 05-2-001 170
Z-0504 [ DEVTONMO ] 05-6-003 171
Z-0504 [ DEV_TONER ] supply 05-6-003 161
assy

04.06.2002 116
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 05502 [PRT] DEVTONCONSE short / open circuit ]

Description
If the measured value of the [ DEVTONCONSE ] input is outside
the working range this error is detected.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Short circuit of the wiring 05-9-001 199
between [ DEVTONCONSE
] and [ CPU_IO PBA ]

04.06.2002 117
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 05502 [PRT] DEVTONCONSE short / open circuit ] &

Developing magnet roller polluted with toner. Decreased print
quality / background.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0502 [ 05B1 ] not connected 05-9-001
Connector [ 2201X3 ] not 05-9-001
connected

04.06.2002 118
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 05701 [PRT] Developer pollution ]

Description

Developer pollution
If the calculated developer concentration decreases too much in
time (e.g. outside the normal system behaviour range) it is
assumed that serious system pollution is in process. This pollution
can cause damage on several consumables. If this is applicable
the error is detected which will prevent this damage.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Hard lumps in toner 05-9-001 Replace 200
([ DEVTONCONSE ] developer
measures too high toner and toner
concentration)
Z-0202 Charge corona wiring 02-6-001 46

Connector 2204X7 02-6-001 79

Short circuit [ 02-6-001 79

CHGHV-backing ]
Open / short circuit [ 02-6-001 79
CHGHV ] wiring
Open circuit [ CHGSUP ] 02-6-001 79

[ CHGHV ] inactive 02-6-001 60

Z-0202 PBA, Grid defect 02-6-001 61

Short circuit [ BIAS_HV ] 05-4-001 199

wiring
[ DEVTONCONSE ] (too 05-9-001 170
high toner concentration)
[ BIASHV ] inactive 05-4-001 180

Z-0504 [ DEVTONMO ] active 05-6-003 850

04.06.2002 119
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 05702 [PRT] Toner empty during poster alarm ]

Description

Toner empty during recovering developer concentration

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Toner supply Fill 962
Malfunctioning Toner Dosage
Unit

04.06.2002 120
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 08001 [PRT] FUSNTC1 short / open circuit ] & Safety relays has
shut off the heater.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0806 Open connection of [ 08-9-001 291
FUSNTC1 ] from power up

04.06.2002 121
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 08002 [PRT] FUSNTC2 short / open circuit ] & Safety relays has
shut off the heater.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0806 [ FUSNTC2 ] 08-9-001 291

04.06.2002 122
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 08003 [PRT] FUSNTC3 short / open circuit ] & Fuser

temperature is too low and toner is not fused on print material.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0806 Short circuit of [ FUSNTC3 ] 08-9-001 291
from power up

04.06.2002 123
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 08003 [PRT] FUSNTC3 short / open circuit ] & The fuser

temperature is too high and a shiny print.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0806 Open connenction [ 08-9-001 291
FUSNTC3 ] from power up

04.06.2002 124
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 08004 [PRT] FUSNTC4 short / open circuit ] & Safety relays has
shut off the heater.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0806 Open connection of [ 08-9-001 291
FUSNTC4 ] from power up
Z-0806 Short circuit of [ FUSNTC4 ] 08-9-001 291
from power up

04.06.2002 125
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 08005 [PRT] FUSNTC5 short / open circuit ] & Safety relays has
shut off the heater.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0806 Open connection of [ 08-9-001 291
FUSNTC5 ] from power up
Z-0806 Short circuit of [ FUSNTC5 ] 08-9-001 291
from power up

04.06.2002 126
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 08006 [PRT] FUSNTC6 short / open circuit ] & Safety relays has
shut off the heater.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0806 Open connection of [ 08-9-001 291
FUSNTC6 ] from power up
Z-0806 Short circuit of [ FUSNTC6 ] 08-9-001 291
from power up

04.06.2002 127
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 08007 [PRT] FUSNTC1 temperature too high ] & Print material

is brown.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0802 [ FUSFANR ] blocked / not 08-4-001 290
active

04.06.2002 128
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 08008 [PRT] FUSNTC2 temperature too high ] & Print material

is brown.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0806 Short circuit of the fuser 08-6-001 281
heater
Z-0802 [ FUSFANR ] blocked / 08-4-001 290
inactive
Z-0806 [ FUSNTC2 ] defect / short 08-9-001 291
circuit
Z-2204 [ FUSFAN_output ] inactive 08-4-001 850

04.06.2002 129
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 08009 [PRT] FUSNTC3 temperature too high ] & Print material

brown. Decreased print quality: toner not fused on print
material.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0806 Short circuit of the fuser 08-6-001 281
heater
Z-0802 [ FUSFANR ] blocked / not 08-4-001 290
active
Z-0806 [ FUSNTC3 ] bad 08-9-001 291
functioning
Z-2204 [ FUSFAN_output ] not 08-4-001 850
active

04.06.2002 130
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 08010 [PRT] FUSNTC4 temperature too high ] & Print material

is brown. Decreased print quality. The toner is locally not fused
on print material.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0806 Short circuit of the fuser 08-6-001 281
heater
Z-0802 [ FUSFANR ] blocked / 08-4-001 290
inactive
Z-0806 [ FUSNTC4 ] defect 08-9-001 291
Z-2204 [ FUSFAN_output ] inactive 08-4-001 850

04.06.2002 131
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 08011 [PRT] FUSNTC5 temperature too high ] & Print material

brown. Decreased print quality: toner locally not fused on print
material.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0806 Short circuit of the fuser 08-6-001 281
heater
Z-0802 [ FUSFANR ] blocked / not 08-4-001 290
active
Z-0806 [ FUSNTC5 ] defect 08-9-001 291
Z-2204 [ FUSFAN_output ] not 08-4-001 850
active

04.06.2002 132
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 08513 [PRT] FUSNTC1 temperature too low ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

04.06.2002 133
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 08514 [PRT] FUSNTC2 temperature too low ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

04.06.2002 134
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 08515 [PRT] FUSNTC3 temperature too low ] & Bad fusing and
a shiny print.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0806 [ FUSNTC3 ] 08-9-001 291

04.06.2002 135
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 08515 [PRT] FUSNTC3 temperature too low ] & Locally a low

temperature : bad fusing.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0802 [ FUSFANL ] blocked 08-4-001 290
Z-0802 [ FUSFANL ] inactive 08-4-001 290

04.06.2002 136
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 08516 [PRT] FUSNTC4 temperature too low ] & Locally a low

temperature : bad fusing.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0802 [ FUSFANL ] blocked 08-4-001 290
Z-0802 [ FUSFANL ] inactive 08-4-001 290

04.06.2002 137
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 08516 [PRT] FUSNTC4 temperature too low ] & The safety

relays has switched off the heater.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0806 [ FUSNTC4 ] 08-9-001 291

04.06.2002 138
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 08517 [PRT] FUSNTC5 temperature too low ] & Locally a low

temperature: bad fusing.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0802 [ FUSFANL ] blocked 08-4-001 290
Z-0802 [ FUSFANL ] inactive 08-4-001 290

04.06.2002 139
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 08517 [PRT] FUSNTC5 temperature too low ] & Safety relays

has shut off the heater.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0806 Open connection of [ 08-9-001 291
FUSNTC5 ] from power up

04.06.2002 140
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 08519 [PRT] Fuser temperature too low during heating up ] &

Heater stays cold during run. The toner is not fused on the copy
material.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-2202 Heater not connected 08-6-001 319
[2203COM ]
Z-2202 Fuser interlock inactive 08-6-001 292
while the fuser is closed
Z-2202 Fuser SSR inactive / once 08-6-001 294
switched on
Z-2202 Coil 08-6-001 294

04.06.2002 141
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 08520 [PRT] Fuser temperature too low ] & Calculated fuser

temperature too low.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

R2.1: Frequent 08520 errors Update Modificatio
and/or badly fused prints print n 19
engine
firmware
Z-0806 [ FUSNTC3 ] defect during [ 08-9-001 291
RUN ]

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 142
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 08007 [PRT] FUSNTC1 temperature too high ] & Print material

is brown and the toner is locally not fused on print material.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0806 Short circuit of the fuser 08-6-001 281
heater

04.06.2002 143
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 08007 [PRT] FUSNTC1 temperature too high ] & The

temperature of the heater is too high outside the print material.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-2204 [ FUSFAN_output ] inactive 08-4-001 850
Colour of lamellas in fuser Replace 281
gold instead of black fuser

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 144
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 08007 [PRT] FUSNTC1 temperature too high ] & Safety relays

has shut off the heater(s).
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0806 [ FUSNTC1 ] defect / short 08-9-001 291
circuit

04.06.2002 145
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12501 Upper paper roll drawer knife initialisation failure ] &

Incomplete cut of [ PRDU ] rolls.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1218 [ PRDUKNIMO ] defect 12-6-001 441
Z-1220 [ PRDUKNISEL ] active 12-2-004 451
from power up
Z-1220 [ PRDUKNISER ] active 12-2-003 451
from power up

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 146
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12501 Upper paper roll drawer knife initialisation failure ] & No

cut material of the [ PRDU ] rolls.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1218 [ PRDUKNIMO ] inactive 12-6-001 452
from power up
Z-1216 [ PRDU DRIVER KNIMO ] 12-6-001 460
output active from power
up
Z-1216 [ PRDU DRIVER KNIMO ] 12-6-001 460
output inactive from power
up

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 147
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12501 Upper paper roll drawer knife initialisation failure ] & [

PRDUKNIfe ] initialisation failure.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Short circuit to ground of [ 12-6-001 479
PRDUKNIMO ] wiring

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 148
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12501 Upper paper roll drawer knife initialisation failure ] & [

PRDUKNIMO ] continuous on untill next cut.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1220 [ PRDUKNISEL ] not active 12-2-004 451
Z-1220 [ PRDUKNISER ] not active 12-2-003 451

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 149
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12502 Middle paper roll drawer knife initialisation failure ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1218 Short circuit to ground of 12-6-021 479
the [ PRDMKNIMO ] wiring

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 150
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12502 Middle paper roll drawer knife initialisation failure ] &

Incomplete cut of the [ PRDM ] rolls.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1218 [ PRDMKNIMO ] 12-6-021 441
Z-1220 [ PRDMKNISEL ] inactive 12-2-024 451
from power up
Z-1220 [ PRDMKNISER ] active 12-2-023 451
from power up

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 151
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12502 Middle paper roll drawer knife initialisation failure ] & No

cutting of the [ PRDM ] rolls.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1218 [ PRDMKNIMO ] inactive 12-6-021 452
from power up
Z-1216 [ PRDM DRIVER KNIMO ] 12-6-021 460
output active from power up
Z-1216 [ PRDM DRIVER KNIMO ] 12-6-021 460
output inactive from power
up

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 152
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12502 Middle paper roll drawer knife initialisation failure ]: [

PRDMKNIMO ] on untill next cut.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1220 [ PRDMKNISEL ] inactive 12-2-024 451
Z-1220 [ PRDMKNISER ] inactive 12-2-023 451

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 153
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12503 Lower paper roll drawer knife initialisation failure ] &

Incomplete cut of the [ PRDL ] rolls.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1220 [ PRDLKNISEL ] active from 12-2-044 451
power up
Z-1220 [ PRDLKNISER ] active 12-2-043 451
from power up

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 154
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12503 Lower paper roll drawer knife initialisation failure ] & No

cutting of [ PRDL ] rolls.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1218 [ PRDLKNIMO ] 12-6-041 452
continuously inactive from
power up
Z-1216 [ PRDL DRIVER KNIMO ] 12-2-041 460
output active / inactive from
power up

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 155
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12503 Lower paper roll drawer knife initialisation failure ] & [

PRDLknife ] initialisation failure.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1218 Short circuit to ground of 12-6-043 479
the [ PRDLKNIMO ] wiring

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 156
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12503 Lower paper roll drawer knife initialisation failure ] & [

PRDLKNIMO ] on until next cut.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1220 [ PRDLKNISEL ] inactive 12-2-044 451
Z-1220 [ PRDLKNISER ] inactive 12-2-043 451

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 157
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12504 Upper paper roll drawer knife sensor failure ] &

Incomplete cut from the [ PRDU ] rolls.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1218 [ PRDU ] knife assy 12-6-001 478
Z-1220

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 158
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12504 Upper paper roll drawer knife sensor failure ] & No cut of
the material from the [ PRDU ] rolls.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1218 [ PRDU ] knife assy 12-6-001 478
Z-1220

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 159
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12505 Middle paper roll drawer knife sensor failure ] &

Incomplete cut from the [ PRDM ] rolls.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1218 [ PRDM ] knife assy 12-6-021 478
Z-1220

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 160
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12505 Middle paper roll drawer knife sensor failure ] & No

cutted material from the [ PRDM ] rolls.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1218 [ PRDM ] knife assy 12-6-021 478
Z-1220

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 161
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12506 Lower paper roll drawer knife sensor failure ] &

Incomplete cut from the [ PRDL ] rolls.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1218 [ PRDL ] knife assy 12-6-041 441
Z-1220

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 162
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12506 Lower paper roll drawer knife sensor failure ] & No

cutted material from the [ PRDL ] rolls.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1218 [ PRDL ] knife assy 12-6-041 452
Z-1220

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 163
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12701 Sheet from upper paper sheet feeder too late at

PRDULEADSE ] & No sheet out of [ PSFU ] .
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1308 [ PSFU ] sheet positioning 962
assy
Z-1306 Short circuit to ground of 13-4-002 519
the [ PSFUELEMO ] wiring
Z-1306 [ PSFUEMPSE ] inactive 13-2-002 490
Z-1302 [ PSFUELESW ] active / 13-4-002 491
inactive
Z-1306 [ PSFUELEMO ] 13-4-002 492
Z-1306 [ PSFUELEMO ] inactive 13-4-002 492
Z-1302 [ PSFUSEPCL ] inactive 13-4-001 493
[ CPU-IO PSFUELEMO ] 13-4-002 850
output inactive
[ CPU-IO PSFUSEPCL ] 13-4-001 850
output inactive
Z-1306 [ PSFU ] lift assy 13-4-002 486
Z-1306 [ PSFU ] lift assy too slow 13-4-002 492
functioning
Z-1306 [ PSFU ] seperation assy 13-4-001 493
[ PSFU ] sheets too tight

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 164
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12701 Sheet from upper paper sheet feeder too late at

PRDULEADSE ] & Paper path full with sheets / double sheets /
no sheets out of [ PSFU ]
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1306 [ PSFU ] separation assy 13-4-001 493
bad functioning

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 165
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12701 Sheet from upper paper sheet feeder too late at

PRDULEADSE ] & Paperjam in [ PSF ] paperpath.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Sheet size too small to 962
transport
Z-1302 [ PSFU ] paper path 481
blocked with pieces of copy
material

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 166
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12702 Sheet from middle paper sheet feeder too late at

PRDULEADSE ] & No sheet out of the [ PSFM ]
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1308 [ PSFL ] sheet positioning 962
assy
Z-1306 Short circuit to ground of 13-4-042 519
the [ PSFLELEMO ] wiring
Z-1306 [ PSFLEMPSE ] inactive 13-2-042 490
Z-1302 [ PSFLELESW ] active / 13-4-042 491
inactive
Z-1306 [ PSFLELEMO ] 13-4-042 492
Z-1306 [ PSFLELEMO ] inactive 13-4-042 492
Z-1302 [ PSFLSEPCL ] inactive 13-4-041 493
[ CPU-IO PSFLELEMO ] 13-4-042 850
output inactive
[ CPU-IO PSFLSEPCL ] 13-4-041 850
output inactive
Z-1306 [ PSFL ] lift assy 13-4-042 486
Z-1306 [ PSFL ] lift assy too slow 13-4-042 492
functioning
Z-1306 [ PSFL ] seperation assy 13-4-041 493
Z-1306 [ PSFMEMPSE ] inactive 13-2-022 490
Z-1302 [ PSFMELESW ] active 13-4-022 491
Z-1306 [ PSFMELEMO ] insufficient 13-4-022 492
torque / inactive
Z-1302 [ PSFMSEPCL ] inactive 13-4-021 493
[ CPU-IO PSFMELEMO ] 13-4-022 850
output inactive
[ CPU-IO PSFMSEPCL ] 13-4-021 850
output inactive
Z-1306 [ PSFM ] lift assy not 13-4-022 486
functioning
Z-1306 [ PSFM ] lift assy bad 13-4-022 492
functioning (too slow)
Z-1306 [ PSFM ] separation assy 13-4-021 493
not functioning
[ PSFM ] sheets too tight 980

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 167
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12702 Sheet from middle paper sheet feeder too late at

PRDULEADSE ] & Paper path full with sheets / double sheets /
no sheets out of [ PSFM ].
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1306 [ PSFM ] separation assy 13-4-021 493
bad functioning

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 168
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12703 Sheet from lower paper sheet feeder too late at

PRDULEADSE ] & No cutted material from the [ PRDU ] rolls.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1218 [ PRDU ] knife assy 12-6-001 478
Z-1220

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 169
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12703 Sheet from lower paper sheet feeder too late at

PRDULEADSE ] & No sheet or double sheet out of the [ PSFL ]
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1308 [ PSFL ] sheet positioning 962
assy
Z-1306 Short circuit to ground of [ 13-4-042 519
PSFLELEMO ] wiring
Z-1306 [ PSFLEMPSE ] inactive 13-2-042 490
Z-1302 [ PSFLELESW ] active / 13-4-042 491
inactive
Z-1306 [ PSFLELEMO ] 13-4-042 492
Z-1306 [ PSFLELEMO ] inactive 13-4-042 492
Z-1302 [ PSFLSEPCL ] inactive 13-4-041 493
[ CPU-IO PSFLELEMO ] 13-4-042 850
output inactive
[ CPU-IO PSFLSEPCL ] 13-4-041 850
output inactive
Z-1306 [ PSFL ] lift assy 13-4-042 486
Z-1306 [ PSFL ] lift assy too slow 13-4-042 492
functioning
Z-1306 [ PSFL ] seperation assy 13-4-041 493

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 170
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12703 Sheet from lower paper sheet feeder too late at

PRDULEADSE ] & Paperjam in the [ PSF ] paper path
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

[ PSFL ] sheets too tight 962
Z-1302 [ PSFM ] paper path assy 481
The sheet size is smaller
than the customer setting
The sheet size is not
transportable (< 297
mm).

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 171
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12703 Sheet from lower paper sheet feeder too late at

PRDULEADSE ] & Paperpath full with sheets and / or double
sheets and / or skewed sheets or no sheets out of [ PSFL ].
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1306 [ PSFL ] separation assy 13-4-041 493
[ PSFL ] assy opened 962
during run

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 172
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12704 Sheet from upper paper sheet feeder too late at

PRDMLEADSE ] & No sheet out of [ PSFU ].

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1308 [ PSFU ] sheet positioning 962
assy
Z-1306 [ PSFUELEMO ] wiring 13-4-002 519
short circuit to ground from
power up
Z-1306 [ PSFUEMPSE ] inactive 13-2-002 490
Z-1302 [ PSFUELESW ] active / 13-4-002 491
inactive
Z-1306 [ PSFUELEMO ] insufficient 13-4-002 492
torque
Z-1306 [ PSFUELEMO ] inactive 13-4-002 492
Z-1302 [ PSFUSEPCL ] inactive 13-4-001 493
[ CPU IO PSFUELEMO ] 13-4-002 850
inactive
[ CPU IO PSFUSEPCL ] 13-4-001 850
output inactive
[ PSFU ] sheets too tight 980
Z-1306 [ PSFU ] lift assy not 13-4-002 486
functioning
Z-1306 [ PSFU ] lift assy bad 13-4-002 492
functioning (too slow)
Z-1306 [ PSFM ] separation assy 13-4-001 493
not functioning

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 173
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12704 Sheet from upper paper sheet feeder too late at

PRDMLEADSE ] & Paper path full with sheets / double sheets /
no sheets out of [ PSFU ].
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1306 [ PSFU ] separation assy 13-4-001 493
bad functioning

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 174
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12704 Sheet from upper paper sheet feeder too late at

PRDMLEADSE ] & Paperjam in [ PSF ] paper path.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

[ PSF ] sheets too tight 962
Z-1302 [ PSF ] paper path blocked 481
with pieces of copy material

The sheet size is smaller

than the customer setting
The sheet size is not
transportable (< 297
mm).

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 175
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12705 Sheet from middle paper sheet feeder too late at

PRDMLEADSE ] & No sheet out of [ PSFM ].

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

[ PSFM ] sheets pos. assy 962
[ PSFMELEMO ] wiring 13-4-022 519
short circuit to ground from
power up
[ PSFMEMPSE ] inactive 13-4-022 490
[ PSFMELESW ] active / 13-4-022 491
inactive
[ PSFMELEMO ] insufficient 13-4-022 492
torque
[ PSFMELEMO ] inactive 13-4-022 492
[ PSFMSEPCL ] inactive 13-4-021 493
[ CPU IO PSFMELEMO ] 13-4-022 850
inactive
[ IO PSFMSEPCL ] output 13-4-021 850
inactive
[ PSFM ] sheets too 980
tightened
[ PSFM ] lift assy not 13-4-022 486
functioning
[ PSFM ] lift assy bad 13-4-022 492
functioning (too slow)
[ PSFM ] separation assy 13-4-021 493
not functioning

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 176
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12705 Sheet from middle paper sheet feeder too late at

PRDMLEADSE ] & Paperjam in the [ PSF ] paper path.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Sheet size too small to 962
transport
Z-1302 [ PSF ] paper path blocked 481
with pieces of copy material

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 177
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12705 Sheet from middle paper sheet feeder too late at

PRDMLEADSE ] & Paperpath full with sheets / double sheets /
skewed sheets / no sheet out of [ PSDM ].
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1306 [ PSFM ] separation assy 13-4-021 493
bad functioning
[ PSFL ] assy opened
during run

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 178
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12706 Sheet from lower paper sheet feeder too late at

PRDMLEADSE & No cut material from [ PRDU ] rolls.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1218 [ PRDU ] knife assy 12-6-001 478
Z-1220

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 179
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12706 Sheet from lower paper sheet feeder too late at

PRDMLEADSE ] & No sheet out of the [ PSFL]
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1308 [ PSFL ] sheet positioning 962
assy
Z-1306 Short circuit to ground of [ 13-4-042 519
PSFLELEMO ] wiring
Z-1306 [ PSFLEMPSE ] inactive 13-2-042 490
Z-1302 [ PSFLELESW ] active / 13-4-042 491
inactive
Z-1306 [ PSFLELEMO ] 13-4-042 492
Z-1306 [ PSFLELEMO ] inactive 13-4-042 492
Z-1302 [ PSFLSEPCL ] inactive 13-4-041 493
[ CPU-IO PSFLELEMO ] 13-4-042 850
output inactive
[ CPU-IO PSFLSEPCL ] 13-4-041 850
output inactive
Z-1306 [ PSFL ] lift assy 13-4-042 486
Z-1306 [ PSFL ] lift assy too slow 13-4-042 492
functioning
Z-1306 [ PSFL ] seperation assy 13-4-041 493

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 180
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12706 Sheet from lower paper sheet feeder too late at

PRDMLEADSE ] & Paperjam in [ PSF ] paper path.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Sheet size too small to 962
transport
Z-1302 [ PSF ] paper path blocked 481
with pieces of copy material

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 181
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12706 Sheet from lower paper sheet feeder too late at

PRDMLEADSE ] & Paperpath full with sheets / double sheets /
skewed sheets / no sheet out of [ PSDL].
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1306 [ PSFL ] separation assy 13-4-041 493
bad functioning

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 182
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12707 Sheet from upper paper sheet feeder too late at

PRDLLEADSE ] & No sheet out of [ PSFU ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1308 [ PSFU ] sheet positioning 962
assy
Z-1306 [ PSFUELEMO ] wiring 13-4-002 519
short circuit to ground from
power up
Z-1306 [ PSFUEMPSE ] inactive 13-2-002 490
Z-1302 [ PSFUELESW ] active / 13-4-002 491
inactive
Z-1306 [ PSFUELEMO ] insufficient 13-4-002 492
torque
Z-1306 [ PSFUELEMO ] inactive 13-4-002 492
Z-1302 [ PSFUSEPCL ] inactive 13-4-001 493
[ CPU IO PSFUELEMO ] 13-4-002 850
inactive
[ CPU IO PSFUSEPCL ] 13-4-001 850
output inactive
[ PSFU ] sheets too tight 980
Z-1306 [ PSFU ] lift assy not 13-4-002 486
functioning
Z-1306 [ PSFU ] lift assy bad 13-4-002 492
functioning (too slow)
Z-1306 [ PSFM ] separation assy 13-4-001 493
not functioning

04.06.2002 183
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12707 Sheet from upper paper sheet feeder too late at

PRDLLEADSE ] & Paper path full with sheets / double sheets /
no sheets out of [ PSFU ].
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1306 [ PSFU ] separation assy 13-4-001 493
bad functioning

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 184
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12707 Sheet from upper paper sheet feeder too late at

PRDLLEADSE ] & Paperjam in [ PSF ] paperpath.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Sheet size too small to 962
transport
Z-1302 [ PSF ] paper path blocked 481
with pieces of copy material

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 185
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12708 Middle paper roll drawer roll 3 leading edge too late at
PRDULEADSE ] & Bad paper transport.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1206 Short circuit to ground of 12-6-022 479
the [ PRDMFEDMO1 ]
wiring
Z-1206 [ PRDMFEDMO1 ] not 12-6-022 452
active from power up with
roll feed
Z-1216 [ PRDM DRIVER FEDMO1 ] 12-6-022 460
output active from power up
Z-1216 [ PRDM DRIVER FEDMO1 ] 12-6-022 460
output inactive from power
up
Z-1210 [ PRDM Roll1 ] paperpath 442
Z-1206 assy

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 186
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12709 Middle paper roll drawer roll 4 leading edge too late at
PRDULEADSE ] & Bad paper transport.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1208 Short circuit to ground of 12-6-023 479
the [ PRDMFEDMO2 ]
wiring
Z-1208 [ PRDMFEDMO2 ] inactive 12-6-023 452
from power up with roll feed
Z-1216 [ PRDM DRIVER FEDMO2 ] 12-6-023 460
output on from power up
Z-1216 [ PRDM DRIVER FEDMO2 ] 12-6-023 460
output inactive from power
up
Z-1204 [ PRDM ] Roll paperpath 12-6-023 443
Z-1208 assy

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 187
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12710 Lower paper roll drawer roll 5 leading edge too late at
PRDMLEADSE ] & Bad paper transport.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1206 Short circuit to ground of 12-6-042 479
the [ PRDLFEDMO1 ] wiring
Z-1206 [ PRDLFEDMO1 ] 12-6-042 452
Z-1216 [ PRDL DRIVER FEDMO1 ] 12-6-042 460
output active
Z-1216 [ PRDL DRIVER FEDMO1 ] 12-6-042 460
output inactive
Z-1216 [ PRDL DRIVER FEDMO2 ] 12-6-043 460
output active
Z-1210 [ PRDL Roll1 ] paperpath 12-6-042 442
Z-1206 assy

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 188
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12711 Lower paper roll drawer roll 6 leading edge too late at
PRDMLEADSE ] & Bad paper transport.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1208 Short circuit to ground of 12-6-043 479
the [ PRDLFEDMO2 ] wiring
Z-1204 [ PRDL roll 2 ] paper path 12-6-043 443
Z-1208 assy
Z-1208 [ PRDLFEDMO2 ] inactive 12-6-043 452
from power up
Z-1216 [ PRDL DRIVER FEDMO2 ] 12-6-043 460
output inactive from power
up

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 189
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12712 Middle paper roll drawer trailing edge too late at

PRDULEADSE ] & No cut material from the [ PRDM ] rolls.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1218 [ PRDM ] knife assy 12-6-021 478
Z-1220 (Correct knife movement
but no cut)

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 190
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 12714 Lower paper roll drawer trailing edge too late at

PRDMLEADSE ] & No cut material from the [ PRDL ] rolls.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1218 [ PRDL ] knife assy 12-6-041 441
Z-1220 (Correct knife movement
but no cut)

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 191
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15712 [PRT] Middle paper roll drawer roll 3 leading edge too
late at PTRINSE ] & Paperjam
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Z-1502 [ PTRBULSE ] 578
paperpath assy not 15-2-00
functioning 2
Z-1508 [ PTRINSE ] paperpath 578
assy not functioning 15-2-00
4
Z-1504 [ PTRLEADSE ] 578
paperpath assy not 15-2-00
functioning 1

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 192
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15001 [PRT] PTRSUCFAN failure ] & No transport of small

prints
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1510 PTRSUCFAN failure 15-6-002 570
Z-2202 PTRSUCFANCONT failure 15-2-008 852

04.06.2002 193
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15502 [PRT] PTRIRT switch initialisation failure ] &

Paperswitch does not function
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Z-1516 PTR IRT switch failure
15-6-00
4
Z-1516 PTR IRT switch sensor
failure 15-2-00
7

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 194
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15503 [PRT] PTRIRT switch failure ] & Paperswitch does not

function
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Z-1516 PTR IRT switch failure
15-6-00
4
Z-1516 PTR IRT switch sensor
failure 15-2-00
7

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 195
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15504 [PRT] Print / copy too late at PTRIRTSE ]: IRT sensor

failing
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Z-1512 PTRIRTSE failing 15-2-00

6

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 196
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15701 [PRT] Upper paper roll drawer roll 1 leading edge too
late at PTRLEADSE ] & Bad paper transport.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Z-1206 [ PRDUFEDMO1 ] 452
inactive 12-6-00
2
Z-1216 [ PRDU DRIVER 460
FEDMO1] output 12-6-00
inactive / partly on 2
Z-1210 [ PRDU roll1 ] paper 442
Z-1206 path assy 12-6-00
2

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 197
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15701 [PRT] Upper paper roll drawer roll 1 leading edge too
late at PTRLEADSE ] & Print material too long for print : paper
jam.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Z-1504 [ PTRLEADSE ] 573
inactive 15-2-00
1

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 198
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15702 [PRT] Upper paper roll drawer roll 2 leading edge too
late at PTRLEADSE ] & Bad paper transport.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Z-1208 [ PRDUFEDMO2 ] 452
inactive 12-6-02
3
Z-1216 [ PRDU DRIVER 460
FEDMO2 ] output 12-6-00
inactive / partly on 3
Z-1204 [ PRDU roll2 ] paper 442
Z-1208 path assy 12-6-00
3

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 199
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15705 [PRT] Speed too low at PTROUTSE ] & Print material not
transported above the heater : brown print material / smoke.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0802 Guide wire of the absorber 50 287
assy has no connection to
ground
Z-0806 Guide wire heater assy has 50 287
no connection to ground
Z-1510 PTRSUCFAN not active for 15-6-002 570
small formats
Z-2202 PTRSUCFANCONT failure 15-2-008 852

04.06.2002 200
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15706 [PRT] Print / copy too late at PTROUTSE ] & No transport

of small prints

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Z-1510 PTRSUCFAN failure 570
15-6-00
2
Z-2202 PTRSUCFANCONT 852
failure 15-2-00
8

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 201
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15707 [PRT] Leading edge too late at PTRIRTSE ] & Paperjam

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1514 [ PTRIRT ] paperpath assy 50 578
Z-1516 not functioning

04.06.2002 202
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15708 [PRT] Trailing edge too late at PTRINSE ] & Large bulge
in [ PTRBULGE ] section: paper jam
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-1502 [ PTRBULSE ] inactive 15-2-002 578

04.06.2002 203
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15710 [PRT] Upper paper roll drawer roll 1 leading edge too
late at PTRINSE ] & Paper path beneath [ PRDM ] full with paper /
sheets
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Z-1202 [ PRDM ] vertical paper 50 444
path assy
Z-1204
Z-1504
Z-1502

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 204
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15710 [PRT] Upper paper roll drawer roll 1 leading edge too
late at PTRINSE ] & Paperjam
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Z-1502 [ PTRBULSE ] 578
paperpath assy not 15-2-00
functioning 2
Z-1508 [ PTRINSE ] paperpath 578
assy not functioning 15-2-00
4
Z-1504 [ PTRLEADSE ] 578
paperpath assy not 15-2-00
functioning 1

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 205
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15710 [PRT] Upper paper roll drawer roll 1 leading edge too
late at PTRINSE ] & Paperpath beneath [ PRDU ] full with paper /
sheets.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Z-1202 [ PRDU ] vertical paper 50 444
path assy
Z-1204
Z-1504
Z-1502

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 206
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15710 [PRT] Upper paper roll drawer roll 1 leading edge too
late at PTRINSE ] & Vertical paper path is full with paper / sheets
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Z-1202 [ PRD ] vertical paper 50 444
path assy
Z-1204
Z-1504
Z-1502

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 207
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15710 [PRT] Upper paper roll drawer roll 1 leading edge too
late at PTRINSE ]: Paperjam in [ PTR ] section / manual feed not
possible.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Z-1508 [ PTRINSE ] inactive 444
15-2-00
4

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 208
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15711 [PRT] Upper paper roll drawer roll 2 leading edge too
late at PTRINSE ] & Paper path beneath [ PRDM ] full with paper /
sheets
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Z-1202 [ PRD ] vertical paper 50 444
path assy
Z-1204
Z-1504
Z-1502

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 209
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15711 [PRT] Upper paper roll drawer roll 2 leading edge too
late at PTRINSE ] & Paper path beneath [ PRDU ] full with paper /
sheets
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Z-1202 [ PRD ] vertical paper 50 444
path assy
Z-1204
Z-1504
Z-1502

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 210
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15711 [PRT] Upper paper roll drawer roll 2 leading edge too
late at PTRINSE ] & Paperjam
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Z-1502 [ PTRBULSE ] 578
paperpath assy not 15-2-00
functioning 2
Z-1508 [ PTRINSE ] paperpath 578
assy not functioning 15-2-00
4
Z-1504 [ PTRLEADSE ] 578
paperpath assy not 15-2-00
functioning 1

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 211
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15711 [PRT] Upper paper roll drawer roll 2 leading edge too
late at PTRINSE ] & Paperjam in [ PTR ] section / manual feed
not possible
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PTRINSE ] inactive 15-2-00 573
4

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 212
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15711 [PRT] Upper paper roll drawer roll 2 leading edge too
late at PTRINSE ] & Vertical paper path full with paper / sheets
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Z-1202 [ PRD ] vertical paper 50 444
path assy
Z-1204
Z-1504
Z-1502

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 213
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15712 [PRT] Middle paper roll drawer roll 3 leading edge too
late at PTRINSE ] & Paper path beneath [ PRDL ] full with paper /
sheets
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PRDL ] vertical paper 444
path assy

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 214
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15712 [PRT] Middle paper roll drawer roll 3 leading edge too
late at PTRINSE ] & Paper path beneath [ PRDM ] full with paper /
sheets
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PRDM ] vertical paper 444
path assy

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 215
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15712 [PRT] Middle paper roll drawer roll 3 leading edge too
late at PTRINSE ] & Paper path beneath [ PRDU ] full with paper /
sheets
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PRDU ] vertical paper 444
path assy

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 216
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15712 [PRT] Middle paper roll drawer roll 3 leading edge too
late at PTRINSE ] & Paperjam in [ PTR ] section / manual feed
not possible
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PTRINSE ] inactive 15-2-00 573
4

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 217
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15713 [PRT] Middle paper roll drawer roll 4 leading edge too
late at PRTINSE ] & Paper path beneath [ PRDL ] full with paper /
sheets
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PRDL ] vertical paper
path assy

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 218
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15713 [PRT] Middle paper roll drawer roll 4 leading edge too
late at PRTINSE ] & Paper path beneath [ PRDM ] full with paper /
sheets
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PRDM ] vertical paper
path assy

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 219
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15713 [PRT] Middle paper roll drawer roll 4 leading edge too
late at PRTINSE ] & Paper path beneath [ PRDU ] full with paper /
sheets
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PRDU ] vertical paper
path assy

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 220
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15713 [PRT] Middle paper roll drawer roll 4 leading edge too
late at PRTINSE ] & Paperjam
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Z-1502 [ PTRBULSE ] 578
paperpath assy not 15-2-00
functioning 2
Z-1508 [ PTRINSE ] paperpath 578
assy not functioning 15-2-00
4
Z-1504 [ PTRLEADSE ] 578
paperpath assy not 15-2-00
functioning 1

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 221
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15713 [PRT] Middle paper roll drawer roll 4 leading edge too
late at PRTINSE ] & Paperjam in [ PTR ] section / manual feed
not possible
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PTRINSE ] inactive 15-2-00 573
4

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 222
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15714 [PRT] Lower paper roll drawer roll 5 leading edge too
late at PTRINSE ] & Paper path beneath [ PRDL ] full with paper /
sheets
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PRDL ] vertical paper 444
path assy

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 223
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15714 [PRT] Lower paper roll drawer roll 5 leading edge too
late at PTRINSE ] & Paper path beneath [ PRDM ] full with paper /
sheets
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PRDM ] vertical paper 444
path assy

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 224
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15714 [PRT] Lower paper roll drawer roll 5 leading edge too
late at PTRINSE ] & Paper path beneath [ PRDU ] full with paper /
sheets
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PRDU ] vertical paper 444
path assy

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 225
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15714 [PRT] Lower paper roll drawer roll 5 leading edge too
late at PTRINSE ] & Paperjam
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Z-1502 [ PTRBULSE ] 578
paperpath assy not 15-2-00
functioning 2
Z-1508 [ PTRINSE ] paperpath 578
assy not functioning 15-2-00
4
Z-1504 [ PTRLEADSE ] 578
paperpath assy not 15-2-00
functioning 1

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 226
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15714 [PRT] Lower paper roll drawer roll 5 leading edge too
late at PTRINSE ] & Paperjam in [ PTR ] section / manual feed
not possible
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PTRINSE ] inactive 15-2-00 573
4

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 227
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15715 [PRT] Lower paper roll drawer roll 6 leading edge too
late at PTRINSE ] & Paper path beneath [ PRDL ] full with paper /
sheets
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PRDL ] vertical paper 444
path assy

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 228
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15715 [PRT] Lower paper roll drawer roll 6 leading edge too
late at PTRINSE ] & Paper path beneath [ PRDM ] full with paper /
sheets
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PRDM ] vertical paper 444
path assy

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 229
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15715 [PRT] Lower paper roll drawer roll 6 leading edge too
late at PTRINSE ] & Paper path beneath [ PRDU ] full with paper /
sheets
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PRDU ] vertical paper 444
path assy

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 230
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15715 [PRT] Lower paper roll drawer roll 6 leading edge too
late at PTRINSE ] & Paperjam
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Z-1502 [ PTRBULSE ] 578
paperpath assy not 15-2-00
functioning 2
Z-1508 [ PTRINSE ] paperpath 578
assy not functioning 15-2-00
4
Z-1504 [ PTRLEADSE ] 578
paperpath assy not 15-2-00
functioning 1

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 231
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15715 [PRT] Lower paper roll drawer roll 6 leading edge too
late at PTRINSE ] & Paperjam in [ PTR ] section / manual feed
not possible.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PTRINSE ] inactive 15-2-00 444
4

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 232
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15716 [PRT] Sheet upper paper sheet feeder too late at

PTRINSE ] & Paper path beneath [ PRDL ] full with paper / sheets
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PRDL ] vertical paper 444
path assy

04.06.2002 233
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15716 [PRT] Sheet upper paper sheet feeder too late at

PTRINSE ] & Paper path beneath [ PRDM ] full with paper /
sheets
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PRDM ] vertical paper 444
path assy

04.06.2002 234
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15716 [PRT] Sheet upper paper sheet feeder too late at

PTRINSE ] & Paper path beneath [ PRDU ] full with paper /
sheets
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PRDU ] vertical paper 444
path assy

04.06.2002 235
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15716 [PRT] Sheet upper paper sheet feeder too late at

PTRINSE ] & Paperjam
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Z-1502 [ PTRBULSE ] 578
paperpath assy not 15-2-00
functioning 2
Z-1508 [ PTRINSE ] paperpath 578
assy not functioning 15-2-00
4
Z-1504 [ PTRLEADSE ] 578
paperpath assy not 15-2-00
functioning 1

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 236
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15716 [PRT] Sheet upper paper sheet feeder too late at

PTRINSE ] & Paperjam in [ PTR ] section / manual feed not
possible.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PTRINSE ] inactive 15-2-00 573
4

04.06.2002 237
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15717 [PRT] Sheet middle paper sheet feeder too late at

PTRINSE ] & Paper path beneath [ PRDL ] vertical transport full
with paper / sheets
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PRDL ] vertical paper 444
path assy

04.06.2002 238
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15717 [PRT] Sheet middle paper sheet feeder too late at

PTRINSE ] & Paper path beneath [ PRDM ] vertical transport full
with paper / sheets
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PRDM ] vertical paper 444
path assy

04.06.2002 239
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15717 [PRT] Sheet middle paper sheet feeder too late at

PTRINSE ] & Paper path beneath [ PRDU ] vertical transport full
with paper / sheets
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PRDU ] vertical paper 444
path assy

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 240
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15717 [PRT] Sheet middle paper sheet feeder too late at

PTRINSE ] & Paperjam
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Z-1502 [ PTRBULSE ] 578
paperpath assy not 15-2-00
functioning 2
Z-1508 [ PTRINSE ] paperpath 578
assy not functioning 15-2-00
4
Z-1504 [ PTRLEADSE ] 578
paperpath assy not 15-2-00
functioning 1

04.06.2002 241
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15717 [PRT] Sheet middle paper sheet feeder too late at

PTRINSE ] & Paperjam in [ PTR ] section / manual feed not
possible
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PTRINSE ] inactive 15-4-00 573
4

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 242
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15718 [PRT] Sheet lower paper sheet feeder too late at

PTRINSE ] & Paper path beneath [ PRDL ] full with paper / sheets
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PRDL ] vertical paper 444
path assy

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 243
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15718 [PRT] Sheet lower paper sheet feeder too late at

PTRINSE ] & Paper path beneath [ PRDM ] full with paper /
sheets
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PRDM ] vertical paper 444
path assy

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 244
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15718 [PRT] Sheet lower paper sheet feeder too late at

PTRINSE ] & Paper path beneath [ PRDU ] full with paper /
sheets
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PRDU ] vertical paper 444
path assy

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 245
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15718 [PRT] Sheet lower paper sheet feeder too late at

PTRINSE ] & Paperjam in [ PTR ] section / manual feed not
possible
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PTRINSE ] inactive 15-2-00 573
4

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 246
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22001 [PRT] PBA CPU-I/O watchdog in the printer ]

Description
The watchdog is a piece of hardware on the Printer CPU IO board. It checks that the software is correctly
running.
If the watchdog on the Printer CPU IO board becomes active the operator has to switch off and on the Printer.
After power-up the CPU-IO board detects automatically that the watchdog was active and the error is generated.
The watchdog becomes also active during test 73 when the printer goes into software-download mode.
This is also a way to test the hardware of the watchdog.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Z-2204 [ PRT-PBA CPU-I/O ] 73 Replace 850

watchdog circuit defect board if
printer
does
not go
in
downlo
ad
mode.
Z-2204 [ PRT-PBA CPU-I/O ] Write 847
software is not running Proble
correctly m
Report
if after
replace
ment
the
problem
is not
solved.
(Include
backup
files of
test 71)

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 247
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22002 [PRT] PBA CPU-I/O EPROM failure in the printer ]

Description
During power up of the CPU-IO board the checksum of the FEPROM is calculated and compared with the
correct value.
If they do not match the following error is generated.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Z-2204 [ PRT-PBA CPU-I/O ] Replace 850

FEPROM defective, board
detected at power up

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 248
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22003 [PRT] PBA CPU-I/O IO-ASIC failure in the printer ]

Description
During power up of the CPU-IO board the checksum of the IOASICs (input and output IC's) are tested.
If a fault is detected the following error is generated.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Z-2204 [ PRT-PBA CPU-I/O ] Replace 850

IOASIC defective, board
detected at power up

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 249
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22004 [PRT] PBA CPU-I/O RAM failure in the printer ]

Description
During power up of the CPU-IO board test patterns are written and read from the RAM.
If a fault is detected the following error is generated.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Z-2204 [ PRT-PBA CPU-I/O ] Replace 850

RAM defective, board
detected at power up

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 250
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22005 [PTR] PBA CPU-I/O DUART failure in the printer ]

Description
During power up of the CPU-IO board the DUART (communication IC) is tested.
If a fault is detected the following error is generated.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Z-2204 [ PRT-PBA CPU-I/O ] Replace 850

DUART defective, board
detected at power up

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 251
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22006 [PRT] PBA CPU-I/O ADC failure in the printer ]

Description
During power up of the CPU-IO board the ADC (analogue signals to digital signals converter IC) is tested.
If a fault is detected the following error is generated.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Z-2204 [ PRT-PBA CPU-I/O ] Replace 850

ADC defective, board
detected at power up

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 252
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22007 [PTR] PBA CPU-I/O software failure in the printer ]

Description
If the CPU-IO board firmware detects a program contradiction in the software the following error is generated.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Z-2204 [ PRT-PBA CPU-I/O ] Write 847

software failure Proble
m
Report
(Include
backup
files of
test 71)

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 253
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22008 [PRT] PBA CPU-I/O CPU failure in the printer ]

Description
If the CPU (processor) detects a hardware contradiction the following error is generated.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Z-2204 [ PRT-PBA CPU-I/O ] Write 847

software is not running Proble
correctly m
report
(Include
backup
files of
test 71)

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 254
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22009 [PRT] safety relais ON failure ]

Description
In case of a too high fuser temperature this is detected via the CPU-IO software.
As an extra safety-precaution there is also a hardware-circuit present on the CPU-IO board that will react in case
the software detection fails.
This safety circuit will switch off the safety relais.
The detection is based on the phenomenon that in case this error occurs no longer pulses are generated on the
CONMAINSII input.
This input measures the mains-frequency

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-0806 Fusing NTC1..6 defect 08-9-001 291

Z-2202 Fusing hardware circuit 08-6-001 844

defect

04.06.2002 255
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22010 [PRT] Safety relais OFF failure ]

Description
The correct functioning of the safety relais is checked via the CONMAINSII input.
This input measures the mains-frequency. In case the relais is switched off, no pulses should be measured.
If pulses are detected the error is generated.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Z-2202 Relais defect 08-6-001 844

Z-2204 PRT-PBA CPU-I/O output 08-6-001 850

defect

04.06.2002 256
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22028 [PRT] Copy counter not connected ]

Description
Each time the copy counter is activated the software detects, via a input, if the copy counter is connected.
If this is not detected the following error is generated.
Check for signs if the customer has tried to disconnect the counter.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Z-2202 Copy counter defect 22-6-00 If fails, 843

6 check
wiring +
Copy
counter
impeda
nce
Z-2204 [ CPU IO PBA ] defect 22-6-00 850
6

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 257
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22501 [PTR] PBA CPU-I/O NOVRAM category 2 failure in the

printer ] & Printer settings on default
Description
Category 2 NOVRAM data contains Printer parameters that are not critical for functioning.
At power-up all parameters are checked for legal values and if not correct the default value will be filled in.
The next error will be generated.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Z-2204 [ PRT-PBA CPU-I/O ] Switch Replace 850

NOVRAM category 2 Printer board if
values not correct at OFF/On errors
power-up several occurs
times after
Printer
OFF/O
N test.

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 258
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22506 [PRT] Controller - printer interface error ]

Description
This error occurs if the Scanner recieves in-correct data from the Controller

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Z-2204 [ PRT-PBA CPU-I/O ] Write 860

failure Proble
m
Report
if
problem
occurs
more as
ones
(Include
backup
files of
test 71)

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 259
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22903 [SYS] Configuration failure ]

Description
During power-up the configuration of the system is checked for correctness.
If a configuration is determined that can not exist the following error is reported.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Configure Printer / Scanner/ 90 Re-
Controller / Folder Configure
the
system

04.06.2002 260
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 23501 [PRT] Speed DRIMO out of range ] & Paperjam in the [

PTR ] section and copy material brown in the fuser section
Description

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

[ DRIMO ] inactive 23-6-001 890
[ DRIMO ] blokked 23-6-001 890
Driver [ DRIMO output ] 23-6-001 900
inactive

04.06.2002 261
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 23501 [PRT] Speed DRIMO out of range ] & Paperspeed to high,

decreased copy quality (toner not fused) and image streched in
the transport direction.
Description

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

[ DRIMOSE ] inactive 23-2-001 892
Driver [ DRIMO output ] 23-6-001 900
active in run

04.06.2002 262
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 23501 [PRT] Speed DRIMO out of range ] & Paperspeed to

slow, decreased copy quality and image compressed in the
transport direction.
Description

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

[ DRIMO ] slipping 23-6-001 888

04.06.2002 263
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 23501 [PRT] Speed DRIMO out of range ] & [ DRIMO ] not

rotating
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

[ 2202X2 ] not connected 23-6-001 859
from power up
[ 2203X2 ] not connected 23-6-001 859
from power up
[ 2203X6 ] not connected 13-6-001 859
form power up

04.06.2002 264
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25715 [PRT] Paper transport flap opened during run ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PTRFLAPSW ] 15-2-00 962
inactive during run 3

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 265
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25711 [PRT] Upper paper roll drawer opened during run ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 266
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25001 [SYS] control bus failure: CTR - PRT ]

Description
This error is generated if the Printer is
switched off during run. Basically this
error is assumed to be caused by the
customer.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Printer is switched off Instruct
during run. customer
Electrical problem in Printer Solve
problem
[ + 5VPHD ] short circuit to 159
frame during RUN
[ CPU IO PBA ] defect 850
Printhead 140

04.06.2002 267
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25701 [PRT] Upper paper sheet feeder opened during run ] &
Paper path full with paper / sheets
Description
This errors occurs when the paper sheet feeder is opened during run.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PSFU ] assy opened Instruct 962
during run custom
er
Z-1310 Switch defect 13-2-00 491
3

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 268
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25702 [PRT] Middle paper sheet feeder opened during run ] &
Paper path full with paper / sheets
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PSFM ] assy opened 13-2-02 962
during run 3

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 269
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25703 [PRT] Lower paper sheet feeder opened during run ] &
Paper path full with paper / sheets
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PSFL ] assy opened
during run

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 270
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25704 [PRT] Sheet from upper paper sheet feeder not

transportable in PTR path ] & Copy material brown / smoke
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Copy material length 962
(from [ PSFU ] ) shorter
than 297 mm

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 271
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25704 [PRT] Sheet from upper paper sheet feeder not

transportable in PTR path ] & Copy material stuck at
sheetfeeder / roll drawer
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Copy material length 962
shorter than 297 mm
Slip in feed rollers roll 446
drawer
Slip in feed rollers 487
sheet feeder
PRDxLEADSE defect upper 450
drawer

middle
draw.

lower
drawer

04.06.2002 272
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25705 [PRT] Sheet from middle paper sheet feeder not

transportable in PTR path ] & Copy material brown / smoke
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Copy material length 962
(from [ PSFM ] ) shorter
than 297 mm

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 273
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25705 [PRT] Sheet from middle paper sheet feeder not

transportable in PTR path ] & Copy material stuck at
sheetfeeder / roll drawer
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Copy material length 962
shorter than 297 mm
Slip in feed rollers roll 446
drawer
Slip in feed rollers 487
sheet feeder
PRDxLEADSE defect upper 450
drawer

middle
draw.

lower
drawer

04.06.2002 274
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25706 [PRT] Sheet from lower paper sheet feeder not

transportable in PTR path ] & Copy material brown / smoke
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Copy material length 962
(from [ PSFL ] ) shorter
than 297 mm

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 275
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25706 [PRT] Sheet from lower paper sheet feeder not

transportable in PTR path ] & Copy material stuck at sheetfeeder
/ roll drawer
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Copy material length 962
shorter than 297 mm
Slip in feed rollers roll 446
drawer
Slip in feed rollers 487
sheet feeder
PRDxLEADSE defect upper 450
drawer
middle
draw.

lower
drawer

04.06.2002 276
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25707 [PRT] Sheet from upper paper sheet feeder not

transportable in PTR path ] & Copy material brown / smoke
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Copy material length 962
(from [ PSFU ] ) shorter
than 297 mm

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 277
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25707 [PRT] Sheet from upper paper sheet feeder not

transportable in PTR path ] & Copy material stuck at sheetfeeder
/ roll drawer
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Copy material length 962
shorter than 297 mm
Slip in feed rollers roll 446
drawer
Slip in feed rollers 487
sheet feeder
PRDxLEADSE defect upper 450
drawer
middle
draw.

lower
drawer

04.06.2002 278
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25708 [PRT] Sheet from middle paper sheet feeder not

transportable in PTR path ] & Copy material brown / smoke
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Copy material length 962
(from [ PSFM ] ) shorter
than 297 mm

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 279
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25708 [PRT] Sheet from middle paper sheet feeder not

transportable in PTR path ] & Copy material stuck at sheetfeeder
/ roll drawer
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Copy material length 962
shorter than 297 mm
Slip in feed rollers roll 446
drawer
Slip in feed rollers 487
sheet feeder
PRDxLEADSE defect upper 450
drawer
middle
draw.

lower
drawer

04.06.2002 280
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25709 [PRT] Sheet from lower paper sheet feeder not

tranportable in PTR path ] & Copy material brown / smoke
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Copy material length 962
(from [ PSFL ] ) shorter
than 297 mm

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 281
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25709 [PRT] Sheet from lower paper sheet feeder not

tranportable in PTR path ] & Copy material stuck at sheetfeeder /
roll drawer
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Copy material length 962
shorter than 297 mm
Slip in feed rollers roll 446
drawer
Slip in feed rollers 487
sheet feeder
PRDxLEADSE defect upper 450
drawer
middle
draw.

lower
drawer

04.06.2002 282
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25710 [PRT] Sheet from upper paper sheet feeder not

tranportable in PTR path ] & Copy material brown / smoke
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Copy material length 962
(from [ PSFU ] ) shorter
than 297 mm

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 283
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25710 [PRT] Sheet from upper paper sheet feeder not

tranportable in PTR path ] & Copy material stuck at sheetfeeder /
roll drawer
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Copy material length 962
shorter than 297 mm
Slip in feed rollers roll 446
drawer
Slip in feed rollers 487
sheet feeder
PRDxLEADSE defect upper 450
drawer
middle
draw.

lower
drawer

04.06.2002 284
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25712 [PRT] Middle paper roll drawer opened during run ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 285
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25713 [PRT] Lower paper roll drawer opened during run ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 286
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25714 [PRT] Manual sheet not transportable in paper transport

path ] & Copy material brown / smoke
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Copy material length 962
(from manual feed) is
shorter than 297 mm :
no transport above the
heater

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 287
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25714 [PRT] Manual sheet not transportable in paper transport

path ] & Paperjam under [ PHC ]
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Copy material length 962
(from manual feed) is
shorter than 297 mm
:no transport
Wrong position (too 568
low) of [ PTR ] pick-up
pawl

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 288
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25715 [PRT] Paper transport flap opened during run ] & [ PTR ]
paper path full with paper
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PTR ] flap opened 962
during run

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 289
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25716 [PRT] Fuser cover opened during run ] & Toner not fused
on the copy material
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Connector [ 2201x3 ] 08-9-00 319
disconnected from 1
power up : heater stays
cold

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 290
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25717 [PRT] Paper path upper paper roll drawer leading edge is
not free ]
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 291
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25718 [PRT] Paper path middle paper roll drawer leading edge
sensor is not free ]
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 292
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25719 [PRT] Paper path lower paper roll drawer leading edge
sensor is not free (PRDLLEADSE) ]
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 293
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25720 [PRT] Paper path paper transport leading edge sensor is

not free (PTRLEADSE) ] & Remove paper message
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PTRLEADSE ] active 15-2-00 573
from power up 1

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 294
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25721 [PRT] Paper path paper transport input sensor is not free
(PTRINSE) ] & Remove paper message
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PTRINSE ] active from 15-2-00 573
power up 4

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 295
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25722 [PRT] PTRIRTSE path not free: [ IRT ] full message

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

[ PTRIRTSE ] active from 15-2-006 573
power up

04.06.2002 296
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25723 [PRT] Paper path paper transport bulge sensor is not

free ] & Remove paper message
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PTRBULSE ] active 15-2-00 578
2

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 297
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25724 [PRT] Manual sheet removed during run ] & Copy

material is brown / smoke
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Copy material is 317
removed before the
start of the run

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 298
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25725 [PRT] PTROUTSE path not free ]: Manual sheet removed

in run
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Sheet of manual feed is 962
removed in run

04.06.2002 299
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25772 [PRT] Sheet from upper paper sheet feeder is too long at
PRDULEADSE ] & Paperpath full with sheets / double sheets /
pieces of copy material
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PSFUSEPCL ] active 13-4-00 493
1
[ PSFUSEPCL ] wiring 13-4-00 519
short circuit to ground 1
from power up
[ CPU IO PSFMSEPCL 13-4-00 850
] output active 1

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 300
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25773 [PRT] Sheet from middle paper sheet feeder is too long
at PRDULEADSE ] & Paperpath full with sheets / double sheets /
pieces of copy material
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PSFLSEPCL ] active 13-4-02 493
1
[ PSFMSEPCL ] wiring 13-4-02 519
short circuit to ground 1
from power up
[ CPU IO PSFMSEPCL 13-4-02 850
] output active 1

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 301
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25774 [PRT] Sheet from lower paper sheet feeder is too long at
PRDULEADSE ] & Paperpath full with sheets / double sheets /
pieces of copy material
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Short circuit to ground 13-4-04 519
from power up of [ 1
PSFLSEPCL ] wiring
[ CPU-IO PSFLSEPCL ] 13-4-04 850
output active 1
[ PSFMSEPCL ] active 13-4-04 493
1

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 302
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25775 [PRT] Sheet from upper paper sheet feeder is too long at
PRDMLEADSE ] & Paperpath full with sheets / double sheets /
pieces of copy material
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Short circuit to ground 13-4-00 519
from power up of the [ 1
PSFUSEPCL ] wiring
[ CPU IO PSFUSEPCL 13-4-00 850
] output active 1
[ PSFUSEPCL ] active 13-4-00 493
1

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 303
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25776 [PRT] Sheet from middle paper sheet feeder is too long
at PRDMLEADSE ] & Paperpath full with sheets / double sheets /
pieces of copy material
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PSFLSEPCL ] active 13-4-02 493
1
[ PSFMSEPCL ] short 13-4-02 519
circuit to ground from 1
power up
[ CPU IO PSFMSEPCL 13-4-02 850
] active 1

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 304
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25777 [PRT] Sheet from lower paper sheet feeder is too long at
PRDMLEADSE ] & Paperpath full with sheets / double sheets /
pieces of copy material
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Short circuit to ground 13-4-04 519
from power up of the [ 1
PSFLSEPCL ] wiring
[ CPU IO PSFLSEPCL ] 13-4-04 850
output active 1
[ PSFMSEPCL ] active 13-4-04 493
1

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 305
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25778 [PRT] Sheet from upper paper sheet feeder is too long at
PRDLLEADSE ] & Paperpath full with sheets / double sheets /
pieces of copy material
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Short circuit to ground 13-4-00 519
from power up of the [ 1
PSFUSEPCL ] wiring
[ CPU IO PSFUSEPCL 13-4-00 850
] output active 1
[ PSFUSEPCL ] active 13-4-00 493
1

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 306
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25801 [PRT] Sheet from upper paper sheet feeder is too short
at PRDULEADSE ] & Information loss on the print
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Sheet size is shorter 962
than customer settings

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 307
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25802 [PRT] Sheet from middle paper sheet feeder is too short
at PRDULEADSE ] & Information loss on the print
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Sheet size is shorter 962
than customer settings

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 308
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25803 [PRT] Sheet from lower paper sheet feeder is too short at
PRDULEADSE ] & Information loss on the print
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Sheet size is shorter 962
than customer settings

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 309
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25804 [PRT] Sheet from upper paper sheet feeder is too short
at PRDMLEADSE ] & Information loss on the print
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 310
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25805 [PRT] Sheet from middle paper sheet feeder is too short
at PRDMLEADSE ] & Information loss on the print
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 311
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25806 [PRT] Sheet from lower paper sheet feeder is too short at
PRDMLEADSE ] & Information loss on the print
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Sheet size is shorter 962
than customer settings

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 312
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25807 [PRT] Sheet from upper paper sheet feeder is too short
at PRDLLEADSE ] & Information loss on the print
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Sheet size is shorter 962
than customer settings

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 313
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15720 [FOL] Print / copy too late at PTRFOLTRAISE3 ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PTRFOLTRAISE3 ] 599
not connected
[ 1505X2 ] not 599
connected : [
PTRFOLWISEx ] and [
PTRFOLTRAISEx ] not
functioning

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 314
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15720 [FOL] Print / copy too late at PTRFOLTRAISE3 ] & First

folding does not work
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PTRFOLTRAISE3 ] 15-2-01 586
inactive 5
Connector [ 1803X8 ] 719
not connected

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 315
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15720 [FOL] Print / copy too late at PTRFOLTRAISE3 ] & No

paper in the folder
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PTRFOLCOLCL ] 15-2-01 587
inactive 3
[ PTRFOLFEDCL ] 15-4-01 587
inactive 2

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 316
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15721 [FOL] Trailing edge too late at PTRFOLTRAISE3 ] & First

folding does not work
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

[ PTRFOLTRAISE3 ] active 15-2-015 586

04.06.2002 317
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15722 [FOL] Print / copy too late at PTRFOLTRAISE5 ] & First

folding does not work
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PTRFOLTRAISE5 ] 599
not connected
[ PTRFOLTRAISE5 ] 15-2-01 586
inactive 7

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 318
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15722 [FOL] Print / copy too late at PTRFOLTRAISE5 ] &

Paperjam
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PTRFOLROSE ] 15-4-01 588
active 5

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 319
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15723 [FOL] Trailing edge too late at PTRFOLTRAISE5 ] & First

folding does not work
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

[ PTRFOLTRAISE5 ] active 15-2-017 586

04.06.2002 320
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15724 [FOL] Print / copy too early at FOL1PTRINSE ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 321
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 15725 [FOL] Print / copy too late FOL1PTRINSE]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 322
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 18720 [FOL] Print / copy too late at FOLOOUTSE ] & Belt unit
motors are not functioning / belt does not move
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Connector 1818X6 not 719
connected
[ FOLOOUTSE ] not 719
connected
[ FOLOPTRMO ] 18-4-01 690
inactive 1

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 323
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 18701 [FOL] Print / copy too late at FOL1STARTSE ] & A4 size

not rotated
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
1505X6 not connected 599
1505X8 not connected 599

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 324
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 18701 [FOL] Print / copy too late at FOL1STARTSE ]:1 st fold

does not work
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
1807X1 not connected 719
1807X2 not connected 719
[ FOL1DEPOSE ] not 719
connected
[ FOL1STARTSE ] not 18-2-00 692
connected 1
[ FOL1STARTSE ] 18-2-00 692
inactive 1
2202X3 not connected 879

04.06.2002 325
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 18702 [FOL] Trailing edge too late at FOL1STARTSE ] & Folder

not active
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

[ FOL1STARTSE ] active 18-2-001 692

04.06.2002 326
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 18703 [FOL] FOL1DEFCL in wrong position ]& No 1st folding

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ FOL1DEPOSE ] active 18-2-00 692
/ inactive 2
[ FOL1DEFCL ] active / 18-6-00 694
inactive 5
2202X5 not connected 879

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 327
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 18704 [FOL] Distance too small at FOL1STARTSE ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

04.06.2002 328
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 18706 [FOL] Print / copy too late at FOL1OUTSE ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 329
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 18720 [FOL] Print / copy too late at FOLOOUTSE ] & 1 st fold

does not work
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PTRFOLCORCL ] not 599
connected
[ PTRFOLFEDCL ] not 599
connected

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 330
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 18501 [FOL] Reinforcement unit initialisation failure ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ FOL2RUHOMESE ] 18-2-01 692
active 2

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 331
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 18716 [FOL] Trailing edge too late at FOLFFDOUTSE ]: Folder

not active
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

[ FOLFFDOUTSE1 ] active 18-2-016 692

04.06.2002 332
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 18718 [FOL] Reinforcement unit stamp failure ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ FOL2RUHOMESE ] 18-2-01 692
inactive 2

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 333
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 18719 [FOL] Reinforcement unit tape failure ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ FOL2RUJAMSW ] 18-2-01 695
closed 4

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 334
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 18721 [FOL] Trailing edge too late at FOLOOUTSE ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

04.06.2002 335
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 18722 [FOL] Distance too small at FOL2RUSTARTSE ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

04.06.2002 336
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 18723 [FOL] Distance too small at FOL2STARTSE ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

04.06.2002 337
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 18725 [FOL] Trailing edge too late at FOL2RUSTARTSE ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

04.06.2002 338
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 18726 [FOL] Print / copy not correctly stopped in reinforcement

unit ]
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 339
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 18707 [FOL] Print / copy too late at FOL2TRAISE2 ] & 2 nd fold

does not work
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Connector 18X9 not 719
connected
[ FOL2TRAISE2 ] not 719
connected
[ FOL2TRAISE2 ] 18-2-00 692
inactive 5

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 340
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 18708 [FOL] Trailing edge too late at FOL2TRAISE2] & Folder

not active
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

[ FOL2TRAISE2 ] active 18-2-005 692

04.06.2002 341
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 18709 [FOL] Print / copy too late at FOL2STARTSE ] & 2 nd fold

does not work
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Connector 18X10 not 719
connected
[ FOL2STARTSE ] not 719
connected
[ FOL2STARTSE ] 18-2-00 692
inactive 6

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 342
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 18709 [FOL] Print / copy too late at FOL2STARTSE ] & A4 size

not rotated
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PTRFOLROSO ] 588
inactive

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 343
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 18710 [FOL] Trailing edge too late at FOL2STARTSE ] & Folder

not active
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

[ FOL2STARTSE ] active 18-2-006 692

04.06.2002 344
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 18711 [FOL] FOL2DEFCL in wrong position ] & 2 nd fold does

not work
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Connector 1810X2 not 719
connected

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 345
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 18711 [FOL] FOL2DEFCL in wrong position ] & Wrong output /

bad folding quality
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ FOL2DEPOSE ] active 18-2-00 692
/ inactive 7
[ FOL2DEFCL ] active / 18-6-00 694
inactive 6

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 346
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 18713 [FOL] Print / copy too late at FOL2OUTSE1 ] & Wrong

output
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ FOL2OUTSO ] active 691

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 347
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 18713 [FOL] Print / copy too late at FOL2OUTSE1 ]: [

FOL2OUTSE1 ] not functioning
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ FOL2OUTSE1 ] not 719
connected

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 348
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 18714 [FOL] Trailing edge too late at FOL2OUTSE1 ] & Folder

not active
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

[ FOL2OUTSE1 ] active 18-2-008 692

04.06.2002 349
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 18715 [FOL] Print / copy too late at FOLFFDOUTSE ] & No

delivery of paper / no delivery signal
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ FOLFFDOUTMO ] 18-4-01 690
inactive 0
[ FOLFFDOUTSE ] 18-2-01 692
inactive 6

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 350
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 18715 [FOL] Print / copy too late at FOLFFDOUTSE ]: [

FOLFFDOUTSE ] not functioning
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Connector 18X12 not 719
connected
[ FOLFFDOUTSE ] not 719
connected

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 351
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 18717 [FOL] Print / copy too late at FOL2RUSTARTSE ]: [

FOL2RUSTARTSE ] not functioning
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ FOL2RUSTARTSE ] 719
not connected
[ FOL2RUSTARTSE ] 18-2-01 692
inactive 1

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 352
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 18720 [FOL] Print / copy too late at FOLOOUTSE ] & No delivery

signal
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ FOLOOUTSE ] 18-2-01 692
inactive 7

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 353
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22021 [FOL] PBA CPU-I/O EPROM failure in the folder ]

Description
During power up of the CPU-IO board the checksum of the EPROMs is calculated and compared with the
correct value.
If they do not match the following error is generated and on the 7 segment display on the CPU-IO board the
code 1 is shown.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Z-2208 [ FOL-PBA CPU-I/O ] Replace 873

FEPROM defective, EPROM
detected at power up s
Z-2208 [ FOL-PBA CPU-I/O ] Replace 871
FEPROM defective, board
detected at power up

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 354
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22022 [FOL] PBA CPU-I/O RAM failure in the folder]

Description
During power up of the CPU-IO board test patterns are written and read from the RAM.
If a fault is detected the following error is generated and on teh 7 segment display of the CPU-IO board the code
2 is shown.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Z-2208 [ FOL-PBA CPU-I/O ] Replace 871

RAM defective, board
detected at power up

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 355
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22023 [FOL] PBA CPU-I/O watchdog in the folder ]

Description
The watchdog is a piece of hardware on the Folder CPU IO board. It checks that the software is correctly
running.
If the watchdog on the Folder CPU IO board becomes active the operator has to switch off and on the Folder.
On the 7 segment display of the CPU Io board a code 3 is shown.
After power-up the CPU-IO board detects automatically that the watchdog was active and the error is generated.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Z-2208 [ PRT-PBA CPU-I/O ] Replace 871

watchdog circuit defect board
Z-2208 [ PRT-PBA CPU-I/O ] Report 873
software is not running if after
correctly replace
ment
the
problem
is not
solved.
(Include
backup
files of
test 71)

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 356
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22024 [FOL] PBA I/O-INT1 failure in the folder ]

Description
During power up of the CPU-IO board the checksum of the IOASICs on the IO Interface boards (input and output
IC's) are tested.
If a fault is detected the following error is generated and on the 7 segment dispaly of the CPU IO board a code 4
is shown.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Z-2208 [FOL-PBA IO Switch If 7SD 872

INTERFACE ] IOASIC the 2 IO code 5
defective, detected at INT is
power up boards generat
ed
replace
board
Z-2208 [FOL-PBA CPU-IO ] Switch If 7SD 871
IOASIC defective, the 2 IO code 4
detected at power up INT is
boards generat
ed
replace
board

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 357
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22025 [FOL] PBA I/O-INT2 failure in the folder ]

Description
During power up of the CPU-IO board the checksum of the IOASICs on the IO Interface boards (input and output
IC's) are tested.
If a fault is detected the following error is generated and on the 7 segment dispaly of the CPU IO board a code 5
is shown.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Z-2208 [FOL-PBA IO Switch If 7SD 872

INTERFACE ] IOASIC the 2 IO code 4
defective, detected at INT is
power up boards generat
ed
replace
board
Z-2208 [FOL-PBA CPU-IO ] Switch If 7SD 871
IOASIC defective, the 2 IO code 5
detected at power up INT is
boards generat
ed
replace
board

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 358
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22026 [FOL] PBA IO-INT1 PMC failure in the folder ]

Description
During power-up the PMC (Precision Motor Controller) chips on the IO Interface boards are tested.
If the tests fails the following error is generated and on the 7 segment display of the CPU IO board a code 6 is
shown.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Z-2208 [FOL-PBA IO Switch If 7SD 872

INTERFACE ] IOASIC the 2 IO code 7
defective, detected at INT is
power up boards generat
ed
replace
board
Z-2208 [FOL-PBA CPU-IO ] Switch If 7SD 871
IOASIC defective, the 2 IO code 6
detected at power up INT is
boards generat
ed
replace
board

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 359
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22027 [FOL] IO-INT2 PMC failure ]

Description
During power-up the PMC (Precision Motor Controller) chips on the IO Interface boards are tested. If the tests
fails the following error is generated and on the 7 segment display of the CPU IO board a code 7 is shown.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Z-2208 [FOL-PBA IO Switch If 7SD 872

INTERFACE ] IOASIC the 2 IO code 6
defective, detected at INT is
power up boards generat
ed
replace
board
Z-2208 [FOL-PBA CPU-IO ] Switch If 7SD 871
IOASIC defective, the 2 IO code 7
detected at power up INT is
boards generat
ed
replace
board

04.06.2002 360
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22515 [FOL] PBA IO-INT1 MCTR FOL1INMO failure in the folder

] & 1 st fold does not work
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Connector [ 1803X3 ] 719
not connected
Connector [ 1803X4 ] 719
not connected
Connector [ 1803X5 ] 719
not connected
Connector [ 18X2 ] not 719
connected
Connector [ 18X3 ] not 719
connected
[ FOL1INMOSE ] not 719
connected

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 361
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22515 [FOL] PBA IO-INT1 MCTR FOL1INMO failure in the folder

] & No transport into the 1st fold
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ FOL1INMOSE ] active 18-1-00 692
/ inactive 3

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 362
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22516 [FOL] PBA IO-INT1 MCTR FOL1FOLMO failure in the

folder ] & 1st fold does not work
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Connector [ 1805X1 ] 719
not connected
[ FOL1FOLMOSE ] not 719
functioning
[ FOL1FOLMO ] 18-6-00 690
inactive 2
[ FOL1FOLMOSE ] 18-6-00 692
active / inactive 1

04.06.2002 363
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22516 [FOL] PBA IO-INT1 MCTR FOL1FOLMO failure in the

folder ] & No paper transport
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ FOL1INMO ] inactive 18-6-00 690
1

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 364
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22517 [FOL] PBA IO-INT2 MCTR FOL2INMO failure in the folder

] & 2 nd fold does not work
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Connector [ 1801G3 ] 719
not connected
Connector [ 18X8 ] not 719
connected
Connector [ 1810X3 ] 719
not connected
Connector [ 1816X2 ] 719
not connected
Connector [ 1816X4 ] 719
not connected
Connectorn [ 18X18 ] 719 ?
not connected
Connector [ 18X20 ] not 719 ?
connected
Connector [ 18X27 ] not 719
connected
[ FOL2INMOSE ] not 719
conneccted
[ FOL2INMO ] inactive 18-6-00 690
3
[ FOL2INMOSE ] active 18-6-00 692
/ inactive 3
[ FOL2SAFRL1 ] active 695
Relay PBA not 719
connected
Connector [ 1818X8 ] 719
not connected
Connector [ 18X33 ] not 719
connected

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 365
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22517 [FOL] PBA IO-INT2 MCTR FOL2INMO failure in the

folder]: [ FOLOFFOUTMO ] not functioning
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Connector [ 18X30 ] not 719
connected

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 366
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22518 [FOL] PBA IO-INT2 MCTR FOL2FOLMO failure in the

folder ] & 2 nd fold does not work
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
Connector [ 1810X5 ] 719
not connected
Connector [ 1812X1 ] 719
not connected
Connector [ 18X6 ] not 719
connected
[ FOL2FOLMO ] 18-6-00 690
inactive 4
[ FOL2FOLMOSE ] 18-6-00 692
active / inactive 4
[ IO Interface 872
FOL2FOLNO ] not
functioning

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 367
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22519 [FOL] Folder - printer interface error ]

Description
This error occurs if the Printer recieves in-correct data from the Folder

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Z-2208 [ FOL-PBA CPU-I/O ] Write 880

failure Proble
m
Report
if
problem
occurs
more as
ones
(Include
backup
files of
test 71)

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 368
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 22902 [SYS] Firmpack / Software version failure ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

04.06.2002 369
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25003 [SYS] control bus failure: PRT - FOL ]

Description
This error is generated if the Folder is
switched off during run. Basically this
error is assumed to be caused by the
customer.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Folder is switched off during Instruct
run. customer
Electrical problem in Solve
Scanner problem
[ CPU IO PBA ] defect 850

04.06.2002 370
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25741 [FOL] First fold paper transport door opened during run ]
& 1 st fold does not work
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PTRFOLDOORSW ] 15-2-02 585
open 0

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 371
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25741 [FOL] First fold paper transport door opened during run ]
& 1 st fold stops
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PTRFOLDOORSW ] 15-2-02 962
open during run 0

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 372
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25742 [FOL] First fold door opened during run ] & 1 st fold does
not work
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ FOL1DOORSW ] 18-2-00 695
inactive 3
[ FOL1DOORSW ] 18-2-00 962
opened during run 3

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 373
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25743 [FOL] Reinforcement intermediate door opened during

run ] & 1 st fold does not work / stops
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ FOL2INTDOORSW ] 18-2-02 695
opened durin run 1
[ FOL1DOORSW ] 18-2-00 965
open 9

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 374
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25744 [FOL] Second fold door opened during run ] & 1 st fold
does not work / stops
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ FOL2DOORSW 18-2-00 695
]opened during run 9
[ FOL1DOORSW ] 18-2-00 965
open 9

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 375
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25745 [FOL] Second fold tray opened during run ] & 1 st fold
stops
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ FOL2TRAYSW ] 18-2-01 695
closed 0

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 376
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25745 [FOL] Second fold tray opened during run ] & Folder not
active
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ FOL2TRAYSW ] open 18-2-01 695
0

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 377
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25746 [FOL] Reinforcement unit door opened during run ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ FOL2RUDOORSW ] 18-2-01 695
opened in run 5

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 378
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25747 [FOL] Folder output door opened during run ] & 1 st fold
not active
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ FOLODOORSW ] 18-2-01 695
open 9

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 379
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25747 [FOL] Folder output door opened during run ] & 1 st fold
stops
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ FOLODOORSW ] 18-2-01 962
opened during run 9

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 380
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25748 [FOL] FOLBELTDOOR opened in run ] & 1 st fold stops

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

[ FOLOBELTDOORSW ] 18-2-020 962
opened during run

04.06.2002 381
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25748 [FOL] FOLBELTDOOR opened in run ] & Belt unit not

active
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

[ FOLOBELTDOORSW ] 18-2-020 695
open

04.06.2002 382
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25749 [FOL] Paper path folder trailing sensor 1 not free

(FOLTRAISE1) ]
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 383
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25750 [FOL] Paper path folder trailing sensor 1 not free

(FOLTRAISE1) ]: Folder does not start
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ (PTR)FOLTRAISE1 ] 15-2-01 586
active during power up 3

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 384
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25751 [FOL] Paper path folder trailing sensor 2 not free

(FOLTRAISE2) ]
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 385
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25752 [FOL] Paper path folder trailing sensor 2 not free

(FOLTRAISE3) ]: Folder does not start
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ (PTR)FOLTRAISE3 ] 15-2-01 586
active during power up 5

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 386
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25753 [FOL] Paper path folder trailing sensor 4 not free

(FOLTRAISE4) ]: Folder does not start
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ (PTR)FOLTRAISE4 ] 15-2-01 586
active during power up 6

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 387
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25754 [FOL] Paper path folder trailing sensor 5 not free

(FOLTRAISE5) ]: Folder does not start
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ (PTR) FOLTRAISE5 ] 15-2-01 586
active during power up 7

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 388
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25755 [FOL] Paper path folder width sensor 1 not free

(PTRFOLWISE1) ]: 1 st fold does not work
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PTRFOLWISE1 ] 15-2-01 586
active 8

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 389
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25755 [FOL] Paper path folder width sensor 1 not free

(PTRFOLWISE1) ]: Folder does not start
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PTRFOLWISE1 ] 15-2-01 586
active during power up 8

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 390
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25756 [FOL] Paper path folder width sensor 2 not free

(PTRFOLWISE2) ]:Folder does not start
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PTRFOLWISE2 ] 15-2-01 586
active during power up 9

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 391
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25757 [FOL] Paper path first fold start sensor not free
(FOL1STARTSE) ]: Folder does not start
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ FOL1STARTSE ] 18-2-00 692
active during power up 1

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 392
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25758 [FOL] Paper path first fold output sensor (FOL1OUTSE) ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 393
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25759 [FOL] Paper path second fold trailing sensor not free
(FOL2TRAISE2) ] & Folder does not start
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ FOL2TRAISE2 ] active 18-2-00 692
during power up 5

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 394
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25760 [FOL] Paper path second fold start sensor not free
(FOL2STARTSE) ] & Folder does not start
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ FOL2STARTSE ] 18-2-00 692
active during power up 6

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 395
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25761 [FOL] Paper path second fold output sensor not free
(FOL2OUTSE1) ] & Folder does not start
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ FOL2OUTSE1 ] active 18-2-00 692
during power up 8

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 396
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25762 [FOL] Paper path folder reinforcement unit start sensor

not free (FOL2RUSTARTSE) ]
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ FOL2RUSTARTSE ] 18-2-01 692
active during power up 1

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 397
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25763 [FOL] Paper path folder output first foldoutput sensor

not free (FOLOFFOUTSE) ] & Folder does not start
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ FOLOFFOUTSE ] 18-2-01 692
active during power up 6

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 398
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25764 [FOL] Paper path folder output output sensor not free
(FOLOOUTSE) ] & Folder does not start
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ FOLOOUTSE ] active 18-2-01 692
during power up 7

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 399
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25764 [FOL] Paper path folder output output sensor not free
(FOLOOUTSE) ] & Folder not active
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ FOLOOUTSE ] active 18-2-01 692
7

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 400
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25765 [FOL] The folder bulge sensor has wrong position

(PTRFOLBULSE) ] & Folder not active
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PTRFOLBULSE ] 15-2-01 586
active at start of run 1

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 401
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25766 [FOL] Media is too long for the folder ]: Paperjam

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Info Diagra

m
[ PTRFOLTRAISE1 ] 15-2-01 586
active during power up 3

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 402
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25767 [FOL] Folder reinforcement unit cover door opened

during run ]
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 403
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25768 [FOL] Folder output belt door opened during run ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 404
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25769 [FOL] Cleaning the reinforcement unit knife ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 405
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25771 [FOL] The reinforcement unit tape empty ]

Suspected Parts & Settings:

04.06.2002 406
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Diagnostic

[ 25818 [FOL] Paper source in the folder has wrong format ] &
Width of paper in drawer / sheetfeeder does not match
measured width at second fold.
Description
Width of paper in drawer / sheetfeeder does not match measured width at second fold.

This can be the case when the customer has inserted the wrong media format on the printer panel.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Known Problems:

04.06.2002 407
 Connectors (external) NGC G1
The picture below shows an overview of all external connectors on the NGC.
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Component Locator

DC Power Supply cables NGC G1

Overview of the DC Power Cables in the NGC power supply.

04.06.2002 2
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Component Locator

Jumpers Motherboard PBA NGC G1

The Motherboard PBA is the main board in the NGC Controller.

= jumpered

= unjumpered

RSVD1 Jumper not installed (default)

450 Jumpered when the processor's internal speed is 450 MHz
400 Jumpered when the processor's internal speed is 400 MHz
350 Jumpered when the processor's internal speed is 350 MHz (default)
333 Jumpered when the processor's internal speed is 333 MHz
266 Jumpered when the processor's internal speed is 266 MHz
BUS66M Jumpered when the external system clock is 66 MHz, default is 100 MHz (jumper not installed)
BIOS Jumper not installed (default)
PSWD Jumpered when the password features are enabled (default)

One set of speed jumpers must have a jumper plug installed; otherwise the system defaults to an undetermined
speed.

04.06.2002 3
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Component Locator

Main Parts Controller NGC G1

The picture below shows an overview of the NGC main cabinet.

04.06.2002 4
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Component Locator

Motherboard PBA NGC G1

The Motherboard PBA is the main board in the NGC Controller.

04.06.2002 5
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Component Locator

Riser PBA NGC G1

The Riser PBA provides the connection between the Motherboard PBA and the ISA & PCI extension slots.

Note:
ISA1 shares its card-slot opening with PCI4, and ISA2 shares its card-slot opening with PCI5.

04.06.2002 6
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Component Locator

Spice PBA NGC G1

The SPICE-board is an expansion board in the controller. It is connected via a PCI bus connector.

No image available.

04.06.2002 7
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Component Locator

Front view Oc· Power Logic controller (GX150).

The picture below shows the front view of the Oc· Power Logic controller (GX150).

1. Hard drive access indicator

2. Power indicator
3. Power button
4. Front panel door
5. Floppy drive access indicator
6. Removable 3.5-inch drive front panel
7. Removable 5.25-inch drive front panel

View with front panel open

1. Front panel door, with two breakaway hinges

2. Headphone connector
3. USB connectors (2)

Note:
do not use these front connectors for USB keyboards or mice

04.06.2002 8
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Component Locator

Main Parts Oc· Power Logic controller (GX150).

The picture below shows the inside of the Oc· Power Logic controller (GX150).

.. 1. 5.25-inch drive Hard drive

2. 3.5-inch floppy drive
3. Hard drive
4. Internal speaker
5. Chassis intrusion switch
6. System board
7. Expansion card slots
8. I/O ports and connectors
9. AC power connector
10. Power supply
11. Padlock ring
12. Microprocessor and heat sink shroud

04.06.2002 9
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Component Locator

Back view Oc· Power Logic controller (GX150).

The picture below shows the back view of the Oc· Power Logic controller (GX150).

1. AC power connector
2. AC voltage switch
3. Parallel port connector
4. Mouse connector
5. Link integrity indicator
6. Integrated NIC connector
7. Activity indicator
8. Padlock ring
9. Video connector
10. PCI expansion-card slots
11. AGP slot
12. Line-out jack, line-in jack, and microphone jack
13. USB connectors
14. Keyboard connector
15. Diagnostic LEDs
16. Serial port 2 connector
17. Serial port 1 connector

04.06.2002 10
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Component Locator

3Com 3C900-COMBO EtherLink XL PBA (Ethernet)

The 3C900 PCI PBA is an expansion board in the controller.

AUI Connector Pin Assignments

RJ45 Connector Pin Assignments

04.06.2002 11
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Component Locator

Developing unit

toner supply toner dosage developing unit

tube unit

DEVTONSW DEVTONMO DEVBIASHV DEVTONCONS DEVCLEANHV

E

DEVTONSW
DEVTONMO
DEVTONCONSE
DEVCLEANHV
DEVBIASHV

04.06.2002 12
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Component Locator

Fuser heater unit

Paste a drawing here!

[ FUSNTC ]
[ FUSNTC1,2,3,4,5 ] mounted against the fuser elements (FUSNTC1 non drive side, FUSNTC5 drive side).
The middle FIXNTC3 regulates the temperature.
Switching the absorber fans.

[ FUSNTC6 ] is mounted against the reflector.

Switches the cooling fan of the output roller.

All NTC's are involved in the temperature safety circuit.

[ Heaters ]
Front heater 08E01
Rear heater 08E02

[ Fuser door switch ]

Rear fuser interlock 08S02

[ Fuser open switch ]

Warns operator to close fuser 08S4

[ FUSFANL/R ]
Airfans left right on top of the absorber box.
Cooling high temperature of the fuser elements.

[ PTROUTFAN ]
Airfan to cool the upper output rollers of the paper output section.

04.06.2002 13
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Component Locator

Paper Roll Drawer

Picture

Knife position sensor left / right PRDxKNIPOSSEL / PRDKNIPOSSER (1-5)

Paper present sensor PRDxPRESEx (2)
Drawer open switch PRDxOPSW (3)
Roll empty sensor PRDxRUNSEx (4)
Paper roll drawer feed motor PRDxFEDMOx (6-8)
Leading edge sensor PRDxLEADSE (7)
Knife motor PRDxKNIMO (9)
Feed / cut button PRDxFEDSWx (10)

04.06.2002 14
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Component Locator

Paper sheet feeder

Picture

Lift up position switch PSFxOpen SWitch

elevator switch

PSFxELEvator PSFxEMPty PSFxSEParation

MOtor SEnsor CLutch

PSFxELEvatorMotor
Pulls the elevator table upwards when the sheet feeder is closed.

PSFxSEParation CLutch
When active a sheet is transported from the sheet feeder to the vertical paper transport path.

PSFxEMPty SEnsor
PSFxOpen SWitch
Elevator switch

04.06.2002 15
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Component Locator

Paper transport

Paste a drawing here!

Sensors
Switches
Clutch
Motors

04.06.2002 16
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Component Locator

PBA Driver
PBA Layout

Connector Description
Connector X1 (Mains output to Low-Voltage-Supply
Pin Signal In/Out/Power Function
1 NEUTRAL O/P Output to LV Supply
2 n.c.
3 LINE O/P Output to LV Supply

Connector X2 (to CPU)

Pin Signal In/Out/Power Function
1 DRIPWM I Drive motor PWM signal
2 CONMAINSII I Zero-Cross pulses
3 PTRSUCFANCONT O Suction-fan OK
4 PTRSUCFAN I Suction-fan ON/OFF
5 SUCFAN O/P Suction-fan output
6 +24V P Supply for suction-fan

Connector X3 (from Mains)

Pin Signal In/Out/Power Function
1 LINE I/P LINE input

Connector X4 (to Drive motor and LV Supply)

Pin Signal In/Out/Power Function
1 +24V I/P 24 Volt supply-voltage
2 GND I/P Ground
3 +24V O/P 24 Volt for drive-motot
4 GND O/P Drive-motor output

Connector X5 (to CPU)

Pin Signal In/Out/Power Function
1 CONMAINS1 I Safety-relay ON/OFF

04.06.2002 17
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Component Locator

2 CONMAINS2 I Safety-relay ON/OFF

3 n.c.
4 n.c.

04.06.2002 18
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Component Locator

Paper TRansport

PTRFOLDOOR PTRFOLTRAISE PTRFOLROSO

SW 1/5

PTRFOLOFFLLE PTRFOLCORCL PTRFOLINSE PTRFOLBULSE PTRFOLFEDCL

D

PTRFOLINSE
PTRFOLBULSE
PTRFOLTRAISE1-5
PTRFOLDOORSW
PTRFOLFEDCL
PTRFOLCORCL
PTRFOLROSO
PTRFOLOFFLLED

04.06.2002 19
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Component Locator

Belt unit

FOLOBELTDOORSW
This switch detects whether the belt is raised or not.

FOLODOORSW
This switch detects whether the door of the belt unit is opened or not.

FOLOBELTENDSE
This sensor detects whether the belt is almost full.

FOLOOUTSE
This sensor detects whether a package is delivered to the belt unit.

FOLOPTRMO
This motor drives all transport in the belt unit.

FOLOBELTCL
When the clutch is energised the belt moves a few cm.

04.06.2002 20
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Component Locator

1 st Fold view

18PBA07
Sensor distribution PBA

FOL1OUTDEFSO
Operates the output flap to guide the package from the 1st fold to intermediate transport.

FOL1STARTSE
Mounted at the entrance of the 1st fold and used for length measurement in the 1st fold

FOL1DOORSW
The switch detects whether the door of the 1st fold is opened or not.

04.06.2002 21
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Component Locator

FOL1OUTSE
Detects if the paper leaves rhe 1st fold.

FOL1INTDOORSW
The switch detects wether the door above the intermediate transport is open.

04.06.2002 22
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Component Locator

Folder stand

04.06.2002 23
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Component Locator

Lower view (1st Fold)

FOL1DEPOSE
This sensor detects the position of the fold deflector, the folding flap in the 1st fold.

FOL1SAFRL
Safety relay door switches 1st fold.

FOL1FOLMO
Folds the paper in the 1st fold to the selected folding method.

FOL1DEFCL
Changes the position of the folding flap in the 1st fold

FOL1INMO
Transports the paper from the PTR into the 1st fold.

04.06.2002 24
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Component Locator

Rear upper view

18PBA07
Sensor distribution PBA

FOL1OUTDEFSO
Operates the output flap to guide the package from the 1st fold to intermediate transport.

FOL1STARTSE
Mounted at the entrance of the 1st fold and used for length measurement in the 1st fold

FOL1DOORSW
The switch detects whether the door of the 1st fold is opened or not.

04.06.2002 25
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Component Locator

FOL1OUTSE
Detects if the paper leaves rhe 1st fold.

FOL1INTDOORSW
The switch detects wether the door above the intermediate transport is open.

04.06.2002 26
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Component Locator

Front view

Paste a drawing here!

Switches

FOL2RUDOORSW
This switch detects whether the front door of the RU is open.

FOL2RUINTDOORSW
The switch detects whether the door above the intermediate transport is opened or not.

FOL2RUCOVERSW
This switch detects whether the top cover of the RU is open.

FOL2RUJAMSW
This switch detects a jam if the strip is not correctly transported to the stamp position.

FOL2RUSTARTSE
Detects present of paper to start the sequence of the reinforcement unit.
Infra-red sensor, one part in Reinforcement unit, one part in the intermediate transport.

Sensors

FOL2RUEMPTYSE
The empty sensor detects the presence of the reinforcement strip on the roll.

FOL2RUHOMESE
Detects if the stamp is returned in the home position.

Solenoids

FOL2RUSTOPSO
Stops and holds the print at the stamp position to glue a reinforcement strip to the print.

FOL2RUGUIDSO
This solenoid turns a small copy guide away from its position to allow the strip to be glued to the copy.

FOL2RUTAPESO
The solenoid unlocks the pin roller to make half a turn. During this period the reinforcement strip is transported
to the stamp position while a protection strip is separated from the reinforcement strip.

FOL2RUSTAMPSO
The solenoid unlocks the stamp roller to make one turn. The stamp moves upwards while the reinforcement
head moves downwards.

Motor

FOL2RUMO
This motor drives all transport in the RU via a chain and clutches.

04.06.2002 27
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Component Locator

Front view 2nd Fold

FOL2DOORSW
The switch detects whether the door of the 2nd fold is opened or not.

FOL2INMO
Transports the packages from the 1st fold over the intermediate transport to the 2nd fold or to
the First Fold Delivery

FOL2FOLMO
Folds the packages from the 1st fold into a package according to the selected method.

FOL2DEFCL
Changes the position of the folding flap in the 2nd fold.

04.06.2002 28
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Component Locator

Rear view (2nd Fold)

FOL2TRAYSW
The switch detects whether the copy receiving tray is opened or not.

FOL2FLATSO
When activated the single folded package is fed into the 2nd fold.

FOL2OUTSO
When active the package is transported to the belt unit, not active to the copy receiving tray.

FOL2SAFRL

04.06.2002 29
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Component Locator

Total view (2nd Fold)

FOL2OUTSE FOL2DEPOSE

FOLOFFOUTSE FOLOFFOUTMO FOL2TRAISE2 FOL2DOORSW FOL2STARTSE

FOL2DOORSW
FOL2TRAISE2
FOL2STARTSE
FOL2DEPOSE
FOL2OUTSE1
FOLOFFOUTSE
FOLOFFOUTMO

04.06.2002 30
20 Interface (controller)
Fill in instructions

Controller
776 Controller (complete swap)
777 PBA, Motherboard
778 PBA, SCSI controller
779 PBA, SPICE
780 PBA, Memory
781 PBA, Centronics
782 PBA, Local Area Network (Ethernet BNC, Token ring)
784 Floppy (drive)
785 IDE Hard disk
786 SCSI Hard disk (SETMEM)
787 CD-rom (drive)
788 Monitor
789 Keyboard / mouse
790 Fan(s)
791 Power supply
792 Cabinet / Riserboard

794 Operating system / Firmware

795 Oc· controller software
796 Switch(es)

797 Settings / parameters in controller hardware

798 Mechanical connections inside controller
799 Electrical connections inside controller
800 Others controller
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - CAS-Card

20 Interface (software, connections)

Fill in instructions

Software
761 Customer SW / Applications
762 Oc· Driver SW
763 Oc· Printroom Application SW
764 Oc· Job Editor SW
765 Incorrect configuration

Hardware
766 Host interface hardware / network
767 Protocol converter
768 Modem

Connection Cables
769 Data cable between modules (Scanner-Controller, Controller-Printer)
770 Data cable to host environment (ethernet, centronics,..)

Data emulation
771 Incorrect data
772 Unsupported command / file format

773 Mechanical connections outside modules

774 Electrical connections between modules
775 Others interfacing

04.06.2002 2
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - CAS-Card

09 Originals
Fill in instructions

327 Feed rollers

328 White original plate
330 Switches (ORGWIDSEnsors, ORGPRESEnsor, ORGSAFSWitch)
331 Motor
340 PBA, Step motor control

357 Settings / Parameters original handling

358 Mechanical connections original handling
359 Electrical connections original handling
360 Others original handling

04.06.2002 3
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - CAS-Card

10 Scanning
Fill in instructions

361 Camera (mechanical parts)

366 Mirror
367 Lens
368 Glass plate

370 Scanner lamp

380 CCD
381 PBA, CCD console
382 PBA, CCD interface
384 PBA, Exposure sensor
385 PBA, Mixed power supply

397 Settings / Parameters scanner

398 Mechanical connections scanner
399 Electrical connections scanner
400 Others scanner

04.06.2002 4
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - CAS-Card

11 Image Processing
Fill in instructions

420 PBA, Image processing

04.06.2002 5
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - CAS-Card

01 Photoconductor
Fill in instructions

001 photoconductor (drum)

002 Earth spring

Reason of removal
010 Hump on surface
011 Damaged during transport
012 Sctratches
013 Mechanical failure
014 Crack(s) (consult your .......... card)
015 ........ (consult your .......... card)
016 ........ (consult your .......... card)
017 ........ (consult your .......... card

038 Mechanical connections photoconductor

039 Electrical connections photoconductor
040 Others photoconductor

04.06.2002 6
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - CAS-Card

02 Charging
Fill in instructions

041 Charging unit

046 Corona wire

047 Grid wire
048 Ozone filters

060 PBA, High voltage

061 PBA, Grid voltage

078 Mechanical connections charging

079 Electrical connections charging
080 Others charging

04.06.2002 7
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - CAS-Card

04 Exposure / Printhead
Fill in instructions

121 Printhead
122 Printhead adjustment
130 NTC printhead assembly
140 PBA, Printhead interface
157 Settings / parameters exposure
158 Mechanical connections exposure
159 Electrical connections exposure
160 Others exposure

04.06.2002 8
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - CAS-Card

05 Developing
Fill in instructions

161 Toner supply unit

162 Developer unit
166 Magnet roller
167 Gear
168 Developer

170 Sensor(s)
171 Motor

180 PBA, High voltage

198 Mechanical connections developing

199 Electrical connections developing
200 Others developing

04.06.2002 9
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - CAS-Card

06 Transfer
Fill in instructions

201 Transfer unit

206 Corona wire

207 Guide wire/fingers
208 Block R/L

220 PBA, High voltage

238 Mechanical connections transfer

239 Electrical connections transfer
240 Others transfer

04.06.2002 10
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - CAS-Card

07 Cleaning
Fill in instructions

241 Cleaning blade

242 Cleaning flap

246 Seals
247 Waste toner bag
248 Gear

260 PBA, Cleaning leds

278 Mechanical connections cleaning

279 Electrical connections cleaning
280 Others cleaning

04.06.2002 11
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - CAS-Card

08 Fusing
Fill in instructions

281 Heater unit

282 Absorber unit

286 Feed plate

287 Guide wires
290 Fan(s)
291 NTC(s)
292 Switch(es)
293 Sensor(s)
294 Solid state relais

300 PBA, Driver

317 Print material becomes too hot

318 Mechanical connections fusing
319 Electrical connections fusing
320 Others fusing

04.06.2002 12
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - CAS-Card

12 Paper Roll Drawer

Fill in instructions

441 Roll knife cutter

442 Roll1 paperpath assembly
443 Roll2 paperpath assembly
444 Vertical paperpath assembly

445 Paper spools

446 Feed rollers
447 Belt(s)
448 Gear
449 Rail

450 Switch(es)
451 Sensor(s)
452 Motor(s)

460 PBA, PRD driver

461 PBA, Feeding switch

478 Mechanical connections paper roll feed

479 Electrical connections paper roll feed
480 Others paper roll feed

04.06.2002 13
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - CAS-Card

13 Paper Sheet Feeder

Fill in instructions

481 Paperpath assembly

486 Cable (steel)
487 Feed rollers
488 Gear
489 Rail

490 Sensor(s)
491 Switch(es)
492 Motor
493 Clutch

518 Mechanical connections paper sheet feeder

519 Electrical connections paper sheet feeder
520 Others paper sheet feeder

04.06.2002 14
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - CAS-Card

15 Paper Transport (printer)

Fill in instructions

Printer
566 Separation corona wire
567 Feed rollers
568 Pick off pawl
569 Motor
570 Suction fan
571 Output fan
572 Switch(es)
573 Sensor(s)
574 Clutch(es)

575 PBA, High voltage

576 PBA, Step motor control
577 PBA, Driver (suction fan)

578 Mechanical connections paper transport printer

579 Electrical connections paper transport printer
580 Others paper transport printer

04.06.2002 15
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - CAS-Card

19 Delivery
Fill in instructions

721 Tube assy

722 Roller assy
723 Shaft assy

726 Brush
730 Motor
731 Fan
732 Sensor(s)

740 PBA, CRU

758 Mechanical connections copy delivery tray
759 Electrical connections copy delivery tray
760 Others copy delivery tray

04.06.2002 16
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - CAS-Card

22 Power & Control (folder)

Fill in instructions

Folder
871 PBA, CPU
873 Firmware
872 PBA, I/O-Interface

877 Settings / parameters of folder

878 Mechanical connections of folder
879 Electrical connections inside folder
880 Others Control folder

04.06.2002 17
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - CAS-Card

22 Power & Control (printer)

Fill in instructions

Printer
841 Line filter
842 Fuse(s) / Circuit breaker(s)
843 Copy counter
844 (Safety) switch(es) / relay(s)
845 Sensor(s)
846 Fan(s)

850 PBA, CPU-I/O

847 Firmware
851 Low voltage supply
852 PBA, Driver
853 PBA, High voltage supply
854 Control panel
855 PBA, RFI DSUB-M
856 Humidity control / Dew preventer

857 Settings / parameters of printer

858 Mechanical connections of printer
859 Electrical connections inside printer
860 Others control printer

04.06.2002 18
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - CAS-Card

22 Power & Control (scanner)

Fill in instructions

Scanner
861 PBA, Console cpu
865 Firmware
862 PBA, Keypad 1
863 LCD Display
864 Supply FL-inverter

867 Settings / parameters of scanner

868 Mechanical connections of scanner
869 Electrical connections inside scanner
870 Others control scanner

04.06.2002 19
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - CAS-Card

23 Drive
Fill in instructions

886 Tooth belt

887 Gear
888 Tensioner
889 Bearings

890 Motor
891 Clutch(es)
892 Sensor

900 PBA, Driver (DRIMO)

918 Mechanical connections drive

919 Electrical connections drive
920 Others drive

04.06.2002 20
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - CAS-Card

25 Environment
Fill in instructions

Customer
961 No fault on arrival
962 Incorrect operation
963 Original
964 Exaggerated demand
965 Software virus
969 Others customer

Environment
971 Humidity / temperature
972 Mains connection
979 Others environment

Consumables
980 Paper
981 Specialties
982 Toner
989 Others consumables

Installation / Integration
990 Installation
991 Integration
992 Training / instruction
993 Packing
994 Covers
995 Incomplete delivery
996 Incomplete / incorrect installation by transporter
997 Host software
998 Upgrade / patches

999 Complete system is okay

04.06.2002 21
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - CAS-Card

18 Folder
Fill in instructions

681 Reinforcement unit

682 Receiving belt(s)
684 Gear
685 Paper guide plate(s)
686 Folding roller(s)
687 Timing belt(s) / pulley(s)
688 Feed rollers
689 Folding flap

690 Motor(s)
691 Solenoid(s)
692 Sensor(s)
693 Static eliminators
694 Clutch(es) / Brake(s)
695 (Safety) switch(es) / relay(s)
696 Circuit breaker

700 PBA, Power supply

701 PBA, Power I/O
702 PBA, RS232-iso-lpm
703 PBA, Sensor distribution fold
704 PBA, Relay
705 PBA, Distribution power I/O

717 Settings / parameters folder

718 Mechanical connections folder
719 Electrical connections folder
720 Others folder

04.06.2002 22
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - CAS-Card

15 Paper Transport (folder)

Fill in instructions

Folder
585 Switch(es)
586 Sensor(s)
587 Clutch(es)
588 Solenoid(s)
590 PBA, Distr.pow-I/O

598 Mechanical connections paper transport folder

599 Electrical connections paper transport folder
600 Others paper transport folder

04.06.2002 23
04.06.2002 1 10:07:54 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

1 : 1 Image length correction scanner

Aim
Make sure that the speed of the scanner is correct so the image is 1 : 1 with the original.
Check
1. Select A0 (36") roll width. 1.0
2. Feed the original in portrait direction and make a copy.
3. Feed the original 4 times again.
4. Match the original with the copies 3, 4 and 5 along the line Xe of
the original and Xh of the copy. (Xe - Xh = 700 mm.)
5. Measure the difference in length on all 3 copies in mm.
6. Calculate the average difference.
7. Specification: The max. average difference must be between +/- 5
0.5 %.
(is +/- 3.5 mm.) 0 Max.
+/- 3,5 mm

Correction
l Carry out SDS test 09-1-001
l Indicated value is in ‰ (0.1%)
Default is 1000 (= 100%)
Min. = -50‰ Max. = +50‰
Tip: 1 ‰ is 0.7 mm.
l If image-length on copy ...
... is too long: ... is to short:
l Decrease the indicated value. l Increase the indicated value.
Once again make a copy and measure if the difference in length is within 1.0 mm

04.06.2002 1
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Original Present Sensor leading edge position (Scan start

moment)
Note:
Related Adjustments
l Engine adjustments must be correct.
l Adjustment 1:1 Image length correction scanner must be correct.

Aim
Make sure that the scanner starts scanning the leading edge of the original on the correct moment.
l Too early: leading edge of the paper too long
l Too late: leading edge of the paper too short

Check
1. Select roll width A0 (36”).
2. Feed the service test original in input arrow direction.
3. Make 1 copy.
4. Match the original with the copy.
5. Measure at the middle ruler at the leading edge, the distance between the edge of the copy and the
edge of the test original.
6. Specification: +/- 1.0 mm

Correction
1. Do SDS test 09-1-002
2. Add the measured difference to the value which is allready set.
Leading edge too long: Decrease the value.
Leading edge too short: Increase the value

04.06.2002 2
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Original Present Sensor trailing edge position (Scan stop

moment)
Note
Related Adjustments

Aim
Make sure that the scanner stops scanning the trailing edge of the original on the correct moment.
l Too early: trailing edge paper too short
l Too late: trailing edge paper too long

Check
1. Select roll width A0 (36”).
2. Feed the service test original in input arrow direction.
3. Make 1 copy.
4. Match the original with the copy.
5. Measure at the middle ruler at the trailing edge, the distance between the edge of the copy and the
edge of the test original.
6. Specification: +/- 1.0 mm.

Correction
1. Do SDS test 09-1-003
2. Add the measured difference to the value which is allready set.
Trailing edge too long: Decrease the value.
Trailing edge tooshort: Increase the value.

04.06.2002 3
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Original parameters adjustments (from R2.1)

All next adjustments are affected by SDS test 56!

Original Present sensor leading edge position (scan start moment)

Original Present Sensor trailing edge position (scan stop moment)

Note
Related Adjustments

Aim
Make sure that the scanner stops scanning the trailing edge of the original on the correct moment.
l Too early: scanner misses trailing edge original
l Too late: scanner reads gauge roller

Check
1. Select roll width A0 (36”).
2. Feed the service test original in input arrow direction.
3. Make 1 copy.
4. Match the original with the copy.
5. Calculate the difference between the original trailing edge and the grey trailing edge on the copy.
6. Specification: The difference between the original trailing edge and the scan trailing edge on the copy
must be within +/- 1.0 mm.
Practical tip: add some centimetres leading and trailing edge, set the exposure to dark.
In this way, the original edges are better visual.

Correction
Carry out SDS test 56
The trailing edge scan moment will be automatically adjusted and stored in the memory.

The value can be checked and re-adjusted manually by test 09-01-003.

scanner stops too late scanner stops too early

When the scan (grey) trailing edge on the copies is When the scan trailing edge on the copies is too
too long: short:
l Decrease the indicated value. l Increase the indicated value.

Translation Control
current database language GB
current document language GB
needs translation Yes

Version Control
maintenance/update 0
number
translation rerun number 11

last backup number 141999

creator Wim van Helden, on 25-02-97

modifiers Henk Ebus, on 26-05-99

04.06.2002 4
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Henk Ebus, on 26-05-99

Henk Ebus, on 28-05-99
Henk Ebus, on 21-06-99
Henk Ebus, on 21-06-99
Henk Ebus, on 22-06-99
Henk Ebus, on 06-07-99
Henk Ebus, on 06-07-99
Henk Ebus, on 06-07-99
Henk Ebus, on 06-07-99
Henk Ebus, on 06-07-99

Access Control
Target Audience Install & Setup
Maintenance
Troubleshooting

Hierarchy Control
Hierarchy Machine Level Sub function Level 1 Sub function Level 3
Function Level Sub function Level 2 Sub function Level 4
Document type adjustment
Function 09 Originals

Product Information Control

OCS

Model Groups Model Serie Configuration Type Component Type Modifications

It is possible to use Approver-Roles in the datadictionary keyvalues, e.g. [ReadDraft] means all users with the
ReadDraft-Role can approve the document concerned.

1:1 scanning

Also scanner adjustments chapter 10

04.06.2002 5
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Gauge roller

Aim

To have the correct position between the gauge roller and the exposure glass.
l Too high position increases the scattered light, reflection with shiny originals and/ or schadowing on the
copy with transparent originals.
l Too low position increases the friction with thick originals.

Check

1. Make a copy from the service test original.

2. Examine the copy quality, especially the Isomer figures.
3. Specification: see test original description .
Practical tip: the bearings of the gauge roller must lay nicely in the rounding of the gauge blocks,
without touching the square hole of the gauge plate.

Correction

1. Measure the distance ridge of the gauge block against the black front profile at the left and right hand
side.
2. If not 0 mm (vertical and horizontal), adjust the block with the 2 block fixing screws.
3. Check:
Place 2 long M4 screws through the block position holes, gauge block and the gauge plate.
If the screws fit, the position of the gauge roller is correct.

4. If not:
Loosen the 2 fixing screws of the gauge plate and place the 2 long M4 screws through the block
position holes, gauge block and the gauge plate.
The gauge roller is now positioned.
5. Fix the 2 fixing screws of the gauge plate and remove the 2 M4 screws.

0 mm

0 mm

04.06.2002 6
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

General
First the scanner must be adjusted as a stand alone unit.
Then the scanner is connected to a correctly adjusted printer to adjust the com-plete scanner / printer
combination.

Adjustment tools needed are:

l CCD position tool and focus test tool 2x
code no. 7078.580, adjustment image on both sides.

7078.580
l mirror test and ’0’line adjustment, (only R2)
code no. 7991.516 (3.5 mil melinex)

7991.516

1048 (41.3")

Adjustment procedure:
Note: Most of the scanner adjustments will influence each other.So complete all the adjustments from
where you start and carry them out in order.

1. [ Maximum exposure level ]

2. [ Scanning CCD alignment ] (position CCD with the scan line, diabolo)
3. [ Scanning CCD Gain ] (exposure level)
4. [ Scanning CCD focus ] (focus, left - right contrast)
5. [ Scanning 1:1 width and right alignment ] (mirror test, correction 1:1 width and alignment at the right)

If the difference between the values is less than 5 pixels, continue with point 9.
6. [ Scanning CCD focus ] (focus, left - right contrast)
7. [ Scanning CCD alignment ] (position CCD with the scan line, diabolo)
8. [ Scanning 1:1 width and right alignment ] (mirror test, correction 1:1 width and alignment at the right)

04.06.2002 7
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Maximum exposure level

Aim

To adjust the lamp supply, to the correct light output of the exposure lamp.
To high: shortens life time of the lamp
To low: copy quality / background
Note: The adjustment is done at the moment that the exposure lamp generates maximal light output (see
figure) and is measured by the EXPSE sensor.
Necessary after replacing of the exposure lamp, supply and or sensor.

Check

No check

Correction

Attention:
Read first the complete description of the adjustment before starting with the adjustment.
When the exposure lamp is warming up, it generates more light = more voltage on the voltmeter (see
figure).
When the temperature is stable, it generates a little less light, = less voltage on the voltmeter.
Adjustment must be done on the moment that the lamp generates maximum light. This is why the
adjustment voltage cannot be set just to a fix value.

Adjustment:
1. Top cover must be in closed position.
2. Connect a voltmeter (DC range) between the testpoints EXPSE and GND on the [ Mixed power supply ]
PBA.
3. Put the jumper J6 into the [ adjustment position ] (= lowest position).
4. Switch on the scanner.
5. Measure the voltage and adjust the potentiometer R133 to keep the voltage continuously at 9.0 V ± 0.1
V during the rise.
6. Stop the adjustment when the voltage decreases!!
7. Switch off the scanner.
8. Remove the voltmeter and put the jumper on the [ Mixed Power Supply ] PBA back into its [ normal
position ] .

Figure

04.06.2002 8
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

04.06.2002 9
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

[ Scanning CCD alignment ] (Position of the CCD with the scan

line)

Aim:

With this adjustment the CCD is positioned parallel and on the scan line in the horizontal plane.
Necessary after replacing of the CCD unit.

Problem on pixel level: (1 pixel in the width direction (200 dpi)= 0.127mm)
l Slant positioning: a square will be a parallelogram
l Displaced: shadows next to thick lines with transparent originals
overexposed with shiny opaque originals.

Check:

1. Place the 2 diabolo test tools (code no. 7078.580) on the exposure glass: against the
original front profile and against the left and right side frame.
2. Close the original cover.
3. Carry out SDS test 10-7-001.
4. Specification: Value of the measured diameter (in pixels) for the left and right diabolo
should be: MINIMAL (approx. between 75 - 85 pixels.)

Scan line wrong

DIABOLO DIABOLO

Scan line Feed direction original

correct

Correction:
1. Open the covers of the CCD unit at the rear side.
2. Carry out SDS test 10-7-001.
The left and right alignment values are indicated.
Note: If the camera assy is replaced, messure if plate -C- is parrellel to the frame.
Adjust with bolts A and B till there is any value on the display.
Do not adjust 1 side completely but adjust both sides with small moves.
3. Adjust the position of the CCD with the screw -A and / or B- until the display indicates that
the value for both sides is within the specifications.
4. Deactivate the SDS test.
5. Remove the 2 diabolo test tools.

A C B

04.06.2002 10
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

04.06.2002 11
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

[ Scanning CCD Gain ] (Exposure level)

Aim:

To adjust the amplification factor of the analogue electronics of both (odd / even) CCD cells to
the same greystep value of 225, after measuring the reflect-ed light from the gauge roller.
l Setting too low: every grey step above the setting will be blank
l Setting too high: the circuit will be overload if the measurement of an original,
whiter than the gauge roller, is higher than 256.

Check:

1. Close the original cover.

2. Carry out SDS test 10-7-003.
The odd and even gain values are indicated.
3. Specification: Greystep value for the odd and even CCD channels is 225 +/-10.
Difference between odd and even: maximal 5.

Correction:

1. Remove the rear cover over the CCD unit.

2. Adjust potentiometer R35 on the CCD PBA, until the LED [ ODD ] flashes.
3. Adjust potentiometer R35 on the CCD PBA, until 225 (+2 or -2) is indicated on the screen.
4. Adjust potentiometer R48 on the CCD PBA, until the LED [ EVEN ] flashes.
5. Adjust potentiometer R48 on the CCD PBA, until 225 (+2 or -2) is indicated on the screen.

R48 R35

EVEN ODD

04.06.2002 12
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

[Scanning CCD focus ]

Aim:

To adjust the focus on the left and right side.

The CCD unit is positioned to the same and correct distance to the lens at the left and right side.

Check:

1. Make a copy from the service test original.

2. Specification: The 2.6 line pattern must be clearly visible.

Correction:

1. Open the original cover.

2. Place the focus test tool (code no. 7078.580) on the exposure glass:
against the original front profile and against the left and right side frame.
3. Close the original cover.
4. Remove the covers of the CCD assy.
5. Carry out SDS test 10-7-002.
The focus left and right values are indicated.
Note: (The CCD reads the contrast between the black and white lines.)
Adjustment screw -C- is for the right hand side focus! (see figure)
Adjustment screw -D- is for the left hand side focus! (see figure)

6. Rotate the adjustment screws until the value on the screen indicates the highest value
(empirical value is approx. 40, see also the graphic figure).
7. Leave the SDS test and remove the focus test tools.

Warning:
Value <5 means: white is measured (wrong position test chart)
Value >50 means: no reflection of test chart.

Adjustment figure

Graphic figure

04.06.2002 13
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

[ Scanning 1:1 width and right alignment ]

Note1: This one adjustment test affects both adjustment parameters: 1:1 width and the right
alignment!
Note 2: Check if the calibration factor in key operator mode is on 100 %.

Aim:
1. To adjust the correct 1:1 in width direction.
2. To adjust the optical ‘0’-line for the left side of the original (right alignment).

Check 1:

Correction 1: 1:1 width adjustment

1. Open the original cover
2. Place the 1:1 special tool (code no. 7991.516) centred over the exposure glass.
3. Close the original cover.
4. Carry out SDS test 10-7-004.
The gap difference value is indicated.
5. The software now measures the number of pixels who or which are exposed at the left side
and at the right side of the middle and calculates the correction factor for the correct width.
These values are stored automatically in the memory.
6. Specification : The value left and right must be within 990 - 1010 pixels.
For fine tuning, the horizontal correction factor can be read and or modified by hand by test
10-1-003.
Increasing the correction factor will increase the image width.

Note: If outside the specification, the mirror is out of position and the width cannot be
calculated to the correct width.
Attention: mirror is a factory adjustment!
Please contact your coordination.

7. Leave the SDS test.

8. Remove the 1:1 special tool.

----------------------------------------------------------------------
--

Check 2: Right alignment (correct ‘0’ line)

Correction 2 : Right alignment (correct ‘0’ line)

04.06.2002 14
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

[ Blocknumber with correct light intensity (PHD light intensity) ]

Attention: this test is also accessible via Settings Editor/TIM application.

Aim:
To adjust the optical density of the image.
As result, also the line pairs are more or less visible.

Check:
Select SDS test 50.
Check the line blocks.

Specification:
1. The optical density OD = 1.0 - 1.3. Choose the blocknumber with the correct blackness
2. The 3 biggest line patterns must have an open structure (up to 2.6 line pairs are visible).

Correction:
1. Make 3x a testprint with test 50 and examen the 3th print according to the specifications.
2. Select test 04-1-001.
3. Enter the chosen blocknumber.

If no grey scale available than

1. Make a test print SDS 50.
2. On the print, 20 square spots will be generated. They walk up from white,grey up to black.
1. Beside the spot range a line patern is shown, also containing 20 steps.
2. To judge which step meets the requirements, two conditions must be valid.
3. First of all, the spot must be equal black and next the 3 biggest line patterns must have an open structure.
4. Choose the right step.
3. Adjust the duty cycle of the printhead (SDS test 04-1-001 [ Blocknumber with correct light intensity ] ).
1. The choosen step number must be entered as the new value.

04.06.2002 15
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

R2 The toner concentration sensor 05B1

Aim:
To adjust the toner concentration setpoint for the toner sensor [DEVTONCONSE ].
This is needed to meet the print quality parameters.
Note:
Execute this test only with new fresh developer!

Adjustment has to be done after replacement of:

l the toner sensor but also replace the developer
l developer
l If the CPU board is replaced follow the description at the end of this document

Check:
No check.

Correction:

Starting with an empty toner unit.

Fill the toner unit.

Starting with an empty developing unit.

Fill the developer unit.

Adjustment.
Activate SDS test 05-7-001.

The test is started and takes about 5 minutes and stops automatically, never interrupt the test.
After this time, the controller reports a number, or [ Test completed ].
In case of a number, the engine keeps running.
Acknowledge the number by pressing <ENTER> as soon as possible.
The next loop takes about 15 seconds.
In case of [ Test completed ] (the sensor value is within the range), the engine stops and the test is
ended.
The determined value is automatically stored as parameters.
These parameter can be read by SDS test 05-1-001 and 05-1-003.

Test is also accessible by [ TIM ].

In case the CPU board is replaced:

Read out SDS test 05-1-003.

If the correct value (between 35 - 255) is present:

Run SDS test 05-7-002 to restore the concentration voltage.
The value is stored in parameter test 05-1-001.
No developer has to be replaced.

If the correct value (between 35 - 255) is not present:

Empty the developing unit and continue with the procedure "Starting with an empty developing
unit" as described above.

04.06.2002 16
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

[ Leading edge adjustment PRD ]

Attention: test also accessable via Settings Editor/TIM application (after R2).

Remark: To execute the next measurements properly, the print to be measured must cool down for at least
15 minutes (because of shrinkage caused by fuse temperature).

Aim:
To correct the position of the leading edge of the image related to the leading edge of the paper.

Check:
1. Activate SDS test 50 (Test print basic). A test plot is made from roll 1.
2. Measure the length from the leading edge of the image to “C” (leading edge position).

Specification: 70 mm. +/- 1 mm.

Correction:
1. Select SDS test 12-1-002 (Length between leading edge and marker "C").
2. Enter the measured length in mm, multiplied by 10.
3. The value is automatically adapted to SDS test 12-1-001.

KOS / SAS / TIM application

Measure the distance between line "C" and the border of the paper.
Insert the measured length by the scroll bar (steps of 0,1 mm or 0.01 inch)
Correction is automatically calculated and memorised.

04.06.2002 17
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

[ Paper Roll cutting length ]

Aim
To correct the length (cutting moment) of the copy material.

Check:
No check

Correction:

First execute:
12-1-002 [ Length between leading egdge and marker "C" ]
23-1-002 [ Length between marker ·" and "B" (1:1 scale in feed direction) ]
15-7-001 [ [PTR] Static deviation on measured length ]

Activate test:
12-7-001 roll 1
12-7-002 roll 2
12-7-003 roll 3
12-7-004 roll 4
12-7-005 roll 5
12-7-006 roll 6
12-7-007 all rolls
The next actions are generated automatically:
l After activating this test ten blank prints (5 times about 1300 mm and 5 times 300 mm) are made. The
cutting length is automatically corrected after the length of both print lengths is measured by [ PTRINSE
].
l From the measured times the length of the sheets are calculated and compared with the nominal
values.
The result is the correction factor for the cutting length and stored in the memory.
The cutting length adjustment is now (automatically) completed.

04.06.2002 18
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

[ PRD width position / Z-correction PRD ]

Attention: this test is also accessible via Settings Editor/TIM application (after R2).

Remark: To execute the next measurements properly, the print to be measured must cool down for at least
15 minutes (because of shrinkage caused by fuse temperature).

PRDU width position / Z-correction upper roll drawer (roll 1 & 2):

PRDM width position / Z-correction middle roll drawer (roll 3 & 4):

PRDL width position / Z-correction Lower roll drawer (roll 5 & 6):

04.06.2002 19
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

[ Leading edge adjustment PSF ]

Attention: test also accessible via Settings Editor/TIM application (after R2)

Remark: To execute the next measurements properly, the print to be measured must cool down for at least
15 minutes (because of shrinkage caused by fuse temperature).

Aim:
To correct the position of the leading edge of the image related to the leading edge of the paper.

Check:
1. Activate SDS test 50 (Test print basic), select sheet feeder.
2. Measure the length from the leading edge to "D" (leading edge position).

Specification: 70 mm. +/- 1 mm.

Correction:
1 Select SDS test 13-1-002 (Length between leading edge and marker “D”).
2 Enter the measured length in mm multiplied by 10.
3 The value is automatically adapted to SDS test 13-1-001.

KOS / SAS / TIM application

Measure the distance between line "D" and the border of the paper.
Insert the measured length by the scroll bar (steps of 0,1 mm or 0.01 inch)
Correction is automatically calculated and memorised.

04.06.2002 20
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

[ PSF width position / Z-correction sheet feeder's ]

Attention: this test is also accessible via Settings Editor/TIM application (after R2)

Remark: To execute the next measurements properly, the print to be measured must cool down for at least
15 minutes (because of shrinkage caused by fuse temperature).

PSFU width position / Z-correction upper sheet feeder 1:

Aim:
To shift the image in horizontal position between the left and right hand side of the paper borders.

Check:
1. Make a testprint with system test 50 from sheet feeder 1.
2. Measure on the print the length between the sheet side edge and marker “E”. This must be 50 mm. +/- 1
mm.

Correction:
1. A = Measured value in mm X 10.
2. Enter A in SDS test 13-1-005 [ ([PRT] PSFU Length between side edge and marker "E") ].
3. The value is automatically adapted to SDS test 13-1-003.

PSFM width position / Z-correction middle sheet feeder 2:

PSFL width position / Z-correction lower sheet feeder 3:

04.06.2002 21
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Skewing

Aim:
Paper border parallel with the image border.

Check:
Make 3 prints on A0 size (36") paper with SDS test 50 (test original
A0).
Take the 3rd print and measure the distances between paper and
image border at the left and at the right hand side.

Specification:
The difference between left and right may be 0.5 mm

Correction:
If L-R= +2 mm, move the right bracket one line clockwise and the left
bracket one line clockwise (left picture).
If L-R= -4 mm, move right bracket two lines counter clockwise and left
bracket two lines counter clockwise (right picture).

Note:
1 line displacement of the bracket is about 1 mm skew on the copy.
Example: skew is 4 mm, adjust both brackets 2 mm.

Drawing

paper border image border

left bracket right bracket

04.06.2002 22
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Static deviation PTRINSE

Attention: this test is also accessable via Settings Editor/TIM application (after R2).

Remark: To execute the next measurements properly, the print

to be measured must cool down for at least 15 minutes (because
of shrinkage caused by fuse temperature).

Aim:
To avoid incorrect start/stop behaviour of the input clutch.

Check: -

Correction:
1. Activate SDS test 15-7-001 (Static deviation on measured length).
2. A blank sheet is made.
3. Measure the length of the sheet.
4. Enter the measured value in the test, in 0,1mm.
5. The value is automatically adapted to test 15-1-004.

04.06.2002 23
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

[ Manual feed leading edge position ]

Attention: test also accessible via Settings Editor/TIM application (after R2)

Remark: To execute the next measurements properly, the print

to be measured must cool down for at least 15 minutes (because
of shrinkage caused by fuse temperature).

Aim:
To correct the position of the leading edge of the image related to the leading edge of the paper.

Check:
1. Load roll 1 with a A0 size roll.
2. Activate the SDS test 43 (Blank print).
3. Enter the value for A0 length (1189 mm) and press start.
4. Activate the SDS test 50 (Test print basic) Select manual feed and start the test.
5. Feed the just made Blank print in the manual feed.
6. Measure the length from the leading edge of the image to “D” (leading edge position).

Specification: 70 mm. +/- 1 mm.

Correction:
1. Select SDS test 15-1-002 (Length between leading edge and marker “D”).
2. Enter the measured length in mm multiplied by 10.
3. The value is automatically adapted to SDS test 15-1-001.

Settings Editor / TIM application

Measure the distance between line "D" and the border of the paper.
Insert the measured length by the scroll bar (steps of 0,1 mm or 0.01 inch)
Correction is automatically calculated and memorised.

04.06.2002 24
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

[ Manual feed width position ]

Attention: test also accessible via Settings Editor/TIM application (after R2)

Remark: To execute the next measurements properly, the print

to be measured must cool down for at least 15 minutes (because
of shrinkage caused by fuse temperature).

Aim:
To shift the image in horizontal position between the left and right hand side of the paper borders.

Check:
1. Load roll 1 with a A0 size roll.
2. Activate the SDS test 43 (Blank print).
3. Enter the value for A0 length (1189 mm) and press start.
4. Activate the SDS test 50 (Test print basic) Select manual feed.
5. Feed the just made Blank print in the manual feed.
6. Measure on the print the length between the sheet side edge and marker “F”.

Specification: 70 mm. +/- 1 mm.

Correction:
1. Select SDS test 15-1-006 [ [PTR] Length between side edge and marker “E”.].
2. Enter the measured length in mm multiplied by 10.
3. The value is automatically adapted to SDS test 15-1-003.

Settings Editor / TIM application

Measure the distance between line "E" and the border of the paper.
Insert the measured length by the scroll bar (steps of 0,1 mm or 0.01 inch)
Correction is automatically calculated and memorised.

04.06.2002 25
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Length "A" to "B" (1:1 scale)

Remark: To execute the next measurements properly, the print

to be measured must cool down for at least 15 minutes (because
of shrinkage caused by fuse temperature).

Aim:
Ensure that the image on the print / copy is 1:1.

Check:
1. Activate SDS test 50. A test plot is made from roll 1.
2. Measure the length from the line between marker "A" and "B".

Specification: 950 +/- 1mm.

Correction:
1. Select SDS test 23-1-002 (DRIMO speed).
2. Enter the measured length in mm, multiplied by 10.
The value is automatically adapted to SDS test 23-1-001

04.06.2002 26
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Long drive belt

The tension of the long drive drive belt is determined by a tensioner (strip and a spring).
No adjustment is needed.

04.06.2002 27
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Short photoconductor (drum) drive belt

1. Loosen the fixing screw of the tensioner plate.

2. The force of the spring will set the correct tension on the belt.
3. Tighten the fixing screw.

04.06.2002 28
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Height of the folder

Adjustment of the height of the folder behind the printer

Aim:
To have a good flow of the paper from the output of the fuser unit and
into the folder.

Check:
Measure with a cm tool
Specification: 175 mm, difference between left and right side (detail B
and C): maximum 2 mm.

Correction:
Adjust with the feet of the engine (detail A). The wheels must be
free from the floor and the enging must stay level:
It is possible that the adjustment with the wheels is not low
enough. Then you must lift the folder. Do this by putting the
metal plates under the folder wheels (see the information B
and C).
These plates are within the 2nd folder part.

04.06.2002 29
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

04.06.2002 30
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Bulge fingers
Aim:
Correct feeding of the print into the paper transport of the folder.

Check:
The distance between the bulge fingers and the input guide plate should be 3 +3/-2 mm.

Correction:
1. Remove at the left and right 2 screws from the right hand and left side top covers of the PTR.
2. Open the PTR door.
3. Remove at the left and right inside 1 screw from the right hand and left side top covers of the PTR.
4. Remove the right hand and left side top covers of the PTR.
5. Remove at the left and right side 2 screws from the PTR door.
6. Loosen at the left and right the fixing screws from the shaft of the bulge fingers.
7. Adjust at the left and right hand side the distance between the input guide plate of the PTR and the bulge
fingers to 3 +3/-2 mm.

04.06.2002 31
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Height of the input guides

Adjustment of the height of the input guide between the engine and
the folder.

Aim:
To have a good flow of the paper from the output of the fuser unit and
into the folder.

Check:
Measure with a cm tool between the guide plate and the blouse
fingers.
Specification: 3 +3/-2 mm.

Correction:
Adjust with the bolts -A-.

04.06.2002 32
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Rotation solenoid A4-size print

Aim:
An A4-like print must be turned from portrait to landscape.

Check:
1. Select 1st fold delivery output.
2. Make 5 A4 size prints.
3. The sheets must be delivered in the 1st fold delivery tray.

Correction:
1. Open the PTR folder door.
2. Remove at the left and right hand side the 2 fixing screws from the door.
3. Remove the door.
4. Loosen the fixing screws from the solenoid housing.
5. Push the solenoid in arrow directions and tighten the fixing screws.
Note:
The pin must be above the bottom plate.

Drawing

fixing screws

pin bottom plate

04.06.2002 33
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Rotation time A4-size print

Aim:
The left and right corner of an A4-like print must leave the output pinch of the first fold (onto the intermediate
transport) at the same time, this means : parallel

Check:
1. Print A4's (75 g) using Plot Director
1. 2 prints, sheet feeder (A4 size)
2. Cut on plot size
3. Deliver the prints on the Stacker.
2. Observe the prints exiting the First Fold unit folding rollers by raising the lower cover.
Specification: the left and right corner of the A4 like print must leave parallel.

Correction:
1. If the right corner is earlier then adjust the rotate time to a lower
value (SDS test folder 15-1-016);
if the right corner is later then adjust it to a higher value. Use 2300
for standard value.
2. Repeat the adjustment until the corners have an equal distance (+/-
3 mm) to the ruler on the intermediate transport.

04.06.2002 34
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Belt tensioner
The adjustment is only given for one belt tensioner, all others have the same principle.

Aim:
A correct tension of the drive belts.

Check:
No check available

Correction:
Drawing

04.06.2002 35
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Drawing and adjustments of first fold package (DIN)

Aim:
Delivery of a folded package with a width of 210 mm +/-1 mm.

Check:
No check

Picture

First fold package (DIN)

P = Package width

O = Overlap (first fold)

T = Trailing edge sensor (P-B)

S = Start sensor value (P-O)

B = Binding edge

04.06.2002 36
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

1st Fold output deflector solenoid

Aim:

To feed the packages without creasing from the first fold to the intermediate transport .

Check:

Fold some prints and check them.

Correction:

1. Open the folder 1 doors.

2. Loosen at the right side the 2 screws from the top cover and remove the top and top side cover.
3. Adjust the levers 1 and 2 with their screws to be aligned (drawing 1).
4. Loosen the screws 1 and 2 and move the bracket to the lowest position, the levers must have a position <
180· as shown (drawing 2).
5. Move the bracket upwards until the levers 2 and 3 are in line, lever 1 may not move, tighten the screws 1
and 2 (drawing 3).
6. Adjust the solenoid in activated position in such a way that, the gap between the ring and the solenoid is
2.5 +/- 0.2 mm and the levers 2 and 3 are in horizontal position (drawing 4).

Drawing 1

lever 2 lever 1

Drawing 2

lever 3

lever 2 lever 1

Drawing 3

lever 3

04.06.2002 37
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

lever 2 lever 1

Drawing 4

lever 2 lever 3 solenoid

screws

04.06.2002 38
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

FOLder 1 DEFlector CLutch

Assemble the clutch as follows:
1. Push the clutch -A- in direction -B- to the end position (drawing 1).
2. Turn the Allen screw -M- of clutch -A- into clutch -A- until it touches shaft -F-.
3. Unscrew -M- 1/4 turn and lock it with LOCTITE222.
4. Push weight -C- over clutch -A-.
5. Secure weight -C- with two Allen screws -D-.
6. Turn weight -C- in direction -E- until the clutch is in the locking position .
7. Turn shaft -F- in the same direction -E- until crank -G- is in the vertical position.
8. Secure weight -C- to the shaft with 2 Allen screws -H-.
9. Adjust the actuator -L- to 90 degrees +/- 5 degrees as shown in the drawing 2).

Drawing 1
Drawing 2

04.06.2002 39
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Adjustment 1st Fold trailing sensors distance

Note:
The value of FOL1 INput Motor roll DIAMmeter (18-1-001) must be
correct (the value is mentioned on the roller ).

Aim:
Determination of the distances from the trailing edge sensors to the start
sensor.

Check:
No check

Correction:
1. Select folding off via Setting Editor / Key Operator / Print / Finishing.
2. Make an A0 / 36" print using system test 50 and let it cool down for
at least 15 min.
3. Measure (over the 950 mm line) the total length of the paper in mm
(+/- 0.5 mm).
4. Enter the measured value in mm x 10 in SDS test 18-7-001 (Adjust
first fold), if no value is entered the test does not start.
5. Open the cover above the transport rollers of the intermediate
transport.
6. Use the just made print and feed it into the off-line folding input.
Take care you feed the print straight.
7. Attention ! Pick up the print in time at the intermediate transport, to
avoid damaging of the print.
8. Feed the print into the off-line folding 10 times. The machine
generates automatically a “beep” if the last print completed.
The controller shows on the last line message: Test completed.
9. Check the following parameters; if the read value is not between the
given values, you have to repeat this complete adjustment.
1. 15-1-011 must be between 6670 and 6730
2. 15-1-012 must be between 5320 and 5380
3. 15-1-013 must be between 4140 and 4200
4. 15-1-014 must be between 3230 and 3290
5. 15-1-015 must be between 2220 and 2280

Continue with adjustment adjustment 1st Fold start sensor position.

04.06.2002 40
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Adjustment 1st Fold start sensor position

[ adjustment 1st Fold trailing sensors distance. ] must be correct

Aim:
Delivery of a folded package with a width of 210 mm +/-1 mm.

Check:
No check

Correction:
1. Read out the value of SDS test 18-1-006 [ [FOL] FOLder 1 overlap ].
This value divided by 10 is "O" ( "O"=overlap)
S (start page) is the length from the leading edge to the 1st fold, S =
210 mm - O.
2. On controller, leave SDS.
3. Print a portrait A0 testfile on A0/75 gr/m2 using Plot Director.
4. Use the following settings:
1. 5 prints, auto roll
2. Cut on plotsize
3. Folding width = 210 mm
4. Binding edge = 20 mm
5. Deliver the prints on the First Fold Only.
5. Measure on each print (in the middle) the width of the page, from the
binding edge to the first fold of the package (+/- 0.5 mm). Determine
the average (Av) of the 5 measured prints.
6. Determine the difference between the average value and S.
Difference D = S - Av.
7. D10 = D x 10 (D10 can be positive or negative).
8. Activate SDS test 18-1-002 [ (Folder 1 start sensor position) ].
9. The current value is shown.
The new value is: current value + D10 (att. D10 can be positive or
negative. So current value + (+/-D10)!!)
(e.g. decreasing the value = decreases the package width).
10. Make 3 A0 prints as described above.
11. The length from the leading edge to the 1st fold must be S +/- 1mm.
12. The width of the total package must be P = 210 +/- 1mm.

04.06.2002 41
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

The adjusting procedure for the Reinforcement Unit

Like any other Oc· machine, you only check / adjust a component in case of a problem.
The reinforcement unit is no exception to that rule.
The criteria are: is the position of the reinforcement strip according to the specifications as stated in adjustments
'Stopper position (fine-tuning)' and 'Position of the Reinforcement Unit in the frame (fine-tuning)' .
If these criteria are met you are ready, or you have a problem elsewhere.

The adjustments of the reinforcement unit can be divided into two groups: the basic settings and the
fine-tuning.
When the machine concerned was already equipped with a reinforcement unit, you only have to check, and if
necessary carry out, the adjustments of the last group (fine-tuning, adjustments 11 upto 18).
In case you have installed or replaced the reinforcement unit you better start with the first group (basic settings,
adjustments 1 upto 10).

The adjustments of the reinforcement unit influence each other.

Therefore it is necessary to maintain a certain order of adjustments.
It also means that, in case you have performed one of the adjustments of the following list, you also have to
carry out all of the next adjustments in this list.

Basic adjustments, which you normally only have to carry out after installation / replacement of the
Reinforcement Unit, are:
1. Position of the copy guide in the intermediate transport (with Reinforcement Unit) (basic setting)
2. Hinges (basic setting)
3. Position of the Reinforcement Unit in the frame (basic setting)
4. Locking plate
5. Stopper angle
6. Stopper position (basic setting)
7. Third copy guide (inside the second folding unit)
8. Vertical position of the small copy guide (basic setting)
9. Horizontal position of the small copy guide (basic setting)
10. Position of the retraction solenoid of the small copy guide (basic setting) .

After this series of basic adjustments you have to check, and if necessary carry out, the adjustment
'Position of the second folding unit' .

In case you have to carry out one of the following adjustments 11, 12, or 13, first retract and fix the small
copy guide of the reinforcement unit, e.g. with a rubber band, in order to prevent it from interfering with the
adjustment you are carrying out.

If the reinforcement strip is not properly glued on the copy, you have to carry out one or more of the
following adjustments:
11. Position of the copy guide in the intermediate transport (with Reinforcement Unit) (fine-tuning)
12. Stopper position (fine-tuning)
13. Position of the Reinforcement Unit in the frame (fine-tuning)
14. Position of the retraction solenoid of the small copy guide (fine-tuning)
15. Retracted position of the small copy guide (fine-tuning)
16. Horizontal position of the small copy guide (fine-tuning)
17. Vertical position of the small copy guide (fine-tuning)
18. Long copy guide to small copy guide .

Adjustment 'Position of the upper knife' , can be carried out independently from any other adjustment.

04.06.2002 42
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Position of the copy guide in the intermediate transport (with

Reinforcement Unit) (basic setting)
Note:
This and other adjustments influence each other! Refer to 'The adjusting procedure for the Reinforcement Unit'
for the correct order of the adjustments.

Aim:
To prevent copies from running under the guide, and to guide the copies
straight into the reinforcement unit and the second folding unit.

Check:
Measure distance -A-. It should be 1.5 ± 0.5 mm over the entire length of
guide -B-.

A = 1 .5 ± 0 .5 m m

B C D

Correction:
1. Loosen bolts -C- (2x) and -D- (3x).
2. Push guide -B- against the rollers.
3. Measure distance -E- at the left and the right.
4. Adjust distance -E- to a value of 1.5 ± 0.5 mm less than the value
you measured in step 3.
5. Tighten bolts -C- (2x). Now the distance towards the rollers is fixed.
6. Slide guide -B- as far as possible to the left (this enables you to
carry out the other adjustments; in the end of the adjusting
procedure you will have to slide guide -B- to the right, according to
the adjustment 'Long copy guide to small copy guide').
7. Tighten bolts -D- (3x).

04.06.2002 43
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Hinges (basic setting)

Note:
This and other adjustments influence each other! Refer to 'The adjusting procedure for the Reinforcement Unit'
for the correct order of the adjustments.

Aim:
To create a correct starting point for the next adjustments.

Check:
1. Check if distance -B- is 18 ± 1 mm.
2. Check if distance -D- is 34 ± 1 mm.
D = 34 ± 1 mm

A B = 18 ± 1 m m C E

Correction:
1. Adjust the female hinge -A- on the reinforcement unit in such a way
that distance -B- is 18 ± 1 mm.
2. Adjust the male hinge -C- on the frame of the second folding unit in
such a way that distance -D- is 34 ± 1 mm.
3. Move plate -E- against hinge -C- and tighten the bolts.

04.06.2002 44
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Position of the Reinforcement Unit in the frame (basic setting)

Note:
This and other adjustments influence each other! Refer to 'The adjusting procedure for the Reinforcement Unit'
for the correct order of the adjustments.

Aim:
To create a correct starting point for the next adjustments.

Check:
1. Open the reinforcement unit and check if the appropriate washer is
placed on the lower hinge.
2. Put a steel ruler on surface -A- and check if surfaces -A- and -B- are
parallel within 0.5 mm.
B A

D
E

G F

Correction:
1. Open the reinforcement unit.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Loosen the bolts -C- (2x).
4. Lift the bracket -D- and close the unit.
5. Loosen the bolts -E- (3x).
6. Level the unit with eccentric screw -F- (surfaces -A- and -B- parallel
within 0.5 mm).
7. Tighten the bolts -E-.
8. Make sure bracket -D- rests on roll -G-.
9. Tighten the bolts -C-.
10. Mount the cover.

04.06.2002 45
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Locking plate
Note:
This and other adjustments influence each other! Refer to 'The adjusting procedure for the Reinforcement Unit'
for the correct order of the adjustments.

Aim:
To make sure the Reinforcement Unit locks properly.

Check:
If distance -A- is between 0 and 1 mm.

B C

E D

A = 0 - 1 mm

Correction:
1. Loosen the bolts -B- (2x).
2. Move plate -C- towards you.
3. Loosen the bolts -D- (2x).
4. Move plate -E- in such a way that distance -A- is between 0 and 1
mm.
5. Tighten the bolts -D- (2x).
6. Pull the unit towards you, move plate -C- against the frame plate -F-,
and tighten bolts -B- (2x).

F B

04.06.2002 46
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Stopper angle
Note:
This and other adjustments influence each other! Refer to 'The adjusting procedure for the Reinforcement Unit'
for the correct order of the adjustments.

Aim:
To prevent copies from slipping downward along the stopper / slipping
over the stopper.

Check:
The angle between the upper surface of the rollers and the stopper must
be just a little more than 90 degrees.
This can be checked by manually pushing down the stopper, while a
piece of paper is touching the stopper.
The paper may not be pulled down by the stopper.
The drawing below right is a view from the rear side of the unit.

B A 91 + 1°

C D

B A

Correction:
1. Loosen the bolts -A- (2x).
2. Turn eccentric bolts -B- in such a way that bolts -A- (2x) are in the middle of the slots in the stopper.
3. Tighten bolts -A- (2x).
4. Loosen the bolts -C- (2x).
5. Move the solenoid -D- upwards to increase the angle or downwards to decrease the angle.
6. Tighten the bolts -C- (2x).

04.06.2002 47
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Stopper position (basic setting)

Note:
This and other adjustments influence each other! Refer to 'The adjusting procedure for the Reinforcement Unit'
for the correct order of the adjustments.

Aim:
To create a correct starting point for the next adjustments.

Check:
1. Measure distance -A-, it should be 1 ± 0.5 mm.
2. Measure distance -B-, it should be A + 1 ± 0.5 mm.
3. Distance -B- should always be bigger than distance -A-.

D C

A = 1 ± 0.5 mm

B = A + 1 ± 0.5 mm

E C

Correction:
1. Loosen the bolts -C- (2x).
2. Turn eccentric bolt -D- to change distance -A- to 1 ± 0.5 mm.
3. Turn eccentric bolt -E- to change distance -B- to A + 1 ± 0.5 mm.
4. Tighten the bolts -C- (2x).

04.06.2002 48
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Third copy guide (inside the second folding unit)

Note:
This and other adjustments influence each other! Refer to 'The adjusting procedure for the Reinforcement Unit'
for the correct order of the adjustments.

Aim:
To prevent the guide from touching the rollers.

Check:
Distance -A- between guide -B- and rollers -C- should be 1.5 ± 0.5 mm.

A = 1.5 ± 0.5 mm

Correction:
1. Loosen the bolts -D- (2x).
2. Move guide -B- to the correct distance.
3. Tighten the bolts -D- (2x).

04.06.2002 49
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Vertical position of the small copy guide (basic setting)

Note:
This and other adjustments influence each other! Refer to 'The adjusting procedure for the Reinforcement Unit'
for the correct order of the adjustments.

Aim:
To create a correct starting point for the next adjustments.

Check:
Measure distance -A- at the left and the right. It should be 13 ± 1 mm.

A = 13 ± 1 mm
B

B
C

Correction:
1. Loosen the screw -B-.
2. Move block -C- up or down until A = 13 ± 1 mm.
3. Tighten the screw -B-.

04.06.2002 50
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Horizontal position of the small copy guide (basic setting)

Note:
This and other adjustments influence each other! Refer to 'The adjusting procedure for the Reinforcement Unit'
for the correct order of the adjustments.

Aim:
To create a correct starting point for the next adjustments.

Check:
Bolts -A- should be in the middle of the slots.

Correction:
1. Loosen the bolts -A- (2x).
2. Move plate -B- left or right until bolts -A- are in the middle of the
slots.
3. Tighten the bolts -A- (2x).

04.06.2002 51
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Position of the retraction solenoid of the small copy guide (basic

setting)
Note:
This and other adjustments influence each other! Refer to 'The adjusting procedure for the Reinforcement Unit'
for the correct order of the adjustments.

Aim:
To create a correct starting point for the next adjustments.

Check:
Bolts -A- should be in the middle of the slots.

B
A

Correction:
1. Loosen the bolts -A- (2x).
2. Move the solenoid -B- up or down until bolts -A- are in the middle of
the slots.
3. Tighten the bolts -A- (2x).

04.06.2002 52
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Position of the copy guide in the intermediate transport (with

Reinforcement Unit) (fine-tuning)
Note:
This and other adjustments influence each other! Refer to 'The adjusting procedure for the Reinforcement Unit'
for the correct order of the adjustments.

Aim:
To guide the copies straight into the reinforcement unit and the second
folding unit.

Check:
Measure skewness -X- of the folded copy.
Specification: X < 2 mm

X < 2 mm X < 2 mm

A B

Correction:

If the situation is like A:

1. Measure the distance -C- between the rollers and the guide -F- at the left and the right.
2. Loosen the bolts -D- (2x) and -E- (3x).
3. At the left correct distance -C- to 2.0 + 0 / - 0.5 mm.
4. Push the guide -F- a little towards the rollers at the right hand side.
5. Tighten all the bolts handtight.
6. Make a folded copy and measure skewness -X-.
7. If necessary repeat steps 1 upto 6.
8. Continue with step 16.

If the situation is like B:

9. Measure the distance -C- between the rollers and the guide -F- at the left and the right.
10. Loosen bolts -D- (2x) and -E- (3x).
11. At the right correct distance -C- to 2.0 + 0 / - 0.5 mm.
12. Push guide -F- a little towards the rollers at the left hand side.
13. Tighten all the bolts handtight.
14. Make a folded copy and measure skewness -X-.
15. If necessary repeat the steps 9 upto 14.

16. Make sure the distance from the guide to the rollers is at least 0.5 mm.
17. Tighten bolts -D- (2x). Now the distance towards the rollers is fixed.
18. Slide guide -F- as far as possible to the left (this enables you to carry out the other adjustments. At the end
of the adjusting procedure you have to slide guide -F- as far as possible to the right. Make sure it does not
interfere with the small copy guide of the Reinforcement Unit).
19. Tighten the bolts -E- (3x).

04.06.2002 53
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

D E
F

04.06.2002 54
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Stopper position (fine-tuning)

Note:
This and other adjustments influence each other! Refer to 'The adjusting procedure for the Reinforcement Unit'
for the correct order of the adjustments.

Aim:
To make sure the reinforcement strip is glued correctly on the copy in
length direction.

Check:
1. Make 5 copies, A1, folded and reinforced.
2. Check dimension -A-. It should be 108.5 ± 1 mm.
Correction:

A = 108.5 ± 1 mm

C B

F = D + 1 ± 0.5 mm

E B

If -A- is more than 108.5 + 1 mm:

1. Loosen the bolts -B- (2x).
2. Turn the eccentric bolt -C- to decrease the distance -D-.
3. Turn the eccentric bolt -E- to decrease the distance -F- to D + 1 ±
0.5 mm.
4. Tighten the bolts -B- (2x).

If -A- is less than 108.5 - 1 mm:

1. Loosen bolts -B- (2x).
2. Turn eccentric bolt -C- to decrease the distance -D-.
3. Turn eccentric bolt -E- to decrease the distance -F- to D + 1 ± 0.5
mm.
4. Tighten the bolts -B- (2x).

Note 1:
Distance -F- should always be more than distance -D-.

04.06.2002 55
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Note 2:
Make sure the stopper does not touch the roller.

04.06.2002 56
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Position of the Reinforcement Unit in the frame (fine-tuning)

Note:
This and other adjustments influence each other! Refer to 'The adjusting procedure for the Reinforcement Unit'
for the correct order of the adjustments.

Aim:
To make sure the reinforcement strip is glued correctly on the copy in
width direction.

Check:
1. Make 5 copies, A1, folded and reinforced.
2. Check dimension -A-. It should be 12 ± 1 mm and parallel within 0.5
mm.

A = 12 ± 1 mm

Correction:

B D

If -A- is larger than 12 + 1 mm:

1. Loosen the bolts -B- (2x).
2. Move plate -C- as many millimetres to the inside as -A- differs from
12 mm (create a gap -D- between plate -C- and hinge -E-
accordingly).
3. Tighten the bolts -B-.
4. Loosen the bolts -F- (2x).
5. Move the hinge -E- against plate -C-.
6. Tighten the bolts -F- (2x).

If -A- is smaller than 12 - 1 mm:

1. Loosen the bolts -F- (2x).
2. Move the hinge -E- as many millimetres to the outside as -A- differs
from 12 mm (create a gap -D- between hinge -E- and plate -C-
accordingly).
3. Tighten the bolts -F-.
4. Loosen the bolts -B- (2x).
5. Move plate -C- against hinge -E-.
6. Tighten the bolts -B- (2x).

If the strip is not glued parallel to the edge of the copy:

04.06.2002 57
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

K H G

J I L

1. Loosen the bolts -G- (2x) and bolts -H- (2x).

2. Pull the unit towards you (without releasing the latch) and turn bolts -I- (2x) both the same number of turns,
until the unit -J- is parallel to the frame of the intermediate transport -K-.
3. Tighten the bolts -H- (2x).
4. Move plate -L- against the frame -K- of the intermediate transport.
5. Tighten the bolts -G- (2x).

04.06.2002 58
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Position of the retraction solenoid of the small copy guide

(fine-tuning)
Note:
This and other adjustments influence each other! Refer to 'The adjusting procedure for the Reinforcement Unit'
for the correct order of the adjustments.

Aim:
To put the small copy guide in the right home position (horizontally).

Check:
1. Make sure solenoid -A- is not activated.
2. Measure distance -B-. It should be between 0.1 and 0.5 mm.
B = 0.1 - 0.5mm

Correction:
1. Remove the door of the reinforcement unit.
2. Loosen the bolts -C- (2x).
3. Move the solenoid -A- in such a way that distance -B- is between 0.1
and 0.5 mm.
4. Tighten the bolts -C- (2x).
5. Mount the door.

04.06.2002 59
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Retracted position of the small copy guide (fine-tuning)

Note:
This and other adjustments influence each other! Refer to 'The adjusting procedure for the Reinforcement Unit'
for the correct order of the adjustments.

Aim:
To prevent the small copy guide from being hit by the lower stamp, if the
retraction solenoid does not function.

Check:
1. Unlock the single-revolution clutch in order to release the stamp
drive.
2. Manually move up stamp -A- until bracket -B- is released.
3. Measure the distance -C-. It should be 4.6 ± 2 mm.
4. Manually move up the stamp -A- to its top position and push it
downwards again until the solenoid locks it in its home position.

C = 4.6 ± 2mm

B
D

Correction:
1. Unlock the single-revolution clutch in order to release the stamp
drive.
2. Manually move up stamp -A- until bracket -B- is released.
3. Loosen the bolt -D-.
4. Move bracket -B- up or down until distance -C- is 4.6 ± 2 mm.
5. Tighten the bolt -D-.
6. Manually move up stamp -A- to its top position and push it
downwards again until the solenoid locks it in its home position.

04.06.2002 60
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Horizontal position of the small copy guide (fine-tuning)

Note:
This and other adjustments influence each other! Refer to 'The adjusting procedure for the Reinforcement Unit'
for the correct order of the adjustments.

Aim:
To align the small copy guide of the reinforcement unit with the copy
guide of the intermediate transport, in order to prevent copy transport
jams and for skew reinforcement strips.

Check:
Put a steel ruler -A- against the long copy guide at position -B-. The
distance between the steel ruler and the short copy guide should be 0.5
+ 0.5 / - 0 mm at both ends -C- and -D- of the short copy guide.

A
B
D C

F
E

Correction:
1. Open the unit.
2. Loosen bolts -E- and -F-.
3. In case of a difference at position -C-: move the plate -G- on the side
of bolt -E- with the difference you measured in the check above.
In case of a difference at position -D-: move the plate -G- on the side
of bolt -F- with the difference you measured in the check above.
4. Tighten the bolts -E- and -F-.

04.06.2002 61
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Vertical position of the small copy guide (fine-tuning)

Note:
This and other adjustments influence each other! Refer to 'The adjusting procedure for the Reinforcement Unit'
for the correct order of the adjustments.

Aim:
To align the small copy guide of the reinforcement unit with the copy
guide of the intermediate transport, and with the second folding unit, in
order to prevent for jams in the copy transport.

Check:
Put a steel ruler -A- on the small copy guide. The distance between the
steel ruler and the short copy guide should be 0.5 + 0.5 / - 0 mm at
position -B-, and 2 ± 0.5 mm at position -C-.
Note:
The picture below is a view from the rear.

A D E F

B C

B= 0.5 -0/+0.5mm
C = 2 ±0.5mm

Correction:

In case of a difference at position -B-:

1. Loosen the screw -D-.
2. Move the plate -E- on the side of screw -D- with the difference you
measured in the check above.
3. Tighten the screw -D-.

In case of a difference at position -C-:

1. Loosen the screw -F-.
2. Move the plate -E- on the side of screw -F- with the difference you
measured in the check above.
3. Tighten the screw -F-.

04.06.2002 62
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Long copy guide to small copy guide

Note:
This and other adjustments influence each other! Refer to 'The adjusting procedure for the Reinforcement Unit'
for the correct order of the adjustments.

Aim:
To make sure the small guide of the reinforcement unit does not touch
the long copy guide of the intermediate transport.

Check:
Distance -A- should be 2 ± 1 mm

A=2 ±1mm

B C

Correction:
1. Loosen the bolts -B- (3x).
2. Move the guide -C- to the left or the right to create a distance -A- of
2 ± 1 mm.
3. Tighten the bolts -E- (3x).

04.06.2002 63
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Position of the upper knife.

Aim:
To make sure the knife cleanly cuts the reinforcement tape.

Check:
1. Release the single revolution clutch.
2. Move up the bottom stamp until the top of the moving knife -X-
reaches the top of the fixed knife -Y-.
3. Check if the distance between the knives at the top of the knives -A-
is 0.1 mm.
4. At the same position of the knives, distance -B- must be 0.5 mm.
A = 0.1mm

X
C

B= 0.5mm

Correction:
1. Loosen the bolts -C- (2x).
2. Move the fixed knife -Y- in such a position that the conditions as given above, are fulfilled.
3. Tighten the bolts -C- (2x).

04.06.2002 64
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Adjustment 2nd Fold start sensor position

[ Adjustment 2nd Fold trailing sensor distance ] must be correct

Aim:
Delivery of a folded package with a length of 297 +/- 1 mm.

Check:
No check

Correction:

1. On controller, leave SDS.

2. Print a portrait A1 testfile on A1/75 gr/m2 using Plot Director.
3. Select the folowing settings:
1. 10 prints, auto roll
2. Cut on plotsize
3. Folding width = 210 mm
4. Binding edge = 20 mm
5. Folding length = 297 mm
6. Deliver the prints on the Stacker
4. Measure on each package (in the middle) the length of the upper page of the folded print (+/- 0.5
mm). Determine the average (Av) of the 10 measured prints.
5. Determine the difference between the average value and 297 (298 for 1 mm overlap). Difference D
= Av - 297 (298).
6. D10 = D x 10
7. Activate SDS test 18-1-005 [ (Folder 2 start sensor position) ].
8. The current value is shown.
9. The new value is: current value minus D10 (att. D10 can be positive or negative. So current value +
(+/-D10)!!)
10. Print an A0 and an A1 with settings as described above.
11. The length must be 297 +/- 1 mm.

04.06.2002 65
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Adjustment 2nd Fold trailing sensor distance Release 1

Note:
The value of FOL2 INput Motor roll DIAMmeter (18-1-003) must be correct (the value is mentioned on the roller
).

Aim:
Determination of the distance from the trailing edge sensor to the start
sensor.

Check:
No check

Correction:
1. Take a sheet A-4 size 75 gr/m2.
2. Measure the length of the sheet in the middle (+/- 0.5 mm).
3. A = measured value in mm x 10.
4. Enter A in SDS test 18-7-002 (Adjustment start sensor position).
5. The test will be activated after entering the measured value and pressing Enter/Start on the controller.
6. Open the cover above the intermediate transport rollers.
7. Put the sheet on the rollers. Align the side edge (in length direction) on to the ruler of the transport.
8. After being transported, pick up the print and feed it on the same way into the transport unit.
Repeat this action until the machine generates automatically a “beep” if the last print completed (the 10th).
9. On controller: Last line message: Test completed.
10. The value is stored in test 18-1-004.

Continue with Adjustment 2nd Fold start sensor position

04.06.2002 66
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Flat guide plate 2nd folding unit

Aim:
To feed the copy flat into the 2nd folding unit so that no creases into the package occur in the 2nd fold.

Check:

1. Make 2 A0 folded copies.

2. Specification: no creases in the folded copies in the 2nd fold.

Correction:

1. Open the copy delivery tray of the 2nd folding unit.

2. Remove the rear cover of the 2nd folding unit
3. Switch the machine to SDS.
4. Activate SDS test 18-4-002.
5. Loosen the fixing screws of the solenoid (FOL2FLATSO).
6. Adjust the distance between the flat guide plate and the bottom guide plate to 10 +0.5/-0.5 mm.
7. Tighten the fixing screws of the solenoid.
8. Switch to service copy mode and check again for creases.

Drawing

FOL2FLATSO

04.06.2002 67
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

FOLder 2 DEFlector CLutch

Assemble the clutch as follows

1. Push the clutch -A- in direction -B- to the end position (drawing 1).
2. Turn the Allen screw -M- of clutch -A- into clutch -A- until it touches shaft -F-.
3. Unscrew -M- 1/4 turn and lock it with LOCTITE222.
4. Push weight -C- over clutch -A-.
5. Secure weight -C- with two Allen screws -D-.
6. Turn weight -C- in the direction -E- until the clutch is in the locking position.
7. Turn shaft -F- in the same direction -E- until crank -G- is in the horizontal position.
8. Secure weight -C- to the shaft with 2 Allen screws -H-.
9. Adjust the actuator -L- to 90 degrees +/- 5 degrees as shown in the drawing 2.

Drawing 1

Shaft -F- Weight -C- Allen screw -M- clutch -A-

Allen screws -H- Allen screws -D-

Drawing 2

Actuator -L- Crank -G-

04.06.2002 68
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Guide plate inner transport

Aim:

To feed the copy straight and correctly into the 2nd folding section

Check:

1. Make 5 A1 folded copies.

2. Specification: the skew the 2nd fold must be within +10/ -5 mm.

Correction:

1. Open the lower cover of the 1st fold and the paper tray.
2. Loosen the 3 screws from the guide plate.
3. Adjust the guide plate to the required position, it must be 1.5 mm free from the transport rollers.
4. Tighten the 3 screws again.
5. Check the specifications again.

Drawing

guide plate transport rollers

04.06.2002 69
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Adjustment

Position 2nd Fold

Aim:
Transport of the prints from the 1st fold to the 2nd fold without being jammed.

Check:
1. Close all covers from the folding units.
2. The distance between the lower cover of the 1st fold and the cover of the intermediate transport unit should
be parallel and max. 12 mm.

Correction:
Mount spacer plates between the wheels and the bottom frame (the plates are kept inside the 2nd fold unit on
the bottom
plate against the side frame).

04.06.2002 70
Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

CONTROLLER

1 -CONTROLLER ASSY 1
1L 7078.240 --FRAME 1
2 7045.140 --FLOPPY DISK DRIVE 1
3 7045.141 --CD-ROM DRIVE 1
4 7175.972 --HARD DISK, IDE 1
5 7045.145 --SCSI PBA 1
6 7045.148 --HARD DISK, SCSI 2
7 7078.241 --POWER SUPPLY 1
8 7078.242 --FAN 1
9 7045.149 --MAINBOARD PBA 1
10 1202.274 --DIMM, DRAM 1X128MB 1
11 5584.613 --SPICE II PBA 1
5584.579 --SPICE II PBA (SEE INFO BULLETIN 1016) 1
16 7078.239 --RISERBOARD PBA 1
20 7101.266 --TOKENRING PBA (OPTIONAL) 1
21 7101.434 --ETHERNET PBA (OPTIONAL) 1
22 5584.487 --DPP DUAL PARALELL PORT (OPTIONAL) 1
25 2977.812 -MONITOR 17 INCH 1
2977.813 -MONITOR 21 INCH 1
26 2977.814 -MOUSE 1
31 7045.158 -KEYBOARD-NL 1
7045.159 - " -DE 1
7045.160 - " -FR 1
7045.161 - " -GB 1
7045.162 - " -SE 1
7045.163 - " -DK 1
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

7045.164 - " -NO 1

7045.165 - " -IT 1
7045.166 - " -US 1
7045.167 - " -ES 1
7045.168 - " -PT 1
7045.169 - " -FI 1
7045.171 - " -HU 1
7045.172 - " -PL 1
7045.173 - " -CZ 1
51 5799.696 -R2.0 REPLACEMENT CD 1
7070.831 -R2.1 REPLACEMENT CD 1
7176.061 -V3.0 REPLACEMENT CD 1
7176.247 -V3.0.1 REPLACEMENT CD 1
70 7070.790 -R2.0 BOOT FLOPPY DISK (CLIENT SPECIFIC) 1
7070.842 -R2.1 BOOT FLOPPY DISK (CLIENT SPECIFIC) 1
71 7069.748 -DIAGNOSTIC DISK 1

04.06.2002 2
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

CONTROLLER RD G1

1 -CONTROLLER ASSY 1
1L 7078.240 --FRAME 1
2 7045.140 --FLOPPY DISK DRIVE 1
3 7045.141 --CD-ROM DRIVE 1
4 7175.972 --HARD DISK, IDE 1
7 7078.241 --POWER SUPPLY 1
8 7078.242 --FAN 1
9 7045.149 --MAINBOARD PBA 1
10 1202.274 --DIMM, DRAM 1X128MB -
11 5584.613 --SPICE PBA 1
16 7078.239 --RISERBOARD PBA 1
20 7101.266 --TOKENRING PBA (OPTIONAL) 1
21 7101.434 --ETHERNET PBA (OPTIONAL) 1
25 2977.812 -MONITOR 17 INCH 1
2977.813 -MONITOR 21 INCH 1
26 2977.814 -MOUSE 1
31 7045.158 -KEYBOARD-NL 1
7045.159 - " -DE 1
7045.160 - " -FR 1
7045.161 - " -GB 1
7045.162 - " -SE 1
7045.163 - " -DK 1
7045.164 - " -NO 1
7045.165 - " -IT 1
7045.166 - " -US 1
7045.167 - " -ES 1

04.06.2002 3
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

7045.168 - " -PT 1

7045.169 - " -FI 1
7045.171 - " -HU 1
7045.172 - " -PL 1
7045.173 - " -CZ 1
51 7093.709 -OCE REPRO DESK V4.21 SERVER UPDATE 1
52 7094.447 -OCE REPRO DESK NT4.0 1
70 NOT AVAILABLE -BOOT FLOPPY DISK 1
71 7069.748 -DIAGNOSTIC DISK 1

04.06.2002 4
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

CONTROLLER NGC GX100

1 -CONTROLLER ASSY 1
7174.998 --CONTROLLER ASSY, STRIPPED 1
4 7175.972 --HARD DISK, IDE 1
5 7095.300 --SCSI PBA U160 1
6 7045.148 --HARD DISK, SCSI -
10 1202.274 --DIMM, DRAM 1X128MB -
11 5584.613 --SPICE-II PBA 1
5584.579 --SPICE-II PBA (SEE INFO BULLETIN 1016) 1
20 7101.266 --TOKENRING PBA (OPTIONAL) 1
21 7101.434 --ETHERNET PBA (OPTIONAL) 1
22 5584.487 --DPP DUAL PARALELL PORT (OPTIONAL) 1
25 2977.812 -MONITOR 17 INCH 1
2977.813 -MONITOR 21 INCH 1
26 2977.814 -MOUSE 1
31 7045.158 -KEYBOARD-NL 1
7045.159 - " -DE 1
7045.160 - " -FR 1
7045.161 - " -GB 1
7045.162 - " -SE 1
7045.163 - " -DK 1
7045.164 - " -NO 1
7045.165 - " -IT 1
7045.166 - " -US 1
7045.167 - " -ES 1
7045.168 - " -PT 1
7045.169 - " -FI 1

04.06.2002 5
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

7045.171 - " -HU 1

7045.172 - " -PL 1
7045.173 - " -CZ 1
51 5799.696 -R2.0 REPLACEMENT CD 1
7070.831 -R2.1 REPLACEMENT CD 1
7176.061 -V3.0 REPLACEMENT CD 1
7176.247 -V3.0.1 REPLACEMENT CD 1
70 7070.790 -R2.0 BOOT FLOPPY DISK (CLIENT SPECIFIC) 1
7070.842 -R2.1 BOOT FLOPPY DISK (CLIENT SPECIFIC) 1
71 7070.865 -DIAGNOSTIC DISK 1

04.06.2002 6
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

CONTROLLER RD GX100

1 -CONTROLLER ASSY 1
7174.998 -CONTROLLER ASSY, STRIPPED 1
4 7175.972 --HARD DISK, IDE 1
10 1202.274 --DIMM, DRAM 1X128MB 1
11 5584.613 --SPICE-II PBA 1
20 7101.266 --TOKENRING PBA (OPTIONAL) 1
21 7101.434 --ETHERNET PBA (OPTIONAL) 1
25 2977.812 -MONITOR 17 INCH 1
2977.813 -MONITOR 21 INCH 1
26 2977.814 -MOUSE 1
31 7045.158 -KEYBOARD-NL 1
7045.159 - " -DE 1
7045.160 - " -FR 1
7045.161 - " -GB 1
7045.162 - " -SE 1
7045.163 - " -DK 1
7045.164 - " -NO 1
7045.165 - " -IT 1
7045.166 - " -US 1
7045.167 - " -ES 1
7045.168 - " -PT 1
7045.169 - " -FI 1
7045.171 - " -HU 1
7045.172 - " -PL 1
7045.173 - " -CZ 1
51 7093.709 -OCE REPRO DESK V4.21 SERVER UPDATE 1

04.06.2002 7
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

52 7094.447 -OCE REPRO DESK NT4.0 1

70 NOT AVAILABLE -BOOT FLOPPY DISK 1
71 7070.865 -DIAGNOSTIC DISK 1

04.06.2002 8
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image
Please refer to the drawing of the GX100

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

CONTROLLER PLC GX150

1 -CONTROLLER ASSY 1
7176.291 --CONTROLLER ASSY, STRIPPED 1
4 7176.292 --HARD DISK, IDE 2
10 7225.630 --DIMM, DRAM 1X128MB 133 MHz -
11 5584.613 --SPICE-II PBA 1
5584.579 --SPICE-II PBA 1
20 7101.266 --TOKENRING PBA (OPTIONAL) 1
21 7101.434 --ETHERNET PBA (OPTIONAL) 1
22 5584.487 --DPP DUAL PARALELL PORT (OPTIONAL) 1
25 2977.812 -MONITOR 17 INCH 1
2977.813 -MONITOR 21 INCH 1
26 2977.814 -MOUSE 1
31 7045.158 -KEYBOARD-NL 1
7045.159 - " -DE 1
7045.160 - " -FR 1
7045.161 - " -GB 1
7045.162 - " -SE 1
7045.163 - " -DK 1
7045.164 - " -NO 1
7045.165 - " -IT 1
7045.166 - " -US 1
7045.167 - " -ES 1
7045.168 - " -PT 1
7045.169 - " -FI 1
7045.171 - " -HU 1
7045.172 - " -PL 1
7045.173 - " -CZ 1
51 7176.247 -V3.0.1 REPLACEMENT CD 1
71 7070.865 -DIAGNOSTIC DISK 1
72 7095.290 -SPICE III TESTDISK 1

04.06.2002 9
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PHOTOCONDUCTOR

1 7069.008 -PACKED PHOTOCONDUCTOR 1

2 7045.269 -LEAF SPRING 1
3 2977.856 -PULLEY GEAR 1
4 2912.554 -SPRING HOUSING 1
5 1037.688 -EARTH WIRE 1
6 2962.860 -RESISTOR ASSY, 100K 1

04.06.2002 10
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

04.06.2002 11
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

CHARGING UNIT

1 2999.821 -CHARGING ASSY 1

6 2999.818 --CORONA-WIRE ASSY 1
8 2912.615 --LID 1
10 2912.620 -PRESSURE BLOCK 2
11 3861.198 -COMPRESSION SPRING 2
12 5583.883 -ERASER PBA 3
13 2912.622 -BUSH 9
19 5583.923 -GRID PBA 1
20 2999.822 -BUSH 2

04.06.2002 12
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

AIR SUPPLY, SECTION 1

1 7045.048 -SUCTION BOX ASSY 1

2 2926.727 --CLAMP 1
3 2926.728 --CLAMP 1
4 2944.945 --CLAMP 8
5 2926.707 --FAN ASSY 24V 1
6 2926.714 --SNAP RIVET 4
7 2926.715 --FILTER 2

04.06.2002 13
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

AIR SUPPLY, SECTION 2

9 2977.594 -GUIDE PLATE 1

13 2977.681 -COVER PLATE ASSY 1
15 2912.644 -PICK PAWL 1
18 2912.434 -BRACKET,RH 1
19 2912.435 -BRACKET,LH 1
20 2977.971 -PROFILE ASSY 1
21 2926.733 -BUSH 1
22 2926.731 -SEAL PLATE 2
42 2945.073 -FRONT HOUSING 8
44 2945.075 -GUIDE WHEEL 8
47 7045.002 -PROFILE 1
48 7078.304 -SEAL 2

04.06.2002 14
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PRINTHEAD

1 5600.402 -PRINTHEAD 1
35 2977.823 -NTC RESISTOR 1
PHDNTC, 04R1
50 5584.536 -PRINTHEAD INTERFACE PBA 1
04PBA01, PHDDATA

04.06.2002 15
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

04.06.2002 16
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

DEVELOPING UNIT

1 5600.401 -DEVELOPING UNIT 1

10 2912.538 --SENSOR HOUSING 1
11 7078.399 --ADJUSTED SENSOR 1
DEVTONCONSE, 05B1
12 2912.542 --GEAR 25/15T 2
13 7078.317 --GEAR 27T 1
15 2912.547 --GEAR 25T 1
17 2912.549 --CONNECTION PLATE 1
69 3314.009 --RING 3
80 2978.043 --CAP 1
90 7045.011 -DEVELOPER 1

04.06.2002 17
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

TONER DOSAGE UNIT

30 7005.968 -TONERDOSAGE UNIT 1

32 1933.256 --DC MOTOR 1
DEVTONMO, 05M1
33 2912.321 --22W03 BUNDLE 1
34 2912.683 --GEAR 48T 1
35 2912.598 --SHAFT 1
36 2912.592 --MAGNETIC SWITCH 1
ZDEVTONSW, 05S1
37 2944.852 --GROMMET 1
Note: An Oc· B5 toner kit (2 bottles) can be ordered via the normal supply channels by
article number 25001843

04.06.2002 18
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

TRANSFER

1 7070.463 -TRANSFER ASSY 1

2 7070.468 --BLOCK,RH 1
3 7070.470 --BLOCK,LH 1
4 2999.727 --LID 2
7 2999.802 --CORONA WIRE ASSY 2
8 2912.639 --PAPER GUIDE,RH 5
9 2912.640 --PAPER GUIDE,LH 5

04.06.2002 19
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

CLEANING

1 5600.348 -CLEANING ASSY 1

2 2912.651 --CLEANING BLADE ASSY 1
3 2185.028 --SHOULDER SCREW 1
9 7048.538 --SHAFT, SPRING ASSY 1
10 2912.667 --GEAR 22T 1
11 2912.669 --SEAL PLATE ASSY 2
12 2944.946 -TENSION SPRING 2
14 2945.066 -WASTE TONER BAG 1

04.06.2002 20
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

04.06.2002 21
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

ABSORBER, SECTION 1

1 7078.619 -ABSORBER ASSY 1

13 2912.736 -FAN ASSY 2
FUSFANL, 08M1
FUSFANR, 08M2
15 7078.496 -REFLECTOR 1
18 2977.509 -REFLECTOR 1
30 7078.611 -INSULATION 1
32 2977.510 -FRONT COVER 1
48 2978.019 -HANDLE, UPTO MOD.07 1
48A 7070.577 -HANDLE, FROM M0D.07 1
80 7078.349 -GUARD 2
85 7078.352 -GRIP, FROM MOD.07 1
86 2258.103 -LOCKING RING, FROM MOD.07 1

04.06.2002 22
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

ABSORBER, SECTION 2

24 2977.514 -PLAIN BEARING 2

34 7078.393 -SUPPORT BRACKET 1
37 2977.515 -SUPPORT BEARING 1
44 2912.736 -FAN 1
PTROUTFAN, 15M3
55 7045.295 -PIN 1
56 7045.262 -KNOB 1
58 3861.141 -COMPRESSION SPRING 1
61 2978.009 -BRACKET 1
62 2977.726 -TENSIONER PLATE 2
65 2978.008 -PIN ASSY 1
68 2978.013 -AIR ADAPTOR 1
70 2978.018 -RING 1
76 7078.334 -GUIDE SPRING 8
78 7078.603 -COOLING ASSY 1

04.06.2002 23
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

HEATER, SECTION 1

1 7078.618 -HEATER ASSY 1

2 7078.612 -NTC RESISTOR 5
FUSNTC1, 08R1 (TONER SIDE OF ENGINE)
FUSNTC2, 08R2
FUSNTC3, 08R3
FUSNTC4, 08R4
FUSNTC5, 08R5 (DRIVE SIDE OF ENGINE)
3 7045.389 -NTC RESISTOR
FUSNTC6, 08R6 1
13 7078.621 -SIDE REFLECTOR 2

04.06.2002 24
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

HEATER, SECTION 2

18 2977.690 -BRACKET 1
20 2977.689 -BRACKET 1
21 1201.226 -OPTO SENSOR 1
PTROUTSE, 15B4
22 2944.889 -O-RING 1
23 2912.750 -PULSE DISK 1

24 2977.691 -PIN 1
25 2977.694 -ROLL 1
30 2912.739 -SHAFT 4
31 2912.742 -ROLL 8
32 2912.741 -BEARING 8

34 2977.520 -LEAF SPRING 4

04.06.2002 25
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

04.06.2002 26
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER ROLL DRAWER, SECTION 1
31 2977.544 -PLATE 1
139 2977.530 -ROLLER 1
140 1033.513 -BEARING HOUSING 1
141 2351.008 -BALL BEARING 1
143 1033.514 -BEARING HOUSING 1
144 2351.008 -BALL BEARING 1
150 7078.397 -PLATE 1
153 2977.577 -ROLLER SHAFT 4
155 2977.768 -TORSION SPRING 8
156 2912.363 -PRESSURE ROLL 8
157 2934.730 -SLIDE BLOCK 8
158 7023.981 -ACTUATOR ASSY 1
PRDULEADSE, 12B3
PRDMLEADSE, 12B10
PRDLLEADSE, 12B17
242 2977.329 -GEAR 25T 1
258 1933.865 -TAB BRACKET 1
259 2905.854 -CARBON BRUSH 1

04.06.2002 27
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER ROLL DRAWER, SECTION 2

80 7078.356 -GUIDE PLATE 1

83 7078.587 -ROLLER SHAFT 1
84 2944.584 -SPRING 2
85 7078.501 -PRESSURE ROLL 1
86 7023.981 -ACTUATOR ASSY 1
PRDUPRESE2, 12B6
PRDMPRESE2, 12B13
PRDLPRESE2, 12B20
139 2977.530 -ROLLER 1
140 1033.513 -BEARING HOUSING 1
141 2351.008 -BALL BEARING 1
143 1033.514 -BEARING HOUSING 1
144 2351.008 -BALL BEARING 1
150 7078.397 -GUIDE PLATE 1
153 2977.577 -ROLLER SHAFT 4
155 2977.768 -TORSION SPRING 8
156 2912.363 -PRESSURE ROLL 8
157 2934.730 -SLIDE BLOCK 8
158 7023.981 -ACTUATOR ASSY 1
PRDULEADSE, 12B3
PRDMLEADSE, 12B10
PRDLLEADSE, 12B17
242 2977.329 -GEAR 25T 1
301 7069.795 -CLIP 2

04.06.2002 28
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

04.06.2002 29
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER ROLL DRAWER, SECTION 3

1 2912.693 -DC MOTOR 1

PRDUFEDMO1, 12M1
PRDMFEDMO1, 12M4
PRDLFEDMO1, 12M7
2 2912.699 -BUSH 2
4 2668.036 -GROMMET 1
5 2977.542 -MOTOR BRACKET 1
7 2333.045 -TIMING BELT 1
9 7078.358 -ROLLER ASSY 1
11 1033.513 -BEARING HOUSING 1
12 2351.008 -BALL BEARING 1
13 1033.514 -BEARING HOUSING 1
14 2351.008 -BALL BEARING 1
15 2977.538 -TIMING BELT PULLEY 1
17 7078.360 -GUIDE PLATE 1

04.06.2002 30
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER ROLL DRAWER, SECTION 4

29 1933.865 -TAB BRACKET 2

30 2905.854 -CARBON BRUSH 2
61 2912.693 -DC MOTOR 1
PRDUFEDMO2, 12M3
PRDMFEDMO2, 12M6
PRDLFEDMO2, 12M9
62 2912.699 -BUSH 2
64 2668.036 -GROMMET 4
65 2977.542 -MOTOR BRACKET 1
67 2333.052 -TIMING BELT 1
69 7078.358 -ROLLER ASSY 1
71 1033.513 -BEARING HOUSING 1
72 2351.008 -BALL BEARING 1
73 1033.514 -BEARING HOUSING 1
74 2351.008 -BALL BEARING 1
75 2977.538 -TIMING BELT PULLEY 1
77 7070.543 -GUIDE PLATE 1

04.06.2002 31
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER ROLL DRAWER, SECTION 5

20 7070.564 -GUIDE PLATE 1

23 7078.587 -ROLLER SHAFT 1
24 2944.584 -SPRING 2
25 7078.501 -PRESSURE ROLL 1
26 1995.476 -ACTUATOR ASSY 1
PRDUPRESE1, 12B4
PRDMPRESE1, 12B11
PRDLPRESE1, 12B18
300 7069.795 -CLIP 2

04.06.2002 32
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER ROLL DRAWER, SECTION 6

34 2977.877 -BUSH 8
35 2977.869 -ROLL 6
36 2977.592 -CATCH BLOCK 4
37 7070.634 -ROLL ASSY 2
41 7078.632 -ROLL HOLDER 2
43 1201.226 -OPTO SENSOR 2
PRDURUNSE1, 12B5
PRDMRUNSE1, 12B12
PRDLRUNSE1, 12B19
45 2977.878 -SENSOR BRACKET 4
47 2977.870 -PULSE DISK 2

04.06.2002 33
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER ROLL DRAWER, SECTION 7

165 2977.888 -FRONT COVER 1

170 2977.559 -SIDE COVER 1
175 2977.560 -SIDE COVER 1
180 2977.547 -LOCK PLATE 2
183 7070.165 -GRIP PLATE 1
191 2978.011 -LOCK SPRING 2
221 2977.999 -KNOB, GREY (only for 1 rolls drawer) 1
PRDUFEDSW2
PRDMFEDSW2
PRDLFEDSW2
222 2977.998 -KNOB, GREEN 2
PRDUFEDSW1
PRDMFEDSW1
PRDLFEDSW1
223 5583.387 -CONTROL SWITCH PBA 1
12PBA02
12PBA04
12PBA06
224 2977.556 -BUTTON BRACKET 1
226 2646.225 -PBA FASTENER 4

04.06.2002 34
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER ROLL DRAWER, SECTION 8

91 7078.586 -GUIDE PLATE 1

93 7078.535 -BOTTOM PLATE 1
94 2977.980 -POSITION PLATE 2
115 2977.574 -FRAME PLATE 1
118 2977.575 -FRAME PLATE 1
122 2977.526 -REAR PLATE 1
125 2977.890 -SEPARATE BRACKET 1
168 7078.536 -TOP COVER 1
195 2977.528 -HOOK PLATE 1
205 2977.561 -BUNDLE PLATE 1
207 2977.563 -BUSH 1
208 2977.561 -BUNDLE PLATE 1
210 2977.563 -BUSH 1
215 2977.565 -BUNDLE BRACKET 1
220 1034.197 -BUTTON SWITCH 1
PRDUOPSW, 12S1
PRDMOPSW, 12S2
PRDLOPSW, 12S3
227 5583.922 -PRD PBA 1
12PBA01
12PBA03
12PBA05
253 2977.894 -BRACKET 1
265 2977.981 -SUPPORT BRACKET 2

04.06.2002 35
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

04.06.2002 36
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER ROLL DRAWER, CUTTING UNIT, SECTION 1

10 2955.048 -O-RING 7
11 2955.036 -CARRIAGE PLATE 1
12 2944.668 -RUNNING WHEEL 6
13 2955.041 -SPRING PLATE 2
14 2955.079 -TORSION SPRING 2
15 2955.040 -O-WHEEL 1
16 2955.047 -O-RING 1
17 2955.039 -PIN 1
18 7174.783 -CIRCULAR KNIFE 1
19 2944.677 -HOLDER 1
20 2944.682 -COMPRESSION SPRING 1
21 1037.235 -WASHER 1
22 1014.555 -STOP 2
23 2955.050 -ACTUATOR PLATE 1
24 2944.625 -MOTOR BRACKET 1

25 1933.175 -DC MOTOR 1

PRDUKNIMO, 12M2
PRDMKNIMO, 12M5
PRDLKNIMO, 12M8
27 2944.619 -ROUND BELT PULLEY 1
28 2944.622 -PULLEY BRACKET 1
29 2944.621 -ROUND BELT PULLEY 1
30 2351.007 -BALL BEARING 1

04.06.2002 37
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

31 2965.230 -BEARING SUPPORT 1

32 2944.669 -CORD ASSY 1

04.06.2002 38
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER ROLL DRAWER, CUTTING UNIT, SECTION 2

2 2977.554 -FRAME PLATE 1

3 2977.555 -FRAME PLATE 1
4 2955.046 -KNIFE SUPPORT PROFILE 1
5 7174.784 -LINEAR KNIFE 1
6 7048.554 -KNIFE PLATE 1
7 2944.665 -PAPERCLAMP PLATE 1
8 1201.226 -OPTO SENSOR 2
PRDUKNISER, 12B2
PRDMKNISER, 12B9
PRDLKNISER, 12B16
PRDUKNISEL, 12B1
PRDMKNISEL, 12B8
PRDLKNISEL, 12B15
9 2955.044 -GUIDE PROFILE 1
33 2944.846 -PLATE 2

04.06.2002 39
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

04.06.2002 40
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER SHEET FEEDER, SECTION 1

8 7045.289 -UPPER PLATE 1

12 2977.674 -STRIPPER 2
20 1933.922 -BEARING BLOCK 1
22 1933.948 -SEPARATION FRAME 1
23 1999.279 -BLOCK 1
24 1933.615 -GEAR 12T 1
28 7032.874 -FRICTION ROLL 1
29 1933.612 -SHAFT 1
30 1933.613 -GEAR 20T 1
35 2977.625 -SHAFT 1
36 1933.614 -GEAR 18T 1
37 7032.873 -FRICTION ROLL 1
38 7024.023 -CLUTCH 1
PSFUSEPCL, 13Y1
PSFMSEPCL, 13Y2
PSFLSEPCL, 13Y3
39 2254.027 -SPLIT PIN 1
40 2977.629 -GEAR 29T 1
42 1033.514 -BEARING HOUSING 1
43 2351.008 -BALL BEARING 1
44 2246.030 -GROOVED PIN 1
45 1005.848 -BUSH 1
46 2933.960 -BUFFER 1
47 2372.015 -BEARING BUSH 1
51 2372.015 -BEARING BUSH 1

04.06.2002 41
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

52 2977.626 -ROLLER ASSY 1

53 2977.628 -GEAR 21T 1
54 1033.514 -BEARING HOUSING 1
55 2351.008 -BALL BEARING 1
57 2246.030 -GROOVED PIN 1
58 2977.914 -BEARING PLATE 1
149 2977.633 -GUIDE PLATE 1
154 7078.396 -GUIDE PLATE 1
179 4165.018 -NUT PLATE 1
180 2981.347 -MICRO SWITCH 1
PSFUELESW, 13M1
PSFMELESW, 13M2
PSFLELESW, 13M3
235 1933.865 -TAB BRACKET 2
236 2905.854 -CARBON BRUSH 2

04.06.2002 42
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER SHEET FEEDER, SECTION 2

14 2977.635 -LOWER PLATE 1

61 7078.628 -WHEEL SEPARATION ASSY 1
63 1933.610 -SPRING HOLDER 1
64 2959.204 -SPRING HOLDER 1
65 3861.206 -COMPRESSION SPRING 1
69 2977.645 -ROLLER SHAFT 1
70 1933.633 -ROLL 2
74 7078.374 -TORSION SPRING 2
79 2977.630 -GEAR 19T 2
80 2977.631 -PIN 2
138 2977.928 -SHAFT 1
139 2977.627 -GEAR 30T 1
140 1033.514 -BEARING HOUSING 1
141 2351.008 -BALL BEARING 1
142 1033.513 -BEARING HOUSING 1
143 2351.008 -BALL BEARING 1
145 2977.329 -GEAR 25T 1
300 7069.795 -CLIP 2

04.06.2002 43
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER SHEET FEEDER, SECTION 3

115 2977.953 -ELEVATOR TABLE 1

116 2906.368 -DC MOTOR 1
13M1, PSFUELEMO
13M2, PSFMELEMO
13M3, PSFLELEMO
117 2977.638 -GEAR 10T 1
119 2977.639 -MOTOR BRACKET 1
124 2977.636 -SHAFT 1
125 2977.637 -GEAR 25T 1
126 2912.384 -PLAIN BEARING 2
128 2977.640 -CABLE 2
129 2977.927 -BRACKET 1
182 2965.209 -ACTUATOR ASSY 1
13B1, PSFUEMPSE
13B2, PSFMEMPSE
13B3, PSFLEMPSE

04.06.2002 44
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER SHEET FEEDER, SECTION 4

85 2977.655 -BASE PLATE 1

87 1014.555 -STOP 3
90 7045.398 -BRACKET 3
92 2977.923 -SHAFT 1
93 2977.647 -SHAFT 2
94 2977.924 -NUT PLATE 3
95 7208.880 -GRIP ASSY 3
97 2933.917 -PIN 3
99 3861.112 -COMPRESSION SPRING 3
102 2977.657 -LOCK PLATE 3

04.06.2002 45
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER SHEET FEEDER, SECTION 5

1 2977.661 -FRAME PLATE 1

4 2977.662 -FRAME PLATE 1
5 2977.648 -REAR PLATE 1
166 2977.547 -LOCK PLATE 2
168 2977.642 -LEVER 1
170 7070.165 -GRIP PLATE 1
176 2978.011 -LOCK SPRING 2
191 2977.561 -BUNDLE PLATE 2
193 2977.563 -BUSH 2
195 2977.565 -BUNDLE BRACKET 1
201 1034.197 -BUTTON SWITCH 1
PSFUOPSW, 13S2
PSFMOPSW, 13S4
PSFLOPSW, 13S6
203 2977.528 -HOOK PLATE 1
208 2977.651 -SIDE PLATE 1
209 2977.652 -SIDE PLATE 1
214 2977.675 -FRONT COVER 1

04.06.2002 46
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

04.06.2002 47
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER TRANSPORT, SECTION 1

30 1201.226 -OPTO SENSOR 1

PTRBULSE, 15B2
31 2977.931 -LEVER SHAFT 1
33 2977.401 -BULGE LEVER 8
34 2668.014 -GROMMET 1
82 2977.412 -COVER PLATE 1
83 2977.413 -GRIP COVER 1
84 2977.785 -PAPERGUIDE PROFILE 1

04.06.2002 48
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER TRANSPORT, SECTION 2

10 2977.409 -GUIDE PLATE 1

12 2912.363 -PRESSURE ROLL 8
13 2934.730 -SLIDE BLOCK 8
14 2977.577 -ROLLER SHAFT 4
18 2912.396 -PLAIN BEARING 2
19 2977.768 -TORSION SPRING 8
20 2977.416 -ROLLER 1
22 7023.981 -ACTUATOR ASSY 1
PTRLEADSE, 15B1
25 1046.330 -BUFFER 8
80 7078.271 -FRAME PLATE 1
81 7078.272 -FRAME PLATE 1
90 2977.781 -LOCK PLATE 2

04.06.2002 49
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER TRANSPORT, SECTION 3

1 2977.415 -SQUARE SHAFT 1

2 2977.402 -BULGE LEVER 8
5 2977.744 -BRACKET,RH 1
6 2977.745 -BRACKET,LH 1
8 2977.746 -BEARING BUSH 2
95 1034.197 -BUTTON SWITCH 1
PTRFLAPSW, 15S1
100 2977.414 -SLIDE BLOCK 2
101 2977.419 -LEVER 2
103 2977.420 -LEVER 2
105 2977.741 -SHAFT 1
107 1005.848 -BUSH 2
108 7069.618 -LEVER ASSY 1
110 7078.489 -LEVER ASSY 1
112 3851.119 -TENSION SPRING 2
115 2912.367 -EARTH WIRE 1
130 7078.253 -BRACKET,LH 1

131 7078.255 -BRACKET,RH 1

04.06.2002 50
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER TRANSPORT, SECTION 4

45 7023.981 -ACTUATOR ASSY 1

PTRINSE, 15B3
47 2945.085 -LEAF SPRING 2
48 2977.403 -PAPERFEED ASSY 1
49 1828.012 -DRAUGHT STRIP 1
50 7078.650 -SENSOR PLATE 1
55 7070.793 -ROLLER 1
56 2912.350 -GUIDE PLATE 1
57 2912.356 -PLATE 4
58 2912.362 -SHAFT 4
60 2912.363 -PRESSURE ROLL 8
61 2912.387 -PIN 2
63 2912.396 -PLAIN BEARING 2

04.06.2002 51
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER TRANSPORT, INTERMEDIATE

1 7045.380 -SHAFT ASSY 1

2 2912.384 -PLAIN BEARING 1
5 2977.699 -DC FAN, 1
PTRSUCFAN, 15M1
6 7045.392 -FLANGE 1
7 2977.700 -FAN MUFFLER 1
9 7045.391 -PLAIN BEARING 2
10 7045.393 -FOAM 2
11 2977.352 -PLATE 1
15 7078.313 -GUIDE PLATE 1
20 7045.381 -SHAFT 1
21 2934.790 -BUFFER 1
22 2351.926 -BALL BEARING 2

04.06.2002 52
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER TRANSPORT, RECEIVING TRAY, SECTION 1

1 7078.671 -RECEIVING TRAY 1

2 2977.721 -LEAF SPRING 1
3 2977.720 -SUPPORT BEARING 1
4 2977.722 -ROLLER 1
5 1017.191 -BEARING 2
6 7045.179 -TIMINGBELT PULLEY 1
8 2912.687 -BUSH 1
9 2912.686 -ROLL 2
10 7078.314 -TENSIONER PLATE 1
13 2977.718 -SHAFT 3
14 1085.850 -SUPPORT ROLL 8
15 2977.719 -ACTUATOR 1
16 7078.258 -SPRING 3
17 1201.226 -OPTO SENSOR 1
PTRIRTSE, 15B5
33 2333.218 -TIMING BELT 1
34 7045.050 -WRAP SPRING 1
37 2977.717 -SENSOR BRACKET 1
42 1933.865 -TAB BRACKET 1
44 2905.854 -CARBON BRUSH 1

04.06.2002 53
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER TRANSPORT, RECEIVING TRAY, SECTION 2

20 2977.724 -FAN BRACKET 1

21 2912.736 -FAN 24V 1
PTRIRTFAN, 15M4
24 7078.335 -SEAL 2
27 2977.714 -REAR COVER, UP TO MOD.07 1
7070.545 -REAR COVER, FROM MOD.07 1
30 2977.728 -RECEIVING RACK 4
31 7174.748 -LEVER 14
32 7078.294 -GUIDE PLATE 2
38 7078.493 -LEVER SHAFT 2
39 2977.900 -MIDDLE RACK 1
45 7045.177 -SHAFT SUPPORT 3
47 7174.749 -FOAM 2
50 7078.349 -GUARD 1
55 7078.669 -PLATE, FROM ..... 1
56 7078.670 -PLATE, FROM ..... 1

04.06.2002 54
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER TRANSPORT, PAPER SWITCH

1 7175.681 -FRAME ASSY 1

2 7070.571 -PAPER GUIDE ASSY 1
5 7069.513 -BRACKET 1
7 2906.368 -DC MOTOR 1
PTRFLAPMO, 15M5
9 1201.226 -OPTO SENSOR 1
PTRIRTSWSE, 15B6
10 7069.614 -LEVER 1
11 2978.030 -PULSE WHEEL 1
14 7069.611 -BRACKET 1
15 7045.042 -TURN LEVER 16
19 7078.528 -SHAFT ASSY, UPTO MOD.07 1
7070.163 -SHAFT ASSY, FROM MOD.07 1
25 7078.527 -GRIP, UPTO MOD.07 1
28 7078.490 -LEVER, UPTO MOD.07 1
34 7078.479 -BRACKET 1
35 3851.122 -TENSION SPRING 1
36 2999.932 -SET BALL SCREW, UPTO MOD.07 1
38 7069.514 -BRACKET 1
40 7070.491 -SHOULDER SCREW 1
41 7069.835 -SHOULDER SCREW 1
43 7069.852 -BRACKET, RIGHT 1
44 7069.851 -BRACKET, LEFT 1
48 7070.578 -TIMING BELT PULLEY, FROM MOD.07 1
49 7070.271 -MOUNTING PLATE, FROM MOD.07 1

04.06.2002 55
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

50 2373.017 -BEARING, FROM MOD.07 1

53 2333.284 -TIMING BELT 390, FROM MOD.07 1
54 1035.396 -TIMING BELT PULLEY, FROM MOD.07 1
55 1010.638 -PLAIN BEARING, FROM MOD.07 1
58 7070.148 -MOUNTING PLATE, FROM MOD.07 1
60 7070.576 -BRACKET ASSY, FROM MOD.07 1
62 2922.625 -ROLLER ASSY, FROM MOD.07 1
64 7070.521 -SPRING PLATE, FROM MOD.07 1
65 3851.149 -TENSION SPRING, FROM MOD.07 1
66 7070.528 -COVER, FROM MOD.07 1

04.06.2002 56
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

04.06.2002 57
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

COPY DELIVERY TRAY, OCE 964, SECTION 1

1 7045.436 -UPPER PLATE ASSY 1

2 7045.437 -TRAY ASSY 1
3 1988.096 -STOP 2
6 7016.874 -REAR FRAME 1
7 7045.444 -TUBE 1

8 2994.560 -BUSH 4
10 7016.722 -TURN WHEEL 2
11 7016.871 -FRONT FRAME 1
13 1989.606 -BLOCK 2
14 1989.649 -BRACKET 2

15 1989.497 -GUIDE GUIDE 2

16 2944.796 -STOP 2
17 7045.443 -FRAME 1
21 7016.605 -BAR PLATE 2
25 7016.838 -CASTOR 2

29 7016.875 -PLUG 4

04.06.2002 58
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

COPY DELIVERY TRAY, OCE 964, SECTION 2

1 7045.438 -FRAME REAR 1

2 7045.439 -FRONT FRAME 1
4 2981.698 -PLATE 1
5 2986.893 -GUIDE PLATE 1
7 1201.227 -OPTO SENSOR 3

15 2981.701 -ROLLER ASSY 1

16 1989.912 -BEARING HOUSING 1
17 1988.604 -BEARING HOUSING 1
18 2351.029 -BALL BEARING 2
20 1995.368 -TIMING PULLEY 1

22 1069.468 -GEAR 35T 2

25 2986.812 -SHAFT ASSY 1
26 1020.441 -BEARING HOUSING 1
27 1047.945 -BEARING HOUSING 1
28 1023.614 -BALL BEARING 2

30 2930.019 -DC MOTOR 1

31 1062.576 -TIMINGBELT PULLEY 1
32 2998.584 -MOTOR PLATE 1
36 2333.342 -TIMING BELT 1
37 1933.865 -TAB BRACKET 2

38 1995.764 -ANTISTATIC BRUSH 2

04.06.2002 59
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

39 7070.671 -BRUSH-DISCHARGE 2
46 7170.720 -BUNDLE, 19W01 1
65 2912.699 -BUSH 2
66 2668.036 -GROMMET 4

67 3311.024 -RING 2
85 3761.016 -ROUND NUT 4

04.06.2002 60
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

COPY DELIVERY TRAY, OCE 964, SECTION 3

3 7045.442 -TUBE ASSY 1

6 1987.375 -FAN ASSY 2
41 7045.441 -REAR COVER 2
47 7170.640 -CRU PBA 1
49 2646.222 -PBA FASTENER 5

51 7093.662 -FINGER ASSY 1

53 1302.287 -SOCKET 1
54 1302.288 -FUSE DRAWER 1
58 7016.819 -BUNDLE, 19W02 1
69 1300.366 -FUSE-300MA F 6.3X32 2

72 7008.934 -FAN GUARD 2

83 7045.440 -COVER 1
90 7070.028 -UPPER PLATE 1

91 7070.029 -LOWER PLATE 1

92 2998.681 -ABSORBER PLATE 1
93 2998.692 -ABSORBER PLATE 1

04.06.2002 61
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

CONTAINER UNIT, OCE 882

1 7045.447 -RACK 1
2 7045.449 -SPRING BRACKET 2
3 1990.071 -TURN WHEEL 4

04.06.2002 62
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

POWER & CONTROL, ENGINE

1 1201.868 -CIRCUIT BREAKER,230V 2

22Q1,22Q2
1201.955 -CIRCUIT BREAKER,120V 2
22Q1,22Q2
2 1202.042 -MANUEL SWITCH 1
22S1
3 1201.864 -MAINS CONNECTION CABLE,230V 1
1201.863 -MAINS CONNECTION CABLE,120V 1
4 1034.197 -BUTTON SWITCH 1
08S4
5 2926.772 -RFI FILTER 1
22Z1
6 2926.762 -INTERLOCK SWITCH,230V 1
08S2
2926.762 -INTERLOCK SWITCH,120V 2
08S3
7 7078.504 -BRACKET 1
8 1302.507 -SOLID STATE RELAY 24V DC 1
08S1
9 2912.703 -STRAIN RELIEF,230V 1
7078.651 -STRAIN RELIEF,120V 1
10 7078.652 -PLATE 1
21 1201.775 -HOUSING 2
27 2912.474 -WASHER 1
28 5583.916 -DRIVER PBA 1

04.06.2002 63
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

22PBA03
30 5584.534 -HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY PBA 1
22PBA04
31 5583.919 -RFI PBA 1
22PBA06
32 7127.918 -COUNTER 1
CONCNT, 22Y1
33 2912.506 -BUSH 2
34 2977.974 -LINE CHOKE 1
08L1
35 2977.995 -PROTECTION BRACKET 1
36 2926.768 -FERRITE SLEEVE 2
37 1301.474 -D-SUB NUT 2
38 1202.271 -JACKPOST 2

04.06.2002 64
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

POWER & CONTROL, UNDERFRAME

1 5584.533 -CPU-I/O PBA,22PBA01 1

1201.048 --FUSE 500mA S 2
7176.088 --FIRMPACK Rx.x 1
2 5583.915 -LOW VOLTAGE SUPPLY PBA,22PBA02 1
5 2977.936 -PLATE 1
10 2955.571 -TRANSFORMER 208/240V 1
11 7175.110 -BRACKET 1

04.06.2002 65
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

POWER & CONTROL, SCANNER
1 7008.905 -OPERATING PANEL ASSY 1
1932.288 --LCD DISPLAY 1
22LCD1
7020.874 --FL-INVERTOR 1
22G1
5583.926 --KEYPAD-1 PBA 1
22PBA06
5583.925 --CONSOLE CPU PBA 1
22PBA02
7176.093 ---FIRMPACK R2.X 1
2 7045.418 -OPERATING PANEL COVER 1
3 7078.307 -OVERLAY 1
4 7176.224 -POWER SUPPLY 1
10G01
1202.076 --FUSE 2
8 2978.021 -COVER 1
9 2986.879 -BRACKET 1
10 1302.099 -SWITCH 1
22S1
35 1008.390 -MICRO SWITCH 1
ORGSAFSW, 09S1
36 1016.963 -STRAIN RELIEF 1
87 7093.873 -PLATE 1
110 1990.079 -INSULATING PLATE 1
140 1201.774 -MAINS INLET CONNECTOR 1
145 7018.018 -TRANSFORMER 100V 1

04.06.2002 66
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

10T01
1300.396 -FUSE 4A SLOW 1
146 7045.276 -BRACKET 1
155 7078.654 -PLATE 1

04.06.2002 67
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

FOLDER CONTROL

4 5583.563 -I/O INTERFACE PBA 2

(a) 22PBA09
(b) 22PBA02
5 2646.222 -PBA FASTENER 13
34 2999.889 -BRACKET ASSY 1
PBA RS232-ISO, 18PBA04
42 5584.514 -CPU PBA 1
22PBA01
43 7070.630 -FIRMPACK 9600 R2 1
7175.241 -FIRMPACK 9600 R2.1 1

04.06.2002 68
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

DEW PREVENTER

1 2977.786 -UPPER PLATE 2

2 2945.026 -HEATER ASSY 2
22R1, 22R2
3 2977.787 -LOWER PLATE 2
5 2977.788 -BRACKET 1
10 2977.826 -HUMIDITY CONTROLLER 1
22S2
12 1302.785 -RELAY 1
22K1
20 2977.344 -BASE PLATE 2

04.06.2002 69
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

04.06.2002 70
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

DRIVE, ENGINE, SECTION 1

6 2912.686 -ROLL 2
11 2333.291 -TIMING BELT 1245 1
15 2333.103 -TIMING BELT 2360 1
34 2912.676 -TIMING BELT PULLEY-48 1
35 2977.853 -TIMING BELT PULLEY-60 1
36 7078.245 -MOTOR DC 18V 1
DRIMO, 23M1
37 1201.226 -OPTO SENSOR 1
DRIMOSE, 23B1
38 2977.855 -BRACKET 1
39 1041.667 -PULS DISC 1

04.06.2002 71
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

DRIVE, ENGINE, SECTION 2

16 2912.686 -ROLL 2
17 2912.687 -BUSH 1
20 2912.688 -BRACKET 1
21 3851.141 -TENSION SPRING 1
22 7070.762 -GEAR 30T (ORDER ALSO INDEX 23) 1
23 7070.763 -FLANGE 1
25 2977.873 -GEAR 48T 1
27 2977.326 -GEAR 48T 1
28 5180.035 -SPRING CLAMP 1
29 7070.762 -GEAR 30T (ORDER ALSO INDEX 30) 1
30 7070.763 -FLANGE 1
32 2912.683 -GEAR 48T 1
44 3851.141 -TENSION SPRING 1
47 2912.687 -BUSH 1
50 7045.184 -BRACKET 1
51 2912.686 -ROLL 2

04.06.2002 72
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

DRIVE, ENGINE, SECTION 3

3 2912.694 -GEAR/PULLEY ASSY 1

4 7024.023 -CLUTCH 1
PTRINCL, 15Y1
5 2254.027 -SPLIT PIN 2
40 2933.960 -BUFFER 2
52 7069.844 -PLATE 1
53 7069.845 -SHAFT 1
54 7069.843 -GEAR 51T 1
55 7024.024 -CLUTCH 1
PTRINREVCL, 15Y2
56 2912.384 -PLAIN BEARING 3
59 1034.770 -GEAR 37T 2
60 1933.614 -GEAR 18T 1
61 7069.846 -PIN 1

04.06.2002 73
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

DRIVE, UNDERFRAME

1 2977.333 -MOTOR BRACKET 1

2 2668.036 -GROMMET 4
3 2912.699 -BUSH 2
4 2912.693 -DC MOTOR 1
PTRMO,15M2
7 2977.332 -PULLEY GEAR 1
9 2333.052 -TIMING BELT 1
11 3851.115 -TENSION SPRING 1
12 5583.901 -STEP PBA 1
15PBA01
17 2977.330 -GEAR 23T 1
19 2977.329 -GEAR 25T 1
21 2977.334 -PIN 1
30 7078.486 -GEAR 34T 3
31 2977.330 -GEAR 23T 3
32 2977.334 -PIN 6

04.06.2002 74
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER ROLL LOADER, OCE 9630-9631

1 2977.400 -FRONT FRAME 1

2 7078.284 -HANDLE 1
3 7078.274 -KNOB 1
4 2258.103 -LOCKING RING 1
5 7078.321 -BUSH 1

8 7078.286 -BRACKET,LH 1
9 7078.287 -BRACKET,RH 1
10 2185.047 -SHOULDER SCREW 2
12 3314.009 -RING 2
15 2977.399 -REAR FRAME 1

16 7078.284 -HANDLE 1
17 7078.274 -KNOB 1
18 2258.103 -LOCKING RING 1
19 7078.321 -BUSH 1
22 2185.047 -SHOULDER SCREW 2

24 1942.182 -RING 2

04.06.2002 75
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

FRAME, ENGINE

1 7069.899 -FRAME ASSY 1

4 2977.798 -BRACKET 1
9 2978.042 -BRACKET 1
20 2926.766 -CLOSED BUSHING 2
21 2438.011 -SEALING PLUG 1

04.06.2002 76
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

COVERING, ENGINE

1 2977.943 -RIGHT COVER 1

2 7045.216 -BLOCK 8
4 7045.217 -PIN 4
6 2977.944 -UPPER COVER 1
9 2905.854 -CARBON BRUSH 1

11 2977.945 -LEFT COVER 1

16 7078.674 -UPPER COVER 1
21 7078.279 -COVER,DEVELOPING 1
25 7078.662 -COVER,PRINTHEAD 1
27 7045.182 -LEAF SPRING 1

29 7070.782 -COVER ASSY 1

31 2977.937 -REAR COVER 1
34 2977.784 -OPERATING PANEL 1
22PBA05
35 2977.755 -COVER,INSIDE 1
39 2996.758 -FRAME ASSY 1

40 4812.470 -NAME PLATE 9600 1

7168.910 -NAME PLATE TDS600 1
42 7070.618 -MAGNET BRACKET, FROM MOD.08 1
43 1016.735 -MAGNETIC CATCH, FROM MOD.08 1
44 7070.690 -CLAMPING SPRING, FROM MOD.08 2

04.06.2002 77
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

04.06.2002 78
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

FRAME AND COVERING, UNDERFRAME

1 7175.408 -SUPPORT ASSY 1

2 2977.383 -SUPPORT ASSY 1
3 2906.390 -CASTOR 4
5 2977.758 -FOOT 4
6 2977.340 -BASE PROFILE 3

8 2977.345 -TIE BAR 1

12 2977.568 -LOCK BRACKET 1
13 2977.570 -LEAF SPRING 1
18 2977.769 -BRACKET 1
20 2977.963 -BOLT ASSY 4

25 2977.915 -SIDE COVER 2

26 2977.916 -BACK COVER 1
27 2977.919 -COVER, 100 1
28 2977.920 -COVER, 200 1
184 2977.670 -RAIL,RH 1

186 2977.671 -RAIL,LH 1

188 2977.893 -PIN 2
189 2351.008 -BALL BEARING 2
284 2977.668 -RAIL,RH 1
286 2977.669 -RAIL,LH 1

288 2977.893 -PIN 2

04.06.2002 79
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

289 2351.008 -BALL BEARING 2

04.06.2002 80
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

FRAME & COVERING, STAND OF PAPER TRANSPORT

1 7070.078 -FRAME ASSY 1

1L 2906.476 --WHEEL 4
2 7070.779 -SIDE PANEL 2
10 2917.155 -SWITCH 1
18S5
12 1202.002 -CIRCUIT BREAKER 2
13 1201.774 -MAINS INLET CONNECTOR 1
40 2917.183 -BUSH 2
46 2934.879 -PLATE 1
50 7070.784 -BRACKET 1
51 7070.785 -BRACKET 1
53 7069.819 -BRACKET 2
55 7069.820 -BRACKET ASSY 1
56 1201.591 -RELAY SWITCH 1
FOL1LPMRL, 18K3

04.06.2002 81
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

COVERING, PAPER TRANSPORT

3 7069.805 -SIDE PANEL 1

4 7069.806 -SIDE PANEL 1
7 7069.809 -UPPER COVER 1
120 1302.151 -LED,GREEN 1
PTRFOLOFFLILED, 15V1

04.06.2002 82
 TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image
NO DRAWING AVAILABLE

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

TOOLS

1 7991.530 -RS232 LOOPBACK PLUG (CPU I/O PBA) 1

2 7991.531 -SERIAL LOOPBACK PLUG 1
3 7991.532 -BNC CABLE SET (coax set + terminator) 1
4 7991.533 -ETH.10 BASE-T CROSS OVER (3 mtr.) 1
6 9162.245 -TRANSCEIVER AUI TO BNC(OPTIONAL) 1
7 7991.585 -CABLE SET LAPTOP null-modem 1
8 7991.273 -SERVICE KEY 1
9 2831.001 -GLOVES, DISPOSABLE 1
10 9136.627 -MAGNIFYING GLASS 1
11 7991.320 -WRIST STRAP 1
12 7991.322 -ANTISTATIC MAT 1
13 9714.529 -POLISHING CLOTHS 1
15 0831.381 -TESTCHART 1
16 7991.238 -AGFA GREY SCALE 1
17 1068.117 -CLEANER A -KIT-USA 1
18 1055.452 -ASSY CLEANER O 1
19 1055.449 -ASSY CLEANER R 1
20 1929.023 -ASSY CLEANER K, USA 1
21 0109.180 -PHOTOCONDUCTOR REPORTING CARD 1
22 0109.631 -LOGBOOK 1
23 2761.075 -LOGBOOK HOLDER 1
25 1989.916 -ASSY CLEANER T, GB,ES,PT,NO,SE,FI 1
26 1989.750 -ASSY CLEANER T, USA 1
27 1990.072 -ASSY CLEANER T, GB,NL,DE,DK,FR,IT 1
29 1068.116 -CLEANER A KIT, EU 1
32 7991.220 -VACUUM CLEANER, 220V, 50HZ 1
32L 7991.368 --CREVICE TOOL 1
32M 7991.369 --SNORKEL TUBE 1
32N 7991.370 --BRUSH ADAPTOR 1
32P 7991.367 --EXTENSION TUBE 1
37 7991.257 -FILTER BAGS (1 SET=10 PCS) 1
38 7991.099 -RUBBER NOZZLE 1
50 7991.550 -AEROSOL CAN LIGHT GREY 310 1
51 7991.551 -AEROSOL CAN DARK GREY 311 1
52 7991.552 -AEROSOL CAN DARK BLUE 313 1
53 7991.553 -PAINTSTICK LIGHT GREY 310 1
54 7991.554 -PAINTSTICK DARK GREY 311 1
55 7991.555 -PAINTSTICK DARK BLUE 313 1
56 7991.557 -PHOTOCONDUCTOR QUALITY CHART 1
57 7991.255 -MASSLIN TOWELS 1
58 2813.013 -PLASTIC WASTE BAGS 1
59 1987.994 -CLEANER P ASSY, EU 1
60 1987.798 -CLEANER P ASSY, USA 1
61 1929.022 -CLEANER K ASSY, EU 1
62 5600.415 -PM KIT 1
63 7078.580 -TESTCHART ADJ.SCANNER 2
64 7991.519 -PLCC EXTRACTION TOOL 1

04.06.2002 83
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

BUNDLES OVERVIEW, ENGINE

1 7078.345 -04W01 BUNDLE 1

1L 1302.944 --FERRITE FILTER 1
1M 1302.945 --PLASTIC MOUNTING CLIP 1
2 2912.321 -05W01 BUNDLE 1
3 7069.179 -12W01 BUNDLE 1
4 2945.116 -12W02 BUNDLE 1
5 2945.117 -13W01 BUNDLE 1
6 2945.122 -15W02 BUNDLE 1
7 1302.893 -DATA CABLE 9DSUB-9DSUB 20W02 (PRINTER-FOLDER) 1
8 7078.471 -22W02 BUNDLE 1
9 2945.124 -22W04 BUNDLE 1
10 2945.123 -22W05 BUNDLE 1
11 2945.114 -22W07 BUNDLE 1
12 1302.566 -DATACABLE RJ45-RJ45 22W08/22W09 2
13 1302.505 -INTERFACE CABLE 15DSUB-15DSUB 4 MTR.20W01 1
14 1302.506 -INTERFACE CABLE 15DSUB-15DSUB 8 MTR.20W01 1
15 1301.782 -MAINS CONNECTION CABLE,230V 1
1201.854 -MAINS CONNECTION CABLE,120V 1
1202.423 -MAINS CONNECTION CABLE,JA 1

04.06.2002 84
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

BUNDLES OVERVIEW, FOLDER

2 7069.832 -18W02 BUNDLE 1

3 7045.189 -18W03 BUNDLE 1
4 2917.011 -18W04 BUNDLE 1
5 7093.852 -18W05 BUNDLE 1
6 7016.595 -18W06 BUNDLE 1
7 1971.130 -18W07 BUNDLE 1
8 7016.589 -18W08 BUNDLE 1
9 2917.009 -18W09 BUNDLE 1
10 7045.208 -18W10 BUNDLE 1
11 7069.833 -18W11 BUNDLE 1
12 7093.822 -18W12 BUNDLE 1
13 7045.190 -18W13 BUNDLE 1
14 1971.131 -18W14 BUNDLE 1
15 7032.359 -18W15 BUNDLE 1
16 7016.591 -18W16 BUNDLE 1
17 7032.360 -18W17 BUNDLE 1
25 2934.948 -18W25 BUNDLE 1
27 7016.592 -18W27 BUNDLE 1
28 7016.593 -18W28 BUNDLE 1
29 7016.596 -18W29 BUNDLE 1
30 7016.597 -18W30 BUNDLE 1
31 7016.598 -18W31 BUNDLE 1
32 7016.599 -18W32 BUNDLE 1
33 7045.191 -18W33 BUNDLE 1
37 7045.195 -18W37 BUNDLE 1

04.06.2002 85
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

38 7069.837 -18W38 BUNDLE 1

151 2917.016 -15W01 BUNDLE 1
152 2917.014 -15W02 BUNDLE 1
153 7069.841 -15W03 BUNDLE 1
155 7069.831 -15W05 BUNDLE 1
156 1301.782 -MAINS CONNECTION CABLE,230V 1
1201.854 -MAINS CONNECTION CABLE,120V 1

04.06.2002 86
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

04.06.2002 87
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

04.06.2002 88
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER TRANSPORT, SECTION 1

11 7078.543 -GUIDE PLATE ASSY 1

30 7078.517 -OFFLINE COVER 1
32 1201.226 -OPTICAL SENSOR 1
PTRFOLBULSE, 15B1
33 7078.538 -GUIDE PLATE 1
35 1004.198 -BUSHING 4
60 7069.545 -BLOUSE LEVER 1
61 7078.523 -SHAFT ASSY 1
63 7078.529 -BRACKET 1
65 2185.112 -PIN SCREW 2
66 1995.236 -BRACKET 2
70 1995.211 -PLATE 2
97 7078.531 -BLOUSE LEVER 14

04.06.2002 89
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER TRANSPORT, SECTION 2

3 1995.210 -ROLLER 1
4 2351.029 -BALL BEARING 8
5 1019.943 -BEARING HOUSING 4
6 1019.944 -BEARING HOUSING 4
8 4245.007 -SECURING PLATE 4
10 2967.151 -ROLLER 1
11 1995.208 -ROLLER 1
12 7078.532 -ROLLER 1
14 1034.818 -WASHER 3
15 3821.020 -GEAR 45T 1
17 1995.221 -GEAR 43T 1
18 7024.023 -CLUTCH 2
PTRFOLCORCL, 15Y1
PTRFOLFEDCL, 15Y2 (DRIVE SIDE)
19 1035.522 -CLIP 2
20 1933.724 -TIMINGBELT PULLEY 30T 1
21 1995.233 -BRACKET 2
23 7017.844 -FREE PULLEY 30-52T 1
25 1995.201 -TIMING BELT PULLEY 30T 1
26 1995.232 -PIN 5
27 2922.625 -ROLLER ASSY 7
30 2987.243 -TENSION ARM 1
32 3851.159 -TENSION SPRING 1
34 2333.291 -TIMING BELT 1245 1
35 1933.865 -TAB BRACKET 4

04.06.2002 90
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

37 1995.764 -ANTISTATIC BRUSH 4

59 2351.008 -BALL BEARING 1
103 1040.536 -TIMING BELT PULLEY 30T 1

04.06.2002 91
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER TRANSPORT, SECTION 3

1 7069.814 -FRAME,L.H 1
2 7069.813 -FRAME,R.H 1
43 7070.059 -GUIDE PLATE 1
45 7069.812 -GUIDE PLATE 1
48 2934.880 -ACTUATOR ASSY 1
PTRFOLINSE, 15B2
49 1995.282 -PIN 1
53 1988.048 -SWITCH 1
PTRFOLDOORSW, 18S1
57 7017.835 -SAFETY PLATE 1
151 7078.539 -SENSOR BRACKET 1
174 7069.960 -PIN 2
176 7078.602 -STUD 2

04.06.2002 92
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER TRANSPORT, SECTION 4

41 7078.636 -GUIDE PLATE 1

54 7017.850 -DAMPER 2
60 1868.005 -GROMMET 1
76 7069.763 -GUIDE PLATE 1
77 1995.224 -PRESSURE SHAFT 7
78 1995.299 -ROLLER 14
80 2934.730 -SLIDE BLOCK 14
81 1995.300 -TORSION SPRING 12
82 1995.212 -BALL 10
83 1021.702 -BUSHING 10
86 1995.285 -ACTUATOR ASSY 5
(a) PTRFOLTRAISE 1, 15B6
(b) PTRFOLTRAISE 2, 15B7
(c) PTRFOLTRAISE 3, 15B8
(d) PTRFOLTRAISE 4, 15B9
(e) PTRFOLTRAISE 5, 15B10
87 1995.286 -BRACKET 1
89 5583.930 -DISTRIBUTION POWER I/O PBA 1
15PBA05
98 7069.775 -PIN 1
104 1661.026 -PROTECTION STRIP 1
110 2999.932 -SET BALL SCREW 1
111 7078.550 -BRACKET ASSY 1
112 2999.909 -SHAFT 1
115 2993.451 -SOLENOID 1

04.06.2002 93
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

PTRFOLROSO, 15Y4
118 2977.768 -TORSION SPRING 2
165 7078.577 -HANDLE BAR 1
166 3736.075 -BEARING BUSH 1
168 1995.402 -BUSHING 2
170 3851.179 -TENSION SPRING 2
171 7078.579 -HOOK, RIGHT 1
172 7078.576 -HOOK, LEFT 1
174 7069.960 -PIN 2
176 7078.602 -STUD 2
177 7045.721 -KNOB 1
178 7078.644 -BRACKET 1
180 7078.635 -BUSH 1
183 3736.083 -BEARING BUSH 1

04.06.2002 94
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

04.06.2002 95
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

BELT UNIT, COPY TRANSPORT

1 9418.079 -BEARING HOUSING 8

4 9418.051 -BALL BEARING 8
5 9418.188 -SHAFT 2
6 9418.251 -FOAM ROLL 16
10 9418.186 -SHAFT 1
11 9418.210 -PULLEY 2
12 2333.347 -TIMING BELT 219 1
13 1933.724 -TIMING BELT PULLEY 30T 1
14 9419.607 -BALL BEARING 2
15 1932.429 -CLUTCH 1
FOLOBELTCL, 18Y11
16 1035.522 -CLIP 1
17 9418.185 -SHAFT 1
18 9418.180 -BRACKET 2
19 9420.022 -ANTISTATIC BRUSH 2
20 2987.243 -TENSION ARM 1
21 2922.625 -ROLLER ASSY 1
23 9418.175 -SPRING 1
25 9418.901 -TIMING BELT 1
26 9418.203 -CLUTCH LOCK PLATE 1
27 9418.201 -BEARING LOCK PLATE 1
28 9418.250 -RING 2
30 9418.168 -GROMMET 4
31 9418.193 -SPACER 4
32 2917.030 -MOTOR ASSY 1

04.06.2002 96
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

FOLOPTRMO, 18M8
34 9418.208 -MOTOR PULLEY 1

04.06.2002 97
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

BELT UNIT, COPY DELIVERY

1 9418.216 -SWITCH BRACKET 1

2 9418.155 -SENSOR 1
FOLOBELTENDSE, 18B16
3 9418.217 -SWITCH ASSY 1
4 9418.104 -SHOULDER SCREW 1
5 9418.233 -CONVEYOR PLATE ASSY 1
7 9418.079 -BEARING HOUSING 2
8 9418.051 -BALL BEARING 3
13 9418.187 -SHAFT 1
14 9418.017 -PULLEY 6
15 9418.210 -PULLEY 2
16 9418.066 -TRANSPORT BELT 2
17 9418.903 -TRANSPORT BELT 1
20 9418.194 -SPACER 1
21 9418.195 -SPACER 1
22 9419.990 -BEARING 1
24 2959.217 -TIMINGBELT PULLEY 1
25 9418.258 -PIN 1
27 9418.257 -ROD 1
28 9418.191 -SHAFT 1
29 9418.064 -BEARING 2
31 9418.237 -BUNDLE 1
41 9418.224 -PLATE 1
44 9418.225 -PLATE 1
45 9418.073 -NUT PLATE 2

04.06.2002 98
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

46 9418.182 -STRIP 2
47 9418.074 -WASHER 2
48 9418.075 -WASHER 2
49 9418.076 -KNURLED SCREW 2
50 9418.061 -RACK 1
54 9418.234 -COVER ASSY 1
55 9418.168 -GROMMET 1
58 9418.215 -MAGNET SET SHAFT 1
59 9418.260 -MAGNET ASSY 1
60 9418.207 -TIGHTENER SUPPORT 1
61 9418.166 -MOTOR BASE SPACER 1
62 9418.259 -ROLLER 1
67 9418.261 -FELT 1

04.06.2002 99
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

BELT UNIT, FRAME

1 9418.254 -FRAME ASSY 1

2 9418.174 -GROMMET 2
8 9418.184 -SHAFT 1
9 9418.051 -BALL BEARING 4
10 9419.990 -BEARING 1
12 9418.183 -TABLE SUPPORT ROTATION 1
13 9418.231 -TABLE ROTATION LH 1
14 9418.232 -TABLE ROTATION RH 1
15 9418.214 -SPACER 1
16 9418.900 -GAS SPRING 2
18 9418.212 -SPACER 1
19 9418.213 -SPACER 1
26 9418.902 -LOCKING 1
27 9418.205 -UPPER LOCKING PLATE 1
28 9418.167 -GROMMET 1
29 9418.192 -WASHER 1
32 9418.179 -BOLT CAP 1
41 9418.226 -GUIDE PLATE 1
48 9418.230 -PBA BRACKET 1
49 9418.211 -SPACER 1
50 9418.229 -SWITCH BRACKET 1
51 1988.048 -MANUAL SWITCH 2
(a) FOLOBELTDOORSW, 18S9
(b) FOLODOORSW, 18S8
53 1201.591 -RELAY SWITCH 1

04.06.2002 100
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

FOLOSAFRL, 18K4
54 5583.931 -DISTRIB.POWER PBA 1
18PBA18
71 9418.255 -GUIDE PLATE ASSY 1
72 9418.037 -SPINDLE 1
73 9418.038 -EXTENSION SPRING 2
75 9418.209 -PIN 2
76 9418.039 -KNOB 2
77 9418.019 -SENSOR 1
FOLOOUTSE, 18B14

04.06.2002 101
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

04.06.2002 102
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

FIRST FOLD, SECTION 1

10 7078.545 -GUIDE PLATE 1

20 4334.039 -U-BEARING 2
26 1005.826 -SPACER 2
27 2922.625 -ROLLER ASSY 6
28 1995.374 -PIN 5
75 1019.944 -BEARING HOUSING 1
76 2351.029 -BALL BEARING 2
77 2935.000 -ROLLER ASSY 1
78 1019.943 -BEARING HOUSING 1
79 4245.007 -SECURING PLATE 1
85 7017.827 -TIMING BELT PULLEY 52T 1
86 7017.687 -ROLLER 1
87 2351.920 -BALL BEARING 2
90 4571.066 -PLATE 1
155 2934.977 -PRESSURE ROLLER 1
209 5583.570 -SENSOR PBA 1
18PBA07
275 1995.416 -BRACKET 1
285 1933.865 -TAB BRACKET 8
286 1995.764 -ANTISTATIC BRUSH 8
295 2642.213 -TAB 1
298 2926.908 -BRACKET 1
300 3851.033 -SPRING 1
301 2926.909 -DISCHARGE BRUSH 1
305 2646.222 -PBA FASTENER 4

04.06.2002 103
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

436 1033.833 -TIMING BELT PULLEY 24T 2

438 2333.273 -TIMING BELT 489 1
439 2922.625 -ROLLER ASSY 1
440 2926.905 -STUD 1
504 1201.227 -OPTICAL SENSOR 1
FOL1OUTSE, 18B3
505 7166.740 -BRACKET 1

04.06.2002 104
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

FIRST FOLD, SECTION 2

29 1995.455 -ROLL ASSY 6

30 2934.730 -SLIDE BLOCK 6
32 1995.224 -PRESSURE SHAFT 3
39 3851.179 -TENSION SPRING 1
40 2934.785 -BRACKET 1
41 1995.380 -HOOK 1
42 2926.911 -HANDLE BAR 1
43 1014.555 -STOP 2
44 1995.381 -PIN 2
45 7069.777 -REAR PLATE 1
46 7070.573 -PLATE ASSY 1
150 1099.676 -SPACER 1
152 1995.161 -HINGE PIN 2
161 3736.075 -BEARING BUSH 2
166 1995.476 -ACTUATOR ASSY 1
FOL1STARTSE, 18B1
237 2934.951 -LEAF SPRING 3
283 1995.413 -FRONT HOOK 1
288 1995.402 -BUSHING 4
476 7045.302 -HANDLE 1

04.06.2002 105
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

FIRST FOLD, SECTION 3

8 1995.358 -BRACKET 2
9 3856.011 -TENSION SPRING 4
22 1995.445 -GUIDE PLATE 1
48 1995.169 -HINGE PIN 1
49 2934.816 -PRESSURE ROLLER 2
50 1995.353 -FLAP 1
56 1995.352 -ARM 4
57 3642.024 -HINGE PIN 4
58 2934.778 -PLATE 1
82 1995.357 -BUSHING 4
92 2372.015 -BEARING BUSH 2
187 2934.984 -HINGE PIN 1
365 1995.434 -ROLLER 1
372 1995.435 -ROLLER 1
386 1995.431 -BRACKET 1
407 2934.757 -BRACKET 1

04.06.2002 106
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

FIRST FOLD, SECTION 4

55 1995.438 -STOP PLATE 1

84 2351.050 -BALL BEARING 2
112 1995.400 -NUT PLATE 1
121 1974.389 -DC MOTOR 1
FOL1FOLMO, 18M2
FOL1FOLMOSE, 18PBA05
122 1999.146 -PLATE 1
123 1999.154 -SHAFT ASSY 1
131 2333.319 -TIMING BELT 531 1
132 2333.309 -TIMING BELT 336 1
133 1995.421 -BUFFER 1
137 1054.801 -NUT PLATE 2
140 1995.132 -PIN 1
151 2934.817 -ROLLER ASSY 2
182 1995.154 -LOCK PLATE 2
184 2351.070 -BALL BEARING 2
269 1004.650 -PIN BOLT 1
319 3856.011 -TENSION SPRING 1
320 1004.650 -PIN BOLT 1
376 2967.190 -PIN 2
377 2967.192 -BELT 2
378 1995.500 -BRACKET 2
379 1995.428 -ROLLER ASSY 4
381 1995.427 -PIN 2
384 3851.117 -TENSION SPRING 2

04.06.2002 107
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

385 1995.439 -BUSHING 8

430 2934.975 -CLIP 2
459 2333.250 -TIMING BELT 312 1
460 7017.846 -SHAFT ASSY 1
461 1995.400 -NUT PLATE 1
463 1004.650 -PIN BOLT 1
466 3851.108 -TENSION SPRING 1

04.06.2002 108
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

FIRST FOLD, SECTION 5

3 2917.030 -MOTOR ASSY 1

FOL1INMO, 18M1
4 7017.826 -TIMING BELT PULLEY 14T 1
5 2333.340 -TIMING BELT 1125 1
6 7070.720 -BRACKET ASSY 1
7 1995.175 -CLUTCH 1
FOL1DEFCL, 18Y1
27 2922.625 -ROLLER ASSY 6
51 2987.244 -TENSION ARM 1
54 3851.119 -TENSION SPRING 1
100 1995.376 -CLAW COUPLING 1
101 2981.406 -BALL BEARING 1
102 1995.359 -SHAFT 1
103 7017.828 -TIMING BELT PULLEY 48T 1
105 1085.826 -BEARING HOUSING 1
106 2351.028 -BALL BEARING 2
107 1040.319 -BUSHING 1
115 2934.983 -SHAFT 1
117 1995.401 -HUB 1
176 1995.375 -ACTUATOR ASSY 1
177 1201.226 -OPTICAL SENSOR 1
FOL1DEPOSE, 18B4
178 1995.133 -BRACKET 1
179 2906.543 -LEVER ASSY 1
180 2351.029 -BALL BEARING 1

04.06.2002 109
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

181 1019.944 -BEARING HOUSING 1

189 3736.083 -BEARING BUSH 2
190 1995.388 -STRIP 1
191 2906.544 -LEVER ASSY 1
242 1995.409 -FLY WHEEL, UPTO ..... 1
-FLY WHEEL, FROM ..... 2
255 1041.667 -PULS DISC 1
256 1201.226 -OPTICAL SENSOR 1
FOL1INMOSE, 18B5
257 2917.026 -BRACKET 1
277 1912.353 -BRACKET 2
290 4245.007 -SECURING PLATE 1

04.06.2002 110
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

FIRST FOLD, SECTION 6

1 7070.171 -TIE PLATE 2

2 2967.170 -FRAME PLATE 2
83 1999.143 -FLAP ASSY 1
125 2934.799 -BRACKET 1
144 2281.029 -BUMPONS 1
175 2351.920 -BALL BEARING 2
207 2646.222 -PBA FASTENER 5
208 5583.564 -POWER PBA 1
18PBA03
210 7070.621 -POWER SUPPLY 1
18G01
250 7068.947 -BASE PLATE 2
285 1933.865 -TAB BRACKET 8
286 1995.764 -ANTISTATIC BRUSH 8
291 1995.451 -BRACKET 1
306 1903.442 -TAB 1
310 1995.475 -SPACER 2
323 1201.591 -RELAY SWITCH 1
FOL1SAFRL, 18K1
325 1021.194 -NUT PLATE 1
471 2926.919 -BRACKET 1
483 1999.174 -BRACKET 1
488 2967.195 -MAGNET 24V 1
FOL1OUTDEFSO, 18Y2
490 1999.164 -FOAM RING 1

04.06.2002 111
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

491 1019.610 -PIN 1

493 1999.168 -PLATE ASSY 1
494 1999.175 -LEVER 1
496 1999.169 -PLATE ASSY 1
497 1999.100 -LEVER 1
499 1999.158 -BRACKET 1

04.06.2002 112
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

04.06.2002 113
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

REINFORCEMENT UNIT SECTION 1

3 9168.002 -MOTOR ASSY 24V 1

FOL2RUMO, 18M7
4 9168.003 -SPROCKET 30T 1
5 9168.091 -STUD 1
6 9168.008 -BEARING BUSH 5
7 9168.028 -SPROCKET ASSY 15T 1
9 9168.006 -ECCENTRIC ASSY 1
10 9168.093 -FLANGE 1
11 9168.007 -SHAFT 1
12 9168.017 -WASHER 2
13 9168.009 -BUFFER DISK 5
14 9168.004 -CLUTCH/SPROCKET ASSY 48T 1
15 9168.010 -CLUTCH/SPROCKET ASSY 60T 1
16 9168.012 -NUT PLATE 2
18 9168.016 -SHAFT 1
19 9168.015 -DISTANCE BUSH 1
20 9168.014 -HOLDER 1
21 9168.013 -SPROCKET ASSY 1
22 9168.021 -SPROCKET 15T 1
23 9168.020 -SHAFT 1
24 9168.095 -DISTANCE BUSH 2
25 9168.019 -ROLL 1
27 9168.029 -CHAIN 1
27L 9168.031 -CHAIN LOCK 1
28 9168.005 -SOLENOID ASSY 24V 2

04.06.2002 114
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

(a) FOL2RUSTAMPSO, 18Y7

(b) FOL2RUTAPESO, 18Y8
30 2257.008 -COLLAR,A10 1

04.06.2002 115
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

REINFORCEMENT UNIT SECTION 2

6 9168.008 -BEARING BUSH 3

13 9168.009 -BUFFER DISK 2
31 9168.096 -ECCENTER BLOCK 1
32 9168.098 -LEVER 1
33 9168.097 -BEARING BUSH 1
34 9168.037 -LIFTING MECHANISM UPPER 2
35 9168.099 -SLIDE BLOCK 1
36 9168.100 -CONSOLE 1
37 9168.068 -PRESSURE PLATE ASSY 1
39 9168.039 -LIFTING MECHANISM LOWER 1
40 9168.041 -GUIDE LEFT 1
41 9168.042 -GUIDE RIGHT 1
42 9168.043 -FLAT SPRING 1
43 9168.044 -STOP 2
44 9168.045 -RUBBER SPONGE 2
52 9168.070 -SENSOR HOLDER 1
53 1201.400 -OPTO SENSOR 1
FOL2RUHOMESE, 18B17

04.06.2002 116
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

REINFORCEMENT UNIT SECTION 3

45 9168.032 -STAMP ASSY 1

46 9168.033 -FRONT GUIDE RAIL 1
47 9168.034 -REAR GUIDE RAIL 1
48 9168.036 -CLAMP 4
49 9168.035 -EXTENSION SPRING 2
50 9168.080 -STOP PLATE 1
51 9168.090 -LOWER KNIFE 1
61 9168.048 -BRACKET 1
62 9168.049 -SPRING PLATE 1
63 9168.089 -UPPER KNIFE 1
64 9168.087 -BRACKET 1
65 9168.050 -LOWER GUIDE BLOCK 1
66 9168.079 -OIL FELT 1
67 9168.101 -BLOCK 1
68 9168.055 -UPPER GUIDE 1
69 9168.074 -HOLDER 1
70 9168.058 -SIDE GUIDE 1
71 9168.052 -STOP LEVER 1
72 9168.083 -COMPRESSION SPRING 1
73 9168.082 -HOLDER 1
74 9168.057 -TORSION SPRING 1
76 9168.054 -SHAFT ASSY 1
77 9168.053 -SHAFT 1
78 9168.056 -SHAFT ASSY 1
79 9168.059 -SHAFT ASSY 1

04.06.2002 117
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

97 9168.073 -MICROSWITCH 1
FOL2RUJAMSW, 18S12
98 9168.051 -COMPRESSION SPRING 1
99 9168.060 -TORSION SPRING 1
100 9168.077 -THRUST PIECE 2

04.06.2002 118
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

REINFORCEMENT UNIT SECTION 4

6 9168.008 -BEARING BUSH 2

78 9168.061 -GUIDE ROLLER 1
79 9168.102 -SHAFT 1
80 1201.569 -OPTO SENSOR 1
FOL2RUEMPTYSE, 18B18
81 9168.071 -BRACKET 1
82 9168.072 -DISTANCE WASHER 1
83 9168.086 -HOLDER 1
84 9168.063 -ROLL COVER, INTERNAL 1
85 9168.103 -SHAFT 3
86 9168.065 -DISTANCE DISK 1
87 9168.062 -ROLL COVER, EXTERNAL 1
88 9168.067 -KNURLED HEAD SCREW 1
89 9168.064 -TAPE ROLL SHAFT 1
90 9168.104 -ROUND NUT 1
91 9168.105 -COMPRESSION SPRING 1
92 9168.024 -ROLLER 1
93 9168.025 -AXLE 1
94 9168.027 -ECCENTRIC SCREW 1
95 9168.107 -BUSH 1
96 9168.026 -SLIDE 1

04.06.2002 119
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

REINFORCEMENT UNIT SECTION 5

101 9168.109 -CONSOLE 1

230 7017.742 -BRACKET 1
279 7017.712 -PLATE ASSY 1
281 7016.769 -T-NUT 2
283 7016.931 -SHOULDER SCREW 2
284 2372.034 -BEARING BUSH 2
285 7017.724 -RULER ASSY 1
286 1037.110 -WASHER 3
288 7017.713 -ARM 1
291 7017.715 -LEVER 1
294 1988.995 -MAGNET ASSY 1
FOL2RUQUIDSO, 18Y10
295 2951.679 -CLAMP 1
297 7016.928 -LEVER 1
301 2372.034 -BEARING BUSH 1
302 2231.028 -FLAT WASHER 1
303 7016.770 -SHOULDER SCREW 1
304 7017.721 -BRACKET 1
306 3851.134 -TENSION SPRING 1
403 7016.932 -IR PBA 1
FOL2RUSTARTSE, 18PBA20
423 7016.857 -SENSOR COVER 1

04.06.2002 120
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

04.06.2002 121
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

REINFORCEMENT UNIT SECTION 6

1 9168.000 -FRAME PLATE 1

2 9168.001 -FRAME PLATE 1
110 9168.069 -DISTANCE PIN 6
111 9168.085 -CARRIER PLATE 1
112 9168.110 -PIPE 1
113 9168.084 -SUPPORTING PLATE 1
114 9168.088 -HOLDER 2
115 5583.570 -SENSOR PBA 1
FOL2RUSTARTSE, 18PBA19
116 9168.075 -CABLE ASSY SENSOR 1
117 9168.076 -CABLE ASSY 5V CIRCUIT 1
118 9168.078 -CABLE ASSY 24V 1
212 7017.702 -HINGE PLATE 1
218 7016.800 -SHAFT 1
219 7070.692 -LOCK HANDLE 1
221 7017.747 -SWITCH BRACKET 1
223 7017.729 -PLATE 1
228 7017.741 -BRACKET 1
338 7016.923 -EXCENTER SCREW 1
340 5541.018 -BRAKE STOP 1
346 7016.795 -FRAME, HANDLE 1
349 7016.796 -BRACKET 1
352 1046.240 -SPRING 1
353 1033.798 -HOOK 1
358 7016.797 -BRACKET 1

04.06.2002 122
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

360 2185.035 -SHOULDER SCREW 1

361 2646.222 -PBA FASTENER 4

04.06.2002 123
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

04.06.2002 124
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

04.06.2002 125
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

INTERMEDIATE TRANSPORT, SECTION 1

5 2934.650 -PIN 18
2934.650 -PIN, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 20
6 2642.213 -TAB 1
8 2906.557 -DRIVE BELT 1
7017.738 -DRIVE BELT, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
10 7171.499 -ROLLER ASSY 3
7171.499 -ROLLER ASSY, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 7
11 2917.049 -ROLLER ASSY 26
2917.049 -ROLLER ASSY, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 30
14 2906.556 -LOCK PLATE 2
15 2922.625 -ROLLER ASSY 20
2922.625 -ROLLER ASSY, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 24
16 2934.933 -GUIDE 1
7017.732 -GUIDE, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
22 2917.031 -LOCK PLATE 1
7017.698 -LOCK PLATE, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
25 2917.087 -CONNECT PIN 1
41 2926.905 -STUD 4
44 2934.994 -BRACKET 1
7017.740 -BRACKET, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 2
46 2934.851 -DISCHARGE BRUSH 1
7017.734 -DISCHARGE BRUSH, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
53 2934.941 -GROMMET 36
57 7016.780 -ADJUST PLATE, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 2
73 7016.852 -GUIDE PLATE 1

04.06.2002 126
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

176 7017.696 -GUIDE PLATE, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1

177 7225.283 -ROLLER ASSY, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 4
178 7017.749 -BRACKET 1

04.06.2002 127
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

INTERMEDIATE TRANSPORT, SECTION 2

23 2917.079 -PLATE 1
27 2917.088 -CONNECT PLATE 1
32 1054.612 -WASHER 1
1054.612 -WASHER, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 2
47 3851.033 -SPRING 1
50 2185.035 -SHOULDER SCREW 1
60 7017.710 -SENSOR BRACKET, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
64 7016.791 -CONNECTOR PLATE, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
66 7016.793 -CONNECTOR PLATE, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
80 2934.729 -DISTANCE STRIP 1
7016.603 -DISTANCE STRIP, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
209 7017.703 -HINGE ASSY, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
211 1037.235 -WASHER, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
236 1988.048 -MANUAL SWITCH, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
FOL2RUDOORSW, 18S7
237 7017.737 -BRACKET, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
242 1037.298 -BEARING, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 2
243 7017.695 -SHAFT, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
245 7017.692 -STOPPER, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
247 7017.693 -BRACKET, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
249 2995.132 -MAGNET ASSY, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
FOL2RUSTOPSO, 18Y6
2973.288 --KNURLED PIN, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
307 7016.923 -EXCENTER SCREW, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 2
308 7016.778 -SLIDE PLATE, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1

04.06.2002 128
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

335 7016.802 -ADJUST BRACKET, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1

339 7016.807 -BRACKET, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
342 2373.017 -BEARING, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
365 1988.048 -MANUAL SWITCH, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
FOL2RUINTDOORSW, 18S10
370 7016.811 -BRACKET, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
387 7016.813 -PLATE, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
406 2995.141 -IR PBA, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
410 7016.849 -GUIDING, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
411 7016.851 -CLIP, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
412 7016.850 -BRACKET, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
417 7016.855 -SPRING CLAMP, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 2
421 7016.853 -BRACKET, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
425 1988.048 -MANUAL SWITCH, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
FOL2RUCOVERSW, 18S11

04.06.2002 129
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

INTERMEDIATE TRANSPORT, SECTION 3

1 7017.651 -FRAME 1
3 2930.019 -DC MOTOR 1
FOLOFFOUTMO, 18M6
4 7017.755 -PLATE 1
5 2668.036 -GROMMET 4
6 2912.699 -BUSH 2
9 1035.396 -TIMING BELT PULLEY 9T 1
11 2333.287 -TIMING BELT 243 1
12 1037.283 -TIMING BELT PULLEY 12T 1
14 7016.762 -ROLLER ASSY 1
15 1047.945 -BEARING HOUSING 1
16 1020.441 -BEARING HOUSING 1
17 1023.614 -BALL BEARING 2
19 7016.761 -ROLLER ASSY 1
20 2372.015 -BEARING BUSH 2
22 3851.025 -EXTENSION SPRING 2
23 7045.364 -CONTAINER 1
24 7017.669 -RACK 1
25 2372.034 -BEARING BUSH 4
27 2185.046 -SHOULDER SCREW 2
30 3311.024 -RING 2
31 7017.672 -BRACKET 1
33 1995.285 -ACTUATOR ASSY 1
FOLOFFOUTSE, 18B15
34 7017.757 -BRACKET 1

04.06.2002 130
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

35 7017.754 -RING 1
40 1933.865 -TAB BRACKET 1
42 7016.751 -TAB PLATE 1
44 1995.764 -ANTISTATIC BRUSH 2
46 1009.190 -SPACER 1
47 7016.757 -SPRING LEAF 1
49 1933.865 -TAB BRACKET 2
50 1995.764 -ANTISTATIC BRUSH 2
55 2642.213 -TAB 1
519 5584.014 -RELAY PBA 1
18PBA16
520 2646.222 -PBA FASTENER 4

04.06.2002 131
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

SECOND FOLD, SECTION 1

32 2906.571 -PIN 2
47 2934.820 -HINGE PIN 1
48 2372.015 -BEARING BUSH 2
102 1995.169 -HINGE PIN 1
140 3736.083 -BEARING BUSH 2
145 2906.544 -LEVER ASSY 1
150 2372.015 -BEARING BUSH 2
152 2934.932 -GUIDE PLATE 1
155 1995.285 -ACTUATOR ASSY 1
FOL2STARTSE, 18B9
156 2934.610 -ACTUATOR ASSY 1
FOL2TRAISE2, 18B10
172 2934.819 -FLAP 1
173 2934.937 -GUIDE PLATE 1
190 2934.742 -ROLLER ASSY 1
269 7016.602 -GUIDE PLATE ASSY 1
270 2917.093 -HINGE PIN 2
273 2917.040 -SHAFT 1
275 3736.075 -BEARING BUSH 2
277 7045.302 -HANDLE 1
278 2934.728 -BRACKET 1
280 2934.991 -BRACKET 1
282 1903.257 -SOLENOID ASSY 1
FOL2FLATSO, 18Y5
283 1037.575 -INSULATION PLATE 1

04.06.2002 132
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

285 3736.075 -BEARING BUSH 2

287 2917.045 -SHAFT 1
319 1995.764 -ANTISTATIC BRUSH 11
321 1933.865 -TAB BRACKET 12
349 3851.025 -EXTENSION SPRING 2
374 2934.758 -BRACKET 2
377 2934.760 -PLATE 2
378 7045.348 -HANDLE 1
382 2934.599 -ROLLER 1
383 2934.600 -SHAFT 1
384 2934.601 -LEVER 2
385 2934.602 -PIN 2
420 1004.620 -MAGNETIC LOCK 2
474 2934.812 -BRACKET 1
476 2934.762 -PLATE 2
477 2934.931 -LEFT PLATE 1
478 2934.759 -RIGHT PLATE 1
479 1020.696 -SCREW CAP 2
481 2185.033 -SHOULDER SCREW 8
508 1087.070 -FLAP ASSY 1

04.06.2002 133
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

SECOND FOLD, SECTION 2

24 2906.571 -PIN 1
35 1903.257 -SOLENOID ASSY 1
FOL2OUTSO, 18Y4
37 1037.575 -INSULATION PLATE 1
38 1999.093 -FLAP 1
41 2934.728 -BRACKET 1
42 3736.075 -BEARING BUSH 2
43 2351.050 -BALL BEARING 2
44 2917.073 -ROLLER ASSY 2
64 1995.357 -BUSHING 2
65 2906.537 -ROLLER 1
66 1995.352 -ARM 2
68 2934.821 -SPRING 2
69 3642.024 -HINGE PIN 2
74 2934.755 -GUIDE PLATE 1
79 7070.777 -DC MOTOR 1
FOL2FOLMO, 18M4
80 1995.146 -PLATE 1
84 7070.743 -TIMING BELT 356 1
93 2906.546 -PIN 1
95 1034.601 -REEL 1
96 2333.319 -TIMING BELT 51 1
101 2351.070 -BALL BEARING 2
144 2934.722 -PRESSURE ROLLER 1
146 1995.154 -LOCK PLATE 1

04.06.2002 134
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

171 2906.538 -STOP PLATE 1

194 7070.731 -SHAFT ASSY 1
288 3851.118 -TENSION SPRING 1
289 1004.650 -PIN BOLT 1
292 1054.801 -NUT PLATE 2
319 1995.764 -ANTISTATIC BRUSH 11
321 1933.865 -TAB BRACKET 12
376 2934.985 -STUD 1
390 2934.711 -WHEEL 2
393 2934.718 -PIN 3
395 2922.625 -ROLLER ASSY 3
397 2967.192 -BELT 2
426 2934.671 -GUIDE PLATE 1
428 7070.574 -GUIDE PLATE 1
429 2185.031 -SHOULDER SCREW 2
432 2999.916 -PLATE 1
435 7045.368 -ROLLER 1
438 2934.773 -BRACKET 2
444 1037.235 -WASHER 2
445 3736.075 -BEARING BUSH 2
446 2962.903 -ROLLER 1
446L 1995.460 -ROLL ASSY 4
458 2967.185 -PIN 2
465 2967.186 -BRACKET ASSY 2
466 2922.625 -ROLLER ASSY 2
468 3851.106 -TENSION SPRING 2
486 2934.986 -STUD 1
487 2934.989 -PIN 2
509 1999.099 -ADJUSTMENT PLATE 1

04.06.2002 135
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

SECOND FOLD, SECTION 3

1 1033.514 -BEARING HOUSING 3

2 1033.833 -TIMING BELT PULLEY 24T 1
4 2351.008 -BALL BEARING 2
6 1004.198 -BUSHING 2
8 1033.513 -BEARING HOUSING 2
10 2351.008 -BALL BEARING 2
19 1085.826 -BEARING HOUSING 2
31 3514.024 -PIN SCREW 2
56 1020.696 -SCREW CAP 2
98 2333.290 -TIMING BELT 1071 1
110 1201.227 -OPTICAL SENSOR 1
FOL2OUTSE1, 18B7
121 2906.502 -BRACKET 1
124 7070.786 -GUIDE PLATE 1
151 1033.749 -TIMING BELT PULLEY 25T 2
160 1034.770 -GEAR 37T 1
162 2351.028 -BALL BEARING 2
164 1033.749 -TIMING BELT PULLEY 25T 1
174 2906.559 -SHAFT 1
176 2987.244 -TENSION ARM ASSY 1
178 2934.968 -ROLLER 1
179 1034.770 -GEAR 37T 1
180 7016.749 -ROLLER 1
191 1971.141 -ROLLER 1
192 2906.567 -WHEEL 1

04.06.2002 136
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

193 1033.787 -GEAR 27T 1

200 1033.513 -BEARING HOUSING 1
201 2351.008 -BALL BEARING 2
203 1033.514 -BEARING HOUSING 1
210 1033.513 -BEARING HOUSING 1
211 2351.008 -BALL BEARING 2
213 1033.514 -BEARING HOUSING 1
220 2922.625 -ROLLER ASSY 2
300 2185.034 -SHOULDER SCREW 2
301 3851.149 -TENSION SPRING 1
335 7128.053 -TIMING BELT PULLEY 24T 1
353 2351.008 -BALL BEARING 2
354 1033.514 -BEARING HOUSING 1
355 1033.513 -BEARING HOUSING 1
371 7017.675 -ROLLER ASSY 1
371L 1995.461 --ROLL ASSY 3
371M 2962.902 --ROLL ASSY 2
393 2934.718 -PIN 3
395 2922.625 -ROLLER ASSY 3
398 2962.902 -ROLLER ASSY 1
398L 1995.461 --ROLL ASSY 5
531 2981.318 -DISCHARGE BRUSH 1
532 2248.003 -BLIND RIVET 2

04.06.2002 137
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

SECOND FOLD, SECTION 4

1 1033.514 -BEARING HOUSING 1

8 1033.513 -BEARING HOUSING 1
12 1995.367 -PULLEY 18T 1
14 2917.030 -MOTOR ASSY 1
FOL2INMO, 18M3
15 2934.694 -TIMING BELT PULLEY 25T 1
16 2922.625 -ROLLER ASSY 5
17 1995.374 -PIN 5
19 1085.826 -BEARING HOUSING 1
45 1995.133 -BRACKET 1
46 1201.226 -OPTICAL SENSOR 1
FOL2DEPOSE, 18B11
103 1085.826 -BEARING HOUSING 1
104 7017.753 -PULLEY ASSY 21T 1
105 7017.655 -SHAFT 1
108 1040.319 -BUSHING 1
109 2351.028 -BALL BEARING 2
115 2917.075 -WHEEL 1
123 1041.667 -PULS DISC 1
132 2981.406 -BALL BEARING 1
133 1995.376 -CLAW COUPLING 1
134 1995.175 -CLUTCH 1
FOL2DEFCL, 18Y3
136 2906.545 -SHAFT 1
138 1995.375 -ACTUATOR ASSY 1

04.06.2002 138
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

139 2906.543 -LEVER ASSY 1

143 1995.138 -LEVER 1
160 1034.770 -GEAR 37T 1
162 2351.028 -BALL BEARING 4
164 1033.749 -TIMING BELT PULLEY 25T 2
174 2906.559 -SHAFT 2
176 2987.244 -TENSION ARM ASSY 2
220 2922.625 -ROLLER ASSY 2
225 2333.325 -TIMING BELT 804 1
231 2351.069 -BALL BEARING 1
233 1995.154 -LOCK PLATE 1
267 2917.036 -BRACKET ASSY 1
298 2917.026 -BRACKET 1
300 2185.034 -SHOULDER SCREW 2
302 3851.159 -TENSION SPRING 1
303 1995.401 -HUB 1
319 1995.764 -ANTISTATIC BRUSH 2
321 1933.865 -TAB BRACKET 2
333 2351.008 -BALL BEARING 2
359 1201.226 -OPTICAL SENSOR 1
FOL2INMOSE, 18B12
450 7017.752 -ROLLER ASSY 1
450L 1995.461 --ROLL ASSY 4
510 1020.624 -RING 1

04.06.2002 139
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

SECOND FOLD, SECTION 5

5 2906.526 -LEAF SPRING 2

18 2934.754 -FRAME 2
24 2906.510 -TIE PLATE 2
31 1034.818 -WASHER 4
50 2906.527 -HINGE PIN 2
63 2372.015 -BEARING BUSH 4
75 2906.509 -GUIDE PLATE 1
78 2185.032 -SHOULDER SCREW 2
102 2906.508 -ROLLER 2
103 1995.460 -ROLL ASSY 8

04.06.2002 140
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

SECOND FOLD, SECTION 6

1 3851.105 -TENSION SPRING 2

2 7045.302 -HANDLE 1
3 2934.722 -PRESSURE ROLLER 1
4 2962.919 -LOCK PLATE 2
7 1971.139 -LEVER ASSY 2
8 2906.536 -ROLLER 1
9 1995.357 -BUSHING 2
10 1002.983 -MOUNTING STUD 2
15 2934.627 -BRACKET 2
17 2906.575 -NUT PLATE 2
19 2934.717 -PLATE 1
22 2906.524 -SHAFT 1
27 2906.505 -GUIDE PLATE 1
36 2934.981 -HOOK ASSY 1
37 2934.992 -HOOK ASSY 1
38 2917.035 -BRACKET 1
40 3851.314 -TENSION SPRING 2
74 3736.075 -BEARING BUSH 2
95 2917.094 -BRACKET 1

04.06.2002 141
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

COVERING, FIRST FOLD

1 7045.322 -COVER,UPPER 1
2 7045.324 -COVER,LOWER 1
3 7045.308 -COVER 1
4 2906.435 -HINGE PIN 4
8 7069.958 -BRACKET 1
10 2934.700 -BRACKET 1
12 2372.034 -BEARING BUSH 4
16 2906.436 -PLATE 2
18 1035.184 -CLIP 4
19 2906.440 -BUFFER BRACKET 2
20 1025.672 -BUFFER 4
22 1988.048 -MANUAL SWITCH 1
PTRFOLDOORSW, 15S1
23 2917.043 -BRACKET 1
26 2934.823 -BRACKET 1
27 2934.787 -CHAIN 2
28 7045.350 -COVER 1
29 2917.193 -BRACKET 1
30 2967.193 -BRACKET 2
31 2934.962 -COVER 1
32 2917.081 -BRACKET 2
33 7045.338 -COVER 1
34 2917.190 -BRACKET 2
35 2934.815 -FASTENER PLATE 1
36 2934.736 -BRACKET 1

04.06.2002 142
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

37 2185.064 -SHOULDER SCREW 2

54 2185.029 -SHOULDER SCREW 2
57 2185.031 -SHOULDER SCREW 2
63 7016.788 -SENSOR PLATE, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
68 2934.701 -BUFFER BRACKET 1
70 2934.806 -BRACKET 2
71 2962.915 -PLATE 1
73 7045.320 -SIDE PANEL 1
74 7045.318 -SIDE PANEL 1
75 7045.360 -SIDE PANEL 1
76 7045.358 -SIDE PANEL 1
77 2934.707 -NUT PLATE 2
78 2934.794 -FASTENER PLATE 1
79 2934.813 -GUIDE PLATE 1
81 2934.972 -BRACKET 1
86 2934.678 -BRACKET 1
88 2962.946 -HINGE PLATE 2
89 2962.916 -BRACKET 2
91 7045.370 -HANDLE 2
92 2926.921 -BRACKET 2
93 2926.922 -LEAF SPRING 1
94 2934.707 -NUT PLATE 1
98 1661.026 -PROTECTION STRIP 1
99 2962.944 -PLATE 1
102 2934.842 -BUFFER BRACKET 1
104 1661.026 -PROTECTION STRIP 1
106 7070.166 -BRACKET 1
107 1948.973 -SWITCH 1
FOL1INTDOORSW, 15S2

04.06.2002 143
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

COVERING, SECOND FOLD

1 7045.334 -FRONT DOOR 1

2 7045.310 -BACK COVER 1
3 7045.336 -COVER 1
9418.265 -COVER, ONLY WITH BELT UNIT 1
4 7016.830 -COVER 1
7016.862 -COVER, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
5 7045.312 -FRONT COVER 1
6 7045.314 -TOP COVER 1
7 7045.305 -COVER ASSY 1
10 2917.057 -LEFT BRACKET 1
11 2917.055 -RIGHT BRACKET 1
13 7045.316 -BACK COVER 1
14 2906.451 -DOOR HINGE 2
15 2934.756 -HINGE 2
17 2906.454 -CATCH BRACKET 2
18 2917.181 -SWITCH BRACKET 2
19 2906.456 -SWITCH BRACKET 1
20 2906.475 -BRACKET 1
23 2917.093 -HINGE PIN 2
28 2917.056 -PAPER SUPPORT 1
29 1988.048 -MANUAL SWITCH 2
(a) FOL2TRAYSW, 18S3
(b) FOL2DOORSW, 18S2
30 1016.735 -MAGNETIC CATCH 2
31 1035.184 -CLIP 12

04.06.2002 144
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

33 7045.304 -COLLECTOR PLATE 2

35 2934.655 -BRACKET 1
36 1013.963 -PIN 2
37 2934.688 -BRACKET 1
38 3342.012 -EXTENDED NUT 3
53 9418.266 -PLATE, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
72 7045.301 -KNOB 2
73 2906.476 -WHEEL 3
76 2934.691 -LEAF SPRING 2
80 2934.702 -CLIP FASTENER 1
81 7045.342 -SIDE COVER, ONLY WITHOUT REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
82 2934.726 -NUT PLATE 4
83 7045.366 -PLATE 1
265 5583.564 -POWER PBA 1
18PBA10
266 5583.570 -SENSOR PBA 1
18PBA14
333 5584.020 -CONTROL PBA, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
18PBA17
334 2646.222 -PBA FASTENER 11
421 1201.591 -RELAY SWITCH 1
FOL2SAFRL1, 18K2
519 5584.014 -RELAY PBA 1
18PBA16
520 2646.222 -PBA FASTENER 4
526 2999.977 -BRACKET 1

04.06.2002 145
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

COVERING, INTERMEDIATE TRANSPORT

1 1995.192 -SUPPORT 1
3 2906.476 -WHEEL 1
8 7045.340 -COVER 1
8L 7016.890 -COVER, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
9 2934.957 -BRACKET 1
18 7070.046 -FRAME 1
7070.053 -FRAME, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
22 2917.059 -PLATE 1
25 2906.469 -BRACKET 1
31 1035.184 -CLIP 4
78 7045.362 -SIDE COVER 1
79 7045.356 -COVER 1
7016.902 -COVER, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
84 2934.814 -GUIDE PLATE 1
90 7017.673 -SAFETY PLATE 1
92 7016.882 -DOOR, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
93 7016.892 -SOLENOID BOX, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1
95 7016.897 -SWITCH BRACKET, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 2
96 7016.898 -HINGE PIN, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 2
97 2906.451 -HINGE, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 2
98 2934.756 -HINGE, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 2
100 5541.018 -BRAKE STOP, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 2
101 1035.184 -CLIP, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 2
426 7016.854 -RECEIVING BOX, ONLY WITH REINFORCEMENT UNIT 1

04.06.2002 146
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

04.06.2002 147
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

COVERING, BELTUNIT

1 9418.220 -BACK DOOR ASSY 1

3 9418.228 -UPPER GUIDE PLATE 1
4 9418.227 -LOWER GUIDE PLATE 1
6 9418.169 -TAB 1
8 9418.902 -LOCKING 1
9 9418.204 -LOCKING SUPPORT PANEL 1
11 9418.241 -PIN 2
14 9418.904 -GAS SPRING 2
17 9418.196 -HANDLE 1
21 9418.222 -COVER 1
22 9418.256 -NUT PLATE 1
23 9418.103 -ANTI STATIC BRUSH 1
24 9418.169 -TAB 1
27 9418.223 -LOWER COVER 1
28 9418.198 -SIDE COVER R.H 1
29 9418.197 -SIDE COVER L.H 1
30 9418.221 -UPPER COVER 1

04.06.2002 148
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

04.06.2002 149
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

ORIGINAL HANDLING, TRANSPORT, SECTION 1
80 7045.432 -PLATE 1
83 7045.422 -PLATE 1
85 7170.716 -ROLLER 1
86 1990.247 -BLOCK 2
90 1990.233 -PRESSURE SHAFT 6
91 1995.300 -TORSION SPRING 16
92 2934.730 -SLIDE BLOCK 16
93 1995.299 -ROLLER 15
95 1990.249 -PRESSURE SHAFT 2
98 1990.225 -PULLEY 1
100 7045.420 -PLATE 1
105 7045.426 -FRAME R.H 1
106 7045.424 -FRAME L.H 1
115 1990.290 -FLAP 1
116 2451.084 -O-RING 1
117 1990.217 -BLOCK 1
120 1990.221 -PLATE 2
121 1990.080 -NUT PLATE 2
125 2912.765 -TAPE 1
128 7040.053 -BRACKET 1
129 7016.148 -BUSH 3

04.06.2002 150
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

ORIGINAL HANDLING, TRANSPORT, SECTION 2
1 2945.213 -SUPPORT BEARING 2
4 1990.248 -ROLLER 2
5 2954.996 -BEARING 4
6 2912.357 -ACTUATOR ASSY 8
(a) ORGWIDSE7, 09B8
(b) ORGWIDSE6, 09B7
(c) ORGWIDSE5, 09B9
(d) ORGWIDSE4, 09B6
(e) ORGWIDSE3, 09B5
(f) ORGWIDSE2, 09B4
(g) ORGWIDSE1, 09B3
(h) ORGPRESE, 09B2
10 1990.245 -SENSOR BRACKET 4
12 7015.768 -SENSOR BRACKET 1
14 2954.985 -SENSOR BRACKET 1
17 1990.258 -GLASS PLATE 1
27 2912.685 -TIMING BELT PULLEY-72 2
42 2912.717 -WAVE WASHER 2
43 1006.269 -RING 2
60 7015.475 -PROFILE, FRONT 1
63 1990.228 -PROFILE, ORIGINAL 1
110 7045.434 -FEED PLATE 1

04.06.2002 151
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

ORIGINAL HANDLING, TRANSPORT, SECTION 3
30 2912.693 -MOTOR, DC 1
ORGMO, 09M1
32 2954.947 -PLATE 1
34 5583.901 -PBA, STEP 1
09PBA01
35 2668.036 -GROMMET 3
36 2912.699 -BUSH 2
50 2986.888 -TENSIONER ASSY 1
53 1990.227 -TIMING BELT PULLEY-69 1
55 2333.075 -TIMING BELT 1984 1
56 2333.057 -TIMING BELT 880 1
58 3851.153 -TENSION SPRING 1

04.06.2002 152
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

SCANNING
1 5600.421 -CAMERA ASSY 1
10PBA01, CCD CONSOLE
10CCD1, CCD
2 5584.468 --CCD INTERFACE PBA 1
10PBA02
3 2944.810 -LAMP HOLDER 2
5 2912.376 -LAMP CONNECTOR 2
7 1990.287 -REFLECTOR 1
8 2912.379 -LAMP ASSY 1
SCALA, 10E1
9 5583.781 -EXPOSURE PBA 1
10PBA05
10 2954.948 -SENSOR HOLDER 1
11 2926.714 -SNAP RIVET 4
12 2954.942 -MIRROR 1
15 2912.765 -TAPE 1
20 2977.111 -SHIELDING PLATE 1
40 1989.214 -BRACKET 1
50 1990.289 -CLAMP 3
52 2977.131 -RING 2
53 1990.288 -STUD 1
54 1990.223 -SET BALL SCREW 5
60 2986.886 -BRACKET 2
61 1645.054 -HOSE 2

04.06.2002 153
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

04.06.2002 154
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

IMAGE PROCESSING
1 7045.264 -PLATE 1
3 7070.769 -IMAGE PROCESSING PBA 1
10PBA04
4 7045.278 -BRACKET 1
7 7045.265 -COVER 1
9 7078.269 -LEAF SPRING 2

04.06.2002 155
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

FRAME & COVERING, SCANNER
2 2906.476 -WHEEL 4
3 1022.793 -FOOT 2
4 7045.428 -COVER 2
5 7045.429 -COVER 2
10 7045.407 -COVER 1
13 7045.401 -COVER, R.H 1
14 7045.403 -COVER, L.H 1
15 1990.083 -BRACKET 2
16 1990.084 -BRACKET 2
18 4812.470 -NAME PLATE 9600 1
7168.910 -NAME PLATE TDS600 1
20 7045.413 -TOP COVER 1
23 1990.087 -BLOCK 1
25 1990.280 -GUIDE SLIDE 1
26 1990.086 -PLATE 1
30 7045.405 -STOP 4
35 7045.409 -PLATE COVER 1
37 7097.035 -KNOB 1
40 7045.411 -CONSOLE HOLDER 1
42 2986.885 -PLATE NUT 2
44 1990.075 -O-RING 2
46 2983.430 -BRACKET 1
47 7029.573 -HANDLE 1
48 3861.137 -COMPRESSION SPRING 2
49 2983.493 -PLATE 1
51 2983.494 -DISTANCE BUSH 2

04.06.2002 156
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

52 7165.953 -TOP COVER 1

75 2185.112 -PIN SCREW 2
100 7070.671 -DISCHARGE BRUSH 2
105 7015.608 -SWITCH BRACKET 1
107 4165.018 -NUT PLATE 1
115 2986.881 -BRACKET 1
128 1665.023 -PROTECTION STRIP 1

04.06.2002 157
TSM Oc· TDS600 / 9600 - Partslist by function

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

BUNDLES OVERVIEW, SCANNER
1 7078.497 -10W01 BUNDLE 1
2 7069.180 -10W02 BUNDLE 1
3 7033.621 -10W03 BUNDLE 1
4 2978.053 -10W04 BUNDLE 1
5 2978.054 -10W07 BUNDLE 1
6 7045.293 -10W08 BUNDLE 1
7 2978.055 -22W01 BUNDLE 1
8 1302.506 -INTERFACE CABLE 15DSUB-15DSUB 8 MTR. 1

04.06.2002 158